Symantec OpsCenter Administrator's Guide

Windows and UNIX

Release 7.5

Symantec OpsCenter Administrator's Guide

The software described in this book is furnished under a license agreement and may be used only in accordance with the terms of the agreement. Documentation version: 7.5

Legal Notice
Copyright 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved. Symantec, Symantec Logo, and NetBackup are trademarks or registered trademarks of Symantec Corporation or its affiliates in the U.S. and other countries. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners. This Symantec product may contain third party software for which Symantec is required to provide attribution to the third party (Third Party Programs). Some of the Third Party Programs are available under open source or free software licenses. The License Agreement accompanying the Software does not alter any rights or obligations you may have under those open source or free software licenses. Please see the Third Party Legal Notice Appendix to this Documentation or TPIP ReadMe File accompanying this Symantec product for more information on the Third Party Programs. The product described in this document is distributed under licenses restricting its use, copying, distribution, and decompilation/reverse engineering. No part of this document may be reproduced in any form by any means without prior written authorization of Symantec Corporation and its licensors, if any. THE DOCUMENTATION IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ALL EXPRESS OR IMPLIED CONDITIONS, REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT, ARE DISCLAIMED, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT THAT SUCH DISCLAIMERS ARE HELD TO BE LEGALLY INVALID. SYMANTEC CORPORATION SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH THE FURNISHING, PERFORMANCE, OR USE OF THIS DOCUMENTATION. THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS DOCUMENTATION IS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE. The Licensed Software and Documentation are deemed to be commercial computer software as defined in FAR 12.212 and subject to restricted rights as defined in FAR Section 52.227-19 "Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights" and DFARS 227.7202, "Rights in Commercial Computer Software or Commercial Computer Software Documentation", as applicable, and any successor regulations. Any use, modification, reproduction release, performance, display or disclosure of the Licensed Software and Documentation by the U.S. Government shall be solely in accordance with the terms of this Agreement.

Symantec Corporation 350 Ellis Street Mountain View, CA 94043 http://www.symantec.com

Technical Support
Symantec Technical Support maintains support centers globally. Technical Supports primary role is to respond to specific queries about product features and functionality. The Technical Support group also creates content for our online Knowledge Base. The Technical Support group works collaboratively with the other functional areas within Symantec to answer your questions in a timely fashion. For example, the Technical Support group works with Product Engineering and Symantec Security Response to provide alerting services and virus definition updates. Symantecs support offerings include the following:

A range of support options that give you the flexibility to select the right amount of service for any size organization Telephone and/or Web-based support that provides rapid response and up-to-the-minute information Upgrade assurance that delivers software upgrades Global support purchased on a regional business hours or 24 hours a day, 7 days a week basis Premium service offerings that include Account Management Services

For information about Symantecs support offerings, you can visit our Web site at the following URL: www.symantec.com/business/support/ All support services will be delivered in accordance with your support agreement and the then-current enterprise technical support policy.

Contacting Technical Support

Customers with a current support agreement may access Technical Support information at the following URL: www.symantec.com/business/support/ Before contacting Technical Support, make sure you have satisfied the system requirements that are listed in your product documentation. Also, you should be at the computer on which the problem occurred, in case it is necessary to replicate the problem. When you contact Technical Support, please have the following information available:

Product release level

Hardware information Available memory, disk space, and NIC information Operating system Version and patch level Network topology Router, gateway, and IP address information Problem description:

Error messages and log files Troubleshooting that was performed before contacting Symantec Recent software configuration changes and network changes

Licensing and registration

If your Symantec product requires registration or a license key, access our technical support Web page at the following URL: www.symantec.com/business/support/

Customer service
Customer service information is available at the following URL: www.symantec.com/business/support/ Customer Service is available to assist with non-technical questions, such as the following types of issues:

Questions regarding product licensing or serialization Product registration updates, such as address or name changes General product information (features, language availability, local dealers) Latest information about product updates and upgrades Information about upgrade assurance and support contracts Information about the Symantec Buying Programs Advice about Symantec's technical support options Nontechnical presales questions Issues that are related to CD-ROMs, DVDs, or manuals

Support agreement resources

If you want to contact Symantec regarding an existing support agreement, please contact the support agreement administration team for your region as follows:
Asia-Pacific and Japan Europe, Middle-East, and Africa North America and Latin America customercare_apac@symantec.com semea@symantec.com supportsolutions@symantec.com

Contents

Technical Support ............................................................................................... 4 Chapter 1 Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter .................. 23
About Symantec OpsCenter ............................................................ About Symantec OpsCenter functions ........................................ About Symantec OpsCenter Analytics functions .......................... About monitoring and managing NetBackup and NetBackup appliances ...................................................................... About alerting in OpsCenter ..................................................... About reporting in Symantec OpsCenter Analytics ....................... About what's new in Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 .................................... About OpsCenter components ........................................................ About the OpsCenter Server ..................................................... About the OpsCenter Agent ...................................................... About the OpsCenter Java View Builder ..................................... About using the OpsCenter console ................................................. About starting the OpsCenter console .............................................. About Web browser considerations ........................................... About accessing the OpsCenter console ...................................... Logging on to the Symantec OpsCenter console ........................... Logging out of the OpsCenter console ........................................ Configuring the OpsCenter session timeout interval ..................... Possible OpsCenter console issues ............................................. About OpsCenter console components ............................................. About using the links on the title bar ......................................... About using tabs and subtabs ................................................... About refreshing the OpsCenter console ..................................... Changing the Task pane .......................................................... About the View pane ............................................................... About the Symantec ThreatCon pane ......................................... Using the quick links in the Task pane ....................................... Viewing alerts from the Alert Summary pane .............................. Sizing the Content pane .......................................................... About the OpsCenter status bar ................................................ Status icons and colors in the console ........................................ About using tables .................................................................. 23 24 25 26 27 27 29 43 43 46 50 50 51 51 53 64 68 68 69 70 71 72 73 73 73 78 78 79 79 82 82 83

Contents

Common tasks in OpsCenter .......................................................... 88 About using Web browser bookmarks .............................................. 90 About OpsCenter documentation .................................................... 91

Chapter 2

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 ................................. 93

About planning an OpsCenter installation ........................................ 93 Software components that OpsCenter uses ................................. 94 About the OpsCenter licensing model ........................................ 95 Symantec OpsCenter DVDs .................................................... 100 OpsCenter platform compatibility ........................................... 101 OpsCenter compatible backup and archiving products ................ 104 Managed NetBackup master server considerations ..................... 106 About designing your OpsCenter Server ................................... 108 Supported upgrade paths ....................................................... 110 About planning an OpsCenter Agent deployment ....................... 111 Preparation for install or upgrade ........................................... 123 Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX ...................... 130 About installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 on Windows ................ 131 About installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 on UNIX ..................... 137 About installing Symantec OpsCenter silently on Windows .......... 142 About upgrading to OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX ...................... 158 About upgrading from OpsCenter 7.0.x or 7.1.x to OpsCenter 7.5 ............................................................................... 158 About post-installation tasks ....................................................... 170 Verifying that Symantec OpsCenter is running properly .............. 170 About starting to use OpsCenter .............................................. 170 About the start up tasks that OpsCenter performs ...................... 171 About tuning OpsCenter for more performance .......................... 171 About uninstalling Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX ......... 190 Uninstalling Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 on Windows ..................... 190 Uninstalling Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 on UNIX ......................... 191 About clustering Symantec OpsCenter ........................................... 193 About a Symantec OpsCenter cluster ........................................ 193 Supported OS and cluster solutions ......................................... 193 About running commands on the active node ............................ 194 Connecting Symantec Product Authentication Service and Symantec Private Branch Exchange ................................... 194 Clustering Symantec OpsCenter on Windows ............................. 196 Uninstalling Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 from the Windows cluster .......................................................................... 207 Clustering Symantec OpsCenter Server on Solaris ...................... 208

Contents

Upgrading from OpsCenter 7.0.x or 7.1.x cluster to OpsCenter 7.5 cluster ..................................................................... 215 Uninstalling OpsCenter Server completely from the Solaris cluster .......................................................................... 218

Chapter 3

Administering Symantec OpsCenter ............................. 221

About OpsCenter services and processes used by OpsCenter ............... Services used by OpsCenter on Windows ................................... OpsCenter server scripts on Windows and UNIX .............................. Commands to control OpsCenter services and processes .............. About dependency of services ................................................. About nbproxy processes on NetBackup master servers ............... About OpsCenter database administration ...................................... OpsCenter database commands ............................................... Moving the OpsCenter database and database logs to a different hard disk ...................................................................... About database troubleshooting .............................................. Configuring remote authentication service in OpsCenter ................... About backup and restore of OpsCenter and OpsCenter Analytics ............................................................................ Backing up OpsCenter in case of a disaster ................................ Restoring OpsCenter ............................................................. About communication and firewall considerations ........................... Communication ports used by key OpsCenter components .... 2 4 8 Ports required to communicate with backup products ................. Web browser to OpsCenter Web GUI connection ........................ About OpsCenter Web GUI to OpsCenter server software communication .............................................................. About OpsCenter server to NetBackup master server (NBSL) communication .............................................................. About SNMP traps ................................................................ About OpsCenter Web GUI/OpsCenter server to Sybase database communication .............................................................. About OpsCenter Web GUI to OpsCenter server email communication .............................................................. Gathering troubleshooting data with the support script ..................... About OpsCenter log files ............................................................. VxUL log files ...................................................................... OpsCenter application log files ................................................ About OpsCenter log files on Windows servers ........................... About OpsCenter log files on UNIX servers ................................ 221 222 225 227 229 229 230 230 235 239 239 241 241 244 247

250 251 252 253 253 253 253 254 257 257 259 260 263

10

Contents

Chapter 4

Understanding OpsCenter settings ............................... 265

OpsCenter settings ..................................................................... Setting user preferences .............................................................. Settings > User Preferences options ......................................... Changing your OpsCenter password ......................................... About managing licenses ............................................................. Settings > Configuration > License options ................................ Adding OpsCenter license keys ............................................... Viewing OpsCenter license keys .............................................. Deleting OpsCenter license keys .............................................. Configuring the data purge period on the OpsCenter Server ............... Settings > Configuration > Data Purge options ........................... Configuring SMTP server settings for OpsCenter .............................. Settings > Configuration > SMTP server options ........................ Configuring Symantec ThreatCon feature in OpsCenter ..................... Settings > Configuration > ThreatCon options ........................... Adding host aliases in OpsCenter .................................................. Settings > Configuration > Host Alias options ............................ Merging objects (hosts) in OpsCenter ............................................. Settings > Configuration > Object Merger options ....................... Modifying tape library information in OpsCenter ............................. Settings > Configuration > Tape Libary options .......................... Copying a user profile in OpsCenter ............................................... Settings > Configuration > Copy User Profile options .................. Setting report export location in OpsCenter .................................... Settings > Configuration > Report Export Location options .......... About managing Object Types in OpsCenter .................................... Settings > Configuration > Object Type options .......................... Adding object types in OpsCenter ............................................ Deleting object types in OpsCenter .......................................... Modifying object types in OpsCenter ........................................ Adding attributes to object types in OpsCenter ........................... Deleting attributes from object types in OpsCenter ..................... About managing Symantec OpsCenter users ................................... Settings > Users > Users options ............................................. User access rights and UI functions in OpsCenter ....................... Viewing OpsCenter user account information ............................ Adding new users to OpsCenter ............................................... Editing OpsCenter user information ......................................... Resetting an OpsCenter user password ..................................... Deleting OpsCenter users ....................................................... Viewing OpsCenter user groups .............................................. 266 268 268 272 272 272 273 273 273 274 274 275 276 276 277 278 278 279 280 280 281 281 282 282 283 283 283 284 284 285 285 285 286 286 287 292 293 293 294 294 295

Contents

11

Settings > Users > User Groups options .................................... Adding OpsCenter user groups ................................................ Editing OpsCenter user groups ................................................ Deleting OpsCenter user groups .............................................. About managing recipients in OpsCenter ........................................ Viewing email recipients in OpsCenter ..................................... Settings > Recipients > Email options ....................................... Viewing SNMP trap recipients in OpsCenter .............................. Settings > Recipients > SNMP trap recipient options ................... Creating OpsCenter email recipients ........................................ Settings > Recipients > Email > Add Email Recipient options ......................................................................... Creating OpsCenter SNMP trap recipients ................................. Settings > Recipients > SNMP > Add SNMP trap recipient options ......................................................................... Modifying OpsCenter Email or SNMP recipient information ......... Deleting OpsCenter Email or SNMP trap recipient ...................... About managing cost analysis and chargeback for OpsCenter Analytics ............................................................................ Setting the default currency for OpsCenter cost reports .............. Settings > Chargeback > Currency Settings options .................... Editing the OpsCenter global currency list ................................ Settings > Chargeback > Currency Settings > Edit Currency List options ......................................................................... Settings > Chargeback > Cost Variable options ........................... Creating cost variables in OpsCenter ........................................ Modifying cost variables in OpsCenter ...................................... Deleting cost variables in OpsCenter ........................................ Settings > Chargeback > Cost Formulae options ......................... Creating cost formulae in OpsCenter ........................................ Modifying cost formulae in OpsCenter ..................................... Deleting a cost formulae in OpsCenter ...................................... Estimating chargeback costs using the OpsCenter Formula Modeling Tool ................................................................ Settings > Chargeback > Cost Estimation options .......................

295 296 296 296 297 297 298 298 298 299 299 300 301 302 302 303 303 304 304 305 305 307 308 308 309 309 310 310 310 311

Chapter 5

Understanding data collection ....................................... 313

About data collection in OpsCenter ................................................ About OpsCenter Agents ........................................................ About OpsCenter Agent logs ................................................... OpsCenter Data Collector types ............................................... 313 314 315 315

12

Contents

Backup and archiving products supported by Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 ................................................................ About managing OpsCenter Agents ................................................ Settings > Configuration > Agent options .................................. Viewing OpsCenter Agent status ............................................. Configuring an OpsCenter Agent ............................................. Settings > Configuration > Agent > Create Agent or Edit Agent options ......................................................................... Modifying an OpsCenter Agent ............................................... Deleting OpsCenter Agents .................................................... About managing OpsCenter Data Collectors .................................... Viewing OpsCenter Data Collector status .................................. Configuring an OpsCenter Data Collector .................................. Data Collector Wizard settings ................................................ Modifying an OpsCenter Data Collector configuration ................. Deleting OpsCenter Data Collectors ......................................... About configuring data collection for NetBackup .............................. Settings > Configuration > NetBackup options ........................... NetBackup data collection view ............................................... How OpsCenter collects data from NetBackup ............................ About the Breakup Jobs option ................................................ About NetBackup versions that OpsCenter 7.5 can monitor and manage ........................................................................ Viewing master server details and data collection status .............. Data collection status of a master server ................................... NetBackup data types and collection status ............................... Master server states in OpsCenter ........................................... Adding a master server or appliance in OpsCenter ...................... Adding a NetBackup 7.0 or later master server ........................... Configuring a master server or appliance master server for server access and data collection by OpsCenter ............................. Settings > Configuration > NetBackup > Add Master Server options ......................................................................... Adding a master server or an appliance master server in the OpsCenter console .......................................................... Editing a master server or an appliance master server in OpsCenter ..................................................................... Deleting a master server or an appliance master server in OpsCenter ..................................................................... Controlling data collection for a master server in OpsCenter ..................................................................... Configuring Backup Exec data collector .......................................... Collecting data from PureDisk ......................................................

319 322 322 323 323 324 325 325 325 325 326 327 329 329 330 330 332 332 334 340 341 342 343 345 346 347 349 351 355 356 357 357 358 359

Contents

13

Setting up a trust between the PureDisk SPA host and OpsCenter AB host ......................................................................... Configuring PureDisk data collector ......................................... About collecting data from Enterprise Vault .................................... About Enterprise Vault .......................................................... About data collected from Enterprise Vault ............................... Versions supported by OpsCenter ............................................ Planning the Enterprise Vault data collector deployment ............. OpsCenter Agent deployment modes ........................................ Accessing Microsoft SQL Server host ....................................... About creating a user for integrated logon ................................ Configuring the OpsCenter Agent properties for integrated logon ............................................................................ Installing Microsoft SQL Server JDBC driver .............................. Configuring Enterprise Vault data collector ............................... IBM Tivoli Storage Manager data collector variables and details ......... EMC NetWorker data collector variables .........................................

360 361 362 363 363 366 366 368 368 369 371 372 373 375 376

Chapter 6

Managing OpsCenter views

............................................ 379 379 381 383 383 385 386 386 387 387 388 388 389 390 390 391 391 392 393 393 394 395 395 396

About OpsCenter views ................................................................ Settings > Views options ........................................................ OpsCenter view types ............................................................ UI access for specific view types .............................................. About access rights for a view ................................................ About OpsCenter view levels ................................................... About nodes and objects ........................................................ About managing OpsCenter views ................................................. Settings > Views > Manage Nodes and Objects options ................ Looking at OpsCenter views and their details ............................. Creating OpsCenter views ...................................................... Modifying OpsCenter views .................................................... Deleting OpsCenter views ...................................................... Modifying alias view levels in OpsCenter .................................. About managing nodes and objects in OpsCenter .............................. Adding nodes to a view in OpsCenter .............................................. Modifying node details in OpsCenter .............................................. Deleting nodes in OpsCenter ......................................................... Adding objects to a view node in OpsCenter ..................................... Deleting objects from a view node in OpsCenter ............................... View filters in OpsCenter ............................................................. Creating a view object filter in OpsCenter .................................. Modifying view object filters in OpsCenter ................................

14

Contents

Deleting view object filters in OpsCenter ................................... 397

Chapter 7

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter .....................................................................

About the Monitor views .............................................................. Controlling the scope of Monitor views ........................................... About time frame selection .................................................... About monitoring NetBackup using the Overview tab ........................ Viewing the Job Summary by State .......................................... Viewing the Media Summary by Status .................................... About Top 7 Job Error Log Summary ........................................ Viewing the Services Summary ............................................... Viewing the Master Server Summary ....................................... Viewing the Job Summary by Exit Status ................................... Viewing the Drive Summary by Status ...................................... Top 7 Policies by Failed Jobs ................................................... Viewing the Alert Summary by Severity ................................... About monitoring NetBackup jobs ................................................. Monitor > Jobs List View options ............................................. About monitoring jobs using the List View ................................ Viewing the details for a single NetBackup job ........................... Viewing the details for a master server associated with a job ............................................................................... Viewing policy information for a job ........................................ Filtering on NetBackup job type and state ................................. Controlling NetBackup jobs .................................................... Reconciling NetBackup jobs .................................................... Changing the job priority ....................................................... Change Job Priority dialog box options ..................................... Exporting NetBackup job logs ................................................. About using the Summary View for monitoring jobs ................... Viewing the Job Summary by Exit Status ................................... Viewing the Job Summary by State .......................................... Viewing the Job Summary by Type ........................................... About the Group Component Summary table ............................. About using the Hierarchical View for monitoring jobs ................ Viewing the details for a single NetBackup job ........................... Viewing the details for a master server associated with a job ............................................................................... Viewing policy information for a job ........................................ Filtering on NetBackup job state .............................................. Monitor > Services view ...............................................................

399 401 401 402 403 404 404 405 405 406 407 408 409 409 410 410 413 414 414 415 415 416 417 417 418 418 419 420 420 421 422 424 426 426 427 427 428

Contents

15

Filtering on NetBackup service type ......................................... Controlling NetBackup services ............................................... About monitoring NetBackup policies ...................................... Monitor > Policies List View ................................................... About using the List View to monitor NetBackup policies ............. Filtering on NetBackup policy type .......................................... Monitor > Policies page ......................................................... Viewing details for a single NetBackup policy ............................ Viewing the details for a master server associated with a policy ........................................................................... Viewing the details for a volume pool associated with a policy ........................................................................... Activating or deactivating a job policy ...................................... Starting a manual backup ...................................................... Viewing the history for a single job policy ................................ Monitor > Policies Summary View ........................................... About Top 5 Policies by Data Backed up .................................... About Top 7 Policies by Failed Jobs .......................................... About Top 7 Policies by No. of Jobs .......................................... About monitoring NetBackup media ........................................ Monitor > Media List View options ........................................... About using the List View to monitor NetBackup media ..................... Viewing the details for NetBackup media ........................................ Viewing the details for a master server associated with the media ................................................................................. Filtering on NetBackup media type ................................................ Controlling media ....................................................................... Monitor > Media Summary View options ........................................ Hierarchical View by Volume Pool for monitoring media ................... Viewing the details for volume pool ............................................... Viewing the details for media ....................................................... Controlling media ....................................................................... Hierarchical View by Volume Group for monitoring media ................. Viewing the details for a volume group ........................................... Viewing the details for media ....................................................... Controlling media in OpsCenter .................................................... Monitoring NetBackup devices ...................................................... Monitor > Devices > Drives List View options .................................. About using the List View for monitoring drives ............................... Viewing the details for a single drive .............................................. Viewing the details for a master server associated with a drive ........... Filtering on NetBackup drive category ............................................ Controlling drives .......................................................................

429 430 430 431 434 435 435 436 436 437 437 437 438 438 439 439 440 440 441 443 444 444 444 445 446 447 448 448 448 449 449 450 450 451 451 453 453 454 454 455

16

Contents

Monitor > Devices > Drives Summary View ..................................... Viewing the Drive Summary by Status ............................................ Monitor > Devices > Disk Pools options .......................................... Viewing the details for a single disk pool ......................................... About monitoring NetBackup hosts ............................................... Monitor > Hosts > Master Servers view ........................................... Filtering by NetBackup master server type and status ....................... Monitor > Hosts > Media Servers view ............................................ Viewing the details of a master server that is associated with a media server ................................................................................. Monitor > Hosts > Clients view ...................................................... Viewing the details for a single master server .................................. About monitoring NetBackup alerts ............................................... Monitor > Alerts List View ........................................................... About using the List View to monitor NetBackup alerts ..................... Viewing the details for a single alert .............................................. Viewing the details of the alert policy associated with an alert ............ Filtering by alert type .................................................................. Responding to alerts .................................................................. Summary View for monitoring NetBackup alerts .............................. Viewing alerts by severity ............................................................ About monitoring Audit Trails ...................................................... Additional information about the Audit Trails report .................. What Audit Trails track ......................................................... Audit Trails report ................................................................ About OpsCenter features for Audit Trails ................................ Creating a custom filter to view audit trail data .......................... About managing Audit Trails settings ...................................... Monitor > Appliance Hardware > Master Server ............................... Monitor > Appliance Hardware > Media Server ................................ Appliance hardware details .......................................................... Monitor > Cloud options ..............................................................

455 456 456 458 458 459 460 461 461 462 462 462 463 464 465 465 466 467 469 470 471 471 471 472 472 473 474 474 477 480 482

Chapter 8

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter .....................................................................

About the Manage views .............................................................. Controlling the scope of Manage views ........................................... About managing alert policies ....................................................... About OpsCenter alert policies ................................................ Manage > Alert Policies view .................................................. Viewing the details for a single alert policy ............................... Filtering on type of alert policy ...............................................

485 485 486 487 487 488 489 489

Contents

17

About creating (or changing) an alert policy .............................. Managing an alert policy ....................................................... Viewing the alerts associated with an alert policy ....................... About managing NetBackup storage .............................................. Manage > Storage > Storage Unit view ..................................... Manage > Storage > Storage Unit Group view ............................ Manage > Storage > Storage Lifecycle Policy view ....................... About managing NetBackup devices ............................................... Manage > Devices > Drive view ............................................... Manage > Devices > Robot view ............................................... Manage > Devices > Disk Pool view .......................................... Manage > Devices > SAN Client view ........................................ Manage > Devices > FT Server view ......................................... About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations .............. About Operational Restores from OpsCenter ............................. About OpsCenter Guided Recovery .......................................... About managing NetBackup Hosts ................................................. Managing audit trails settings ................................................ About managing NetBackup Deployment Analysis ............................ About the traditional license report ......................................... Prerequisites and data collection for a traditional licensing report ........................................................................... Traditional Licensing page ..................................................... Create Traditional Licensing Report Wizard .............................. Generating a Traditional Licensing report ................................. Traditional Licensing report and log file locations ...................... Possible Traditional License report issues ................................. Capacity License report ......................................................... Data compilation for the Capacity License report ....................... Generating a Capacity Licensing report .................................... Possible Capacity License report issues .....................................

490 508 509 509 510 512 513 515 515 519 521 524 526 527 527 560 572 573 573 573 575 579 579 582 583 584 586 587 588 593

Chapter 9

Supporting Replication Director in OpsCenter ............ 595

About monitoring Replication Director from OpsCenter .................... About the Open Storage alert condition .......................................... How the events are generated ....................................................... Adding an alert policy ................................................................. About changes in the SLP Status by Image Copy report ...................... About monitoring replication jobs ................................................. About changes in the Monitor and Manage views ............................. 595 595 596 597 598 599 600

18

Contents

Chapter 10

Understanding and configuring OpsCenter alerts ..............................................................................

About using SNMP ...................................................................... About SNMP ........................................................................ About SNMP versions ............................................................ SNMP versions supported in OpsCenter .................................... About the Management Information Base (MIB) and OpsCenter support ......................................................................... SNMP traps ......................................................................... Alert descriptions in OpsCenter .............................................. Configuring the SNMP trap community name for OpsCenter ..................................................................... Configuring the SNMP version for sending SNMP traps ............... About customizing Alert Manager settings ................................ Frequently asked SNMP and OpsCenter questions ...................... About managing OpsCenter alerts using Microsoft System Center Operations Manager 2007 ...................................................... About managing OpsCenter alerts using HP OpenView Network Node Manager 7.50/7.51 on Windows ..............................................

605 605 606 606 607 607 607 610 622 623 624 625 626 626

Chapter 11

Reporting in OpsCenter .................................................... 627

About OpsCenter reports ............................................................. OpsCenter reports UI ............................................................ Report creation wizards in OpsCenter ...................................... Reports > Report Templates ................................................... About custom reports in OpsCenter Analytics ............................ About custom SQL query in OpsCenter Analytics ........................ Report Templates in OpsCenter ..................................................... About report filters in OpsCenter ............................................ Creating an OpsCenter report using a Report Template ............... Using report formats ............................................................ About managing reports in OpsCenter ............................................ Save report and email report dialog boxes ................................. Saving an OpsCenter report .................................................... Exporting an OpsCenter report ............................................... File formats available in OpsCenter .......................................... Emailing a report in OpsCenter ............................................... Configuring number of rows in a tabular report for email or export .......................................................................... Adding email recipients to an OpsCenter report mailing .............. Add email recipients dialog box options .................................... Creating a custom report in OpsCenter ........................................... 627 628 629 629 630 631 631 633 634 635 636 636 638 639 639 641 642 644 644 644

Contents

19

About Custom Report Wizard parameters ................................. Changes in custom reporting in OpsCenter 7.5 ................................. Creating an OpsCenter report using SQL query ................................ About managing My Reports ........................................................ Creating a report using the My Reports tab ............................... Deleting a saved report using the My Reports tab ....................... Viewing a saved report using the My Reports tab ........................ Editing a saved report using the My Reports tab ......................... Exporting a saved report ........................................................ Emailing a saved report ......................................................... About managing My Dashboard .................................................... Reports > My Dashboard options ............................................. Adding reports to a dashboard ................................................ Modifying a dashboard section ................................................ Deleting a dashboard section .................................................. Emailing dashboard sections .................................................. Refreshing My Dashboard ...................................................... About managing reports folders in OpsCenter ................................. Reports > Manage Folders options ........................................... Adding a reports folder in OpsCenter ....................................... Editing a reports folder in OpsCenter ....................................... Deleting reports folders in OpsCenter ...................................... Deleting reports from a folder in OpsCenter .............................. Using report schedules in OpsCenter .............................................. Reports > Schedules options ......................................................... About managing report schedules in OpsCenter ............................... Viewing report schedule details in OpsCenter ............................ Report Schedule Wizard ........................................................ Creating a report schedule in OpsCenter ................................... Editing a report schedule in OpsCenter ..................................... Deleting a report schedule in OpsCenter ................................... Enabling or disabling a report schedule .................................... About managing time schedules in OpsCenter ................................. Reports > Schedules > Create or Edit Time Schedule options ......................................................................... Viewing time schedule details ................................................. Creating a time schedule ........................................................ Editing a time schedule .......................................................... Deleting a time schedule ........................................................ About Report Templates descriptions ............................................. About Enterprise Vault Archiving reports in OpsCenter ............... About Audit reports .............................................................. About Backup reports in OpsCenter .........................................

654 661 666 668 668 668 669 669 669 670 671 671 672 672 672 673 673 673 673 674 674 675 675 675 677 678 679 679 681 683 684 684 684 684 685 685 686 686 686 688 691 691

20

Contents

About Catalog reports in OpsCenter ......................................... About Chargeback reports in OpsCenter ................................... About Client reports in OpsCenter ........................................... About Cloud reports .............................................................. About Disk and Tape Device Activity reports in OpsCenter ........... About Hold reports in OpsCenter ............................................. About Media reports in OpsCenter ........................................... About Performance reports in OpsCenter .................................. About Policy reports in OpsCenter ........................................... About Restore reports in OpsCenter ......................................... About Storage Lifecycle Policy reports ..................................... About Workload Analyzer reports in OpsCenter .........................

833 833 842 874 887 897 897 907 921 937 943 978

Chapter 12

Using NetBackup Search .................................................. 989

About NetBackup Search ............................................................. Search & Hold > New view ............................................................ Search & Hold > Saved view .......................................................... Search & Hold > Saved > Search Results view .................................. Search & Hold > Holds view .......................................................... Search & Hold > Holds > Hold Details view ...................................... 989 990 993 993 994 995

Appendix A

Additional information on PureDisk data collection ....................................................................... 997

About AT configuration scenarios specific to PureDisk backup product .............................................................................. 997 About Scenario 1: Common Root Broker ................................... 998 About Scenario 2: Different Root Brokers .................................. 999 Setting up a trust between the OpsCenter AB host and PureDisk SPA host .................................................................................. 1001

Appendix B Appendix C

Attributes of NetBackup data ........................................ 1003

Backup data attributes ............................................................... 1003

Man pages for CLIs .......................................................... 1035

changeDbPassword ................................................................... changeVxATProperties .............................................................. configurePorts ......................................................................... dbbackup ................................................................................ dbdefrag ................................................................................. nbfindfile ................................................................................ opsadmin ................................................................................ 1036 1038 1039 1040 1041 1042 1046

Contents

21

opsCenterAgentSupport ............................................................. opsCenterSupport ..................................................................... runstoredquery ........................................................................ startagent ............................................................................... startdb .................................................................................... startgui ................................................................................... startserver .............................................................................. stopagent ................................................................................ stopdb .................................................................................... stopgui ................................................................................... stopserver ...............................................................................

1048 1049 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059

Appendix D

Creating views using CSV, TSV, and XML files ........... 1061
About using CSV, TSV, and XML files to create views ....................... About creating CSV files ............................................................ About creating TSV files ............................................................ About creating XML files ............................................................ XML DTD structure ................................................................... DTD elements .......................................................................... DTD <application> element ........................................................ DTD <objects> and <object> elements .......................................... DTD <attribute> elements .......................................................... DTD <view> element ................................................................. DTD <node> elements ............................................................... DTD <aliaslevel> elements ......................................................... Examples of XML files ............................................................... Example 1: Adding an object ....................................................... Example 2: Adding a view ........................................................... Example 3: Updating an object .................................................... Example 4: Merging objects ........................................................ 1062 1062 1064 1067 1068 1069 1069 1069 1071 1071 1072 1072 1073 1073 1074 1075 1076

Appendix E

Error messages in OpsCenter ........................................ 1079

OpsCenter Error Messages added in 7.5 ......................................... 1079

Symantec OpsCenter Glossary .................................................................... 1097 Index

................................................................................................................. 1099

22

Contents

Chapter

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter

This chapter includes the following topics:

About Symantec OpsCenter About what's new in Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About OpsCenter components About using the OpsCenter console About starting the OpsCenter console About OpsCenter console components Common tasks in OpsCenter About using Web browser bookmarks About OpsCenter documentation

About Symantec OpsCenter

Symantec OpsCenter is a Web-based software application that helps organizations by providing visibility into their data protection environment. By using Symantec OpsCenter, you can track the effectiveness of backup and archive operations by generating comprehensive reports. OpsCenter is a convergence of NetBackup Operations Manager (NOM) and Veritas Backup Reporter (VBR) and is available in the following two versions:

24

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About Symantec OpsCenter

Symantec OpsCenter

This OpsCenter version does not require any license. Symantec OpsCenter provides single deployment configuration and user interface for monitoring, alerting, and reporting functionality. These features were previously available in NOM and VBR. Symantec OpsCenter Analytics is the licensed version of OpsCenter. In addition to the features available in the unlicensed OpsCenter version, Analytics offers report customization, chargeback reporting, support for third-party data protection products, and also NetBackup Search. The NetBackup Search functionality is now also available with Symantec OpsCenter Analytics 7.5. If you upgrade from an earlier version of Symantec OpsCenter Analytics to 7.5 and want the Search functionality, a new OpsCenter Analytics license key can be purchased which enables only the Search functionality.

Symantec OpsCenter Analytics

Note: OpsCenter 7.5 does not support upgrades from NOM and VBR.

About Symantec OpsCenter functions

The unlicensed version of OpsCenter is called Symantec OpsCenter. Symantec OpsCenter can perform the following functions:

Monitor NetBackup and NetBackup 52xx Appliance setups. Manage or administer NetBackup and NetBackup 52xx Appliance setups. Note that OpsCenter can only monitor and manage NetBackup or NetBackup 52xx Appliance. It cannot monitor or manage other products like Symantec NetBackup PureDisk, Symantec Enterprise Vault, Symantec deduplication appliance etc. Generate alerts depending on the conditions that you have defined. Create and customize views using Java View Builder. With OpsCenter 7.5, Java View Builder is free and does not require any license. Provide operational reporting on the following Symantec products:

Symantec NetBackup Symantec NetBackup 52xx Appliance Symantec NetBackup PureDisk Symantec Backup Exec Symantec Enterprise Vault

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About Symantec OpsCenter

25

About Symantec OpsCenter Analytics functions

The licensed version of OpsCenter is called Symantec OpsCenter Analytics. Symantec OpsCenter Analytics can perform the following functions:

Monitor NetBackup and NetBackup 52xx Appliance setups. Manage or administer NetBackup and NetBackup 52xx Appliance setups. See About monitoring and managing NetBackup and NetBackup appliances on page 26. Note that Symantec OpsCenter Analytics can only monitor and manage NetBackup or NetBackup 52xx Appliance. It cannot monitor or manage other products like Symantec NetBackup PureDisk, Symantec Enterprise Vault, Symantec Backup Exec, Symantec Deduplication Appliance etc. Generate alerts depending on the conditions that you have defined. See About alerting in OpsCenter on page 27. Create and customize views using Java View Builder. With OpsCenter 7.5, Java View Builder is free and does not require any license. Provide operational and business-level reporting on the following Symantec and third-party products:

Symantec NetBackup Symantec NetBackup 52xx Appliance Symantec NetBackup PureDisk Symantec Backup Exec Symantec Enterprise Vault EMC NetWorker IBM Tivoli Storage Manager

Provide chargeback, custom, and custom SQL reports Perform advanced NetBackup Search and hold operations based on indexing the file system metadata that is associated with the backup images. See About NetBackup Search on page 989.

Symantec OpsCenter Analytics displays customizable, multi-level views of backup and archive resources and customizable reports for tracking service usage and expenditures. It also contains tools for defining cost metrics and chargeback formulas or handling alerts. A wide range of audiences can benefit from the reporting capabilities and management capabilities of Symantec OpsCenter Analytics. The audiences include

26

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About Symantec OpsCenter

IT (Information Technology) managers, application owners, IT finance teams, external compliance auditors, legal teams, line-of-business managers, external customers, IT architects, and capacity planning teams. The primary objectives of Symantec OpsCenter Analytics are as follows:

Help organizations assess their compliance with business standards by allowing them to accomplish the following:

Help organizations to establish the Service Level Agreements by reporting on them Report to legal departments, auditors, IT managers, and administrators Verify compliance with internal as well as external business-level regulations. Identify risks in terms of shortfall of backup resources. Assess the recovery of clients and applications.

Assist organizations in effective business planning by enabling them to do the following:

Estimate future backup requirements with the help of backup trend analysis. Calculate the cost of data protection management and chargeback to customers and business units. Note: You can generate cost reports only for backup data. Cost reports for archive data are not available.

About monitoring and managing NetBackup and NetBackup appliances

OpsCenter can manage and monitor NetBackup master and media servers, clients, policies, and additionally appliance master and media servers. It can manage up to 100 NetBackup master servers that are distributed across multiple locations. It does not require you to separately log on to each NetBackup master or media server. OpsCenter lets you view the operational status and health of your distributed data protection environment. OpsCenter focuses on how to maintain your backup environment after you complete the NetBackup configuration. You need to use the NetBackup Administration Console and command-line interfaces for core NetBackup administrative functions such as configuring media, storage units, and policies.

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About Symantec OpsCenter

27

About alerting in OpsCenter

OpsCenter provides a policy-based alert system, which monitors and notifies you before serious problems happen to your backup environment. You can use predefined alert conditions to create alert policies to monitor typical issues or thresholds within NetBackup, NetBackup Appliance or other products. You can send an email or SNMP notification in response to an actual alert, which lets administrators focus on other job responsibilities. They no longer need to be logged on to a terminal to monitor systems continuously. See About managing alert policies on page 487.

About reporting in Symantec OpsCenter Analytics

These topics state the benefits that you can get from the Symantec OpsCenter Analytics reports. See About OpsCenter reports on page 627. See About compliance reporting on page 27. See About business planning on page 28. See About reporting on archive data on page 29.

About compliance reporting

OpsCenter Analytics helps organizations evaluate their compliance with internal and external business standards by providing accurate and customizable reports. By using internal compliance reports, you can measure system performance against a service level agreement (SLA). You can then use the results to optimize data protection management. Reports such as history or trend analysis ensure your compliance with the SLA. By using these reports, you can track the use of backup resources and identify the risks involved. For example, you can generate a report that anticipates a shortfall of resources in the future based on the current backup trend. This report is then used to determine the time that is required to purchase new tape drives, master servers, or media servers. External compliance reports help you follow the policies that are laid down by various federal regulations. Such policies include the Sarbanes-Oxley Act (SOX) and the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA). In addition to tracking the backup information or archive information, OpsCenter reports ensure recovery of key information assets. The reports can help you ensure that the data recovery meets the recovery-time and recovery-point objectives. OpsCenter can generate reports that are filtered by views. A view shows a set of enterprise assets (hosts or file systems) organized in logical groups. For example,

28

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About Symantec OpsCenter

you can create views to display assets according to their locations in the organization, the line of business they represent, or the applications that are installed. OpsCenter can generate reports according to views created. These reports help you identify locations or departments containing assets with critical data. These reports are then used in resource planning.

About business planning

OpsCenter Analytics is a management tool that helps you optimize your data protection environment with effective business planning. It delivers backup services to organizations, which include reporting on backup and recovery trends and managing datacenters . This product supports a wide range of backup and recovery solutions including NetBackup and Backup Exec. It seamlessly integrates with Symantec products as well as third-party backup products and provides consistent reporting across them. It can collect data from the following target products:

Symantec NetBackup Symantec NetBackup Appliance Symantec Backup Exec Symantec NetBackup PureDisk Symantec Enterprise Vault IBM Tivoli Storage Manager EMC NetWorker

OpsCenters ability to forecast backup resource requirements helps datacenter executives to decide whether to maintain the existing resources or add new capacity. The detailed, drill-down OpsCenter reports help you determine the applications, databases, or business departments that are the heaviest consumers of backup resources. For example, in an environment running 20 instances of Oracle applications, you can generate a report showing resource consumption by department, server, or location. Depending on this information, organizations can provide appropriate resource planning in advance. Symantec OpsCenter Analytics offers you a set of chargeback reports that detail backup service expenditures. By using these reports, you can track the backup use and recovery use and the associated cost. By using the chargeback function, you can define pricing models for backup service delivery and allocate costs to customers based on these models. For example, you can create a formula that determines charges based on kilobytes of backed up data over a period of time. Using this chargeback data, you can then present itemized invoices to internal

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About what's new in Symantec OpsCenter 7.5

29

customers, export chargeback tables to third-party billing systems, or use the data to analyze and justify expenditures. Note: You can generate cost reports only for backup data. Cost reports for archive data are not available.

About reporting on archive data

The Enterprise Vault Archiving report category contains a number of reports that are generated based on the archive data collected from Enterprise Vault. You can report on the number of messages that are archived across mailboxes or the size of these messages before and after the archive operation.

About what's new in Symantec OpsCenter 7.5

OpsCenter 7.5 offers the following enhancements or new functions.

OpsCenter 7.5 allows you to search for and restore the backed up files or directories from multiple source clients. In the OpsCenter console, go to Manage > Restore and click Restore Files and Directories link to restore backed up files and directories. A new user role named Restore Operator has been added in OpsCenter 7.5. See About Operational Restores from OpsCenter on page 527. In OpsCenter 7.5, the top 50 standard reports and also custom reports have been enhanced for report definition and data correctness. The following enhancements have been made:

The top 50 standard OpsCenter reports have been enhanced for report definition correctness to be at par with the earlier NOM or VBR reports. The top 50 standard OpsCenter reports have been enhanced for report data correctness to be at par with the earlier NOM or VBR reports. The custom reports have been enhanced for report definition and data correctness. With earlier versions of OpsCenter, standard or custom reports may show incorrect data if you select a time frame that contains a Daylight Saving Time (or DST) change. This issue has now been fixed in OpsCenter 7.5. However, there will be some performance impact if you run a standard or custom report that meets both of the following conditions:

The report is Historical (has a Time Frame Grouping filter) ) or is tabular with a Date or Date Time column.

30

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About what's new in Symantec OpsCenter 7.5

The time frame selected to run the report contains DST change. Example: Suppose you select CST (GMT -6:00) as the Data Display Time Zone on OpsCenter Server. And while running the report, you specify the absolute timeframe from Oct 22, 2010 to November 22, 2010. The DST setting for CST time zone ended on Nov 7, 2010 02:00:00. Since the DST ends on November 7 which is in the middle of the selected timeframe, the selected timeframe contains the DST change. To overcome such performance issues, Symantec recommends that you configure the timezone for the OpsCenter Server as either GMT or a timezone that does not have any DST. You can configure the Data Display Time Zone from the OpsCenter console by clicking Settings > User Preferences > General and browsing to the Basic Preferences section. The following standard or canned reports have been enhanced in OpsCenter 7.5:

Folder Name

Report Name

Reference
See Job Activity > File Count on page 740. See Job Activity > Job Count on page 720. See Job Activity > Job Size on page 725. See Job Activity > Client Count on page 731. See Job Activity > Job Duration on page 736. See Job Activity > Backup Window > Job Count report on page 716. See Planning Activity > Forecast > Job Size on page 751.

Backup > Job Activity File Count

Job Count

Job Size

Client Count

Job Duration

Backup Window > Job Count Backup > Planning Activity > Forecast Backup > Status & Success Rate Job Size - Forecast

Advanced Success Rate See Status & Success Rate > Success Rate > Advanced Success Rate report on page 821. Success Rate - All Attempts See Status & Success Rate > Success Rate > Success Rate - All Attempts report on page 824.

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About what's new in Symantec OpsCenter 7.5

31

Folder Name

Report Name
Success Rate - First Attempt

Reference
See Status & Success Rate > Success Rate > Success Rate - First Attempt report on page 829.

Success Rate - All Jobs See Status & Success Rate > Success Rate > Success Rate All Jobs report on page 817. Backup > Status & Consecutive Failures Success Rate > Status Report Week at a Glance See Status > Consecutive Failures on page 788. See Status & Success Rate > Status > Week At A Glance report on page 797. See Status & Success Rate > Status > Job Status > Historical report on page 810. See Status & Success Rate > Status > Failed Job Count report on page 776.

Job Status

Failed Job Count

Partially Successful Job See Status & Success Rate > Status > Count Partially Successful Job Count report on page 780. Successful Job Count See Status & Success Rate > Status > Successful Job Count report on page 784. See Status & Success Rate > Status > Success Rate Line report on page 793. See Status & Success Rate > Status > Job Attempt Status Detail report on page 806. See Planning Activity > Scheduled Jobs > Job Details Scheduled Vs Actual report on page 762. See Planning Activity > Scheduled Job > Job Count Scheduled Vs Actual report on page 756. See Planning Activity > Scheduled Job > Job Count within Backup Window report on page 760.

Success Rate Line

Job Attempt Status Detail

Backup > Planning Activity > Scheduled Job

Job Details Scheduled vs. Actual

Job Count Scheduled Vs. Actual

Job Count within Backup Window

32

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About what's new in Symantec OpsCenter 7.5

Folder Name
Backup > Deduplication

Report Name
Deduplication Size Savings Deduplication Size Factor Pre Vs. Post Deduplication

Reference
See Deduplication > Deduplication Size Savings on page 703. See Deduplication > Deduplication Size Factor on page 694. See Deduplication > Pre vs. Post Deduplication Size report on page 700. See Variance > Throughput Variance on page 709. See Job Activity > Variance > Backup Job Size Variance report on page 712.

Job Activity > Variance

Throughput Variance

Backup Job Size Variance

Backup > Job Browser Tabular Backup Report See Job Browser > Tabular Backup Report on page 745. Backup > Planning Activity > Stored Backup Images Stored backup Images on Media See Planning Activity > Stored Backup Images > Stored Backup Images > Stored Backup Images on Media on page 769. See Backup Chargeback report on page 838. See Deduplication Chargeback report on page 833. See Risk Analysis > Recovery Point Objective report on page 853. See Risk Analysis > Client Risk Analysis report on page 843. See Risk Analysis > Client Coverage report on page 846. See Client Restore report on page 872. See Clients Not Backed up report on page 857. See Job Success by Client report on page 864.

Chargeback

Backup Chargeback

Deduplication Chargeback Client Reports > Risk Analysis Recovery Point Objective Client Risk Analysis

Client Coverage

Client Report

Client Restore

Client Not Backed up

Job Success By Client

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About what's new in Symantec OpsCenter 7.5

33

Folder Name

Report Name
Virtual Client Summary

Reference
See Virtual Client Summary report on page 859. See Disk and Tape Device Activity > Current Disk Usage Report on page 888. See Disk and Tape Device Activity > Drive Throughput on page 891. See Disk and Tape Device Activity > Drive Utilization Report on page 894. See Media Reports > Media Utilization on page 901. See Media Reports > Media Expiration Schedule on page 904. See Media Reports > Media State on page 898. See Master Server Job Throughput report on page 908. See Disk Usage report on page 915. See Policy Summary Dashboard report on page 927. See Top 10 Policies Using Most Server Space report on page 922. See Restore > Restore Job Details on page 941. See Restore > Restore Job Attempt Summary by Job Count on page 937. See Restore > Restore Job Attempt Summary by Volume Restored on page 939.

Disk & Tape Device Activity

Current Disk Usage

Drive Throughput

Drive Utilization

Media Reports

Media Utilization

Media Expiration Schedule Media State

Performance Reports Master Server Job Throughput Disk Usage Policy Reports Policy Summary Dashbaord Top 10 Policies Using most Server Space Restore Restore Job Details

Restore Job Summary by Job Count Restore Job Summary by Volume Restored

If you have saved one or more reports that are based on any of the report templates mentioned above or any custom reports and you upgrade from an earlier OpsCenter version to OpsCenter 7.5, you will see the link named View modified saved reports under Reports > My Reports. Since the saved reports

34

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About what's new in Symantec OpsCenter 7.5

are based on templates that have been modified in OpsCenter 7.5, these saved reports may appear modified. Click the link to view the modified saved reports. The following figure shows the View modified saved reports link. The following are some of the report definition changes that have been implemented that are valid for some or all of the above mentioned standard (or canned) reports:

The unit Years has been added for Relative Timeframe selection for all of the reports. You can now view report data for the last x years with Symantec OpsCenter Analytics for the above reports. You can also see the Years tab on the top-right corner of the above reports. Trend line display option is now available for some of the canned historical reports. You can use trendlines to specify whether the report should include a trendline, and the length of the interval between points on the trend line (in days). The following check box is available under Timeline Chart Properties on the Modify Display Options pane: Show trend line with moving average period of <select value> The trendline option is available for the following reports:

Backup > Deduplication > Deduplication Size Saving Backup > Deduplication > Deduplication Size Factor Backup > Job Activity > File Count Backup > Job Activity > Job Count Backup > Job Activity > Job Size Backup > Status & Success Rate > Status > Failed Job Count Backup > Status & Success Rate > Status > Job Status Backup > Status & Success Rate > Status > Partially Successful Job Count Backup > Status & Success Rate > Status > Successful Job Count Backup > Planning Activity > Stored Backup Images > Stored Backup Images on Media Chargeback > Backup Chargeback Chargeback > Deduplication Chargeback

The Week at a Glance report can now show the files and directories that are backed up for each client. The following checkbox has been added on the Modify Display Options pane when you edit the report: Show the files and directories backed up for each client

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About what's new in Symantec OpsCenter 7.5

35

If you check this option and click Run Report, you can view the client name and the backed up directory in the Client Name column of Week at a Glance report.

Drilldown reports are now available for the following reports: Report Drill down report

Backup > Job Browser > Tabular Backup Skip File Details Report (click any link in the Job Primary ID column) Client Reports > Job Success By Client (click the bar chart) Media Reports > Media Expiration Schedule (click the bar chart) Job Details by Client

Media Expiration Details

Restore > Restore Job Attempt Summary Restore Job Attempt Details by Job Count (click the bar chart) Restore > Restore Job Attempt Summary Restore Job Attempt Details by Volume restored (click the bar chart)

A new value called UNKNOWN has been added for filters like Policy type, Job Type. The charts section now show UNKNOWN as legend instead of blank. The following are some of the report definition changes that have been implemented for custom reports:

The unit Years and Quarters has been added for Relative Timeframe selection. You can now view report data for the last x years or the last x quarters with Symantec OpsCenter Analytics. A new subcategory called Disk Pool has been added under the Backup/Recovery category for custom reports. A new checkbox named Target Performance has been added to the Modify Display Options page. This checkbox is visible when you create a custom historical report. You can use the Target Performance option to specify where a report draws the target line, with which you can compare the actual performance shown. The Target Performance option allows you to specify the target for Y1 or Y2 axis (in case of dual axis). In case you set a value of say 100 for Y1 axis and run the report, you will see a straight line parallel to X-axis and the value as 100 on Y1 axis. Using this option, you can easily compare the actual performance with the target performance.

36

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About what's new in Symantec OpsCenter 7.5

A new checkbox option called Display unique rows in the report has been added for custom tabular reports. This option appears on the Modify Display Options page when you create custom tabular reports. When you select this option, all duplicate rows are replaced by a single row in the report and only distinct records are shown. Duplicate rows generally appear if the rows do not have a unique ID. While creating custom reports (Distribution, Historical, Tabular, or Ranking) in the Modify Display Options page, if you select report data for chart based reports then the function or Operation drop-down list is populated dynamically with the supported values. For example if you create a Distribution, Historical, or Ranking custom report, and select Report Data as Job Primary ID, only valid functions like Count, Distinct Count, Maximum, and Minimum are shown in the other drop-down list. Earlier all the functions were displayed. Similarly if you create a tabular custom report, and add Job Retention Level as a selected column, the Operation drop-down list shows only applicable functions namely Count and Distinct Count. You can now choose to start from the beginning of a Relative time frame for custom reports. The following checkbox has been added in Relative Timeframe: Start from the beginning of <selected unit>. <selected unit> may stand for Hours, Days, Weeks, Months, Quarters, or Years depending on what you select. If you specify a relative timeframe and check Start from the beginning of <selected unit>, the Relative timeframe is calculated starting from the first day for week, month, quarter, or year selection, from 12 A.M. for day selection, and from the earliest whole number (no minutes or seconds) for hour selection. Do not select the Start from the beginning of <unit> check box if you want to view data for the entire period specified in Relative Timeframe. Examples:

The current date is June 13, 2010. If you select the Relative Timeframe as Previous 1 Month and do not select the Start from the beginning of Month check box, the report shows data from May 14, 2010 to June 13, 2010. However if you select the Start from the beginning of Month check box, the report shows data from June 1, 2010 to June 13, 2010. The current date and time is September 13, 10:30 PM. If you select the Relative Timeframe as Previous 2 Days and do not select the Start from the beginning of Days check box, the report shows data from September 11, 10:30 P.M. to September 13, 10:30 P.M. However if you select the

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About what's new in Symantec OpsCenter 7.5

37

Start from the beginning of Days check box, the report shows data from September 12, 12 A.M. to September 13, 10:30 P.M.

The current time is 4:25 P.M. If you select the Relative Timeframe as Previous 2 Hours and do not select the Start from the beginning of Hour check box, the report shows data from 2:25 P.M. to 4:25 P.M. However if you select the Start from the beginning of Hours check box, the report shows data from 3 P.M. to 4:25 P.M.

Note: If you specify relative time frame and check Start from the beginning of <selected unit>, the report is configured to display data collected over the interval ending at the current date. This is effectively equivalent to specifying an absolute time frame; the reports contents remain static whenever you display it. The following checkboxes have been added for Absolute Time frame in custom reports:
Ignore From Date Check this option to view all the data on and before the To date. Example: Suppose you specify an absolute timframe: From March 1, 2004, 12:00 A.M. to April 30, 2004, 12:00 A.M. The report displays data from the time period between the start and end dates. Now if you check Ignore From Date, the report ignores the From Date and displays all data before April 30, 2004, 12:00 A.M. Check this option to view all data on and after the From date Example: Suppose you specify an absolute timframe: From March 1, 2004, 12:00 A.M. to April 30, 2004, 12:00 A.M. The report displays data from the time period between the start and end dates. Now if you check Ignore To Date, the report ignores the To Date and displays all data on and after March 1, 2004, 12:00 A.M.

Ignore To Date

Use Ignore From Date or Ignore To Date to indicate an open-ended time interval for an Absolute Timeframe.

A new value called UNKNOWN has been added for filters like Policy type, Job Type, Schedule/Level Type etc. The charts section now shows UNKNOWN as legend instead of blank.

Symantec OpsCenter Analytics 7.5 allows you to perform advanced NetBackup Search and hold operations based on indexing the file system metadata that is associated with the backup images. A license for NetBackup Search is required. After you have added the license and log on as a Security

38

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About what's new in Symantec OpsCenter 7.5

Administrator, you can view the content in Search & Hold tab in the OpsCenter console. See About NetBackup Search on page 989.

OpsCenter 7.5 helps you to generate traditional licensing reports for master servers of version 6.5.6 and higher (supported by nbdeployutil). You can find information about traditional licenses by going to Manage > Deployment Analysis > Traditional Licensing in the OpsCenter console. See About the traditional license report on page 573. View-based access has been improved with OpsCenter 7.5. The following changes have been made with respect to implementing view-based access in OpsCenter 7.5:

All OpsCenter users cannot access all OpsCenter views. A Security Administrator or an Administrator has read and write permission for all the views (except write permission for the ALL MASTER SERVERS view). For other users, access to views is permission-based. Note: The ALL MASTER SERVERS view cannot be modified. See About access rights for a view on page 385.

Only the Security Administrator can grant view access to users from the OpsCenter console. This can be done when a Security Administrator adds or edits a user from Settings > Users. All non-admin users like Operator, Restore Operator, or Reporter can be given a read-only access to the views. The Security Administrator can see assigned views for each user from Settings > Users by looking at the Assigned Views tab at the bottom. See Adding new users to OpsCenter on page 293. See Editing OpsCenter user information on page 293. See Settings > Users > Users options on page 286. Note that both Security Administrator and an Administrator can grant view access to users from the Java View Builder. A Security Administrator or an Administrator can also grant view access to user groups using the Java View Builder. See the Symantec OpsCenter Java View Builder Help for more information. The logged-in user in OpsCenter can view the data for the permitted views only. Only the permitted views appear in the View drop-down list in the View pane. See About the View pane on page 73.

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About what's new in Symantec OpsCenter 7.5

39

You can view the data that is relevant to the selected view. For example for a client view, media details are not valid. Hence if you select a client-type view and click Monitor > Media, you will see the following error message: Data is not applicable for the view that you selected. Click UI access for specific view types for details about the applicable view types. See UI access for specific view types on page 383. Only a Security Administrator or Administrator can create or modify the views. See Creating OpsCenter views on page 388. An OpsCenter user can specify the default view to be shown in OpsCenter from Settings > User Preferences > General. This default view would be used when you log on to OpsCenter. If you modify the view selection after logging on to OpsCenter from the View Pane, then that view selection is used for that session throughout OpsCenter except reporting. You can also specify the default view to be used for report templates. This default view will be used only for the standard reports. A Security Administrator can view information about permitted view for the user from Settings > Users. As this view is restricted to Security Administrator, only the user with Security Administrator will be able to see the views assigned to a specific user. See Settings > Users > Users options on page 286. All the non-admin users get the access to the ALL MASTER SERVERS view only if permitted. A Security Administrator can only grant read access to this view but cannot modify or delete this view. During upgrade, all the existing users are given read access to the ALL MASTER SERVERS view. See About access rights for a view on page 385. The Analyst user role is no longer available. When you upgrade from an earlier version to OpsCenter 7.5, all the existing Analyst users are upgraded to Reporter in OpsCenter 7.5. Because an Analyst has default read permission on all the views, after upgrade all upgraded Analyst users get read permission on all the views in OpsCenter. The Java View Builder is now available for free as part of Symantec OpsCenter. The Java View Builder was earlier available only with the licensed version (Symantec OpsCenter Analytics). All My Views now is the default view for all standard reports. If an OpsCenter user does not have access to any view, the user gets the following message immediately after login:

40

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About what's new in Symantec OpsCenter 7.5

OpsCenter login was successful. You may not be able to proceed further as you do not have access to any View. For more details, contact the administrator.

Consider a scenario where an OpsCenter user has saved a view-based report, and now he no longer has access to the specific view. If the user tries to run this report, the following message is displayed: You might not have access to the View selected for this report. You can however edit the report and then change the View.

OpsCenter 7.5 lets you monitor, manage, report, and alert on a NetBackup 52xx Appliance master server. OpsCenter 7.5 also lets you monitor hardware of multiple NetBackup 52xx Appliances from the OpsCenter console. You can monitor appliance master and media servers and quickly identify any hardware failures in the appliances from the OpsCenter console. To monitor appliance hardware and view hardware summary of the appliance master or media servers, go to Monitor > Appliance Hardware in the OpsCenter console. OpsCenter can monitor appliance 2.0 master servers. OpsCenter 7.5 can also monitor appliance 1.2 and 2.0 media servers that are attached to an appliance 2.0 master server or to a regular NetBackup 7.5 master server. A new data type called Appliance Hardware has been added to collect appliance-specific data. See Monitor > Appliance Hardware > Media Server on page 477. See Monitor > Appliance Hardware > Media Server on page 477. OpsCenter 7.5 can monitor and report on cloud configurations on multiple NetBackup 7.5 master or media servers. To monitor your cloud configuration, go to Monitor > Cloud in the OpsCenter console. See Monitor > Cloud options on page 482. A new report category called Cloud reports has been added to Reports > Report Templates. See About Cloud reports on page 874. The following reports have been added in Cloud reports:
Job Success Rate Data Expiring in Future Cloud Metering Average Data Transfer Rate See Job Success Rate report on page 874. See Data Expiring in Future on page 877.

See Cloud Metering on page 880. See Average Data Transfer Rate on page 882.

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About what's new in Symantec OpsCenter 7.5

41

Cloud Metering Chargeback

See Cloud Metering Chargeback on page 885.

OpsCenter 7.5 now supports the feature of asset tags. This feature deploys ISO 19770-2 standard software asset tags with OpsCenter 7.5 components like Server, Agent, and View Builder. An Asset tag helps to identify if a particular software product or component is deployed on a host. This feature specifies the format and location of the tag that can help any Software Asset Management (SAM) tool to detect and report on Symantec OpsCenter. In OpsCenter 7.5, the following infrastructure components have been upgraded to higher versions:

The Apache Tomcat Web server has been upgraded to version 6.0.33.0 (from version 6.0.29.0) for all platforms. The Web server has been upgraded to address the security vulnerabilities in the earlier version. Starting from OpsCenter 7.5, Java Runtime Environment (JRE) is embedded in the OpsCenter Server package. The JRE component has been upgraded to higher versions based on the respective platforms. The following table shows the new upgraded version of JRE in OpsCenter 7.5 for each platform: Platform
Windows x86, Windows x64, Linux SUSE, Linux RHEL, Solaris SPARC, Solaris x86 HP-UX AIX

Old Version
1.6.0_17

New Version
1.6.0_29

1.6.0.05.00 6.0.0.150

1.6.0.12.00 6.0.0.280

Starting with OpsCenter 7.5, the OpsCenter Product Improvement Program captures installation deployment and product usage information. During the installation, you can choose to participate in the Product Improvement Program and send this information automatically and in a secured manner to Symantec. The information received becomes part of a continuous quality improvement program that helps Symantec understand how customers configure, deploy, and use OpsCenter. This information is then used to help Symantec identify improvements in product features, testing, technical support, and future requirements. To learn more about the Product Improvement Program, refer to the license agreement section 17.19 Privacy; Data Protection. The following describes where to find the license agreement:

42

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About what's new in Symantec OpsCenter 7.5

UNIX

See the file LICENSE in the base directory of the UNIX images on the DVD media. From the DVD media, start the installation wizard (Browser.exe). On the Home page, click Installation. On the Installation page, select OpsCenter Server, OpsCenter Agent, or OpsCenter View Builder Installation. On the Welcome page, click Next to advance to the License Agreement page.

Windows

Native 64-bit OpsCenter Agent software is now available for 64-bit Windows platforms. For OpsCenter 7.5, 32-bit Agent software is not supported on 64-bit Windows systems. The Installer automatically installs 64-bit Agent software on a 64-bit Windows system. If you were using 32-bit Agent software on a 64-bit Windows system and upgrade to OpsCenter 7.5, then 64-bit Agent software is installed when you install OpsCenter 7.5 Agent. You need to perform the following tasks after you upgrade to 64-bit OpsCenter Agent:

If 32-bit Agent software is upgraded to 64-bit, all Agent tuning configurations in OpsCenterAgentService.xml file that you may have made earlier should be performed again manually. The OpsCenterAgentService.xml file is used to specify how much memory is allocated for the Agent process and can be located in <INSTALL_PATH>\agent\bin. If 32-bit Agent software is upgraded to 64-bit software and the Agent is not installed on the OpsCenter Server, any Agent configurations in the log.conf file that you may have made earlier must be performed manually again after you upgrade. Possible Agent configuration in log.conf can be changing the Agent logging level etc. The log.conf file is located in <INSTALL_PATH>\agent. This step must be performed only if OpsCenter Agent is not located on the OpsCenter Server.

In OpsCenter 7.5, a new database user named DBOPERATOR has been added. The DBOPERATOR role is used when you create reports by running SQL-based queries. The SQL-based queries can be created from Reports > Report Templates > Create New Report > Run SQL Query and is available in Symantec OpsCenter Analytics. The DBOPERATOR only has read access to the OpsCenter specific tables, views, procedures, and functions. Hence the DBOPERATOR can only execute Select queries on the OpsCenter-specific tables, views, or stored procedures. The DBOPERATOR can create his own tables, views,

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter components

43

procedures and functions for which he has full permission (like Select, Delete, or Update). If you are upgrading to OpsCenter 7.5, DBOPERATOR has full access on the procedures, functions that are not specific to OpsCenter and were created before 7.5. DBOPERATOR also has full access (except DROP) on the tables and views that are not specific to OpsCenter and were created before 7.5.

The following Client reports can now show data for a specific client view:

Virtual Client Summary Clients not Backed up Client Summary Dashboard BMR Client Configuration Backup Failures

To view report data for a specific client view, edit the report and select a client view from the View filter. Earlier you could only filter the report data for a master server view.

OpsCenter 7.5 can monitor and manage all NetBackup master server versions between 6.5.x and 7.5. OpsCenter 7.5 can now collect data from Symantec Enterprise Vault 9, 10. It can also collect data from PureDisk 6.6.1.2, 6.6.3a. OpsCenter 7.5 does not support Backup Exec 10.x. See OpsCenter compatible backup and archiving products on page 104. You can access OpsCenter 7.5 using Internet Explorer 7.x, 8.x, and 9.0. You can also access OpsCenter 7.5 using Firefox 3.0, 3.5.x, 3.6.x, 9.0.1 and above. See Web browsers supported by OpsCenter 7.5 on page 53.

About OpsCenter components

This section describes the following OpsCenter components:

About the OpsCenter Server

The OpsCenter Server, the core of the architecture, is a Web application that normalizes backup and archive data that it collects from various applications. This normalized data is used for reporting on backup-related information. OpsCenter Server is supported on Windows and UNIX platforms.

44

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter components

Note: You must install OpsCenter Server, Agent, and View Builder of the same versions. For example, Server 7.5 is compatible only with Agent 7.5 and View Builder 7.5. The OpsCenter Server comprises the following components:
OpsCenter database A Sybase SA (SQL Anywhere) database management system containing data related to back up and archive service usage and expenditure, cost metrics and chargeback formulas, and alerts. See About the OpsCenter database on page 45. Symantec Product Authentication Service (AT) A set of common authentication runtime libraries and processes that enable users to log on once to access multiple products. AT validates identities based on external name spaces. Examples of name spaces are Active Directory or other LDAP servers, UNIX identities based on password files, NIS/NIS+ repositories, or any identities that can be authenticated through PAM (Pluggable Authentication Module). It also provides a private user repository for service identities. See About the Symantec Product Authentication Service on page 46. Alert Manager A component that provides policy-based alert management, including notification, custom actions, and SNMP management capabilities. A common Web server (that uses Java Server Pages) and a JRE to serve the OpsCenter console. A common Veritas Licensing Module and API used to add, change, and remove Veritas product license keys. A common component that uses socket passing to reduce the number of ports that are required to be open across a firewall. Symantec Private Branch Exchange uses a paradigm similar to the paradigm of a telephone switchboard. Calls placed to a switchboard are redirected to a known extension. In the PBX exchange, client connections that are sent to the exchanges port are redirected to an extension that is associated with the OpsCenter Server.

Symantec Web Server and Java Runtime Environment (JRE) Veritas Licensing Manager

Symantec Private Branch Exchange

Figure 1-1 shows the architecture of the OpsCenter Server.

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter components

45

Figure 1-1

OpsCenter Server architecture

OpsCenter Web Server View Builder Console OpsCenter Console Symantec Product Authentication Service (AT)

OpsCenter Server
CORBA Service

Alert Service

Reporting Service

View Builder Service

Licensing Service

Security Service

Database Access Layer

Server Communication Layer

OpsCenter Database (Sybase DBMS)

Symantec Backup Exec Symantec PureDisk (Web Services) OpsCenter Agent Symantec Enterprise Vault

NBSL Communication (CORBA)

IBM TSM CLI EMC Legato Networker

Symantec NetBackup

About the OpsCenter database

OpsCenter uses Sybase SQL Anywhere 11 (Sybase 11) database management system as a repository for the backup data or archive data, such as backup service usage and expenditure reports, cost metrics, chargeback formulae, and alerts.

46

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter components

OpsCenter uses a Sybase SQL Anywhere 11 (Sybase 11) database installation that is separate from the NetBackup database. Except for a very small number of system settings, all information that is in the Web user interface is contained in the OpsCenter database, which consists of a single cross-platform database file. The OpsCenter database is completely embedded and requires no additional installation steps. The Sybase database is also self tuning and does not require a database administrator to maintain it. OpsCenter 7.5 does not support upgrades from NOM and VBR.

About the Symantec Product Authentication Service

The OpsCenter Server relies on Symantec Product Authentication Service (AT) for user authentication for connections between, OpsCenter Server, Agent, and Java View Builder. The Symantec Product Authentication Service is referred to as AT. Symantec Product Authentication Service is a shared component and is used to perform the following actions:

Authenticate users to the OpsCenter console based on external authentication systems such as Active Directory, NIS, NIS+, LDAP and even standard UNIX passwords. Provide for a secure transport of data between OpsCenter Agents and the OpsCenter server. Enable trust between OpsCenter and other Symantec products that also use AT.

Note: For more details on AT, refer to the ICS documentation that is shipped with the NetBackup documentation set. When the Symantec Product Authentication Service library authenticates a user for OpsCenter, it returns a credential that OpsCenter passes along when cross-linking to other Symantec products such as NetBackup Operations Manager. The Web credential provides a limited form of user authentication so that products do not prompt the user to log on again.

About the OpsCenter Agent

The OpsCenter Agent collects data from various Symantec and third-party backup and archiving products. These products can reside on the OpsCenter Agent host

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter components

47

or on remote hosts. The OpsCenter Agent relies on the Java Runtime Environment (JRE) to perform its functions. The OpsCenter Agent also requires embedded AT (Symantec Product Authentication Service) to authenticate itself with the OpsCenter Server. Both JRE and AT libraries are installed automatically with the Agent installation. OpsCenter Agent is supported on Windows and Solaris platforms. Note: You must install OpsCenter Server, Agent, and View Builder of the same versions. For example, Server 7.5 is compatible only with Agent 7.5 and View Builder 7.5. OpsCenter formats the information collected from the following target products and displays it through the OpsCenter console:

Symantec NetBackup and NetBackup Appliance Note: For NetBackup 6.5.x master servers, you need to have OpsCenter Agent only if you want to collect image, error log, breakup jobs, capacity license, or traditional license data. For NetBackup 6.0.x master servers, you need to have OpsCenter Agent only if you want to collect image, error log, capacity, and traditional license data. For NetBackup 7.0.x master servers, you need to have OpsCenter Agent only if you want to collect breakup jobs, capacity license, or traditional license data. For NetBackup 7.1.x, 7.5 master servers, you need to have OpsCenter Agent only if you want to collect capacity license or traditional license data. Symantec Backup Exec (Windows only) Symantec Enterprise Vault (Windows only) EMC NetWorker IBM Tivoli Storage Manager

OpsCenter Server collects NetBackup data using NBSL in the following scenarios:

If you want to collect tape drive information, media, policy and schedule, job, or skipped file data from a NetBackup master server of any supported version. If you want to collect any data type from NetBackup 7.5 master servers (except traditional and capacity license data).

The OpsCenter Agent can reside on the same host as the OpsCenter Server, or can be installed on a remote host. All OpsCenter data collectors are configured on

48

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter components

every Agent. Configure and run only these data collectors for the target product on which you want to monitor or report. A number of combinations of OpsCenter Agent and Server installations are possible. For example, you can install an Agent on the OpsCenter Server host and configure the NetBackup data collector to collect data from a remote NetBackup master server. Alternatively, you can install an agent on the NetBackup master server host and configure the NetBackup data collector to collect data from the local NetBackup master server. Note: The EMC NetWorker data collector does not support remote data collection. Therefore, the Agent must be installed on the EMC NetWorker server host. The core of the OpsCenter Agent is a Java virtual machine (JVM) on which you run different data collectors. The OpsCenter Agent communicates with the OpsCenter Server, schedules backup and archive data collection data types, and receives commands through the CORBA API. Because the OpsCenter Server relies on Symantec Product Authentication Service to authenticate connections between the OpsCenter Agent and OpsCenter Server, the Symantec Product Authentication Service client libraries reside on the Agent host. The OpsCenter Agent consists of the scheduler, CORBA Client/Server, and data collectors that collect backup data from all available backup applications. The Scheduler and CORBA form the agent core. These parts of the agent are described in the following topics: See About the scheduler on page 48. See About the CORBA Client/Server on page 49. See About data collectors on page 49.

About the scheduler

The scheduler performs three basic functions for the OpsCenter Agent:

Checks and queues the data collection schedules of all running data collectors. Sends periodic heartbeat messages to the OpsCenter server to ensure the reliability of communications between the Agent and the Server. Monitors modifications that are made to the Agent configuration using the OpsCenter console, which are stored on the OpsCenter Server.

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter components

49

About the CORBA Client/Server

The OpsCenter Agent implements a CORBA server that listens on a configurable port that allows the OpsCenter console to get the runtime status of the Agent. (The default port is 7806.) When you send a request to get the Agent status through the OpsCenter user interface, the OpsCenter Server sends the request to the CORBA Server to receive the requested information. The Agent behaves as a CORBA client when sending data or alerts to the OpsCenter Server.

About data collectors

The data collectors convert the data specific to back up or archive products into a format that can be used by the OpsCenter Server. Each data collector must conform to an interface that defines its interaction with the OpsCenter Agent. The data collector is implemented in a way that suits the underlying backup or archive product. Data collector configurations consist of general parameters, such as log configurations and data collection event definitions, which are shared by all data collectors, and product-specific values. You must configure a data collector on the OpsCenter Agent host that collects data from a backup or archive product host.

About Agent configuration and logging

Agent configuration settings are stored in the OpsCenter database. The OpsCenter Agent also caches the latest version of the configuration settings in the agent.conf file. The agent compares the local agent.conf file with the one stored in the database when the agent process is started. If the agent process has already started, any changes made to the local agent.conf file do not take place until the agent is restarted. Note: You should not modify the agent.conf file. You should change the agent configuration settings using the OpsCenter Agent configuration user interface. Any changes that you make to the Agent configuration settings are reflected after the next heartbeat. A heartbeat is a request that the OpsCenter Agent sends to the OpsCenter Server to check for any new changes in the configuration settings. By default, a heartbeat is sent every minute.

50

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About using the OpsCenter console

Logging for the agent core and individual data collector is administered in the same fashion but written to different log files.

About the OpsCenter Java View Builder

The OpsCenter Java View Builder is an application in which an administrator creates, modifies, and manages access to the OpsCenter views that users see in the console. Note: Java View Builder is now available free with Symantec OpsCenter 7.5. It does not require a license. The Java View Builder relies on the AT client libraries which is installed automatically to communicate properly with the OpsCenter Server. To use the Java View Builder, you need to provide logon credentials as you do while logging onto the OpsCenter console. See Logging on to the Symantec OpsCenter console on page 64. When you run the Java View Builder .exe file, it is directly connected to the OpsCenter Server. The View Builder fetches the existing object view definitions from the OpsCenter database and displays them in the OpsCenter console. The actions that you perform using the View Builder console are then stored in the OpsCenter database. Note: You must install OpsCenter Server, Agent, and View Builder of the same versions. For example, Server 7.5 is compatible only with Agent 7.5 and View Builder 7.5.

About using the OpsCenter console

The following sections describe how to access and use OpsCenter. They include how to log on and log off and how the console works. For information on how to understand and use the various OpsCenter views and related tasks, see the OpsCenter online Help. Context-sensitive help is available for all console views, task dialog boxes, and wizard task screens. To access the online Help, use the Help option in most dialog boxes and wizard screens. You can also use the Help option on the title bar of OpsCenter views. The OpsCenter online documentation assumes that the user has a good working knowledge of NetBackup and its concepts and components.

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About starting the OpsCenter console

51

Portions of the online Help may refer the user to other NetBackup documentation for descriptions of NetBackup fields and components. The following NetBackup documents are referenced in the OpsCenter online Help:

NetBackup Administration Console Help NetBackup Administrators Guide for Windows, Volume I NetBackup Administrators Guide for UNIX and Linux, Volume I NetBackup Troubleshooting Guide for UNIX, Windows, and Linux

About starting the OpsCenter console

The OpsCenter Server is the focal point for centralized management of the NetBackup servers (version 6.5.x and later) in your backup environment. When you install Symantec OpsCenter, you select the computer that serves as the OpsCenter server. When you start the OpsCenter console to manage and monitor your NetBackup environment, you open a connection to the OpsCenter Web interface.

About Web browser considerations

Consider the following recommendations and requirements for the Web browser to be able to access the OpsCenter console. The following requirements and recommendations should be considered for the Web browser:

The OpsCenter console uses pop-up menus. If you use pop-up blockers with your Web browser, some of these menus may not display properly. You must disable pop-up blocking or add the OpsCenter Web address to the list of acceptable sites in your browser. The Web browser should have active scripting (ActiveX and JavaScript) enabled. Ensure that the character encoding for the browser is Unicode (UTF 8) before you access the OpsCenter console. Open the Internet Explorer browser and select View > Encoding > Unicode (UTF-8). Open the Mozilla Firefox browser and select View > Character Encoding > Unicode (UTF 8). On some server systems, you may see a blank page when you try to access OpsCenter using Internet Explorer 7.0 and above versions. This issue is caused due to high security level in server systems. If you encounter this issue, open Internet Explorer and click Tools > Internet Options. Click the Security tab

52

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About starting the OpsCenter console

and select 'Internet' icon as the zone. Click Custom Level.... In the Security Settings dialog box, browse to Miscellaneous > Allow META REFRESH and select Enable. Click Yes to confirm that you want to change the security settings for the zone, and then click OK. Note: In case you do not want to change your security settings, you must manually append /opscenter to the OpsCenter URL. This action must be taken every time you access OpsCenter and face this issue. On some server-class systems, an enhanced security configuration can cause some pages to not display properly in Internet Explorer. If you encounter this issue, add the OpsCenter URL to the Trusted-sites list and lower the security setting. To resolve this issue, open Internet Explorer and select Tools > Internet Options > Security to configure the Trusted-sites list and lower the security level. If you use Internet Explorer 8.0 or 9.0 to access the OpsCenter console, security certificate warnings appear when you access a pop-up menu. Select Continue to this website (not recommended) to open the pop-up menu. Once you select this option, the security certificate warnings do not appear on the pop-up menus. If you use Internet Explorer 9.0 to access the OpsCenter console, you may not be able to download or view reports, jobs, or audit trails data when you export it from OpsCenter. More details on how to resolve this issue are available. See Exporting OpsCenter reports or data with IE 9.0 on page 57. A known issue in Firefox 8.x causes the downloaded attachments to be named as ExportReportAction.do or some other file name and type which cannot be opened. This issue affects you if you use Firefox 8.x to access the OpsCenter console and generally occurs when you export a report or export job and audit logs. Because of the Firefox 8.x issue, when you export an OpsCenter report for instance, the report is saved by the name ExportReportAction.do and does not open if you try to open it. To resolve this issue, Symantec recommends that you upgrade to Firefox 9.0. In case you want to continue using Firefox 8.x, when you export a report or job logs using Firefox 8.x and are prompted to open or save the exported file, click Save File. In the Enter name of file to save to dialog box, select the Save as type as All Files and then rename the file with the proper extension (like replace the default name ExportReportAction.do with filecount.pdf) and click Save. You can then open this report.

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About starting the OpsCenter console

53

Note: If you do not see Enter name of file to save to dialog box, click Firefox > Options > General and check Always ask me where to save files option. The Web browser cache must be cleared.

Web browsers supported by OpsCenter 7.5

The OpsCenter user interface (the OpsCenter console) is supported with the following Web browsers. Table 1-1 lists the Web browsers that OpsCenter supports. Table 1-1 Web browser
Microsoft Internet Explorer

Web browsers supported by OpsCenter 7.5 Supported Versions

7.x, 8.x, 9.0

Notes
IE 7.0 and later versions may display a security certificate warning page when you access OpsCenter. See Disabling security certificate warnings and HTTPS redirection in browsers on page 55. You may not be able to view reports, jobs, or audit data when you export these from IE 9.0. Alternatively, IE 9.0 may show "Internet Explorer Cannot Download" error when you export reports, jobs, or audit data from OpsCenter. See Exporting OpsCenter reports or data with IE 9.0 on page 57.

Note: OpsCenter 7.5 does

not support IE 6.x.

Mozilla Firefox

3.0, 3.5.x, 3.6.x, 9.0.1 and above

Note: OpsCenter 7.5 does

not support Firefox 4.0.

Mozilla Firefox may display an Untrusted Connection page when you access OpsCenter. See Disabling the Untrusted Connection page in Mozilla Firefox on page 54.

About accessing the OpsCenter console

Before accessing the OpsCenter console, review the following section thoroughly.

54

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About starting the OpsCenter console

See About Web browser considerations on page 51. On a system that has a network connection to the OpsCenter server, start a Web browser. In the Web browser address bar, enter the following: http://host.domain/opscenter
host.domain is the fully qualified domain name of the OpsCenter server and can

also be an IP address. Note: By default, OpsCenter tries to run on port 80 (HTTP). If port 80 is not available, OpsCenter can use a different port. To know the HTTP and HTTPS port that OpsCenter uses, run the configurePorts utility. Run INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\gui\bin\goodies\configurePorts.bat -status on Windows hosts or
<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterWebGUI/bin/goodies/configurePorts.sh -status on UNIX hosts. For example, if OpsCenter uses HTTP port 8181, then use

http://host.domain:8181/opscenter. You can also use the URL that is presented at the end of the OpsCenter server installation to access OpsCenter. You must supply logon credentials on the OpsCenter logon screen. For an administrator initial logon, the user name is admin and the password is password or any custom password that you chose during the installation. Select OpsCenterUsers(vx) from the Domain drop-down list and click Log On. See Logging on to the Symantec OpsCenter console on page 64.

Disabling the Untrusted Connection page in Mozilla Firefox

When you access OpsCenter in Mozilla Firefox, you may see the following Untrusted Connection page.
-------------------------------------------------------------This Connection is Untrusted You have asked Firefox to connect securely to <OpsCenterhost.domain>, but we can't confirm that your connection is secure. Normally, when you try to connect securely, sites will present trusted identification to prove that you are going to the right place. However, this site's identity can't be verified.

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About starting the OpsCenter console

55

What Should I do? If you usually connect to this site without problems, this error could mean that someone is trying to impersonate the site, and you shouldn't continue. Technical Details I Understand the Risks --------------------------------------------------------------

Your choice is either to click Get me out of here, which takes you to the Mozilla Firefox start page, or to click Add Exception (when you expand the I Understand the Risks section) and permanently disable the page. To disable the Untrusted Connection page in Mozilla Firefox

1 2 3 4 5

On the Untrusted Connection page, expand I Understand the Risks section and click Add Exception. In the Add Security Exception dialog box, click Get Certificate. To make this exception permanent, make sure that the Permanently store this exception option is checked. This option is checked by default. Click Confirm Security Exception. Restart your browser for the changes to take effect.

Disabling security certificate warnings and HTTPS redirection in browsers

When you log on to the OpsCenter console, you may see security certificate warnings on Mozilla Firefox and Internet Explorer browsers. When you access OpsCenter using http://<host.domain>/opscenter, you are automatically redirected to HTTPS (hypertext transfer protocol secure) which is a secure protocol and requires a certificate. If you do not want to use HTTPS, you can disable the security certificate warnings for the OpsCenter console. However, if you disable the automatic redirection to HTTPS, you lose the encryption and secure identification of the server that HTTPS provides.

56

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About starting the OpsCenter console

To disable security certificate warnings and HTTPS redirection in browsers

Open the web.xml configuration file in a text editor from the following locations:
For Windows: For UNIX: INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\gui\webserver\conf\web.xml <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterGUI/webserver/conf/web.xml

Note: Before you proceed, take a backup of the web.xml file.

In the web.xml file, locate the security constraint string (located towards the end of the file):
<security-constraint> <display-name>Security Constraint</display-name> <web-resource-collection> <web-resource-name>Protected Area</web-resource-name> <url-pattern>/*</url-pattern> </web-resource-collection> <user-data-constraint> transport-guarantee>CONFIDENTIAL</transport-guarantee> </user-data-constraint>

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About starting the OpsCenter console

57

Comment this portion from the web.xml file by adding <!-- in the beginning and --> in the end. You can also add your comments inside. For example:
<!-- Commenting to disable https <security-constraint> <display-name>Security Constraint</display-name> <web-resource-collection> <web-resource-name>Protected Area</web-resource-name> <url-pattern>/*</url-pattern> </web-resource-collection> <user-data-constraint> <transport-guarantee>CONFIDENTIAL</transport-guarantee> </user-data-constraint> Comments End -->

Stop the OpsCenter Web interface service on Windows. Select Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services and restart (stop and then start) the Symantec OpsCenter Web Server Service.

Restart the OpsCenter Web interface service on UNIX. Enter the following command:
Stop service Start service <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterGUI/bin/stopGUI <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterGUI/bin/startGUI

Exporting OpsCenter reports or data with IE 9.0

When you are using IE 9.0, you may not be able to download or view reports, audit trails, or jobs data when you export them from OpsCenter on HTTPS. This problem occurs if the Do not save encrypted pages to disk option in Internet Explorer is checked. This issue is explained in detail on the following Web site:

58

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About starting the OpsCenter console

http://support.microsoft.com/kb/2549423 File downloads in Internet Explorer require a cache or temporary file to succeed. In IE9, if the file is delivered over HTTPS with any response headers set to prevent caching and the Do not save encrypted pages to disk option is set, then a cache file is not created. Therefore, the download fails. Use any one of the following procedures to resolve this issue. To uncheck encrupted pages to disk

1 2

Open Internet Explorer. Go to Tools > Internet Options > Advanced. Uncheck Do not save encrypted pages to disk option.

To bypass the cache check in IE 9

1 2

Start the Registry Editor. For a per-user setting, locate the following registry key: HKEY_CURRENT_USER\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Internet Settings For a per-computer setting, locate the following registry key: HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Internet Settings

On the Edit menu, click Add Value and add the following value: "BypassSSLNoCacheCheck"=Dword:00000001

Quit Registry Editor.

Possible OpsCenter console access issues

Table 1-2 describes possible OpsCenter console access issues and their solution.

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About starting the OpsCenter console

59

Table 1-2 Issue and Cause

OpsCenter console access issues, causes, and solution Solution

You cannot connect to the Web interface. Your To connect to the Web interface Web browser displays a "page cannot be 1 Verify that the Symantec OpsCenter Web server Service is displayed" or "connection was running. refused."message. You can check the status of all OpsCenter processes on UNIX This issue happens when the OpsCenter Web by entering the following command: interface (the OpsCenter console) is not <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin.sh running or is inaccessible on the network. monitor

Verify that a Web browser on the OpsCenter server can connect to the OpsCenter console by using the following address: http://localhost:<HTTP port number>/opscenter

Note: To know the HTTP and HTTPS port that OpsCenter uses,
run the configurePorts utility. Run INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\gui\bin\goodies\configurePorts.bat -status on Windows hosts or <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterWebGUI/bin/goodies/configurePorts.sh -status on UNIX hosts.

60

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About starting the OpsCenter console

Table 1-2 Issue and Cause

OpsCenter console access issues, causes, and solution (continued) Solution To resolve an HTTP STATUS 404 error on Windows 1
Locate the opscenter.war file in the following directory to verify that the OpsCenter application is installed: INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\gui\webserver\webapps

The OpsCenter Web interface is running, but the OpsCenter console is not available. Your Web browser displays an HTTP STATUS 404 error. This issue happens when the OpsCenter console application is not loaded.

2 3

Verify that all the OpsCenter server services are running. Start all the OpsCenter Server services by using the following command: INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsadmin.bat start

To resolve an HTTP STATUS 404 error on UNIX: 1

Locate the opscenter.war file in the following directory to verify that the OpsCenter application is installed: <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterGUI

To verify that all OpsCenter Server processes are running, use the following command: <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin monitor

Start all the OpsCenter Server processes by using the following commands: <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin.sh start

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About starting the OpsCenter console

61

Table 1-2 Issue and Cause

OpsCenter console access issues, causes, and solution (continued) Solution

You see a blank page when you try to access To resolve blank page issues when using Internet Explorer 7.0 OpsCenter using Internet Explorer 7.0 and later and later versions. 1 Open Internet Explorer . On the Tools menu, click Internet Options.

2 3 4 5

Click the Security tab. Under Select a Web content zone to specify its security settings, click the Internet, icon and then click Custom Level. In the Security Settings dialog box, browse to Miscellaneous > Allow META REFRESH and select Enable. Click Yes to confirm that you want to change the security settings for the zone, and then click OK.

Note: If you do not want to change your security settings, you must
manually append /opscenter to the OpsCenter URL. Without the changes to the security settings, the issue recurs every time that you accessOpsCenter, and you must add /opscenter to the URL.

62

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About starting the OpsCenter console

Table 1-2 Issue and Cause

You get the following error when you access OpsCenter by clicking Start > Programs > Symantec OpsCenter > WebUI Login on Windows:

OpsCenter console access issues, causes, and solution (continued) Solution

Windows cannot find https://<MACHINE_NAME>:<PORT_NUMBER>/opscenter. Make sure you typed the name correctly, and then try again. To search for a file, click the Start button and then click Search.

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About starting the OpsCenter console

63

Table 1-2 Issue and Cause

OpsCenter console access issues, causes, and solution (continued) Solution To fix the WebUI Login error for Windows XP and Windows 2000 1 2 3 4 5 6
Open Windows Explorer (or My Computer). Go to Tools > Folder Options > File Types. Select Extension: (NONE) and File Type: URL:HyperText Transfer Protocol Click Advanced. In the Edit File Type window, select Open and click Edit. Uncheck Use DDE (the dialog should then hide the lower part). Click OK for that dialog and the next one (afterwards, the Use DDE box is still checked but the DDE Message box will be cleared). Repeat for Extension: (NONE) File Type: URL:HyperText Transfer Protocol with Privacy (and any other protocols you want to fix). Repeat for Extension: (NONE) File Type: Firefox URL. Repeat for Extension: HTM (or HTML) File Type: Firefox Document.

8 9

Note that the File Types user interface that allows you to uncheck the Use DDE option, as described above, is not available in Windows Vista. You need to edit the registry to remove the ddeexec key. You need to manually edit the registry in Windows Vista or in cases where the File Types listing is missing certain entries such as URL:HyperText Transfer Protocol (HTTP) and URL:HyperText Transfer Protocol with Privacy (HTTPS).

Note: Editing the registry incorrectly can damage your system. Do

not attempt these steps if you are inexperienced or uncomfortable using the Registry Editor. Use the following resolution on Windows Vista or in cases where the File Types listing is missing certain entries such as URL:HyperText Transfer Protocol (HTTP) and URL:HyperText Transfer Protocol with Privacy (HTTPS):

1 2 3

Go to Start > Run, then type regedit and click OK. Use the directory tree hierarchy to navigate to HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT\HTTP\shell\open\ddeexec. Delete the ddeexec registry key.

64

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About starting the OpsCenter console

Table 1-2 Issue and Cause

OpsCenter console access issues, causes, and solution (continued) Solution 4

Repeat for HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT\HTTPS\shell\open\ddeexec (and any other protocols you want to fix). Repeat for HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT\FirefoxURL\shell\open\ddeexec. Repeat for HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT\FirefoxHTML\shell\open\ddeexec.

5 6

Logging on to the Symantec OpsCenter console

You must supply logon credentials on the OpsCenter logon screen.

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About starting the OpsCenter console

65

To log on to the Symantec OpsCenter console

Enter a user name and password, and select a domain from the Domain drop-down list. For administrator initial logon, the user name is admin and the password is password or any custom password that you chose during the installation. Select OpsCenterUsers(vx) from the Domain drop-down list. The domains that appear in the Domain drop-down list include the OpsCenterUsers(vx) domain, domains that are migrated if you upgraded to OpsCenter from NOM or VBR, and domains of the users that are added to the OpsCenter console. After the initial log on, change the user name and password. To change existing passwords, use Settings > User Preferences > My Profile view in the OpsCenter console. See Changing your OpsCenter password on page 272.

Click Log On. Initially, a monitoring overview of the NetBackup master servers appears. When you log off from the console, OpsCenter saves your settings and preferences and uses these settings when you restart the console again. Note: The first time you log on, OpsCenter uses the default language of the Web browser. If OpsCenter does not support this language, it uses English. After initial logon, you can specify a default language or locale from Settings > User Preferences > General. If you do not set a default, OpsCenter uses the Web browser language (or English). See Setting user preferences on page 268.

Possible OpsCenter console logon issues

Table 1-3 describes the issues you may find when you log on to the console and their solution.

66

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About starting the OpsCenter console

Table 1-3 Issue

OpsCenter console logon issues Cause

The Symantec Product Authentication Service cannot validate the user name and password for the selected domain. The user name and domain are valid, but the user was not added to the list of users for OpsCenter.

Solution
Enter a valid user name, password, and domain. Ensure that the Symantec Product Authentication Service is started and running properly. You can start the authentication service by running net start vrtsat' on Windows and <INSTALL_PATH>/VRTSat/bin/vxatd on UNIX.

You have a user authentication error. The logon screen displays the message "User authentication failed. Please enter valid user name and password. If problem persists contact your system administrator."

The entered user name is not a registered OpsCenter user. The logon screen displays the message "This user is not authorized to use OpsCenter. Please contact the OpsCenter Administrator for adding this user."

Log on as the OpsCenter admin user and add the user to the list of OpsCenter users.

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About starting the OpsCenter console

67

Table 1-3 Issue

OpsCenter console logon issues (continued) Cause

This issue may occur due to any of the following reasons: The OpsCenter server is not running. If PBX server goes down or restarts when OpsCenter services were running.

Solution
Start the Symantec OpsCenter Server Service and verify that it is running properly. See 'Controlling OpsCenter services and processes' section in the Administration chapter of the Symantec OpsCenter Administrator's Guide. Check your network configuration. Verify that the hosts file has the correct IP address to host name mapping. The hosts file is located in C:\WINDOWS\system32\drivers\etc directory on Windows. If PBX server gets restarted while OpsCenter services were running, you must restart all OpsCenter services. Use the following procedure to restart all OpsCenter services. First stop all Symantec OpsCenter server services, by using the following command for Windows and UNIX: INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsadmin.bat stop <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin.sh stop Start all Symantec OpsCenter server services, use the following command for Windows and UNIX: INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsadmin.bat start <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin.sh start

You cannot connect to the OpsCenter server. The logon screen displays the message "Error occurred while connecting to the OpsCenter Server. Please ensure that the server is running."

Either the user name or password or both have not been entered. The logon screen displays the message "Please enter valid user name and password. "

Username Enter a valid user name and password. and/or password has not been specified. Authentication Verify that the Symantec Product Authentication service is Service is running. You can start the authentication down service by running net start vrtsat on Windows or <INSTALL_PATH>/VRTSat/bin/vxatd on UNIX.

Authentication service is down "Error occurred while connecting to the Symantec Product Authentication Service (AT). Please ensure that the AT service is running."

68

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About starting the OpsCenter console

Logging out of the OpsCenter console

When you log out from the console, OpsCenter saves most of the settings and changes you make in an OpsCenter session. To log out from Symantec OpsCenter

Click Logout located on the right side of the title bar.

Configuring the OpsCenter session timeout interval

When the timeout interval is left at its default value, users are automatically logged out of the OpsCenter console when a session is left inactive for 30 minutes. However, the session timeout interval can be reconfigured. To configure the session timeout interval

Open the web.xml configuration file in a text editor from the following locations:
For Windows: For UNIX: INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\gui\webserver\conf\web.xml <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterGUI/webserver/conf/web.xml

In the web.xml file, locate the session-timeout parameter:

<session-config> <session-timeout>30</session-timeout> </session-config>

Change the session timeout parameter value to the desired length by changing the number that is encapsulated by the XML tags for session-timeout (in the example above, change 30 to the desired value). This value is set in minutes.

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About starting the OpsCenter console

69

Stop the OpsCenter services. Enter the following command:

Windows UNIX INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsadmin.bat stop <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin.sh stop

Restart the OpsCenter services. Enter the following command:

Windows UNIX INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsadmin.bat start <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin.sh start

Possible OpsCenter console issues

Table 1-4 describes the issues you may find when you use the console. Table 1-4 Issue
Your OpsCenter console session times out. The logon screen appears when you try to change views or refresh the current view.

Issues when you use OpsCenter console Cause

After 30 minutes of inactivity, the OpsCenter user automatically logs out of the console. Any attempt to use OpsCenter, displays the OpsCenter logon screen.

Solution
Log on again. After successful logon, you then return to the OpsCenter view that you last visited. You can also configure the session timeout interval. See Configuring the OpsCenter session timeout interval on page 68.

An internal error occurs in the This error results from an internal OpsCenter console. An exception error issue in the OpsCenter console message appears in the OpsCenter application. console. You receive the message "An unknown error has occurred. Click here to log on and retry. "

Click the link in the message and try to logon again.

You receive the message "Active Active scripting is disabled in the Web Enable active scripting in the Web scripting is required to use this browser. browser. You must enable it to use application. Enable active scripting in OpsCenter. the browser."

70

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter console components

About OpsCenter console components

This section provides information on the panes and navigation features available in the OpsCenter console. You can view the console by using a Web browser. When you log on initially, the Monitor > Overview view appears. The following is an example view that shows the OpsCenter console components. Figure 1-2 OpsCenter console components
Tabs and subtabs Content pane List View Title bar Change Table links Settings icon

View Pane Symantec ThreatCon pane Minimize icons Task Pane (whole left pane) Quick links Alert Summary Pane Maximize icon Details pane Minimize icon Table page controls

Table 1-5 lists the topics that describe the main elements of the console in greater detail. Table 1-5 Topic Description Topics covered in this section Link

Use the links available from the title bar, such as See About using the links on the title bar on page 71. Logout and Help. Overview about the tabs and subtabs available in See About using tabs and subtabs on page 72. the console.

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter console components

71

Table 1-5 Topic Description

Topics covered in this section (continued) Link

Control the frequency that the OpsCenter console See About refreshing the OpsCenter console on page 73. refreshes to reflect changes in your backup environment. Overview about the Task pane. Overview about the View pane. Overview about quick links in the task panes. See Changing the Task pane on page 73. See About the View pane on page 73. See Using the quick links in the Task pane on page 78.

Use the pane that displays a quick visual summary See Viewing alerts from the Alert Summary pane on page 79. of any current alerts. Use the main data display pane that OpsCenter uses. See Sizing the Content pane on page 79.

Use the status bar at the bottom of the OpsCenter See About the OpsCenter status bar on page 82. console. Use the visual keys that OpsCenter uses to help you understand displayed information. Use tables, select rows, and use filters. See Status icons and colors in the console on page 82.

See About using tables on page 83.

About using the links on the title bar

On the title bar of the OpsCenter console, the Logged in as value shows the user name that is logged on to the OpsCenter server. To adjust the screen space that is used by the tabs and subtabs, click the Customize Tabs drop-down list. You can select the following options:
Small Only the selected tab and subtab are shown in a single row. To display the remaining tabs in a drop-down list, click the arrow next to the selected tab. To display the remaining subtabs in a drop-down list, click the arrow next to the selected subtab. The tabs and subtabs appear in two separate rows. The tabs do not have any icons above them. The tabs and subtabs appear in two separate rows. The tabs have icons placed above them.

Medium

Large

Use the links available in the title bar at the top of the console for the following tasks:

72

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter console components

To access documentation, product information, How To links, support links, and other information click Tools. To see OpsCenter product version and copyright information, click About. To access Symantec OpsCenter help, click Help. Context-sensitive help for all views, wizards, and dialog boxes is available. More information about online Help is available. See About OpsCenter documentation on page 91. To disconnect from the OpsCenter server to end your session, click Logout. See Logging out of the OpsCenter console on page 68.

About using tabs and subtabs

Table 1-6 describes the main tabs that provide access to the major areas of the OpsCenter console. Table 1-6 Tab
Monitor

Tabs and subtabs in the OpsCenter console Description

From this tab, you can monitor the status of NetBackup or NetBackup Appliance jobs, services, policies, media, devices, and hosts. You can also display and respond to any OpsCenter alerts. From this tab, you can manage alert policies, NetBackup job policies, storage units, and devices. You can also restore data. From this tab, you can view standard OpsCenter reports, create and run custom reports, and schedule reports.

Manage

Reports

Note: You can use custom report functionality only with a

licensed OpsCenter version (OpsCenter Analytics). Settings From this tab, you can customize the OpsCenter server, add OpsCenter users, define user preferences, add master servers or appliance master servers, add and configure views, set up email and SNMP recipients, view chargeback settings, and so on.

Under each main tab is a series of subtabs. The contents of these subtabs vary depending on the current view and represent the views accessible from each main tab. For example, the Monitor tab includes subtabs such as Overview, Jobs, Services, and Policies.

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter console components

73

Your selection on the View pane determines what data is shown in OpsCenter views. More information about the View pane is available. See About the View pane on page 73.

About refreshing the OpsCenter console

As you use Symantec OpsCenter, the status of your backup environment is likely to change. Devices go online and offline, OpsCenter generates alerts, media usage fluctuates, and so on. You can control when the information in the console refreshes to reflect the changes in your backup environment. You can change the refresh setting from Settings > User Preferences > General view in the OpsCenter console. See Setting user preferences on page 268.

Changing the Task pane

In many views in the console, a Task pane is available. The Task pane is located on the left side of the console and contains the View pane, the Symantec ThreatCon pane, and Quick Links at the bottom. To change the Task pane

1 2 3

To enlarge the Task pane, click the Collapse Task Panel icon between the Task pane and the Content pane. To show all panes after you enlarged the Task pane, click the Collapse Task Panel icon again. To resize the Task pane, drag the line separating the Task pane and the Content pane. The minimize or maximize settings are applicable only for the current session. You cannot resize the Task pane from the Monitor > Overview page.

About the View pane

The View pane is a key navigation and configuration tool in Symantec OpsCenter. This pane lets you select the views to control the scope of your console views. From OpsCenter 7.5, the View pane lists only the views that you are permitted to access.

74

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter console components

Using OpsCenter views, you can view NetBackup information for your entire management domain (with the ALL MASTER SERVERS view), a specific view type, an individual server, or NetBackup appliances. A Security Administrator or an Administrator can create views from Settings > Views or by using the Java View Builder. For example, an admin can create a view named Geography to display details about master servers in a particular region, such as Europe. An admin can also create client or policy views. More information about how to create views from Settings > Views is available. See About OpsCenter views on page 379. See the online Java View Builder Help for more information about creating views using Java View Builder. The View pane has the following features:

It is available in any OpsCenter view where you can change the view. It uses unique icons and colors to convey operational states. For example, an icon with a red-dashed-circle represents a managed server that is Not Connected. Similarly, a disabled master server is shown as a gray-colored icon. See Status icons and colors in the console on page 82. It lets you access and change the views that you monitor or manage. As you navigate within the OpsCenter console, your view selection applies for any subsequent screens until you select a different view. The View pane is one method that you can use to determine the scope of information that you view. See About making multiple or single-click selections in the View pane on page 75. See About selecting views from the View pane when the multiple selection option is checked on page 77.

Figure 1-3 shows a sample View pane in which ALL MASTER SERVERS view is selected.

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter console components

75

Figure 1-3

View pane description

About making multiple or single-click selections in the View pane

You can make either multiple selections or single-click selections in the View pane. The Allow Multiple Selection In View Pane option governs how you can make selections in the View pane. To see the Allow Multiple Selection In View pane option, click Settings > User Preferences > General in the OpsCenter console. You can make selections in the View pane in the following ways, based on whether you check or uncheck the multiple selection option:
Check Allow Multiple Selection In View Pane option With the multiple-selection option checked, you can select multiple nodes or view objects from the View pane. The multiple-selection option is checked by default. You also see a check box next to each master server or node in the View pane. To view data for multiple master servers and nodes, check the corresponding check boxes and click Apply Selection.

76

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter console components

Uncheck Allow Multiple Selection In View Pane option

With the multiple-selection option unchecked, you can only select a single node or view object from the View pane. (The NetBackup Operations Manager (NOM) used this method.) Each node or a view object is a link. You can click a node or a view object to view data for the respective node or view object. For example, you can click a master server in the View pane to view data for the specific master server.

Note: When you uncheck the multiple-selection option, a

Group Component Summary table is displayed when you click Monitor > Jobs > Summary View. See About the Group Component Summary table on page 422.

Figure 1-4 shows how you can check the Allow Multiple Selection In View Pane option and make multiple selections. The Allow Multiple Selection in View Pane option is checked by default. Figure 1-4 Making multiple selections in the View pane

You can select multiple master servers by selecting the check-box

Figure 1-5 shows how you can uncheck the Allow Multiple Selection in View Pane option and make single-click selections.

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter console components

77

Figure 1-5

Making single-click selections in the View pane

You can select only one master server. Each master server is a link

About selecting views from the View pane when the multiple selection option is checked
From the View pane, you can select a view and a node that contains a group of master servers and also specific objects. For example, you can select the default view, ALL MASTER SERVERS. When you select a view such asALL MASTER SERVERS or a node that contains a group of master servers, all the master servers that are currently in the view or node are automatically selected. The master servers that you may add later to this view or node are also automatically selected. You also have the option to select only specific objects of a particular view or node. For example, you may select only specific master servers under the default view ALL MASTER SERVERS. To select a specific master server, first deselect the view or node that contains the master server and then select the master server. You may also deselect a specific master server from a view by selecting the view and then deselecting the specific master server. Consider a scenario in which server A and server B exist in a particular view, such as ALL MASTER SERVERS. Suppose that you select the ALL MASTER SERVERS view and then specifically deselect server B. Then, you select a node that also contains server B. In this case, even though server B is part of the selected view or node, it is not considered. It is not considered because you specifically excluded server B from the ALL MASTER SERVER view. When you specifically deselect a master server from a view, and that master server is also part of another selected view, the exclusion (the deselection) has a higher priority. For this reason, it is recommended that you do not repeat a master server across groups.

78

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter console components

About the Symantec ThreatCon pane

The Symantec ThreatCon pane shows the current ThreatCon level in the OpsCenter console. This level is the same as the ThreatCon level which is shown on the following Web site: http://www.symantec.com/security_response/threatcon The Symantec ThreatCon pane is available under most views in the OpsCenter console on the left side. Figure 1-6 shows the Symantec ThreatCon pane in the OpsCenter console. Figure 1-6 Symantec ThreatCon pane in the OpsCenter console

Click the More Info link in the Symantec ThreatCon pane to see details about the ThreatCon level. OpsCenter periodically polls the ThreatCon Web service and updates the data that is shown in the Symantec ThreatCon pane. You can configure the polling interval. The Symantec ThreatCon feature is enabled by default, but you can disable it (or turn it on). See Configuring Symantec ThreatCon feature in OpsCenter on page 276.

Using the quick links in the Task pane

In many views in the console, a Task pane is available. At the bottom of the Task pane, there are quick links to the most common tasks in OpsCenter. Table 1-7 shows the quick links available in OpsCenter and where they take you when you click them. Table 1-7 Quick Link Quick links and their destinations Destination

Restore Files and Directories Manage > Restore or Oracle Cloning Alert Policies Manage > Alert Policies

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter console components

79

Table 1-7 Quick Link

Quick links and their destinations (continued) Destination

Settings > Configuration > NetBackup Settings > Views Settings > Users > Users Monitor > Cloud Monitor > Appliance Hardware

NetBackup Data Collection Views Users Cloud Appliance Hardware

To use the quick links in the Task pane

Click the minimize icon (the down arrow) located on top of the quick links. Only the icons for quick link tasks are visible when the quick links are minimized. Click the maximize icon (the up arrow) again to view the quick links. Note: The quick links are shown by default in a maximized state. The minimize or maximize settings are applicable only for the current session.

Viewing alerts from the Alert Summary pane

The Alert Summary pane provides a visual summary of the critical, major, warning, and informational alerts for the NetBackup master servers to which you are connected. This pane is available in the Monitor view and Manage view of the OpsCenter console. The Alert Summary pane displays all the alerts in the OpsCenter database. To view alerts from the Alert Summary pane

Click any of the four available alert counts. A filtered detail view for that alert category appears. This view is a shortcut to the Monitor > Alerts view.

Sizing the Content pane

When you initially log on to Symantec OpsCenter, the content pane displays a summary of information for all master servers in the OpsCenter console.

80

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter console components

Initially, a monitoring overview appears (Monitor > Overview). Information in the content pane varies and is context-sensitive to current selections in the View pane, the tabs and subtabs, and the time frame. To size the Content pane

1 2 3

To enlarge the Content pane, click the Collapse Task Panel icon between the Task pane and the Content pane. To show all panes after you enlarged the Content pane, click the Collapse Task Panel icon again. To resize the Content pane, drag the line separating the Task pane and the Content pane. The minimize or maximize settings are applicable only for the current session. Note: You cannot resize the Content pane from Monitor > Overview page.

Using the List, Summary, Hierarchical, and Details views

Most of the OpsCenter Monitor views and Manage views present information in three main viewing modes: List View, Summary View, and Hierarchical View. You can view information about your NetBackup environment in any of the available views. Use the drop-down list on the top-right corner of the OpsCenter console to switch these views. Note: Not all viewing modes are available for all Monitor views and Manage views. If the viewing modes are available, the drop-down list is displayed.

List View

Drop-down list

The Summary View presents information in a graphical format as pie charts. The List View and Hierarchical View present information in tabular formats. For example, you can show any of the following views on the Monitor > Jobs page:

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter console components

81

To view details about all NetBackup jobs for a master server in a tabular format, clickList View To view a summary of all NetBackup jobs for a master server in the form of pie charts, click Summary View. To view details about all NetBackup jobs and relationships between jobs for a master server in a tabular format, click Hierarchical View.

A Details view is available on some of the Monitor views, Manage views, and Settings views. The following figure shows the Details view.

Maximize icon

Minimize icon

Tabs on the Details View

Details View

Contents of all the columns for the specific job ID is displayed in the Details View.

The Details view presents detailed information about an entity and shows contents of all the tabular columns for the specific entity. The view presents details on the displayed information and on the available information for the specific entity. For example, the Details view on the Monitor > Jobs page (List View) shows detailed information about a specific job ID. Information in the Details view can be viewed from tabs available in the view.

82

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter console components

To change the Details view

1 2

To minimize the Details view, click the icon (the down arrow) between the Details view and the upper part of the Content pane. To maximize the Details view, click the icon (the up arrow) between the Details view and the upper part of the Content pane. The minimize or maximize settings are applicable only for the current session.

To resize the Details view, drag the line separating the upper part of the Content pane and Details view.

About the OpsCenter status bar

The status bar at the bottom of the OpsCenter console shows a Page generated value. The Page generated value shows the date and time on the OpsCenter server to which you logged on. The date and time are adjusted to match your time zone. This value updates when the view changes or refreshes. More information on how to specify your time zone is available. See Setting user preferences on page 268.

Status icons and colors in the console

To help you understand the information it presents, OpsCenter uses status icons and color. Tool tips provide brief descriptions of the tool and the status icons that appear in OpsCenter views. A tool tip appears when you place the mouse over an icon. When OpsCenter detects a condition for a managed NetBackup server, job, drive, or drive path, you see a status icon. The icons use colors to represent critical, warning, or informational conditions. Together, the icons and colors let you quickly determine the status of a particular area in your NetBackup environment. For example, the Monitor > Jobs view contains green icons for running jobs. Unique icons appear in the drive details view for shared drives available with the NetBackup Shared Storage Option (SSO). These icons represent the shared drives that are operating on all servers that share the drive. Icons also appear for shared drives where the drive status is mixed (operating on some servers and not operating on other servers that share the drive). Table 1-8 lists the icons that are used for managed NetBackup master servers in the View pane.

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter console components

83

Table 1-8 Icon

Icons used for managed master servers Description

A normal, blue-gray server icon means that the managed server is connected. A server icon that has a red circle with a line drawn through it means that the connection to the managed server is lost. OpsCenter tries to connect again after 10 minutes. A managed server icon with a line through it denotes that the server is partially connected. For a partially connected master server, OpsCenter tries to reconnect to NBSL every 10 minutes in order to collect data for the data types that have a Failed collection status. A gray server icon means that data collection for the managed server was disabled by the user. A normal dark blue server icon means that the NetBackup appliance is connected.

OpsCenter uses the following colors in the interface:

Red indicates a critical condition that may cause the system to be unable to perform an important function. Investigate critical conditions immediately. Green indicates a normal condition, result, or operation. Blue-gray generally indicate conditions such as enabled or assigned, while gray indicates conditions such as disabled or unassigned.

About using tables

OpsCenter collects information about aspects of your NetBackup environment and presents much of this information in tables. This section describes how to change the tables to display the information you want to see. The following is a sample table showing task icons. Figure 1-7 shows the task options for tables.

84

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter console components

Figure 1-7
Create, Edit, and Delete filter icons

Sample screen with task options for tables

Table Settings icon

Table page controls

Customizing tables for your needs

You can customize the tables in the following manner. You can perform the following operations to a table:
Add or remove columns See Specifying which columns appear in a table on page 85.

Rearrange the order of the columns for your See Moving a column on page 85. individual requirements Choose the number of rows and columns to See Choosing the number of table rows that display appear per page on page 85. Sort columns in ascending or descending order Change the widths of columns See Sorting the contents of a table column on page 86. See Changing the width of a column on page 86. See Accessing multiple pages of data in a table on page 86. See Selecting rows in tables on page 86.

Configure pagination

Select rows in tables

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter console components

85

The table refreshes after the operation and shows the changes you made. For these operations, OpsCenter saves and reloads your customized settings when you log on to the OpsCenter server again. Each user can have different customized table settings.

Specifying which columns appear in a table

Use the following procedure to specify which columns appear in a table. To specify which columns appear in a table

1 2

Click the Change Table Settings icon at the top-right corner of the table. Initially, some OpsCenter tables do not show all available columns. To view any of these columns, you may first have to remove one or more columns from the table and then add the missing columns. To remove columns you do not want to appear, select the column in Selected Columns and click Remove. To add any columns that currently do not appear, select the column in the Available Columns list and click Add. Added columns appear as the last column in the table.

Moving a column
Use the following procedure to move columns in a table. To move a column

1 2 3

Click the Change Table Settings icon at the top of the table. Select the name of the column in Selected Columns. Click Move Up to move the column to the left in the table. Click Move Down to move the column to the right in the table.

Choosing the number of table rows that appear per page

Use the following procedure to choose the number of table rows that appear per page. To choose the number of table rows that appear per page

1 2 3

Click the Change Table Settings icon at the top of the table. Select a number from the Rows Per Page drop-down list . Select Apply To All Tables if you want the Rows Per Page setting to apply to all tables in OpsCenter. The setting applies to reports also.

86

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter console components

Sorting the contents of a table column

Use the following procedure to sort the contents of a column or multiple columns. To sort the contents of a column or multiple columns

In a table, click the column name. The column sorts in ascending order by default. To sort in descending order, click the column name again.

Changing the width of a column

Use the following procedure to change the width of a column. To change the width of a column

1 2

Select the edge of the column heading and hold down the left mouse option. Drag the edge of the column heading to the right or left.

Accessing multiple pages of data in a table

Much of the monitoring information appears in a table format. OpsCenter tables display 10 rows at one time by default. To change the number of rows that are displayed, use the Change Table Settings icon. When you have more data to display than can fit in a table, the table contains multiple pages. Use the table page controls that are located below the table to help you navigate the pages. To display the next 10 rows or to return to a previous set of rows in large tables, use the table page controls. To access a specific page in a table

Click the page number.

To access the previous or the next page in a table

Click the left arrow or the right arrow.

To access the first or the last page in a table

Click the double left arrow or the double right arrow.

Selecting rows in tables

For many tables in OpsCenter, you must select a row or rows to enable the tasks. To select a row in a table

Click the check box for that row. Click the check box again to deselect the selected row.

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter console components

87

To select all rows on the current page of the table

Click the check box in the header row of the table. Click the check box again to deselect all selected rows.

Creating, applying, editing, and removing custom view filters

Many tables in OpsCenter let you display a subset of the information available by creating and using custom filters, or by using the predefined (ready-to-use) filters. A filter screens information that is based on a set of conditions that you define. Once you create a filter, you can save it, edit it, or remove it. In the views that allow filtering, filtering icons appear above the table. The following procedures describe how you can create, apply, edit, or remove a filter. To create a custom filter

1 2 3

Select the Create Filter icon. Type a name for the filter in the Name field. For Column, select the column name that you want to filter on from the drop-down list. For Operator, select an operator. Use != if you do not want to match a specific value. For Value, enter or select a value. If you select Start Time or End Time for Column, a calendar icon appears for Value. Click the calendar icon to choose a date and time and then click OK.

From the drop-down list, select And or Or to build the filter query. For Link, click Add to add another clause to the query. If the clause is not what you want, click Remove to remove the clause from the query.

To continue building the filter, select another column. Repeat 3 and 4.

Click OK when you finish building the filter. Your new filter is available in the filter drop-down list.

To apply a filter

From the drop-down list, select a custom filter or a OpsCenter built-in filter. OpsCenter filters the table according to the criteria you specify. The view remains in effect until you change it by selecting another filter.

88

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter Common tasks in OpsCenter

To edit a custom filter

From the drop-down list, select a custom filter. Note: You cannot modify the predefined OpsCenter filters. You can only modify custom filters.

2 3

Click the Edit filter icon. See To create a custom filter on page 87. This lists the instructions for using the dialog to edit a filter.

Make your changes and click OK.

To remove a custom filter

From the drop-down list, select a custom filter. Note: You cannot delete the predefined filters.

2 3

Click the Delete filter icon. Click OK to remove the filter.

Common tasks in OpsCenter

Table 1-9 lists common tasks and corresponding links to the documentation. Table 1-9 OpsCenter functions Quick links to the OpsCenter documentation Tasks Go to this topic

User Create, update, delete users See About managing Symantec OpsCenter Management users on page 286. Create, update, delete user groups See Setting user preferences on page 268. Add, remove users from user groups Assign, remove roles to users and user groups

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter Common tasks in OpsCenter

89

Table 1-9 OpsCenter functions

Quick links to the OpsCenter documentation (continued) Tasks Go to this topic

See Adding a master server or appliance in OpsCenter on page 346. See Editing a master server or an appliance master server in OpsCenter on page 356. See Deleting a master server or an appliance master server in OpsCenter on page 357. See About managing OpsCenter Agents on page 322. See About managing cost analysis and chargeback for OpsCenter Analytics on page 303. See About managing recipients in OpsCenter on page 297. See Configuring SMTP server settings for OpsCenter on page 275.

OpsCenter Add, update, or delete Management master servers Add, update, or delete OpsCenter Agents Set default currency, SNMP, SMTP server

NetBackup Operations

Change states of the NetBackup entities as follows: Policy (Activate or deactivate) Job (Stop, start, suspend, or resume) Media (Assign, freeze, unfreeze) Drives (Up or down)

See Activating or deactivating a job policy on page 437. See Controlling NetBackup jobs on page 416. See Controlling media on page 445. See Controlling drives on page 455.

Backup and Recovery

Execute manual backups

See Starting a manual backup on page 437.

Search and restore files, See About Operational Restores from directories, or application OpsCenter on page 527. (Oracle) See Performing a Guided Recovery cloning operation on page 563.

90

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About using Web browser bookmarks

Table 1-9 OpsCenter functions

Quick links to the OpsCenter documentation (continued) Tasks Go to this topic

Views Create, update, delete See About managing OpsCenter views Management OpsCenter views and nodes on page 387. Assign read or write See User access rights and UI functions in permissions to users on OpsCenter on page 287. OpsCenter views and nodes See Adding new users to OpsCenter on page 293. Report Execution Execute report templates and custom reports Schedule canned and custom reports See Creating an OpsCenter report using a Report Template on page 634. See Creating a custom report in OpsCenter on page 644.

Create, update Dashboard See About managing My Dashboard on page 671. Schedule when you want a report to run See About managing report schedules in OpsCenter on page 678. Monitoring View entities (Dashboards, See About monitoring NetBackup using the Summary, Details): Job, Overview tab on page 403. Policy, Services etc. See About monitoring NetBackup jobs on page 410. See About monitoring NetBackup policies on page 430. See Monitor > Services view on page 428. Alert Create, update, delete alert See About creating (or changing) an alert Management policies policy on page 490. Assign, acknowledge, and clear alerts See Managing an alert policy on page 508. See About managing recipients in OpsCenter on page 297. See Configuring SMTP server settings for OpsCenter on page 275.

About using Web browser bookmarks

Use your Web browser to add a bookmark for any view in the OpsCenter console and return to it as needed.

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter documentation

91

You can use the bookmark to return to the same view when you log onto the console again.

About OpsCenter documentation

The Symantec OpsCenter Administrator's Guide (NetBackup_AdminGuide_OpsCenter.pdf) provides information on how to use OpsCenter. It includes information about how to monitor and manage NetBackup, collect data from Symantec products as well as third-party products, generate alerts, and create various reports. It also provides details on the new enhancements in OpsCenter 7.5 and also how you can install OpsCenter 7.5. The online version of the Symantec OpsCenter Administrator's Guide can be found at: http://www.symantec.com/docs/DOC5042 A separate Guide for reporting (NetBackup_OpsCenter_Reporting.pdf) is also available. The online version of the Symantec OpsCenter Reporting Guide can be found at: http://www.symantec.com/docs/DOC5044 Note: For the latest support information about supported products and operating systems, see the Symantec NetBackup Hardware and Software Compatibility List. The list is regularly updated on the Symantec Support Web site: http://www.symantec.com/business/support You can find more information about OpsCenter 7.5 in Symantec NetBackup 7.5 Release Notes. Always refer to the OpsCenter sections of the NetBackup 7.5 Release Notes for any last-minute changes to the information that is presented in this document. The Release Notes also include any restrictions or limits for OpsCenter 7.5. You can access the Release Notes from the following URL: http://www.symantec.com/docs/DOC5041 In addition to this Symantec OpsCenter Administrator's Guide PDF, OpsCenter 7.5 is also shipped with the following online Help documents:
OpsCenter context-sensitive This Help provides information about the OpsCenter user help interface. It provides context-sensitive help pages for all screens.

92

Getting started using Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter documentation

Java View Builder context-sensitive help

This Help provides information about all Java View Builder procedures and dialog boxes. To access the Help, click Help in a dialog box in the Java View Builder console.

NetBackup Status Codes Help This Help provides descriptions of NetBackup status codes and possible actions to take when a code appears. To access the Help, click Monitor > Jobs. Click a status code link in the jobs table to view its details. Table Settings Help This Help provides information on how to change the settings of a table in the OpsCenter console. To access the Help, click Help on the Table Settings pop-up dialog box.

Chapter

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5

This chapter includes the following topics:

About planning an OpsCenter installation Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX About upgrading to OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX About post-installation tasks About uninstalling Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX About clustering Symantec OpsCenter

About planning an OpsCenter installation

The following topics provide information on concepts to understand and steps to take before you install or upgrade OpsCenter. See Software components that OpsCenter uses on page 94. See About the OpsCenter licensing model on page 95. See Symantec OpsCenter DVDs on page 100. See OpsCenter platform compatibility on page 101. See OpsCenter compatible backup and archiving products on page 104. See Managed NetBackup master server considerations on page 106. See About designing your OpsCenter Server on page 108. See Supported upgrade paths on page 110.

94

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation

See About planning an OpsCenter Agent deployment on page 111. See Preparation for install or upgrade on page 123.

Software components that OpsCenter uses

Along with OpsCenter-specific components, OpsCenter uses some Symantec components that are shared.
Components that are shared OpsCenter uses the following components that are also shared with other Symantec with other Symantec applications: applications Symantec Private Branch Exchange (PBX) PBX lets applications share a common TCP/IP port, which reduces the required number of open ports in firewalls. PBX also integrates with the Symantec Product Authentication Service to allow for authenticated connections and non-authenticated connections. Because PBX is an independent component, its port number can be changed using PBX configuration files.

Note: If you change the PBX port number on the OpsCenter server, OpsCenter
may fail. Symantec Product Authentication Service (AT) The AT service is primarily used for user logon authentication. AT is required for secure communication among the OpsCenter Agent, Server, View Builder, and user interface. It is also used for secure communication between NetBackup master servers and the OpsCenter Server. The OpsCenter Server needs to be a legitimate server that can communicate with NetBackup; it must be on the NetBackup server list. OpsCenter does not require that you install the Symantec Product Authorization Service. The NetBackup authentication service (NBAC) does not need to be configured on your managed NetBackup master servers. See the NetBackup Security and Encryption Guide for information about authentication services and about NBAC. JRE (Java Runtime Environment ) The Symantec OpsCenter Web server and the OpsCenter application require this component.

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation

95

Symantec OpsCenter components

OpsCenter uses the following components that are not shared with other Symantec applications:

Apache Tomcat Web server The OpsCenter user interface runs under the Apache Tomcat Web server.

Veritas Unified Logging (VxUL) VxUL is installed with the OpsCenter Server and the Agent. OpsCenter uses VxUL to configure and view logs. See the NetBackup Troubleshooting Guide for more information about VxUL logs. Sybase database OpsCenter uses a Sybase SQL Anywhere 11 (Sybase 11) database installation that is separate from the NetBackup database. More information about the Sybase component is available at the following location: http://www.sybase.com/support/manuals

About the OpsCenter licensing model

OpsCenter requires no license. To enable additional functionality you can add a license key to enable Symantec OpsCenter Analytics. The licensed version of OpsCenter is called Symantec OpsCenter Analytics. The unlicensed version of OpsCenter is called Symantec OpsCenter. The product name is visible from the title bar and logon page of the OpsCenter console. The charges for Symantec OpsCenter licenses are based on how many entities you require reports on, as follows:

For backup environments, the charges are based on the number of backup clients. For NetBackup Search that has been introduced with Symantec OpsCenter Analytics 7.5, the charges are based on the number of indexed clients. For example, assume your NetBackup environment contains 100 clients to backup and all these 100 clients are also indexed then you must purchase a NetBackup Search license that allows you to search for 100 indexed clients. For Symantec Enterprise Vault environments, the charges are based on the number of mailboxes.

Note: If you want to enable custom reporting on Enterprise Vault data, you must add the appropriate license key. For example, assume that your NetBackup environment contains 100 clients to back up. You also run Enterprise Vault and have 500 mailboxes. You must purchase a license that allows reporting for 100 backup clients and 500 mailboxes.

96

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation

The Symantec Enterprise Vault license option called Archive Mailbox is added. If you install the Archive Mailbox option, it is visible in the OpsCenter console on the Settings > Configuration > License page. You compare the configured number of mailboxes or backup clients with the license limit. Examine the Value column and the Usage column on the Settings > Configuration > License page. If you have a license for 1000 mailboxes, it is added as Archive Mailbox as shown in the figure.

These entries show that the license to back up 1000 clients and the license to collect archive data of 1000 mailboxes from Enterprise Vault is installed. These entries show that the actual usage of Archive mailbox license option is 0 while the licensed value is 1000.

If you have a license for NetBackup Search with 1000 indexed clients, it is added as NetBackup Search option on the Settings > Configuration > License page. This is displayed in the following figure:

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation

97

This entry shows that the license to search for 1000 indexed clients is installed.

These entries show that the actual usage of Archive mailbox license option is 0 while the licensed value is 1000.

Symantec OpsCenter Analytics license keys

Symantec OpsCenter Analytics has two types of license keys:
Demo key The demo key is valid for 60 days from the day the key is generated. The demo key lets you try the product before you purchase it. A permanent key does not have an expiry date. A new category has been added under the permanent keys called NetBackup 7.5 Search Key along with the previous keys (like GOLD key or NetBackup 7.5 ENT Capacity key) NetBackup 7.5 Search key is capable of enabling only the NetBackup Search feature in OpsCenter Analytics. NetBackup 7.5 ENT Capacity key enables all the features of OpsCenter Analytics like business reporting, NetBackup Search etc. GOLD key enables all the features of OpsCenter Analytics other than the Search feature.

Permanent key

You can access the licensed features with both demo keys and permanent keys. With Symantec OpsCenter Analytics, you can perform advanced reporting, create custom reports, collect data from third-party products such as IBM Tivoli Storage Manager and EMC Networker, and perform indexed NetBackup Search operations. The Search license is a part of Symantec OpsCenter Analytics. If you are a new OpsCenter user, then buying the OpsCenter Analytics license will enable the Search and other OpsCenter Analytics features. In this case no additional key is required. If you are an existing customer and upgrade to Symantec OpsCenter Analytics 7.5, and if you only require a license of NetBackup Search, then a new OpsCenter Analytics license key can be purchased which will enables only the NetBackup Search feature.

98

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation

See Symantec OpsCenter Analytics licensed features on page 99. You can also add, delete, or view license keys after installation from the OpsCenter console. See About managing licenses on page 272.

Differences between Symantec OpsCenter and Symantec OpsCenter Analytics

Table 2-1 lists the differences between Symantec OpsCenter and Symantec OpsCenter Analytics. Table 2-1 Differences between Symantec OpsCenter and Symantec OpsCenter Analytics Symantec OpsCenter Analytics
Symantec OpsCenter Analytics is visible from the title bar and logon page of the OpsCenter console.

Symantec OpsCenter
Symantec OpsCenter is visible from the title bar and logon page of the OpsCenter console. Symantec OpsCenter lets you do operational reporting.

Symantec OpsCenter Analytics lets you perform advanced, business-level reporting. With Symantec OpsCenter Analytics, you have an additional reporting functionality that includes (but is not limited to) the following:

Creating custom reports Creating reports using SQL queries Running or configuring charge back reports Viewing report data for any previous date

You can also collect data from third-party products such as IBM TSM and EMC Networker. More information about the licensed features is available. See Symantec OpsCenter Analytics licensed features on page 99. You can perform operational NetBackup search and restore operations. This can be done from Manage > Restore > Restore Files and Directories. See About Operational Restores from OpsCenter on page 527. Symantec OpsCenter Analytics lets you perform advanced NetBackup Search operations that are based on indexing the file system metadata that is associated with the backup images. This can be done from the Search tab in the OpsCenter console. See About NetBackup Search on page 989.

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation

99

Symantec OpsCenter Analytics licensed features

Table 2-2 shows the list of licensed features, where they are located in the OpsCenter console, and how they appear in the unlicensed version. Table 2-2 Licensed feature
Create a Custom Report

Licensed features in Symantec OpsCenter Analytics Access on the Symantec OpsCenter Analytics console Access on the unlicensed Symantec OpsCenter console

Reports > Report Templates > Create Create a custom report option is a New Report > Create a Custom disabled. Report Reports > My Reports > Create a New Report > Create a Custom Report

Create a report using SQL query

Reports > Report Templates > Create Create a report using SQL query a New Report > Create a report using option is disabled. SQL query Reports > My Reports > Create a New Report > Create a report using SQL query

Run or view charge back reports

Report > Report Templates > Charge Charge back reports are disabled. back Reports Settings > Charge back Charge back settings are disabled. You cannot create or edit data collectors for third-party products.

Control charge back settings

Create or edit data collectors for IBM Settings > Configuration > Agent > TSM and EMC Networker Create Data Collector In the Data Collector Wizard, in the Select Product drop-down list, TSM and EMC Networker options are disabled. Settings > Configuration > Agent > Edit Data Collector

100

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation

Table 2-2 Licensed feature

Full control over report time frame selection. You can view report data for any previous date.

Licensed features in Symantec OpsCenter Analytics (continued) Access on the Symantec OpsCenter Analytics console Access on the unlicensed Symantec OpsCenter console

Report > Report Templates > Create You cannot view data older than 60 New Report (Relative and Absolute days. Time frame window on the Select Parameters page.) Reports > My Reports > Create New Report (Relative and Absolute Time frame window on the Select Parameters page.) Report > Report templates (Run a report, click Edit Report and then Relative and Absolute Time frame window.) Reports > My Reports (Run a report, click Edit Report and then Relative and Absolute Time frame window.)

Reconcile Task

Monitor > Jobs. The Reconcile option The Reconcile option is disabled. under the More drop-down list is disabled. Settings > Edit View level Alias The Edit View level Alias tab is disabled. The Object Types tab is disabled.

Edit View level Alias tab

Object Types

Settings > Configuration > Object Types

Perform advanced NetBackup Search Search > New, Search > Saved, operations based on indexing the file Search > Saved tab system metadata that is associated with the backup images

When you click the Search tab, the following message is displayed: You do not have license to view this page.

Symantec OpsCenter DVDs

Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 is shipped with three OpsCenter DVD's. Three OpsCenter DVDs are available and are a part of the NetBackup media kit. Table 2-3 describes the contents of each DVD.

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation

101

Table 2-3 DVD

OpsCenter (1 of 3)

OpsCenter 7.5 DVD contents Platform OS

Windows (x86 and x64)

Contents

32-bit Windows platforms (x86) 64-bit Windows platforms (x64) ICS directory for each platform OpsCenter documentation RedHat SUSE Solaris x86 ICS directory for each platform OpsCenter documentation AIX64 HP-UX IA Solaris SPARC64 ICS directory for each platform OpsCenter documentation

OpsCenter (2 of 3)

UNIX

OpsCenter (3 of 3)

UNIX

Note: OpsCenter 7.5 software is not a part of the NetBackup DVD's. You can either install an unlicensed version, a demo version, or purchase a Symantec OpsCenter Analytics license key and install the licensed version. With the demo version, you can access the Symantec OpsCenter Analytics features for 60 days (starting from the day you install the demo key). See About the OpsCenter licensing model on page 95.

OpsCenter platform compatibility

This section provides information about OpsCenter platform compatibility. Note: Refer to the compatibility matrix that is posted on the Symantec Support Web site for the latest information on the platforms that OpsCenter supports. This document is posted at the following URL: http://www.symantec.com/docs/TECH59978

102

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation

Table 2-4 Platform

OpsCenter operating system requirements Server

32-bit 64-bit Yes

Agent
32-bit Yes 64-bit Yes

View Builder
32-bit Yes 64-bit Yes* See Note

Windows 2003 SP2

Yes

Windows 2003 R2 Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes* See Note

Windows 2008

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes* See Note

Windows 2008 R2 No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes* See Note

Solaris 9 SPARC Solaris 10 x64 Solaris 10 SPARC HP Itanium 11.31 AIX 5.3 AIX 6.1 AIX 7.1

No No No No

No Yes Yes Yes

No No No No

Yes No Yes No

No No No No

No No No No

No No No

Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No No No

No No No No

No No No No

No No No No

Linux RedHat 5.0, No 6.0 The supported versions for Red Hat Linux are 2.6.18 and above. Linux SUSE 10 Linux SUSE 11 The supported versions for SUSE Linux are 2.6.16 and above. No

Yes

No

No

No

No

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation

103

Note: * signifies 32-bit View Builder binaries working on 64-bit architecture. This applies only to View Builder software. 32-bit Agent binaries are not supported on 64-bit Windows systems.

Note: OpsCenter components are not supported if Windows or Linux OS is installed on IA-64 architecture.

Operating systems and OpsCenter deployment limitations

This section provides important notes regarding the supported operating systems and limitations that you need to address during OpsCenter deployment. Important notes on operating systems:

If installing OpsCenter on AIX, ensure that the XLC runtime version is 9.0 or higher. If installing OpsCenter on AIX 6.1, ensure that you install the applicable patch for AIX from the IBM site: http://www-01.ibm.com/support/docview.wss?uid=isg1fixinfo105097 OpsCenter Server is not supported on non-global Solaris zones. OpsCenter Server and Agent are supported in a VMware virtual machine guest operating system environment. Ensure that the system on which the OpsCenter server is installed has valid values for the following OS parameters:

Display language Location

Check your operating system documentation for more information on these parameters. OpsCenter deployment limitations:

You must install Server, Agent, and View Builder of the same versions. For example, Server 7.5 is only compatible with Agent 7.5 and View Builder 7.5. Only the OpsCenter Server can be installed in a clustered mode on UNIX and Windows, with Veritas Cluster Server (VCS). The OpsCenter Agent and View Builder are not supported on VCS. OpsCenter components must not be installed on an IPv6 system. If you install OpsCenter components on a dual stack system that has both IPv4 and IPv6 for instance, you must configure the default IP as IPV4. Also hostname of the system must be configured with IPv4.

104

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation

The OpsCenter installer automatically sets the maximum heap size to 1024 MB. Your system may require a lesser max heap size to properly run all applications. See Adjusting the heap size for OpsCenter components on page 179. Installing OpsCenter components in a location that is mounted from a remote host is not supported on UNIX. If 8.3 file name creation is disabled on a Windows host, enable it and restart the Windows host before installing or upgrading to OpsCenter components. If you install or upgrade to OpsCenter components on a Windows host where 8.3 file name creation is disabled, then you must do the following:

Install OpsCenter components on a customized (non-default) location like D:\Favorites. The default installation location of OpsCenter components is C:\Program Files\Symantec. Ensure that the customized location that you provide does not contain spaces or special characters like %, ).

Ensure that the OpsCenter Server host name does not contain any underscores like opshost. Ensure that the time on the OpsCenter Server and the backup product host or the archive product host is in sync based on the time zone they are deployed in. A backup product host or an archive product host means a supported product host that is connected to OpsCenter. Examples of a backup product host or an archive product host are PureDisk host, Backup Exec host, NetBackup master server, Enterprise Vault host etc. If the OpsCenter server and the product host are in the same time zone, both the OpsCenter server and the product host must show the same time. For example, say the OpsCenter server and the product host are in the CST time zone but show different times, such as 8:00 P.M. and 9:00 P.M.. In this case, OpsCenter may not display accurate data in the reports or in the Monitor tab and Manage tab. If the OpsCenter server and product host are in different time zones, ensure that both time zones convert to the same GMT time. For example, if the OpsCenter server shows 8:00 P.M. C.S.T and the managed host shows and 6:00 P.M. P.S.T, they must translate to the same GMT time (such as GMT -6).

OpsCenter compatible backup and archiving products

This section lists the backup and archiving products that OpsCenter supports. Note that with the licensed version of OpsCenter, you can perform advanced reporting from the data that is collected from all of these products. With the

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation

105

unlicensed version, you cannot collect data from third-party products like IBM TSM and EMC Networker. Table 2-5 lists the backup and archiving products that OpsCenter supports. Table 2-5 Backup and archiving products supported by Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 Versions Support level

Back up or Archiving product

Symantec NetBackup

6.0 MP7 and higher All supported NetBackup platforms versions, 6.5.x and higher by remote agent versions, 7.0 and higher Native agent for Windows 2003 (SP2 versions, 7.5 & R2), Windows 2008 (SP2 & R2), and Solaris 9, 10, 11 Appliance 2.0 master servers Appliance 1.2 and 2.0 media servers that are attached to an appliance 2.0 master server or to a regular NetBackup 7.5 master server Data collection happens automatically by NBSL

Symantec NetBackup Appliance

Symantec NetBackup PureDisk

6.2, 6.2.2, 6.5, 6.5.1, 6.6, 6.6.0.1, 6.6.0.2, 6.6.0.3, 6.6.1, 6.6.1.2, 6.6.3a

PureDisk supported platform (PDOS) by the OpsCenter integrated Agent. You do not need a separate Agent to collect data from PureDisk. You can use the inbuilt Agent of the OpsCenter Server for data collection. To create or configure the data collector, select the Agent that is installed as Integrated Agent.

Symantec Backup Exec

11d, 12.0, 12.5, 2010, 2010 All supported Symantec Backup R2, 2010 R3 Exec platforms by remote agent.

Note: OpsCenter does not Native agent on backup servers on

support Symantec Backup Windows 2003 (SP2 & R2), 2008 Exec running on NetWare. (SP2 & R2)

106

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation

Table 2-5

Backup and archiving products supported by Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 (continued) Versions
7.5, 8.0, 9.0, 10.0

Back up or Archiving product

Symantec Enterprise Vault

Support level
All supported Symantec Enterprise Vault platforms by remote agent Native agent on Microsoft SQL Server 2005 or 2008 (where Enterprise Vault database resides) on Windows 2003 (SP2 & R2), 2008 (SP2 & R2).

EMC NetWorker

7.3

Native agent on backup servers on Windows 2003 (SP2 & R2), 2008 (SP2 & R2) and Solaris 9/10 Data collection is possible only with a licensed version of OpsCenter.

IBM Tivoli Storage Manager (TSM)

5.3, 5.4, 5.5

All supported TSM platforms by remote agent Native agent for backup server on Windows 2003 (SP2 & R2), 2008 (SP2 & R2) and Solaris 9/10 Data collection is possible only with a licensed version of OpsCenter.

Managed NetBackup master server considerations

Consider the following recommendations and requirements for your managed NetBackup master servers. The following recommendations and requirements should be considered for your managed master servers:

Installation of OpsCenter Server software on a NetBackup master server or media server is possible if you want to monitor only one master server. An example is the master server on which the OpsCenter server software is installed. To monitor more than one master server, Symantec recommends that you install the OpsCenter server software on a separate standalone server. More information on sizing guidelines is available. See OpsCenter sizing guidelines on page 109..

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation

107

OpsCenter does not collect data from the managed servers that are configured within a network address translation (NAT) network. The OpsCenter server should be configured as a fixed host with a static IP address. Symantec recommends that any NetBackup master server is monitored by only one OpsCenter server. The OpsCenter Server must be at an equal or higher version than the NetBackup master server version that it monitors. For example, OpsCenter 7.5 can monitor all NetBackup master server versions between 6.5.x and 7.5. If you plan to upgrade the backup and archiving product like NetBackup, Backup Exec, PureDisk etc. and the OpsCenter components, it is recommended that you upgrade OpsCenter components first. By upgrading OpsCenter components before the backup and archiving product, OpsCenter can start collecting data from the backup or archiving product once it is added to the console. You must perform upgrades in the following order: Serial No. Steps to upgrade
1. 2. 3. Upgrade the OpsCenter Agent Upgrade the OpsCenter Server Upgrade the OpsCenter View Builder

Reference
See Upgrading from OpsCenter 7.0.x or 7.1.x to OpsCenter 7.5 on Windows on page 159. See Upgrading from OpsCenter 7.0.x or 7.1.x to OpsCenter 7.5 on UNIX on page 166.

4.

Upgrade the backup or archiving Refer to the appropriate product product that you are using like manuals. NetBackup, EMC NetWorker, IBM If you plan to upgrade to NetBackup TSM etc. 7.5, visit the NetBackup 7.5 Upgrade Portal: http://www.symantec.com/docs/TECH74584

The order also holds true if you plan to upgrade only OpsCenter and not the backup or archiving product. Always upgrade the OpsCenter Agent first followed by the Server and the View Builder.

OpsCenter can be used to monitor a NetBackup cluster. See NetBackup High Availability Administrator's Guide for more details on setting up a NetBackup cluster environment.

More information about adding managed NetBackup servers in OpsCenter is available.

108

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation

See Adding a master server or an appliance master server in the OpsCenter console on page 355.

About using NBSL to collect data from NetBackup master servers

A NetBackup master server with version 7.1.x or 7.5 requires an Agent or data collector only for capacity or traditional license data collection. The OpsCenter Server uses the NetBackup Service Layer (NBSL) to collect all other data types from a NetBackup 7.1.x or 7.5 master server. For a 6.5.x master server, an Agent must be installed if you want to collect image, error logs, breakup jobs, capacity license, or traditional license data. Similarly, for a 6.0.x master server, an Agent must be installed if you want to collect image, error logs, capacity license, or traditional license data. If you do not want to collect such data, you do not need to install an Agent. OpsCenter uses NBSL to collect all the other data automatically from the master server. For a 7.0.x master server, an Agent must be installed if you want to collect breakup jobs, capacity license, or traditional license data. If you do not want to collect this data, you do not need to install an Agent. OpsCenter uses NBSL to collect all the other data automatically from the master server. Beginning with NetBackup version 6.0, NBSL components are included as a part of NetBackup on master and media servers. OpsCenter requires NBSL for all NetBackup monitoring, managing, and control functions. OpsCenter is affected if NBSL stops running on a managed NetBackup server. If NBSL stops, OpsCenter may not capture any changes that were made to the NetBackup configuration. When NBSL restarts, OpsCenter correctly recaptures the latest state.

About designing your OpsCenter Server

Before setting up an OpsCenter Server, review the recommendations and requirements that are listed in the earlier sections. See Managed NetBackup master server considerations on page 106.

Sizing considerations
The size of your OpsCenter server depends largely on the number of NetBackup objects that OpsCenter manages. The following NetBackup objects determine the characteristics of the OpsCenter Server:

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation

109

Number of master servers to manage Number of policies Number of the jobs that are run per day Total number of jobs Number of media

Based on these factors, the following OpsCenter Server components should be sized accordingly:

Disk space (for installed OpsCenter binary + OpsCenter database) Type and number of CPUs RAM

About the OpsCenter database

The Sybase database that OpsCenter uses is similar to the database that NetBackup uses. The database is installed as part of the OpsCenter server installation. Note the following:

After you configure OpsCenter, OpsCenter disk space depends on the volume of data initially loaded on the OpsCenter server from the managed NetBackup servers. The initial data load on the OpsCenter server is in turn dependent on the following data present in the managed master servers:

Number of policy data records Number of job data records Number of media data records

The rate of OpsCenter database growth depends on the quantity of managed data. This data can be policy data, job data, or media data.

Information is available on how to adjust database values for better OpsCenter performance. See About tuning OpsCenter for more performance on page 171.

OpsCenter sizing guidelines

Table 2-6 lists the minimum hardware requirements and recommended settings for installing the OpsCenter Server.

110

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation

Table 2-6

OpsCenter server sizing guidelines Number of alerts Number of Number of job policies media Number of jobs per day

System Number of configuration NetBackup master servers to be monitored

2 Processors, 0-20 8 GB RAM 4 Processors, 20-40 8 GB RAM 8 Logical 40-60 Processors, 8 GB RAM 16 Logical Processors, 16 GB RAM 60-100

0 - 10,000

0 2000

0 1000

0 20,000

10,000 40,000 40,000 60,000

2000 4000

1000 10,000 20,000 40,000 10,000 50,000 40,000 60,000

4000 6000

60,000 1,00,000

6000 10,000 50,000 1,00,000

60,000 1,50,000

Note: Some of the data in this table has been interpolated. Symantec recommends that the memory of the system where you install OpsCenter Server is 8 GB or more. You can install the OpsCenter server on a NetBackup master or media server if you want to monitor only the master server in the configuration. If NetBackup and the OpsCenter Server are installed on the same system, Symantec recommends that you run no more than 5000 NetBackup jobs daily. If the number of NetBackup jobs that run daily on the master server is more than 5000, Symantec recommends that you install OpsCenter server software on a separate standalone system. Information is available on how you can tune OpsCenter for better performance. See About tuning OpsCenter for more performance on page 171.

Supported upgrade paths

OpsCenter 7.5 supports direct upgrades from the following versions:

OpsCenter 7.0 to OpsCenter 7.5 OpsCenter 7.0.1 to OpsCenter 7.5

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation

111

OpsCenter 7.1 to OpsCenter 7.5 OpsCenter 7.1.0.1 to OpsCenter 7.5 OpsCenter 7.1.0.2 to OpsCenter 7.5 OpsCenter 7.1.0.3 to OpsCenter 7.5

Note: If you have NOM or VBR, first upgrade to OpsCenter 7.0 or 7.1. See the product documentation for details on how to upgrade.

About planning an OpsCenter Agent deployment

Before deploying an OpsCenter Agent, you must decide if you need an OpsCenter Agent. To make this decision, you must examine the following parameters:
Do I need an Agent? See When do you need an Agent? on page 111.

Can a single Agent monitor multiple product See Can a single Agent monitor different versions? product versions? on page 112. Should I install the Agent on the product host? Should I install the Agent on a different platform? Quickly glance through the Agent deployment matrix Examples of Agent deployment scenarios See About the Agent deployment matrix on page 117. See Examples of OpsCenter Agent deployment in a NetBackup environment on page 119. See Where should I install the Agent? on page 113.

When do you need an Agent?

You require an Agent based on the product that you want to collect data from. You do not need an OpsCenter Agent to collect data from PureDisk.

112

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation

NetBackup

The requirement for an OpsCenter Agent differs for each NetBackup version. Review the following points for specific NetBackup versions: 6.0.x Install an Agent if you want to collect data for image, error logs, capacity, or traditional license. 6.5.x Install an Agent if you want to collect data for image, error log, capacity license, traditional license, or breakup jobs.

Note: From OpsCenter 7.5, NBSL is used

to automatically collect the scheduled jobs data from NetBackup 6.5.x and later master servers. You do not need to install an Agent to collect scheduled jobs data from NetBackup 6.5.x master servers. 7.0.x Install an Agent if you want to collect data for breakup jobs, capacity license, or traditional license. 7.1.x Install an Agent if you want to collect data for capacity license and traditional license. 7.5 Install an Agent if you want to collect data for capacity license and traditional license.

PureDisk

You do not require an OpsCenter Agent to collect data from PureDisk. You require OpsCenter Agent to collect data from these products.

IBM TSM, Backup Exec, Enterprise Vault, Legato Networker

Can a single Agent monitor different product versions?

A single Agent can monitor multiple versions of TSM, BE, EV. For EMC Networker and NetBackup master servers, you need separate Agents depending on the versions.

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation

113

NetBackup

You need separate Agents to collect data from different NetBackup master servers. NetBackup binaries (such as the Remote Administration Console for Windows and a UNIX media server) that you install on the Agent host must match the version of the NetBackup master server. You need different OpsCenter Agents for EMC Networker servers with different versions. The OpsCenter Agent needs to be installed on the EMC Networker server host. PureDisk data collection does not require a separate Agent. You can use the Integrated Agent of the OpsCenter Server for data collection. To create or configure the data collector, select the Agent that is installed as the Integrated Agent.

EMC Networker

PureDisk

Note: You do not require an OpsCenterAgent to collect data

from PureDisk. See Configuring PureDisk data collector on page 361. Backup Exec You can use the same Agent to collect data from Backup Exec servers with different versions.

Note: To collect data from a Backup Exec server host, you

need to install the Agent on a compatible Windows host. IBM TSM You can use the same OpsCenter Agent to collect data from TSM servers with different versions. You can use the same OpsCenter Agent to collect Enterprise Vault data from Microsoft SQL Servers with different versions.

Enterprise Vault

Note: To collect Enterprise Vault archive data, you must

install the OpsCenter Agent on a Windows host.

Where should I install the Agent?

Installing the OpsCenter Agent has a little affect on the backup environment. The OpsCenter Agent must be compatible with the operating system of the backup application host. To monitor Enterprise Vault or Backup Exec, you need to install the Agent on a Windows host as these products support only Windows platform. Agents can be installed on either Windows or Solaris platforms if you want to monitor NetBackup, Tivoli Storage Manager, or EMC Networker. You can deploy the OpsCenter Agent on any of the following hosts:

114

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation

Product host

The Product host is the host where the backup or archiving product is installed. For example, a product host can be a NetBackup master server, a Backup Exec host, an Enterprise Vault host etc.

Note: To collect data from EMC Networker,

you must install the OpsCenter Agent on the product host only. Advantages of installing OpsCenter Agent on a product host are the following: Ease of maintenance for upgrades, because you only service one host. Minimal intrusion on backup hosts, because only one agent is installed on a backup host.

Disadvantages of installing OpsCenter Agent on the product host are the following:

The Agent may use significant system resources, which can affect the product hosts performance.

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation

115

OpsCenter Server host or a separate host

116

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation

The OpsCenter Agent can be installed on a host different from the product host; this is sometimes called a Remote Agent. The different host may be the OpsCenter Server host or a separate host. You should deploy a Remote Agent in the following situations: When the OpsCenter Agent is not compatible with the operating system of the product (such as HP-UX). When the product host system has insufficient resources to support co-location of the OpsCenter Agent and the backup application.

In such situations, the Agent should remotely communicate with backup products.

Note: EMC Networker does not support

Remote Agent. Advantages of installing OpsCenter Agent on the Server host or a separate host are the following: You do not have to install additional software on backup application hosts, because the backup data is gathered remotely. If you install Agent on the OpsCenter Server host, you need to maintain only one host for both the OpsCenter Agent and the Server, which avoids the maintenance that might otherwise be involved in upgrading the Agent.

Disadvantages of installing OpsCenter Agent on the Server host include the following:

You must install a component of the backup application on the OpsCenter Server host. For example, assume that you need separate OpsCenter Agents to collect data from different versions of NetBackup master servers. You need to install NetBackup binaries (the Remote

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation

117

Administration Console for Windows, the master server, or the media server) on the Agent host that match the version of the NetBackup master server.

In some situations, a backup application license key is required for the component that is installed on the OpsCenter Server host.

Note the following points about installing an OpsCenter Agent:

Only one OpsCenter Agent can be installed on any host. A single Agent can be configured for multiple data collectors which collect data from the respective product hosts. Agent for NetBackup needs binaries of either RAC (Remote Admin Console) or master or media server, installed local to the Agent. The version of RAC or master or media server binaries installed on the Agent host should match the version of the NetBackup master server it intends to monitor. If you want to collect data from EMC Networker host, you must install an Agent locally on the EMC Networker host.

About the Agent deployment matrix

Table 2-7 compiles Agent-related information for each backup product. The Agent deployment matrix can help you in deploying the OpsCenter Agent. Table 2-7 Product Agent deployment matrix Is an Agent Required? Can a single Agent monitor multiple product versions? Should Agent Can Agent be be deployed on installed on the product any platform? host?
Solaris, Windows

NetBackup 7.5

Required only Multiple Agents Anywhere for capacity and traditional licensing Required only Multiple Agents Anywhere for capacity and traditional licensing

NetBackup 7.1.x

Solaris, Windows

118

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation

Table 2-7 Product

Agent deployment matrix (continued) Is an Agent Required? Can a single Agent monitor multiple product versions? Should Agent Can Agent be be deployed on installed on the product any platform? host?
Solaris, Windows

NetBackup 7.0.x

Required for breakup jobs, capacity, and traditional licensing

Multiple Agents Anywhere

NetBackup 6.5.x

Required only Multiple Agents Anywhere for image, error log, capacity licensing, traditional licensing, or breakup jobs. Required only Multiple Agents Anywhere for image, capacity licensing, traditional licensing, or error logs. Not Required None None

Solaris, Windows

NetBackup 6.0.x

Solaris, Windows

PureDisk

Solaris, Windows Windows only Windows only Solaris, Windows Solaris, Windows

Backup Exec Enterprise Vault

Required Required

Single Agent Single Agent Single Agent

Anywhere Anywhere Anywhere

IBM Tivoli Storage Required Manager EMC Networker Required

Multiple Agents On the product host

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation

119

Examples of OpsCenter Agent deployment in a NetBackup environment

In a NetBackup environment, the following OpsCenter deployment scenarios are valid:

Example 1: You install the OpsCenter Server on OpsCenterHost1, install the Agent on AgentHost1, and install a NetBackup 7.5 master server on ProdHost1. Install the NetBackup 7.5 Remote Administration Console or NetBackup master server on AgentHost1 and configure a data collector to collect data from ProdHost1. Figure 2-1 illustrates this scenario. Example 2: You install the OpsCenter Server and Agent on OpsCenterHost1 and install the NetBackup 7.0 master server on ProdHost1. Install the NetBackup 7.0 Remote Administration Console or the NetBackup master server on OpsCenterHost1 and configure a data collector to collect data from ProdHost1. Figure 2-2 illustrates this scenario. Example 3: You install the OpsCenter Server on OpsCenterHost1, and you install the NetBackup master server and the OpsCenter Agent on ProdHost1 Configure a data collector on OpsCenterHost1 to collect data from ProdHost1. Figure 2-3 illustrates this scenario. Example 4: You install the OpsCenter Server and Agent on OpsCenterHost1, the NetBackup 6.5 master server is installed on ProdHost1, and you install another NetBackup 6.5 master server on ProdHost2. Install either the Remote Administration Console or master server on OpsCenterHost1 and configure two data collectors: one to collect data from ProdHost1 and another to collect data from ProdHost2. Figure 2-4 illustrates this scenario. Example 5: You install the OpsCenter Server on OpsCenterHost1. You install Agent A1 on AgentHost1, install Agent A2 on AgentHost2, and install Agent3 on AgentHost3. A NetBackup 7.0 master server exists on ProdHost1 and you install a NetBackup 6.5 master server on ProdHost2. Install NetBackup 6.0 MP7 on ProdHost3 and ProdHost4. Install a NetBackup 7.0 Remote Admin Console or 7.0 master server on AgentHost1 and configure a data collector to collect data from ProdHost1. Install a NetBackup 6.5 Remote Administration Console or 6.5 master server on the AgentHost2 and configure a data collector to collect data from ProdHost2. Install a NetBackup 6.0 MP7 Remote Admin Console or 6.0 MP7 on AgentHost3 and configure a data collector from ProdHost3 and ProdHost4. Figure 2-5 illustrates this scenario.

120

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation

Example 6: You install the OpsCenter Server on OpsCenterHost1. You install Agent A1 on AgentHost1, install Agent A2 on AgentHost2, and install agent A3 on AgentHost3. A NetBackup 7.0 master server exists on ProdHost1 and you install a NetBackup 6.5 master server on ProdHost2. NetBackup 6.0 MP7 master servers exist on ProdHost3 and ProdHost4. Install a NetBackup 7.0 Remote Admin Console or 7.0 master server on AgentHost1 and configure a data collector to collect data from ProdHost1. Install a NetBackup 6.5 Remote Administration Console or 6.5 master server on the AgentHost2 and configure a data collector to collect data from ProdHost2. Install either the Remote Administration Console or master server on AgentHost3 and configure two data collectors: one to collect data from ProdHost3 and another to collect data from ProdHost4. Figure 2-6 illustrates this scenario. Example 1

Figure 2-1

OpsCenter host 1 1. Add Agent1 to OpsCenter AgentHost1: NBU 7.5 ProdHost1: NBU 7.5 1. Install Agent1 2. Select Agent1 for 2. Install 7.5 RAC master ProdHost1 data collection

Figure 2-2

Example 2

OpsCenter host 1 + Agent host 1 1. Install 7.0 RAC or master 2. Add Agent1 to OpsCenter 3. Select Agent1 for ProdHost1 data collection

ProdHost1: NBU 7.0

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation

121

Figure 2-3

Example 3

OpsCenter Host 1 1. Add Agent1 to OpsCenter 2. Select Agent1 for ProdHost1 data collection

ProdHost1: NBU 6.5 + AgentHost1 1. Install Agent1

Figure 2-4

Example 4

OpsCenter host 1 + Agent host 1 1. Install and add Agent1 to OpsCenter 2. Install 6.5 RAC master 3. Select Agent1 for ProdHost1 data collection 4. Use the same Agent for ProdHost2 data collection

ProdHost1: NBU 6.5

ProdHost2: NBU 6.5

122

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation

Figure 2-5

Example 5

AgentHost1 1. Install Agent1 2. Install 7.0 RAC or master

ProdHost1: NBU 7.0

OpsCenter Host1 1. Add Agent1 2. Add Agent2 3. Add Agent3 4. Select Agent1 for ProdHost1 data collection 5. Select Agent2 for ProdHost2 data collection 6. Select Agent3 for ProdHost3 data collection 6. Use the same Agent3 for ProdHost4 data collection

AgentHost2 1. Install Agent2 2. Install 6.5 RAC or master

ProdHost2: NBU 6.5

AgentHost3 1. Install Agent3 2. Install 6.0 MP7 RAC or master

ProdHost3: NBU 6.0 MP7

ProdHost4: NBU 6.0 MP7

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation

123

Figure 2-6

Example 6

Agent Host1 1. install Agent1 2. Install 7.0 RAC or master

ProdHost1: NBU 7.0

OpsCenter Host1 1. Add Agent1 2. Add Agent2 3. Add Agent3 3. Select Agent1 for ProdHost1 data collection 4. Select Agent2 for ProdHost2 data collection 5. Select Agent3 for ProdHost3 data collection 6. Use the same Agent3 for ProdHost4 data collection

ProdHost2: NBU 6.5 Agent Host2 1. Install Agent1 2. Install 6.5 RAC or master

ProdHost3: NBU 6.0MP7

Agent Host3 1. Install Agent2 2. Install 6.0 RAC or master ProdHost4: NBU 6.0 MP7

See Examples of OpsCenter Agent deployment in a NetBackup environment on page 119.

Preparation for install or upgrade

Review the following checklists before installing OpsCenter. Table 2-8 lists the things you must check before you install OpsCenter on a Windows server.

124

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation

Table 2-8 Item

1.

OpsCenter install and upgrade checklist for Windows

Task
Ensure that you install OpsCenter software on a compatible platform. See OpsCenter platform compatibility on page 101.

2.

Ensure that no other installation is in progress while you install OpsCenter. In addition, Symantec recommends that you do not stop the installer forcefully while the OpsCenter upgrade is in progress.

3.

If 8.3 file name creation is disabled on a Windows host, it is recommended that you enable it and restart the Windows host before installing or upgrading to OpsCenter components. If you install or upgrade to OpsCenter components on a Windows host where 8.3 name creation is disabled, then you must do the following:

Install OpsCenter components on a customized (non-default) location like D:\Favorites. The default installation location of OpsCenter components is C:\Program Files\Symantec. The customized location that you provide should not contain spaces or special characters like ( , % etc.

4. 5.

Ensure that the antivirus software is disabled before you install OpsCenter. Ensure that your OpsCenter server is configured as a fixed host with a static IP address. Ensure that the fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of your OpsCenter Server has no more than 44 characters. For a new OpsCenter installation, ensure that the database directory has at least 20 MB of available space. Note that after you install and start using OpsCenter, the database grows in size, and requires more space. See About designing your OpsCenter Server on page 108.

6.

7.

8.

If you have Veritas Backup Reporter (VBR) or NetBackup Operations Manager (NOM) and want to upgrade to OpsCenter 7.5, you must first upgrade to OpsCenter 7.0.x or 7.1.x. You cannot upgrade directly from VBR or NOM to OpsCenter 7.5. See Supported upgrade paths on page 110.

9.

If you plan to upgrade to OpsCenter 7.5, ensure that the available disk space is at least three times the database size. This should be done before you upgrade to OpsCenter 7.5.

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation

125

Table 2-8 Item

10.

OpsCenter install and upgrade checklist for Windows (continued)

Task
Before upgrading to OpsCenter 7.5, Symantec recommends that you take a hot backup of the OpsCenter database (without stopping OpsCenter) using the dbbackup utility. See Backing up the OpsCenter database on page 242.

11.

If you plan to upgrade to OpsCenter 7.5 and have changed the database password, Symantec recommends that you reset the database password to original before performing the upgrade. See Changing the OpsCenter database administrator password on page 231.

12.

If you plan to upgrade both the backup and archiving product like NetBackup, Backup Exec, PureDisk etc. and the OpsCenter components, it is recommended that you upgrade OpsCenter components first. By upgrading OpsCenter components before the backup and archiving product, OpsCenter can start collecting data from the backup or archiving product once it is added to the console. You must perform upgrades in the following order:

Upgrade the OpsCenter Agent Upgrade the OpsCenter Server Upgrade the OpsCenter View Builder Upgrade the backup or archiving product that you are using like NetBackup, EMC NetWorker, IBM TSM etc.

The above order also holds true if you plan to upgrade only OpsCenter and not the backup or archiving product. Always upgrade the OpsCenter Agent first followed by the Server and the View Builder. See Upgrading from OpsCenter 7.0.x or 7.1.x to OpsCenter 7.5 on Windows on page 159. If you plan to upgrade to NetBackup 7.5, visit the NetBackup 7.5 Upgrade Portal: http://www.symantec.com/docs/TECH74584

126

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation

Table 2-8 Item

13.

OpsCenter install and upgrade checklist for Windows (continued)

Task
If you plan to upgrade to OpsCenter 7.5 and have installed the OpsCenter database on a custom location, ensure that the free space on the drive where OS is installed is equal to or more than size of the current OpsCenter database. In case free space on the drive where OS is installed is less than size of the current OpsCenter database, use the following procedure before you upgrade:

1 2

Create a directory (say temp) where the OpsCenter database is installed: <OpsCenterDatabaseCustomLocation>\temp. From My Computer > Properties > Advanced > Environment Variables, create a new system variable with variable name SATMP and value as: <OpsCenterDatabaseCustomLocation>\temp. Run the OpsCenter 7.5 installer. After successful upgrade, delete the environment variable SATMP and the directory temp from <OpsCenterDatabaseCustomLocation>.

3 4

14.

Ensure that the necessary ports are opened before you install OpsCenter on a hardened server. See About communication and firewall considerations on page 247.

15.

Ensure that the name of the folder in which you install OpsCenter does not contain any special characters such as %, ~, !, @, $, &, ^, or #. If a file called program exists in the C: folder of your OpsCenter Server, rename or delete the file before you install OpsCenter. If you need to monitor a single master server, install OpsCenter on the NetBackup master server or media server (recommended). Ensure that the system on which the OpsCenter server is installed has valid values for the following OS parameters:

16.

17.

18.

Display language Location

Check your respective OS documentation for more information on these parameters. 19. Install OpsCenter Server, Agent, and View Builder of the same versions. For example, Server 7.5 is only compatible with Agent 7.5 and View Builder 7.5.

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation

127

Table 2-8 Item

20.

OpsCenter install and upgrade checklist for Windows (continued)

Task
You must not install OpsCenter components on an IPv6 system. OpsCenter 7.5 is not supported on an IPv6 system. Also in case OpsCenter components are installed on a dual stack IPv4 and IPv6 host, the default IP must be IPv4 and the hostname of the system must be configured accordingly.

21.

In a clustered environment, first upgrade OpsCenter Server on the active node and then on the passive nodes.

Table 2-9 lists the things you must check before you install OpsCenter on a UNIX server. Table 2-9 Item
1.

OpsCenter install and upgrade checklist for UNIX

Task
Ensure that you install OpsCenter software on a supported platform. See OpsCenter platform compatibility on page 101.

2.

Ensure that no other installation is in progress while you install OpsCenter. In addition, Symantec recommends that you do not stop the installer forcefully while the OpsCenter upgrade is in progress.

3.

Ensure that your OpsCenter Server is configured as a fixed host with a static IP address. Ensure that the OpsCenter Server does not have a symbolic link to the /opt directory. Ensure that the fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of your OpsCenter Server has no more than 44 characters. For a new OpsCenter installation, ensure that the database directory has at least 20 MB of available space. Note that once you install and start using OpsCenter, the database grows in size, and requires more space. See About designing your OpsCenter Server on page 108.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Ensure that the necessary ports are opened before you install OpsCenter on a hardened server. See About communication and firewall considerations on page 247.

8.

If you need to monitor a single master server, install OpsCenter on the NetBackup master server or media server (recommended).

128

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation

Table 2-9 Item

9.

OpsCenter install and upgrade checklist for UNIX (continued)

Task
Ensure that the name of the folder in which you install OpsCenter does not contain any special characters such as %, ~, !, @, $, &, ^, or #. Ensure that the system on which the OpsCenter server is installed has valid values for the following OS parameters:

10.

Display language Location

Check your respective OS documentation for more information on these parameters. 11. Install OpsCenter Server, Agent, and View Builder of the same versions. For example, Server 7.5 is only compatible with Agent 7.5 and View Builder 7.5. If you have Veritas Backup Reporter (VBR) or NetBackup Operations Manager (NOM) and want to upgrade to OpsCenter 7.5, you must first upgrade to OpsCenter 7.0.x or 7.1.x. It is not possible to upgrade directly from VBR or NOM to OpsCenter 7.5. See Supported upgrade paths on page 110. 13. If you plan to upgrade to OpsCenter 7.5, ensure that the available disk space is at least three times the database size. This should be done before you upgrade to OpsCenter 7.5. If you plan to upgrade to OpsCenter 7.5 and have changed the database password, Symantec recommends that you reset the database password to original before performing the upgrade. See Changing the OpsCenter database administrator password on page 231. 15. Before upgrading to OpsCenter 7.5, Symantec recommends that you take a hot backup of the OpsCenter database (without stopping OpsCenter) using the dbbackup utility. See Backing up the OpsCenter database on page 242.

12.

14.

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About planning an OpsCenter installation

129

Table 2-9 Item

16.

OpsCenter install and upgrade checklist for UNIX (continued)

Task
If you plan to upgrade both the backup and archiving product like NetBackup, Backup Exec, PureDisk etc. and the OpsCenter components, it is recommended that you upgrade OpsCenter components first. By upgrading OpsCenter components before the backup and archiving product, OpsCenter can start collecting data from the backup or archiving product once it is added to the console. You must perform upgrades in the following order:

Upgrade the OpsCenter Agent Upgrade the OpsCenter Server Upgrade the OpsCenter View Builder Upgrade the backup or archiving product that you are using like NetBackup, EMC NetWorker, IBM TSM etc.

The above order also holds true if you plan to upgrade only OpsCenter and not the backup or archiving product. Always upgrade the OpsCenter Agent first followed by the Server and the View Builder. See Upgrading from OpsCenter 7.0.x or 7.1.x to OpsCenter 7.5 on UNIX on page 166. If you plan to upgrade to NetBackup 7.5, visit the NetBackup 7.5 Upgrade Portal: http://www.symantec.com/docs/TECH74584 17. If you plan to upgrade to OpsCenter 7.5 and have installed the OpsCenter database on a custom location, ensure that the free space on /tmp is equal to or more than the size of current OpsCenter database. In case the free space on /tmp is less than size of the current OpsCenter database, use the following procedure before you upgrade:

1 2

Create a directory (say temp) where the OpsCenter database is installed: <OpsCenterDatabaseCustomLocation>/temp. Export a variable named SATMP with the value of this variable as <OpsCenterDatabaseCustomLocation>/temp. Use the following command: export SATMP=<OpsCenterDatabaseCustomLocation>/temp

3 4

Run the OpsCenter 7.5 installer. After successful upgrade, unset the environment variable SATMP and remove the temp directory from <OpsCenterDatabaseCustomLocation>. Use the following command to unset the SATMP variable: unset SATMP

130

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX

Table 2-9 Item

18.

OpsCenter install and upgrade checklist for UNIX (continued)

Task
You must not install OpsCenter components like Server, Agent, or View Builder on an IPv6 system. OpsCenter 7.5 is not supported on an IPv6 system. Also in case OpsCenter components are installed on a dual stack IPv4 and IPv6 host, the default IP must be IPv4 and the hostname of the system must be configured accordingly.

19.

In a clustered environment, first upgrade OpsCenter Server on the active node and then on the passive nodes.

Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX

This section describes the procedures for fresh installation of OpsCenter 7.5 on Windows and UNIX hosts. You can also upgrade from an earlier NOM, VBR, or OpsCenter installation. See About upgrading to OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX on page 158. You can install OpsCenter 7.5 in a clustered mode. See About clustering Symantec OpsCenter on page 193. Table 2-10 provides steps to install OpsCenter components. You can use this table as a checklist while installing Symantec OpsCenter.

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX

131

Table 2-10 Step number

1

Steps to install, upgrade, and cluster Symantec OpsCenter Reference topic

See About planning an OpsCenter installation on page 93. See OpsCenter platform compatibility on page 101.

Step

Review the hardware requirements and software requirements for OpsCenter Server and Agent hosts, carefully. Make sure that you satisfy the operating system requirements. Go through the firewall settings and port number information. Go through the Agent deployment section. Review the Install/Upgrade checklists before installing OpsCenter.

See About communication and firewall considerations on page 247. See About planning an OpsCenter Agent deployment on page 111. See Preparation for install or upgrade on page 123.

Go through the appropriate installation section. Different sections are available for fresh installation, upgrade, and clustering.

See About installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 on Windows on page 131. See About installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 on UNIX on page 137. See About upgrading to OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX on page 158. See About clustering Symantec OpsCenter on page 193.

Note: After installation, verify

if OpsCenter is running properly.

About installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 on Windows

Use the Installation Wizard to install OpsCenter on a Windows host. The three OpsCenter DVD's contain OpsCenter 7.5 software for all available platforms. Review the following considerations before installing OpsCenter components on Windows:

Symantec recommends that you enable 8.3 file name creation before installing OpsCenter components. If 8.3 file name creation is disabled, enable it and restart the Windows host before installing or upgrading to OpsCenter components. You must not run any other installation while installing OpsCenter components. Additionally after an installation is complete, you should wait for some time before installing other OpsCenter components.

132

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX

Note: Symantec recommends that you do not cancel or interrupt the installation process once it is started. See Installing Symantec OpsCenter Server on Windows on page 132. See Installing Symantec OpsCenter Agent on Windows on page 134. See Installing Symantec OpsCenter View Builder on Windows on page 135.

Installing Symantec OpsCenter Server on Windows

Use the following procedure to install Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 Server on Windows hosts. Note: In case you try to install OpsCenter 7.5 components on a system where OpsCenter 7.5 is already installed, the installer runs in a Maintenance mode. Maintenance mode lets you repair or remove the OpsCenter component that is installed on your system. To install OpsCenter Server on Windows

1 2

On a Windows host where you want to install OpsCenter Server, insert the OpsCenter product DVD in the DVD drive.

If autorun is enabled, the Symantec DVD Browser appears. If autorun is not enabled, click Start > Run. On the Run dialog box, in the Open text box, type D:\Browser.exe and press Enter: Where D is the DVD drive. The Symantec DVD Browser appears.

3 4 5 6

On the Symantec DVD browser, click the Installation link. Click the OpsCenter Server Installation link to install Symantec OpsCenter server. The Symantec OpsCenter Installation Wizard appears. Click Next. Read the license agreement, check I accept the terms of the license agreement and click Next. You may opt to check or uncheck Participate in the NetBackup Product Improvement Program. This option is checked by default. If you check this option, the installer uploads installation deployment and product usage information to Symantec automatically and in a secured manner. This data would help Symantec to guide future product development and also analyze issues.

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX

133

The following options are displayed on the Installation Choice screen:

Install to this computer only Select this option to install OpsCenter Server on this host. Install a clustered OpsCenter Select this option to install OpsCenter Server on all Server selected nodes, in a clustered mode. You need to install OpsCenter Server manually on each node of the cluster. This option is enabled if you have Veritas Cluster Server (VCS) installed. See Clustering Symantec OpsCenter on Windows on page 196. See Clustering Symantec OpsCenter Server on Solaris on page 208.

Select Install to this computer only. In the Installation Method section, click Typical to use the default settings, installation location, or port numbers. Also compare the space that is required by the installation with the actual space available in the installation directory. Click Custom if you want to change the default settings, locations, or port numbers. Click Next.

On the License Keys panel, enter your demo or permanent key that you have received with the purchase of OpsCenter and click Add Key. See Symantec OpsCenter Analytics license keys on page 97. You can also add the license keys later from the OpsCenter console. See About managing licenses on page 272.

Click Next. The installer shows the summary of the settings that you have selected for installation. Check Save Summary to field to save the installation summary. Click Browse to save the installation summary in your preferred location.

10 Click Install.
The installer starts installing the OpsCenter Server software. Note: The default OpsCenter database location on Windows is:
C:\Program Files\Symantec\OpsCenter\server\db\data

134

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX

11 After successful installation, you can view the OpsCenter console or view
installation logs. The installation logs are generated in the following location:%ALLUSERSPROFILE%\Symantec\OpsCenter\ INSTALLLOGS\OpsCenterServerInstallLog.htm. If you run the installer in a maintenance mode later,OpsCenterServerMaintenanceInstallLog.htm is also generated in the same location.

12 Click Finish.

Installing Symantec OpsCenter Agent on Windows

Use the following procedure to install Symantec OpsCenter Agent on a Windows host. To install OpsCenter Agent on Windows

You can install the OpsCenter Agent either on the OpsCenter Server host, product host, or a separate host. To decide where you want to install the OpsCenter Agent, review the information on Agent deployments. See About planning an OpsCenter Agent deployment on page 111.

2 3

On a Windows host where you want to install OpsCenter Agent, insert the OpsCenter product DVD in the DVD drive.

If autorun is enabled, the Symantec DVD Browser appears. If autorun is not enabled, click Start > Run. On the Run dialog box, in the Open text box, type D:\Browser.exe and press Enter: Where D is the DVD drive. The Symantec DVD Browser appears.

4 5 6

On the Symantec DVD Browser, click the Installation link. Click the OpsCenter Agent Installation link to install OpsCenter Agent. The Symantec OpsCenter Installation Wizard appears. Click Next.

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX

135

Read the license agreement, check I accept the terms of the license agreement and click Next. You may opt to check or uncheck Participate in the NetBackup Product Improvement Program. This option is checked by default. If you check this option, the installer uploads installation deployment and product usage information to Symantec automatically and in a secured manner. This data would help Symantec to guide future product development and also analyze issues.

The default installation location is C:\Program Files\Symantec. To install OpsCenter to a different directory, click Browse. Click Next.

The installer shows the summary of the settings that you have selected for Agent installation. Check Save Summary to field to save the installation summary. Click Browse to save the installation summary in your preferred location.

10 Click Install.
The installer starts installation of OpsCenter Agent.

11 After successful installation, you can view Agent installation logs or open
the readme file. The installation logs are generated in the following location:%ALLUSERSPROFILE%\Symantec\OpsCenter\INSTALLLOGS\OpsCenterAgentInstallLog.htm. If you run the installer in a maintenance mode later,OpsCenterAgentMaintenanceInstallLog.htm is also generated in the same location.

12 Click Finish.

Installing Symantec OpsCenter View Builder on Windows

Use the following procedure to install Symantec OpsCenter View Builder. To install OpsCenter View Builder on Windows

1 2

On the OpsCenter Server host, insert the OpsCenter product DVD in the DVD drive.

If autorun is enabled, the Symantec DVD Browser appears. If autorun is not enabled, click Start > Run. On the Run dialog box, in the Open text box, type D:\Browser.exe and press Enter: Where D is the DVD drive.

136

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX

The Symantec DVD Browser appears.

3 4 5 6

On the Symantec DVD Browser, click the Installation link. Click the OpsCenter View Builder Installation link to install Symantec OpsCenter View Builder. The Symantec OpsCenter Installation Wizard appears. Click Next. Read the license agreement, check I accept the terms of the license agreement and click Next. You may opt to check or uncheck Participate in the NetBackup Product Improvement Program. This option is checked by default. If you check this option, the installer uploads installation deployment and product usage information to Symantec automatically and in a secured manner. This data would help Symantec to guide future product development and also analyze issues.

On the Installation Location screen, click Browse if you want to change the default location for Symantec OpsCenter View Builder installation. Note: The default installation location on a Windows 64-bit computer is C:\Program Files (x86)\Symantec.

8 9

Select a new location and click Next. The installer shows the summary of the settings that you have selected for Symantec OpsCenter View Builder installation. Check Save Summary to field to save the installation summary. Click Browse to save the installation summary in your preferred location.

10 Click Install.
The installer starts installation of Symantec OpsCenter View Builder.

11 After successful installation, you can view the installation logs or open the
readme file. The installation logs are generated in the following location:%ALLUSERSPROFILE%\Symantec\OpsCenter\
INSTALLLOGS\OpsCenterViewBuilderInstallLog.htm.

If you run the installer in a maintenance mode later,OpsCenterViewBuilderMaintenanceInstallLog.htm is also generated in the same location.

12 Click Finish.

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX

137

About installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 on UNIX

This section provides you with the procedure to install OpsCenter on a UNIX host. You can install OpsCenter components from the OpsCenter DVD's. Three DVD's for OpsCenter are availableone for Windows and two for UNIX. Select the appropriate OpsCenter DVD based on the platform on which you plan to install. Note: Symantec recommends that you do not cancel or interrupt the installation process once it is started. See Installing Symantec OpsCenter Server 7.5 on UNIX on page 137. See Installing Symantec OpsCenter Agent on UNIX on page 140.

Installing Symantec OpsCenter Server 7.5 on UNIX

Use the following procedure to install OpsCenter Server 7.5 software on UNIX hosts. To install OpsCenter Server 7.5 on UNIX

1 2 3

Open a UNIX console and log on as root on the target host. Mount the appropriate OpsCenter product DVD on the computer where you are installing OpsCenter 7.5. Type the following command: ./install. Press Enter. If you install OpsCenter on Solaris SPARC, select Server from the displayed options (Server and Agent). Press Enter to install OpsCenter Server.

4 5

The Welcome message is displayed. Press Enter to continue. The installer then checks if OpsCenter Server is installed on the system or not. It prompts you in case OpsCenter Server is already installed. The installer also examines the system for existing packages. The installer displays a list of components that get installed like PBX, AT, OpsCenter Server, OpsCenter GUI etc. Review this list and press Enter to continue.

138

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX

The installer prompts you with the following question:

Where do you want to install Symantec OpsCenter? </opt>

Type a directory path where you want to install the Symantec OpsCenter Server packages and press Enter. To accept the default path (/opt), press Enter without typing a directory path.

8 9

Type y to confirm the directory path and press Enter. The installer prompts you with the following question:
Participate in the NetBackup Product Improvement Program? [y,n,q] (y)

If you type y and press Enter, the installer uploads installation deployment and product usage information to Symantec automatically and in a secured manner. This data would help Symantec to guide future product development and also analyze issues.

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX

139

10 OpsCenter Server is installed on the system.

The installer prompts for the following information:
Specify a local directory for the Symantec OpsCenter database. A directory named 'OpsCenterServer' will be created within the directory that you specify. (/var/symantec/)

Type a directory path under which to install the OpsCenter database and press Enter. If you create an alternate database directory, the script creates the folder OpsCenterServer below your directory. To accept the default database installation directory (/var/Symantec), press Enter without typing a directory path. In case the database installation directory (/var/symantec) does not exist on the host, the following information is displayed:
Directory "/var/symantec" does not exist. Do you want to create the directory? [y,n,q] y

Type y to confirm and press Enter. The following information is displayed:

The OpsCenter database server may require up to 1 GB of temporary space at runtime. By default, temporary files will be created in the database installation directory /var/Symantec/OpsCenterServer

11 You are prompted with the following message:

Would you like to use an alternate directory for database server temporary space? [y,n,q] (n)

To use the database installation directory for database server temporary space, press Enter without typing a directory path. To specify an alternate directory, type y and press Enter. Type a directory path for the database server temporary space and press Enter.

12 Review the installation options you selected. The location of database directory
and the database temp directory is also displayed.

140

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX

13 Type y and press Enter to confirm the selection and continue.

Type n and press Enter to repeat the configuration steps and revise your selection. Configuration changes are made to the system.

14 You are prompted for license information. The installer prompts you with
the following:
Please enter a Symantec OpsCenter Analytics license key or press <Return>:

Enter a valid demo or permanent key that you have received with the purchase of OpsCenter and press Enter. If you do not enter a key, you get an unlicensed version. With the unlicensed version (Symantec OpsCenter), you cannot access the licensed features. See Symantec OpsCenter Analytics license keys on page 97. You can also add the license keys later from the OpsCenter console. See About managing licenses on page 272.

Installing Symantec OpsCenter Agent on UNIX

You can now install OpsCenter Agent in a local zone on UNIX platforms. However if you are installing OpsCenter Agent in a local zone on Solaris SPARC, you must first install VRTSperl component in global zone. This is because VRTSperl is not supported in local zones. To install VRTSperl in a global zone on Solaris SPARC

1 2

Login to the global zone on the system. Navigate to the sol_sparc directory: cd <INSTALL_DIR>/Agent/pkgs/sol_sparc

Run the following command:

/usr/sbin/pkgadd -d VRTSperl.pkg

Once VRTSperl installation is complete, login to the local zone and install the OpsCenter Agent.

Use the following procedure to install OpsCenter Agent on UNIX.

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX

141

To install OpsCenter Agent on UNIX

1 2 3

Open a UNIX console and log on as root on the target host. Mount the appropriate OpsCenter product DVD on the computer where you plan to install OpsCenter Agent. Type the following command:
./install. Press Enter.

4 5 6 7 8

Select Agent from the displayed options (Server and Agent). Press Enter to install OpsCenter Agent. The Welcome message is displayed. Press Enter to continue. The installer then checks if OpsCenter Agent is installed on the system or not. It prompts you in case OpsCenter Agent is already installed. The installer displays a list of components that get installed like PBX, Symantec WebGUI Agent etc. Review this list and press Enter to continue. It is optional to configure the OpsCenter Agent during installation. You may choose to configure OpsCenter Agent later either manually or by running /opt/VRTS/install/installOpsCenterAgent -configure command. Note: The install OpsCenter Agent script is also present in the Solaris_Sparc64/Agent directory of the DVD. To configure OpsCenterAgent now, type y and press Enter.

Enter the location where you want to install OpsCenter Agent. Type a directory path where you want to install the Symantec OpsCenter Agent packages and press Enter. To accept the default path (/opt), press Enter without typing a directory path.

10 Type y and then press Enter to confirm your installation options. 11 The installer prompts you with the following question:
Participate in the NetBackup Product Improvement Program? [y,n,q] (y)

If you type y and press Enter, the installer uploads installation deployment and product usage information to Symantec automatically and in a secured manner. This data would help Symantec to guide future product development and also analyze issues.

12 The OpsCenter Agent is installed. You can view the installation log files,
summary, and response files on the path mentioned.

142

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX

About installing Symantec OpsCenter silently on Windows

This section explains how you can install the OpsCenter components silently on Windows platform. It also covers how you can track the progress of silent installation and some troubleshooting tips. See Installing OpsCenter Server software silently on page 142. See About editing the response file on page 154. See About tracking the progress of silent installation on page 155.

Installing OpsCenter Server software silently

A silent installation avoids the need for interactive input. A silent installation uses a response file to automate OpsCenter installation. Use a silent installation when you need to perform an identical installation on several servers. You must create a response file first and then use the file to perform a silent installation. The procedure for creating a response file requires that you run through the Installation Wizard. The values that you specify in the Wizard pages are saved to the response file. You can also edit the response file if required. See About editing the response file on page 154. Note the following points about silent installation:

Silent installation of OpsCenter is only supported on Windows platforms. Silent installation of OpsCenter is not supported on clusters.

To install OpsCenter server software silently

1 2 3

Log on as administrator to the system where you want to install OpsCenter server software. Insert the appropriate OpsCenter product DVD in the DVD drive. Open the command prompt on your system. Navigate to <DVD Drive>\<Architecture>\Server directory. Example: D:\x86\Server

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX

143

Enter the following command:

SETUP.EXE -NoInstall

Note that the switch -NoInstall is case-sensitive . This command starts the Installation Wizard where you can specify your preferences. Note that the Installation Wizard creates the response file based on your inputs and does not install the product.

5 6

The Welcome panel of the Symantec OpsCenter Installation Wizard appears. Click Next. Read the license agreement, check I accept the terms of the license agreement and click Next. You may opt to check or uncheck Participate in the NetBackup Product Improvement Program. This option is checked by default. If you check this option, the installer uploads installation deployment and product usage information to Symantec automatically and in a secured manner. This data would help Symantec to guide future product development and also analyze issues.

Select Install to this computer only on the Installation Choice panel. In the Installation Method section, click Typical to use the default settings, installation location, or port numbers. Also compare the space that is required by the installation with the actual space available in the installation directory. Note: Click Custom if you want to change the default settings, locations, or port numbers. Click Next.

On the License Keys panel, enter your demo or permanent key that you have received with the purchase of OpsCenter and click Add Key. If you do not enter a key, you get an unlicensed version. With the unlicensed version (Symantec OpsCenter), you cannot access the licensed features. See Symantec OpsCenter Administrator's Guide for licensing details. Click Next.

The installer shows the summary of the settings that you have selected for installation. Check Save Summary to field to save the installation summary. Click Browse to save the installation summary in your preferred location. Click Install. Note that clicking Install does not install the product.

10 The Installation Status panel is displayed. Click Finish.

144

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX

11 A response file named Server-<DD-MM-YY-HH-MIN-SS>.XML is created at the

following location:
%TEMP%\Symantec\OpsCenter

This XML file can be used to install OpsCenter Server software on multiple computers.

12 On the command prompt, ensure that you are in the directory where
SETUP.EXE is located.

13 Enter the following command to run the silent installation:

SETUP -Silent -RespFile <path of the response file>

Example: Setup -Silent -RespFile C:\Server-07-12-09-06-11-31.xml Note that the switches -Silent and -RespFile are case-sensitive .

14 The installation logs are generated in the following location:

%ALLUSERSPROFILE%\Symantec\OpsCenter\ INSTALLLOGS\OpsCenterServerInstallLog.htm.

If you run the installer in a maintenance mode later,OpsCenterServerMaintenanceInstallLog.htm is also generated in the same location. See the following section to track the progress of the installation. See About tracking the progress of silent installation on page 155. After successful installation, you can see Symantec OpsCenter Server in Add/Remove Programs. To install OpsCenter Agent silently

1 2 3

Log on as administrator to the system where you want to install OpsCenter Agent software. Insert the appropriate OpsCenter product DVD in the DVD drive. Open the command prompt on your system. Navigate to <DVD Drive>\<Architecture>\Agent directory. Example: D:\x86\Agent

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX

145

Enter the following command:

SETUP.EXE -NoInstall

Note that the switch -NoInstall is case-sensitive . This command starts the Installation Wizard where you can specify your preferences. Note that the Installation Wizard creates the response file based on your inputs and does not install the product.

5 6

The Symantec OpsCenter Installation Wizard appears. Click Next. Read the license agreement, check I accept the terms of the license agreement and click Next. You may opt to check or uncheck Participate in the NetBackup Product Improvement Program. This option is checked by default. If you check this option, the installer uploads installation deployment and product usage information to Symantec automatically and in a secured manner. This data would help Symantec to guide future product development and also analyze issues.

The default installation location is C:\Program Files\Symantec. To install OpsCenter to a different directory, click Browse. Click Next.

The installer shows the summary of the settings that you have selected for Agent installation. Check Save Summary to field to save the installation summary. Click Browse to save the installation summary in your preferred location. Click Install. Note that clicking Install does not install the product.

10 The Installation Status panel is displayed. Click Finish. 11 A response file named Agent-<DD-MM-YY-HH-MIN-SS>.XML is created at the
following location:
%TEMP%\Symantec\OpsCenter

This XML file can be used to install OpsCenter Agent software on multiple computers.

12 On the command prompt, ensure that you are in the directory where
SETUP.EXE is located.

146

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX

13 Enter the following command to run the silent installation:

SETUP -Silent -RespFile <path of the response file>

Example: Setup -Silent -RespFile C:\Agent-07-12-09-06-11-31.xml Note that the switches -Silent and -RespFile are case-sensitive .

14 The installation logs are generated in the following location:

%ALLUSERSPROFILE%\Symantec\OpsCenter\ INSTALLLOGS\OpsCenterAgentInstallLog.htm.

If you run the installer in a maintenance mode later,OpsCenterAgentMaintenanceInstallLog.htm is also generated in the same location. See the following section to track the progress of the installation. See About tracking the progress of silent installation on page 155. After successful installation, you can see Symantec OpsCenter Agent in Add/Remove Programs. To install View Builder silently

1 2 3

Log on as administrator to the system where you want to install OpsCenter View Builder software. Insert the appropriate OpsCenter product DVD in the DVD drive. Open the command prompt on your system. Navigate to <DVD Drive>\<Architecture>\ViewBuilder directory. Example: D:\x86\ViewBuilder

Enter the following command:

SETUP.EXE -NoInstall

Note that the -NoInstall switch is case-sensitive . This command starts the Installation Wizard where you can specify your preferences. Note that the Installation Wizard creates the response file based on your inputs and does not install the product.

The Symantec OpsCenter Installation Wizard appears. Click Next.

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX

147

Read the license agreement, check I accept the terms of the license agreement and click Next. You may opt to check or uncheck Participate in the NetBackup Product Improvement Program. This option is checked by default. If you check this option, the installer uploads installation deployment and product usage information to Symantec automatically and in a secured manner. This data would help Symantec to guide future product development and also analyze issues.

The default installation location is C:\Program Files\Symantec. To install OpsCenter View Builder to a different directory, click Browse. Note: The default installation location on a Windows 64-bit computer is C:\Program Files (x86)\Symantec. Click Next.

The installer shows the summary of the settings that you have selected for Symantec OpsCenter View Builder installation. Check Save Summary to field to save the installation summary. Click Browse to save the installation summary in your preferred location.

Click Install. Note that clicking Install does not install the product.

10 The Installation Status panel is displayed. Click Finish. 11 A response file named ViewBuilder-<DD-MM-YY-HH-MIN-SS>.XML is created
at the following location:
%TEMP%\Symantec\OpsCenter

This XML file can be used to install OpsCenter View Builder software on multiple computers.

12 On the command prompt, ensure that you are in the directory where
SETUP.EXE is located.

148

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX

13 Enter the following command to run the silent installation:

SETUP -Silent -RespFile <path of the response file>

Example: Setup -Silent -RespFile

C:\ViewBuilder-07-12-09-06-11-31.xml

Note that the switches -Silent and -RespFile are case-sensitive .

14 The installation logs are generated in the following location:

%ALLUSERSPROFILE%\Symantec\OpsCenter\ INSTALLLOGS\OpsCenterViewBuilderInstallLog.htm.

If you run the installer in a maintenance mode later,OpsCenterViewBuilderMaintenanceInstallLog.htm is also generated in the same location. See the following section to track the progress of the installation. See About tracking the progress of silent installation on page 155. After successful installation, you can see Symantec OpsCenter View Builder in Add/Remove Programs.

Upgrading silently from OpsCenter 7.0.x and 7.1.x to OpsCenter 7.5

Use the following procedures to upgrade to OpsCenter components silently. To upgrade from OpsCenter 7.0.x Server or OpsCenter 7.1.x Server to OpsCenter 7.5 Server

1 2 3 4

If you are using OpsCenter to monitor NetBackup, ensure that you upgrade OpsCenter first before upgrading NetBackup. Log on as administrator to the OpsCenter 7.0.x or 7.1.x system that you want to upgrade to OpsCenter 7.5. Insert the appropriate OpsCenter DVD in the DVD drive. Open the command prompt on your system. Navigate to <DVD Drive>\<Architecture>\Server directory. Example: D:\x86\Server

Enter the following command:

SETUP.EXE -NoInstall

Note that the -NoInstall switch is case-sensitive . This command starts the Installation Wizard where you can specify your preferences. Note that the Installation Wizard creates the response file based on your inputs and does not install the product.

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX

149

The Installation Wizard detects an existing installation of OpsCenter 7.0.x or 7.1.x on the system. For example, the following message may be displayed on the Welcome screen:
The Installation has detected that the following software is already installed on your system: Symantec OpsCenter Server: Version 7.0 In order to upgrade to a newer version, the existing Symantec OpsCenter Server will be removed.

Click Next.

Read the license agreement, check I accept the terms of the license agreement and click Next. You may opt to check or uncheck Participate in the NetBackup Product Improvement Program. This option is checked by default. If you check this option, the installer uploads installation deployment and product usage information to Symantec automatically and in a secured manner. This data would help Symantec to guide future product development and also analyze issues.

In the Installation Method section, click Typical to use the default settings, installation location, or port numbers. Typical is selected by default. Also compare the space that is required for installing OpsCenter server and the actual space that is available. Click Next. Note: The Custom option is disabled when you upgrade from 7.0.x (or 7.1.x) to OpsCenter 7.5. You cannot customize the default settings, locations, or port numbers while upgrading from OpsCenter 7.0.x or 7.1.x to OpsCenter 7.5.

Specify a location for saving the old OpsCenter 7.0.x or 7.1.x database. The default location is C:\Program Files\Symantec\OpsCenter_SavedData. Click Browse to specify a different location. In case the directory C:\Program Files\Symantec\OpsCenter_SavedData does not exist, you are prompted to create it. Click Yes to create the directory. Note: Ensure that the database location has adequate space by going through the Disk space requirements section on this page. A green checkmark appears in the Required column if there is adequate disk space.

150

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX

10 On the License Keys panel, enter your demo or permanent key that you have
received with the purchase of OpsCenter and click Add Key. See Symantec OpsCenter Analytics license keys on page 97. Click Next.

11 The installer shows a summary of the installation settings.

Check Save Summary to option to save the installation summary. Click Browse to save the installation summary in your preferred location. Click Install. Note that clicking Install does not install the product.

12 The Installation Status panel is displayed. Click Finish. 13 A response file named Server-<DD-MM-YY-HH-MIN-SS>.XML is created at the
following location:
%TEMP%\Symantec\OpsCenter

This XML file can be used to upgrade OpsCenter Server software on multiple computers.

14 On the command prompt, ensure that you are in the directory where
SETUP.EXE is located.

15 Enter the following command to run the silent installation:

SETUP -Silent -RespFile <path of the response file>

Example: Setup -Silent -RespFile C:\Server-07-12-10-06-11-31.xml Note that the switches -Silent and -RespFile are case-sensitive .

16 The installation logs are generated in the following location:

%ALLUSERSPROFILE%\Symantec\OpsCenter\ INSTALLLOGS\OpsCenterServerInstallLog.htm.

If you run the installer in a maintenance mode later,OpsCenterServerMaintenanceInstallLog.htm is also generated in the same location. See the following section to track the progress of the installation. See About tracking the progress of silent installation on page 155. After successful installation, you can see Symantec OpsCenter Server 7.5 in Add/Remove Programs.

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX

151

To upgrade silently from OpsCenter 7.0.x or 7.1.x Agent to OpsCenter 7.5 Agent

1 2 3 4

If you are using OpsCenter to monitor NetBackup, ensure that you upgrade OpsCenter first before upgrading NetBackup. Log on as administrator to the OpsCenter Agent system that you want to upgrade. Insert the appropriate OpsCenter DVD in the DVD drive. Open the command prompt on your system. Navigate to <<DVD Drive>\Architecture>\Agent directory. Example: D:\x86\Agent

Enter the following command:

SETUP.EXE -NoInstall

Note that the -NoInstall switch is case-sensitive. This command starts the Installation Wizard where you can specify your preferences. Note that the Installation Wizard creates the response file based on your inputs and does not install the product.

The Symantec OpsCenter Installation Wizard appears. The Installation Wizard detects an existing installation of OpsCenter 7.0.x or 7.1.x Agent on the system. Based on your installed OpsCenter Agent version, the following message may be displayed on the Welcome screen:
The Installation has detected that the following software is already installed on your system: Symantec OpsCenter Agent: Version 7.0 In order to upgrade to a to a newer version, the existing Symantec OpsCenter Agent will be removed.

Click Next to continue.

Read the license agreement, check I accept the terms of the license agreement and click Next. You may opt to check or uncheck Participate in the NetBackup Product Improvement Program. This option is checked by default. If you check this option, the installer uploads installation deployment and product usage information to Symantec automatically and in a secured manner. This data would help Symantec to guide future product development and also analyze issues.

152

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX

The installer shows a summary of the settings that you have selected for Symantec OpsCenter Agent installation. Check Save Summary to field to save the installation summary. Click Browse to save the installation summary in your preferred location. Click Install. Note that clicking Install does not install the product.

The Installation Status panel is displayed. Click Finish. following location:

%TEMP%\Symantec\OpsCenter\

10 A response file named Agent-<DD-MM-YY-HH-MIN-SS>.XML is created at the

This XML file can be used to upgrade OpsCenter 7.0.x or 7.1.x Agent software on multiple computers.

11 On the command prompt, ensure that you are in the directory where
SETUP.EXE is located.

12 Enter the following command to run the silent installation:

SETUP -Silent -RespFile <path of the response file>

Example: Setup -Silent -RespFile C:\Agent-07-12-09-06-11-31.xml Note that the switches -Silent and -RespFile are case-sensitive .

13 The installation logs are generated in the following location:

%ALLUSERSPROFILE%\Symantec\OpsCenter\ INSTALLLOGS\OpsCenterAgentInstallLog.htm.

If you run the installer in a maintenance mode later,OpsCenterAgentMaintenanceInstallLog.htm is also generated in the same location. See the following section to track the progress of the installation. See About tracking the progress of silent installation on page 155. After successful installation, you can see Symantec OpsCenter Agent 7.5 in Add/Remove Programs. To upgrade silently from OpsCenter 7.0.x or 7.1.x View Builder to OpsCenter 7.5 View Builder

1 2

Log on as administrator to the OpsCenter View Builder system that you want to upgrade. Insert the appropriate OpsCenter DVD in the DVD drive.

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX

153

Open the command prompt on your system. Navigate to <DVD Drive>\<Architecture>\ViewBuilder directory. Example: D:\x86\ViewBuilder

Enter the following command:

SETUP.EXE -NoInstall

Note that the -NoInstall switch is case-sensitive . This command starts the Installation Wizard where you can specify your preferences. Note that the Installation Wizard creates the response file based on your inputs and does not install the product.

The Symantec OpsCenter Installation Wizard appears. The Installation Wizard detects an existing OpsCenter View Builder and shows the following message on the Welcome panel:
The Installation has detected that the following software is already installed on your system: Symantec OpsCenter View Builder: Version 7.0 In order to upgrade to a to a newer version, the existing Symantec OpsCenter View Builder will be removed.

Click Next to continue.

Read the license agreement, check I accept the terms of the license agreement and click Next. You may opt to check or uncheck Participate in the NetBackup Product Improvement Program. This option is checked by default. If you check this option, the installer uploads installation deployment and product usage information to Symantec automatically and in a secured manner. This data would help Symantec to guide future product development and also analyze issues.

The installer shows a summary of the settings that you have selected for Symantec OpsCenter View Builder installation. Check Save Summary to field to save the installation summary. Click Browse to save the installation summary in your preferred location. Click Install.

154

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX

A response file named ViewBuilder-<DD-MM-YY-HH-MIN-SS>.XML is created at the following location:

%TEMP%\Symantec\OpsCenter\

This XML file can be used to upgrade OpsCenter View Builder software on multiple computers.

On the command prompt, ensure that you are in the directory where SETUP.EXE is located.

10 Enter the following command to run silent installation:

Setup -Silent -RespFile <path of the response file>

Example: Setup -Silent -RespFile

C:\ViewBuilder-07-12-10-06-11-31.xml

Note that the switches -Silent and -RespFile are case-sensitive .

11 The installation logs are generated in the following location:

%ALLUSERSPROFILE%\Symantec\OpsCenter\ INSTALLLOGS\OpsCenterViewBuilderInstallLog.htm.

If you run the installer in a maintenance mode later,OpsCenterViewBuilderMaintenanceInstallLog.htm is also generated in the same location. See the following section to track the progress of the installation. See About tracking the progress of silent installation on page 155. After successful installation, you can see Symantec OpsCenter View Builder in Add/Remove Programs.

About editing the response file

You can edit the response file to change any inputs that you provided to the Installation Wizard. The silent installation is based on these inputs. To edit the response file, open it and modify the Value field for the applicable install property. For example, you can modify the OpsCenter installation location, license key information, or database directory in the response file. The following are the contents of a sample response file:

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8" standalone="no" ?> - <XML_Install> - HYPERLINK \l ""- <OpsCenter_Server> <InstallProperty Name="RAN_SETUP" Value="1" /> <InstallProperty Name="SYMTMPPATH" Value="C:\DOCUME~1\ADMINI~1\LOCALS~1\Temp\1\

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX

155

<InstallProperty Name="TELEMETRY_UPLOAD" Value="YES" /> <InstallProperty Name="INSTALLHTMLLOGPATH" Value="C:\Documents and Settings <InstallProperty Name="BUSINESS_REP_LIC_KEYS" Value="0" /> <InstallProperty Name="SCMSTARTTYPE" Value="auto" /> <Installproperty Name="INSTALLPBX" Value="YES" /> <Installproperty Name="STARTSERVICE" Value="YES" /> <InstallProperty Name="INSTALLDIR" Value="C:\Program Files\Symantec\" /> <Installproperty Name="DATABASE_DATA_DIR" Value="C:\Program Files\Symantec\ </OpsCenter_Server> </XML_Install>

For example, you can modify the OpsCenter installation location in this response file by changing the value of INSTALLDIR property from C:\Program Files\Symantec to D:\Symantec. You can also modify the database directory by modifying the value of the DATABASE_DATA_DIR property. Similarly you can edit the license key by changing the value of BUSINESS_REP_LIC_KEYS property. You can also add a new license key by adding <TagValue>License key </TagValue> under <InstallProperty Name="BUSINESS_REP_LIC_KEYS" >. Note that the text that you enter or modify in the response file is case-sensitive. You must save the response file after you modify it. Note: Symantec recommends that you do not change the value of RAN_SETUP, SCMSTARTTYPE, INSTALLPBX, and STARTSERVICE properties.

About tracking the progress of silent installation

When a silent installation is in progress, you can see SETUP.EXE process running in the Processes tab of the Windows Task Manager. In addition, you will also find multiple msiexec.exe processes running in the Task Manager. You can also track if a silent installation is in progress by checking the size of Vxinst.log file. The size of Vxinst.log file increases as silent installation progresses. The Vxinst.log file is generated in %ALLUSERSPROFILE%\SYMANTEC\OPSCENTER\INSTALLLOGS. See Troubleshooting silent installation issues on page 155.

Troubleshooting silent installation issues

Use the following procedure to troubleshoot silent installation issues. This procedure must be performed after the silent installation ends.

156

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX

To troubleshoot silent installation issues

After the silent installation ends, navigate to the following location:

%ALLUSERSPROFILE%\SYMANTEC\OPSCENTER\INSTALLLOGS.

2 3

Check if a file named OpsCenterInstallLog.htm is present. If OpsCenterInstallLog.htm is not present, see 7. Open OpsCenterInstallLog.htm and check the timestamp and the OpsCenter component it is for to ensure that it is the appropriate log file. You must check the timestamp because OpsCenterInstallLog.htm may have been generated as a result of previous silent installations. In addition, the same OpsCenterInstallLog.htm file is generated when you install OpsCenter server, Agent, or View Builder. Hence you must check the specific OpsCenter component that is associated with OpsCenterInstallLog.htm.

You can check the timestamp by opening OpsCenterInstallLog.htm and seeing the first line in the file. For example, the following is the first line from a sample OpsCenterInstallLog.htm file:
01-19-2010,13:35:30: -Silent _RespFile "C:\Documents and Settings\Administrator\Agent-19-01-10-13-04-21.xml"

In this example, the timestamp is 01-19-2010, 13:35:30.

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX

157

To know the OpsCenter component the log file is associated with, search for the following keywords in the OpsCenterInstallLog.htm file:
OpsCenter Server You will find matches when you search for OpsCenter Server in the file. This means that the log file is for OpsCenter server. You will find matches when you search for OpsCenter Agent in the file. This means that the log file is for OpsCenter Agent. You will find matches when you search for OpsCenter View Builder in the file. This means that the log file is for OpsCenter View Builder.

OpsCenter Agent

OpsCenter View Builder

Note: If you have checked the timestamp and the OpsCenter component associated with all present OpsCenterInstallLog.htm files and do not find a valid OpsCenterInstallLog.htm file, see 7.

Use the OpsCenterInstallLog.htm file to troubleshoot silent installation issues. Open the OpsCenterInstallLog.htm file to see if the installation was successful or to understand why the installation failed. This file shows the installation status at the end. Installation errors are flagged in this file in red color. You may also see a description about why the error occurred and troubleshoot accordingly. Ignore the subsequent steps of this procedure.

If OpsCenterInstallLog.htm is not present or you cannot find a valid OpsCenterInstallLog.htmfile, check if OpsCenter<Product>InstallLog.htm file is present. In OpsCenter<Product>InstallLog.htm, <Product> can be Server, Agent, or View Builder depending on the OpsCenter component that you are installing.

158

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About upgrading to OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX

Always ensure that the OpsCenter<Product>InstallLog.htm file is appropriate by checking the timestamp. You can check the timestamp by opening the OpsCenter<Product>InstallLog.htm file and seeing the first line of the file. For example, the following is the first line from a sample OpsCenter<Product>InstallLog.htm file:
01-19-2010,13:35:30: -Silent _RespFile "C:\Documents and Settings\Administrator\Agent-19-01-10-13-04-21.xml"

In this example, the timestamp is 01-19-2010, 13:35:30.

Use the OpsCenter<Product>InstallLog.htm file to troubleshoot silent installation issues. You can open the OpsCenter<Product>InstallLog.htm file to see if the installation was successful or to understand why the installation failed. This file shows the installation status at the end. Installation errors are flagged in this file in red color. You may also see a description about why the error occurred and troubleshoot accordingly.

See About tracking the progress of silent installation on page 155.

About upgrading to OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX

This section describes how you can upgrade from OpsCenter 7.0, 7.0.1, 7.1, or 7.1.0.1 to OpsCenter 7.5 on Windows and UNIX platforms. See About upgrading from OpsCenter 7.0.x or 7.1.x to OpsCenter 7.5 on page 158.

About upgrading from OpsCenter 7.0.x or 7.1.x to OpsCenter 7.5

Use the following procedures to upgrade OpsCenter 7.0.x or 7.1.x components to OpsCenter 7.5 on Windows and UNIX hosts. Review the following considerations before you upgrade:

An alert policy that you had created in OpsCenter 7.0.x or 7.1.x may not be visible when you upgrade to OpsCenter 7.5. This happens if this policy was modified by some other user in OpsCenter 7.0.x or 7.1.x respectively. If there are special characters in a report name like (/ \ * ? | ") in OpsCenter 7.0.x, these special characters are replaced with an underscore '_' when you upgrade to OpsCenter 7.5. For example a media**summary report in OpsCenter 7.0 is renamed as media__summary report in OpsCenter 7.5. This only applies if you are upgrading from OpsCenter 7.0.x to OpsCenter 7.5.

See Upgrading from OpsCenter 7.0.x or 7.1.x to OpsCenter 7.5 on Windows on page 159.

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About upgrading to OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX

159

See Upgrading from OpsCenter 7.0.x or 7.1.x to OpsCenter 7.5 on UNIX on page 166.

Upgrading from OpsCenter 7.0.x or 7.1.x to OpsCenter 7.5 on Windows

Use the following procedure to upgrade OpsCenter 7.0.x or 7.1.x components to OpsCenter 7.5 on Windows hosts. Review the following considerations before installing OpsCenter components on Windows:

If you plan to upgrade both the backup and archiving product like NetBackup, Backup Exec, PureDisk etc. and the OpsCenter components, it is recommended that you upgrade OpsCenter components first. By upgrading OpsCenter components before the backup and archiving product, OpsCenter can start collecting data from the backup or archiving product once it is added to the console. You must perform upgrades in the following order: Serial No. Steps to upgrade
1. 2. 3. Upgrade the OpsCenter Agent Upgrade the OpsCenter Server Upgrade the OpsCenter View Builder

Reference
See Upgrading from OpsCenter 7.0.x or 7.1.x to OpsCenter 7.5 on Windows on page 159. See Upgrading from OpsCenter 7.0.x or 7.1.x to OpsCenter 7.5 on UNIX on page 166.

4.

Upgrade the backup or archiving Refer to the appropriate product product that you are using like manuals. NetBackup, EMC NetWorker, IBM If you plan to upgrade to NetBackup TSM etc. 7.5, visit the NetBackup 7.5 Upgrade Portal: http://www.symantec.com/docs/TECH74584

The above order also holds true if you plan to upgrade only OpsCenter and not the backup or archiving product. Always upgrade the OpsCenter Agent first followed by the Server and the View Builder.

Symantec recommends that you enable 8.3 file name creation before installing OpsCenter components. If 8.3 file name creation is disabled, enable it and restart the Windows host before installing or upgrading to OpsCenter components.

160

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About upgrading to OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX

You must not run any other installation while installing OpsCenter components. Additionally after an installation is complete, you should wait for some time before installing other OpsCenter components. Symantec recommends that you do not cancel or interrupt the installation process once it is started. If you try to install OpsCenter 7.5 components on a system where OpsCenter 7.5 is already installed, the installer runs in Maintenance mode. Maintenance mode lets you repair or remove the OpsCenter 7.5 component that is installed on your system.

To upgrade from OpsCenter Agent 7.0.x or 7.1.x to OpsCenter Agent 7.5 on Windows

If you plan to upgrade your backup product and OpsCenter, ensure that you upgrade OpsCenter first. When upgrading OpsCenter, always upgrade the OpsCenter Agent first followed by the Server and then the View Builder. On a Windows host where you want to install OpsCenter Agent, insert the OpsCenter product DVD in the DVD drive.

2 3

If autorun is enabled, the Symantec DVD Browser appears. If autorun is not enabled, click Start > Run. On the Run dialog box, in the Open text box, type D:\Browser.exe and press Enter: Where D is the DVD drive. The Symantec DVD Browser appears.

4 5 6

On the Symantec DVD Browser, click the Installation link. Click the OpsCenter Agent Installation link to install Symantec OpsCenter Agent 7.5. The Welcome panel of the Installation Wizard appears. The Installation Wizard detects an existing installation of OpsCenter Agent 7.0.x (or 7.1.x) on the system. Depending on the installed version, the following message may be displayed on the Welcome screen:
The Installation has detected that the following software is already installed on your system: Symantec OpsCenter Agent: Version 7.0 In order to upgrade to a to a newer version, the existing Symantec OpsCenter Agent will be removed.

Click Next to continue.

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About upgrading to OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX

161

Note: The Installation Wizard automatically detects and installs 32-bit Agent software on 32-bit Windows platforms and 64-bit Agent software on 64-bit Windows platforms. 32-bit Agent software is not supported on 64-bit Windows platforms. If you have an existing 32-bit Agent installation on a 64-bit system and you install OpsCenter Agent 7.5, the Installer automatically uninstalls the older 32-bit software and installs 64-bit Agent software. You need to perform the following tasks after you upgrade to 64-bit OpsCenter Agent:

If 32-bit Agent software is upgraded to 64-bit, all Agent tuning configurations in OpsCenterAgentService.xml file that you may have made earlier should be performed again manually. The OpsCenterAgentService.xml file is used to specify how much memory is allocated for the Agent Java process and can be located in <INSTALL_PATH>\agent\bin. If 32-bit Agent software is upgraded to 64-bit software and the Agent is not installed on the OpsCenter Server, any Agent configurations in the log.conf file that you may have made earlier must be performed manually again after you upgrade. Possible Agent configuration in log.conf can be changing the Agent logging level etc. The log.conf file is located in <INSTALL_PATH>\agent.

Read the license agreement, check I accept the terms of the license agreement. You may opt to check or uncheck Participate in the NetBackup Product Improvement Program. This option is checked by default. If you check this option, the installer uploads installation deployment and product usage information to Symantec automatically and in a secured manner. This data would help Symantec to guide future product development and also analyze issues. Click Next.

162

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About upgrading to OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX

The installer shows the summary of the installation settings. Check Save summary to option to save the installation summary. Click Browse to save the installation summary in your preferred location. Click Install to begin the installation. The installer installs OpsCenter Agent 7.5 software.

After successful installation, you can view the installation logs or view the Readme. Click Finish. The installation logs are generated in the following location:
%ALLUSERSPROFILE%\Symantec\OpsCenter\INSTALLLOGS\OpsCenterAgentInstallLog.htm

Note: If you run the installer in a maintenance mode later, OpsCenterAgentMaintenanceInstallLog.htm is also generated in the same location. To upgrade from OpsCenter Server 7.0.x or 7.1.x to OpsCenter Server 7.5 on Windows

If you plan to upgrade your backup product and OpsCenter, ensure that you upgrade OpsCenter first. When upgrading OpsCenter, always upgrade the OpsCenter Agent first followed by the Server and then the View Builder. On a Windows host where you want to install OpsCenter Server, insert the appropriate OpsCenter product DVD in the DVD drive.

2 3

If autorun is enabled, the Symantec DVD Browser appears. If autorun is not enabled, click Start > Run. On the Run dialog box, in the Open text box, type D:\Browser.exe and press Enter: Where D is the DVD drive. The Symantec DVD Browser appears.

4 5

On the Symantec DVD Browser, click the Installation link. Click the OpsCenter Server Installation link to install Symantec OpsCenter Server.

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About upgrading to OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX

163

The Welcome panel of the Installation Wizard appears. The Installation Wizard detects an existing installation of OpsCenter Server 7.0.x (or 7.1.x) on the system. Depending on the installed version, the following message may be displayed on the Welcome panel:
The Installation has detected that the following software is already installed on your system: Symantec OpsCenter Server: Version 7.0 In order to upgrade to a newer version, the existing Symantec OpsCenter Server will be removed.

Click Next to continue.

Read the license agreement, check I accept the terms of the license agreement. You may opt to check or uncheck Participate in the NetBackup Product Improvement Program. This option is checked by default. If you check this option, the installer uploads installation deployment and product usage information to Symantec automatically and in a secured manner. This data would help Symantec to guide future product development and also analyze issues. Click Next.

On the Installation Choice panel, click Typical to use the default settings, installation location, or port numbers. Typical is selected by default. Also compare the space that is required for installing OpsCenter Server and the actual space that is available. Note: The Custom option is disabled when you upgrade from 7.0.x (or 7.1.x) to OpsCenter 7.5. You cannot customize the default settings, locations, or port numbers while upgrading from OpsCenter 7.0.x (or 7.1.x) to OpsCenter 7.5. Click Next.

164

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About upgrading to OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX

Specify a location for saving the old OpsCenter database. The default location is C:\Program Files\Symantec\OpsCenter_SavedData. Click Browse to specify a different location. In case the directory C:\Program Files\Symantec\OpsCenter_SavedData does not exist, you are prompted to create it. Click Yes to create the directory. Note: Ensure that the database location has adequate space by going through the Disk space requirements section on this page. A green checkmark appears in the Required column if there is adequate disk space.

10 On the License Keys panel, enter your demo or permanent key that you have
received with the purchase of OpsCenter 7.5 and click Add Key. See Symantec OpsCenter Analytics license keys on page 97.

11 The installer shows the summary of the installation settings. Check Save
summary to option to save the installation summary. Click Browse to save the installation summary in your preferred location. Click Install to begin the installation. The installer installs OpsCenter Server 7.5 software and also migrates data from OpsCenter 7.0.x or 7.1.x to the OpsCenter 7.5 database. The database migration may take some time based on the size of your database.

12 After successful installation, you can view the installation logs or view the
Readme. Click Finish. The installation logs are generated in the following location:
%ALLUSERSPROFILE%\Symantec\OpsCenter\ INSTALLLOGS\OpsCenterServerInstallLog.htm

Note: If you run the installer in a maintenance mode later, OpsCenterServerMaintenanceInstallLog.htm is also generated in the same location.

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About upgrading to OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX

165

To upgrade from OpsCenter View Builder 7.0.x or 7.1.x to OpsCenter View Builder 7.5 on Windows

If you plan to upgrade your backup product and OpsCenter, ensure that you upgrade OpsCenter first. When upgrading OpsCenter, always upgrade the OpsCenter Agent first followed by the Server and then the View Builder. On a Windows host where you want to install OpsCenter View Builder, insert the OpsCenter product DVD in the DVD drive.

2 3

If autorun is enabled, the Symantec DVD Browser appears. If autorun is not enabled, click Start > Run. On the Run dialog box, in the Open text box, type D:\Browser.exe and press Enter: Where D is the DVD drive. The Symantec DVD Browser appears.

4 5 6

On the Symantec DVD Browser, click the Installation link. Click the OpsCenter View Builder Installation link to install Symantec OpsCenter View Builder 7.5. The Welcome panel of the Installation Wizard appears. The Installation Wizard detects an existing installation of OpsCenter View Builder 7.0.x or 7.1.x on the system. Depending on the installed version, the following message is displayed on the Welcome panel:
The Installation has detected that the following software is already installed on your system: Symantec OpsCenter View Builder: Version 7.0 In order to upgrade to a to a newer version, the existing Symantec OpsCenter View Builder will be removed.

Click Next to continue.

Read the license agreement, check I accept the terms of the license agreement. You may opt to check or uncheck Participate in the NetBackup Product Improvement Program. This option is checked by default. If you check this option, the installer uploads installation deployment and product usage information to Symantec automatically and in a secured manner. This data would help Symantec to guide future product development and also analyze issues. Click Next.

166

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About upgrading to OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX

The installer shows the summary of the installation settings. Check Save summary to option to save the installation summary. Click Browse to save the installation summary in your preferred location. Click Install to begin the installation. The installer installs OpsCenter View Builder 7.5 software.

After successful installation, you can view the installation logs or view the Readme. Click Finish. The installation logs are generated in the following location:
%ALLUSERSPROFILE%\Symantec\OpsCenter\ INSTALLLOGS\OpsCenterViewBuilderInstallLog.htm

Note: If you run the installer in a maintenance mode later, OpsCenterViewBuilderMaintenanceInstallLog.htm is also generated in the same location. See Upgrading from OpsCenter 7.0.x or 7.1.x to OpsCenter 7.5 on UNIX on page 166. See About upgrading from OpsCenter 7.0.x or 7.1.x to OpsCenter 7.5 on page 158.

Upgrading from OpsCenter 7.0.x or 7.1.x to OpsCenter 7.5 on UNIX

Use the following procedure to upgrade from OpsCenter 7.0.x or 7.1.x to OpsCenter 7.5 software on UNIX hosts. Note: Symantec recommends that you do not cancel or interrupt the installation process once it is started. To upgrade from OpsCenter 7.0.x or 7.1.x Agent to OpsCenter 7.5 Agent on UNIX

If you plan to upgrade your backup product and OpsCenter, ensure that you upgrade OpsCenter first. When upgrading OpsCenter, always upgrade the OpsCenter Agent first followed by the Server and then the View Builder. Open a UNIX console and log on as root on the target host. Mount the OpsCenter product DVD on the OpsCenter Agent 7.0.x (or 7.1.x) computer that you want to upgrade to OpsCenter 7.5.

2 3

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About upgrading to OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX

167

Type the following command:

./install. Press Enter.

5 6 7 8

Select Agent from the displayed options (Server and Agent). Press Enter to install OpsCenter Agent. The Welcome message is displayed. Press Enter to continue. The installer checks if OpsCenter Agent is installed. The installer displays that OpsCenter Agent 7.0.x (or 7.1.x) is installed. The installer displays the packages that are installed like PBX, Symantec OpsCenter Agent etc. Press Enter to install or upgrade these packages to 7.5. It then uninstalls packages with older versions and installs 7.5 packages.

The installer prompts you with the following question:

Participate in the NetBackup Product Improvement Program? [y,n,q] (y)

If you type y and press Enter, the installer uploads installation deployment and product usage information to Symantec automatically and in a secured manner. This data would help Symantec to guide future product development and also analyze issues.

10 OpsCenter Agent 7.5 is installed. You can view the installation log and
summary files on the path mentioned. To upgrade from OpsCenter 7.0.x or 7.1.x Server to OpsCenter 7.5 Server on UNIX

If you plan to upgrade your backup product and OpsCenter, ensure that you upgrade OpsCenter first. When upgrading OpsCenter, always upgrade the OpsCenter Agent first followed by the Server and then the View Builder. Open a UNIX console and log on as root on the target host. Mount the OpsCenter product DVD on the OpsCenter 7.0.x (or 7.1.x) Server that you want to upgrade. Type the following command: ./install. Press Enter. If you install OpsCenter on Solaris SPARC, select Server from the displayed options (Server and Agent). Press Enter to install OpsCenter Server.

2 3 4

5 6

The Welcome message is displayed. Press Enter to continue. The installer then checks if OpsCenter Server is installed on the system or not. It prompts you in case OpsCenter Server is already installed. The installer also examines the system for existing packages.

168

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About upgrading to OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX

The following prompt is displayed:

Where should the existing Symantec OpsCenter database and configuration files be backed up? An 'OpsCenterServer_backup' directory will be created within the directory that you specify to store these files. (/var/symantec/)

Type the directory name in which the existing OpsCenter 7.0.x or 7.1.x database and configuration files can be saved and then press Enter. To accept the default directory path (/var/symantec), press Enter.

The installer displays a list of components that will be installed or upgraded like PBX, AT, OpsCenter Server, OpsCenter GUI etc. Review this list and press Enter to continue. The installer prompts you with the following question:
installOpsCenterServer is now ready to upgrade OPSCENTERSERVER. Are you sure you want to upgrade OPSCENTERSERVER? [y,n,q] (y)

Press Enter to continue and upgrade to OpsCenter 7.5.

10 The installer displays the OpsCenter 7.0.x (or 7.1.x) packages that are installed.
The installer then installs or upgrades the older packages and installs OpsCenter 7.5 Server.

11 The installer prompts you with the following question:

Participate in the NetBackup Product Improvement Program? [y,n,q] (y)

If you type y and press Enter, the installer uploads installation deployment and product usage information to Symantec automatically and in a secured manner. This data would help Symantec to guide future product development and also analyze issues.

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About upgrading to OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX

169

12 The installer displays the OpsCenter 7.0.x (or 7.1.x) packages that are installed.
Depending on the installed packages, the following message may be displayed:
The following packages were found on the system. However the package versions are older than the ones required by OpsCenter. SYMCOpsCenterServer 7.0 was found on the system, but OpsCenter requires SYMCOpsCenterServer 7.5.0.0 SYMCOpsCenterGUI 7.0 was found on the system, but OpsCenter requires SYMCOpsCenterGUI 7.5.0.0 VRTSOpsCenterLegacyServer 7.0 was found on the system, but OpsCenter requires VRTSOpsCenterLegacyServer 7.5.0.0

The installer then uninstalls the older packages and installs OpsCenter 7.5 Server.

13 OpsCenter 7.5 Server is installed. Configuration changes are made to the

system.

14 The database upgrade process starts. In this process, data is migrated from
the OpsCenter 7.0.x (or 7.1.x) database to the OpsCenter 7.5 database. The database process may take time depending on your database size. The following message is displayed:
The database upgrade is in progress. This may take some time based on the database size. To know the upgrade status, see dbManager_<timestamp>_.log file in the OpsCenter Server database logs directory (../db/log) after some time.

You can check the status of database upgrade. A file named dbManager_<timestamp>_.log is created after a few minutes in INSTALL_PATH/SYMCOpsCenterServer/db/log directory. You can view this file to check the database upgrade status.

15 All the OpsCenter processes are started. The following information is also
displayed:

Web URL to access OpsCenter console Location of install log and summary files.

See Upgrading from OpsCenter 7.0.x or 7.1.x to OpsCenter 7.5 on Windows on page 159. See About upgrading from OpsCenter 7.0.x or 7.1.x to OpsCenter 7.5 on page 158.

170

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About post-installation tasks

About post-installation tasks

The following sections explain how to start using OpsCenter and includes some performance tuning tips for OpsCenter. See Verifying that Symantec OpsCenter is running properly on page 170. See About starting to use OpsCenter on page 170. See About the start up tasks that OpsCenter performs on page 171. See About tuning OpsCenter for more performance on page 171.

Verifying that Symantec OpsCenter is running properly

After installing Symantec OpsCenter on either Windows or UNIX, perform a check to verify that OpsCenter is running properly. To verify that OpsCenter is running properly

Use the URL that is presented at the end of the OpsCenter Server installation to access the OpsCenter console. Alternately type the following in the Web browser address bar: http://<server-host>/opscenter Note: By default, OpsCenter tries to run on port 80 (HTTP). If port 80 is not available, OpsCenter can use a different port. To know the HTTP and HTTPS port that OpsCenter uses, run the configurePorts utility. Run
INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\gui\bin\goodies\configurePorts.bat -status

on Windows hosts or
<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterWebGUI/bin/goodies/configurePorts.sh -status on UNIX hosts. For example, if OpsCenter uses HTTP port 8181, then

use http://<host.domain>:8181/opscenter. If the OpsCenter logon screen appears, the OpsCenter Server, the Web server, and the authentication service are running. The first time you log on , it takes longer than usual time for the GUI to load.

Log on as admin (user name) /password (password) on the private domain: OpsCenterUsers(vx)

About starting to use OpsCenter

After you complete the OpsCenter installation, you are ready to start using the OpsCenter console.

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About post-installation tasks

171

Table 2-11 lists the common tasks in OpsCenter and contains links to the corresponding topics and descriptions. Table 2-11 Task Topic Links to get you started with OpsCenter Topic Description
This topic provides instructions on how to access the console and log on, and provides solutions to possible issues. For administrator initial logon, the user name is admin and the password is password if you have chosen to keep the default password during installation. After initial logon, it is recommended that you change the user name and password. This topic provides an overview of the console components.

To access and log on to the See About accessing the OpsCenter console. OpsCenter console on page 53.

To change the password for the administrator logon.

See Changing your OpsCenter password on page 272.

To learn about the OpsCenter console components.

See About OpsCenter console components on page 70.

To learn more about using See About using the OpsCenter For instructions on understanding and using the the OpsCenter console. console on page 50. various OpsCenter monitoring, managing, reporting, and settings views and related tasks, use the OpsCenter online Help .

About the start up tasks that OpsCenter performs

OpsCenter performs the following tasks when it starts for the first time. When OpsCenter starts, it performs the following tasks:

Creates and initializes the security domain that the authentication broker requires. If these security domains are present, OpsCenter uses them. The following domains namely OpsCenterUsers, OpsCenterServices, and NOM_MACHINES are created when OpsCenter server is installed. Creates the OpsCenter admin user in the OpsCenterUsers domain with the default password as 'password'.

About tuning OpsCenter for more performance

The following settings can be tuned to improve OpsCenter performance. See About adding master servers to OpsCenter on page 172. See About using a Web browser to access OpsCenter on page 172. See About installing OpsCenter on a Windows 64-bit platform on page 172.

172

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About post-installation tasks

See About bandwidth utilization on page 173. See About performance tuning guidelines on page 173. See Moving the OpsCenter database to a different hard disk on page 174. See About saving the OpsCenter log files on a different drive on page 176. See Adjusting the heap size for OpsCenter components on page 179. See Adjusting the OpsCenter database cache size on page 184. See About purging data periodically on page 188. See About OpsCenter performance and floating-point calculations on page 188. See About known performance issues on page 188. Note: The information that is published in this section is based on the tests that have been performed in Symantec Lab in a controlled environment with expert users. These can be used as guidelines and should not be used as 100% accurate benchmarks.

About adding master servers to OpsCenter

If you need to add multiple master servers to the OpsCenter console, Symantec recommends that you add five master servers at one time. For example, if you have 20 master servers to be added, then you should not add all of them at once. Symantec recommends that you add them in groups of five in the following manner - 5+5+5+5. Once you add the first five master servers, wait until the initial data collection for these master servers is complete. To view the data collection status for a master server, go to Settings > Configuration > NetBackup in the OpsCenter console and then click the Data Collection Status tab on the page. The data collection status for a master server can be viewed from the Collection Status column.

About using a Web browser to access OpsCenter

Symantec recommends that you use Mozilla Firefox to access the OpsCenter console. Performance testing indicates that Mozilla Firefox works 1.25 times faster than Microsoft Internet Explorer.

About installing OpsCenter on a Windows 64-bit platform

Symantec recommends that you install the OpsCenter server software on a supported Windows 64-bit platform for optimum performance. Performance testing indicates that OpsCenter runs fastest on a Windows 64-bit platform as compared to other Windows or UNIX platforms.

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About post-installation tasks

173

See OpsCenter platform compatibility on page 101.

About bandwidth utilization

The following table lists the average bandwidth that is consumed when OpsCenter collects data from a master server. Average Bandwidth used by OpsCenter Number of jobs per day
4.67 Kbps 10.381 Kbps 2500 More than 10,000

Note: The system that was used for testing was a NetBackup 7.5 master server running Windows 2003 on a Xeon-64 processor that has 2 GB RAM and 1.0 GbE LAN connection.

About performance tuning guidelines

You may want to tune OpsCenter to obtain incremental performance gains. This section describes important tuning parameters and settings that can result in improved performance. The following guidelines can help improve OpsCenter performance:

Install the OpsCenter database on a drive that is different from where OpsCenter server software and operating system is installed. See Moving the OpsCenter database to a different hard disk on page 174. Install the OpsCenter log files on a drive that is different from where OpsCenter server software and operating system is installed. This type of installs should be done only if the logging level is greater than 1. See About saving the OpsCenter log files on a different drive on page 176. Symantec recommends that you defragment the OpsCenter database periodically. You must perform defragmentation once in a month. See About OpsCenter database defragmentation on page 233. Increase the heap size of the OpsCenter Server in accordance with the RAM. See Adjusting the heap size for OpsCenter components on page 179. Increase the database cache size in accordance with the RAM and database size. See Adjusting the OpsCenter database cache size on page 184. Create report schedules such that the email or export happens in system idle time when OpsCenter is not accessed frequently.

174

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About post-installation tasks

Purge the OpsCenter data periodically. See About purging data periodically on page 188.

Moving the OpsCenter database to a different hard disk

Use the following procedure to move the OpsCenter database to a different hard disk. To move the OpsCenter database to a different hard disk on Windows

Stop all OpsCenter server services. Open the command line and enter the following command:
INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsadmin.bat stop

Open the databases.conf file with a text editor like notepad from the following directory:
INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\db\conf

This file has the following contents:

INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\db\data\vxpmdb.db

This path specifies the default location of the OpsCenter database.

To move the database to a custom location like E:\Database, replace the contents of the file with the following:
E:\Database\vxpmdb.db

Make sure that you specify the path in double quotes. The directories in the specified path should not contain any special characters like %, ~, !, @, $, &, ^, # etc. For example, do not specify a path like E:\Database%. Save the databases.conf file.

Copy the database file to the new location. Copy vxpmdb.db and symcOpscache.db from INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\db\data to a location like E:\Database. Restart all OpsCenter server services. To restart all OpsCenter services, enter the following command:
INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsadmin.bat start

You should run and monitor OpsCenter for a certain period after moving the database. If OpsCenter works as expected, you can delete vxpmdb.db and symcOpscache.db from the default location (INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\db\data).

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About post-installation tasks

175

To move the OpsCenter database to a different hard disk on UNIX

Stop all OpsCenter server processes. Enter the following command:

<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin.sh stop

The default location of the OpsCenter database is

<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/db/data.

Back up the OpsCenter database (<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/db/data) to some other location. Enter the following command:
cp R <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/db/data /backup/data

To move the database to a custom location like /usr/mydata, always create a new directory named OpsCenterServer inside /usr/mydata by entering the following command:
mkdir -p /usr/mydata/OpsCenterServer

Symantec recommends that when you move the OpsCenter database to a custom location on UNIX, the database must be saved in a directory named OpsCenterServer inside the custom location: /CUSTOM_LOCATION/OpsCenterServer.

To move the database to a custom location like /usr/mydata/OpsCenterServer, enter the following command:
mv <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/db/data/* /usr/mydata/OpsCenterServer

Remove the symbolic link that exists for the OpsCenter database. Enter the following command:
unlink <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/db/data

Create a symbolic link to /usr/mydata/OpsCenterServer in <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/db/data. To create a symbolic link, enter the following command:
ln -s <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/db/data /usr/mydata/OpsCenterServer

Restart all OpsCenter server processes by entering the following command:

<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin.sh start

You should run and monitor OpsCenter for a certain period after moving the database. If OpsCenter works as expected, you can delete vxpmdb.db and symcOpscache.db from /backup/data.

176

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About post-installation tasks

About saving the OpsCenter log files on a different drive

Symantec recommends that you install the OpsCenter log files on a drive that is different from where OpsCenter Server software and operating system is installed. This installation should be done only if the debug level of logs is greater than 1. The default debug level of OpsCenter logs is 1. To know the debug level of your logs, see the following section. See Checking the debug level of logs on page 176. You can control how OpsCenter writes log files for OpsCenter Server, OpsCenter Agent, and the OpsCenter Web GUI components. See Saving the log files to a different location on Windows on page 177. See Saving the log files to a different location on UNIX on page 178.

Checking the debug level of logs

You can check the debug level of OpsCenter logs by using the following procedure. To check the debug level of logs

Navigate to the following location:

Windows INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\ or INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\Agent\bin\ UNIX <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin or <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterAgent/bin

Enter the following command:

vxlogcfg -l -p 58330 -o <OID> -q

The following OID values must be used for OpsCenter components:

OpsCenter Server OpsCenter Agent OpsCenter View Builder 148 146 147

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About post-installation tasks

177

Saving the log files to a different location on Windows

Use the following procedures to save the log files for OpsCenter components in a different directory. By default, OpsCenter writes VxUL logs to the following directories:
OpsCenter Server OpsCenter Agent OpsCenter View Builder INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\logs INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\Agent\logs INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\gui\logs

To save the log files for OpsCenter server in a different location

Enter the following command to save log files to a different location:

INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\vxlogcfg -a p 58330 -o 148 -s LogDirectory="<New log directory location>"

Note: 58330 is the OpsCenter product ID. 148 is the OID for OpsCenter server.

2 3

Select Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services and stop the Symantec OpsCenter Server Service. Select Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services and start the Symantec OpsCenter Server Service.

To save the log files for OpsCenter Agent in a different location

Enter the following command to save log files to a different location:

INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\Agent\bin\vxlogcfg -a p 58330 -o 146 -s LogDirectory="<New log directory location>"

Note: 58330 is the OpsCenter product ID. 146 is the OID for OpsCenter Agent.

2 3

Select Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services and stop the Symantec OpsCenter Agent Service. Select Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services and start the Symantec OpsCenter Agent Service.

178

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About post-installation tasks

To save the log files for OpsCenter Web GUI in a different location

Enter the following command to save log files to a different location:

INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\vxlogcfg -a p 58330 -o 147 -s LogDirectory="<New log directory location>"

Note: 58330 is the OpsCenter product ID. 147 is the OID for OpsCenter Web GUI.

2 3

Select Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services and stop the Symantec OpsCenter Web Server Service. Select Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services and start the Symantec OpsCenter Web Server Service.

Saving the log files to a different location on UNIX

Use the following procedures to save the log files for OpsCenter components in a different location. By default, OpsCenter writes VxUL logs to the following directories:
OpsCenter Server OpsCenter Agent OpsCenter View Builder <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/logs <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterAgent/logs <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterGUI/logs

To save the log files for OpsCenter server in a different location

Enter the following command to save log files to a different location:

<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/vxlogcfg -a -p 58330 -o 148 -s LogDirectory="<New log directory location>"

Note: 58330 is the OpsCenter product ID. 148 is the OID for OpsCenter server.

Enter the following command to stop the OpsCenter server process:

<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/stopserver

Enter the following command to start the OpsCenter server process:

<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/startserver

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About post-installation tasks

179

To save the log files for OpsCenter Agent in a different location

Enter the following command to save log files to a different location:

<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterAgent/bin/vxlogcfg -a -p 58330 -o 146 -s LogDirectory="<New log directory location>"

Note: 58330 is the OpsCenter product ID. 146 is the OID for OpsCenter Agent.

Enter the following command to stop the OpsCenter Agent process:

<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterAgent/bin/stopagent

Enter the following command to start the OpsCenter server process:

<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterAgent/bin/startagent

To save the log files for OpsCenter Web GUI in a different location

Enter the following command to save log files to a different location:

<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/vxlogcfg -a -p 58330 -o 147 -s LogDirectory="<New log directory location>"

Note: 58330 is the OpsCenter product ID. 147 is the OID for OpsCenter Web GUI.

Enter the following command to stop the OpsCenter Web server process:
<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/stopgui.sh

Enter the following command to start the OpsCenter Web server process:
<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/startgui.sh

Adjusting the heap size for OpsCenter components

Use the following procedures to adjust the heap size for OpsCenter components.

Adjusting the default heap size for the OpsCenter server

If the OpsCenter server processes are consuming a lot of memory (which may happen with large OpsCenter configurations), it may be helpful to increase the OpsCenter Server heap size. The OpsCenter Server default heap size can be increased from 1024 MB up to 1400 MB for 32-bit platforms. The OpsCenter Server default heap size can be increased from 2048 MB to a higher value (like 4096 MB) for 64-bit platforms. You can

180

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About post-installation tasks

determine a higher value based on the physical (RAM) and virtual memory that is available on your system. To adjust the default heap size on Windows servers

Open OpsCenterServerService.xml file from the following location on the OpsCenter server:
INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin

Modify the Xmx1024M value in the following string.

<CmdArg value="-Xms512M -Xmx1024M

For example, replace -Xmx1024M with -Xmx1400M to increase the maximum heap size from 1024 MB to 1400 MB. On 64-bit systems, modify the -Xmx2048M value in the following string:
<CmdArg value="-Xrs -Xmx2048M

For example, replace -Xmx2048 with -Xmx4096 to increase the maximum heap size from 2048 MB to 4096 MB.

3 4

Save the OpsCenterServerService.xml file. You must restart all OpsCenter server services for the changes to be effective. Enter the following commands to first stop and then start all OpsCenter server services as follows:
INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsadmin.bat stop INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsadmin.bat start

To adjust the default heap size on UNIX servers

Open startserver file from the following location:

<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin

Modify the -Xmx2048M value in the following string:

MAX_HEAP=-Xmx2048M

For example, replace -Xmx2048M with -Xmx4096M to increase the maximum heap size from 2048 MB to 4096 MB.

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About post-installation tasks

181

3 4

Save the startserver file. You must restart all OpsCenter server processes for the changes to be effective. Enter the following commands to first stop and then start all OpsCenter server processes as follows:
<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin.sh stop <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin.sh start

Adjusting the default heap size for the Symantec OpsCenter Web server
The OpsCenter Web server default heap size can be increased from 1024 MB up to 1400 MB for 32-bit platforms. The OpsCenter Web server default heap size can be increased from 1024 MB to a higher value (like 2048 MB) for 64-bit platforms. You can determine a higher value based on the physical (RAM) and virtual memory that is available on your system. Note: If you start seeing poor performance in the OpsCenter console every few days and restarting the Symantec OpsCenter Web server service fixes the problem, you should increase the Web server default. To adjust the default heap size on Windows servers

Open OpsCenterGUIService.xml file from the following location on the OpsCenter server:
INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\gui\bin\OpsCenterGUIService.xml

Modify the Xmx1024m value in the following string.

<EnvVar name="JAVA_OPTS" value="-Xrs -Xms512m -Xmx1024m

For example, replace -Xmx1024m with -Xmx1400m to increase the maximum heap size from 1024 MB to 1400 MB. Note: This string may be listed twice in the OpsCenterGUIService.xml file. You can change the first occurrence of -Xmx1024m in the OpsCenterGUIService.xml file to adjust the heap size.

182

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About post-installation tasks

3 4

Save the OpsCenterGUIService.xml file. You must restart all OpsCenter server services for the changes to be effective. Enter the following commands to first stop and then start all OpsCenter server services as follows:
INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsadmin.bat stop INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsadmin.bat start

To adjust the default heap size on UNIX servers

Open startGUI file from the following location:

<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterGUI/bin

Modify the Xmx1024M value in the following string.

JAVA_OPTS="-Xrs -d64 -Xms512M -Xmx1024m...

For example, replace -Xmx1024M with -Xmx1400M to increase the maximum heap size from 1024 MB to 1400 MB.

3 4

Save the startGUI file. You must restart all OpsCenter server processes for the changes to be effective. Enter the following commands to first stop and then start all OpsCenter server processes as follows:
<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin.sh stop <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin.sh start

Adjusting the default heap size for the OpsCenter Agent

If the OpsCenter Agent processes are consuming a lot of memory (which may happen with large OpsCenter configurations), it may be helpful to increase the OpsCenter Agent heap size. The OpsCenter Agent default heap size can be increased from 1024 MB up to 1400 MB for 32-bit platforms. The OpsCenter Agent default heap size can be increased from 1024 MB to a higher value (like 2048 MB) for 64-bit platforms. You can determine a higher value based on the physical (RAM) and virtual memory that is available on your system. Note: The OpsCenter Agent runs as a 32-bit application on 64-bit Windows platforms. Hence, the OpsCenter Agent default heap size can be increased from 1024 MB up to 1400 MB for Windows 64-bit platforms.

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About post-installation tasks

183

To adjust the default heap size on Windows servers

Open OpsCenterAgentService.xml file from the following location on the OpsCenter server:
INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\Agent\bin

Modify the Xmx1024M value in the following string.

<CmdArg value="-Xms512M -Xmx1024M

For example, replace -Xmx1024M with -Xmx1400M to increase the maximum heap size from 1024 MB to 1400 MB.

3 4

Save the OpsCenterAgentService.xml file. You must restart the OpsCenter Agent service for the changes to be effective. To restart the OpsCenter Agent service, first stop and then start the Symantec OpsCenter Agent Service. Select Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services and stop the Symantec OpsCenter Agent Service.

Select Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services and start the Symantec OpsCenter Agent Service.

To adjust the default heap size on UNIX servers

Open startagent file from the following location:

<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterAgent/bin

Modify the Xmx1024M value in the following string.

MAX_HEAP=-Xmx1024M

For example, replace -Xmx1024M with -Xmx2048M to increase the maximum heap size from 1024 MB to 2048 MB.

3 4

Save the startagent file. You must restart the OpsCenter Agent process for the changes to be effective. Enter the following commands to first stop and then start OpsCenter Agent process as follows:
<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterAgent/bin/stopagent <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterAgent/bin/startagent

184

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About post-installation tasks

Adjusting the OpsCenter database cache size

The amount of memory available for database server cache is an important factor in controlling OpsCenter performance. Symantec recommends that you adjust the Sybase cache size after installing OpsCenter. After you install OpsCenter, the database size can grow rapidly as you add more master servers. Sybase automatically adjusts the cache size for optimum performance. You can also set the cache size using the -c server option.

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About post-installation tasks

185

To set the cache size using the -c server option on Windows servers

Open the <INSTALL_PATH>\OpsCenter\server\db\conf\server.conf file. The following default options appear:

-n OPSCENTER_<HOST_NAME> -x tcpip(LocalOnly=YES;ServerPort=13786) -gd DBA -gk DBA -gl DBA -gp 4096 -ti 0 -c 256M -ch 1024M -cl 256M -zl -os 1M -m -o "<INSTALL_PATH>\OpsCenter\server\db\log\server.log"

-c 256M indicates the initial memory reserved for caching database pages and other server information. The default value is 256 MB. -cl 256M indicates the minimum cache size, as a limit to automatic cache resizing. The default minimum cache size is 256 MB. -ch 512M indicates the maximum cache size, as a limit to automatic cache growth. The default maximum cache size is 512 MB for 32-bit systems and 1024 MB for 64-bit systems. For example, to increase the cache size to 512 MB with a maximum of 1 GB, replace -c 256M -ch 512M -cl 256M with -c 512M -ch 1G -cl 512M -cs in the sample server.conf file:
-n OPSCENTER_<HOST_NAME> -x tcpip(LocalOnly=YES;ServerPort=13786) -gd DBA -gk DBA -gl DBA -gp 4096 -ti 0 -c 256M -ch 512M -cl 256M -zl -os 1M -m -o "<INSTALL_PATH>\OpsCenter\server\db\log\server.log"

should be changed to
-n OPSCENTER_<hostname> -x tcpip(LocalOnly=YES;ServerPort=13786) -gd DBA -gk DBA -gl DBA -gp 4096 -ti 0 -c 512M -ch 1G -cl 512M -cs -zl -os 1M -m -o "<INSTALL_PATH>\server\db\log\server.log"

The -cs option logs the cache size changes for the database server. In the same manner, to increase the cache size to 1 GB, you should change -c256M -ch 512M -cl 256M to -c 1G -ch 2G -cl 1G -cs in the server.conf file.

2 3

Save the server.conf file. Stop and restart the OpsCenter services, as follows:
INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsadmin.bat stop INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsadmin.bat start

186

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About post-installation tasks

To set the cache size using the -c server option on UNIX servers

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About post-installation tasks

187

Open the <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/db/conf/server.conffile and change the value of the -c option. The following default options appear:
-n OPSCENTER_<HOST_NAME> -x tcpip (LocalOnly=YES;BROADCASTLISTENER=0;DOBROADCAST=NO;ServerPort=13786;) -gd DBA -gk DBA -gl DBA -gp 8192 -ti 0 -c 256M -ch 512M -cl 256M -zl -os 1M -m

-c 256M indicates the initial memory reserved for caching database pages and other server information. The default value is 256 MB. -cl 256M indicates the minimum cache size, as a limit to automatic cache resizing. The default minimum cache size is 256 MB. -ch 512M indicates the maximum cache size, as a limit to automatic cache growth. The default maximum cache size is 512 MB for 32-bit systems and 1024 MB for 64-bit systems. For example, to increase the cache size to 512 MB with a maximum of 1 GB, replace -c 256M -ch 512M -cl 256M with -c 512M -ch 1G -cl 512M -cs in the sample server.conf file: You can increase the Sybase cache size to 512 MB by changing the server.conf file content. The following:
-n OPSCENTER_<HOST_NAME> -x tcpip (LocalOnly=YES;BROADCASTLISTENER=0;DOBROADCAST=NO;ServerPort=13786;) -gd DBA -gk DBA -gl DBA -gp 8192 -ti 0 -c 256M -ch 512M -cl 256M -zl -os 1M -m

should be changed to:

-n OPSCENTER_<HOST_NAME> -x tcpip (LocalOnly=YES;BROADCASTLISTENER=0;DOBROADCAST=NO;ServerPort=13786;) -gd DBA -gk DBA -gl DBA -gp 8192 -ti 0 -c 512M -ch 1G -cl 512M -zl -os 1M -m

This example replaced -c 256M -ch 512M -cl 256M with -c 512M -ch 1G -cl 512M -cs in the server.conf file to increase the cache size to 512 MB with a maximum of 1 GB. In the same manner, to increase the cache size to 1 GB and a maximum of 2 GB, you should change -c256M -ch 512M -cl 256M to -c 1G -ch 2G -cl 1G -cs in the server.conf file. The -cs option logs the cache size changes for the database server.

188

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About post-installation tasks

2 3

Save the server.conf file. Stop and restart the OpsCenter processes, as follows:
<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin.sh stop <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin.sh start

About purging data periodically

You should purge the OpsCenter data periodically. See Configuring the data purge period on the OpsCenter Server on page 274. The OpsCenter database should be defragmented after a purge operation. See Defragmenting the OpsCenter database on page 234.

About OpsCenter performance and floating-point calculations

Symantec OpsCenter performs certain calculations that require floating-point math. If the server's processor does not have a dedicated floating-point unit, the calculations are handled in floating-point emulation. Emulation mode slows down OpsCenter's performance. Symantec does not recommend running OpsCenter on any server that lacks a dedicated floating-point unit. Performance issues exist when the OpsCenter server software is installed on a Sun T1 server. Symantec recommends that you install OpsCenter server software on a Sun T2 server. The issue of limited floating point capability on T1 servers has been resolved with the T2 servers.

About known performance issues

The following known issues may occur when the database size increases:

The performance of OpsCenter reports degrades. Reports are slow and take a longer time to run. If you have configured report schedules, the reports may reach later than the scheduled time. Procedure-based reports may not run before timeout happens (in 30 minutes). Symantec recommends that you schedule procedure-based reports in such a scenario. The following is a list of procedure-based reports:

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About post-installation tasks

189

Backup Job Size Variance

See Job Activity > Variance > Backup Job Size Variance report on page 712. See Variance > Throughput Variance on page 709. See Job Activity > Variance > File Count Variance report on page 711. See Job Activity > Variance > Backup Duration Variance report on page 711. See BMR client configuration backup failures report on page 873. See Clients Not Backed up report on page 857. See Client summary dashboard report on page 870. See Master Server Job Throughput report on page 908. See Media Server Job Throughput report on page 914. See Disk Usage report on page 915. See Storage Unit Usage report on page 907. See Media Summary by Media Server report on page 900. See Virtual Client Summary report on page 859. See Planning Activity > Capacity Planning > Historical Size report on page 750. See Planning Activity > Capacity Planning > Forecasted Size report on page 750. See Disk and Tape Device Activity > Drive Throughput on page 891. See Disk and Tape Device Activity > Drive Utilization Report on page 894.

Throughput Variance

File Count Variance

Backup Duration Variance

BMR Client Configuration Backup Failures Clients Not Backed up

Client Summary Dashboard

Master Server Job Throughput

Media Server Job Throughput

Disk Usage Storage Unit Usage

Media Summary by Media Server

Virtual Client Summary

Capacity Planning Historical Size

Capacity Planning Forecasted Size

Drive Throughput

Drive Utilization

190

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About uninstalling Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX

Success Rate Line

See Status & Success Rate > Status > Success Rate Line report on page 793. See Status & Success Rate > Success Rate > Advanced Success Rate report on page 821. See Status & Success Rate > Status > All Failed Backups report on page 788. See Status > Consecutive Failures on page 788. See Planning Activity > Scheduled Job > All Jobs report on page 766. See Risk Analysis > Client Risk Analysis report on page 843. See Risk Analysis > Client Coverage report on page 846.

Advanced Success Rate (was earlier named Daily Summary of Backup Activity) All Failed Backups

Consecutive Failures Report

All Jobs

Client Risk Analysis

Client Coverage

About uninstalling Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX

This section describes uninstallation procedures for OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX. Note: After a rollback, the keys are not recreated to display an entry in Add or Remove Programs dialog box. If a rollback occurs during an uninstall of OpsCenter, the keys are not removed from Add or Remove Programs dialog box. You must remove OpsCenter. Use setup.exe to remove OpsCenter. See Uninstalling Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 on Windows on page 190. See Uninstalling Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 on UNIX on page 191.

Uninstalling Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 on Windows

Before uninstalling OpsCenter components, ensure that NetBackup-Windows GUI is not running. Close any NetBackup-Windows GUI consoles that are open before uninstalling OpsCenter components.

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About uninstalling Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX

191

Use the Windows Add/Remove Programs utility to uninstall OpsCenter on a Windows host. To uninstall Symantec OpsCenter Server on Windows

1 2 3

Log on to the target host as a user with administrator privileges. In the Windows Control Panel, click Add/Remove Programs. Click Symantec OpsCenter Server and click Remove. For Windows 64-bit systems, click Symantec OpsCenter Server (64bit) and click Remove.

Click Next to continue and remove Symantec OpsCenter Server from your computer.

To uninstall Symantec OpsCenter Agent on Windows

1 2 3 4

Log on to the target host as a user with administrator privileges. In the Windows Control Panel, click Add/Remove Programs. Click Symantec OpsCenter Agent and click Remove. Click Next to continue and remove Symantec OpsCenter Agent from your computer.

To uninstall Symantec OpsCenter View Builder on Windows

1 2 3 4

Log on to the target host as a user with administrator privileges. In the Windows Control Panel, click Add/Remove Programs. Click Symantec OpsCenter View Builder and click Remove. Click Next to continue and remove Symantec OpsCenter View Builder from your computer.

Uninstalling Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 on UNIX

Use the Uninstall Script, which resides in the root directory of the product DVD and also in opt/VRTS/install directory, to uninstall OpsCenter on a UNIX host. Note: If you want to reinstall OpsCenter components, use the product DVD. You cannot reinstall OpsCenter components using the install scripts in the opt/VRTS/install directory.

Note: Symantec recommends that you do not cancel or interrupt the uninstallation process once it is started.

192

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About uninstalling Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX

To uninstall OpsCenter Server on UNIX

1 2

Open a UNIX console and log on as root on the target host. Change to the following directory:
opt/VRTS/install

Type the following command and press Enter:

./uninstallOpsCenterServer

The Uninstall Script checks the components that are installed on the system.

When asked to confirm if you want to uninstall OpsCenter Server, do one of the following:

Type y. Press Enter to start the uninstall process. The Uninstall Script stops all processes and then uninstalls the component packages. When the uninstall is complete, it displays a summary of the uninstall, including the location of the uninstall log files.

Type n. Press Enter to cancel the uninstall procedure.

To uninstall OpsCenter Agent on UNIX

1 2

Open a UNIX console and log on as root on the target host. Change to the following directory:
<INSTALL_PATH>/VRTS/install

Type the following command and press Enter:

./uninstallOpsCenterAgent

The Uninstall Script checks the components that are installed on the system.

When asked to confirm that you want to uninstall OpsCenter Agent, do one of the following:

Type y. Press Enter to start the uninstall process. The Uninstall Script stops all processes and then uninstalls the component packages. When the uninstall is complete, it displays a summary of the uninstall, including the location of the uninstall log files.

Type n. Press Enter to cancel the uninstall procedure.

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About clustering Symantec OpsCenter

193

About clustering Symantec OpsCenter

The following sections describe how you can cluster OpsCenter 7.5.

About a Symantec OpsCenter cluster

Clusters provide high availability of applications and data to users. In a cluster, two or more nodes are linked in a network and work collectively as a single system. Each node can access the shared disks with the help of cluster software. All nodes in a cluster are constantly aware of the status of resources on the other nodes. If a node becomes unavailable, resources running on that node migrate to an available node. Symantec OpsCenter (OpsCenter) operates in an active or passive failover configuration. OpsCenter Server must be installed on the active node and the passive (or failover nodes). When a failover occurs in an OpsCenter cluster, OpsCenter is shut down on the active node and starts on one of the failover nodes in the cluster. During failover, users experience only a short interruption in service. This failover provides high availability for OpsCenter. You can cluster only the OpsCenter Server. Installing OpsCenter in a clustered environment makes OpsCenter a highly available application.

Supported OS and cluster solutions

An OpsCenter cluster is supported on Windows and Solaris platforms. You can install an OpsCenter 7.5 cluster on the following platforms:

Windows 2008 R2 x64 Windows 2008 x86 and x64 Windows 2003 x86 and x64 Solaris SPARC 10

For Symantec OpsCenter to be clustered, you must have Veritas Cluster Server (VCS) installed. Table 2-12 lists the supported versions of VCS. Table 2-12 Platform
VCS Windows VCS Solaris

OpsCenter cluster support matrix Latest supported version Start of support

5.1 5.1 4.2 RP2 4.3

194

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About clustering Symantec OpsCenter

VCS is a high-availability solution for cluster configurations. With VCS you can monitor systems and application services, and restart services on a different system when hardware or software fails. For more information about VCS, see the Veritas Cluster Server User's Guide. Note: Clustered OpsCenter is not supported on MSCS.

About running commands on the active node

For a clustered OpsCenter server, you must run commands on the active node. You may get unexpected results if you run a command on an inactive node. The command may fail to run and may sometimes result in an unexpected behavior. For example, running the dbbackup command on an inactive node may result in the following unexpected result: Command: E:\OpsCenter\server\bin>dbbackup.bat E:\temp Result: "Could not find Z:\OpsCenter\server\config\db.conf file" In addition, the OpsCenter service group may failover if the command requires restarting the OpsCenter services. Some OpsCenter commands or utilities like the support utility require restarting the services.

Connecting Symantec Product Authentication Service and Symantec Private Branch Exchange
An OpsCenter cluster requires that the authentication service and PBX components that are installed on the remote host are connected. To check if AT and PBX are connected, verify whether pbxexchflag of the authentication service is set or not. When pbxexchflag is set, its value is equal to 1 and this means that PBX and AT are connected. Note: The information in this section applies to OpsCenter clusters only. Before setting the value of pbxexchflag, you must stop all OpsCenter Server services, Symantec Product Authentication Service and Symantec Private Branch Exchange. After setting the value of pbxexchflag to 1, you must restart these services. Use the following procedure to connect the authentication service and PBX components.

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About clustering Symantec OpsCenter

195

To connect Symantec Product Authentication Service and Symantec Private Branch Exchange on Windows

Open the command prompt and enter the following command:

INSTALL_PATH\Security\Authentication\bin\vssat.exe showispbxexchflag

This command gives the value of pbxexchflag. If the value of pbxexchflag is 0, you need to set it to 1. In case the value of pbxexchflag is 1, you do not need to follow the remaining steps.

Navigate to INSTALL_PATH\Security\Authentication\bin directory. Enter the following command at the bin directory to set the value of pbxexchflag:
vssat.exe setispbxexchflag --enable

The value of pbxexchflag is set to 1. Verify if the value of pbxexchflag is 1. See step 1.

Stop all the OpsCenter Server services by executing the following command:
INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsadmin.bat stop

Stop Symantec Product Authentication Service by performing either of the following steps:

Use the stop option in the Windows Service pane, or Execute the following command in a command console:
net stop vrtsat

Restart Symantec Product Authentication Service by performing either of the following steps:

Use the start option in the Windows Service pane, or Execute the following command in a command console:
net start vrtsat

Restart all the OpsCenter Server services by performing the following steps:

Navigate to INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin directory.

196

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About clustering Symantec OpsCenter

Restart all the OpsCenter Server services by executing the following command:
opsadmin.bat start

To connect Symantec Product Authentication Service and Symantec Private Branch Exchange on Solaris

Open the command console and enter the following command:

<INSTALL_PATH>/VRTSat/bin/vssat showispbxexchflag

This command gives the value of pbxexchflag. If the value of pbxexchflag is 0, you need to set it to 1. In case the value of pbxexchflag is 1, you do not need to follow the remaining steps of this procedure.

Enter the following command at the bin directory to set the value of pbxexchflag:
<INSTALL_PATH>/VRTSat/bin/vssat setispbxexchflag --enable

The value of pbxexchflag is set to 1. Follow step 1 of this procedure to verify if the value of pbxexchflag is 1.

Stop all the OpsCenter Server services by entering the following command:
<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin.sh stop

Stop Symantec Product Authentication Service by issuing kill command on the process ID of the vxatd service. For example, if the process ID of vxatd service is 203, run the following command:
kill 203

Run the following command to restart Symantec Product Authentication Service:

<INSTALL_PATH>/VRTSat/bin/vxatd

Run the following command to restart all the OpsCenter Server services:
<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin.sh start

Clustering Symantec OpsCenter on Windows

This section provides information about installing Symantec OpsCenter in a clustered mode, on a Windows host.

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About clustering Symantec OpsCenter

197

Table 2-13 provides the Windows clustering steps. Table 2-13 Step
1

OpsCenter clustering steps Description

Understand the limitations of an OpsCenter cluster

Reference topic
See Limitations of Symantec OpsCenter cluster on Windows on page 197. See Prerequisites for Symantec OpsCenter cluster on Windows on page 197. See Installing Symantec OpsCenter Agent 7.5 and AT on a remote Windows host on page 199.

Make sure that you have met all prerequisites.

Install OpsCenter 7.5.

Limitations of Symantec OpsCenter cluster on Windows

An OpsCenter cluster has the following limitations:

Only the OpsCenter Server can be clustered.OpsCenter Agent and the OpsCenter View Builder cannot be clustered. Upgrades from previous versions of NOM or VBR to clustered OpsCenter Server is not supported. Note that an OpsCenter 7.0.x or 7.1.x cluster can be upgraded to an OpsCenter 7.5 cluster. OpsCenter cluster cannot co-exist with any other Symantec product running in secure mode using the Symantec Product Authentication Service. OpsCenter does not support clustered AT.

Prerequisites for Symantec OpsCenter cluster on Windows

This section contains information about the requirements that must be met before you install and configure OpsCenter in a clustered mode, on a Windows host.

Verify that VCS and OpsCenter support your hardware. For a list of supported storage devices, visit the following Web site: http://entsupport.symantec.com Verify that the supported version of VCS is correctly installed and configured. Follow the steps in the Veritas Cluster Server Installation Guide. For VCS Windows 4.2 versions, ensure that the patch available through Technote 278307 is installed before installing OpsCenter. For OpsCenter, the

198

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About clustering Symantec OpsCenter

supported VCS version starts from 4.2 RP2. The patch is available from the following URL: http://entsupport.symantec.com/docs/278307 This Technote is applicable to OpsCenter.

Verify that no VCS resource group and resource exist with the same name as that which you intend to use for OpsCenter. The SharedDisk must be configured and accessible to all cluster nodes where you want to install OpsCenter. Verify that you have an IP address and host name (virtual host name) to be assigned to the OpsCenter resource in VCS. Only use these for the OpsCenter resource. The virtual host name must be the short name and less than 15 characters. Also, ping the IP address and verify that the IP address is not plumbed. Verify that you can mount the disk. Verify that you have the OpsCenter installation program and a valid license key. For a Windows cluster, verify that the cluster disk groups and dynamic volumes for OpsCenter are created on the shared storage. Refer to theVeritas Storage Foundation Administrators Guide for details. Verify that all VCS services are up and running on all the nodes in the cluster. Verify that OpsCenter installation is carried out with the domain admin account. Before installing OpsCenter Server, ensure that Symantec OpsCenter Agent 7.5 (PBX) and Symantec authentication service (AT) Server are installed separately on a remote host. PBX is installed when you install OpsCenter 7.5 Agent. Note the following points about installing OpsCenter Agent 7.5 (PBX) and AT on the remote host:

Symantec recommends that you first install OpsCenter Agent 7.5 (PBX) and then install AT from the OpsCenter 7.5 DVD. AT must be installed in a non-clustered mode. AT can be installed in Root + AB or AB mode on the remote host.

AT must be installed separately (and not along with OpsCenter) on the remote host. For more information about installing AT, see the Symanetc Infrastructure Core Services Installation Guide.

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About clustering Symantec OpsCenter

199

Verify that authentication service and PBX components on the remote host are connected. See Connecting Symantec Product Authentication Service and Symantec Private Branch Exchange on page 194.

Installing Symantec OpsCenter Agent 7.5 and AT on a remote Windows host

OpsCenter Server requires that OpsCenter Agent 7.5 (PBX) and Symantec Product Authentication Service (AT) are installed on a standalone host, before OpsCenter can be clustered. Symantec recommends that you first install OpsCenter Agent 7.5 and then install AT from the OpsCenter 7.5 DVD. You must install the version of AT Service that is shipped with OpsCenter 7.5. You can either configure AT in root + authentication broker (Root + AB) mode or authentication broker (AB) mode. Symantec recommends that you configure AT in a 'Root+AB' mode. Clustered OpsCenter Server uses this authentication broker. To establish a connection between AT host and OpsCenter Server host, you need to create a principal user on the AT host. Use the credentials of this user when installing OpsCenter Server. Note: Symantec Product Authentication Service is installed when you install Veritas Cluster Server. You must upgrade to the version of authentication service that is shipped with OpsCenter 7.5.

Note: OpsCenter does not support clustered AT.

Note: In case of updates made to AT for OpsCenter 7.5, see the following technote for the latest information: http://entsupport.symantec.com/docs/336967 The OpsCenter Agent 7.5 and AT can be installed on the remote host using the following procedure. To install Symantec OpsCenter Agent and AT on a remote Windows host

1 2

Log on to the remote host where you want to install OpsCenter Agent 7.5 and AT. Install OpsCenter Agent 7.5 on the remote host. See Installing Symantec OpsCenter Agent on Windows on page 134.

200

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About clustering Symantec OpsCenter

Install AT from the OpsCenter 7.5 DVD.

If autorun is enabled, the Symantec OpsCenter Installation Wizard appears. If autorun is not enabled, click Start > Run. On the Run dialog box, in the Open text box, type D:\Browser.exe and press Enter: Where D is the DVD drive. The Symantec OpsCenter Installation Wizard appears.

4 5 6

On the Symantec OpsCenter Installation Wizard, click the Installation link. Click Symantec Product Authentication Service. Click Next. The VxSSVRTSatSetup.exe is executed. Note that you should not cluster the AT service, as OpsCenter does not support clustered AT. See Symantec Infrstructure Core Services Installation Guide for more information about the VxSSVRTSatSetup.exe.

Create a principal user on the AT host using the following command: AT_INSTALL_DIR/bin/vssat addprpl --prplname <principal name>
--password <principal name password> --pdrtype ab --domain broker --prpltype service --is_broker_admin --is_domain_admin

AT_INSTALL_DIR is the directory where AT is installed. The default location on 32-bit Windows platforms is: %Program
Files%\VERITAS\Security\Authentication

The default location on 64-bit Windows platforms is:

%ProgramFiles(x86)%\VERITAS\Secruity\Authentication

Installing OpsCenter Server 7.5 on a Windows cluster

To cluster OpsCenter and make it highly available, you must install and configure OpsCenter in a clustered mode. Note: To install OpsCenter Server in clustered mode, first install the OpsCenter Server on the active node and then on the passive nodes. Also, you need to install OpsCenter Server manually on all the nodes. To install OpsCenter Server 7.5 on a Windows cluster

1 2

On an active cluster node where you want to install OpsCenter server, insert the OpsCenter DVD in the DVD drive.

If autorun is enabled, the Symantec OpsCenter Installation Wizard appears.

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About clustering Symantec OpsCenter

201

If autorun is not enabled, click Start > Run. On the Run dialog box, in the Open text box, type D:\Browser.exe and press Enter: Where D is the DVD drive. The Symantec OpsCenter Installation Wizard appears.

3 4 5 6

On the Symantec OpsCenter Installation Wizard, click the Installation link. Click the OpsCenter Server Installation link to install Symantec OpsCenter server. Click Next. Read the license agreement, check I accept the terms of the license agreement and click Next. You may opt to check or uncheck Participate in the NetBackup Product Improvement Program. This option is checked by default. If you check this option, the installer uploads installation deployment and product usage information to Symantec automatically and in a secured manner. This data would help Symantec to guide future product development and also analyze issues.

Select Install a clustered OpsCenter Server to install OpsCenter Server in clustered mode. You need to install OpsCenter Server manually on each node of the cluster. This option is enabled if you have Veritas Cluster Server (VCS) installed.

In the Installation Method section, click Typical to use the default settings and installation location. Also compare the space that is required for installation with the actual space available in the installation directory. Note: Click Custom if you want to change the default settings and locations. Click Next.

202

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About clustering Symantec OpsCenter

On the License Keys panel, enter the demo or permanent key that you have received with the purchase of OpsCenter and click Add Key. Note: You can also add the license keys from the OpsCenter console. See About managing licenses on page 272. The license keys that are already installed on the system are also displayed in the box that is shown on this panel. The license type information is also shown along with the key. More information about licenses is available. See About the OpsCenter licensing model on page 95.

10 Click Next. The Authentication Settings panel is displayed. 11 On the Authentication Settings panel, enter the following details of a
principal user to connect to the host where AT authentication broker (Root + AB or AB) is installed:

Authentication service host name Authentication service port number (2821 is the default port number) Authentication service user name Authentication service Password Authentication service Domain Name (broker is the default domain name)

Note: You must have this principal user created on the authentication broker (AB) host. See Installing Symantec OpsCenter Agent 7.5 and AT on a remote Windows host on page 199.

Note: Ignore this step if you are installing OpsCenter on a passive node.

12 Click Next. The Cluster Settings panel is displayed.

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About clustering Symantec OpsCenter

203

13 On the Cluster Settings panel, enter the following information:

Cluster Group Name Enter the name for the OpsCenter cluster. For example: OpsCenter_Server Enter the virtual host name that is assigned to the OpsCenter cluster. For example: Oc_cluster. The virtual host name must be the short name and less than 15 characters. Enter the IP address that assigned to the OpsCenter cluster Enter the subnet mask . For example: 255.255.252.0 Select the shared drive path that you have configured in VxVM. For example, Z:\ Select LAN as a public network. You can select different public network for passive nodes.

Virtual host Name

Virtual IP address

Subnet mask Path to Shared data

Public Network

Note: While installing OpsCenter on a passive node, only Public Network option is enabled.

14 Click Next. The installer shows the summary of the settings that you have
selected for OpsCenter Server installation. Check Save Summary to field to save the installation summary. Click Browse to save the installation summary in your preferred location.

15 Click Install.
The installer starts installing the OpsCenter Server software. In a clustered mode, the default OpsCenter database location on Windows is the following location on the shared drive:
OpsCenter\Server\db

204

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About clustering Symantec OpsCenter

16 After successful installation, you can view the OpsCenter console or view
installation logs.

17 Click Finish. Repeat this procedure for all the cluster nodes.
Note: After installing an OpsCenter cluster on Windows 2008 R2 x64 system, you need to manually bring the NetBackupOpsCenterVCS resource online. You can bring the NetBackupOpsCenterVCS resource online from the CLI or by using the cluster GUI. Use the following command:
hares -online <resource name> -sys <Name of the active node>

Example: hares -online newonelatest-OpsCenter -sys OPS-CLUSTER-1

Upgrading from OpsCenter 7.0.x or 7.1.x cluster to OpsCenter 7.5 cluster

Use the following procedure to upgrade from OpsCenter 7.0.x or 7.1.x cluster to OpsCenter 7.5 cluster on Windows. Note: To upgrade to OpsCenter 7.5 Server in a clustered mode, first install the OpsCenter 7.5 Server on the active node and then on the passive nodes. Also, you need to install OpsCenter Server manually on all the nodes. To upgrade from OpsCenter 7.0.x or 7.1.x cluster to OpsCenter 7.5 cluster on Windows

1 2

From the active node of the OpsCenter 7.0.x (or 7.1.x) cluster that you want to upgrade, insert the OpsCenter DVD in the DVD drive.

If autorun is enabled, the Symantec OpsCenter Installation Wizard appears. If autorun is not enabled, click Start > Run. On the Run dialog box, in the Open text box, type D:\Browser.exe and press Enter: Where D is the DVD drive. The Symantec OpsCenter Installation Wizard appears.

3 4 5

On the Symantec OpsCenter Installation Wizard, click the Installation link. Click the OpsCenter Server Installation link to install Symantec OpsCenter server. Click Next.

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About clustering Symantec OpsCenter

205

The Welcome panel of the Installation Wizard appears. The Installation Wizard detects an existing installation of OpsCenter Server 7.0 (or 7.0.1) on the system. Depending on the installed version, the following message may be displayed on the Welcome panel:
The Installation has detected that the following software is already installed on your system: Symantec OpsCenter Server: Version 7.0 In order to upgrade to a newer version, the existing Symantec OpsCenter Server will be removed.

Click Next to continue.

Read the license agreement, check I accept the terms of the license agreement and click Next. You may opt to check or uncheck Participate in the NetBackup Product Improvement Program. This option is checked by default. If you check this option, the installer uploads installation deployment and product usage information to Symantec automatically and in a secured manner. This data would help Symantec to guide future product development and also analyze issues.

Select Install a clustered OpsCenter Server to install OpsCenter Server in clustered mode. You need to install OpsCenter Server manually on each node of the cluster. This option is enabled if you have Veritas Cluster Server (VCS) installed.

In the Installation Method section, click Typical to use the default settings and installation location. Typical is selected by default. Also compare the space that is required for installation with the actual space available in the installation directory. Note: The Custom option is disabled when you upgrade from OpsCenter 7.0x or 7.1.x to 7.5. You cannot customize the default settings, locations, or port numbers while upgrading from OpsCenter 7.0.x (or 7.1.x) to OpsCenter 7.5. Click Next.

206

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About clustering Symantec OpsCenter

10 Specify a location for saving the old OpsCenter database. The default location
is C:\Program Files\Symantec\OpsCenter_SavedData. Click Browse to specify a different location. In case the directory C:\Program Files\Symantec\OpsCenter_SavedData does not exist, you are prompted to create it. Click Yes to create the directory. Note: Ensure that the database location has adequate space by going through the Disk space requirements section on this page. A green checkmark appears in the Required column if there is adequate disk space.

11 On the License Keys panel, enter the demo or permanent key that you have
received with the purchase of OpsCenter and click Add Key. Note: You can also add the license keys from the OpsCenter console. See About managing licenses on page 272. The license keys that are already installed on the system are also displayed in the box that is shown on this panel. The license type information is also shown along with the key. More information about licenses is available. See About the OpsCenter licensing model on page 95.

12 Click Next. The Cluster Settings panel is displayed. 13 On the Cluster Settings panel, enter the following information:
Cluster Group Name Virtual host Name Virtual IP address Subnet mask Path to Shared data Public Network This option is disabled. This option is disabled. This option is disabled. This option is disabled. This option is disabled. Select LAN as a public network. You can select different public network for active and passive nodes.

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About clustering Symantec OpsCenter

207

14 Click Next. The installer shows the summary of the settings that you have
selected for OpsCenter Server installation. Check Save Summary to field to save the installation summary. Click Browse to save the installation summary in your preferred location.

15 Click Install.
The installer starts installing the OpsCenter Server software. Note: In clustered mode, the default OpsCenter database location on Windows is the following location on the shared drive:
OpsCenter\Server\db

16 After successful installation, you can view the OpsCenter console or view
installation logs.

17 Click Finish. Repeat this procedure for the passive nodes.

Uninstalling Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 from the Windows cluster

Use the Windows Add/Remove Programs utility to uninstall OpsCenter Server from a Windows cluster. Use the following procedure to uninstall OpsCenter from all the cluster nodes. To unistall Symantec OpsCenter Server completely from the cluster

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Log on to the active node as a user with administrator privileges. Log on to the cluster Web GUI. Right-click the selected cluster monitor panel and click Explorer View from the menu to access Cluster Explorer. Click the Service Groups tab in the Cluster Explorer configuration tree. Right-click the OpsCenter resource group and select Offline > All Systems. Click Yes to forcefully take the resource group offline. In the Windows Control Panel, click Add/Remove Programs. Click Symantec OpsCenter Server and click Remove. Click Next to continue and remove Symantec OpsCenter Server from your computer.

208

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About clustering Symantec OpsCenter

10 Uninstall OpsCenter software from all the nodes. Repeat steps 7 through 9
for all the passive nodes.

11 Delete the OpsCenter resource groups manually. Note that the installer does
not remove the OpsCenter resource groups. These must be removed manually. See Deleting OpsCenter resource group from the cluster on page 208.

Deleting OpsCenter resource group from the cluster

Use the following procedure to delete OpsCenter resource group from the cluster. To delete OpsCenter resource group from the cluster

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Log on to the cluster Web GUI. Right-click the selected cluster monitor panel and click Explorer View from the menu to access Cluster Explorer. Click the Service Groups tab in the Cluster Explorer configuration tree. Right-click the OpsCenter resource group and select Offline > All Systems. Click Yes to forcefully take the resource group offline. Right-click the OpsCenter resource group and select Delete. Click Yes to delete the OpsCenter resource group.

See Uninstalling Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 from the Windows cluster on page 207.

Clustering Symantec OpsCenter Server on Solaris

This section provides information about installing OpsCenter Server in a clustered mode, on a Solaris host. Table 2-14 provides the Solaris clustering steps. Table 2-14 Step
1

OpsCenter Server clustering steps Description

Understand the limitations of an OpsCenter cluster

Reference topic
See Limitations of Symantec OpsCenter cluster on Solaris on page 209. See Prerequisites for Symantec OpsCenter cluster on Solaris on page 209.

Make sure that you have met all prerequisites.

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About clustering Symantec OpsCenter

209

Table 2-14 Step

3

OpsCenter Server clustering steps (continued) Description Reference topic

Make sure that your preinstallation See Preinstallation checklist for checklist is complete. a Symantec OpsCenter Server installation on page 211. Install OpsCenter 7.5. See Installing Symantec OpsCenter Server in a clustered mode on Solaris on page 213.

Limitations of Symantec OpsCenter cluster on Solaris

An OpsCenter cluster has the following limitations:

Only the OpsCenter Server can be clustered.OpsCenter Agent and OpsCenter View Builder cannot be clustered. Upgrades from previous versions of NOM or VBR to clustered OpsCenter Server is not supported. You can upgrade from OpsCenter 7.0.x (or 7.1.x) cluster to an OpsCenter 7.5 cluster. OpsCenter cluster cannot co-exist with any other Symantec product running in secure mode using the Symantec Product Authentication Service. OpsCenter does not support clustered AT. In a Solaris cluster, the Search broker is not a clustered component and is not monitored by the NetBackupOpsCenterAgent.

Prerequisites for Symantec OpsCenter cluster on Solaris

The following requirements must be met before you install and configure a Symantec OpsCenter failover server:

Verify that VCS and OpsCenter support your hardware. For a list of supported storage devices, visit the following Web site: http://entsupport.symantec.com Verify that the supported version of VCS is correctly installed and configured on Solaris. Follow the steps in the Veritas Cluster Server Installation Guide. Verify that no VCS resource group and resource exist with the same name as that which you intend to use for OpsCenter. The SharedDisk must be configured and accessible to all cluster nodes where you want to install OpsCenter. Verify that you have an IP address and host name (virtual name) to be assigned to the OpsCenter resource in VCS. Only use these for the OpsCenter resource.

210

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About clustering Symantec OpsCenter

Also, ping the IP address and verify that the IP address is not plumbed.

Verify that you can mount the disk. Verify that you have the OpsCenter installation program and a valid license key. Verify that OpsCenter Server installation is carried out with the domain admin account. Before installing OpsCenter Server, ensure that Symantec OpsCenter Agent 7.5 (PBX) and Symantec authentication service (AT) Server are installed separately on a remote host. PBX is installed when you install OpsCenter 7.5 Agent. Note the following points about installing OpsCenter Agent 7.5 (PBX) and AT on the remote host:

Symantec recommends that you first install OpsCenter Agent 7.5 (PBX) and then install AT from the OpsCenter 7.5 DVD. AT must be installed in a non-clustered mode. AT can be installed in Root + AB or AB mode on the remote host.

AT must be installed separately (and not along with OpsCenter) on the remote host. For more information about installing AT, see the Symanetc Infrastructure Core Services Installation Guide.

Verify that the authentication service and PBX components are connected. See Connecting Symantec Product Authentication Service and Symantec Private Branch Exchange on page 194.

Installing Symantec OpsCenter Agent 7.5 and AT on a remote host

OpsCenter Server requires that OpsCenter Agent 7.5 (PBX) and Symantec Product Authentication Service (AT) are installed on a standalone host, before OpsCenter can be clustered. Symantec recommends that you first install OpsCenter Agent 7.5 and then install AT from the OpsCenter 7.5 DVD. You must install the version of AT Service that is shipped with OpsCenter 7.5. You can either configure AT in root + authentication broker (Root + AB) mode or authentication broker (AB) mode. Symantec recommends that you configure AT in a 'Root+AB' mode. Clustered OpsCenter Server uses this authentication broker. To establish a connection between AT host and OpsCenter Server host, you need to create a

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About clustering Symantec OpsCenter

211

principal user on the AT host. Use the credentials of this user when installing OpsCenter Server. Note: Symantec Product Authentication Service is installed when you install Veritas Cluster Server. You must upgrade to the version of authentication service that is shipped with OpsCenter.

Note: OpsCenter does not support clustered AT. OpsCenter Agent 7.5 and AT can be installed on the remote host using the following procedure. To install Symantec OpsCenter Agent 7.5 and AT on a remote host

1 2

Log on to the remote host where you want to install OpsCenter Agent 7.5 and AT. Install OpsCenter Agent 7.5 on the remote host using the OpsCenter 7.5 DVD. See Installing Symantec OpsCenter Agent on UNIX on page 140.

To install AT, mount the OpsCenter 7.5 DVD. Navigate to the ICS directory:
cd ICS

Invoke the ./installics script from the ICS directory. The installics menu is displayed.

Select 1 to install AT. Note that you must enable PBX support for the authentication broker server. Answer y to enable Private Branch Exchange (PBX) support in authentication broker server. See Symantec Infrstructure Core Services Installation Guide for more details on using the installics script.

Preinstallation checklist for a Symantec OpsCenter Server installation

The OpsCenter Server requests certain cluster-related information during installation. Fill out the checklist before you begin installation. Note: The configuration utility unless specified, treats all attribute values globally. The following information is required for all VCS cluster configurations.

212

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About clustering Symantec OpsCenter

Virtual Name for NetBackup: IP address : Subnet mask Node Name IP address

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Network device name (NIC)

---------------------------------------- ---------------------------------------- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------------------------------- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------------------------------- ----------------------------------------

Installation checklist for aSymantec OpsCenter installation with VCS

The following information is required if you use VCS with VxVM. Review the scenario that is described.
Resource Disk group resource: Disk group : -------------------------------------Start volumes: ----------------------------------Stop volumes: ----------------------------------Volume resource: (optional) Volume: ------------------------------------------Mount resource: Mount point : -----------------------------------Block device: ----------------------------------FS Type: -----------------------------------------Mount option: ---------------------------------Fsck option: ------------------------------------/opt/VRTSnbu /dev/vx/dsk/opsdg/opsvol vxfs (optional) (if you add other options, -y is also required) opsvol opsdg 0 or 1 0 or 1 Example

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About clustering Symantec OpsCenter

213

Installing Symantec OpsCenter Server in a clustered mode on Solaris

To cluster OpsCenter and make it highly available, you must install and configure OpsCenter in a clustered mode. Note: To install OpsCenter Server in clustered mode, first install the OpsCenter Server on the active node and then on the passive nodes. Also, you need to install OpsCenter Server manually on all the nodes. To install OpsCenter Server in clustered mode on Solaris

Fill out the checklist for all configurations and the checklist for your specific environment. See Preinstallation checklist for a Symantec OpsCenter Server installation on page 211.

2 3 4

Open a Solaris console and log on as root on the target host. Mount the OpsCenter product DVD for the appropriate platform on which you are installing OpsCenter Server. Make sure that the shared disk is not mounted on any node in the cluster. If applicable, unmount the OpsCenter shared mount point. Stop the volume the mount point is on and deport the disk group for that volume on all nodes of the cluster.

Type the following command:./install. Press Enter. Select Server from the displayed options (Server and Agent). Press Enter to install OpsCenter Server.

6 7

The Welcome message is displayed. Press Enter to continue. The installer then checks if OpsCenter Server is installed on the system or not. It prompts you in case OpsCenter is already installed. The installer also examines the system for existing packages. The installer displays a list of components that are installed like PBX, Symantec WebGUI Server, Symantec Database etc. Review this list and press Enter to continue.

214

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About clustering Symantec OpsCenter

The installer prompts you with the following question:

Where do you want to install Symantec OpsCenter? </opt>

Type a directory path where you want to install the Symantec OpsCenter Server packages and press Enter. To accept the default path (/opt), press Enter without typing a directory path.

10 Type y to confirm the directory path and press Enter. 11 The installer prompts you with the following question:
Participate in the NetBackup Product Improvement Program? [y,n,q] (y)

If you type y and press Enter, the installer uploads installation deployment and product usage information to Symantec automatically and in a secured manner. This data would help Symantec to guide future product development and also analyze issues.

12 When OpsCenter Server is installed on the clustered setup, a confirmation

prompt is displayed.

When you install OpsCenter Server on the first node, you are prompted to confirm creation of an OpsCenter Server cluster. Type Yes to set up OpsCenter in HA mode. When you install OpsCenter Server on the subsequent nodes, information of already created NetBackup OpsCenter cluster group is displayed. You are prompted to join the group. Note: Ensure that the installation location of primary node and the secondary nodes is the same. For example, if you install OpsCenter Server in /opt on the primary node, then install OpsCenter Server in /opt on the secondary nodes as well.

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About clustering Symantec OpsCenter

215

13 When you are prompted for cluster-specific configuration details, refer to

the checklist and provide details accordingly. Use the virtual name for the NetBackup server name. Caution: When you are prompted, you must provide the same virtual cluster name that you provided during the installation. This name is case-sensitive and must be in the same format (FQDN/short) on all the nodes.

14 Allow OpsCenter to be installed in a cluster. The following happens when

OpsCenter Server is installed:

On the first node, a single node cluster resource group for OpsCenter is created and brought online. On the other nodes, the installed node is added to the cluster resource group.

Upgrading from OpsCenter 7.0.x or 7.1.x cluster to OpsCenter 7.5 cluster

Use the following steps to upgrade from an OpsCenter 7.0.x or 7.1.x cluster to OpsCenter 7.5 cluster on Solaris. Note: To upgrade OpsCenter Server in a clustered mode, first install OpsCenter 7.5 Server on the active node and then on the passive nodes. Also, you need to install OpsCenter Server manually on all the nodes. To upgrade from OpsCenter 7.0.x or 7.1.x cluster to OpsCenter 7.5 cluster

Fill out the checklist for all configurations and the checklist for your specific environment. See Preinstallation checklist for a Symantec OpsCenter Server installation on page 211.

2 3

Log on to the OpsCenter 7.0.x (or 7.1.x) cluster as root. Make sure that the shared disk is not mounted on any node in the cluster. If applicable, unmount the OpsCenter shared mount point. Stop the volume the mount point is on and deport the disk group for that volume on all nodes of the cluster.

Offline OpsCenter server resource by using the following command:

hares -offline <opscenter server resource name> -sys <node>

216

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About clustering Symantec OpsCenter

Freeze OpsCenter group by using the following command:

hagrp freeze <OpsCenter group name> -persistent sys

Stop NetBackup OpsCenter cluster agent on all nodes of the OpsCenter group using the following command:
haagent -stop NetBackupOpsCenter -force -sys <node>

Log on to the active node and upgrade to OpsCenter Server 7.5 software. Mount the OpsCenter product DVD on the OpsCenter 7.0.x (or 7.1.x) cluster that you want to upgrade.

Type the following command: ./install. Press Enter. Select Server from the displayed options (Server and Agent). Press Enter to install OpsCenter Server.

The Welcome message is displayed. Press Enter to continue. not. It prompts you in case OpsCenter Server is already installed. The installer also examines the system for existing packages.

10 The installer then checks if OpsCenter Server is installed on the system or

11 The following prompt is displayed:

Where should the existing Symantec OpsCenter database and configuration files be backed up? An 'OpsCenterServer_backup' directory will be created within the directory that you specify to store these files. (/var/symantec/)

Type the directory name in which the existing OpsCenter 7.0.x or 7.1.x database and configuration files can be saved and then press Enter. To accept the default directory path (/var/symantec), press Enter.

12 The installer displays a list of components that will be installed or upgraded

like PBX, AT, OpsCenter Server, OpsCenter GUI etc. Review this list and press Enter to continue.

13 The installer prompts you with the following question:

installOpsCenterServer is now ready to upgrade OPSCENTERSERVER. Are you sure you want to upgrade OPSCENTERSERVER? [y,n,q] (y)

Press Enter to continue and upgrade to OpsCenter 7.5.

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About clustering Symantec OpsCenter

217

14 The installer displays the OpsCenter 7.0.x (or 7.1.x) packages that are installed.
Depending on the installed packages, the following message may be displayed:
The following packages were found on the system. However the package versions are older than the ones required by OpsCenter. SYMCOpsCenterServer 7.0 was found on the system, but OpsCenter requires SYMCOpsCenterServer 7.5.0.0 SYMCOpsCenterGUI 7.0 was found on the system, but OpsCenter requires SYMCOpsCenterGUI 7.5.0.0 VRTSOpsCenterLegacyServer 7.0 was found on the system, but OpsCenter requires VRTSOpsCenterLegacyServer 7.5.0.0

The installer then uninstalls the older packages and installs OpsCenter 7.5 Server.

15 The installer prompts you with the following question:

Participate in the NetBackup Product Improvement Program? [y,n,q] (y)

If you type y and press Enter, the installer uploads installation deployment and product usage information to Symantec automatically and in a secured manner. This data would help Symantec to guide future product development and also analyze issues.

16 OpsCenter 7.5 Server is installed. Configuration changes are made to the

system.

17 The database upgrade process starts. In this process, data is migrated from
the OpsCenter 7.0.x (or 7.1.x) database to the OpsCenter 7.5 database. The database process may take time depending on your database size. The following message is displayed:
The database upgrade is in progress. This may take some time based on the database size. To know the upgrade status, see dbManager_<timestamp>_.log file in the OpsCenter Server database logs directory (../db/log) after some time.

You can check the status of database upgrade. A file named dbManager_<timestamp>_.log is created after a few minutes in INSTALL_PATH/SYMCOpsCenterServer/db/log directory. You can view this file to check the database upgrade status.

218

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About clustering Symantec OpsCenter

18 All the OpsCenter processes are started. The following information is also
displayed:

Web URL to access OpsCenter console Location of install log and summary files.

19 After upgrading the active node to OpsCenter 7.5, install OpsCenter 7.5
software on all the passive nodes. Repeat steps 8 through 19 for all passive nodes.

20 After upgrading OpsCenter server on all nodes, run the following command
to start the NetBackupOpsCenter cluster agent on each node.
haagent -start NetBackupOpsCenter -force -sys <node>

21 Unfreeze the OpsCenter VCS group by using the following command:

hagrp -unfreeze <OpsCenter group name> -persistent sys <node>

Uninstalling OpsCenter Server completely from the Solaris cluster

Use the Uninstall Script, which resides in the root directory of the product DVD and also in <INSTALL_PATH>/VRTS/install directory, to uninstall OpsCenter completely from all the nodes on a Solaris host. To unistall OpsCenter Server completely from the Solaris cluster

1 2

Open a Solaris cluster and log on as root. Offline OpsCenter group by following command from the active node:
hagrp -offline <OpsCenter group name> -sys node

Change to the following directory:

<INSTALL_PATH>/VRTS/install

Type the following command and press Enter:

./uninstallOpsCenterServer

The Uninstall script checks the components that are installed on the system.

When you are asked to confirm if you want to uninstall OpsCenter Server, do one of the following:

Type y. Press Enter to start the uninstall process. The Uninstall Script stops all processes and then uninstalls the component packages. When the uninstall is complete, it displays a summary of the uninstall, including the location of the uninstall log files.

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About clustering Symantec OpsCenter

219

Type n. Press Enter to cancel the uninstall procedure.

6 7

Uninstall OpsCenter software from all the nodes. Repeat steps 3 through 5 for all nodes. Delete all resources by following command:
hagrp -delete <OpsCenter group name>

220

Installing Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 About clustering Symantec OpsCenter

Chapter

Administering Symantec OpsCenter

This chapter includes the following topics:

About OpsCenter services and processes used by OpsCenter OpsCenter server scripts on Windows and UNIX About OpsCenter database administration Configuring remote authentication service in OpsCenter About backup and restore of OpsCenter and OpsCenter Analytics About communication and firewall considerations Gathering troubleshooting data with the support script About OpsCenter log files

About OpsCenter services and processes used by OpsCenter

This section provides information about OpsCenter services and processes and how you can control these services. These topics assume you already installed OpsCenter on a server. If you have not installed OpsCenter, review the installation chapter. See Services used by OpsCenter on Windows on page 222. See Controlling the OpsCenter services on page 222. See Processes used by OpsCenter on UNIX on page 223.

222

Administering Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter services and processes used by OpsCenter

Services used by OpsCenter on Windows

After you install OpsCenter server and Agent on Windows, the following services should be active. OpsCenter depends on these services. If any of these services fail to start, OpsCenter does not start. Table 3-1 contains information about the services that OpsCenter uses on Windows. Table 3-1 Service Name Process Services used by OpsCenter on Windows Description
This service is for the Symantec OpsCenter Agent. By default, the OpsCenter Agent Service starts whenever you boot your Agent host. The OpsCenter server interacts with the OpsCenter GUI and provides the data that is requested by the GUI from the OpsCenter database. It also interacts with NetBackup through NBSL to get data regularly. This service manages the OpsCenter databases. This process must be running on the OpsCenter server during all normal operations like viewing reports, running reports and so on. This service is not an OpsCenter service. OpsCenter uses this service to host the OpsCenter Console. This service is not an OpsCenter service, but it is a component used by OpsCenter. Symantec Private Branch Exchange allows all socket communication to take place through a single port. This service is not an OpsCenter service. OpsCenter uses this service to authenticate users of OpsCenter.

Symantec OpsCenter Agent java.exe Service

Symantec OpsCenter Server Service

java.exe

Symantec OpsCenter Database Server

dbsrv11.exe

Symantec OpsCenter Web java.exe server Service Symantec Private Branch Exchange pbx_exchange.exe

Symantec Product Authentication Service

vxatd.exe

Note: The processes that are listed in this table show the actual memory that is consumed by the respective OpsCenter service.

Controlling the OpsCenter services

Use the following procedure to verify if these services are running or not.

Administering Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter services and processes used by OpsCenter

223

To control these services

1 2 3

Use Start > Settings > Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services. Check the Status column for each service. From the Status column, you can verify if a service is running or not. The Services panel can also be used to stop, start, and restart the OpsCenter services and Symantec shared services.

Processes used by OpsCenter on UNIX

After you install OpsCenter server and Agent on UNIX, the following processes should be active. Table 3-2 describes the processes that OpsCenter uses on UNIX. Table 3-2 Process Description
Symantec OpsCenter Agent

Processes used by OpsCenter on UNIX Detailed Description

Process

<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterAgent/bin/.OpsCenterAgentd This process is for the Note: The default installation path or <INSTALL_PATH> for Symantec OpsCenter Agent. By default, the OpsCenter UNIX is /opt Agent process starts whenever you boot your Agent host. <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/.OpsCenterServerd The OpsCenter server interacts with the OpsCenter GUI and provides the data that the GUI requests from the OpsCenter database. It also interacts with NetBackup to get data regularly.

Symantec OpsCenter Server

Symantec <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/db/bin/OpsCenterDBd This process manages the OpsCenter Database OpsCenter databases. This Server process must be running on the OpsCenter server during all normal operations like viewing reports, running reports and so on. OpsCenter Database Server can fail to start in some scenarios. See OpsCenter database service fails to start on page 224.

224

Administering Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter services and processes used by OpsCenter

Table 3-2 Process Description

Symantec OpsCenter Web Server

Processes used by OpsCenter on UNIX (continued) Detailed Description

This process is not an OpsCenter process. OpsCenter uses this process to host the OpsCenter Console. Many Symantec Web consoles share this component. This process is not an OpsCenter process. but it is a component used by OpsCenter. PBX allows all socket communication to take place through a single port. This process is not an OpsCenter process. OpsCenter uses this process to authenticate users of OpsCenter.

Process
java

Symantec Private Branch Exchange

<INSTALL_PATH>/VRTSpbx/bin/pbx_exchange

Symantec Product Authentication Service

<INSTALL_PATH>/VRTSat/bin/vxatd

Note: The processes that are listed in this table show the actual memory consumed by the respective OpsCenter process.

OpsCenter database service fails to start

OpsCenter database service can fail to start on the AIX system in various scenarios. The service fails when the database size increases more than the file size mentioned. In a case where the database service fails to start, you get the following error message - Assertion failed: file system may be full or file size exceeded. You can check log details through <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/db/log/dbserver.log. The problem can be overcome through a few checks, such as checking the ulimit size and size limit of the file system.

Administering Symantec OpsCenter OpsCenter server scripts on Windows and UNIX

225

To overcome database service failure

Check the ulimit size for the file system, enter the ulimit command -a and press Enter.Increase the file size. Note: The file size must be increased only if the database size is greater than the file system size. This information is displayed when you run the ulimit command -a. If the file size is not the maximum size that is supported by the file system, you must increase the file size to the maximum limit. To change file size, you must change the user-specific settings using SMIT or run the command edit /etc/security/limits.

Start the OpsCenter database after the changes are made.

See Starting and stopping the OpsCenter database on page 233.

OpsCenter server scripts on Windows and UNIX

The following scripts are used within OpsCenter. The OpsCenter administrator may use many of these scripts. Use the -h option for help about these scripts. Table 3-3 lists the OpsCenter server scripts on Windows. Table 3-3 Script
startserver.bat and stopserver.bat dbbackup.bat INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin Backs up the OpsCenter database OpsCenter Administrator

OpsCenter server scripts on Windows Function Invokes or Is Invoked by

Location
INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin

Starts or stops Administrator the OpsCenterServerd.

startdb.bat and stopdb.bat

INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin

Starts or stops OpsCenter Administrator the OpsCenter database Starts and OpsCenter Administrator stops all OpsCenter Server services

opsadmin.bat

INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin

226

Administering Symantec OpsCenter OpsCenter server scripts on Windows and UNIX

Table 3-3 Script

dbdefrag.bat

OpsCenter server scripts on Windows (continued) Function

Defragments the OpsCenter database Changes the OpsCenter database password

Location
INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin

Invokes or Is Invoked by
OpsCenter Administrator

changedbpassword.bat INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin

OpsCenter Administrator

runStoredQuery.bat

INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin

Runs saved OpsCenter Administrator custom SQL and generates output in the desired format.

Table 3-4 lists the OpsCenter server scripts on UNIX. Table 3-4 Script Location OpsCenter server scripts on UNIX Function Invokes or Is Invoked by

startserver and stopserver startdb and stopdb

<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin Starts or OpsCenter stops the Server OpsCenterServerd.

<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin Starts or stops the OpsCenter database

OpsCenter Administrator

opsadmin.sh

<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin Starts, stops, OpsCenter and monitors Administrator all OpsCenter Server processes

Administering Symantec OpsCenter OpsCenter server scripts on Windows and UNIX

227

Table 3-4 Script Location

OpsCenter server scripts on UNIX (continued) Function Invokes or Is Invoked by

OpsCenterServer

Solaris: /etc/init.d

This script is OpsCenter used Server internally for clustering. The script starts, stops, or restarts the OpsCenter database, OpsCenter Server, and OpsCenter Web server (Tomcat).

dbbackup.sh

<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin Backs up the OpsCenter OpsCenter Administrator database <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer Defragments OpsCenter the Administrator OpsCenter database Changes the OpsCenter database password OpsCenter Administrator

dbdefrag

changeDbPassword.sh <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer

runStoredQuery.sh

<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer

Runs saved OpsCenter custom SQL Administrator and generates output in the desired format.

Commands to control OpsCenter services and processes

This section provides information on how you can control the OpsCenter server services and OpsCenter Agent service.

228

Administering Symantec OpsCenter OpsCenter server scripts on Windows and UNIX

Table 3-5 Service

All Symantec OpsCenter server services

Start and stop commands on Windows

Commands or Steps
To start all Symantec OpsCenter server services: INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsadmin.bat start To stop all Symantec OpsCenter server services: INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsadmin.bat stop

Symantec OpsCenter Select Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services and start or stop the Symantec database server service OpsCenter Database Server service. Symantec OpsCenter Server Service Symantec OpsCenter Web server Service Symantec OpsCenter Agent Service Select Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services and start or stop the Symantec OpsCenter Server Service. Select Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services and start or stop the Symantec OpsCenter Web Server Service. Select Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services and start or stop the Symantec OpsCenter Agent Service.

Table 3-6 Process

All Symantec OpsCenter server processes

Start and stop commands on UNIX

Commands or Steps
To start all Symantec OpsCenter server processes: <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin.sh start To stop all Symantec OpsCenter server processes: <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin.sh stop To monitor all processes: <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin.sh monitor

Symantec OpsCenter database server process Symantec OpsCenter server process

<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/startdb <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/stopdb

<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/startserver <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/stopserver

Administering Symantec OpsCenter OpsCenter server scripts on Windows and UNIX

229

Table 3-6 Process

Symantec OpsCenter Web server process

Start and stop commands on UNIX (continued)

Commands or Steps
<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterGUI/bin/startgui.sh <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterGUI/bin/stopgui.sh

Symantec OpsCenter Agent process

<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterAgent/bin/startagent <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterAgent/bin/stopagent

About dependency of services

The Symantec OpsCenter server service requires that the following OpsCenter services (processes) are running:

Symantec OpsCenter Database Server Symantec Product Authentication Service Symantec Private Branch Exchange

If you stop any of these services, then the OpsCenter server also stops. Note: After a reboot, the OpsCenter processes do not start automatically on SUSE Linux systems. Symantec recommends that you start the OpsCenter processes after you perform a reboot. Also after you reboot a SUSE 11 Server, and even though OpsCenter Server services are running, an attempt to logon may not succeed. Occasionally, OpsCenter services may not start on reboot in case of SUSE 11. This issue may happen because of the PBX taking time to start.

About nbproxy processes on NetBackup master servers

When OpsCenter is connected to a master server, you may find one or more nbproxy processes running on the master server. You may also see nbproxy processes when NetBackup-Java GUI or NetBackup-Windows GUI request certain data from NetBackup (like LiveUpdate , storage lifecycle policies). Most of the nbproxy processes are started, managed, and removed by NBSL. This section talks about the nbproxy processes that NBSL manages.

230

Administering Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter database administration

Note: Not all nbproxy processes on the master server are managed by NBSL. For example, some of the nbproxy processes are managed by nbjm and nbpem. An nbproxy process runs to retrieve the following NetBackup data for OpsCenter:

Policies Catalogs Storage lifecycle policies LiveUpdate Client details

Note the following points about the NBSL-managed nbproxy processes:

If the data collection for a master server is disabled or a master server is removed from the OpsCenter console, all nbproxy processes are stopped immediately. If OpsCenter crashes (or is abruptly closed), the nbproxy process is removed within an hour. If NetBackup is stopped (and NBSL is already killed), all nbproxy processes are stopped immediately. If NBSL crashes (or is abruptly closed), all nbproxy processes exit within 10 minutes.

About OpsCenter database administration

The Sybase database that OpsCenter uses is similar to the NetBackup database and is installed as part of the OpsCenter installation. The database is located on the OpsCenter server. More information about the Sybase database is available. See http://www.sybase.com/support/manuals.

OpsCenter database commands

OpsCenter provides some useful commands to help manage the OpsCenter database. In addition, a utility called changeVxATProperties has been included that lets you change the authentication server parameters. Table 3-7 lists some of the commands that are available.

Administering Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter database administration

231

Table 3-7 Command

Commands available with OpsCenter Reference

See Changing the OpsCenter database administrator password on page 231. See Starting and stopping the OpsCenter database on page 233. See About OpsCenter database defragmentation on page 233. See Backing up the OpsCenter database on page 242. See Restoring the OpsCenter database on page 245.

changeDbPassword

startdb and stopdb

dbdefrag

dbbackup

changeVxATProperties

See Configuring authentication server parameters on page 235.

Note: For a clustered OpsCenter server, you must run commands on the active node.See About running commands on the active node on page 194.

Changing the OpsCenter database administrator password

The changeDbPassword utility lets you change the database administrator password that is used for the OpsCenter database. Note: This utility is not used to change the logon password for OpsCenter. To change the existing logon password, you must use the OpsCenter console. See Changing your OpsCenter password on page 272. OpsCenter uses the Sybase SA (Server Anywhere) database to store data. You require a user name and a password to access the data that is stored in the database. The database administrator user ID is DBA and the initial password is SQL (password is case-sensitive ). Review the rules for forming a new database password. The OpsCenter database administrator password cannot have the following characteristics:

Exceed 30 characters.

232

Administering Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter database administration

Contain consecutive black slash characters. Contain any bracket [ ] characters. Contain any of the following characters. These characters have special meaning in Windows or in shell scripts. ! $ % & . ; ^ | < > , { } $ " ~ [ ] \\ Contains the ASCII characters that are less than 32 or ASCII characters that are greater than 127. Begin with White space and a single quote character. End with White space.

Note: Information about role-based access in Symantec OpsCenter is available. See User access rights and UI functions in OpsCenter on page 287. To change the database administrator password on Windows and UNIX

Enter the following command on Windows:

INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\changeDbPassword.bat

Enter the following command on UNIX:

<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/changeDbPassword.sh

2 3 4

You are prompted for the current database administrator password. Enter the current database password. You are prompted for a new database administrator password. Enter the new password. Restart the OpsCenter services and processes on Windows and UNIX platforms.
Windows Enter the following commands to stop and then start the OpsCenter services: INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsadmin.bat stop INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsadmin.bat stop UNIX Enter the following commands to stop and then start the OpsCenter processes: <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin.sh stop <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin.sh start

Administering Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter database administration

233

Starting and stopping the OpsCenter database

The startdb script is used to start the OpsCenter database. The stopdb script is used to stop the OpsCenter database. To start the database server on Windows and UNIX

To start the OpsCenter database on Windows, run the following command:

INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\startdb.bat

To start the OpsCenter database on UNIX, run the following command:

<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/startdb

To stop the database server on Windows and UNIX

To stop the OpsCenter database on Windows, run the following command:

INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\stopdb.bat

To stop the OpsCenter database on UNIX, run the following command:

<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/stopdb

About OpsCenter database defragmentation

Fragmentation occurs naturally as you make changes to your database. Such changes may occur due to the deletion of data from the OpsCenter database. Some examples when data is deleted from the OpsCenter database are the following:

When data purging is enabled in OpsCenter. The purge settings can be viewed by clicking Settings > Configuration > Data Purge in the OpsCenter console. Data purging in OpsCenter is enabled by default. When you delete a master server from OpsCenter.

Symantec recommends that you should defragment the OpsCenter database once in a month. In addition, you should defragment the OpsCenter database if the disk fragment count in the server.log file on Windows or dbserver.log file on UNIX shows a large number. The following section describes how you can find the disk fragment count. See Checking the disk fragment count on page 233. See Configuring authentication server parameters on page 235.

Checking the disk fragment count

Use the following procedure to check the disk fragment count in the server.log file on Windows or dbserver.log file on UNIX.

234

Administering Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter database administration

To check the disk fragment count

Open the following files on Windows and UNIX respectively:

Windows INSTALL_PATH\Symantec\OpsCenter\server\db\log\server.log UNIX <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/db/log/dbserver.log

Search for the word fragment in the file. For example, when you search for fragment in server.log or dbserver.log, you may find the following line:
Performance warning: Database file "G:\OpsCenter\db\vxpmdb.db" consists of 2000 disk fragments

Note: You may not find any results when you search for fragment. This result is completely fine. You may see such performance warnings when the disk fragment count is high.

Defragmenting the OpsCenter database

You can defragment the OpsCenter database using the dbdefrag command. Defragmentation helps to increase data access and retrieval speed. For optimum performance, defragment the OpsCenter databases once in a month and after a purge operation. Note: OpsCenter does not work during the time when the OpsCenter database is defragmented. To defragment the OpsCenter database on Windows and UNIX

Before you defragment the OpsCenter database, Symantec recommends that you back up the OpsCenter database. See Backing up the OpsCenter database on page 242.

To defragment the OpsCenter database on Windows, run the following command:

INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\dbdefrag.bat

To defragment the OpsCenter database on UNIX, run the following command:

<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/dbdefrag.sh

Administering Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter database administration

235

Configuring authentication server parameters

The authentication server parameters can be configured using the changeVxATProperties utility. Note: This procedure is applicable only for OpsCenter clusters where the authentication broker is remote. This procedure is not applicable when Symantec Product Authentication Service is installed on the local computer. To configure authentication server parameters

Enter the following command on Windows:

INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\changeVxATProperties.bat

Enter the following command on UNIX:

<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/changeVxATProperties.sh

The authentication server parameters appear one by one. The current values of the parameters are specified in brackets.

2 3

Enter the new values next to the respective parameter. If you do not enter a new value for a parameter, the value of the parameter does not change. You must restart the OpsCenter services for these changes to be effective. Answer y to restart the OpsCenter services.

Moving the OpsCenter database and database logs to a different hard disk
To improve OpsCenter performance, OpsCenter database files and the log files that are associated with the OpsCenter database should be stored on separate hard disks. You can store the OpsCenter database files on one hard disk and the log files on another hard disk. Symantec also recommends that you not store the database files on the hard disk that contains your operating system files. You can specify a custom location (non-default location) for the OpsCenter database during OpsCenter installation. The default location for the OpsCenter database can also be changed after OpsCenter has been installed. Use the following procedures to move the OpsCenter database and log files to a different hard disk. The first two procedures are for moving the OpsCenter database files on Windows or UNIX. The last two procedures are for moving the database log files.

236

Administering Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter database administration

To move the OpsCenter database to a different hard disk on Windows

Stop all OpsCenter services. Enter the following command:

INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsadmin.bat stop

Open the databases.conf file with a text editor like notepad from the following directory:
INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\db\conf

This file has the following contents:

"INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\db\data\vxpmdb.db"

This path specifies the default location of the OpsCenter database.

To move the database to a custom location like E:\Database, replace the contents of the file with the following:

"E:\Database\vxpmdb.db"

Make sure that you specify the path in double quotes. Also the directories in the specified path should not contain any special characters like %, ~, !, @, $, &, ^, # etc. For example, do not specify a path like E:\Database%. Save the databases.conf file.

Copy the database files to the new location. Copy vxpmdb.db and symcOpscache.db from INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\db\data to a location like E:\Database. Restart all OpsCenter server services. To restart all OpsCenter services, enter the following command:
INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsadmin.bat start

You should run and monitor OpsCenter for a certain period after moving the database. If OpsCenter works as expected, you can delete vxpmdb.db and symcOpscache.db from the default location (INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\db\data).

Administering Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter database administration

237

To move the OpsCenter database to a different hard disk on UNIX

Stop all OpsCenter server processes. Enter the following command:

<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin.sh stop

The default location of the OpsCenter database is

<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/db/data.

Back up the OpsCenter database (<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/db/data) to some other location. Enter the following command:
cp R <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/db/data /backup/data

To move the database to a custom location like /usr/mydata, always create a new directory named OpsCenterServer inside /usr/mydata by entering the following command:
mkdir -p /usr/mydata/OpsCenterServer

Symantec recommends that when you move the OpsCenter database to a custom location on UNIX, the database must be saved in a directory named OpsCenterServer inside the custom location: /CUSTOM_LOCATION/OpsCenterServer.

To move the database to a custom location like /usr/mydata/OpsCenterServer, enter the following command:
mv <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/db/data/* /usr/mydata/OpsCenterServer

Remove the symbolic link that exists for the OpsCenter database. Enter the following command:
unlink <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/db/data

Create a symbolic link to /usr/mydata/OpsCenterServer in <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/db/data. To create a symbolic link, enter the following command:
ln -s <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/db/data /usr/mydata/OpsCenterServer

Restart all OpsCenter server processes by entering the following command:

<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin.sh start

You should run and monitor OpsCenter for a certain period after moving the database. If OpsCenter works as expected, you can delete vxpmdb.db and symcOpscache.db from /backup/data.

238

Administering Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter database administration

To move the database log files to a different hard disk on Windows

Stop all OpsCenter server services. Enter the following command:

INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsadmin.bat stop

Navigate to the following location for 32-bit and 64-bit systems respectively:
INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\db\WIN32 INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\db\WIN64

Enter the following commands:

dblog -t directory_path\vxpmdb.log database_path\vxpmdb.db

where directory_path is the path where you want to store the database logs and database_path is the path where your database is located. This command moves the log file that is associated with the OpsCenter database to the new directory (directory_path). It is recommended to use vxpmdb.log as the name of the log file.

Restart all OpsCenter server services. To restart all OpsCenter services, enter the following command:
INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsadmin.bat start

To move the database log files to a different hard disk on UNIX

Stop all OpsCenter server processes. Enter the following command:

<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin.sh stop

Set the path of the LD_LIBRARY_PATH variable in the following manner:

LD_LIBRARY_PATH=<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/db/ lib:$LD_LIBRARY_PATH export LD_LIBRARY_PATH

Administering Symantec OpsCenter Configuring remote authentication service in OpsCenter

239

Navigate to the following location:

<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/db/bin

Enter the following commands:

./dblog -t directory_path/vxpmdb.log database_path/vxpmdb.db

where directory_path is the path where you want to store your database log file and database_path is the path where the OpsCenter database is located. This command moves the log file that is associated with the OpsCenter database to the new directory (directory_path). It is recommended to use vxpmdb.log as the name of the log file.

Restart all OpsCenter server processes by entering the following command:

<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin.sh start

About database troubleshooting

Security information about the OpsCenter database is available. See About OpsCenter Web GUI/OpsCenter server to Sybase database communication on page 253. Information about the log files on Windows and UNIX servers is available. See About OpsCenter log files on Windows servers on page 260. See About OpsCenter log files on UNIX servers on page 263.

Configuring remote authentication service in OpsCenter

OpsCenter supports using Symantec Product Authentication Service (AT) remotely. When you are using the Symantec Product Authentication Service remotely, you install the authentication server component on a remote computer in the network. If you were using a remote AT configuration in NOM and upgrade to OpsCenter, you can configure the remote AT after upgrading to OpsCenter. Use the following procedure to configure remote AT with OpsCenter.

240

Administering Symantec OpsCenter Configuring remote authentication service in OpsCenter

To configure remote authentication service in OpsCenter

Enter the following command for Windows and UNIX platforms respectively:
Windows UNIX INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\changeVxATProperties.bat <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/changeVxATProperties.sh

The authentication server parameters appear one by one. The current values of the parameters are specified in brackets. The following authentication service parameters are displayed:
Authentication Service Host Name The fully qualified host name (FQHN) of the server on which the authentication service server component is running. The default value is localhost if the authentication service is installed on the OpsCenter server. Authentication Service Port Number The port number of the server on which the authentication service server component is running. The default value is 2821. Authentication Service Domain Name The domain name of the broker. The default value is broker. Authentication Service User Name The name of the broker that the user used for initial authentication. The default value is admin. Authentication Service Password The password of the broker that the user used for initial authentication. The default value is Vxadmin.

Administering Symantec OpsCenter About backup and restore of OpsCenter and OpsCenter Analytics

241

To use a remote AT configuration, enter the new values next to the respective parameter. If you do not enter a new value for a parameter, the value of the parameter does not change.
Authentication Service Host Name Enter the FQHN of the remote server on which the authentication service server component is running. Enter the port number of the remote server on which the authentication service server component is running. Enter the domain name of the broker. Enter the name of the broker that the user used for initial authentication. Enter the password of the broker that the user used for initial authentication.

Authentication Service Port Number

Authentication Service Domain Name Authentication Service User Name

Authentication Service Password

You must restart the OpsCenter services for these changes to be effective. Answer y to restart the OpsCenter services.

About backup and restore of OpsCenter and OpsCenter Analytics

The procedures in this section explain how you can back up and restore OpsCenter and OpsCenter Analytics in case of a disaster. See Backing up OpsCenter in case of a disaster on page 241. See Restoring OpsCenter on page 244.

Backing up OpsCenter in case of a disaster

The sequence of steps gives an overview about the steps that need to be followed to back up OpsCenter.

242

Administering Symantec OpsCenter About backup and restore of OpsCenter and OpsCenter Analytics

To back up OpsCenter in case of a disaster

Take a hot backup of the OpsCenter database (vxpmdb.db and symcOpscache.db) using the dbbackup script. This script can be run whenever you need to back up your OpsCenter database. See Backing up the OpsCenter database on page 242.

Along with the OpsCenter database, the user information that Symantec Product Authentication Service manages must be saved in a directory or by using a NetBackup backup policy. See Saving the OpsCenter user profiles managed by Symantec Product Authentication Service on page 243. Note: You can also create schedules for taking regular database and authentication profile backups. In this case, NetBackup policies can be created to back up the specified directories that contain OpsCenter database snapshots and the authentication service user configuration files. See the NetBackup Administrators Guide, Volume I for more information on how to configure a policy and schedule.

If you want to change the OpsCenter database password, you also need to back up the database password file.

Backing up the OpsCenter database

OpsCenter is shipped with a database backup script that performs backup of the database without interrupting its operations, which is referred to as hot backup. On UNIX as well as Windows platforms, the script overwrites existing database (db) files before backing up or restoring the database. The database files are as follows: vxpmdb.db, symcOpscache.db, and vxpmdb.log. The script backs up or restores the vxpmdb.db, symcOpscache.db, and vxpmdb.log file (if it exists). Note: Regular file system backups are not sufficient for backing up the OpsCenter database. You must schedule periodic hot backups for the OpsCenter database to avoid losing any important data.

Administering Symantec OpsCenter About backup and restore of OpsCenter and OpsCenter Analytics

243

To back up the OpsCenter database

Log on to the OpsCenter database server host in one of the following ways:
Windows UNIX As an administrator or user in the Administrator group root

2 3

Open the Windows command prompt or the UNIX console. Run the backup script that is appropriate for your platform. Specify one of the following backup directories depending on your platform:
Windows INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\dbbackup.bat C:\MyDbBackupFolder <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/dbbackup.sh /my_db_backup_dir

UNIX

The backup script creates vxpmdb.db, symcOpscache.db, and vxpmdb.log (if it exists) in the backup directory that you specified.

Saving the OpsCenter user profiles managed by Symantec Product Authentication Service
Use the following procedures to save the authentication service profiles on Windows and UNIX servers. To save authentication service profiles on Windows servers

Do one of the following to save the user profiles:

Copy the folder

INSTALL_PATH\VERITAS\Security\Authentication\systemprofile to

another folder.

Create a NetBackup job policy to back up the authentication service systemprofile folder.

To save authentication service profiles on UNIX servers

Do one of the following to save the user profiles:

Copy the folder /var/VRTSat to another folder. Create a NetBackup job policy to back up the authentication service profile folder.

244

Administering Symantec OpsCenter About backup and restore of OpsCenter and OpsCenter Analytics

Backing up the OpsCenter database password file

If you want to change the OpsCenter database password, you need to back up the following password file (along with the backup of the OpsCenter database files and authentication service profile folders). To back up the OpsCenter database password file on Windows

Back up the db.conf file that is located in

INSTALL_PATH/OpsCenter/server/config directory.

To back up the OpsCenter database password file on UNIX

Back up the db.conf file that is located in

<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/config directory.

Restoring OpsCenter
A restore of OpsCenter requires that the new OpsCenter server has the same host name and IP address of the old server that crashed. This limitation is due to a couple of reasons. Some of the reasons are the following:

The authentication service credentials (host name and IP address) are stored on the old OpsCenter server. To enable data collection, you must configure the master servers for data collection. This involves adding the OpsCenter hostname to the Server List of the NetBackup master servers. Atter this, you must add the master servers to the OpsCenter console. See Adding a master server or appliance in OpsCenter on page 346.

Note: The following procedures assume that you have OpsCenter database snapshots and the authentication service user profiles saved in folders. The sequence of steps gives an overview about the steps that need to be followed to restore OpsCenter. To restore OpsCenter in case of a disaster

1 2

Install OpsCenter on a server with the same name as the server where problems happened. Stop all OpsCenter server services.

Administering Symantec OpsCenter About backup and restore of OpsCenter and OpsCenter Analytics

245

Restore the OpsCenter database snapshot files and authentication service user profiles from the backup image. See Restoring the OpsCenter database on page 245. See Restoring the OpsCenter user profiles managed by Symantec Product Authentication Service on page 247.

If you saved a copy of the OpsCenter database password file, copy the file to the corresponding location on the newly installed OpsCenter server. Copy the db.conf file to INSTALL_PATH/OpsCenter/server/config directory on Windows or <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/config directory on UNIX. Restart all OpsCenter server services.

Restoring the OpsCenter database

After you back up the database, you can restore it. On Windows and UNIX hosts, the restore operation automatically stops the database, restores the backup database files, and restarts the database. The dbbackup script overwrites existing database (db) files before backing up or restoring the database. The database files are as follows: vxpmdb.db, symcOpscache.db, and vxpmdb.log. The script backs up or restores the vxpmdb.db, symcOpscache.db, and vxpmdb.log file (if it exists).

246

Administering Symantec OpsCenter About backup and restore of OpsCenter and OpsCenter Analytics

To restore a backed up OpsCenter database

On the OpsCenter server with backup data you want to restore, open a UNIX console or a Windows command prompt and log on as root (on UNIX) or as an administrator or user in the Administrators group (on Windows).
Windows Open a Windows command prompt and log on as an administrator or user in the Administrators group. Open a UNIX console and then log on as root.

UNIX

All the paths that are shown in the steps that follow are the default database install paths. These paths may different for your site if the database was installed anywhere other than the default location.

To restore the backed up database, do one of the following:

Windows Type the following command and press Enter. INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\dbbackup.bat <backupDir> -restore <restoreDir> UNIX Type the following command and press Enter. <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/dbbackup.sh <backupDir> -restore <restoreDir>

where backupDir is the directory where the backed up database resides, and <restoreDir> is the location of the current OpsCenter database. restoreDir is optional. If not used, the dbbackup script restores to the default database directory:
Windows UNIX INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\db\data <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/db/data

If you specified a non-default directory location, you must specify the restoreDir option. The script prompts you with a message similar to the following:
WARNING: this operation will overwrite the active OpsCenter data on this host. Do you wish to continue ? [y/n] (n)

Administering Symantec OpsCenter About communication and firewall considerations

247

To continue with the restore, press Enter on Windows hosts. To continue with the restore, type y on UNIX hosts. The dbbackup script automatically stops and restarts the database.

Restoring the OpsCenter user profiles managed by Symantec Product Authentication Service
Use the following procedures to save the authentication service profiles on Windows and UNIX servers. To restore the authentication user profiles on Windows

Stop all OpsCenter server services. Enter the following command:

INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsadmin.bat stop

2 3

Copy or overwrite the folder containing the authentication service user profiles to INSTALL_PATH\VERITAS\Security\Authentication\systemprofile. Start all OpsCenter server services. Enter the following command:
INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsadmin.bat start

To restore the authentication user profiles on UNIX

Stop all OpsCenter server processes. Enter the following command:

<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin.sh stop

2 3

Copy or overwrite the folder containing the authentication service user profiles to /var/VRTSat Start all OpsCenter server processes. Enter the following command:
<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin.sh start

About communication and firewall considerations

Figure 3-1 shows the key OpsCenter components and the communication ports that are used.

248

Administering Symantec OpsCenter About communication and firewall considerations

Figure 3-1

Key OpsCenter components and how they communicate

The following HTTP and HTTPS port combinations are checked for availability in the specified sequence and the first available port combination is used as the default HTTP and HTTPS port respectively - Port 80 and Port 443, Port 8181 and Port 8443, and, Port 8282 and Port 8553. View Builder Console

Web Browser

Possible Firewall

OpsCenter Web GUI

Default Port 13786 OpsCenter Database PBX default port 1556 Possible Firewall OpsCenter Server SMTP email SNMP traps Port 162

Possible Firewall NetBackup Master Server with NBAC Hosts where backup products like Backup Exec, PureDisk etc. are installed NetBackup Master Server without NBAC

Possible Firewall

Hosts where backup products like Backup Exec, PureDisk etc..are installed

OpsCenter Agent

See Communication ports used by key OpsCenter components on page 248.

Communication ports used by key OpsCenter components

The following table shows the default port settings for OpsCenter.

Administering Symantec OpsCenter About communication and firewall considerations

249

SMTP recipient ports can be configured from the OpsCenter console (using Settings > Configuration > SMTP Server). The SNMP trap recipient ports can also be configured from the OpsCenter console (using Settings > Recipients > SNMP). If these ports are changed then the appropriate hardware ports have to be opened. Table 3-8 lists the communication ports that are used by key OpsCenter components. Table 3-8 Source Host
OpsCenter Server OpsCenter Server OpsCenter Server

Communication ports used by key OpsCenter components Usage (Process Port Configuration Name)
SMTP Allow from source to destination.

Destination Port Number Host

Mail server 25

SNMP Server 162

SNMP trap recipient PBX (pbx_exchange)

Allow from source to destination.

NetBackup Master Server(s)

1556

Allow between source and destination (bi-directional). PBX port number configuration is not supported. See About OpsCenter Web GUI to OpsCenter server software communication on page 252.

OpsCenter Client

OpsCenter Server

1556

PBX (pbx_exchange)

Allow between source and destination. Some hardened servers and firewall configurations may block this port. PBX port number configuration is not supported. See About OpsCenter Web GUI to OpsCenter server software communication on page 252.

250

Administering Symantec OpsCenter About communication and firewall considerations

Table 3-8

Communication ports used by key OpsCenter components (continued) Usage (Process Port Configuration Name)
Allow from all hosts on network.

Source Host

Destination Port Number Host

Web browser OpsCenter Server

The following HTTP and HTTP and HTTPS HTTPS ports are checked for availability in the specified sequence and the first available port combination is used by default:

80 (HTTP) and 443 (HTTPS) 8181 (HTTP) and 8443 (HTTPS) 8282 (HTTP) and 8553 (HTTPS) Sybase database Allow between source and destination. (dbsrv11) Some hardened servers and firewall configurations may block this port. Symantec Allow between source and destination in case Product NBAC is enabled on NetBackup master server. Authentication Service (vxatd)

OpsCenter Server

OpsCenter Server

13786

OpsCenter Server

Host where 2821 Symantec Product Authentication Service (AT) Server is installed

Ports required to communicate with backup products

This section provides information about the ports that OpsCenter Agent uses to communicate with backup products like NetBackup, Backup Exec, PureDisk, TSM etc. Table 3-9 lists the ports that must be opened on OpsCenter Agent to collect data from various backup products.

Administering Symantec OpsCenter About communication and firewall considerations

251

Table 3-9 Backup product

NetBackup

Ports required to communicate with other backup product Communication

OpsCenter (NetBackup data collector) communicates with the NetBackup master server. 13782 port should be used to connect to the NetBackup master server and 13724 port should be used to respond to the Agent host. The response is sent on a port in the reserved port range 512-1023 if not configured to use vnetd The following processes are used for NetBackup data collection:

Port number
13782 & 13724

bperror.exe bpretlevel.exe bpimagelist.exe 6106

Backup Exec

OpsCenter (Backup Exec data collector) communicates with Backup Exec Server using Backup Exec API

PureDisk

OpsCenter (PureDisk data collector) 443 (HTTPS) communicates with PureDisk SPA 2821 (AT) using atssl OpsCenter (TSM data collector) communicates with TSM Server using TSM CLI dsmadmc OpsCenter (EMC data collector) communicates with EMC Server locally 1500

TSM

EMC NetWorker

A local host communication

Web browser to OpsCenter Web GUI connection

Web browsers use Insecure hypertext transfer protocol (HTTP) and Secure hypertext transfer protocol (HTTPS) to communicate with the OpsCenter Web GUI. These protocols use TCP/IP. For HTTP, specific ports are checked for availability in a particular sequence and the first available port is used by default.

252

Administering Symantec OpsCenter About communication and firewall considerations

Table 3-10 lists how the default HTTP and HTTPS ports are selected. Table 3-10 Sr. No.
1.

Default HTTP and HTTPS ports HTTPS port number

443

HTTP port number

80

Description
Port 80 and Port 443 are checked for availability. If port 80 and port 443 are available, port 80 is used as the default HTTP port and port 443 is used as the default HTTPS port. In case, some other application like a Web server uses one or both ports, then the next port combination is checked for availability.

2.

8181

8443

Port 8181 and Port 8443 are checked for availability. If port 8181and port 8443 are available, port 8181 is used as the default HTTP port and port 8443 is used as the default HTTPS port. In case another application like VRTSWeb installed with VCS or any other product uses one or both ports, then the next port combination is checked for availability.

3.

8282

8553

Port 8282 and Port 8553 are checked for availability.

These HTTP and HTTPS ports are opened only for input and are configurable using the command lines. See configurePorts on page 1039.

About OpsCenter Web GUI to OpsCenter server software communication

The OpsCenter Web GUI uses Symantec Private Branch Exchange (PBX) to communicate with the OpsCenter server software. The default port is 1556. The PBX port is opened for input and output traffic.

Administering Symantec OpsCenter About communication and firewall considerations

253

About OpsCenter server to NetBackup master server (NBSL) communication

OpsCenter requires the NetBackup Service Layer (NBSL) to be present on all managed master servers. The OpsCenter server software collects data from NBSL in the following ways:

Initial data load Listening for change notifications or events

Whenever OpsCenter server software starts, when data collection for a master server is enabled or when a master server is added to OpsCenter, the OpsCenter server starts collecting all the available data from NetBackup master server into the OpsCenter database using NBSL. The initial data load happens serially for each data type. As soon as the initial data load is complete, the OpsCenter server software listens to the notifications that are sent by NBSL for any change in NetBackup data. Then OpsCenter updates the OpsCenter database. Symantec Private Branch Exchange (PBX) is used for communication and requires a port opened on the OpsCenter server and the NetBackup master server for input and output. The default PBX port that is used is 1556. Configuring the PBX port is not supported in OpsCenter 7.5.

About SNMP traps

SNMP trap protocol is used for outbound UDP traffic and requires a port that opens for output. The port number is 162.

About OpsCenter Web GUI/OpsCenter server to Sybase database communication

The OpsCenter Web GUI communicates with the OpsCenter Sybase SQL Anywhere database server by using the default port 13786. The Sybase database server port is closed to all inbound connections. The database is available only to resident OpsCenter components on the OpsCenter server.

About OpsCenter Web GUI to OpsCenter server email communication

SMTP email server protocol is used for outgoing mail. The port number is defined when the user specifies the SMTP server port (see Settings > Configuration > SMTP Server in the OpsCenter console to specify this port). The port is opened for output only.

254

Administering Symantec OpsCenter Gathering troubleshooting data with the support script

Gathering troubleshooting data with the support script

If you are running OpsCenter on UNIX or Windows, you can use the support script to gather troubleshooting information for OpsCenter Server and OpsCenter Agent. The script collects Server and Agent logs, collects information about any data collection problems, captures the current Agent configuration, and compresses the results into a zip file. This file can serve as a first-level information for the Support team in case of an issue with OpsCenter. To gather troubleshooting data for OpsCenter Server on Windows

Run the following command to execute the support script for OpsCenter Server:
INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsCenterSupport.bat

Note: The following is the default directory location on Windows computers.

The script then prompts the following questions:

Do you want to collect configuration files? [y/n] y Do you want to collect application log files? [y/n] y Do you want to collect OpsCenter GUI <147> log files? [y/n] y Do you want to collect OpsCenter Server <148> log files? [y/n] y Do you want to collect db log files? [y/n] y Do you want to collect WebServer log files? [y/n] y Do you want to collect setEnv file? [y/n] y Do you want to collect database files? [y/n] y If this is an upgrade scenario, do you want to collect old database and log files? [y/n] y If this is an install scenario, do you want to collect installation lzgs? [y/n] y

Answer y or n based on your preferences.

Administering Symantec OpsCenter Gathering troubleshooting data with the support script

255

This script collects system information and OpsCenter configuration information based on your preferences. It then compresses all this information in a file that is called Support.zip. You can use OpsCenter and run the support script in the background. Note: Adding log files and OpsCenter database files can increase the file size of the resulting Support.zip file.

The Support.zip file is stored in the following directory:

INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\temp\support

To gather troubleshooting data for OpsCenter Agent on Windows

Run the following command to execute the support script for OpsCenter Agent:
INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\Agent\bin\opsCenterAgentSupport.bat

Note: This is the default directory location on Windows computers.

2 3

The script stops the OpsCenter Agent service and then collects the OpsCenter Agent logs. It then collates this information in a Support.zip file. This zip file is stored in the following directory:
INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\Agent\temp\support

After the Support.zip file is created, the script starts the OpsCenter Agent service.

256

Administering Symantec OpsCenter Gathering troubleshooting data with the support script

To gather troubleshooting data for the OpsCenter Server on UNIX

Run the following commands to execute the support scripts for OpsCenter Server:
<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsCenterSupport.sh

The script then prompts the following questions:

Do you want to collect configuration files? [y/n] y Do you want to collect application log files? [y/n] y Do you want to collect OpsCenter GUI <147> log files? [y/n] y Do you want to collect OpsCenter Server <148> log files? [y/n] y Do you want to collect db log files? [y/n] y Do you want to collect WebServer log files? [y/n] y Do you want to collect setEnv file? [y/n] y Do you want to collect database files? [y/n] y If this is an upgrade scenario, do you want to collect old database and log files? [y/n] y If this is an install scenario, do you want to collect installation logs? [y/n] y

Answer y or n based on your preferences.

This script collects system information and OpsCenter configuration information based on your preferences. It then collates all this information in a support.zip file. You can use OpsCenter and run the support script in the background. Note: Adding log files and OpsCenter database files can increase the file size of the resulting support.zip.

The support.zip file is stored in the following directory:

<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/temp/support

Administering Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter log files

257

To gather troubleshooting data for the OpsCenter Agent on UNIX

Run the following command to execute the support script for OpsCenter Agent:
<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterAgent/bin/opsCenterAgentSupport.sh

Note: The following are the default directory locations on UNIX machines.

2 3

The script stops the OpsCenter Agent process and then collects the OpsCenter Agent logs. It then collates this information in a support.zip file. The support.zip file is stored in the following directory:
<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterAgent/temp/support

After the zip file is created, the script automatically starts the OpsCenter Agent process.

About OpsCenter log files

OpsCenter creates log files that you can use to troubleshoot installation, performance, and other issues. OpsCenter writes log files using Veritas Unified Logging (VxUL), legacy, and other log file formats. See About OpsCenter log files on Windows servers on page 260. See About OpsCenter log files on UNIX servers on page 263.

VxUL log files

The VxUL log file creates log file names and messages in a format that is standardized across all Symantec components. These messages use VxUL IDs (a product ID and an originator ID) that identify the component that wrote the log message. OpsCenter components create most log messages in VxUL format. Table 3-11 shows the originator IDs used by OpsCenter and key shared components. Table 3-11 VxUL IDs used by OpsCenter components Originator name
Symantec Private Branch Exchange service (PBX) NetBackup Service Layer (NBSL)

VxUL originator ID
103 132

258

Administering Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter log files

Table 3-11

VxUL IDs used by OpsCenter components (continued) Originator name

Symantec OpsCenter Agent Symantec OpsCenter Web GUI Symantec OpsCenter Server Application log file

VxUL originator ID
146 147 148 423

In Windows, OpsCenter writes VxUL logs to the following directory:

INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\logs

In UNIX, OpsCenter writes VxUL logs to the following directory:

<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/logs

You can control how OpsCenter writes log files for OpsCenter Server, OpsCenter Agent, OpsCenter Web GUI, and also application log files. The following OID values must be used for OpsCenter Server, OpsCenter Agent, OpsCenter Web GUI, and application logging.
OpsCenter Server OpsCenter Agent OpsCenter Web GUI Application logging 148 146 147 423

Table 3-12 lists the commands by which you can control logging on Windows. Table 3-12 Control Logging Control logging on Windows Command

To change the log directory destination INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\vxlogcfg.exe (default value is -a -p 58330 -o <OID> -s LogDirectory="<New log directory location>" <INSTALL_PATH>\ Note: 58330 is the OpsCenter product ID. OpsCenter\server\logs) To configure the verbosity level (default INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\vxlogcfg.exe value is 1) -a -p 58330 -o <OID> -s DebugLevel=1

Administering Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter log files

259

Table 3-12 Control Logging

Control logging on Windows (continued) Command

INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\vxlogcfg.exe -a -p 58330 -o <OID> -s DiagnosticLevel=1 INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\vxlogcfg.exe -a -p 58330 -o <OID> -s NumberOfLogFiles=100

To configure the diagnostic level (default value is 1) To configure the number of log files that are created (default value is 100)

Table 3-13 lists the commands by which you can control logging on UNIX. Table 3-13 Control logging Control logging on UNIX Command

To change the log directory destination <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/vxlogcfg (default value is <INSTALL_PATH>/ -a -p 58330 -o <OID> -s LogDirectory="<New log SYMCOpsCenterServer/logs) directory location>"

Note: 58330 is the OpsCenter product ID.

To configure the debug level (default value is 1) <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/vxlogcfg -a -p 58330 -o <OID> -s DebugLevel=<New debug level> <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/vxlogcfg -a -p 58330 -o <OID> -s DiagnosticLevel=<New diagnostic level> <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/vxlogcfg -a -p 58330 -o <OID> -s NumberOfLogFiles=<New number>

To configure the diagnostic level (default value is 1)

To configure the number of log files that are created (default value is 100)

OpsCenter application log files

Table 3-14 shows details about the application log files.

260

Administering Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter log files

Table 3-14 Log file directory

INSTALL_PATH\ OpsCenter\server\logs

OpsCenter application log files Log file Troubleshooting purpose

58330-423-*.log This log file has minimal information that helps in understanding the flow of each use case. Unlike *148* logs, this log file does not have detailed log information. This log or file can be mainly used by Support to diagnose the problem <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/logs if a particular use case has failed. An example of a failed use case is when you run a report and any of the pre-defined steps like fetching report definition , building query, converting result etc. fail. Each failed use case will have error code and the message. Currently, data collection and reporting component has well defined error code and messages. This log file also has a detailed stack trace for failed use case. By default, the application logging is enabled. You can disable it by configuring the log.conf file. To disable application logging, set the debug level as 0 in log.conf file using the following command: Windows: <INSTALL_PATH>\OpsCenter\server\bin\vxlogcfg.exe -a -p 58330 -o <OID> -s DebugLevel=0 UNIX: /<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/vxlogcfg -a -p 58330 -o <OID> -s DebugLevel=0 To enable application logging later, you can give any value greater than 0. For example, DebugLevel=1 enables application logging. To disable application logging later, modify the value of DebugLevel to 0.

About OpsCenter log files on Windows servers

OpsCenter creates the following log files using VxUL and legacy formats.

OpsCenter 7.5 installation log files

Table 3-15 shows details about the installation log files for OpsCenter components. These log files can be used to troubleshoot installation issues of the respective OpsCenter component.

Administering Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter log files

261

Table 3-15 OpsCenter Log file component

OpsCenter 7.5 installation log files

OpsCenter %ALLUSERSPROFILE%\Symantec\OpsCenter\INSTALLLOGS\OpsCenterServerInstallLog.html Server OpsCenter %ALLUSERSPROFILE%\Symantec\OpsCenter\INSTALLLOGS\OpsCenterAgentInstallLog.html Agent OpsCenter %ALLUSERSPROFILE%\Symantec\OpsCenter\INSTALLLOGS\OpsCenterViewBuilderInstallLog.html View Builder

OpsCenter log files

Table 3-16 shows details about the OpsCenter log files. Table 3-16 Log file directory
INSTALL_PATH\ OpsCenter\server\ logs\

OpsCenter log files Log file Troubleshooting purpose

ServerService_timestamp.log These log files for system.err and system.out of OpsCenter server service.

Log files associated with Symantec Product Authentication Service

Table 3-17 lists the log files that are associated with Symantec Product Authentication Service. Table 3-17 Log file directory Log files for Symantec Product Authentication Service Log file Troubleshooting purpose
Authentication activity.

On 32-bit Windows vxatd.log platforms: %ProgramFiles% vssconfig.log \Veritas\Security \Authentication\bin On 64-bit Windows platforms: %ProgramFiles(x86)% \Veritas\Security \Authentication\bin

262

Administering Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter log files

OpsCenter database log files

Table 3-18 lists the log files that are associated with the OpsCenter database. Table 3-18 Log file directory
INSTALL_PATH\ OpsCenter\server\db\log\ INSTALL_PATH\ OpsCenter\server\db\data\

Log files associated with the OpsCenter database Log file

server.log

Troubleshooting purpose
OpsCenter Sybase database activity. OpsCenter Sybase database transaction files.

vxpmdb.log

Note: Do not change this log file.

OpsCenter Web server log files

The log files that are associated with the OpsCenter Web server are present in the INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\gui\webserver\logs directory.

VxUL log files for OpsCenter and the components that OpsCenter uses
Table 3-19 lists the log files that are associated with VxUL and other components that OpsCenter uses. Table 3-19 Log file directory Log files associated with VxUL and other components Log file Troubleshooting purpose
PBX activity. NBSL activity.

INSTALL_PATH\VERITAS\VxPBX\bin\ 50936-103-*.log INSTALL_PATH\VERITAS\NetBackup\ 51216-132-*.log logs\ INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\Agent\logs 51216-146-*.log INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\gui\logs\ 51216-147-*.log

Agent activity. OpsCenter Web GUI activity. OpsCenter server activity. OpsCenter application logging.

INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\logs 58330-148*.log

INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server

58330-423-*.log

Administering Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter log files

263

About OpsCenter log files on UNIX servers

OpsCenter creates the following log files by using VxUL and legacy formats.

Log files on UNIX servers associated with OpsCenter

Table 3-20 lists the log files for OpsCenter. Table 3-20 Log files for OpsCenter Troubleshooting purpose

OpsCenter log file

<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/logs/ stdout and stderr for the OpsCenterServer OpsCenterServer_out.log daemon. <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/logs/ Shows the details of purge operations. purge-status.log /var/VRTS/install/logs/ (directory) Provides a trace for any installation issues.

Log files on UNIX servers for Symantec Product Authentication Service

Table 3-21 lists the log files that are associated with Symantec Product Authentication Service. Table 3-21 Log file
/var/VRTSat/vxatd.log

Log files for Symantec Product Authentication Service Troubleshooting purpose

Authentication activity.

Log files on UNIX servers associated with OpsCenter database

Table 3-22 lists the log files that are associated with the OpsCenter database. Table 3-22 Log files associated with OpsCenter database Troubleshooting purpose
OpsCenter Sybase database activity.

OpsCenter log file

<INSTALL_PATH>/ SYMCOpsCenterServer/db/log/ dbserver.log

<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/ OpsCenter Sybase database transaction files. db/data/vxpmdb.log Note: Do not change this log file.

264

Administering Symantec OpsCenter About OpsCenter log files

Log files on UNIX servers associated with OpsCenter Web server

Table 3-23 lists the log files that are associated with the OpsCenter Web server. Table 3-23 OpsCenter log directory Log files associated with the OpsCenter Web server Troubleshooting purpose

<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterGUI/webserver/logs OpsCenter Web GUI application activity (stdout).

Log files on UNIX associated with VxUL and other components

Table 3-24 lists the log files that are associated with VxUL and other components. Table 3-24 OpsCenter log file
<INSTALL_PATH>/VRTSpbx/log/ 50936-103-*.log

Log files associated with VxUL and other components Troubleshooting purpose
PBX activity.

<INSTALL_PATH>/openv/logs/51216-132-*.log NBSL activity. <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterAgent/logs/ OpsCenter Agent activity. 51216-146-*.log <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterGUI/logs/ 51216-147-*.log OpsCenter Web GUI activity.

<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/logs/ OpsCenter server activity. 558330-148*.log <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/ 58330-423-*.log OpsCenter application logging.

Chapter

Understanding OpsCenter settings

This chapter includes the following topics:

OpsCenter settings Setting user preferences About managing licenses Configuring the data purge period on the OpsCenter Server Configuring SMTP server settings for OpsCenter Configuring Symantec ThreatCon feature in OpsCenter Adding host aliases in OpsCenter Merging objects (hosts) in OpsCenter Modifying tape library information in OpsCenter Copying a user profile in OpsCenter Setting report export location in OpsCenter About managing Object Types in OpsCenter About managing Symantec OpsCenter users About managing recipients in OpsCenter About managing cost analysis and chargeback for OpsCenter Analytics

266

Understanding OpsCenter settings OpsCenter settings

OpsCenter settings
This topic describes the various OpsCenter settings. An OpsCenter Admin can configure these settings using the OpsCenter console. The normal users can view or access the information that is relevant only to their profiles, which the OpsCenter Administrator has set. You can configure the following settings in OpsCenter. Table 4-1 Setting Settings in OpsCenter Lets you... Reference topic

User Preferences Add user-specific details and create user See Setting user profiles. preferences on page 268. NetBackup Add NetBackup master servers and their See About configuring data properties to collect data from it. collection for NetBackup on page 330. Create Agent and Data Collectors to collect data from non-NetBackup products. See About managing OpsCenter Agents on page 322.

Agent

License

Manage permanent or demo license keys. See Adding OpsCenter license keys on page 273. Specify when you want to purge the data See Configuring the data that is collected from various products. purge period on the OpsCenter Server on page 274. Configure the SMTP server details that See Configuring SMTP you need while sending reports or alerts server settings for through emails. OpsCenter on page 275. Configure Symantec ThreatCon feature in OpsCenter. The Symantec ThreatCon feature is used to show how secure or vulnerable your network is. See Configuring Symantec ThreatCon feature in OpsCenter on page 276.

Data Purge

SMTP Sever

ThreatCon

Host Alias

Add aliases for hosts.

See Adding host aliases in OpsCenter on page 278.

Object Merger

Configure OpsCenter to merge the objects See Merging objects (hosts) that represent the same backup client, in OpsCenter on page 279. but registered as separate objects

Understanding OpsCenter settings OpsCenter settings

267

Table 4-1 Setting

Tape Library

Settings in OpsCenter (continued) Lets you...

Modify tape library information

Reference topic
See Merging objects (hosts) in OpsCenter on page 279. See Copying a user profile in OpsCenter on page 281.

Copy User Profile Configure OpsCenter to copy a user's profile to another user. Report Export Location

Specify the location where the exported See Setting report export reports are stored. location in OpsCenter on page 282. Add new object types and attributes. See About managing Object Types in OpsCenter on page 283. See About managing OpsCenter views on page 387. See About managing Symantec OpsCenter users on page 286. See About managing recipients in OpsCenter on page 297.

Object Type

Views

Create and manage OpsCenter views.

Users

Manage users and user groups.

Recipients

Manage Email and SNMP recipients.

Currency Settings

Manage the currency settings that appear See Setting the default in cost reports. You can select a currency currency for OpsCenter cost from the global currency list and set it as reports on page 303. default. Create cost variables. See Settings > Chargeback > Cost Variable options on page 305. See Settings > Chargeback > Cost Formulae options on page 309. See Estimating chargeback costs using the OpsCenter Formula Modeling Tool on page 310.

Cost Variables

Cost Formulae

Create cost formulae.

Cost Estimation

Manage cost estimation.

268

Understanding OpsCenter settings Setting user preferences

Setting user preferences

In OpsCenter, you can set your preferences, such as default locale or time zone and personal details, such as email ID or name. You can also change your password using the User Preferences tab, if your user account belongs to the OpsCenterUsers domain. To set user preferences

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, click Settings > User Preferences. The user preferences options are organized in the General and My Profile tabs. Click the General tab to set Default Locale, Data Display Time Zone, Start 24 Hour Day at, Disable Auto Refresh, Auto Refresh Interval (Minutes), and Allow Multiple Selection in View Pane. Click Save. Click the My Profile tab to see or modify User Name, Password, User Role, Domain Name, and Email Address. In General details, you can type in name and contact information for this user.

3 4

Click Save.

Settings > User Preferences options

Use the General tab options as follows: Table 4-2 Option
Default Locale

General options Description

Select a locale of your choice from the drop-down list. For example, if you select English as a default locale, all OpsCenter GUI screens use English as a default language. Select a preferred time zone - either OpsCenter Server time zone or any other time zone from the Other drop-down list. OpsCenter displays time on the GUI screens according to the selected time zone. Enter the time that is used as the start time of a day in reports. Report data is grouped depending on this start time. Select this check box if you do not want to automatically refresh the OpsCenter GUI. By default, the auto-refresh option is enabled.

Data Display Time Zone

Start 24 Hour Day at

Disable Auto Refresh

Understanding OpsCenter settings Setting user preferences

269

Table 4-2 Option

General options (continued) Description

Enter auto-refresh interval in minutes. For example, if you want to refresh the OpsCenter GUI to show updated data after every 5 minutes, enter five in the Auto Refresh Interval text box.

Auto Refresh Interval (Minutes)

View Preferences Default View This drop-down list shows the views for which you have permission. Select one of these views as the default view for the Monitor and Manage tabs in the OpsCenter console. By default, data for the selected view is shown in the Monitor and Manage tabs of the OpsCenter console. Report Template Default View This drop-down list shows the views for which you have permission. Select one of these views as the default view for report templates. By default, data for the selected view is shown when you run a report based on any of the report templates.

270

Understanding OpsCenter settings Setting user preferences

Table 4-2 Option

General options (continued) Description

Allow Multiple Selection in Select this check box if you want to select multiple nodes View Pane or view objects in the View Pane. When you check this option, you can see a check box next to each master server or node in the View Pane. To view data for multiple master servers and nodes, you check the corresponding check boxes and then click Apply Selection. By default, the multiple-selection option is enabled. When you uncheck the multiple-selection option, you can only select a single node or view object from the View Pane at a given time. You can make selections in the View pane in a similar manner as NetBackup Operations Manager (NOM). Each node or a view object is a link. You can click a node or a view object to view data for the respective node or view object. For example, you can click a master server in the View Pane to view data for the specific master server. See About making multiple or single-click selections in the View pane on page 75. When you uncheck the multiple-selection option, a Group Component Summary table is displayed when you click Monitor > Jobs and select Summary View from the drop-down list. The Group Component Summary table was also displayed in NOM earlier. The Group Component Summary table at the bottom of the view displays job summary information. It shows the immediate NetBackup constituents of the selected view or node (group) in the View pane. For example if you select the ALL MASTER SERVERS view, the Group Component Summary table displays job summary for each master server. More details about the Group Component Summary table are available. See About the Group Component Summary table on page 422. Report Export Layouts

Understanding OpsCenter settings Setting user preferences

271

Table 4-2 Option

General options (continued) Description

PDF Tabular Report Export You can export a tabular report in various PDF formats. Layout These preferences apply to standard reports only. Select one of the following PDF formats in which you want to export the tabular reports: Portrait Displays a maximum of seven columns of data per page. Landscape Displays a maximum of ten columns of data per page. Portrait for less than eight headers Displays data in the Portrait format for data up to seven headers and Landscape format for more than seven headers. Expand to fit Displays the entire data across a single page.

Read and use the My Profile tab options as follows: Table 4-3 Option
User Name Password

My Profile options Description

Displays the user name. The OpsCenter security admin sets a default password for each user when it creates the profiles. The users that belong to the OpsCenterUsers domain can change their passwords after logging on . To change password, click the Change Password link. See Changing your OpsCenter password on page 272. The users from other domains cannot change their passwords using this option.

User Role Domain Name Email Address General Details

The role of this user. The name of the domain to which this user belongs. The email address of this user. Fill in the First Name, Last Name, Cost Center, Department, Work Number, Mobile Number, and Pager Number.

272

Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing licenses

Changing your OpsCenter password

Change the administrator-assigned password the first time you logon to Symantec OpsCenter console. Change the password at regular intervals thereafter. To change your OpsCenter password

1 2 3

In the OpsCenter console, click Settings > My Profile. In the My Profile dialog box, click Change Password. In the Change Password dialog box, do the following:

Type the existing password in the Old Password field. Type the new password in the New Password field. Passwords are case-sensitive and must contain at least five characters.

Type your new password again in the Confirm New Password text box.

Click Save.

About managing licenses

To use the advanced features that are not available in Symantec OpsCenter, you need to use a license key and enable Symantec OpsCenter Analytics. See About Symantec OpsCenter on page 23. See Adding OpsCenter license keys on page 273. See Viewing OpsCenter license keys on page 273. See Deleting OpsCenter license keys on page 273.

Settings > Configuration > License options

The License tab shows the current state of the following options: Table 4-4 Option
Key Type Expiry Date Licensed Features

License options Description

License keys associated with OpsCenter. Type of license key like PERMANENT, EVALUATION etc. Expiry date that is associated with the license key. Licensed features that are associated with the key.

Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing licenses

273

Table 4-4 Option

Enabled

License options (continued) Description

This column tells whether the licensed feature is enabled or not. Actual current usage of the licensed feature. Total licensed value that is associated for the specific licensed feature.

Current Usage License Limit

Adding OpsCenter license keys

An OpsCenter administrator can install OpsCenter license keys to activate additional product features or delete the license keys that are no longer needed. You can add one or more OpsCenter license keys. To add OpsCenter license keys

1 2 3 4 5

Log on to the OpsCenter console as admin. In the OpsCenter console, click Settings > Configuration. Click the License tab. Click Add. On the Add License Key pop-up screen, enter a license key and click OK.

Viewing OpsCenter license keys

You can view the license keys that are installed on the OpsCenterserver host. To view OpsCenter license keys

1 2 3

Log on to the OpsCenter console as admin. In the OpsCenter console, click Settings > Configuration. Click the License tab.

Deleting OpsCenter license keys

You can remove one or more Symantec OpsCenter Analytics license keys from the OpsCenter Server, on which you are connected as an administrator. To delete Symantec OpsCenter Analytics license keys

1 2

Log on to the OpsCenter console as admin. In the OpsCenter console, click Settings > Configuration.

274

Understanding OpsCenter settings Configuring the data purge period on the OpsCenter Server

3 4 5

Click the License tab. Select the check box in front of the license key that you want to delete. Click Delete.

Configuring the data purge period on the OpsCenter Server

You can configure the OpsCenter Server retention periods for the data types that are logged, such as Job, Policy, and Skipped Files. Note: The details of the purged data are stored in the purge-status.log file, which is located in the OpsCenter server logs directory. To configure the data purge period on the OpsCenter Server

1 2 3

Log on to the OpsCenter console as admin. In the OpsCenter click Settings > Configuration. Click the Data Purge tab. By default, data purge is enabled.

Edit the default data purge settings as necessary. See Settings > Configuration > Data Purge options on page 274.

5 6

In the Time of Purge text box, enter the time of day (in 24-hour clock format) when you want to purge the data. Click Save.

Settings > Configuration > Data Purge options

By default, data purge is enabled. Edit the default data purge options as follows: Table 4-5 Option
Enable Data Purge

Data Purge options Description

By default, data purge is enabled. Uncheck this option to disable data purge.

Understanding OpsCenter settings Configuring SMTP server settings for OpsCenter

275

Table 4-5 Option

Backup Job

Data Purge options (continued) Description

Set the number of days after which you want to purge the backup jobs (default is 420 days). The number of days set for backup logs should be less than or equal to the number of days set for backup jobs. In other words, logs can be purged earlier than their respective jobs, or they can be purged at the same time.

Backup Log

Set the number of days after which you want to purge the Backup logs (default is 3 days). Set the number of days to retain Tape Drive History logs (default is 31 days). Set the number of days to retain Media History logs (default is 31 days). Enter the number of days for which you want to retain the alert data (default is 31 days). Alert data older than this number is purged from the OpsCenter database. Number of days for which the SLP data should be retained (default is 90 days). Number of days for which you want to retain the audit trail records.

Tape Drive History

Media History

Alert

SLP Images

Audit Trail

Note: By default, data purge is set to 420 days.

Time of Purge Enter the time of day (in 24-hour clock format) when you want to purge the data.

Configuring SMTP server settings for OpsCenter

This section provides the procedure to configure the SMTP server that you can use for sending emails and alerts. To configure SMTP server settings for OpsCenter

1 2 3

Log on to the OpsCenter console as admin. In the OpsCenter console, click Settings > Configuration. Click SMTP Server. OpsCenter uses these global server settings to send email notifications using the SMTP server that you specify.

276

Understanding OpsCenter settings Configuring Symantec ThreatCon feature in OpsCenter

Enter the required information. See Settings > Configuration > SMTP server options on page 276.

Click Save.

Settings > Configuration > SMTP server options

A description of the Settings > Configuration > SMTP Server options follows in the table. Table 4-6 Option
SMTP Server Name

SMTP server options Description

Enter the SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) Server host name. Notifications of the alerts that are generated in OpsCenter are sent using this SMTP server.

SMTP Server port

Enter the SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) Server port number. Enter the name that is associated with the Email ID. For example, Backup Reporting Department. Specify the Email ID to receive any replies to the alerts or the reports that were sent by OpsCenter. Some SMTP servers may require user name and password credentials to send email. Enter the user name.

Sender Display Name

Sender Email Address

Server User Name

Server User Password

Some SMTP servers may require user name and password credentials to send email. Enter the password for this user account.

Configuring Symantec ThreatCon feature in OpsCenter

This section provides information on how to configure the Symantec ThreatCon feature in OpsCenter. The Symantec ThreatCon feature is used to show how secure or vulnerable your network is. See About the Symantec ThreatCon pane on page 78.

Understanding OpsCenter settings Configuring Symantec ThreatCon feature in OpsCenter

277

Use the following procedure to enable or disable the Symantec ThreatCon feature. The ThreatCon feature is enabled by default. To disable ThreatCon, uncheck the box next to Enable ThreatCon Collection. To configure Symantec ThreatCon feature in Windows for OpsCenter

1 2 3 4

Log on to the OpsCenter console with administrator privileges. In the OpsCenter, click Settings > Configuration. Click ThreatCon. Edit the default information. See Settings > Configuration > ThreatCon options on page 277.

Click Save.

Settings > Configuration > ThreatCon options

A description of the Settings > Configuration > ThreatCon options follows in the table. Table 4-7 Option ThreatCon options Description

EnableThreatConCollection Disable or enable the ThreatCon data collection using this check box. Polling Interval Server Name Set the minutes for Polling Interval.

Note: The proxy server configuration is not mandatory.

Enter the following proxy server details if you want to use it for accessing the latest ThreatCon ratings, if the default network is down. Enter the proxy server name.

Port User Name Password

Enter the port number to connect to the proxy server. Enter the user name of the proxy server. Set the password for the user account that you use to connect to the proxy server.

278

Understanding OpsCenter settings Adding host aliases in OpsCenter

See Configuring Symantec ThreatCon feature in OpsCenter on page 276.

Adding host aliases in OpsCenter

This section provides the procedures to add aliases for hosts. The hosts primary alias is displayed in all console functions and reports. Other host aliases are used when you are search in OpsCenter or gather and collate data. Warning: Your alias names must be compatible with your hosts DNS names or with the names by which they are known to applications such as NetBackup and Backup Exec. For example, if you use an alias that is unknown to OpsCenter, the explorer stops collecting information from the OpsCenter host. Instead the explorer attempts to collect data from a host with the alias name. To add a host alias

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, click Settings > Configuration > Host Alias. From the drop-down list select a host name or type a host name and click Show Alias. All the existing aliases are displayed.

3 4 5

Click Add Alias. Enter the alias name for the host that you have selected from the drop-down list. Click Save.

Settings > Configuration > Host Alias options

A description of the Settings > Configuration > Host Alias options follows in the table. Table 4-8 Option
Select Host

Host Alias options Description

From the drop-down list select a host name or type a host name. Click Show Alias to display the aliases associated with the selected host.

Show Alias

Understanding OpsCenter settings Merging objects (hosts) in OpsCenter

279

Table 4-8 Option

Alias 1, 2, 3, etc.

Host Alias options (continued) Description

A selected host can have one or more alias associated with it. You can clear and save the alias for removing the particular alias.

Add Alias

Click Add Alias to add aliases for the selected host.

Merging objects (hosts) in OpsCenter

OpsCenter provides a facility to merge objects (hosts) that represent the same media server, backup client, but registered as separate objects (hosts). Using the OpsCenter UI, you can merge only one object into other, at a time. In OpsCenter, you can merge objects (hosts) representing the same backup client. Caution: Object merging is not reversible. To merge two objects

1 2 3

Log on to the OpsCenter console with administrator privileges. In the OpsCenter console, click Settings > Configuration > Object merger. Select the Host Type: Master Server, Media Server, or Client. See Settings > Configuration > Object Merger options on page 280.

4 5 6 7

Select the Source Host from the drop-down list. An auto-suggest feature is available. Select the Target Host from the drop-down list. An auto-suggest feature is available. Click Validate Object Merging. You can view the snapshot of the selection that you have made earlier. To modify the Source Host or Target Host click Back. To begin the merge, click Start Merge. Repeat these steps if you want to merge more objects.

280

Understanding OpsCenter settings Modifying tape library information in OpsCenter

Settings > Configuration > Object Merger options

A description of the Settings > Configuration > Object Merger options follows in the table. Table 4-9 Option
Host Type

Object Merger options Description

Select the Master Server, Media Server, or Client radio button to indicate Host Type. Select a source host from the drop-down list. An auto-suggest feature is available. Source host is the host that you want to merge.

Source Host

Target Host

Select a target host from the drop-down list. An auto-suggest feature is available. Target host is the host to which you want to merge the source host. Target host is the resultant host after the object merger.

Validate Object Merging

Click Validate Object Merging to view a snapshot of the selection that you have made.

Modifying tape library information in OpsCenter

OpsCenter provides a facility to monitor all the tapes that the data collector uses. Using the OpsCenter UI, you can edit the serial number, manufacturer, alias, slot count of the tape drives the data collector uses. OpsCenter receives information from NBSL about specific SCSI robots. Symantec recommends that you do not edit Slot Count information for the following SCSI robots:

TLD TL4 TL8

To modify tape library information in OpsCenter

1 2 3

Log on to the OpsCenter console with administrator privileges. In the OpsCenter console, click Settings > Configuration. Click Tape Library.

Understanding OpsCenter settings Copying a user profile in OpsCenter

281

4 5

You can view the list of the tape libraries in OpsCenter. Select the check box next to tape library, for which you want to edit the information. Edit the information. See Settings > Configuration > Tape Libary options on page 281.

Click Save.

Settings > Configuration > Tape Libary options

The following table provides a description of the Settings > Configuration > Tape Libary options. Table 4-10 Option
ID

Tape Library options Description

Displays the unique ID that is associated with the tape library. Displays the media server to which the tape library is attached. Select the type of tape library from the drop-down list. Enter the serial number of the tape library. Enter the manufacturer of the tape library. Enter the alias for the tape library. Enter the slot count for the tape library.

Host Name

Type Serial Number Manufacturer Alias Slot Count

Copying a user profile in OpsCenter

Most user-definable content, such as reports, cost variables, and cost formulas, is accessible only by the user who has created it. Using the copy user profile functionality, you can copy information from one user account to another. To copy a user profile

1 2 3

Log on to the OpsCenter console with administrator privileges. In the OpsCenter console, click Settings > Configuration > Copy User Profile. Select the source user account from the From User drop-down list. See Settings > Configuration > Copy User Profile options on page 282.

Select the target user account from the To User drop-down list.

282

Understanding OpsCenter settings Setting report export location in OpsCenter

5 6 7

In the Copy Items options, select the items you want to copy, for example reports or cost rates and formulae. Click Next. Select reports or cost rates and formulae to be copied to this user profile. If you copy a cost formula, the associated cost variables are implicitly copied. If you copy a cost report, the associated cost formula and variables are implicitly copied.

Click Copy.

Settings > Configuration > Copy User Profile options

A description of the Settings > Configuration > Copy User Profile options follows in the table. Table 4-11 Option
From User

Copy User Profile options Description

Select the source user account from the From User drop-down list. Select the target user account from the To User drop-down list. Select the items you want to copy: Reports or Cost Rates and Formulae. Select reports to be copied to this user profile. Select cost rates and formulae to be copied to this user profile. Click Copy to copy the selected items to the selected user profile.

To User

Copy Items

Reports Cost Rates and Formaulae

Copy option

Setting report export location in OpsCenter

In OpsCenter you can configure exporting of reports to a predefined location. Data from exported reports is stored in a default directory, if you have not defined any location.

Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing Object Types in OpsCenter

283

To set report export location

1 2 3 4

Log on to the OpsCenter console with administrator privileges. In the OpsCenter console, click Settings > Configuration > Report Export Location. In the Report Export Location box type the directory where you want to save the reports. Click Save.

Settings > Configuration > Report Export Location options

A description of the Settings > Configuration > Report Export Location options follows in the table. Table 4-12 Option
Report Export Location

Report Export Location options Description

Type the directory path where you want to save the reports.

About managing Object Types in OpsCenter

See the following sections for the procedures related to managing object types and their attributes in OpsCenter. See Adding object types in OpsCenter on page 284. See Modifying object types in OpsCenter on page 285. See Deleting object types in OpsCenter on page 284. See Adding attributes to object types in OpsCenter on page 285. See Deleting attributes from object types in OpsCenter on page 285.

Settings > Configuration > Object Type options

A description of the Settings > Configuration > Object Type options follows in the table. Table 4-13 Option
Object Types

Object Type options Description

Click the list box to select an object type that you want to configure.

284

Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing Object Types in OpsCenter

Table 4-13 Option

Add/Edit/Delete

Object Type options (continued) Description

Located to the right of the Object Types drop-down list. Click to add, edit, or delete object types. Located above the Attributes check box. Click to add or delete attributes. Attributes associated with the selected object type.

Add/Delete

Attributes

Adding object types in OpsCenter

In OpsCenter you can add or edit attributes of predefined object types. You can also add new object types and attributes for those new object types. To add an object type

1 2 3 4 5

Log on to the OpsCenter console with administrator privileges. In the OpsCenter console, click Settings > Configuration > Object Types. Click Add. Enter the name in the Add Object Type dialog box.. Click OK.

Deleting object types in OpsCenter

You can only delete an object type that you have created. You cannot delete the predefined objects in the drop-down list. To delete object types

1 2 3 4

Log on to the OpsCenter console with administrator privileges. In the OpsCenter console, click Settings > Configuration > Object Types. Select the object type from the drop-down list. You can delete the object types that you have created. You cannot delete predefined object types. Click Delete.

See Adding object types in OpsCenter on page 284.

Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing Object Types in OpsCenter

285

Modifying object types in OpsCenter

You can only modify the name of an object type that you have created. You cannot modify the name of the predefined objects in the drop-down list. To modify an object type name

1 2 3

Log on to the OpsCenter console with administrator privileges. In the OpsCenter console, click Settings > Configuration > Object Type. Select the object type that you want to modify from the drop-down list. You can rename the object types that you have created. You cannot rename the predefined object types.

4 5

Click Add. In the Add Object type dialog, type a name for the object type and click OK.

Adding attributes to object types in OpsCenter

You can add attributes to all object types. To add attributes to an object type

1 2 3 4

Log on to the OpsCenter console with administrator privileges. In the OpsCenter console, click Settings > Configuration > Object Types. Select the object type from the drop-down list and in Attributes section, click Add. Enter the name of the attribute and click OK.

See Adding object types in OpsCenter on page 284.

Deleting attributes from object types in OpsCenter

You can delete the attributes that are added to an object type. To delete attributes from an object type

1 2 3 4

Log on to the OpsCenter console with administrator privileges. In the OpsCenter console, click Settings > Configuration > Object Types. Select the object type from the drop-down list. In the Attributes section, select the check box in front of the attribute you want to delete. Click Delete.

286

Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing Symantec OpsCenter users

About managing Symantec OpsCenter users

After you install Symantec OpsCenter, you need to create user accounts. The Symantec Product Authentication Service validates credentials of OpsCenter users based on Windows, NIS, or private domains. See User access rights and UI functions in OpsCenter on page 287. See Adding new users to OpsCenter on page 293. See Resetting an OpsCenter user password on page 294. See Adding OpsCenter user groups on page 296. See Viewing OpsCenter user account information on page 292. See Adding new users to OpsCenter on page 293. See Editing OpsCenter user information on page 293. See Resetting an OpsCenter user password on page 294. See Deleting OpsCenter users on page 294.

Settings > Users > Users options

A description of the Settings > Users > Users options follows in the table. Table 4-14 Option
Add/Edit/Delete options Name Email address User Role

Users options Description

Click Add/Edit/Delete to add, edit, or delete users. Login name of the user. Email address that you provided while adding the user. Role that is associated with the user. See User access rights and UI functions in OpsCenter on page 287.

Domain Type

Domain type (like vx) that the user is a member of and also specified while adding the user. Domain name (like OpsCenterUsers) that the user is a member of and also specified while adding the user .

Domain Name

The Security Administrator can view the list of views that each user can access under the Assigned Views tab at the bottom. The Assigned Views tab is only visible if you log on as a Security Administrator (like admin).

Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing Symantec OpsCenter users

287

The following columns are shown in the table:

Name Type This column lists the views to which a user is permitted. This column lists the type of the specific view like Client, Master Server, or Policy. The Security Administrator can assign a view directly to a user using the OpsCenter console. A Security Administrator or Administrator can also assign a view directly to a user-group using the Java View Builder. This column lists if the view was assigned directly to the selected user or via a user group. Created On Owner This column lists the date and time when the view was created. This column lists the name of the user who owns the specific view.

Permission Type

User access rights and UI functions in OpsCenter

The following tables provide information on OpsCenter users and the functions that they can perform in the OpsCenter GUI. Table 4-15 provides details of the OpsCenter UI functions that you can perform. Table 4-15 OpsCenter functions
User Management

OpsCenter UI functions Tasks

The User Management function includes the following tasks: Create, update, delete users. Create, update, delete user groups. Add, remove users from user groups. Assign, remove roles to users and user groups.

Go to this topic
See About managing Symantec OpsCenter users on page 286.

288

Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing Symantec OpsCenter users

Table 4-15 OpsCenter functions

OpsCenter Management

OpsCenter UI functions (continued) Tasks Go to this topic

The OpsCenter Management See Adding a master server or function includes the appliance in OpsCenter on page 346. following tasks: See Editing a master server or an Add, Update, Delete appliance master server in Master Server OpsCenter on page 356. Add, Update, Delete See Deleting a master server or an OpsCenter Agents appliance master server in Set default currency, OpsCenter on page 357. SNMP, SMTP server See About managing OpsCenter Agents on page 322. See About managing cost analysis and chargeback for OpsCenter Analytics on page 303. See About managing recipients in OpsCenter on page 297. See Configuring SMTP server settings for OpsCenter on page 275.

NetBackup Operations

The NetBackup Operations function includes the following tasks:

See Activating or deactivating a job policy on page 437.

See Controlling NetBackup jobs Change states of the on page 416. NetBackup entities as follows: See Controlling media on page 445. Policy See Controlling drives on page 455. (Activate/De-active) Job (Stop/Start/Suspend/Resume) Media (Assign, Freeze, unfreeze ) Drives (Up/Down)

Others

Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing Symantec OpsCenter users

289

Table 4-15 OpsCenter functions

OpsCenter UI functions (continued) Tasks Go to this topic

Backup and Recovery The Backup and the Recovery See Starting a manual backup function includes the on page 437. following tasks: See Performing a Guided Recovery Execute manual backups. cloning operation on page 563.

Search and restore files, folders, application (Oracle, SQL Server, and Exchange Server) See About managing OpsCenter views on page 387.

Views Management

The Views Management function includes the following tasks:

See User access rights and UI Create, update, or delete functions in OpsCenter on page 287. OpsCenter views and nodes. The ALL MASTER SERVERS view cannot be modified. Assign Read permission to users on OpsCenter views and nodes. All Views Read The All Views Read function See About managing OpsCenter includes the following tasks: views on page 387.

View OpsCenter views and nodes. See Creating an OpsCenter report using a Report Template on page 634. See Creating a custom report in OpsCenter on page 644. See About managing report schedules in OpsCenter on page 678. See About managing My Dashboard on page 671.

Report Execution

This function includes the following tasks: Execute report templates and public custom reports. Schedule canned and public custom reports.

Create, update Dashboard.

290

Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing Symantec OpsCenter users

Table 4-15 OpsCenter functions

Custom Reports

OpsCenter UI functions (continued) Tasks Go to this topic

See Creating a custom report in OpsCenter on page 644.

This function includes the Note: This feature is following tasks: available with the Create, update, delete licensed (Symantec custom reports. OpsCenter Analytics) Make custom reports version of the public, private, or both. product. Custom SQL Reports This function includes the Note: This feature is following tasks: available with the Create, update, delete licensed (Symantec custom SQL reports. OpsCenter Analytics version) of the product. Monitoring Monitoring includes the following tasks:

See Creating an OpsCenter report using SQL query on page 666.

View entities ( Dashboards, Summary, Details): Job, Policy, Media, Alerts, Drives, Others.

See chapter 7 - Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter

Alert Management

The Alert Management function includes the following tasks: .Create, update, delete alert policies. Assign, acknowledge, clear alerts.

See About creating (or changing) an alert policy on page 490. See Managing an alert policy on page 508.

OpsCenter users are categorized as follows:

Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing Symantec OpsCenter users

291

Table 4-16 User

User categories Description

A Security Administrator is a super admin user who can perform all OpsCenter functions including user management. The OpsCenter Security Administrator can create, edit, or delete users.

Security Administrator

Administrator

This user can perform all OpsCenter functions except for user management. The OpsCenter Administrator cannot create, edit, or delete users.

Operator

This user is not involved in the activities that are related to managing users, OpsCenter Server, and NetBackup configuration. The role of this user is to mainly perform restore operations. The Restore Operator can monitor, perform alert operations and run standard or custom reports. The role of this user is to mainly generate the operational and business-level reports for further analysis. A Reporter would be able to view only those schedules that they themselves create. The Security Administrator, Administrator, and Operator would however be able to access all the schedules.

Restore Operator

Reporter

Note: From OpsCenter 7.5, the role of Analyst has been removed. A new role called Restore Operator has been added. Table 4-17 lists the OpsCenter user roles and the OpsCenter UI functions that these users can perform. Table 4-17 OpsCenter function
User Management OpsCenter Management

User roles Administrator

N

Security Administrator
Y

Operator
N

Restore Operator Reporter

N N

292

Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing Symantec OpsCenter users

Table 4-17 OpsCenter function

NetBackup Operations

User roles (continued) Administrator

Y

Security Administrator
Y

Operator
Y

Restore Operator Reporter

Partial (Only perform operations on Restore Jobs) Y N

Backup and Recovery Views Management All Views Read Report Execution Custom Reports Custom SQL Reports Monitoring Alert Management

Y (except Hold reports) Y

Y (except Hold reports) Y

Y (except Hold reports) Y

Y (except Hold reports) Y

Y Y

Y Y

Y Y

Y Y

Y Y

Y represents Yes, which means that the users of this role can perform this particular OpsCenter function. N represents No, which means that the users of this role cannot perform this particular OpsCenter function. P respresents "Permission based" which means that users of this role need permission to perform the particular function. See About managing Symantec OpsCenter users on page 286.

Viewing OpsCenter user account information

You can view a list of OpsCenter users and their information such as, name, user name, access level, authentication domain, and so on. The user information is arranged in a tabular format. You can sort the table by user attributes.

Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing Symantec OpsCenter users

293

To view OpsCenter user account information

1 2 3

Log on to the OpsCenter console with administrator privileges. In the Symantec OpsCenter console, click Settings > Users. Click Users to view the list of users.

Adding new users to OpsCenter

You can either add the existing users that are discovered from various domains to OpsCenter or create users in the private OpsCenterUsers domain. Only a Security Administrator can add or modify user profiles by using the OpsCenter console. To add a new user to OpsCenter

1 2 3 4 5

Log on to the OpsCenter console as a Security Administrator. In the OpsCenter console, click Settings > Users. On the Users tab, click Add. Select the user creation type: New User or Existing Domain User. Enter the following general and demographic details of the user: User name, user role, domain name, email ID, first name, last name, department, cost center, work number, mobile number, and contact details. The following user information is mandatory: User Name, Password, Confirm Password, and User Role See User access rights and UI functions in OpsCenter on page 287. If you have selected Operator, Reporter, or Restore Operator as the User Role, you can see the Granted Views list box. Select one or more views from the Granted Views list box to grant access of the specific views to the specific user. If you have selected the Existing Domain User option, you do not have to enter Password and Confirm Password. If you have selected the New User option, specify the password, and enter it once again for confirmation.

Click Save.

Editing OpsCenter user information

Only a Security Administrator can edit the existing users.

294

Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing Symantec OpsCenter users

To edit an existing user in OpsCenter

1 2 3 4 5

Log on to the OpsCenter console as a Security Administrator. In the OpsCenter console, click Settings > Users. On the Users tab, click the check box in front of the user that you want to edit. Click Edit. Modify the user information. You cannot modify the domain of the user. You can also reset passwords of the OpsCenter users using this page. You can modify the views that you want a user to access. You can modify the views for user roles like Operator, Restore Operator, or Reporter. Select one or more views from the Granted Views list to grant access of the specific views to the user. See Resetting an OpsCenter user password on page 294.

Click Save.

Resetting an OpsCenter user password

This section describes how to reset a user password. The Reset Password functionality is applicable only for OpsCenter users. To reset a user password

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Log on to the OpsCenter console as a Security Administrator. In the OpsCenter console, click Settings > Users. On the Users tab, click the check box in front of the user for whom you want to reset the password. Click Edit. In the General Details pane, click Reset Password. On the Reset Password page, enter the new password and confirm password for the selected user. Click Save.

See About managing Symantec OpsCenter users on page 286.

Deleting OpsCenter users

You can delete the user accounts that do not need to be maintained.

Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing Symantec OpsCenter users

295

Note: The default OpsCenter user admin cannot be deleted.

Warning: Do not inadvertently delete all your administrator accounts. To delete a OpsCenter user

1 2 3 4 5

Log on to the OpsCenter console as a Security Administrator. In the OpsCenter console, click Settings > Users. Click Users. Check the box next to the user account you want to delete. Click Delete.

Viewing OpsCenter user groups

This section provides the procedure to view the existing user groups. To view a user group

1 2 3

Log on to the OpsCenter console as a Security Administrator. In the OpsCenter console, click Settings > Users. Click User Groups to view the list of user groups.

Settings > Users > User Groups options

A description of the Settings > Users > User Groups options follows in the table. Only a Security Administrator can access this view. Table 4-18 Option
Add/Edit/Delete options

User Groups options Description

Click Add to add user groups. Click Edit to add or delete users to the existing user group. Click Delete to delete the user groups. Enter a name for the user group that you add. Enter a description for the user group that you add.

Name Description

296

Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing Symantec OpsCenter users

Adding OpsCenter user groups

If you want to give the same privileges to multiple users, add them to a single user group. The same access rights on views are attributed to all users in the user group . To create an OpsCenter user group

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Log on to the OpsCenter console as a Security Administrator. In the OpsCenter console, click Settings > Users. Click User Groups. Click Add. On the User Groups tab, enter the name of the group and description. In the List of Users pane, click Add to open the Add Users pop-up screen. On the Add Users dialog box, select the users that you want to add to this user group. Click OK. On the User Group tab, click Save.

Editing OpsCenter user groups

You can modify an existing user group. To edit a Symantec OpsCenter user group

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Log on to the OpsCenter console as a Security Administrator. In the OpsCenter console, click Settings > Users. Click User Groups . Select the check box in front of the user group that you want to edit. Click Edit. Modify the user group name or description. Add or delete the users using the List of Users pane and Add Users pop-up screen. Click Save.

Deleting OpsCenter user groups

You can delete a user group that you no longer need.

Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing recipients in OpsCenter

297

To delete a Symantec OpsCenter user group

1 2 3 4 5

Log on to the OpsCenter console as a Security Administrator. In the OpsCenter console, click Settings > Users. Click User Groups. Select the check box next to the user groups that you want to delete. Click Delete.

About managing recipients in OpsCenter

You can specify the recipients to whom you want to send alert notifications or email reports. Note: Make sure that the mail server is configured to send emails. See Configuring SMTP server settings for OpsCenter on page 275. The following sections provide procedures for viewing, creating, modifying, and deleting email and SNMP trap recipient information. See Viewing email recipients in OpsCenter on page 297. See Viewing SNMP trap recipients in OpsCenter on page 298. See Creating OpsCenter email recipients on page 299. See Creating OpsCenter SNMP trap recipients on page 300. See Modifying OpsCenter Email or SNMP recipient information on page 302. See Deleting OpsCenter Email or SNMP trap recipient on page 302.

Viewing email recipients in OpsCenter

This section provides the procedure to view the available email recipients. To view the email recipients

1 2

Log on to the OpsCenter console. In the OpsCenter console, click Settings > Recipients. By default, the Email tab is selected. All email recipients are displayed on this tab.

Modify recipients and recipient details as needed.

See Settings > Recipients > Email options on page 298.

298

Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing recipients in OpsCenter

See About managing recipients in OpsCenter on page 297.

Settings > Recipients > Email options

A description of the Settings > Recipients > Email options follows in the table. Table 4-19 Option
Recipient Name Email Address Active

Email recipient options Description

Name of the email recipient Email ID of the recipient The status of the email recipient that states whether it is active or not If a recipient is not active, it is not available for selection on the Adding Email Recipients pop-up screen, when emails are sent.

Description

Description about the email recipient

Viewing SNMP trap recipients in OpsCenter

This section provides the procedure to view the available SNMP trap recipients. To view the SNMP trap recipients

1 2 3 4

Log on to the OpsCenter console. In the OpsCenter console, click Settings > Recipients. Click SNMP. Modify recipients and recipient details as needed.

Settings > Recipients > SNMP trap recipient options

A description of the Settings > Recipients > SNMP trap recipient options follows in the table. Table 4-20 Option
Recipient Name SNMP Host

SNMP trap recipient options Description

Name of the SNMP trap recipient. Name of the SNMP host.

Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing recipients in OpsCenter

299

Table 4-20 Option

Port

SNMP trap recipient options (continued) Description

Port number on the SNMP host where you want to send traps. The status of the trap recipient that states whether it is active or not. If a recipient is not active, it is not available for selection on the Adding Trap Recipients pop-up screen, when alert policies are configured.

Active

Description

Description about the trap recipient.

Creating OpsCenter email recipients

This section describes how to create email recipients. To create email recipients

1 2 3 4

Log on to the OpsCenter console with administrator privileges. In the OpsCenter console, click Settings > Recipients. In the Email tab, click Add to create new email recipients. Enter the required information. See Settings > Recipients > Email > Add Email Recipient options on page 299.

Click Save.

Settings > Recipients > Email > Add Email Recipient options
A description of the Settings > Recipients > Email > Add Email Recipient options follows in the table. Table 4-21 Option
Email Recipient Name

Add Email Recipient options Description

Enter the name of the official whom you want to notify about an alert or send reports. Enter the email ID of the official, to which alert notifications or reports are sent. Select this check box if you want the recipient to receive alert notifications and reports by emails.

Email Address

Active

300

Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing recipients in OpsCenter

Table 4-21 Option

Description

Add Email Recipient options (continued) Description

Enter a short description about the alert or report so that recipients can understand. Select this check box to activate the Alert Notification Delivery Limit settings. If you do not select this check box, Maximum Number of Messages, Delivery Time Span, and Reset Message Count After Time are not taken into account when notifications are sent. Enter the maximum number of notifications that you want to receive within the specified Delivery Time Span. Enter the time duration in hours, minutes, or seconds, during which notifications are sent. Once the message count reaches Maximum Number of Messages, the Notification Manager blocks the delivery of any new notifications to the associated recipient for the time period that is specified for Reset Message Count After Time.

Activate Delivery Limit

Maximum Number of Messages Delivery Time Span

Reset Message Count After Enter the time period in hours, minutes, or seconds, during Time which notifications are blocked if the message count has reached Maximum Number of Messages. Once this time period is over, Maximum Number of Messages is reset and the Notification Manager starts sending notifications for the specified Delivery Time Span.

Note: For example, assume Maximum Number of Messages

= 10, Delivery Time Span = 30 Minutes, and Reset Message Count After Time = 2 Hours. In this case, Alert Manager sends messages until message count reaches 10 in 30 Minutes. Once it has sent 10 messages, it blocks the delivery of new messages for next two Hours. After two hours, Alert Manager once again starts sending messages until message count reaches 10.

Creating OpsCenter SNMP trap recipients

Traps or interrupts are signals sent to inform the programs that an event has occurred. In OpsCenter, traps are the notifications that are sent to a specified SNMP host or group of hosts when a condition is met. A trap recipient is a host that receives notifications in the form of SNMP traps when an alert condition is met. For example, a trap is sent after an alert was

Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing recipients in OpsCenter

301

generated as a result of failure of communication between the OpsCenter Agent and Server. For more details, refer to the About using SNMP with OpsCenter section. To create SNMP recipients

1 2 3 4 5

Log on to the OpsCenter Server host with administrator privileges. In the OpsCenter console, click Settings > Recipients. Click SNMP. Click Add. In the SNMP Attributes page enter the required information. See Settings > Recipients > SNMP > Add SNMP trap recipient options on page 301.

Click Save.

Settings > Recipients > SNMP > Add SNMP trap recipient options
A description of the Settings > Recipients > SNMP > Add SNMP trap recipient options follows in the table. Table 4-22 Option
Recipient Name SNMP Host SNMP Port

Add SNMP trap recipient options Description

Enter the name of the SNMP trap recipient. Enter an SNMP host, to which you want to send traps. Enter the port number on the SNMP host where you want to send traps. Select this check box if you want the recipient to receive notifications by SNMP traps. Enter a short description about the traps. Select this check box to activate the Alert Notification Delivery Limit Settings. If you do not select this check box, Maximum Number of Messages, Delivery Time Span, and Reset Message Count After Time are not taken into account when notifications are sent. The notifications are sent as soon as alerts are generated. Enter a maximum number of notifications that can be sent within the specified Delivery Time Span.

Active

Description Activate Delivery Limit

Maximum Number of Messages

302

Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing recipients in OpsCenter

Table 4-22 Option

Add SNMP trap recipient options (continued) Description

Enter the time duration in hours, minutes, or seconds, during which notifications are sent. Once the message count reaches Maximum Number of Messages, Alert Manager blocks the delivery of any new notifications to the associated recipient for the time period that is specified for Reset Message Count After Time.

Delivery Time Span

Reset Message Count After Enter the time period in hours, minutes, or seconds, during Time which notifications are blocked if the message count has reached Maximum Number of Messages. Once this time period is over, Maximum Number of Messages is reset and Alert Manager starts sending notifications for the specified Delivery Time Span.

Modifying OpsCenter Email or SNMP recipient information

Only OpsCenter administrators can modify email or trap recipient information. See Creating OpsCenter email recipients on page 299. See Creating OpsCenter SNMP trap recipients on page 300. To modify email or SNMP trap recipient information

1 2 3 4 5

In the OpsCenter console, click Settings > Recipients. In the Email Recipients tab or SNMP Recipients tab, select the email or trap recipient that you want to edit. Click Edit. On the modify email or trap recipient page, change Email Recipient or SNMP Trap Recipient attributes and Alert Notification Delivery Limit Settings. Click Save.

Deleting OpsCenter Email or SNMP trap recipient

Only OpsCenter administrator can delete email or trap recipient. See Creating OpsCenter email recipients on page 299. To delete Email or SNMP trap recipient

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, click Settings > Recipients. In the Email Recipients tab or SNMP Recipients tab, select the email or trap recipient(s) from the table that you want to delete.

Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing cost analysis and chargeback for OpsCenter Analytics

303

3 4

Click Delete. Click Save.

About managing cost analysis and chargeback for OpsCenter Analytics

This feature is accessible only to Symantec OpsCenter Analytics users. In OpsCenter Analytics, you can choose the currency that you want to be displayed on cost reports. If you have OpsCenter administrator privilege, you can set multiple global currencies, one of which can be set as default currency. You can set the cost variable, cost formulae, and cost estimation that you want to run the cost reports. You cannot access the Settings > Chargeback feature if you do not have Symantec OpsCenter Analytics. This feature is disabled for unlicensed OpsCenter version. The following sections provide procedures for managing cost analysis and chargeback. See Setting the default currency for OpsCenter cost reports on page 303. See Editing the OpsCenter global currency list on page 304. See Settings > Chargeback > Cost Variable options on page 305. See Settings > Chargeback > Cost Formulae options on page 309.

Setting the default currency for OpsCenter cost reports

This section provides the procedure to set the default currency that you want to be displayed on OpsCenter cost reports. Note: Setting the default currency gives you the flexibility of displaying cost report values in the currency of your choice. However, OpsCenter does not support conversion of currencies. To set the default currency for cost reports

1 2

Log on to the OpsCenter console with administrator privileges. In the OpsCenter console, click Settings > Chargeback. You cannot access the Settings > Chargeback feature if you do not have Symantec OpsCenter Analytics. This feature is disabled for unlicensed OpsCenter version.

304

Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing cost analysis and chargeback for OpsCenter Analytics

On the Currency Settings tab, in the Default Currency drop-down list, all global currencies that are set by the administrator are available for selection. Select a currency from the drop-down list. See Editing the OpsCenter global currency list on page 304.

Select the Currency Display Mode: Currency Code or Currency Symbol. For example, for US dollar currency you can either select a currency code USD or symbol $, which appears on chargeback reports. Select the Display Currency Option in Cost Reports check box to show the default currency on the cost reports. Click Save.

5 6

Settings > Chargeback > Currency Settings options

A description of the Settings > Chargeback > Currency Settings options follows in the table. Table 4-23 Option
Default Currency

Currency Settings options Description

Select a currency from the drop-down list. All global currencies that are set by the administrator are available for selection. Click this option to change the list of currencies available for selection. Select the Currency Display Mode: Currency Code or Currency Symbol. For example, for US dollar currency you can either select a currency code USD or symbol $, which appears on chargeback reports.

Edit Currency List

Currency Display Mode

Display Currency Option in Select the Display Currency Option in Cost Reports check Cost Reports box to show the default currency on the cost reports.

Editing the OpsCenter global currency list

This section provides the procedure to edit the global currency list. This list is available when a default currency is selected to be displayed on OpsCenter cost reports.

Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing cost analysis and chargeback for OpsCenter Analytics

305

To edit the global currency list

1 2

Log on to the OpsCenter console with administrator privileges. In the OpsCenter console, click Settings > Chargeback. If you have not entered the Symantec OpsCenter Analytics license key, you cannot access the Settings > Chargeback feature. This feature is disabled for unlicensed OpsCenter version.

3 4

On the Currency Settings tab, click Edit Currency List. On the Edit Currency List pop-up screen, select currencies from the Global Currency list which you want to make available for selection in the Currency Settings > Default Currency drop-down list. See Setting the default currency for OpsCenter cost reports on page 303.

Click Add to add the selected currencies to the User Currency list. You can use Add, Remove, Add All, and Remove All options to alter the User Currency list.

Click OK.

Settings > Chargeback > Currency Settings > Edit Currency List options
A description of the Settings > Chargeback > Currency Settings > Edit Currency List options follows in the table. Table 4-24 Option
Global Currency User Currency

Edit Currency List options Description

Lists the available global currencies. It is the default currency list and lists the currencies that you select. You can use these options to alter the User Currency list.

Add/Remove/Add All/Remove All

Settings > Chargeback > Cost Variable options

You can create cost variables based on various parameters to determine cost of various services. A description of the Settings > Chargeback > Cost Variable options follows in the table.

306

Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing cost analysis and chargeback for OpsCenter Analytics

Table 4-25 Option

Name Metric

Cost Variable options Description

Displays the name of the cost variable that you add. Displays the metric that you select for the cost variable.

Total Date Ranges and Rates Displays the date ranges and rate in units for the date range that you select.

And if you click the Add option, a page with the following settings appears. Table 4-26 Option
Variable Name Variable Metric

Add Cost Variable options Description

Enter a name for the cost variable that you want to add. Select a variable metric from the drop-down list for the cost variable that you add. Measure costs for a specific type of job, for example Backup or Restore. The default option is All. Measure costs for the jobs that use a specific policy type. In NetBackup, the policy type determines the type of clients that can be part of the policy and, in some cases, the types of backups that can be performed on the clients. Examples include DB2, Sybase, and MS Exchange Server. The default policy type is All. Measure cost for a specific transport type for example, LAN (local area network) or SAN (storage area network ). The default option is All. Measure cost for a specific storage type for example, tape or disk. OpsCenter supports NetBackup's disk-based data protection feature, which enables you to select disk as a storage type, when a cost variable is created. The default option is All. Select to add a start date to the cost variable. Select to add a end date to the cost variable. You can also select Never as the end date. Add an associated rate to the cost variable. Select to add more date ranges.

Job Type

Job Policy Type

Job Transport Type

Job Storage Type

Date Range Starts Date Range Ends

Rate Add New Range

Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing cost analysis and chargeback for OpsCenter Analytics

307

Creating cost variables in OpsCenter

Cost reports in OpsCenter Analytics are based on the user-defined variables that define the cost of various services. Typically, each service is represented by one variable that reflects the cost of the service, for example $1.00 per backup job. However, you can account for rate changes in one of two ways: by creating two variables for the same service (which you can include in a single cost formula later) or by incorporating both rates into a single variable. For example, a single variable can incorporate the rate of $1.00 per backup job until 31 December 2004 and the rate of $1.25 per backup job starting on 1 January 2005. Note: To generate deduplication savings reports, you must create a cost variable with the Protected Job Size (GB) metric. To set up OpsCenter to run cost reports, you need to create the variables that define the cost of various services. To create a cost variable

1 2

Log on to the OpsCenter console with administrator privileges. In the OpsCenter console, click Settings > Chargeback. Click Cost Variable.

3 4 5

On the Cost Variable tab, click Add. Enter the variable name. Select any of the following variable metrics from the drop-down list:

Daily Occupancy Job Count Job Size Protected Job Size

If necessary, select additional parameters to refine the metric you selected. For Job Count, Job Size, and Protected Job Size select the Job Type, Job Policy Type, Job Transport Type, and Job Storage Type. Note: These fields are not applicable for the Daily Occupancy variable metric. See Settings > Chargeback > Cost Variable options on page 305.

308

Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing cost analysis and chargeback for OpsCenter Analytics

Add one or more date ranges using the drop-down lists for Month, Day, Year, and Time. Add an associated rate by typing a cost per service unit (such as backup jobs or backed-up GB) in the Rate field. Add at least one date range.

Optionally, to add more date ranges, click Add New Range. This can be useful for defining multiple date ranges to represent historical or future changes in service costs. You can also modify the variable later to add or delete date ranges as costs change.

Click OK . You can now use the variable you created to build the formulas that form the basis for cost reports. See Creating cost formulae in OpsCenter on page 309.

Modifying cost variables in OpsCenter

You can update cost variables and formulas without having to recreate the reports that rely on them. For example, you can modify the name, date ranges and rates of a variable to reflect changing conditions in your enterprise. To modify a cost variable

1 2

Log on to the OpsCenter console with administrator privileges. In the OpsCenter console, click Settings > Chargeback. Click Cost Variables.

3 4 5 6

Select the check box in front of the variable name that you want to modify. Click Edit. Modify the cost variable details. Click OK.

Deleting cost variables in OpsCenter

You can variables you no longer need. Deleting a cost variable removes it permanently from the database, and you must update any formulas that use the variable. To restore a deleted variable, you must recreate the variable manually. To delete a cost variable

1 2 3

Log on to the OpsCenter console with administrator privileges. In the OpsCenter console, click Settings > Chargeback. Click Cost Variables.

Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing cost analysis and chargeback for OpsCenter Analytics

309

4 5

Select the check box in front of the cost variable that you want to delete. Click Delete.

Settings > Chargeback > Cost Formulae options

Based on cost variables you can create the cost formulas that you can use to generate cost reports. A description of the Settings > Chargeback > Cost Formulae options follows in the table. Table 4-27 Option
Name Total Cost Variables

Cost Formulae options Description

Displays the name of the cost formulae added. Displays the number of cost variables added to the cost formulae.

Creating cost formulae in OpsCenter

After you create cost variables, create the formula that define the cost of various services to run cost reports. To create a cost formula

1 2

Log on to the OpsCenter console with administrator privileges. In the OpsCenter console, click Settings > Chargeback. Click Cost Formulae.

3 4 5

On the Cost Formulae tab, click Add. Enter the name of the formula. Select a cost variable from the drop-down list. You need to select at least one cost variable.

Optionally, to define formulae containing more than one variable, click Add new cost variable. Select a different variable from the drop-down list. You can also modify the formulae later to add or delete variables.

Click OK. You now can use the formula to create cost reports. These reports help you evaluate the cost of services and make decisions about what to charge for performing those services.

310

Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing cost analysis and chargeback for OpsCenter Analytics

Modifying cost formulae in OpsCenter

You can modify the name and variables of a cost formula that you have created. You can update chargeback formulas without having to recreate the reports that rely on them. For example, you might want to update a formula that is called RecoveryRate to reflect a change in the hourly rate that is charged for recovery operations. To modify a cost formulae

1 2

Log on to the OpsCenter console with administrator privileges. In the OpsCenter console, click Settings > Chargeback. Click Cost Formulae.

3 4 5 6

On the Cost Formulae tab, select the cost formulae that you want to modify. Click Edit. Modify the details of the cost formula. Click OK.

Deleting a cost formulae in OpsCenter

You can also delete formulae that you no longer need. Deleting a cost formula removes it permanently from the database. To delete cost formulae

1 2

Log on to the OpsCenter console with administrator privileges. In the OpsCenter console, click Settings > Chargeback. Click Cost Formulae.

3 4 5

On the Cost Formulae tab, select the cost formulae that you want to delete. Click Delete. On the confirmation dialog box, click OK.

Estimating chargeback costs using the OpsCenter Formula Modeling Tool

The Formula Modeling Tool offers an easy way to estimate baseline rates for the IT services you provide. Using historical data, it provides you with an estimate of how much it costs your organization to provide a specific kind of service. For example, suppose you anticipate spending $500,000 over the next year to provide backup services throughout your enterprise. By inserting the metric Daily

Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing cost analysis and chargeback for OpsCenter Analytics

311

Occupancy into the tool, along with the amount $500,000, you can obtain an estimate per kilobyte that is based on the backup activity you performed last year. See Creating cost variables in OpsCenter on page 307. See Creating cost formulae in OpsCenter on page 309. To estimate baseline (chargeback) costs using the Formula Modeling Tool

1 2

Log on to the OpsCenter console with administrator privileges. In the OpsCenter console, click Settings > Chargeback. Click Cost Estimation.

3 4

Select a Report Grouping parameter to define the models scope. Use the Metric Selection parameters to specify the metric whose rate you want to estimate: See Settings > Chargeback > Cost Estimation options on page 311.

5 6

Use the following Time Frame parameters to define the time intervals for which data is modeled. Click Run Model to input different values into the model, or to run a new model.

Settings > Chargeback > Cost Estimation options

A description of the Settings > Chargeback > Cost Estimation options follows in the table. Table 4-28 Option
Report Grouping

Cost Estimation options Description

Select a report grouping parameter to define the model's scope. Examples: All Master Servers or User

Metric

Select a metric or category of service. Example: Daily Occupancy

Amount

Specify the total amount of money, in dollars, you expect to charge for service within that category in a given time frame. Examples: $50000, $10000, or $10000.00

312

Understanding OpsCenter settings About managing cost analysis and chargeback for OpsCenter Analytics

Table 4-28 Option

Time Frame

Cost Estimation options (continued) Description

Defines the beginning and end of the time interval the estimate must cover. You can choose either absolute or relative dates. Choose absolute dates if you want the estimates contents to remain static whenever you display it. Choose relative dates if you want the estimate to reflect data that was collected over the most recent time interval. Select one of the following: Click Absolute to configure an absolute time frame. Select a start time (month, day, year, and time of day) using the From drop-down lists, and a stop time using the To drop-down lists. The estimate reflects data from the time period between the start and the end dates. Example: From MAR 1 2004 12:00 A.M. to APR 30 2004 12:00 A.M. Click Relative to configure a relative time frame. Then select a time interval using the Last drop-down lists. The estimate reflects the data that is collected within the specified time period, up to the current time.

Examples: Last 21 Days or Last two Quarters The Relative setting is especially useful for the estimates that you plan to generate on a regular basis. Such estimates always reflect the data that is collected over the most recent time interval.

Chapter

Understanding data collection

This chapter includes the following topics:

About data collection in OpsCenter About managing OpsCenter Agents About managing OpsCenter Data Collectors About configuring data collection for NetBackup Configuring Backup Exec data collector Collecting data from PureDisk About collecting data from Enterprise Vault IBM Tivoli Storage Manager data collector variables and details EMC NetWorker data collector variables

About data collection in OpsCenter

OpsCenter provides extensive reporting on the data that is collected from backup and archiving products. An OpsCenter Agent comprises the product-specific data collectors that collect data from point products and return it to the OpsCenter Server. Note: Only one OpsCenter Agent can be installed on a single host.

314

Understanding data collection About data collection in OpsCenter

An OpsCenter Agent consists of the data collectors that can collect data from the following backup and archiving products:

Symantec Backup Exec (Windows only) Note: To collect data from Backup Exec server host, you need to install the OpsCenter Agent on a Windows host. Symantec NetBackup PureDisk Symantec Enterprise Vault (Windows only) Note: To collect archive data from Enterprise Vault, you need to install the OpsCenter Agent on a Windows host. IBM Tivoli Storage Manager (TSM) EMC NetWorker

See About configuring data collection for NetBackup on page 330. See About OpsCenter Agents on page 314. See OpsCenter Data Collector types on page 315. See Backup and archiving products supported by Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 on page 319.

About OpsCenter Agents

The OpsCenter Agent collects data from various Symantec and third-party backup and archiving products. These products can reside on the OpsCenter Agent host or on remote hosts. For more details on OpsCenter Agent installation and deployment scenarios, refer to the Installing Symantec OpsCenter chapter. Note: When you install the OpsCenter Server, OpsCenter Integrated Agent is also installed and configured, which you can use to collect only PureDisk data. To collect PureDisk data, you do not need to manually install or configure OpsCenter Agent. You cannot delete the Integrated Agent. You can collect PureDisk data only through the OpsCenter Integrated Agent.

Understanding data collection About data collection in OpsCenter

315

About OpsCenter Agent logs

OpsCenter Agent logs are stored at the following location:
InstallPath\Symantec\OpsCenter\Agent\logs

Where InstallPath is the location where you have installed the OpsCenter Agent. By default the InstallPath is: C:\Program Files Naming convention for the OpsCenter Agent log file:
5*-146-*.log

An example of the OpsCenter Agent log file name:

58330-146-2567491850-091129-0000000000.log

OpsCenter Data Collector types

The OpsCenter data collectors, collect data from backup and archiving product hosts. Each data collector collects data from a single product host. You can configure multiple data collectors on a single OpsCenter Agent host. You can create data collectors to communicate with the various products, such as Backup Exec, Enterprise Vault, or EMC NetWorker. These data collectors collect the specified data type as specified in the configuration. You can specify to collect all or some of the data types for that product. For example, Backup Exec data collector can collect tape drive Usage, Media, Policy and Schedule, Job, or Image. Note: Error logs and skipped files are collected as part of job data. You can enable or disable a data collector. Table 5-1 lists the data collectors that you can configure in OpsCenter. Table 5-1 Data collector types Description

Data Collector type

Symantec Backup Exec Data Create this data collector to collect data from Backup Exec. Collector (Windows only) See Configuring Backup Exec data collector on page 358.

316

Understanding data collection About data collection in OpsCenter

Table 5-1

Data collector types (continued) Description

Create this data collector to collect data from NetBackup PureDisk. See Collecting data from PureDisk on page 359.

Data Collector type

NetBackup PureDisk Data Collector

Note: You can collect the PureDisk data only through the
OpsCenter Integrated Agent that is installed with the OpsCenter server. To collect PureDisk data, you need to create a data collector for the Integrated Agent. Symantec Enterprise Vault Data Collector (Windows only) Create this data collector to collect archive data from Symantec Enterprise Vault database See About collecting data from Enterprise Vault on page 362. Create this data collector to collect data from TSM. See IBM Tivoli Storage Manager data collector variables and details on page 375. EMC NetWorker Data Collector Create this data collector to collect data from EMC NetWorker. See EMC NetWorker data collector variables on page 376.

TSM Data Collector

Table 5-3 lists the data types that OpsCenter 7.5 collects from different NetBackup versions (including NetBackup Appliance). Table 5-2 Data Type 7.5 Data Types collected for different NetBackup versions 7.1.x 7.0.1 7.0 6.5.x 6.0 NetBackup Appliance
(Appliance 2.0, 2.0.1, or 2.0.2 master server or NetBackup 7.1.0.3 master server and later)

Understanding data collection About data collection in OpsCenter

317

Table 5-2 Data Type 7.5

Data Types collected for different NetBackup versions (continued) 7.1.x 7.0.1 7.0
N.A.

6.5.x
N.A.

6.0
N.A.

NetBackup Appliance
Y

Appliance Y Hardware

Collected N.A. only for 7.1.0.3 and later versions Y Y N.A. Y

Audit

N.A. Y

N.A. N.A.

N.A. N.A.

Y Y

BMR, Y Skipped Files and Job Throughput Catalog Client Disk Error Logs FT Hold N.A. Y Y Y

N.A. Y Y Y

N.A. Y Y Y

N.A. Y Y Y

Y Y Y Agent

Y N.A. N.A. Agent

N.A. Y Y Y

Y Y

Y N.A. Y

Y N.A. N.A.

Y N.A. N.A.

Y N.A. N.A.

N.A. N.A. N.A.

Y Y Y

Host Y Properties Images Index Job Media server Y Y Y Y

Y N.A. Y Y

Y N.A. Y Y

Y N.A. Y Y

Agent N.A. Y Y

Agent N.A. Y N.A.

Y Y Y Y

Policy Y and Schedule Retention Y Level

N.A.

N.A.

318

Understanding data collection About data collection in OpsCenter

Table 5-2 Data Type

Robot

Data Types collected for different NetBackup versions (continued) 7.5

Y

7.1.x
Y Y

7.0.1
Y Y

7.0
Y Y

6.5.x
Y Y

6.0
Y N.A.

NetBackup Appliance
Y Y

Scheduled Y jobs Service SLP Image Storage service Storage unit Storage unit Group SubJobs Y Y

Y Y

Y N.A.

Y N.A.

Y N.A.

Y N.A.

Y Y

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

Y Y

Agent Y

Agent Y

Agent Y

N.A. Y

Y Y

Tape Y drive Information Throughput N.A. Virtual Y machine V l m/ e i Y ou eMda Volume group Volume Pool Y

N.A. Y

N.A. Y

N.A. Y

Y Y

N.A. N.A.

N.A. Y

Y Y

Y Y

Y Y

Y Y

Y Y

Y Y

Table 5-3 lists the data types that OpsCenter 7.5 collects from various backup and archiving products (other than regular NetBackup).

Understanding data collection About data collection in OpsCenter

319

Table 5-3 Data Types

Data types collected from backup and archiving products Symantec IBM EMC NetBackup Tivoli NetWorker PureDisk Storage Manager
9.0 10.0 (6.2.x, 6.5.x, 6.6, 6.6.0.1, 6.6.0.2, 6.6.0.3, 6.6.1, 6.6.1.2) Y Y (5.3, 7.3 5.4, 5.5)

Backup Enterprise Vault Exec

(10.x, 11.x, 12.x, 2010, 2010 R2)

7.5

8.0

Job

N N

N N

N N

N N

Y Y

Y Y

Policy Y and Schedules Tape Y drive I f r ai n nom to Media Y

N Y

N Y

N Y

N Y

N N

Y N

Y N

Archive N Policy Archive N Vault Vault Store N N

Y Y Y

Y Y Y

Y Y Y

Y Y Y

N N N

N N N

N N N

Backup and archiving products supported by Symantec OpsCenter 7.5

This section lists the backup and archiving products that OpsCenter 7.5 supports. Note that with the licensed version of OpsCenter, you can perform advanced reporting from the data that is collected from all of these products. With the unlicensed version, you cannot collect data from third-party products like IBM Tivoli Storage Manager (TSM) and EMC NetWorker. Table 5-4 lists the backup and archiving products that OpsCenter supports.

320

Understanding data collection About data collection in OpsCenter

Table 5-4

Backup and archiving products supported by Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 Versions Support level

Backup or Archiving product

Symantec NetBackup

6.0 MP7 and higher All supported NetBackup platforms versions, 6.5.x and higher by remote agent versions, 7.0 and higher Native agent for Windows 2003 (SP2 versions, 7.5 & R2), Windows 2008 (SP2 & R2), and Solaris 9, 10, 11 Appliance 2.0 master servers Appliance 1.2 and 2.0 media servers that are attached to an appliance 2.0 master server or to a regular NetBackup 7.5 master server Data collection happens automatically by NBSL

Symantec NetBackup Appliance

Symantec NetBackup PureDisk

6.2, 6.2.2, 6.5, 6.5.1, 6.6, 6.6.0.1, 6.6.0.2, 6.6.0.3, 6.6.1, 6.6.1.2, 6.6.3a

PureDisk supported platform (PDOS) by the OpsCenter integrated Agent. You do not need a separate Agent to collect data from PureDisk. You can use the inbuilt Agent of the OpsCenter Server for data collection. To create or configure the data collector, select the Agent that is installed as Integrated Agent.

Symantec Backup Exec

11d, 12.0, 12.5, 2010, 2010 All supported Symantec Backup R2, 2010 R3 Exec platforms by remote agent.

Note: OpsCenter does not Native agent on backup servers on

support Symantec Backup Windows 2003 (SP2 & R2), 2008 Exec running on NetWare. (SP2 & R2) Symantec Enterprise Vault 7.5, 8.0, 9.0, 10.0 All supported Symantec Enterprise Vault platforms by remote agent Native agent on Microsoft SQL Server 2005 or 2008 (where Enterprise Vault database resides) on Windows 2003 (SP2 & R2), 2008 (SP2 & R2).

Understanding data collection About data collection in OpsCenter

321

Table 5-4

Backup and archiving products supported by Symantec OpsCenter 7.5 (continued) Versions
7.3

Backup or Archiving product

EMC NetWorker

Support level
Native agent on backup servers on Windows 2003 (SP2 & R2), 2008 (SP2 & R2) and Solaris 9/10 Data collection is possible only with a licensed version of OpsCenter.

IBM Tivoli Storage Manager (TSM)

5.3, 5.4, 5.5

All supported TSM platforms by remote agent Native agent for backup server on Windows 2003 (SP2 & R2), 2008 (SP2 & R2) and Solaris 9/10 Data collection is possible only with a licensed version of OpsCenter.

Note: Ensure that the time on the OpsCenter Server and the backup product host or archive product host is in sync based on the time zone they are deployed in. A backup product host or an archive product host means a supported product host that is connected to OpsCenter. Examples of a backup product or archive product host (product host) are PureDisk host, Backup Exec host, NetBackup master server, Enterprise Vault host etc. If the OpsCenter server and the product host are in the same time zone (like CST), both OpsCenter server and the product host must show the same time. For example, if the OpsCenter server and the product host are in CST time zone, but show different time like 8:00 P.M. and 10:00 P.M., then OpsCenter may not display accurate data in the reports and also Monitor and Manage tabs of the OpsCenter console. If the OpsCenter server and product host are in different time zones like CST and PST, then ensure that both the CST and the PST time convert to the same GMT time. For example if the OpsCenter server and the managed host show 8:00 P.M. CST and 9:00 P.M. PST respectively, then 8:00 P.M. (CST) and 9:00 P.M. (PST) must translate to the same GMT time.

322

Understanding data collection About managing OpsCenter Agents

About managing OpsCenter Agents

The following topics provide more information about viewing, modifying, creating, and deleting an OpsCenter Agent configuration. See About the OpsCenter Agent on page 46. See Viewing OpsCenter Agent status on page 323. See Configuring an OpsCenter Agent on page 323. See Modifying an OpsCenter Agent on page 325. See Deleting OpsCenter Agents on page 325.

Settings > Configuration > Agent options

A description of the Settings > Configuration > Agent options follows in the table. Table 5-5 Option
Create/Edit/Delete Agent

Settings > Configuration > Agent options Description

Select the Create Agent or Edit Agent option to create an agent or modify the details of an agent. Select Delete Agent to delete the selected agent. See Settings > Configuration > Agent > Create Agent or Edit Agent options on page 324.

Create/Edit/Delete Data Collector

Select the Create Data Collector or Edit Data Collector option to create an agent or modify the details of an agent using the Data Collector Wizard. Select Delete Data Collector to delete the selected agent. See Data Collector Wizard settings on page 327.

Name Product Host

Name of the Agent host. Host from where Agent collects the data like Backup Exec server , PureDisk server etc. Data collection status for policy and schedule on the product host. Data collection status for tapes on the product host.

Policy and Schedule

Tape Drive Information

Understanding data collection About managing OpsCenter Agents

323

Table 5-5 Option

Media

Settings > Configuration > Agent options (continued) Description

Data collection status for media on the product host. Data collection status for jobs on the product host. This field is specific to Enterprise Vault hosts. This field is specific to Enterprise Vault hosts. This field is specific to EMC NetWorker. This field is specific to Enterprise Vault hosts. This field is specific to Enterprise Vault hosts.

Job Archive Archive Policy Images Target Vault Store

Viewing OpsCenter Agent status

Use this section to view general details and status of an OpsCenter Agent that you have configured in OpsCenter. To view Agent status

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, click Settings > Configuration > Agent. On the Agent list, select an Agent to view its status at the bottom of the page. By default the General tab is selected. The tab displays the parameters which you have specified when you created this Agent. See Settings > Configuration > Agent options on page 322. See Configuring an OpsCenter Agent on page 323.

Click the Agent Summary by Data Collector Status, Agent Summary by Data Type Status, or Agent Summary by Data Collector Count tab to view the relevant details.

Configuring an OpsCenter Agent

This section provides the procedure to configure an OpsCenter Agent.

324

Understanding data collection About managing OpsCenter Agents

To configure an OpsCenter Agent

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, click Settings > Configuration > Agent. Click Create Agent and complete the fields. See Settings > Configuration > Agent > Create Agent or Edit Agent options on page 324.

Click Save.

Settings > Configuration > Agent > Create Agent or Edit Agent options
To create an Agent, the Create Agent pane options must be completed as follows: Table 5-6 Settings > Configuration > Agent > Create Agent or Edit Agent options Description
Enter the host name where you want to configure the OpsCenter Agent Select the operating system family of the host where you want to install Agent. For example: Solaris Family or Windows Family For Windows hosts, you can configure an Agent for all supported backup and archiving products. For Solaris hosts, you can only configure an Agent for IBM Tivoli Storage Manager and EMC NetWorker. OpsCenter Server Network Select the network address from the drop-down list, using Address which you want to connect to the OpsCenter Server Locate option Click Locate to check if OpsCenter can connect to the Agent host that you entered, validate the OS, and Network address. An error appears if OpsCenter cannot connect to the Agent.

Option
Agent Host

Agent Operating System Family

Note: Changing the port number that the OpsCenter Agent requires to connect to the PBX on the OpsCenter Server is not supported in OpsCenter 7.5. If you add or edit a new OpsCenter Agent, the PBX port value is taken as 1556 by default. If you had configured a PBX port other than 1556 and upgrade to OpsCenter 7.5, then when you edit and save the Agent in OpsCenter 7.5 the PBX port value is changed to 1556.

Understanding data collection About managing OpsCenter Data Collectors

325

Modifying an OpsCenter Agent

This section provides the procedure to modify an OpsCenter Agent information. To modify an OpsCenter Agent

1 2 3 4 5

In the OpsCenter console, click Settings > Configuration > Agent. From the list of agents, select the check box in front of the Agent that you want to modify. Click Edit Agent. On the Edit Agent page, modify OpsCenter Server Network Address. Click Save.

Deleting OpsCenter Agents

This section provides the procedure to delete an OpsCenter Agent. To delete an OpsCenter Agent

1 2 3

In the OpsCenter console, click Settings > Configuration > Agent. From the list of agents, select the check box in front of the Agent that you want to delete. Click Delete.

About managing OpsCenter Data Collectors

The following topics provide more information about viewing, configuring, modifying, or deleting a data collector. See Viewing OpsCenter Data Collector status on page 325. See Configuring an OpsCenter Data Collector on page 326. See Modifying an OpsCenter Data Collector configuration on page 329. See Deleting OpsCenter Data Collectors on page 329.

Viewing OpsCenter Data Collector status

Use this section to view general details and status of a Data Collector that you have configured for an Agent.

326

Understanding data collection About managing OpsCenter Data Collectors

To view data collector status

1 2 3

In the OpsCenter console, click Settings > Configuration > Agent. On the Agent list, expand an Agent to view the Data Collectors that are configured for this Agent. Select a Data Collector to view its details and status at the bottom of the page. By default the General tab is selected displaying the following Data Collector details, which you have specified when you created this Data Collector. See Configuring an OpsCenter Data Collector on page 326.
Product Displays the name of the product type, for which this Data Collector is configured. For example: Symantec Backup Exec Product Host Status Displays the name of the target host, which this Data Collector collects data from. Displays the status of the Data Collector as Enabled or Disabled that you have set. If the Data Collector status is disabled, the data is not collected from the target host.

Select the Data Collection Status tab. More information is available about the parameters that are displayed on this tab. See Data collection status of a master server on page 342.

Configuring an OpsCenter Data Collector

OpsCenter is designed to provide extensive reporting on the data that is received from backup and archiving products. OpsCenter consists of Server, Agent, Java View Builder, and a console. The OpsCenter Agent contains product-specific data collectors collecting data from the products and returning it to the OpsCenter Server. You can generate various business reports on this backup data or archiving data. After you install and configure an OpsCenter Agent, configure the data collectors. See Configuring an OpsCenter Agent on page 323.

Understanding data collection About managing OpsCenter Data Collectors

327

To configure a data collector

1 2 3 4 5

In the OpsCenter console, click Settings > Configuration > Agent. On the Agent list, select a check box in front of the Agent, for which you want to configure a Data Collector. Click Create Data Collector. Complete the fields on the Create Data Collector: Product Selection page. Click Next. On the Create Data Collector: Details page, the Target Details, Configuration Settings, and Data Collection details are displayed.

Verify or modify the default Target Details: See Data Collector Wizard settings on page 327.

Enter the data collector ConfigurationSettings. These settings vary depending on the data collector type you configure. For product-specific configuration settings, refer to the respective data collector settings. See Configuring Backup Exec data collector on page 358. See About collecting data from Enterprise Vault on page 362. See IBM Tivoli Storage Manager data collector variables and details on page 375. See EMC NetWorker data collector variables on page 376.

8 9

Enter the Data Collection Settings. Click Save.

Data Collector Wizard settings

Complete the Product Selection fields as follows: Table 5-7 Setting
Select Product

Product Selection settings Description

Select the name of the product from which you want to collect data. For example, Symantec Backup Exec. The options available in the Select Product drop-down list depends on the Agent operating system family that you have selected while creating the respective Agent.

328

Understanding data collection About managing OpsCenter Data Collectors

Table 5-7 Setting

Target host name

Product Selection settings (continued) Description

Enter the name of the product host from which you want to collect backup or archiving data.

Complete the Data Collector: Details fields as follows: Table 5-8 Setting
Product

Data Collector: Details settings Description

Displays the name of the product from which this data collector collects data. You need to specify the product name when you create the data collector. For example: Symantec Backup Exec. Displays the name of the product host from which this data collector collects data. You need to specify the product name when you create the data collector. By default, the data collector status is Enabled. You can disable the data collection by changing the status.

Target host name

Data Collector Status

Blackout Period Start Time Select the start time of a blackout period. The data is not collected during the time that is specified in Blackout Period Start Time and Blackout Period End Time. Blackout Period End Time Select the end time of a blackout period. The data is not collected during the time that is specified in Blackout Period Start Time and Blackout Period End Time. Select this check box to collect the associated data type. Lists the data types that can be collected from a product host. The data types vary depending on the product that you are collect data from. See OpsCenter Data Collector types on page 315. Collection Interval (sec) Enter the Collection Interval in minutes, hours, and days. Collection interval is the time interval that you want to set between the two consecutive data collections. For example: You have set the Collection Interval to 15 Minutes. The first data collection starts at say 9:00 A.M. till all archive records are collected and ends at 11:00 A.M. The next data collection starts at 11:15 A.M. after 15-minutes interval .

Configuration Status Collectible Data Type

Understanding data collection About managing OpsCenter Data Collectors

329

Table 5-8 Setting

Data Collector: Details settings (continued) Description

States whether last data load was successful or not. See Viewing OpsCenter Agent status on page 323.

Last Successful Data Load

Modifying an OpsCenter Data Collector configuration

This section provides procedure to modify configuration of a Data Collector. To modify a Data Collector configuration

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Log on to the OpsCenter console. In the OpsCenter console, click Settings > Configuration > Agent.. On the Agent list, expand an Agent to view Data Collectors that are configured for this Agent. Select a check box in front of the Data Collector that you want to modify. Click Edit Data Collector. On the Edit Data Collector: Details page, modify the Target Details. Modify data collection configuration settings. These settings vary depending on the product, which this data collector collects data from. Modify blackout period settings. Modify collection interval.

10 Click Save.

Deleting OpsCenter Data Collectors

This section provides procedure for deleting Data Collector configurations from an Agent. To delete a Data Collector configuration

1 2 3 4 5

Log on to the OpsCenter Server. In the OpsCenter console, click Settings > Configuration > Agent. On the Agent list, expand an Agent to view Data Collectors that are configured for this Agent. Select check boxes in front of the Data Collectors that you want to delete. Click Delete Data Collector.

330

Understanding data collection About configuring data collection for NetBackup

About configuring data collection for NetBackup

This section describes how OpsCenter collects data from NetBackup. It also describes how you can add, edit, delete, and control data collection for a master server. The following sections describe the NetBackup data collection in detail:

See NetBackup data collection view on page 332. See How OpsCenter collects data from NetBackup on page 332. See About the Breakup Jobs option on page 334. See Viewing master server details and data collection status on page 341. See Adding a master server or appliance in OpsCenter on page 346. See Editing a master server or an appliance master server in OpsCenter on page 356. See Deleting a master server or an appliance master server in OpsCenter on page 357. See Controlling data collection for a master server in OpsCenter on page 357.

Settings > Configuration > NetBackup options

A description of the Settings > Configuration > NetBackup options follows in the table.

Understanding data collection About configuring data collection for NetBackup

331

Table 5-9 Option

Add/Edit/Delete

NetBackup options Description

Select Add to add a NetBackup master server to the OpsCenter console. Note that you must first configure the master server to allow server access and data collection by OpsCenter. After configuring the master server, you must add this server to the OpsCenter console so that it can be monitored. See Adding a master server or appliance in OpsCenter on page 346. Select Edit to edit the properties of a master server. The master server name cannot be edited. Select Delete to delete one or more master servers from the OpsCenter console. Deleting a master server removes all the data that is associated with the master server from the OpsCenter database.

Disable/Enable Data Collection

Select Disable Data Collection or Enable Data Collection to disable or enable data collection from one or more NetBackup master servers. Name or IP address of the master server that is configured. The display name that you have chosen for the master server. Operating system of the master server. Backup product and version from where the data is collected. The master server can show any of the following states:

Master Server Name Display Name

Operating System Product State

Connected Partially Connected Not Connected Disabled

See Master server states in OpsCenter on page 345. Connected Since The last time that OpsCenter successfully connected to the particular master server. The Connected Since column does not necessarily represent the last time that OpsCenter collected information from the master server. Reason if any for the current state.

Reason

332

Understanding data collection About configuring data collection for NetBackup

NetBackup data collection view

This view is displayed when you select Settings > Configuration > NetBackup from the OpsCenter console. This view shows details of master servers. The table that appears in this view shows the following columns:
Master Server Name Display Name Operating System Product State Name or IP address of the master server that is configured. The display name that you have chosen for the master server. Operating system of the master server. Backup product and version from where the data is collected. The master server can show any of the following states:

Connected Partially Connected Not Connected Disabled

See Master server states in OpsCenter on page 345. Connected SInce The last time that OpsCenter successfully connected with the particular master server. The Connected SInce column does not necessarily represent the last time that OpsCenter collected information from the master server. Reason if any for the current state.

Reason

How OpsCenter collects data from NetBackup

OpsCenter is used to monitor, manage, and report on NetBackup master and media servers, clients, and policies. To perform the monitoring, management, and reporting functions, OpsCenter collects data from the NetBackup master servers. The NetBackup data collection and management logic that OpsCenter uses is built into NetBackup master servers. This logic is included in the NetBackup Service Layer (NBSL). Starting with the 6.0 release of NetBackup, NetBackup Service Layer (NBSL) components are included as a part of NetBackup on master and media servers. Note: OpsCenter only uses the NBSL on master servers for data collection. Though NBSL is also included on media servers, OpsCenter does not use it. You must add only master servers to the OpsCenter console. You must not add any media servers to the OpsCenter console.

Understanding data collection About configuring data collection for NetBackup

333

NBSL provides a single point of access to key NetBackup data, objects, and change events. The NetBackup UI also uses NBSL. NBSL runs as a service or daemon and has local configuration information, but no local database. OpsCenter uses NBSL for all NetBackup monitoring, managing, and control functions. If NBSL service stops running on a managed NetBackup server, OpsCenter gets affected. If NBSL stops, OpsCenter may not capture any changes that were made to the NetBackup configuration. When NBSL restarts, OpsCenter correctly recaptures the latest state. See Data collection status of a master server on page 342. Note: A NetBackup 7.5 or 7.1.x master server requires an OpsCenter Agent to collect capacity and traditional license data. For 7.0.x master servers, an Agent must be installed only if you want to collect breakup jobs, capacity, or traditional license data. For 6.5.x master servers, an Agent must be installed only if you want to collect specific data (image, error log, breakup jobs, capacity license, or traditional license data). For 6.0 MP7 master server, you cannot collect scheduled jobs and breakup jobs data. Hence for a 6.0 MP7 master server, an Agent must be installed only if you want to collect image, error logs, capacity, and traditional license data. The OpsCenter Server software collects data from NBSL in the following ways:

Initial data load Listening for change notifications

Whenever OpsCenter server software starts, when data collection for a master server is enabled or when a master server is added to OpsCenter, the OpsCenter server starts collecting all the available data from NetBackup master server into the OpsCenter database using NBSL. The initial data load happens serially for each data type. As soon as the initial data load is complete, OpsCenter server software listens to the notifications from NBSL for any change in NetBackup data, and updates the OpsCenter database. Note: Consider a scenario when you add a master server or when OpsCenter Server software starts after a long time, or when the data collection for a master server is enabled after a long time. In this case, it may take some time for the OpsCenter server to collect all data (such as media, jobs, images, drives etc.) from the NetBackup master server and insert it into the OpsCenter database.

334

Understanding data collection About configuring data collection for NetBackup

Consider a scenario where a master server is already added on the OpsCenter console, and you uninstall and then reinstall NetBackup on the master server. In this case, you should disable the data collection (Settings > Configuration > NetBackup) before you uninstall NetBackup. Once NetBackup installation completes, you must enable the master server. Enabling the master server marks the existing master server as retired and also create a new master server with the freshly installed NetBackup. See Adding a master server or an appliance master server in the OpsCenter console on page 355. Symantec Private Branch Exchange (PBX) is used for communication and requires a port to be opened on the OpsCenter server and the NetBackup master server for input and output. The default PBX port that is used is 1556. You cannot configure the PBX port in OpsCenter 7.5.

About the Breakup Jobs option

This section describes the NetBackup-specific Breakup Jobs option that you can set in Symantec OpsCenter Analytics while adding a master server. The Breakup Jobs functionality was earlier available in Veritas Backup Reporter (VBR). With the Breakup Jobs option, detailed file-level information like size and backup file count for each backup selection (associated with a NetBackup job) is collected and displayed as a part of custom reports in Symantec OpsCenter Analytics. The Breakup Jobs functionality is most effective if you have multiple backup selection lists in the NetBackup policy. You can either enable or disable the breakup job option for master servers. When the Breakup Jobs option is enabled, OpsCenter collects a greater level of job detail at a file-system level. In addition to other job attributes, OpsCenter collects job attributes like size, file count, and directory name from the master server. For example, when the Breakup Jobs option is enabled, you can see how much data was backed up per file system. You can enable or disable the Breakup Jobs functionality for master server versions earlier than 7.1. The Breakup Jobs option can be enabled or disabled when you add a master server from Settings > Configuration > NetBackup. To enable the Breakup Jobs functionality for master server versions earlier than 7.1, select the Enable Breakup Job data collection option from the Advanced Data Collection Properties section. More information on how to enable or disable the Breakup Jobs functionality for master server versions earlier than 7.1 is available. See Settings > Configuration > NetBackup > Add Master Server options on page 351.

Understanding data collection About configuring data collection for NetBackup

335

The Breakup Jobs functionality is disabled by default for 7.1 and later master servers. To enable the Breakup Jobs functionality for 7.1 or later master servers, you must configure the scl.conf file. More information on how you can enable the Breakup Jobs functionality for 7.1 master servers is available. See Configuring the Breakup Jobs option for master servers on page 336. Note: Enabling the Breakup Jobs option increases the load on the master server, the load on the Agent (applicable for master servers earlier than 7.1), and the time it takes to gather and load data in OpsCenter. You can also configure the jobs for which you want to collect breakup job information. The job selection is based on the maximum number of files that a job backs up. By default, breakup job information is not collected for the jobs whose file count is greater than 1000000. This applies to all master server versions. See Configuring the Breakup Jobs option for master servers on page 336. Review the following considerations with respect to the Breakup Jobs functionality:

The Breakup Jobs functionality is specific to NetBackup and does not apply to any other product. The Breakup Jobs functionality supports the NetBackup master server versions starting from 6.5. This includes NetBackup 6.5, 6.5.*, 7.0, 7.0.1, 7.1, and 7.5 master servers. Note that the Breakup Jobs functionality is not supported for NetBackup 6.0 MPx master servers (like 6.0 MP7, 6.0 MP5 etc.). The Breakup Jobs data collection only happens for the jobs that are collected after you upgrade to Symantec OpsCenter Analytics 7.1. The breakup jobs data is not collected for the jobs that already exist in the OpsCenter database. The Breakup Jobs data collection happens through image ID's. Symantec recommends that you enable image data collection for the master server if you want to collect the breakup jobs data. For 7.1 or later master servers, the image data collection happens automatically by NBSL. For NetBackup master servers before 7.1, you can enable image data collection while adding a master server. See Adding a master server or an appliance master server in the OpsCenter console on page 355. The Breakup Jobs option is only valid for the backup jobs and Archive jobs whose Job State is Done.

336

Understanding data collection About configuring data collection for NetBackup

For NetBackup 7.1 and later master servers, the breakup jobs data is collected directly from the master server by NBSL. For NetBackup master servers earlier than 7.1, the OpsCenter Agent collects the breakup jobs data from the NetBackup master server. Hence if you have a master server version earlier than 7.1 (like 7.0, 7.0.1 etc.) and want to collect breakup jobs data for the master server, you must install the OpsCenter Agent. The OpsCenter Agent uses the bplist command to collect data from the NetBackup master server. More information about deploying the OpsCenter Agent is available. See About planning an OpsCenter Agent deployment on page 111. Data for the breakup jobs is collected from NetBackup after every 15 minutes. The Breakup Jobs functionality applies to Symantec OpsCenter Analytics only. The Breakup Jobs functionality cannot be used with Symantec OpsCenter (free version). If you were using OpsCenter and applied the appropriate license keys for the licensed version (OpsCenter Analytics), breakup jobs may still not be displayed. To display breakup jobs, you must disable and then enable data collection for the master server from Settings > Configuration. See Controlling data collection for a master server in OpsCenter on page 357. If you upgrade from VBR to Symantec OpsCenter Analytics 7.1, the breakup job information from VBR is migrated to the OpsCenter database.

Configuring the Breakup Jobs option for master servers

You can configure the Breakup Jobs option for master servers from the scl.conf file. You can configure the scl.conf file to enable the Breakup Jobs option for 7.1 or later master servers (disabled by default). Note that enabling or disabling the Breakup Jobs option using scl.conf applies to 7.1 or later master servers only. Note: Enabling the Breakup Jobs option increases the load on the master server and the time it takes to gather and load data in OpsCenter. You can also configure the jobs for which you want to collect breakup job information. The job selection is based on the maximum number of files that a job backs up. By default, breakup job information is not collected for the jobs whose file count is greater than 1000000. This applies to all master server versions.

Understanding data collection About configuring data collection for NetBackup

337

To enable the Breakup Jobs option for 7.1 or later master servers

Log on to the OpsCenter Server host. Stop all OpsCenter Server services on Windows and UNIX:
Windows INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsadmin.bat stop UNIX <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin.sh stop

Open scl.conf file from the following directory on Windows and UNIX:
Windows INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\Server\config\scl.conf UNIX <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/config

The Breakup Jobs option is disabled by default. To enable the Breakup Jobs option for 7.1 or later master servers, add the following text to scl.conf file:
nbu.scl.collector.enableBreakupJobDataCollection=true

Note: To disable the Breakup Jobs option for 7.1 or later master servers, add the following text to scl.conf file:
nbu.scl.collector.enableBreakupJobDataCollection=false

4 5

Save scl.conf file. Restart all OpsCenter Server services on Windows and UNIX:
Windows INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsadmin.bat start UNIX <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin.sh start

338

Understanding data collection About configuring data collection for NetBackup

To specify the maximum file size of jobs for Breakup Job data collection

Go to theOpsCenter Server host. Stop all OpsCenter Server services on Windows and UNIX:
Windows INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsadmin.bat stop UNIX <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin.sh stop

Open scl.conf file from the following directory on Windows and UNIX:
Windows INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\Server\config\scl.conf UNIX <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/config

By default, breakup job information is not collected for the jobs that back up more than 1000000 files. However, you can configure the jobs for which you want to collect breakup job information based on the maximum number of files that a job backs up. This applies to all master server versions. For example, if you do not want to collect breakup job information for the jobs that back up more than 20,000 files, add the following text to the scl.conf file: nbu.scl.collector.breakupJobMaxFileCountPerJob=20000 Once you complete this procedure, breakup job information is not collected for the jobs whose file count is greater than 20000. This applies to all master servers.

4 5

Save scl.conf file. Restart all OpsCenter Server services on Windows and UNIX:
Windows INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsadmin.bat start UNIX <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin.sh start

Viewing the data collection status for breakup jobs

You can also view the data collection status for breakup jobs data for a specific master server.

Understanding data collection About configuring data collection for NetBackup

339

To view the breakup job data collection status for a master server

1 2 3

Go to the Settings > Configuration > NetBackup view in the OpsCenter console. Click the master server from the Master Server Name column and then click the Data Collection Status tab. To view the breakup jobs data collection status, check the status for the SubJobs data type.

About viewing breakup jobs data in custom reports

The Breakup Jobs option provides more granular-level reporting on the files that are backed up by NetBackup. You can see the breakup jobs data by creating custom reports in Symantec OpsCenter Analytics. To view breakup jobs data in Symantec OpsCenter Analytics, ensure that the Breakup Jobs option is enabled in OpsCenter and then create a custom report of category Backup/Recovery and subcategory BackupJob/Image/Media in a tabular format. The custom report shows the following additional columns:

Backup Sub Job File Count Backup Sub Job Size

Figure 5-1 is a sample custom report that shows the breakup jobs data for each job directory. This report helps you to know how much data was backed up per job directory. Figure 5-1 Sample custom report that shows breakup jobs data

In this example, you may notice some job directories named Other in addition to the actual job directories from NetBackup. The Other job directory exists in cases when the total backup size that we get from the primary job is different from the

340

Understanding data collection About configuring data collection for NetBackup

summation of the sizes of the individual files in the file list. To keep the total backup size consistent, a new job directory named Other is shown to make up the difference. Hence you see some additional file system objects named Other in OpsCenter other than the actual list that comes from NetBackup.

About breakup jobs considerations

Review the following considerations with respect to the Breakup Jobs functionality:

Unlike VBR, OpsCenter does not provide the option to purge breakup jobs. In OpsCenter, the breakup jobs are tightly coupled with jobs and are purged along with the jobs. For a specific job ID in an OpsCenter custom report, breakup job data (like Backup Sub Job File Count, Backup Sub Job Size) is available only for 50 job directories. When a NetBackup policy or job has more than 50 backup selections, breakup jobs data for only 50 backup selections is available with NetBackup. The NetBackup GUI truncates data for the subsequent backup selections (greater than 50). With VBR you can view breakup job information for all job directories for a job or policy. This information is displayed as data is collected by using CLI's and not NBSL. OpsCenter Analytics does not show deduplication or snap duplication data for a specific job directory in the custom reports. OpsCenter Analytics does not show deduplication or snap duplication data because deduplication or snap duplication data for a backup selection is not available with NetBackup.

About NetBackup versions that OpsCenter 7.5 can monitor and manage
OpsCenter 7.5 can monitor and manage all NetBackup versions between 6.5.x and 7.5. The OpsCenter Server must be at an equal or higher version than the NetBackup master server version that it monitors. OpsCenter 7.5 can also monitor NetBackup appliance 2.0 master servers. In addition, OpsCenter 7.5 can monitor appliance 1.2 and 2.0 media servers that are attached to an appliance 2.0 master server or to a regular NetBackup 7.5 master server. The following table provides details on how an appliance version maps to a NetBackup version: NetBackup Appliance Hardware NetBackup version Appliance Version version
2.0 5200 or 5220 7.1.0.5

Base NetBackup version

7.1.0.1

Master or Media Appliance

Master and Media

Understanding data collection About configuring data collection for NetBackup

341

NetBackup Appliance Hardware NetBackup version Appliance Version version

1.2 5200 7.0.1.8

Base NetBackup version

7.0.1

Master or Media Appliance

Media only

Note: The NetBackup versions that are listed in the table are available for Appliance only. The version 7.1.0.5 is based on NetBackup 7.1.0.1 and 7.0.1.8 is based on 7.0.1. The NetBackup master servers that OpsCenter manages are referred to as managed NetBackup servers. Each managed NetBackup master server that OpsCenter manages must have NBSL present and in operation. Starting with the 6.0 release of NetBackup, NetBackup Service Layer (NBSL) components are included as a part of NetBackup on master servers. These managed NetBackup servers harvest pertinent NetBackup data and store it in the OpsCenter database. OpsCenter can also be used to monitor a NetBackup cluster. See NetBackup High Availability Administrator's Guide for more details on setting up a NetBackup cluster environment. Also review the OpsCenter sections of the NetBackup release notes before using OpsCenter for monitoring NetBackup clusters.

Viewing master server details and data collection status

Use the following procedure to view the details for a master server. The details for the master server are shown at the bottom of the Settings > Configuration > NetBackup view under the following tabs:
General This tab displays the contents of many of the columns that are displayed in the table.

342

Understanding data collection About configuring data collection for NetBackup

Data Collection Status

This tab displays the collection status for each of the data types. The Data Collection Status tab is shown by default when you select Settings > Configuration > NetBackup. It also lists details like the time when the data load was last successful, when data collection last happened, and the exception message if the data collection failed for any of the data types. See Data collection status of a master server on page 342.

To view master server details and data collection status for a master server

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, select Settings > Configurations > NetBackup. Click the name of the master server (link) from the Master Server Name column. The details for the master server are shown at the bottom of this view.

Data collection status of a master server

This section describes the NetBackup data types that OpsCenter collects and the different states for managed servers. Figure 5-2 shows a sample data collection status view for a master server. Figure 5-2 Sample Data Collection Status view

Table 5-10 gives a description of the contents in the Data Collection Status tab.

Understanding data collection About configuring data collection for NetBackup

343

Table 5-10 Column

Data Type

Data Collection Status view Description

The type of data that is collected from NetBackup. See NetBackup data types and collection status on page 343.

Last Successful Data Load Last Run Time

This column lists the date and time when the last successful data load happened for the specific data type. This column lists the date and time when data collection was attempted. This column provides the status of each data load activity that OpsCenter requests. This column lists the last exception message if data collection failed for a data type.

Collection Status

Last Exception Message

NetBackup data types and collection status

OpsCenter collects data for many NetBackup data types (such as Appliance Hardware, jobs, policy, media server, service, storage unit etc.) by using NBSL. For most operations and changes in NetBackup, NBSL sends notifications to OpsCenter. For changes such as job, policy, services, and devices, the notification also contains the changed data. This data is stored in the OpsCenter database. The following are the collection status for the different data types and their description:

344

Understanding data collection About configuring data collection for NetBackup

Table 5-11 Collection status

Not Applicable

Collection statuses Description

This status may come when the master server version does not support the specific data type. For example, NetBackup 6.0 does not support disk, FT data types. This status also comes when your master server version is lower than 7.1 and you have not configured data collection for the following data types:

Error Logs Image Breakup Jobs

You can enable data collection for these data types while adding or editing a master server under Advanced Data Collection Properties section. See Adding a master server or an appliance master server in the OpsCenter console on page 355. See Editing a master server or an appliance master server in OpsCenter on page 356. See Master server states in OpsCenter on page 345. Not Started The data collection for the specific data type has not started. This status appears when you initially add a master server or when you start the OpsCenter server. The data collection for the specific data type is queued. The data collection for the specific data type is in progress. The data collection for the specific data type is complete. The data collection for the specific data type has failed. When the data collection fails, you can see the exception message from the Last Exception Message column.

Queued Running Completed Failed

Note: Data collection can fail, and then start after some
time. This is normal behavior. If data collection for a particular data type fails, it should be automatically started again within 10 minutes. All the functionality other than the functionality of the failed data type can be used normally while collection for a data type fails. Not Licensed This status is seen when the specific data type like FT is not licensed in NetBackup.

Understanding data collection About configuring data collection for NetBackup

345

See Data collection status of a master server on page 342.

Master server states in OpsCenter

This section lists the different states that can exist for a master server and what they mean. The master server can have any of the following states: Table 5-12 Master server states Description
The master server is Connected when the data collection status for all data types is not Failed. This means that the collection status for all the data types must be any other status except Failed. The master server is Partially Connected when data collection for some data types fails while data collection has happened or is happening for other data types. For example, data collection for catalog data type is Completed but data collection for client, device, disk etc. fails. Master servers may show as Partially Connected temporarily for some time. This is because data collection can fail, and then start after some time. This is normal behavior. If data collection for a particular data type fails, it should be automatically started again within 10 minutes. All the functionality other than the functionality of the failed data type can be used normally while collection for a data type fails. Not Connected The master server is Not Connected when the data collection for all data types fails. This may be when there is a network issue because of which OpsCenter is not able to connect and collect data from NetBackup.

Master server state

Connected

Partially Connected

Note: Data collection can fail, and then start after some
time. This is normal behavior. If data collection for a particular data type fails, it should be automatically started again within 10 minutes. All the functionality other than the functionality of the failed data type can be used normally while collection for a data type fails. Disabled The master server is Disabled when the data collection for the selected master server is disabled.

346

Understanding data collection About configuring data collection for NetBackup

Adding a master server or appliance in OpsCenter

To allow OpsCenter to communicate with a managed NetBackup server and collect data requires some security configuration. OpsCenter can monitor the master servers which have NetBackup Access Control (NBAC) configured and also those servers that do not have NBAC configured. Note: Symantec recommends that any NetBackup master server or appliance master server is monitored by only one OpsCenter Server. Use the following steps to add a master server or an appliance master server. Note that you must first configure the master server to allow server access and data collection by OpsCenter. After configuring the master server, you must add this server to the OpsCenter console so that it can be monitored. Note: You cannot add an appliance media server to the OpsCenter console. To monitor an appliance media server, you can add a master appliance or a regular master server to which it is connected. To add a master server or an appliance master server

Configure your managed master server or appliance master server to allow server access and data collection by OpsCenter. See Configuring a master server or appliance master server for server access and data collection by OpsCenter on page 349.

After configuring the master server or appliance master server, you must add the master server or appliance to the OpsCenter console so that it can be monitored. See Adding a master server or an appliance master server in the OpsCenter console on page 355.

Note: You can use an alternate procedure to add a NetBackup 7.0 or later master server to OpsCenter. This procedure can be used for both NBAC and non-NBAC servers. See Adding a NetBackup 7.0 or later master server on page 347.

Understanding data collection About configuring data collection for NetBackup

347

Adding a NetBackup 7.0 or later master server

Use the following procedure to add a NetBackup 7.0.x, 7.1.x, or 7.5 master server or a NetBackup 52xx Appliance 2.0 master server to the OpsCenter console. This procedure can be used for both NBAC and non-NBAC servers. In case of a clustered NetBackup setup, use this procedure for each node of the cluster. To add a NetBackup 7.0 or later master server or appliance master server to the OpsCenter console on Windows and UNIX

1 2

Log on to the managed master server or NetBackup 52xx Appliance 2.0 master server as Administrator or root for Windows and UNIX respectively. Browse to the following location:
Windows UNIX %Program Files%/NetBackup/bin/admincmd /usr/openv/netbackup/bin/admincmd

Run the following command on the master server or the appliance master server:
nbregopsc -add <Name of the OpsCenter Server>

As a part of usability enhancements, a command that is called nbregopsc has been added to NetBackup 7.0 and later versions. In addition, a new entry that is called OPS_CENTER_SERVER_NAME has been added to the bp.conf file. The nbregopsc command registers OpsCenter with the current master server and adds this master server to OpsCenter. This command also establishes a trust relationship from the authentication broker of NetBackup master server to the authentication broker of OpsCenter server.

348

Understanding data collection About configuring data collection for NetBackup

Ignore this step for master servers for which NBAC is not configured. However if the master server is NBAC-enabled, a trust relationship must be established from the authentication broker of the OpsCenter server to the authentication broker (AB) of the NetBackup master server. OpsCenter cannot monitor NetBackup servers if the trust relationship has not been set up between OpsCenter and NetBackup server. To establish the trust relationship, log on as Administrator or root on the OpsCenter server host and navigate to the following location:
Windows %Program Files%\Veritas\Security\Authentication\bin <INSTALL_PATH>/VRTSat/bin

UNIX

On the OpsCenter server host, run the following command depending on your specific master server version:
7.0 and 7.0.1 master server 7.1 or later master server or appliance master server vssat setuptrust --broker <MasterServerhost:2821> --securitylevel high vssat setuptrust --broker <MasterServerhost:13783> --securitylevel high

Note that <MasterServerhost> is the name of the master server.

Restart all the NetBackup services (processes). In case you add an appliance 2.0 master server, check if OpsCenter can connect to the appliance master server. Restart all appliance services or processes only if OpsCenter cannot connect to the Appliance master server. Note: In case running the nbregopsc command fails, you must manually add the master server or the appliance master server to the OpsCenter console. See Adding a master server or an appliance master server in the OpsCenter console on page 355.

Once you perform this procedure, the master server is automatically added to the OpsCenter console.

Understanding data collection About configuring data collection for NetBackup

349

Configuring a master server or appliance master server for server access and data collection by OpsCenter
Use the following procedures to configure a master server or an appliance master server for data collection by OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX. This procedure applies to both NBAC and non-NBAC master servers. In case of a clustered NetBackup setup, use this procedure on each node of the cluster. Note: This procedure applies to all master server versions including 7.0.x, 7.1.x, 7.5. However, it is recommended that the following procedure be used for NetBackup 7.0 and later servers. See Adding a master server or an appliance master server in the OpsCenter console on page 355. You can use an alternate procedure to configure an appliance master server for data collection by OpsCenter. Log on to the Appliance console as admin and go to Manage > Appliance > Add Additional Server. Click Add and in the Server Name field, enter the host name of the OpsCenter Server. Now you can add this appliance master server to the OpsCenter console (if not added already). See Adding a master server or an appliance master server in the OpsCenter console on page 355. To configure a master server or appliance master server for server access and data collection on Windows and UNIX

1 2 3 4 5

Log on to the managed master server or the appliance master server as Administrator or root on Windows and UNIX respectively. Start the NetBackup Administration Console. Expand NetBackup Management > Host Properties > Master Servers. Double-click the master server name to view its properties. The Master Server Properties dialog box appears. For a NetBackup 7.5 server, select the Servers tab and then the OpsCenter servers tab from the Master Server Properties dialog box. The OpCenter servers tab displays all of the OpsCenter servers that can access the currently selected NetBackup master server. For NetBackup servers before 7.5, select the Servers tab from the Master Server Properties dialog box to display the server list.

To add the OpsCenter server to the server list, click Add. The Add a New Server Entry dialog box appears.

350

Understanding data collection About configuring data collection for NetBackup

Type the OpsCenter server name in the field and click Add to add the server to the list. Ensure that the OpsCenter server name that you add is reachable from the NetBackup server.

8 9

Click Close. In the Master Server Properties dialog box, click OK.

10 Ignore this step for master servers on which NBAC is not configured.
However if the master server is NBAC-enabled, a bi-directional trust relationship must be established between the authentication broker of the OpsCenter server and the authentication broker(AB) of each managed NetBackup server. OpsCenter cannot monitor NetBackup servers if the trust relationship has not been set up between OpsCenter and NetBackup server (NBAC enabled). To set up these trust relationships, use the vssat command in Symantec Product Authentication Service. Run this command from %Program Files%\Veritas\Security\Authentication\bin directory in Windows or <INSTALL_PATH>/VRTSat/bin in UNIX. On the NetBackup master server or the appliance master server host, run the following command:
vssat setuptrust --broker <OpsCenterABhost:2821> --securitylevel high

where <OpsCenterABhost> is same as the host where OpsCenter server is installed. However if OpsCenter is installed in a clustered mode, then <OpscenterAB> is the host name that is provided as the remote authentication broker host during the OpsCenter installation. Similarly, log on as Administrator or root on the OpsCenter server host and run the following command depending on your specific master server version:
7.0 and 7.0.1 master server 7.1 or later master server vssat setuptrust --broker <MasterServerhost:2821> --securitylevel high vssat setuptrust --broker <MasterServerhost:13783> --securitylevel high

where <MasterServerhost> is the name of the master server.

Understanding data collection About configuring data collection for NetBackup

351

11 Restart all the NetBackup services. 12 Add this master server to the OpsCenter console so that it can be monitored.
See Adding a master server or an appliance master server in the OpsCenter console on page 355.

Settings > Configuration > NetBackup > Add Master Server options
Enter the following detailsforthemasterserverunderGeneralPropertiesandAdvancedPropertiessections:

Table 5-13 Option

General Properties and Advanced Properties options Description

Enter a host name or an IP address of the master server or appliance master server. This field is required. In case the master server is clustered, enter the virtual name of the master server.

Master Server Name

Note: You cannot add an appliance media server directly

to the OpsCenter console. Display Name Enter an alternate name for the master server or appliance master server. The display name is used for the master server on all views of the OpsCenter console. Note that this field is required. OpsCenter's Preferred network address The OpsCenter Server may have multiple network interface cards (NIC). You can select a preferred network address from the drop-down list. OpsCenter uses the address that you select to connect to the master server. After entering the above details, click Locate to locate the master server. The OpsCenter Server tries to connect to the master server or the appliance master server.

Locate option

Note: Changing the PBX port that the NetBackup master server requires to connect to the PBX on the OpsCenter Server is not supported in OpsCenter 7.5. If you add or edit a new master server or an appliance master server, the PBX port value is taken as 1556 by default. If you had configured a PBX port other than 1556 and upgrade to OpsCenter 7.5, then when you edit and save the master server in OpsCenter 7.5 the PBX port value is changed to 1556.

352

Understanding data collection About configuring data collection for NetBackup

You can configure an Agent to collect the following data from master server or appliance master server versions: NetBackup version
6.0.x

Data Collection
Install an Agent if you want to collect data for image, error logs, capacity, or traditional license. Install an Agent if you want to collect data for image, error log, breakup jobs, capacity, and traditional license. Install an Agent if you want to collect data for breakup jobs, capacity, and traditional license. Install an Agent if you want to collect data for capacity license and traditional license.

6.5.x

7.0.x

7.1.x or 7.5

Note: The data for image, error log, capacity license, traditional license, and breakup jobs is used in OpsCenter reports. From OpsCenter 7.5, NBSL is used to automatically collect the scheduled jobs data from NetBackup 6.5.x and later master servers. You do not need to install an Agent to collect scheduled jobs data from NetBackup 6.5.x master servers. Enter the following details under Advanced Data Collection Properties section: Table 5-14 Option
NetBackup version

Advanced Data Collection Properties options Description

When you click Locate and OpsCenter server can successfully connect to the master server or appliance master server, the appropriate NetBackup version is automatically selected in the NetBackup version drop-down list. In case the Locate operation fails and OpsCenter fails to connect to the master server, select the appropriate master server version manually from the drop-down list. You can select from the following versions:

6.0.x 6.5.x 7.0.x 7.1.x 7.5.x

Understanding data collection About configuring data collection for NetBackup

353

Table 5-14 Option

Agent

Advanced Data Collection Properties options (continued) Description

Select an Agent from the drop-down list. In case, no agent is configured, click Configure Agent. You can create an OpsCenter Agent from Settings > Configuration > Agent > Create Agent. See Configuring an OpsCenter Agent on page 323.

Install Directory

The directory path on the OpsCenter Agent host where the NetBackup application is installed. In case of remote data collection, this is the path on the OpsCenter Agent host where RAC (Remote Admin Console) is installed. Example of install directory path on a Windows system: C:\Program Files\VERITAS\NetBackup Example of install directory path on a Solaris system: /usr/openv/netbackup

Volume Manager Directory The directory path on the OpsCenter Agent host where the Volume Manager is installed. Example of Volume Manager directory on a Windows system: C:\Program Files\VERITAS\Volmgr Example of Volume Manager directory on a Solaris system: /usr/openv/volmgr Enable Image Data Collection Click the checkbox if you want to enable image data collection from the master server. This option appears only when you add 6.0.x or 6.5.x master servers. Enable Error Log data Collection Click the checkbox if you want to enable error log data collection from the master server. This option appears only when you add 6.0.x or 6.5.x master servers.

354

Understanding data collection About configuring data collection for NetBackup

Table 5-14 Option

Advanced Data Collection Properties options (continued) Description

Click the checkbox if you want to break up a job (using data from the NetBackup's catalog) so that the size and backup file count have finer granularity. This feature is most effective if you have multiple paths in your backup selection lists in NetBackup. This option appears only when you add 6.5.x, or 7.0.x master servers. For 6.0 MP7 master servers, you cannot collect breakup jobs data. The breakup jobs data is automatically collected for 7.1 and later master servers.

Enable Breakup Job Data Collection

Note: Enabling this option increases the load on the

OpsCenter Agent, the master server, and the time it takes to collect and load data in OpsCenter. Enable Capacity License Click the checkbox if you want to enable capacity license Deployment Data Collection data collection from the master server. This option appears for all master server versions. Enable Traditional License Click the checkbox if you want to enable traditional license Deployment Data Collection data collection from the master server. This option appears for all master server versions. Note that you must enter the value in Username and Password fields so that traditional license data can be collected. Username Enter the user name to access the NetBackup master server. A user name is required if you enable traditional license data collection. Ignore this field in the following scenarios:

If you have not enabled the Traditional License option If you want to collect the traditional license data from a local NetBackup host.

Note: The Username field is disabled if Enable Traditional

License Deployment Data Collection checkbox is unchecked.

Note: Username and Password are not needed if the Agent

is installed on the NetBackup master server.

Understanding data collection About configuring data collection for NetBackup

355

Table 5-14 Option

Password

Advanced Data Collection Properties options (continued) Description

Enter the password of the NetBackup user account. This is required if you enable scheduled job or traditional license data collection.

Note: The Password field is disabled if Enable Traditional

License Deployment Data Collection checkbox is unchecked. Validate Agent option After entering the details in Advanced Data Collection Properties, click Validate Agent to validate the Agent information that you entered. This would validate the install directory, volume manager directory, user name, and password that you have entered. Save / Cancel options Click Save to add the master server. Click Cancel to exit and go back to the Settings > Configuration > NetBackup page.

Adding a master server or an appliance master server in the OpsCenter console

You must add a master server or an appliance master server to the OpsCenter console so that it can be monitored. Use the following procedure to add a master server or an appliance master server. To add a master server or an appliance master server

1 2 3

In the OpsCenter console, select Settings > Configurations > NetBackup . Click Add. Enter the detailsforthemasterserverunderGeneralPropertiesandAdvancedPropertiessections . See Settings > Configuration > NetBackup > Add Master Server options on page 351.

Click Locate to check if OpsCenter can connect to the master server or the appliance master server. An error appears if OpsCenter cannot connect to the NetBackup master server or appliance master server on the network.

356

Understanding data collection About configuring data collection for NetBackup

The Advanced Data Collection Properties section lets you enable data collection for additional data types by using an Agent. For master server versions before 7.1, you must install an Agent to collect the data for image, error log, breakup jobs, capacity license, or traditional license as per the master server version. For NetBackup 7.0.x master servers, OpsCenter Agents are needed to collect breakup jobs, capacity, and traditional license data. For NetBackup 7.1.x or 7.5, OpsCenter Agents are needed to collect capacity and traditional license data. The data like image, error log, scheduled jobs, breakup jobs, capacity license, or traditional license is used in OpsCenter reports. Enter the details under Advanced Data Collection Properties section. See Settings > Configuration > NetBackup > Add Master Server options on page 351.

Click Validate Agent to validate the Agent information that you entered. This would validate the install directory, volume manager directory, user name, and password that you have entered. Click Save to add the master server. Alternately, you can click Cancel to exit.

In case you add an appliance 2.0 master server, restart all appliance services or processes only if OpsCenter cannot connect to the Appliance master server. See the Appliance documentation for details on how to restart services.

Editing a master server or an appliance master server in OpsCenter

Use the following procedure to change the configuration information for a NetBackup master server or an appliance master server. To edit a master server or an appliance master server

1 2 3

In the OpsCenter console, select Settings > Configurations > NetBackup. Use the checkbox to select a master server or an appliance master server from the Master Server Name column. Click Edit.

Understanding data collection About configuring data collection for NetBackup

357

Edit the information that is displayed on the Edit Master Server page. You can change the data that is shown for General Properties, Advanced Properties, and Advanced Data Collection Properties sections. A description of the fields present in these sections is available. See Adding a master server or an appliance master server in the OpsCenter console on page 355. Note that you cannot edit the Master Server Name for the master server. The Master Server Name field falls under the General Properties section.

Click Save.

Deleting a master server or an appliance master server in OpsCenter

You can delete one or more master servers or appliance master servers using the following procedure. Note that deleting a master server deletes all the data that is associated with the master server. Note: Deleting a master server may take some time. To delete a master server

1 2 3 4

In the OpsCenter console, select Settings > Configurations > NetBackup . Use the checkbox to select one or more master servers from the Master Server Name column. Click Delete. The following warning message appears:
Deletion of the selected master server(s) will delete all related data. Do you want to proceed?

Click OK.

Controlling data collection for a master server in OpsCenter

You can disable or enable OpsCenter data collection for a particular managed NetBackup master server or an appliance master server depending on your needs. Note: If you disable data collection it may appear to be a loss of data in OpsCenter. For example, a drive may have the same status until you enable OpsCenter data collection again.

358

Understanding data collection Configuring Backup Exec data collector

To disable data collection for a master server

1 2 3

In the OpsCenter console, select Settings > Configurations > NetBackup. Use the checkbox to select one or more master servers from the Master Server Name column. Click Disable Data Collection.

To enable data collection for a master server

1 2 3

In the OpsCenter console, select Settings > Configurations > NetBackup . Use the checkbox to select one or more master servers from the Master Server Name column. Click Enable Data Collection.

Configuring Backup Exec data collector

This section describes data collection from Backup Exec. Caution: The Backup Exec data collector requires the following component to be installed on the OpsCenter Agent host, to collect data properly. Microsoft Visual C++ 2005 SP1 Redistributable Package (x86) that is vcredist_x86.exe VC Redistributable Package is available at: http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/details.aspx?familyid=200B2FD9-AE1A-4A14-984D-389C36F85647&displaylang=en Once you install this component on the Agent host, configure the Backup Exec data collector as described in the following section. To configure Backup Exec data collector

1 2 3 4 5 6

Click Settings > Configuration > Agent. On the Agent list, select a check box in front of the Agent, for which you want to configure a Data Collector. Click Create Data Collector. On the CreateDataCollector:ProductSelection page, select Symantec Backup Exec from the Select Product drop-down list. In the Target Host Name text box, enter the Backup Exec server host name, from which you want to collect data. Click Next.

Understanding data collection Collecting data from PureDisk

359

On the Create Data Collector: Details page, specify the following Backup Exec data collector configuration settings:
User name Enter the name of the user account that is required to connect to the Backup Exec Database . Enter the password of this user account. Select the version of the Symantec Backup Exec Server - 10.x, 11.x, or 12.x - from which you want to collect data.

Password Version

Select blackout period details, data types to be collected, and collection interval. For more details on collection interval, and other data collector settings, refer to the following section: See Configuring an OpsCenter Data Collector on page 326.

Click Save.

Collecting data from PureDisk

OpsCenter supports collection of data from Symantec NetBackup PureDisk. The collected data is stored in the OpsCenter database, based on which you can generate reports. OpsCenter can collect Policy & Schedule and Job data types from PureDisk Storage Pool Authority (PureDisk SPA). For more details on PureDisk, refer to the Symantec NetBackup PureDisk documentation. PureDisk SPA and its components that run on the PureDisk operating system (PDOS). The Single Instance Storage (SIS) or deduplication technology of NetBackup PureDisk is unique in storage and backup industry. PureDisk identifies files and the data segments that contain identical data and treats them as a single instance of a file, which it backs up only once. This lets you save storage space. Attributes of identical files, such as name and date of modification can vary. While backing up a file, PureDisk determines whether multiple instances of the file are present on hosts across the network, including remote hosts. By using the deduplication technology, PureDisk stores only one instance of the file. Table 5-15 describes the steps that you need to carry out to collect data from PureDisk.

360

Understanding data collection Collecting data from PureDisk

Table 5-15

Steps to collect data from PureDisk Reference topic

See Installing Symantec OpsCenter on Windows and UNIX on page 130.

Step number Step

Step 1 Install OpsCenter server.

Note: When you install OpsCenter

server,OpsCenter Integrated Agent is also installed and configured, which you can use to collect only PureDisk data. To collect PureDisk data, you do not need to manually install or configure OpsCenter Agent. You cannot delete the Integrated Agent.

Note: You can collect PureDisk data only through

the OpsCenter Integrated Agent. Step 2 You need to establish trust between the See Setting up a trust authentication brokers of OpsCenter and PureDisk between the PureDisk SPA for secure communication. SPA host and OpsCenter AB host Setting up trust is a pre-requisite for PureDisk on page 360. data collection from OpsCenter. Using the OpsCenter console, configure PureDisk See Configuring data collector for the Integrated Agent. PureDisk data collector on page 361.

Step 3

See Setting up a trust between the PureDisk SPA host and OpsCenter AB host on page 360. See Configuring PureDisk data collector on page 361.

Setting up a trust between the PureDisk SPA host and OpsCenter AB host
You need to set up a bi-directional trust between the PureDisk SPA host and OpsCenter AB (authentication broker ) host. Establishing trust is a pre-requisite for PureDisk data collection from OpsCenter.

Understanding data collection Collecting data from PureDisk

361

Note: OpsCenter AB host is the host where the OpsCenter server is installed. However, if OpsCenter is installed in a clustered mode, then the OpsCenter AB host is the host name that was provided as the remote authentication broker host during the OpsCenter installation. The OpsCenter AB host name is stored in the vxss.hostname parameter in the following file: On Windows: C:\Program
Files\Symantec\OpsCenter\server\config\security.conf

On UNIX: <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/config/security.conf This section provides the manual steps that you need to carry out on the PureDisk SPA host, to setup trust between the PureDisk SPA host and the OpsCenter authentication broker host. To set up a trust between PureDisk SPA host and OpsCenter AB host

On the PureDisk SPA host, logon as root and run the following command:
su www-data

As a www-data user, run the following command:

<INSTALL_PATH>/VRTSat/bin/vssat setuptrust --broker OpsCenterABhost:2821 --securitylevel low

After successfully setting up a trust between the PureDisk SPA host and OpsCenter AB host, the following message is displayed:
setuptrust ------------------------------------------Setup Trust With Broker: OpsCenterABhost

Note: Setting up a trust between the OpsCenter AB host and PureDisk SPA host from the OpsCenter AB host is accomplished automatically after the PureDisk data collector is configured.

Configuring PureDisk data collector

This section provides the procedure to configure NetBackup PureDisk data collector on the OpsCenter UI.

362

Understanding data collection About collecting data from Enterprise Vault

To configure NetBackup PureDisk data collector

1 2

Click Settings > Configuration > Agent. On the Agent list, select a check box in front of the Integrated Agent. When you install OpsCenter server,OpsCenter Integrated Agent is also installed and configured, which you can use to collect only PureDisk data. To collect PureDisk data, you do not need to manually install or configure OpsCenter Agent. You can collect PureDisk data only through the OpsCenter Integrated Agent.

3 4 5 6 7

Click Create Data Collector. On the Create Data Collector: Product Selection page, select Symantec NetBackup PureDisk from the Select Product drop-down list. In the Target Host Name text box, enter the PureDisk SPA Server host name, from which you want to collect data. Click Next. On the Create Data Collector: Details page, specify the following PureDisk configuration settings:
Product Version Select any of the following Symantec NetBackup PureDisk versions from the drop-down list: 6.2, 6.2.1, 6.2.2, 6.5, 6.5.0.1, 6.5.1, 6.6, 6.6.0.1, 6.6.0.2, 6.6.0.3

For more details on collection interval, and other data collector settings, refer to the following section: See Configuring an OpsCenter Data Collector on page 326.

Click Save. Setting up a trust between the OpsCenter authentication broker host and PureDisk SPA host is accomplished automatically after PureDisk data collector is configured. If it is not successful, you need to do it manually. Refer to Setting up a trust between the OpsCenter AB host and PureDisk SPA host in the OpsCenter Administrator's Guide.

About collecting data from Enterprise Vault

The following topics provide information about Enterprise Vault Data Collector configuration. See About Enterprise Vault on page 363.

Understanding data collection About collecting data from Enterprise Vault

363

See About data collected from Enterprise Vault on page 363. See Versions supported by OpsCenter on page 366. See Planning the Enterprise Vault data collector deployment on page 366. See OpsCenter Agent deployment modes on page 368. See Accessing Microsoft SQL Server host on page 368. See About creating a user for integrated logon on page 369. See Configuring the OpsCenter Agent properties for integrated logon on page 371. See Installing Microsoft SQL Server JDBC driver on page 372. See Configuring Enterprise Vault data collector on page 373.

About Enterprise Vault

Symantec Enterprise Vault software application provides a flexible framework for archiving emails, file systems, and collaborative environments. It is supported only on Windows platform. Enterprise Vault has the following features:

Policy-controlled archiving Seamless retrieval of information Powerful search capability Compliance retention Data compression and single instancing

For more details, refer to Enterprise Vault documentation.

About data collected from Enterprise Vault

OpsCenter categorizes the data that is collected from Enterprise Vault database into various data types. Table 5-16 lists the data types in OpsCenter that represent the type of data that is collected from Enterprise Vault. For example, OpsCenter collects Policy and retention category data from Enterprise Vault database and stores it as Archive Policy data type.

364

Understanding data collection About collecting data from Enterprise Vault

Table 5-16

Enterprise Vault data types Data in Enterprise Vault

Policy and retention category Vault Store Groups, Vault Store, and Vault Store Partition Mailbox, Public Folder, and Provisioning Group Saveset

Data type in OpsCenter

Archive Policy Vault Store

Target Archive

You can select these data types while configuring the Enterprise Vault data collector. The data collector collects the information from Enterprise Vault that is associated with the selected data types, , as per the specified schedule. See Configuring Enterprise Vault data collector on page 373. Figure 5-3 shows the hierarchy of archive data in Enterprise Vault.

Understanding data collection About collecting data from Enterprise Vault

365

Figure 5-3

Representation of Enterprise Vault data in OpsCenter reports

Archive Site

Exchange Server

Enterprise Vault Server

Vault Store Group

Vault Store Group

Provisioning Group Vault Store Vault Store Vault Store Vault Store

Vault Partition

Vault Partition

Vault Partition

Vault Partition

------------------------Archives-----------------------

------------------------Archive Storage-----------------------

An archive site is a logical group of hosts that need to be archived (Exchange Servers, Provisioning Groups), storage media (vault store groups, vault stores, vault partitions), and Enterprise Vault servers . It is at the highest level in the Enterprise Vault data hierarchy. Using OpsCenter archive reports you can

366

Understanding data collection About collecting data from Enterprise Vault

determine the details about both archiving activities and archival storage, depending on which path you follow to drill down the site information. See About OpsCenter reports on page 627. OpsCenter reports present archive data in the following two ways:
Archiving activities A few archive reports show details about archiving activities. For example: Details of mailboxes to be archived, the original size of data that has been archived, the number of mailboxes that exceed their warning limits per Exchange Server or Provisioning Group, and so on. These are all archiving activities, which you can view reports for. These archiving activity reports are available in the Exchange report folder of Archive reports. OpsCenter archive reports show only Exchange Server data.

Note: Mailboxes are referred to as targets and an individual email

is referred to as an item. Storage of archived data A few archive reports show details about the storage of archived data. For example: details of vault stores and vault partitions where the archive data has been stored, or how many emails were archived per Enterprise Vault server , and so on.

Versions supported by OpsCenter

OpsCenter supports the following versions of Enterprise Vault. It supports all versions of Microsoft SQL Server that the Enterprise Vault supports.
Enterprise Vault Microsoft SQL Server 7.5, 8.0 2005, 2008

Planning the Enterprise Vault data collector deployment

Enterprise Vault stores archive metadata in the directory and the Vault Store database. To collect the archive metadata from Microsoft SQL Server, you need to configure OpsCenter Agent and data collector using the OpsCenter console. OpsCenter supports local as well as remote archive-data collection. In the remote data collection method, OpsCenter Agent and Microsoft SQL Server are installed on different hosts. Table 5-17 lists the steps that you need to carry out before configuring the Enterprise Vault data collector for archive-data collection in the OpsCenter console.

Understanding data collection About collecting data from Enterprise Vault

367

Table 5-17

Planning and deployment steps Reference topic

Step number Step

Step 1

Deploy OpsCenter Agent in any of the following See OpsCenter Agent ways, to collect archive data remotely: deployment modes on page 368. Single-domain mode

Multi-domain mode Standalone mode

Step 2

Make sure that the user whose credentials you See Accessing Microsoft use for the integrated logon has required access SQL Server host rights on the Microsoft SQL Server, where the on page 368. archive data resides. This can be an existing user, or you can create a new user in Microsoft SQL Server and give required access rights.

Step 3

Depending on the deployment mode of the OpsCenter Agent, add a user in the appropriate domain or workgroup, which you want to use for integrated logon between Agent host and Microsoft SQL Server host.

See About creating a user in single-domain deployment mode on page 369. See About creating a user in multi-domain deployment mode on page 370. See About creating a user in standalone deployment mode on page 370.

Step 4

Install Microsoft SQL Server JDBC driver on the OpsCenter Agent host.

See Installing Microsoft SQL Server JDBC driver on page 372. See Configuring the OpsCenter Agent properties for integrated logon on page 371.

Step 5

For integrated logon, configure the OpsCenter Agent to run in the context of the user or group that has access to Microsoft SQL Server, where the Enterprise Vault data resides, depending on the OpsCenter Agent deployment mode.

You need to configure the Enterprise Vault data collector using the OpsCenter console and schedule data collection. See Configuring Enterprise Vault data collector on page 373.

368

Understanding data collection About collecting data from Enterprise Vault

OpsCenter Agent deployment modes

This section describes various deployment modes in which you can deploy OpsCenter Agent, depending on your setup. This section mainly talks about the remote agent deployment modes. However, Enterprise Vault also supports local Agent deployment. You can deploy the OpsCenter Agent on Microsoft SQL Server host or OpsCenter Server host. Table 5-18 Agent deployment modes Description
In a single-domain deployment mode, the OpsCenter Agent host and the Microsoft SQL Server host (Enterprise Vault database instance) share the same Windows domain. In addition to single-domain mode, you can deploy the OpsCenter Agent in multi-domain mode. In this deployment mode, the OpsCenter Agent host and the Microsoft SQL Server host (Enterprise Vault database instance) do not share the same Windows domain. The OpsCenter Agent host is in a domain different than the SQL Server domain. In this deployment mode, the OpsCenter Agent host and the Microsoft SQL Server host (Enterprise Vault database instance) do not share the same Windows domain. The OpsCenter Agent host is installed on a standalone host.

Deployment mode
Single-domain deployment mode

Multi-domain deployment mode

Standalone deployment mode

Accessing Microsoft SQL Server host

This section describes how to give the required rights to a user to access Microsoft SQL Server. To access Microsoft SQL Server host

1 2

Create a Windows domain user on the Microsoft SQL Server host. For example, create a user with credentials of user name: localadmin and password: pass. Open the Microsoft SQL Server admin console, using SQL Server Management Studio Express or any other Microsoft SQL Server client. Add this Windows domain user (local admin) to the Microsoft SQL Server.

Understanding data collection About collecting data from Enterprise Vault

369

Add this user (local admin) to the Enterprise Vault databases, on which you want the access rights. Note: To report on Enterprise Vault / archive data, OpsCenter Agent needs access to the Enterprise Vault directory and storage databases. You need to add the user to these databases and give the required access rights on these databases.

4 5 6

In the Microsoft SQL Server admin console, in the Object Explorer, expand the Security folder. Expand the logons folder. Right-click the user name - for example user name: OpsDomain\localadmin with the password: pass - with which you want to perform integrated logon on the Agent host and Microsoft SQL Server host. Click Properties. On the logon Properties screen, in the Select a page pane, select Server Roles. In the right-hand Server roles pane, select the public check box. The user local admin in the OpsDomain (OpsDomain\localadmin) now has the rights to access Microsoft SQL Server.

7 8 9

10 Additionally, make sure that the user has datareader rights to access the
desired database.

About creating a user for integrated logon

This section provides procedures to create a user that is required for integrated logon between the OpsCenter Agent host and Microsoft SQL Server host, where the archive data resides. Depending on the OpsCenter Agent deployment mode, the procedure to create a logon user varies. See About creating a user in single-domain deployment mode on page 369. See About creating a user in multi-domain deployment mode on page 370. See About creating a user in standalone deployment mode on page 370.

About creating a user in single-domain deployment mode

Make sure that the user whose credentials (for example, User name: localadmin and Password: pass) you use for the integrated logon has required access rights on the Microsoft SQL Server, where the archive data resides.

370

Understanding data collection About collecting data from Enterprise Vault

The user localadmin can be an existing user, or you can create a new user with these credentials in Microsoft SQL Server and give required access rights. See Accessing Microsoft SQL Server host on page 368. If you have deployed the OpsCenter Agent in the single-domain mode, create a user, (User name: localadmin and Password: pass) in the Agent host domain that is the Windows domain. See OpsCenter Agent deployment modes on page 368. Use credentials of this user (User name: localadmin and Password: pass) when you configure the Agent properties for integrated logon. See Configuring the OpsCenter Agent properties for integrated logon on page 371.

About creating a user in multi-domain deployment mode

Make sure that the user whose credentials (for example, User name: localadmin and Password: pass) you use for the integrated logon has required access rights on the Microsoft SQL Server, where the archive data resides. The user localadmin can be an existing user, or you can create a new user with these credentials in Microsoft SQL Server and give required access rights. See Accessing Microsoft SQL Server host on page 368. If you have deployed the OpsCenter Agent in the multi-domain mode, create a user (User name: localadmin and Password: pass) in the Agent host domain. See OpsCenter Agent deployment modes on page 368. Use credentials of this user (User name: localadmin and Password: pass) when you configure the Agent properties for integrated logon. See Configuring the OpsCenter Agent properties for integrated logon on page 371. If the Agent host is on a different domain as compared to the EV host, then the user must be created as a local Administrator. This is because the Agent domain is not visible to the EV host.

About creating a user in standalone deployment mode

Make sure that the user whose credentials (for example, User name: localadmin and Password: pass) you use for the integrated logon has required access rights on the Microsoft SQL Server, where the archive data resides. The user localadmin can be an existing user, or you can create a new user with these credentials in Microsoft SQL Server and give required access rights. See Accessing Microsoft SQL Server host on page 368.

Understanding data collection About collecting data from Enterprise Vault

371

If you have deployed the OpsCenter Agent in the standalone mode, create a user for example (User name: localadmin and Password: pass) in the Administrator workgroup. See OpsCenter Agent deployment modes on page 368. Use credentials of this user (User name: localadmin and Password: pass) when you configure the Agent properties for integrated logon. See Configuring the OpsCenter Agent properties for integrated logon on page 371.

Configuring the OpsCenter Agent properties for integrated logon

The Enterprise Vault data collector that is configured in OpsCenter collects the Enterprise Vault archive data residing on the Microsoft SQL Server. However, the data collection is not possible if the OpsCenter Agent is not configured to run in the context of the user or the group that has access to the SQL Server. Note: Make sure that this user has required rights to access Microsoft SQL Server See Accessing Microsoft SQL Server host on page 368. To configure OpsCenter Agent properties

1 2 3

On the OpsCenter Agent host (Windows system), click Start > Run. In the Run dialog box, in the Open text box, enter services.msc. Click Enter. The Windows Services screen is displayed.

4 5 6 7

On the Services screen, on the services list, right-click the Symantec OpsCenter Agent service. On the right-click menu, click Properties. On the Symantec OpsCenter Agent Properties screen, on the Log On tab, select the This account option. Enter the credentials of the user - for example localadmin with the password: pass - who has the rights to access the Microsoft SQL Server, where the Enterprise Vault archive data resides. Alternatively, click Browse. This opens the Select User dialog box.

Enter a user name in the text box. This user should have access rights on Microsoft SQL Server. Click Check Names to check whether the user name that is specified is present in the Windows domain or not.

372

Understanding data collection About collecting data from Enterprise Vault

Click OK.

10 Click OK on the LogOn tab.

Installing Microsoft SQL Server JDBC driver

To collect the Enterprise Vault data residing on Microsoft SQL Server (or Microsoft SQL Server or SQL Server), you require the SQL Server JDBC driver that is installed on the OpsCenter Agent host. The Agent requires the JDBC driver to communicate with the Microsoft SQL Server. Microsoft provides a Java Database Connectivity (JDBC) driver for use with SQL Server. The SQL Server JDBC Driver 2.0 is available to all SQL Server users at no additional charge, and provides access to SQL Server 2000, SQL Server 2005, and SQL Server 2008 from any Java application, application server, or Java-enabled applet. This is a Type 4 JDBC driver that provides database connectivity through the standard JDBC application program interfaces (APIs) available in Java Platform, Enterprise Edition 5. To install Microsoft SQL Server JDBC driver

Click the following link: Download Microsoft SQL Server JDBC Driver 2.0

2 3

On the Microsoft SQL Server JDBC Driver 2.0 page, click Download. The File Download dialog box is displayed. Click Open to access the end-user license agreement.

On the MICROSOFT SOFTWARE LICENSE TERMS page, select the following: I Accept the above agreement and I want to download the Microsoft Windows version The File Download dialog box is displayed.

5 6

Click Save to save the sqljdbc_2.0.1803.100_enu.exe file to a desired location. Unzip the sqljdbc_2.0.1803.100_enu.exe file.

Understanding data collection About collecting data from Enterprise Vault

373

For 32-bit Agent, copy sqljdbc_2.0\enu\auth\x86\sqljdbc_auth.dll and sqljdbc_2.0\enu\sqljdbc.jar files to the following location on the Agent host.
Install Dir\Symantec\OpsCenter\Agent\lib

For 64-bit Agent, copy sqljdbc_2.0\enu\auth\x64\sqljdbc_auth.dll and sqljdbc_2.0\enu\sqljdbc.jar files to the following location on the Agent host.
Install Dir\Symantec\OpsCenter\Agent\lib

where Install Dir is the location where you have installed OpsCenter. Note: If the file in sqljdbc_2.0\enu directory is not named sqljdbc.jar and named something else like sqljdbc4.jar, you must rename it to sqljdbc.jar. Click the following link for more information and frequently asked questions on the JDBC driver. Microsoft SQL Server JDBC Driver

Restart the Agent service.

Configuring Enterprise Vault data collector

This section provides the procedure to configure the Enterprise Vault data collector in the OpsCenter console. This data collector collects archive data from Microsoft SQL Server where the Enterprise Vault database resides. To collect archive data, the Enterprise Vault data collector needs the Agent to be configured to run in the context of the user or the group that can access Microsoft SQL Server. See Configuring the OpsCenter Agent properties for integrated logon on page 371. To configure Enterprise Vault data collector

1 2 3 4 5 6

In the OpsCenter console, click Settings > Configuration > Agent . On the Agent list, select a check box in front of the Agent for which you want to configure the Data Collector. Click Create Data Collector. On the Create Data Collector: Product Selection page, select Symantec Enterprise Vault from the Select Product drop-down list. Enter the name of the host, from where you want to collect the archive data. Click Next.

374

Understanding data collection About collecting data from Enterprise Vault

Enter the following Configuration Settings:

Database Instance Name This is the directory database instance name. By default this field is left blank.

Databaseportnumber Enter the port number that is used to connect to the Microsoft SQL Server. The default port number is 1433.

8 9

Specify blackout period details. Select the data types that you want to collect. You can collect the following data types from an Enterprise Vault setup : Target, Vault Store, Archive Policy, and Archive.

10 Select collection interval.

For more details on collection interval, and other data collector settings, refer to the following section: See Configuring an OpsCenter Data Collector on page 326.

11 Click Save.
See Enterprise Vault data collection checklist on page 374.

Enterprise Vault data collection checklist

Ensure the following before you start collecting data from Enterprise Vault database:

The SQL Server JDBC driver has been installed on the OpsCenter Agent host See Installing Microsoft SQL Server JDBC driver on page 372. The OpsCenter Agent has been configured to run in the context of the user or user group that has access to Microsoft SQL Server database where Enterprise Vault data is stored. See Configuring the OpsCenter Agent properties for integrated logon on page 371. The OpsCenter Agent service is running. The SQL Server services are running. You have entered the appropriate information for Enterprise Vault data collector variables. See Configuring Enterprise Vault data collector on page 373. You have selected the data types and events to be collected from the Enterprise Vault database, that is the Microsoft SQL Server.

Understanding data collection IBM Tivoli Storage Manager data collector variables and details

375

You have specified the collection interval within which you want to collect the archive data.

IBM Tivoli Storage Manager data collector variables and details

OpsCenter supports the collection of the following data types from IBM Tivoli Storage Manager (TSM): The variables to configure for the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager data collector are as follows:
Home Directory The home directory for the Tivoli Storage Manager installation. (This variable can be left blank.) An administrator-level logon that is used to connect to the Tivoli Storage Manager server. (The default is admin.) The password for the account (specified in tsmId) for connecting to the TSM server. (The default password is admin.) (Windows only) The TCP port on the TSM server through which the data collector establishes a connection. The TSM Server Port has no effect on Solaris. The Solaris data collector uses only product host settings. dsmConfig dsmDir dsmadmc Location The path to the dsm.opt file. The path where files to be run dsmadmc reside. The path of TSM administrative client (dsmadmc).

TSM ID

TSM Password

TSM Server Port

Note: The TSM product environment variables DSM_CONFIG and DSM_SYS point to the dsmadmc required files dsm.opt and dsm.sys (Solaris and AIX). For more information, refer to your TSM documentation. Specify the TSM server host (also called product host) value for the TSM data collector in the following manner:

376

Understanding data collection EMC NetWorker data collector variables

Windows

Use the fully qualified host name. In short, product host is the value that you can use with the dsmadmc -tcpserveraddress option. For example, the following entries are valid for product host: Host.sample.domain.com Host assuming that Host can be fully qualified.

Solaris and AIX

The product host must be the value that is specified in the dsm.sys file, for tag SErvername (note the case). In short, product host is the value that you can use with the dsmadmc -se option. The following is a sample dsm.sys file: ***************************************** SErvername server_a COMMmethod CoMMmethod TCPPort TCPip 1500

TCPServeraddress 255.255.255.255 SERVERNAME MYHOST.Veritas.COM TCPSERVERADDRESS 255.255.255.255 NODENAME myhost.mycompany.com

******************************************

For more details on collection interval, and other data collector settings, refer to the following section: See Configuring an OpsCenter Data Collector on page 326.

EMC NetWorker data collector variables

The variables to configure for the EMC NetWorker data collector are as follows:
Home Directory The home directory for the EMC NetWorker installation.

Understanding data collection EMC NetWorker data collector variables

377

Location of messages file

The directory path for the log file containing group-complete messages. This path may be absolute or relative to homeDirectory. The default file name is messages. To increase the efficiency of the NetWorker data collector, configure NetWorker to create a log that contains only group complete messages, and point messagesFile to this log

Location of mminfo.exe

The directory path of the mminfo command-line interface (CLI), absolute, or relative to homeDirectory The directory path of the nsradmin CLI, absolute, or relative to homeDirectory The NetWorker resource file to use instead of the default file that is used by nsradmin (Optional) Output of an nsradmin command (Optional) The OpsCenter console displays nsrResFile, nsrFile, and mminfoFile even though these variables are optional and only advanced users must set them.

Location of nsradmin.exe

Location of nsrres file

Location of nsr file

Location of mminfo file

Output of mminfo(Optional)

For more details on collection interval, and other data collector settings, refer to the following section: See Configuring an OpsCenter Data Collector on page 326.

378

Understanding data collection EMC NetWorker data collector variables

Chapter

Managing OpsCenter views

This chapter includes the following topics:

About OpsCenter views About managing OpsCenter views About managing nodes and objects in OpsCenter Adding nodes to a view in OpsCenter Modifying node details in OpsCenter Deleting nodes in OpsCenter Adding objects to a view node in OpsCenter Deleting objects from a view node in OpsCenter View filters in OpsCenter

About OpsCenter views

Symantec OpsCenter views are logical groups of IT assets (master servers or clients) organized in a hierarchical manner. A Security Administrator or an Administrator can create views either from OpsCenter console or the Java View Builder and make them available in the OpsCenter console. Figure 6-1 shows the details that are displayed on the Views tab in the OpsCenter console.

380

Managing OpsCenter views About OpsCenter views

Figure 6-1

The Views tab

Note: Only a Security Administrator or an Administrator can create or modify views. See User access rights and UI functions in OpsCenter on page 287. In an OpsCenter view, IT assets that are scattered across organization can be arranged according to their locations, business units, or applications. You can generate various OpsCenter reports that are filtered by views. With these reports, you can identify the locations or departments with hosts storing business critical data. After you install and run the OpsCenter Server and the OpsCenter Agent, OpsCenter detects the IT assets, which are then stored in the database. The Java View Builder makes these IT assets available when a view is created. The hierarchy of an object view based on archive data is as follows: Abstract objects (Geography > Region > City) > Domain (Site) > Host (Exchange Server / Enterprise Vault server ) > Target (Mailbox / Journal Mailbox / Public Folder) See About collecting data from Enterprise Vault on page 362.

Managing OpsCenter views About OpsCenter views

381

Note: To run the Java View Builder, you need Java Runtime Environment (JRE) installed on the host. In a view hierarchy, between top and bottom levels you can create a number of user-defined levels. An OpsCenter view is a homogeneous one, it cannot have hosts and file systems in the same tree.

Settings > Views options

OpsCenter 7.5 now displays all the view types that are supported by Java View Builder like File System, Enterprise Vault server etc. on the Settings > Views pane. However you cannot perform operations like add, edit, delete, manage nodes and objects etc. from the OpsCenter GUI on view types like File System, Enterprise Vault server, Exchange server, and Vault. Use the Java View Builder to add, edit, delete, or manage these view types. You can manage only the Master Server, Client, and Policy view types using the OpsCenter GUI. A description of the Views tab options follows in the table. Table 6-1 Option
View Type

Views tab options Description

Select the type of view from the drop-down list. The options are All Views, Client, Master Server, and Policy. See OpsCenter view types on page 383.

Add/Edit/Delete

Select to add new views, or to edit and delete the available views. These options are available only when you log on as a Security Administrator or an Administrator. In addition, you can add, edit, or delete only the Master Server, Client, and Policy view types using the OpsCenter GUI. The Add, Edit, or Delete options are disabled if you select any other view type like File System, Enterprise Vault server etc.

Edit View Level Alias

Select to edit the view level aliases. This option is available only when you log on as a Security Administrator or an Administrator. This option is available only for Master Server, Client, and Policy view types. The Edit View Level Alias option is disabled if you select any other view type like File System, Enterprise Vault server etc.

382

Managing OpsCenter views About OpsCenter views

Table 6-1 Option

Views tab options (continued) Description

Select to view the objects on the node and objects that are not in the selected view. This option is available only when you log on as a Security Administrator or an Administrator. This option is available only for Master Server, Client, and Policy view types. The Manage Nodes and Objects option is disabled if you select any other view type like File System, Enterprise Vault server etc.

Manage Nodes and Objects

Name Type

Displays the names of the views that you can access. Displays the view type. OpsCenter 7.5 now displays all the view types that are supported by Java View Builder like File System, Enterprise Vault server etc. on the Settings > Views pane. Displays the date and time when the view was created. Displays the role of the user who created the view.

Created On Owner

Two tabs appear in the Details pane of the Settings > Views page. Table 6-2 Option
View Level Alias tab

Settings > Views Details pane tabs Description

This tab shows the details of view level aliases of the selected view. Default view level aliases are as follows: Level 1, Level 2, and so on. The View Level Alias tab does not contain any data, if you have not added any nodes or objects to the selected view. Only a Security Administrator or an Administrator can modify the view level aliases. See Modifying alias view levels in OpsCenter on page 390.

General tab

The General tab displays the following details:

Name of the selected view Description of the view Date and time when the view was created Name of the user who has created this view

See About OpsCenter views on page 379.

Managing OpsCenter views About OpsCenter views

383

OpsCenter view types

In OpsCenter, each view is associated with a view type. Depending on the type of the view, objects are made available for assigning to that view. You can create views of the following types from the OpsCenter console:
Client If you create a view of type Client, only backup clients are available to be assigned to the view. If you create a view of type Master Server, only Master Servers are available to be assigned to the view. If you create a view of type Policy, only policies are available to be assigned to the view.

Master server

Policy

Note: Use the Java View Builder to create any other view types like Enterprise Vault server, Exchange Server etc.

UI access for specific view types

You may not see data in some tabs or subtabs when you have selected specific views. This is because data for those tabs is not applicable for the specific view types. For example, a Client view should display data that is relevant to Client objects only and not show any unrelated data like media or services. In such a scenario, you see the following error message:
Data is not applicable for the view that you have selected. Click UI access for specific view types for details about the applicable view types.

Table 6-3 lists if data in specific tabs or subtabs is applicable when you select a view of a specific view type like Master Server, Policy, or Client. Table 6-3 Tab
Monitor Overview Yes Yes Yes

Tab access for specific view types Subtab Master Server Policy view view Client view

384

Managing OpsCenter views About OpsCenter views

Table 6-3 Tab

Tab access for specific view types (continued) Subtab

Jobs Services Policies Media Devices (all subtabs) Hosts > Master Server Hosts > Media Server Hosts > Client Alerts Audit Trails Cloud Appliance Hardware

Master Server Policy view view

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes No No

Client view
Yes No Yes No No

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

No

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

No Yes No No No

Yes Yes No No No

Manage Alert Policies Storage > Storage Unit Storage > Storage Unit Group Storage > Storage Lifecycle Policy Devices (all subtabs) Hosts Yes Yes Yes No Yes No

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

No

Managing OpsCenter views About OpsCenter views

385

Note: Manage > Restore and Manage > Deployment Analysis tabs are not dependent on any view selection. The content in these tabs is shown for all views.

About access rights for a view

While creating an OpsCenter view, a Security Administrator can specify the access rights for that view. Note: An Administrator can specify the access rights for a view from the Java View Builder. See Creating OpsCenter views on page 388. Table 6-4 lists the default access levels for specific OpsCenter or JVB roles. Table 6-4 JVB Role
admin

Default access levels OpsCenter Role

Security Administrator Administrator

Permitted View
RW RW

ALL MASTER SERVER View

R R

User

Reporter Restore Operator Operator

P P P

P P P

In this table, RW stands for Read and Write permission, R stands for Read permission, and P stands for Needs Permission. The Analyst user role is no longer available. An Operator, Reporter, or Restore Operator cannot create or modify views. They also need permission to access a view. The concept of public or private views that existed earlier has been removed in OpsCenter 7.5. An Operator or Reporter now only has Read access for all prior public views. An Analyst is upgraded to OpsCenter 7.5 as a Reporter. The following table describe the permissions available to a user for a public or private view after he or she upgrades.

386

Managing OpsCenter views About OpsCenter views

Table 6-5 Role

Permissions available after upgrade Public View

Existing After Upgrade RW RW R R

Private View
Existing After Upgrade

Security Administrator Administrator Operator Reporter

RW RW RW RW

RW RW RW RW

RW RW R R

About OpsCenter view levels

A newly created view has only one level. You can add multiple nodes to a view at different levels. You can add alias for each of these view levels. Only a Security Administrator or an Administrator can modify views. See Modifying alias view levels in OpsCenter on page 390. Master server hosts, clients, or policies are always at the lowest levels in a view. Between the top level and the bottom level, you can create multiple intermediate levels to organize view objects into logical groups, creating a hierarchical structure in the view.

About nodes and objects

An OpsCenter view comprises nodes and view objects. A node is a logical entity that you add to create a hierarchical structure of a view. Between the first level (the view name itself) and the last level (actual view object), you can add multiple nodes. Figure 6-2 shows an example of a view comprising multiple nodes and objects.

Managing OpsCenter views About managing OpsCenter views

387

Figure 6-2

View nodes and objects

About managing OpsCenter views

The following topics provide procedures to add, edit, or delete OpsCenter views. See Looking at OpsCenter views and their details on page 388. See Creating OpsCenter views on page 388. See Modifying OpsCenter views on page 389. See Deleting OpsCenter views on page 390. See Modifying alias view levels in OpsCenter on page 390.

Settings > Views > Manage Nodes and Objects options

A description of the Settings > Views > Manage Nodes and Objects options follows in the table. Table 6-6 Option
Objects on Node tab

Settings > Views > Manage Nodes and Objects options Description
The objects that are assigned to the current view or view node are displayed on the Objects on Node tab.

388

Managing OpsCenter views About managing OpsCenter views

Table 6-6 Option

Settings > Views > Manage Nodes and Objects options (continued) Description

Objects not in selected view The Objects not in selected view tab shows all host objects tab that are not a part of the selected view or view node. The available objects list varies depending on the view type. For example: If the view is of type Client, only client hosts are available on the Objects not in selected view tab for selection.

Looking at OpsCenter views and their details

This topic provides the procedure to see OpsCenter views. See About OpsCenter views on page 379. To look at OpsCenter views

In the OpsCenter console, click Settings > Views. A list of views that you are permitted to access is displayed. See Modifying OpsCenter views on page 389. See Creating OpsCenter views on page 388.

To check the details of a view, select the view from the views list. The View Level Alias and General details are displayed in the lower section of the page. See Settings > Views options on page 381.

Creating OpsCenter views

This topic provides the procedure to create a view using OpsCenter. Only a Security Administrator or an Administrator can create views. Symantec recommends that while creating a view, the lowest level of the view should be an object that is created by a data collector like a master server, policy, client etc. For example, if you create a view called Geography, the lowest level can be an object like adrian.vxa.symantec.com or serena.vxa.symantec.com and not any other hypothetical object like Region, Continent etc.. Example:
Geography | - US |- - Colorado

Managing OpsCenter views About managing OpsCenter views

389

|- - - adrenalize.vxindia.veritas.com

In this example, US, and Colorado are hypothetical nodes (which are not associated with any data collector), and the lowest-level of the view is adrenalize.vxindia.veritas.com which is an object created by a data collector. You can create such views. You should not create any view like the following where the lowest level of the view is a hypothetical object like Denver:
Geography | - US |- - Colorado |- - - adrenalize.vxindia.veritas.com |- - - - Denver

To create an OpsCenter view

1 2 3 4 5

Log on to the OpsCenter console as a Security Administrator or an Administrator. In the OpsCenter console, click Settings > Views. Click Add. On the Add View dialog box, specify the view details. Click OK.

Modifying OpsCenter views

This topic provides the procedure to modify view details. Only a Security Administrator or an Administrator can modify views. Note: The ALL MASTER SERVERS view cannot be modified. To modify OpsCenter views

1 2 3 4

Log on to the OpsCenter console as a Security Administrator or an Administrator. In the OpsCenter console, click Settings > Views. From the list of views, select a view that you want to modify. Click Edit.

390

Managing OpsCenter views About managing OpsCenter views

5 6

On the Edit View dialog box, you can modify the view details. Click OK.

Deleting OpsCenter views

This topic provides the procedure to delete views. Only a Security Administrator or an Administrator can modify views. Only Master Server, Client, and Policy view types can be deleted using the OpsCenter GUI. Note: Once you have deleted a view, it cannot be recovered. If you delete a view, all its nodes are deleted and the objects are moved to the unassigned tree.

Note: The ALL MASTER SERVERS view cannot be deleted. To delete OpsCenter views

1 2 3 4

Log on to the OpsCenter console as a Security Administrator or an Administrator. In the OpsCenter console, click Settings > Views. From the list of views, select a view that you want to delete. Click Delete.

Modifying alias view levels in OpsCenter

This topic provides the procedure to modify alias of view levels. Only a Security Administrator or an Administrator can modify views. Only Master Server, Client, and Policy view types can be modified using the OpsCenter GUI. See Adding nodes to a view in OpsCenter on page 391. See About managing nodes and objects in OpsCenter on page 391. To modify alias view levels in OpsCenter

1 2 3

Log on to the OpsCenter console as a Security Administrator or an Administrator. In the OpsCenter console, click Settings > Views. From the list of views, select a view for which you want to modify view level alias.

Managing OpsCenter views About managing nodes and objects in OpsCenter

391

4 5

Click Edit Alias View Levels. On the Alias View Levels dialog box, text boxes for entering aliases for all available view levels appear. For example, if the selected view has only one level, the Alias View Levels dialog box appears as follows:

Rename the available levels. For example, if the selected view has three levels, you can rename the levels as follows: rename Alias Level 1 as Geography, Alias Level 2 as Country, and Alias Level 3 as Region. Click OK.

About managing nodes and objects in OpsCenter

The following topics provide procedures to create, modify, and delete nodes and objects related to a view. Only Master Server, Client, and Policy view types can be managed using the OpsCenter GUI. Note: The ALL MASTER SERVERS view cannot be modified. See Adding nodes to a view in OpsCenter on page 391. See Modifying node details in OpsCenter on page 392. See Deleting nodes in OpsCenter on page 393. See Adding objects to a view node in OpsCenter on page 393. See Deleting objects from a view node in OpsCenter on page 394. See View filters in OpsCenter on page 395.

Adding nodes to a view in OpsCenter

This topic provides the procedure to add a node to a view. Only a Security Administrator or an Administrator can modify views.

392

Managing OpsCenter views Modifying node details in OpsCenter

See About nodes and objects on page 386. To add nodes to a view

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Log on to the OpsCenter console as a Security Administrator or an Administrator. In the OpsCenter console, click Settings > Views. From the list of views, select a view to which you want to add nodes and objects. Click Manage Nodes and Objects. On the view tree, select the view to which you want to add a node. Click Add. On the Add dialog box, enter the node name. Click OK.

Modifying node details in OpsCenter

This topic provides the procedure to modify the information of a view node. Only a Security Administrator or an Administrator can modify views. See Adding nodes to a view in OpsCenter on page 391. To modify node information

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Log on to the OpsCenter console as a Security Administrator or an Administrator. In the OpsCenter console, click Settings > Views. From the list of views, select a view to modify the information of associated nodes. Click Manage Nodes and Objects. On the view tree, expand the view to see the associated nodes. Select the node that you want to modify. Click Edit. On the Edit dialog box, modify the name of the node. Click OK.

Managing OpsCenter views Deleting nodes in OpsCenter

393

Deleting nodes in OpsCenter

This topic provides the procedure to delete the nodes from a view. Only a Security Administrator or an Administrator can modify views. See Adding nodes to a view in OpsCenter on page 391. To delete a node

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Log on to the OpsCenter console as a Security Administrator or an Administrator. In the OpsCenter console, click Settings > Views. From the list of views, select a view from which you want to delete nodes. Click Manage Nodes and Objects. On the view tree, expand the view to see the associated nodes. Select the node that you want to delete. Click Delete. On the confirmation dialog box, click OK.

Adding objects to a view node in OpsCenter

This topic provides the procedure to add objects to a view or a node within a view. Only a Security Administrator or an Administrator can modify views. To add an object to a view node

1 2 3 4 5

Log on to the OpsCenter console as a Security Administrator or an Administrator. In the OpsCenter console, click Settings > Views. From the list of views, select the view to which you want to add objects. Click Manage Nodes and Objects. On the view tree, select the view name or a view node to which you want to add an object.

394

Managing OpsCenter views Deleting objects from a view node in OpsCenter

In the right-hand pane, select the Objects not in selected view tab. The available objects list varies depending on the view type. For example: If the view is of type Client, only client hosts are available on the Objects not in selected view tab for selection. The Objects not in selected view tab shows all host objects that are not a part of the selected view or view node. You can filter the objects that are not in the selected view with the help of default filters. Or you can create new filters and apply them to view the required objects on the tab. See View filters in OpsCenter on page 395.

7 8

Select the check boxes in front of the view objects that you want to add to the selected view or view node. Click Add to Node. The added view objects are removed from the Objects not in selected view tab and appear on the Objects on Node tab.

Deleting objects from a view node in OpsCenter

This topic provides the procedure to delete the objects from a view or a view node. Only a Security Administrator or an Administrator can modify views. To delete an object from a view node

1 2 3 4 5

Log on to the OpsCenter console as a Security Administrator or an Administrator. In the OpsCenter console, click Settings > Views. From the list of views, select the view from which you want to delete objects. Click Manage Nodes and Objects. On the view tree, select the view name or a view node from which you want to delete an object. The objects that are assigned to this view or the view node are displayed on the Objects on Node tab.

6 7 8

Select the check boxes in front of the view objects that you want to delete. Click Delete from Node. On the confirmation dialog box, click OK.

Managing OpsCenter views View filters in OpsCenter

395

View filters in OpsCenter

OpsCenter provides a set of default filters using which you can filter the view objects that you need to add to a view. You can also create your own filters and apply them to view the required list of view objects. The default set of filters varies depending on the view type. Table 6-7 lists the default filters available for various view types. Table 6-7 View type
Client

Default filters Default filters

All Clients, Windows Clients, Solaris Clients, Linux Clients, Other Clients All Servers, Connected Servers, Partially Connected Servers, Not Connected Servers, Windows Servers, Solaris Servers, Linux Servers, Other Servers All Policies, Active Policies, Inactive Policies, Windows Policies, Catalog Policies, Standard Policies, Other Policies

Master Server

Policy

See the following topics for information about creating, modifying, and deleting view object filters.

Creating a view object filter in OpsCenter

This topic provides the procedure to create user-defined view object filters. See View filters in OpsCenter on page 395. To create a view object filter

1 2 3 4 5

Log on to the OpsCenter console as a Security Administrator or an Administrator. In the OpsCenter console, click Settings > Views. From the list of views, select the view to which you want to assign objects. Click Manage Nodes and Objects. On the view tree, select the view name or the view node to which you want to assign view objects.

396

Managing OpsCenter views View filters in OpsCenter

In the right pane, select the Unassigned Objects tab. The list of objects that is displayed varies depending on the view type. For example: If the view is of type Client, only client hosts are available on the Unassigned Objects tab for selection.

7 8

Click the Create Filter icon. In the Add Filter dialog box, specify the filter details. The following figure shows an example of creating a filter.

Click OK. This user-defined filter is now added in the Filter drop-down list on the Unassigned Objects tab, which you can modify or delete. See Modifying view object filters in OpsCenter on page 396. See Deleting view object filters in OpsCenter on page 397.

Modifying view object filters in OpsCenter

You can modify definition of user-defined view object filters. You cannot modify the default filters. Only a Security Administrator or an Administrator can modify view object filters. See Creating a view object filter in OpsCenter on page 395. To modify view object filters

1 2 3 4 5

Log on to the OpsCenter console as a Security Administrator or an Administrator. In the OpsCenter console, click Settings > Views. From the list of views, select the view to which you want to assign objects. Click Manage Nodes and Objects. On the view tree, select the view name or a view node to which you want to assign view objects.

Managing OpsCenter views View filters in OpsCenter

397

In the right pane, select the Unassigned Objects tab. The list of objects that is displayed varies depending on the view type. For example: If the view is of type Client, only client hosts are available on the Unassigned Objects tab for selection.

7 8

From the Filter drop-down list, select the user-defined filter that you want to modify. Select the Edit Filter icon. If you have selected a default filter, the Edit Filter icon is disabled.

On the dialog box, modify name or definition of the filter.

10 Click OK.

Deleting view object filters in OpsCenter

You can delete user-defined view object filters. You cannot delete the default filters. Only a Security Administrator or an Administrator can delete user-defined view object filters. See Creating a view object filter in OpsCenter on page 395. To delete view object filters

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Log on to the OpsCenter console as a Security Administrator or an Administrator. In the OpsCenter console, click Settings > Views. From the list of views, select the view to which you want to assign objects. Click Manage Nodes and Objects. On the view tree, select the view name or a view node to which you want to assign view objects. In the right pane, select the Unassigned Objects tab. The list of objects that is displayed varies depending on the view type. From the Filter drop-down list, select the user-defined filter that you want to delete. If you have selected a default filter, the Delete Filter icon is disabled.

398

Managing OpsCenter views View filters in OpsCenter

Chapter

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter

This chapter includes the following topics:

About the Monitor views Controlling the scope of Monitor views About monitoring NetBackup using the Overview tab About monitoring NetBackup jobs Monitor > Services view About using the List View to monitor NetBackup media Viewing the details for NetBackup media Viewing the details for a master server associated with the media Filtering on NetBackup media type Controlling media Monitor > Media Summary View options Hierarchical View by Volume Pool for monitoring media Viewing the details for volume pool Viewing the details for media Controlling media Hierarchical View by Volume Group for monitoring media

400

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter

Viewing the details for a volume group Viewing the details for media Controlling media in OpsCenter Monitoring NetBackup devices Monitor > Devices > Drives List View options About using the List View for monitoring drives Viewing the details for a single drive Viewing the details for a master server associated with a drive Filtering on NetBackup drive category Controlling drives Monitor > Devices > Drives Summary View Viewing the Drive Summary by Status Monitor > Devices > Disk Pools options Viewing the details for a single disk pool About monitoring NetBackup hosts Monitor > Hosts > Master Servers view Filtering by NetBackup master server type and status Monitor > Hosts > Media Servers view Viewing the details of a master server that is associated with a media server Monitor > Hosts > Clients view Viewing the details for a single master server About monitoring NetBackup alerts Monitor > Alerts List View About using the List View to monitor NetBackup alerts Viewing the details for a single alert Viewing the details of the alert policy associated with an alert Filtering by alert type

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About the Monitor views

401

Responding to alerts Summary View for monitoring NetBackup alerts Viewing alerts by severity About monitoring Audit Trails Monitor > Appliance Hardware > Master Server Monitor > Appliance Hardware > Media Server Appliance hardware details Monitor > Cloud options

About the Monitor views

From the Monitor tab and associated subtabs, you can view detailed information about your NetBackup environment including jobs, services, policies, media, devices, hosts, and alerts. Note that OpsCenter or OpsCenter Analytics can only monitor and manage NetBackup or NetBackup appliances. It cannot monitor or manage other products like Symantec NetBackup PureDisk, Symantec Enterprise Vault etc.

Controlling the scope of Monitor views

The content that is shown in the Monitor views is based on your current View pane selection. You can select the following default option from the View pane:
ALL MASTER SERVERS Select ALL MASTER SERVERS to view information for all the NetBackup servers in your environment.

In addition to using the default view i.e. ALL MASTER SERVERS, you can also create your own views from Settings > Views or by using Java View Builder. For example, you can create a view like Geography to view details about master servers in a particular region like Europe. More information about how to create views by using the Settings > Views control is available. See About OpsCenter views on page 379.

402

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Controlling the scope of Monitor views

See the online Symantec OpsCenter Java View Builder Help to know how you can create views using Java View Builder. Use the following procedure to view details of all master servers or specific master servers. To view details of all master servers

In the OpsCenter console, select ALL MASTER SERVERS from the drop-down list in the View pane.

To view details of specific master servers

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, select ALL MASTER SERVERS from the drop-down list in the View pane. Deselect the checkbox next to ALL MASTER SERVERS and select the specific master servers from the list of master servers. Ensure that other master servers are unchecked. Click Apply Selection.

See About time frame selection on page 402.

About time frame selection

You can also view data for the last 24, 48, or 72 hours for some of the Monitor views. You can also configure an absolute or relative timeframe for specific Monitor views. Click Last 24 Hours, Last 48 Hours, or Last 72 Hours to view data for the last 24, 48, or 72 hours respectively. These options are located on the top-right corner of specific Monitor views. Note that by default, data for the last 24 hours is shown in these views. You can control time frame selection for the following Monitor views:

Monitor > Overview (Job Summary by State, Job Summary by Exit Status, Top 7 Policies by Failed Jobs, Top 7 Job Error Log Summary, and Alert Summary by Severity sections) Note: You cannot control timeframes for Media Summary by Status, Drive Summary by Status, Services Summary, and Master Server Summary sections. These sections show all the data from the OpsCenter database. Monitor > Jobs Monitor > Alerts

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About monitoring NetBackup using the Overview tab

403

Monitor > Policies (Summary View)

In addition, you can also customize the time frame selection by clicking Customize and specifying an absolute time frame or relative time frame. Using the Customize option, you can view data for any time frame. Note that the Customize option is located on the top-right corner of specific Monitor views. You can configure an absolute or relative timeframe for the following Monitor views:

Monitor > Jobs (List View, Summary View, and Hierarchical View) Monitor > Alerts (List View and Summary View)

See Controlling the scope of Monitor views on page 401.

About monitoring NetBackup using the Overview tab

This view is displayed when you select Monitor > Overview (default view). This view gives an overview of your NetBackup environment. This view contains the different sections which display specific information about your NetBackup environment. From this view, you can use links to drill down and access detailed information about many aspects of your NetBackup environment. Pie charts for most monitoring categories appear. The pie segments are also links to more details for the monitoring category. The following sections describe the Overview subtab in detail:

See Viewing the Job Summary by State on page 404. See Viewing the Media Summary by Status on page 404. See About Top 7 Job Error Log Summary on page 405. See Viewing the Services Summary on page 405. See Viewing the Master Server Summary on page 406. See Viewing the Job Summary by Exit Status on page 407. See Viewing the Drive Summary by Status on page 408. See Top 7 Policies by Failed Jobs on page 409. See Viewing the Alert Summary by Severity on page 409.

404

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About monitoring NetBackup using the Overview tab

Viewing the Job Summary by State

The Job Summary by State section shows an overall distribution of jobs by job state for the current selection in the View pane and time frame selection. This information is shown in a pie chart as well as a table. Data for the last 24 hours is shown by default. You can also view data for the last 48 hours or 72 hours. See Controlling the scope of Monitor views on page 401. A pie chart with different colors represents the job distribution. Each color of the pie chart represents how jobs are distributed in your environment as per the job state in the selected time frame. You can also view the color code summary in this section to know the colors that represent different job states. Pointing on the pie chart gives the number and percentage of jobs in a particular job state in your NetBackup environment. For example, pointing on the yellow color in the pie chart shows that in the last 24 hours, 22 jobs, or 42% jobs in your environment are in a queued state. You can drill down from this section to see details for failed, incomplete, queued, active jobs etc. To view the Job Summary by job state

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, select Monitor > Overview. In the Job Summary by State section, do either of the following:

Click the number of jobs (link) for a particular job state from the table. For example, click the number that is shown for Done jobs. Or Click a colored section of the pie chart that corresponds to a particular job state. For example, click the yellow section of the pie chart to view details for Queued jobs.

Viewing the Media Summary by Status

The Media Summary by Status section shows an overall distribution of media by media status for the current selection in the View pane. This information is shown in a pie chart as well as a table. Note: The timeframe selection does not affect this section. All the data from the OpsCenter database is displayed in this section irrespective of the timeframe that you select. A pie chart with different colors represents media distribution in this section. Each color of the pie chart represents how media are distributed in your

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About monitoring NetBackup using the Overview tab

405

environment as per the media status. You can also view the color code summary in this section to know the colors that represent different media status. Moving your pointer over the pie chart triggers the appearance of the number and percentage of media with a particular media status in your NetBackup environment. For example, pointing on the red color in the pie chart shows that four media or 2% media in your environment are frozen. You can drill down from this section to see details for media with different status like details for frozen and active media. To view media by media status

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, select Monitor > Overview. In the Media Summary by Status section, do either of the following:

Click the number of media (link) for a particular media status from the table. For example, click the number for Frozen media. Or Click a colored section of the pie chart that corresponds to a particular media status. For example, click the red section of the pie chart to view details for Frozen media.

About Top 7 Job Error Log Summary

The Top 7 Job Error Log Summary section lists seven exit status codes responsible for maximum failed jobs in your environment. The content that is shown in this section is based on the current View pane selection. Data for the last 24 hours is shown by default. You can also view data for the last 48 hours or 72 hours. See Controlling the scope of Monitor views on page 401. The table that appears in the section lists the top seven exit status codes responsible for maximum job failure. The table also lists the number of failed jobs for each exit status in the selected time frame. Note that the failed jobs that are shown in the Failed Job Count column are arranged in descending order in the table. By viewing this section, you can quickly analyze the reasons behind maximum job failures in your environment.

Viewing the Services Summary

The Services Summary section provides a high-level view that shows the total number of running and stopped NetBackup services for the current View pane selection.

406

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About monitoring NetBackup using the Overview tab

The total number of running and stopped NetBackup services are shown in a table. You can drill down from the links in this table to see details for running or stopped services. Note: The timeframe selection does not affect this section. All the data from the OpsCenter database is displayed in this section irrespective of the timeframe that you select. To view running or stopped services

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, select Monitor > Overview. In the Service Summary section, click the number that is shown in the Service Count column of the table. For example, click the number that is shown for Running services to view details for the services that are running.

Viewing the Master Server Summary

The Master Server Summary section provides the specific information about the master servers based on the current View pane selection. Note: The timeframe selection does not affect this section. All the data from the OpsCenter database is displayed in this section irrespective of the timeframe that you select. The following information is shown in the Master Server Summary section:

Total number of master servers in your environment Number of the master servers that appear as Connected in the OpsCenter console Number of the master servers that appear as Not Connected in the OpsCenter console Clients that do not have a backup policy configured for them

You can drill down from this section to see details for all the master servers in your environment or the master servers that appear as connected or not connected. You can also see details of the clients that do not have a backup policy configured for them.

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About monitoring NetBackup using the Overview tab

407

To view all master servers

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, select Monitor > Overview. In the Master Server Summary section, click the number that is shown in the Total column.

To view the master servers that are connected

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, select Monitor > Overview. In the Master Server Summary section, click the number that is shown in the Connected column.

To view details of the master servers that are not connected

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, select Monitor > Overview. In the Master Server Summary section, click the number that is shown in the Not Connected column.

To view details of the clients that are at risk

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, select Monitor > Overview. In the Master Server Summary section, click the number that is shown in the Clients at Risk column.

Viewing the Job Summary by Exit Status

The Job Summary by Exit Status section shows an overall distribution of jobs by exit status based on the current View pane and time frame selection. This information is shown in a pie chart as well as a table. Data for the last 24 hours is shown by default. You can also view data for the last 48 hours or 72 hours. See Controlling the scope of Monitor views on page 401. A pie chart with different colors represents the job distribution by exit status in the selected time frame. Each color of the pie chart represents how jobs are distributed in your environment as per the exit status. You can also view the color code summary in this section to know the colors that represent different exit status. Putting your pointer over the pie chart shows the total number and percentage of successful, partially successful, and failed jobs in your NetBackup environment. For example, pointing to the red color in the pie chart shows that in the last 24 hours, 72 jobs, or 42% jobs in your environment failed. This information is also listed in a tabular format. In addition, a table also shows the amount of data that has been backed up for the selected view and time frame. You can drill down from this section to see details for failed, successful, or partially successful jobs.

408

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About monitoring NetBackup using the Overview tab

To view jobs by exit status

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, select Monitor > Overview. In the Job Summary by Exit Status section, do either of the following:

Click the number of jobs (link) corresponding to a particular exit status from the table. Or Click a colored section of the pie chart that corresponds to a particular exit status. For example, click the red section of the pie chart to view details for failed jobs.

Viewing the Drive Summary by Status

The Drive Summary by Status section shows an overall distribution of drives by drive status for the current View pane selection. This information is shown in a pie chart as well as a table. Note: For 7.0.1 and later master servers, the Drive Summary by Status section does not show the drives that are disabled or unreachable.

Note: The timeframe selection does not affect this section. All the data from the OpsCenter database is displayed in this section irrespective of the timeframe that you select. A pie chart with different colors represents the distribution of drives by drive status in the selected time frame. Each color of the pie chart represents how drives are distributed in your environment as per the drive status. You can also view the color code summary in this section to know the colors that represent different exit status. Putting your pointer over the pie chart shows the number and percentage of drives with up or down status in your NetBackup environment. For example, pointing to the green color in the pie chart shows that 5 drives or 100% drives in your environment are up. You can drill down from this section to see details of all drives including up, down, or mixed drives. To view drives by drive status

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, select Monitor > Overview. In the Drive Summary by Status section, do either of the following:

Click the number of drives (link) for a particular drive status from the table. For example, click the number for Up drives

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About monitoring NetBackup using the Overview tab

409

Or

Click a colored section of the pie chart that corresponds to a particular drive status. For example, click the green section of the pie chart to view details for the drives that are up.

Top 7 Policies by Failed Jobs

For information about the Top 7 Policies by Failed Jobs section, see the following topic. See About Top 7 Policies by Failed Jobs on page 439.

Viewing the Alert Summary by Severity

The Alert Summary by Severity section shows an overall distribution of alerts by severity for the current View pane and time frame selection. This information is shown in a pie chart as well as a table. Data for the last 24 hours is shown by default. You can also view data for the last 48 hours or 72 hours. See Controlling the scope of Monitor views on page 401. A pie chart with different colors represents the alert distribution by severity in this section. Each color of the pie chart represents how alerts are distributed in your environment as per the alert severity. You can also view the color code summary in this section to know the colors that represent different severity. Moving your pointer over the pie chart gives the number and percentage of alerts with a particular severity in your NetBackup environment. For example, pointing to the green color in the pie chart shows that in the last 24 hours, 200 alerts, or 17% alerts in your environment are critical. You can drill down from this section to see details for alert categories. To view alerts by severity

In the OpsCenter console, select Monitor > Overview. In the OpsCenter console, select Home.

In the Alert Summary by Severity section, do either of the following:

Click the number of alerts (link) for a particular alert severity from the table. For example, click the number that is shown for Critical alerts. Or Click a colored section of the pie chart that corresponds to a particular alert severity. For example, click the red section of the pie chart to view details for Critical alerts.

410

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About monitoring NetBackup jobs

About monitoring NetBackup jobs

The Monitor > Jobs view provides details of NetBackup jobs. You can use the following views to see NetBackup job information:
List View This view is shown by default when you select Monitor > Jobs. This view displays detailed information about jobs based on the current View pane and time frame selection.

Note: You can only view jobs data for the

last 30 days from the List View. See Monitor > Jobs List View options on page 410. Summary View The Summary View contains the different sections which show the NetBackup job distribution by exit status, job state, and job type based on the current View pane and time frame selection. This information is shown in pie charts and tables. See About using the Summary View for monitoring jobs on page 419. Hierarchical View The Hierarchical View shows all parent-child jobs in a hierarchical fashion based on the current View pane and time frame selection.

Note: You can only view jobs data for the

last 30 days from the Hierarchical View. See About using the Hierarchical View for monitoring jobs on page 424.

Note: You can select these views from the drop-down list. The drop-down list is located at the top-right corner of the page.

Monitor > Jobs List View options

This view is displayed when you select Monitor > Jobs. The List View is shown by default. This view displays detailed information for jobs for the current View Pane and time frame selection. Data for the last 24 hours is shown by default. You can also view data for the last 48 hours or 72 hours.

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About monitoring NetBackup jobs

411

See Controlling the scope of Monitor views on page 401. The table that appears in this view shows the following columns by default: Table 7-1 Option
Job ID

Monitor > Jobs List View options Description

This column shows the unique ID associated with the job (link). This column shows the name of the master server (link) associated with the job. You can click the link to view details for the master server. This column lists the job type like whether the job is a DB Backup or an Image Cleanup job. This column lists the current NetBackup job state like whether the job is Queued, Waiting for Retry, Done etc. Exit status of the job. The link provides status description and details on troubleshooting in case it failed. This column lists the name of the policy that is associated with the job. This column lists the name of the client on which the job is run. This column lists the date, time, and year when the job started. This column lists the time that is taken by the job. The Elapsed Time is the difference between End Time and Start Time values. For a running job, Elapsed Time is the difference between the current time and Start time.

Master Server

Type

State

Status

Policy

Client

Start Time

Elapsed Time

Note: The contents of the Elapsed Time column cannot be

sorted in ascending or descending order (when you click the column name.) End Time This column lists the date, time, and year when the job ended. This column lists the size of the job. This column lists the number of files that have been backed up by this job.

Job Size Files

412

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About monitoring NetBackup jobs

Table 7-1 Option

% Complete

Monitor > Jobs List View options (continued) Description

This column lists the percentage of job that has been completed.

Not all columns are displayed in the table by default. More columns can be added to your view by clicking the Table Settings icon. The Table Settings icon is located on the top-right corner of the table. The following columns are not displayed in the table by default:.

Schedule Source Media Server Destination Media Server Destination Storage Unit Attempt Operation Data Reduction Savings Job Size PID Owner Parent KB per sec Session ID Data Movement Backup Type Schedule Type Policy Type Compression Current File Robot Vault Media to Eject Copy

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About monitoring NetBackup jobs

413

Profile Active Start Reconciliation Status Reconciliation Reason Data Reduction Savings (%) Priority State Details

See the online NetBackup Administration Console Help for a detailed description of these fields. More information about how to customize tables and view specific columns is available. See About using tables on page 83. All the details that are associated with a job can be viewed from the Details pane. The Details pane is located at the bottom of the Monitor > Jobs view. The Details pane has the following tabs: Table 7-2 Tab
General

Monitor > Jobs Details pane tabs Description

The General tab of the Details pane displays all information available for the job. It also includes the contents of all the available columns that can be viewed from the table. The Attempts tab shows details of the attempts that have been made to complete a job. The File List tab shows the files that have been backed up by the job and also their location.

Attempts

File List

About monitoring jobs using the List View

The following topics provide more information about monitoring jobs using the List View.

414

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About monitoring NetBackup jobs

Viewing the details for a single NetBackup job

All the details that are associated with a job can be viewed from the Details pane. The Details pane is located at the bottom of the Monitor > Jobs view. The Details pane has the following tabs:
General The General tab of the Details pane displays all information available for the job. It also includes the contents of all the available columns that can be viewed from the table. The Attempts tab shows details of the attempts that have been made to complete a job. The File List tab shows the files that have been backed up by the job and also their location.

Attempts

File List

To view details for a single NetBackup job

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, select Monitor > Jobs. The job details can be viewed from either List View or Hierarchical View. Select List View or Hierarchical View from the drop-down list. The drop-down list is located at the top-right corner of the view. Click the ID (link) for a job from the Job ID column of the table. View the job details in the Details pane.

3 4

Viewing the details for a master server associated with a job

Use the following procedure to view the details for a master server that is associated with a job. To view details for the master server that is associated with a job

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, select Monitor > Jobs. These details can be viewed from either List View or Hierarchical View. Select List View or Hierarchical View from the drop-down list. The drop-down list is located at the top-right corner of the view. Click the server name (link) associated with the job in the Master Server column of the table. The details of the master server are shown on a separate page. You can also enable or disable data collection for the master server from this page.

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About monitoring NetBackup jobs

415

Viewing policy information for a job

Use the following procedure to view the details for the policy that is associated with a job. To view policy information for a job

1 2 3 4

In the OpsCenter console, select Monitor > Jobs. Select List View or Hierarchical View from the drop-down list. The drop-down list is located at the top-right corner of the view. Click the policy name (link) for the job in the Policy column of the table. A separate page appears that shows policy information on four tabs. See Monitor > Policies page on page 435.

Filtering on NetBackup job type and state

You can filter by using any of the built-in job filters. These filters are available from the drop-down list which is present on top of the table. Many job filters exist. Some of the built-in job filters are the following:
All Jobs (default filter) Active Jobs Queued Jobs Done Jobs Suspended Jobs Select this filter to view details of all the jobs. Select this filter to view only active jobs Select this filter to view only queued jobs. Select this filter to view only Done jobs. Select this filter to view the jobs that have been suspended. Select this filter to view the jobs that are waiting for retry. Select this filter to view the jobs that are incomplete. Select this filter to view the jobs that have been canceled. Select this filter to view the jobs that are undefined. Select this filter to view the jobs that are successful.

Waiting for Retry Jobs

Incomplete Jobs

Canceled Jobs

Undefined Jobs

Successful Jobs

416

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About monitoring NetBackup jobs

Partially Successful Jobs

Select this filter to view the jobs that are partially successful. Select this filter to view the jobs that failed. Select this filter to filter indexing related jobs. Select this filter to filter the index cleanup jobs.

Failed Jobs Index for Search

Index Cleanup for Search

In addition to using the built-in filters, you can also create your own custom filters. See Creating, applying, editing, and removing custom view filters on page 87. To filter details by job state

1 2 3

Select Monitor > Jobs. Select List View or Hierarchical View from the drop-down list. The drop-down list is located at the top-right corner of the view. Select a filter from the drop-down list. Note that the drop-down list is located on top of the table.

Controlling NetBackup jobs

Use the following procedure to cancel, suspend, resume, or restart a job. Before you perform these tasks, manually refresh your Web browser to obtain an updated view for all jobs. Note: These tasks are not visible if you log on with an Analyst or a Reporter role. To control a job

1 2 3 4

In the OpsCenter console, select Monitor > Jobs. Select List View or Hierarchical View from the drop-down list. The drop-down list is located at the top-right corner of the view. Select a job from the table. You may select one or more jobs. Click Cancel, Restart, Resume, Suspend. These options are located on top of the table. The OpsCenter console may take some time to show the updated status once you perform the tasks.

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About monitoring NetBackup jobs

417

Reconciling NetBackup jobs

You can use the Reconcile option to prevent the jobs that failed due to reasons like user terminating a job, host cannot be reached etc. from being billed. By using the Reconcile option and selecting a reason, you can let your service provider know not to bill you for these jobs as these jobs failed due to specific issues at your end. Note: The Reconcile option is disabled in the unlicensed version (Symantec OpsCenter). Before you perform this task, manually refresh your Web browser to obtain an updated view for all jobs To reconcile NetBackup jobs

1 2 3 4 5

In the OpsCenter console, select Monitor > Jobs. Select List View or Hierarchical View from the drop-down list. The drop-down list is located at the top-right corner of the view. Select a job from the table. You can select one or more jobs. From the More drop-down list, select Reconcile. In the Reconcile Jobs dialog box, select a reason for reconciling the job from the drop-down list. Note that you can select Un-Reconcile from the drop-down list to undo a reconciliation.

Click OK.

Changing the job priority

You can change the priority that is associated with a job. Review the following points before changing the job priority:

Priority can be changed only for the jobs that are in Active or Queued state. Priority can be changed only for jobs from the master servers that are running NetBackup 6.5.2 or higher versions.

To change the job priority

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, select Monitor > Jobs. Select List View or Hierarchical View from the drop-down list. The drop-down list is located at the top-right corner of the view.

418

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About monitoring NetBackup jobs

3 4 5 6 7

Select an active job or a queued job from the table. From the More drop-down list, select Change Job Priority. In the Change Priority dialog box, set the job priority to a particular value. You can also increment or decrement the job priority. Click OK. Click Finish. The OpsCenter console may take some time to show the updated status once you perform this task.

Change Job Priority dialog box options

A description of the Change Job Priority dialog box options follows in the table. Table 7-3 Option
Set the job priority to Increment the job priority by Decrement the job priority by

Change Job Priority dialog box options Description

Enter a value to set the job priority. Select a value from the drop down list to increment the job priority. Select a value from the drop down list to decrement the job priority.

See Changing the job priority on page 417.

Exporting NetBackup job logs

You can export the log files that are associated with a job. You can view or save the exported log files in an Excel format. Note: The Export Job Logs option is not visible if you log on with an Analyst or a Reporter role.

Note: Logs are not available for all job types. Before exporting a log file, ensure that the NetBackup master server is Connected and the selected job logs are enabled.

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About monitoring NetBackup jobs

419

To export the NetBackup log files for a job

1 2 3

In the OpsCenter console, select Monitor > Jobs. Select List View or Hierarchical View from the drop-down list. The drop-down list is located at the top-right corner of the view. Select a job from the table. You can export only one job log at a time.

4 5

From the More drop-down list, select Export Job Logs. Click Open or Save from the dialog box to view or save the log file in an Excel format.

About using the Summary View for monitoring jobs

This view is displayed when you select Monitor > Jobs and then select Summary View from the drop-down list. The drop-down list is located at the top-right corner of the page. The content that is shown in the Summary View is based on the current View Pane and time frame selection. Data for the last 24 hours is shown by default. You can also view data for the last 48 hours or 72 hours. See Controlling the scope of Monitor views on page 401. The Summary View contains the different sections which display specific information about NetBackup jobs. These sections show NetBackup job information in a table as well as a pie chart. The table and the pie charts include links to filtered detail views. You can use these links to drill down and access detailed information about NetBackup jobs. Note: If you uncheck the Allow Multiple Selection In View Pane option, a Group Component Summary table is displayed when you access the Summary View for Monitor > Jobs. The Group Component Summary table displays information about immediate NetBackup constituents of the view or node (group) that you selected in the View pane. You can uncheck the Allow Multiple Selection in View Pane option from Settings > User Preferences > General. The following sections describe this view in detail:

See Viewing the Job Summary by Exit Status on page 420. See Viewing the Job Summary by State on page 420. See Viewing the Job Summary by Type on page 421. See About the Group Component Summary table on page 422.

420

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About monitoring NetBackup jobs

Viewing the Job Summary by Exit Status

The Job Summary by Exit Status section shows an overall distribution of jobs by exit status. The data that is shown in this view is based on the current View pane and time frame selection. This information is shown in a pie chart as well as a table. Data for the last 24 hours is shown by default. You can also view data for the last 48 hours or 72 hours. See Controlling the scope of Monitor views on page 401. A pie chart with different colors represents the job distribution by exit status in this section. Each color of the pie chart represents how jobs are distributed in your environment as per the exit status. You can also view the color code summary in this section to know the colors that represent different exit status. Moving your pointer over the pie chart gives the number and percentage of jobs with a particular exit status in your NetBackup environment. For example, pointing your cursor to the red color in the pie chart shows that in the last 24 hours, 72 jobs, or 42% jobs in your environment failed. You can drill down from this section to see details for successful, partially successful, and failed jobs. To view jobs by exit status

1 2 3

In the OpsCenter console, select Monitor > Jobs. Select Summary View from the drop-down list. Note that the drop-down list is located on the top-right corner of the page. In the Job Summary by Exit Status section, do either of the following:

Click the number of jobs (link) corresponding to a particular exit status from the table. Or Click a colored section of the pie chart that corresponds to a particular exit status. For example, click the red section of the pie chart to view details for failed jobs.

Viewing the Job Summary by State

The Job Summary by State section shows an overall distribution of jobs by the NetBackup job state based on the current View pane and time frame selection. This information is shown in a pie chart as well as a table. Data for the last 24 hours is shown by default. You can also view data for the last 48 hours or 72 hours. See Controlling the scope of Monitor views on page 401.

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About monitoring NetBackup jobs

421

A pie chart with different colors represents the job distribution by job state. Each color of the pie chart represents how jobs are distributed in your environment as per the job state. You can also view the color code summary in this section to know the colors that represent different job states. Moving your cursor over the pie chart gives the number and percentage of jobs in a particular job state in your NetBackup environment. For example, pointing to the yellow color in the pie chart shows that in the last 24 hours, 22 jobs, or 42% jobs in your environment are in a queued state. You can drill down from this section to see details for the jobs that failed, the jobs that are waiting for retry, queued or active jobs, and so on. To view jobs by job state

1 2 3

In the OpsCenter console, select Monitor > Jobs. Select Summary View from the drop-down list. Note that the drop-down list is located on the top-right corner of the page. In the Job Summary by State section, do either of the following:

Click the number of jobs (link) in a particular job state from the table. For example, click the number that is shown for Done jobs. Or Click a colored section of the pie chart that corresponds to a particular job state. For example, click the yellow section of the pie chart to view details for Queued jobs.

Viewing the Job Summary by Type

The Job Summary by Type section shows an overall distribution of jobs by the job type based on the current View pane and time frame selection. This information is shown in a pie chart as well as a table. Data for the last 24 hours is shown by default. You can also view data for the last 48 hours or 72 hours. See Controlling the scope of Monitor views on page 401. A pie chart with different colors represents the job distribution by job type in this section. Each color of the pie chart represents how jobs are distributed in your environment as per the job type. You can also view the color code summary in this section to know the colors that represent different job types. Moving your cursor over the pie chart gives the number and percentage of jobs of a particular job type in your NetBackup environment. For example, pointing to the red color in the pie chart shows that in the last 24 hours, 22 jobs, or 42% jobs in your environment are DBBackup jobs. You can drill down from this section to see details for different job types like DBBackup, Image Cleanup etc.

422

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About monitoring NetBackup jobs

To view jobs by job type

1 2 3

In the OpsCenter console, select Monitor > Jobs. Select Summary View from the drop-down list. Note that the drop-down list is located on the top-right corner of the page. In the Job Summary by Type section, do either of the following:

Click the number of jobs (link) corresponding to a particular job type from the table. For example, click the number that is shown for DBBackup jobs. Or Click a colored section of the pie chart that corresponds to a particular job type. For example, click the red section of the pie chart to view details for DBBackup jobs.

About the Group Component Summary table

When you uncheck the Allow Multiple Selection In View Pane option under Settings > User Preferences > General view in the OpsCenter console, you can view the Group Component Summary table in the Summary View for Monitor > Jobs. The Group Component Summary table is displayed at the bottom of the Summary View for Monitor > Jobs. The Group Component Summary table was also displayed in NOM earlier. You must select a group (view or node) from the View pane to see data in the Group Component Summary table. You do not see any data in the Group Component Summary table if you select a specific view object (master server) in the View pane. More details about nodes and view objects is available. See About nodes and objects on page 386. The Group Component Summary table displays job summary information about the immediate NetBackup constituents of the selected view or node (group) in the View pane. For example if you select the ALL MASTER SERVERS view, the Group Component Summary table displays job summary for each master server. If you select a view that contains multiple nodes, a job summary of the nodes (and not the view objects for each node) is displayed. Note: OpsCenter or OpsCenter Analytics monitors only NetBackup. Hence any other servers (like BE, PD, or TSM servers) do not appear in the Group Component Summary table.

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About monitoring NetBackup jobs

423

The information that is displayed in the Group Component Summary table is based on the current View pane and time frame selection. Data for the last 24 hours is shown by default. You can also view data for the last 48 hours or 72 hours. See Controlling the scope of Monitor views on page 401. Table 7-4 explains the information that is displayed in the Group Component Summary table. Table 7-4 Column
Name Total

Columns and descriptions in the Group Component Summary table Description

Name of the node or view object. Total number of jobs (link) for the specific node or view object in the selected time frame. Click the link to view detailed information about all the jobs. Number of successful jobs (link) for the specific node or view object in the selected time frame. Click the link to view detailed information about successful jobs. Number of partially successful jobs (link) for the specific node or view object in the selected time frame. Click the link to view detailed information about the partially successful jobs. Number of failed jobs (link) for the specific node or view object in the selected time frame. Click the link to view detailed information about the failed jobs. Data that is backed up for the specific node or view object in the selected time frame. Number of active jobs (link) for the specific node or view object in the selected time frame. Click the link to view detailed information about the active jobs. Number of queued jobs (link) for the specific node or view object in the selected time frame. Click the link to view detailed information about the queued jobs.

Successful

Partially Successful

Failed

Data Backup up

Active

Queued

424

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About monitoring NetBackup jobs

Table 7-4

Columns and descriptions in the Group Component Summary table (continued) Description
Number of suspended jobs (link) for the specific node or view object in the selected time frame. Click the link to view detailed information about the suspended jobs. Number of incomplete jobs (link) for the specific node or view object in the selected time frame. Click the link to view detailed information about the incomplete jobs. Number of undefined jobs (link) for the specific node or view object in the selected time frame. Click the link to view detailed information about the undefined jobs. Number of the jobs that are waiting for retry (link) for the specific node or view object in the selected time frame. Click the link to view detailed information about the jobs that are waiting for retry.

Column
Suspended

Incomplete

Undefined

Waiting for Retry

About using the Hierarchical View for monitoring jobs

This view is displayed when you select Monitor > Jobs and then select Hierarchical View from the drop-down list. The data that is shown in this view is based on the current View pane and time frame selection. Data for the last 24 hours is shown by default. You can also view data for the last 48 hours or 72 hours. Note: You can only view jobs data for the last 30 days from the Hierarchical View. See Controlling the scope of Monitor views on page 401. In the Hierarchical View, all related jobs can be grouped and you can see all parent-child jobs in a hierarchical fashion. You can view details of only the top level, parent job in this view with the ability to expand and drill into the details of child jobs if there are failures. The Hierarchical View shows details of all jobs and also highlights the parent-child relationship between jobs wherever applicable. All parent jobs have a +sign before the job ID. You can click the + sign to see all child jobs. A child job is indented to the right-hand side in the Job ID column. If some of the child jobs are parent jobs,

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About monitoring NetBackup jobs

425

then + sign also appears before the job ID of the child job. However, if a job does not have a relationship with any other job (it is neither a parent nor a child job), it is represented only by its job ID in the Job ID column. Neither is there a + sign before the job ID of such a job nor this job is indented to the right-hand side. Note the following things about the related jobs that are shown in the Hierarchical View:

The filters are applied only to parent jobs. The filters are not applied to child jobs. For example, if you apply the Partially Successful Jobs filter, child jobs are not considered at all. Only parent jobs or unrelated jobs (jobs that are not related to any other job) with partially successful status are considered. The sorting feature in the Hierarchical View applies to both parent jobs and child jobs. When you expand a parent job, the current selected sort order is applied to child jobs. All tasks that apply to the parent job are also applicable to its child jobs.

The following tasks can be performed from the Heirarchical View: Table 7-5 Task
View the details for a single master server

Tasks from the Heirarchical View Reference topic

See Viewing the details for a single NetBackup job on page 414. See Viewing the details for a master server associated with a job on page 414. See Viewing policy information for a job on page 415. See Filtering on NetBackup job type and state on page 415. See Controlling NetBackup jobs on page 416. See Reconciling NetBackup jobs on page 417. See Changing the job priority on page 417. See Exporting NetBackup job logs on page 418.

View the details for a master server that is associated with a job View policy information for a job

Filter on NetBackup job state

Control NetBackup jobs

Reconcile NetBackup jobs

Change job priority Export job logs

426

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About monitoring NetBackup jobs

Viewing the details for a single NetBackup job

All the details that are associated with a job can be viewed from the Details pane. The Details pane is located at the bottom of the Monitor > Jobs view. The Details pane has the following tabs:
General The General tab of the Details pane displays all information available for the job. It also includes the contents of all the available columns that can be viewed from the table. The Attempts tab shows details of the attempts that have been made to complete a job. The File List tab shows the files that have been backed up by the job and also their location.

Attempts

File List

To view details for a single NetBackup job

1 2 3 4

In the OpsCenter console, select Monitor > Jobs. Select Hierarchical View from the drop-down list. The drop-down list is located at the top-right corner of the view. Click the ID (link) for a job from the Job ID column of the table. View the job details in the Details pane.

Viewing the details for a master server associated with a job

Use the following procedure to view the details for a master server that is associated with a job. To view the details for the master server that is associated with a job

1 2 3

In the OpsCenter console, select Monitor > Jobs. Select Hierarchical View from the drop-down list. The drop-down list is located at the top-right corner of the view. Click the server name (link) associated with the job in the Master Server column of the table. The details of the master server are shown on a separate page. You can also enable or disable data collection for the master server from this page.

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About monitoring NetBackup jobs

427

Viewing policy information for a job

Use the following procedure to view the details for the policy that is associated with a job. Note: You can also view policy information from the List View. To view policy information for a job

1 2 3 4

In the OpsCenter console, select Monitor > Jobs. Select Hierarchical View from the drop-down list. The drop-down list is located at the top-right corner of the view. Click the policy name (link) for the job in the Policy column of the table. A separate page appears that shows policy information on four tabs. See Monitor > Policies page on page 435.

Filtering on NetBackup job state

You can filter by using any of the following built-in job filters. These filters are available from the drop-down list which is present on top of the table. The built-in job filters are the following:
All Jobs (default filter) Active Jobs Queued Jobs Done Jobs Suspended Jobs Select this filter to view details of all the jobs. Select this filter to view only active jobs Select this filter to view only queued jobs. Select this filter to view only Done jobs. Select this filter to view the jobs that have been suspended. Select this filter to view the jobs that are waiting for retry. Select this filter to view the jobs that are incomplete. Select this filter to view the jobs that are undefined. Select this filter to view the jobs that have been canceled.

Waiting for Retry Jobs

Incomplete Jobs

Undefined Jobs

Canceled Jobs

428

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitor > Services view

Successful Jobs

Select this filter to view the jobs that are successful. Select this filter to view the jobs that are partially successful. Select this filter to view the jobs that failed.

Partially Successful Jobs

Failed Jobs

In addition to using the built-in filters, you can also create your own custom filters. See Creating, applying, editing, and removing custom view filters on page 87. To filter details by job state

1 2 3

In the OpsCenter console, select Monitor > Jobs. Select Hierarchical View from the drop-down list. The drop-down list is located at the top-right corner of the view. Select a filter from the drop-down list. Note that the drop-down list is located on top of the table.

Monitor > Services view

This view is displayed when you select Monitor > Services. This view contains detailed information for services. The data that is shown in this view is based on the current View pane selection. See Controlling the scope of Monitor views on page 401. The table that appears in this view has the following columns:
Name Host Name This column lists the name of the service. This column lists the name of the master server or media server where the service or daemon is present. This column lists the NetBackup service type. Example: Vault Manager, Device Manager, or Service Layer.

Service Type

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitor > Services view

429

Status

The operational status of the service or daemon. This status can be Stopped, Running, or Other. Other can be Not Installed, Not Licensed, Start Pending, Stop Pending, Restart Pending, Failed, or Unknown.

Note: The status for some services may

show as Stopped on the Monitor > Services page in the OpsCenter console. The license for these services is either not installed or configured for a specific media or master server.

You can perform the following tasks from this view:

Use filters to view specific services See Filtering on NetBackup service type on page 429. See Controlling NetBackup services on page 430.

Control NetBackup services

Filtering on NetBackup service type

You can filter by using any of the four built-in filters. These filters are available from the drop-down list which is present on top of the table. The built-in filters are the following:
All Services (default filter) Select this filter to view details of all the services. Select this filter to view details of the services that have been stopped. Select this filter to view details of running services. Select this filter to view details of all other services like Not Licensed, Unknown (not recognized by OpsCenter), or Not Applicable (some services may not be applicable to earlier versions).

Stopped Services

Running Services

Other Services

In addition to using the built-in filters, you can also create your own custom filters. See Creating, applying, editing, and removing custom view filters on page 87.

430

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitor > Services view

Use the following procedure to view details by type of service. To filter on service type

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, select Monitor > Services. Select a filter from the drop-down list. Note that the drop-down list is located on top of the table.

Controlling NetBackup services

Under certain circumstances there may be issues among multiple OpsCenter users. For instance, one OpsCenter user stops a service while another user tries to start the same service. Note: NetBackup service layer (nbsl) cannot be controlled from OpsCenter. To control a service

1 2 3 4

Refresh your Web browser to obtain an updated state for all services. In the OpsCenter console, select Monitor > Services. Select a service from the table. You can select one or more services. Click Start, Stop, or Restart. Note that these tasks are located on top of the table. Note: These tasks are not visible if you log on with an Analyst or a Reporter role. The OpsCenter console may take some time to show the updated status once you perform these tasks. Stop, Running, or Restart Pending appears in the Status column until the selected action completes. If you start or stop a service that has a dependency on another service, NetBackup ensures that any dependent services are also started or stopped.

About monitoring NetBackup policies

The Monitor > Policies view provides details of NetBackup policies. You can use the following views to see NetBackup policy information:

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitor > Services view

431

List View

The List View is shown by default when you select Monitor > Policies. This view shows detailed information about NetBackup policies based on the current View pane selection. See Monitor > Policies List View on page 431.

Summary View

The Summary View contains the different sections that display specific information about NetBackup policies based on the current View pane and time frame selection. These sections show specific policy information in a table as well as a pie chart. See Monitor > Policies Summary View on page 438.

Note: You can select these views from the drop-down list. The drop-down list is located at the top-right corner of the page. See About using the List View to monitor NetBackup policies on page 434. See Filtering on NetBackup policy type on page 435. See Viewing details for a single NetBackup policy on page 436. See Viewing details for a single NetBackup policy on page 436. See Viewing details for a single NetBackup policy on page 436. See Viewing details for a single NetBackup policy on page 436. See Viewing details for a single NetBackup policy on page 436. See Viewing details for a single NetBackup policy on page 436.

Monitor > Policies List View

This view is displayed when you select Monitor > Policies. This view contains detailed information about policies. The data that is shown in this view is based on the current View pane selection. See Controlling the scope of Monitor views on page 401. The table that appears in this view has the following columns:

432

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitor > Services view

Name

Name of the policy. Click the link to view details about the policy. Name of the master server that is associated with the policy. Click the link to view details of master server. This column is the policy type. Usually, the Policy type determines the type of clients that can be backed up by this policy. Example: DB2, NBU-Catalog, Oracle, Sybase, Vault etc. Storage that is associated with the policy. Click the link to view details for storage. Volume pool that is associated with the policy. Click the link to view details of volume pool. Interval (in minutes) between two checkpoints in NetBackup. The total number of jobs that are associated with the policy. Priority that you have defined for the policy. Zero means the lowest priority. This column determines whether the policy is Active or not.

Master Server

Type

Storage

Volume Pool

CheckPoint Interval

Jobs/Policy

Priority

Active

Not all of the available columns appear initially in this view. The following columns do not appear, but can be added to your view by clicking the Table Settings icon:

Data Classification Effective Date Compression Encryption Block Level Increments Allow Multiple Data Streams Offhost Follow NFS Cross Mount Points

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitor > Services view

433

Individual File Restore From Raw True Image Recovery Collect Disaster Recovery Information Collect Bare Metal Restore Information Snapshot Backups Alternate Client Data Mover Virtual Machine Proxy Snapshot Method Keyword Phrase Policy Domain Name Application Discovery Indexing Index Server Name Use Accelerator

Note: The column Indexing indicates if indexing is enabled for the policy for NetBackup Search.Index Server Name specifies the machine which will index the backups by this policy for NetBackup Search. See the online NetBackup Administration Console Help for a detailed description of these fields. More information about how to customize tables and view specific columns is available. See About using tables on page 83. All the details that are associated with a policy can be viewed from the Details pane. The Details pane is located at the bottom of the Monitor > Jobs view. The Details pane has the following tabs:

434

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitor > Services view

Table 7-6 Tab

General

Monitor > Policies Details pane tabs Description

The General tab of the Details pane displays all information available for the policy. It also includes the contents of all the available columns that can be viewed from the table. The Schedules tab shows details of the schedules that are associated with the policy. It also shows if indexing is enabled for a schedule. TheClients tab shows the clients that have been backed up by the policy and also their location. It also shows if indexing is enabled for a client. The Selections tab shows the files that have eben backed up by the policy.

Schedules

Clients

Selections

About using the List View to monitor NetBackup policies

You can perform the following tasks from this view:
Use filters to view specific policies See Filtering on NetBackup policy type on page 435. See Viewing details for a single NetBackup policy on page 436. See Viewing the details for a master server associated with a policy on page 436. See Viewing the details for a volume pool associated with a policy on page 437. See Activating or deactivating a job policy on page 437. See Starting a manual backup on page 437. See Viewing the history for a single job policy on page 438.

View the details for a single NetBackup policy View the details for a master server associated with a policy View the details for a volume pool that is associated with a policy Manage a job policy

Start a manual backup View the history for a job policy

See Monitor > Policies Summary View on page 438.

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitor > Services view

435

Filtering on NetBackup policy type

You can filter by using any of the seven built-in filters. These filters are available from the drop-down list which is present on top of the table. The built-in filters are the following:
All Policies (default filter) Select this filter to view details of all NetBackup policies. Select this filter to view details of the policies that are active. Select this filter to view details of the policies that are inactive. Select this filter to view details of all policies that apply to Windows clients. Select this filter to view details of catalog policies. Select this filter to view details of Standard policies. Select this filter to view details of all other policies like DB2 policies, SAP policies, OS2 policies etc.

Active Policies

Inactive Policies

Windows Policies

Catalog Policies

Standard Policies

Other Policies

In addition to using the built-in filters, you can also create your own custom filters. See Creating, applying, editing, and removing custom view filters on page 87. Use the following procedure to view details by type of policy. To filters details by type of policy

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, select Monitor > Policies. Select a filter from the drop-down list. Note that the drop-down list is located on top of the table.

Monitor > Policies page

There are four tabs in the Details pane on the Monitor > Policies page.

436

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitor > Services view

Table 7-7 Tab

General

Monitor > Policies page tabs Description

The General tab of the Details pane displays all information available for the policy. It also includes contents of all the columns that can be viewed from the table. You can also click the master server name (link) to get details of the master server.

Schedules

The Schedules tab displays details of the schedules that are associated with the policy. The Clients tab shows details of clients to be backed up by the policy. The Selections tab shows the files that have been backed up by the policy and also their location.

Clients

Selections

Viewing details for a single NetBackup policy

All the details that are associated with a policy can be viewed from the Details pane. The Details pane is located at the bottom of the Monitor > Jobs view. The Details pane has four tabs. See Monitor > Policies page on page 435. To view details for a single NetBackup policy

1 2 3

In the OpsCenter console, select Monitor > Policies. Click the name (link) for a policy from the Name column of the table. View the policy details in the Details pane.

Viewing the details for a master server associated with a policy

Use the following procedure to view the details for a master server that is associated with a policy. To view the details for a master server that is associated with a policy

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, select Monitor > Policies. Click the server name (link) associated with the policy from the Master Server column of the table. The details of the master server are shown on a separate page. You can also enable or disable data collection for the master server from this page.

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitor > Services view

437

Viewing the details for a volume pool associated with a policy

Use the following procedure to view the details for a volume pool that is associated with a policy. To view the details for a volume pool that is associated with a policy

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, select Monitor > Policies. Click the volume pool name (link) associated with the policy from the Volume Pool column in the table. The details of the volume pool are shown on a separate page.

Activating or deactivating a job policy

Use the following procedure to activate or deactivate a policy. Before you perform these tasks, manually refresh your Web browser to obtain an updated view of all policies. Note: These tasks are not visible if you log on with an Analyst or a Reporter role. To activate or deactivate a policy

1 2 3

In the OpsCenter console, select Monitor > Policies. Select a job policy from the table. Click Activate or Deactivate. Note that these options are located on top of the table. The OpsCenter console may take some time to show the updated status once you perform these tasks.

Starting a manual backup

Use the following procedure to start a manual backup. Before you perform this task, manually refresh your Web browser to obtain an updated view of all policies. The OpsCenter console may take some time to show the updated status once you perform this task. Note: This task is not visible if you log on with an Analyst or a Reporter role.

438

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitor > Services view

To start a manual backup

1 2 3 4

In the OpsCenter console, select Monitor > Policies. Select a policy from the table. You can select only one policy and it must be an active policy. Click Manual Backup. Note that this option is located on top of the table. You can select a schedule and a client from the drop-down lists for the backup, or only select a schedule or a client. If you do not select a schedule, NetBackup uses the schedule with the highest retention level. If you do not select a client, NetBackup backs up all scheduled clients.

Viewing the history for a single job policy

Use the following procedure to view the history for a policy. Note: This task is not visible if you log on with an Analyst or a Reporter role. To view the history for a policy

1 2 3 4

In the OpsCenter console, select Monitor > Policies. Select a job policy from the table. Click View History. Note that this option is located on top of the table. The Compare Policies tab displays the policy versions. You must select two versions from the Policy Versions column to compare versions. The changes are highlighted in red color. To view only the differences between the versions, click the View Differences tab. You can also compare values for indexing and Index Server attributes for different policy versions.

Monitor > Policies Summary View

This view is displayed when you select Monitor > Policies and then select Summary View from the drop-down list. The drop-down list is located at the top-right corner of the page. This view contains detailed information about policies. The content that is shown in the Summary View is based on the current View pane and time frame selection. Data for the last 24 hours is shown by default. You can also view data for the last 48 hours or 72 hours.

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitor > Services view

439

See Controlling the scope of Monitor views on page 401. The Summary View contains the different sections which display specific information about NetBackup policies. These sections show specific policy information in a table as well as a pie chart. The table and the pie charts include links to filtered detail views. You can use these links to drill down and access detailed information about NetBackup policies. The following sections describe this view in detail:

See About Top 5 Policies by Data Backed up on page 439. See About Top 7 Policies by Failed Jobs on page 439. See About Top 7 Policies by No. of Jobs on page 440.

About Top 5 Policies by Data Backed up

The Top 5 Policies by Data Backed up section lists the top five policies which have the maximum data backed up for the current View pane and time frame selection. Data for the last 24 hours is shown by default. You can also view data for the last 48 hours or 72 hours. See Controlling the scope of Monitor views on page 401. The table that is shown in the section lists the top five policies which have maximum data backed up. The table also shows the data that is backed up for each policy. Note that the data that is backed up (shown in Volume (Bytes) column) is arranged in descending order in the table. From this section, you can quickly view the policies which have the maximum data backed up. See About Top 7 Policies by Failed Jobs on page 439. See About Top 7 Policies by No. of Jobs on page 440.

About Top 7 Policies by Failed Jobs

The Top 7 Policies by Failed Jobs section lists seven policies which have the maximum failed jobs for the current View pane and time frame selection. Data for the last 24 hours is shown by default. You can also view data for the last 48 hours or 72 hours. See Controlling the scope of Monitor views on page 401. The table that is shown in the section lists the top seven policies which have maximum failed jobs associated with them. The table also shows the total number of failed jobs for each policy. Note that the failed jobs (shown in Total Number of Jobs column) are arranged in descending order in the table. From this section,

440

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitor > Services view

you can quickly view the policies which have the maximum failed jobs associated with them. Note: This section can also be viewed from Monitor > Overview. See About Top 5 Policies by Data Backed up on page 439. See About Top 7 Policies by No. of Jobs on page 440.

About Top 7 Policies by No. of Jobs

The Top 7 Policies by No. of Jobs section lists seven policies which have the maximum number of jobs. This data is based on the current View pane and time frame selection. Data for the last 24 hours is shown by default. You can also view data for the last 48 hours or 72 hours. See Controlling the scope of Monitor views on page 401. The table that is shown in the section lists the policies which have maximum number of jobs. The table also shows the total number of jobs for each policy. Note that the total number of jobs for each policy (shown in Total Number of Jobs column) are arranged in descending order in the table. From this section, you can quickly view the policies which have the maximum number of jobs associated with them. See About Top 5 Policies by Data Backed up on page 439. See About Top 7 Policies by Failed Jobs on page 439.

About monitoring NetBackup media

The Monitor > Media view provides details of NetBackup media. You can use the following views to see details about NetBackup media:
List View The List View is shown by default when you select Monitor > Media. This view shows detailed information about NetBackup media for the current View pane selection. See Monitor > Media List View options on page 441.

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitor > Services view

441

Summary View

The Summary View displays the volume pool available for each master server for the current View pane selection. It also shows other media details that are associated with the master server like Frozen Media Count, Suspended Media Count etc. See Monitor > Media Summary View options on page 446.

Hierarchical View by Volume Pool

The Hierarchical View by Volume Pool shows details of all media and also groups media by volume pool for the current View pane selection. See Hierarchical View by Volume Pool for monitoring media on page 447.

Hierarchical View by Volume Group

The Hierarchical View by Volume Group shows details of all media and also groups media by volume group for the current View pane selection. See Hierarchical View by Volume Group for monitoring media on page 449.

Note: You can select these views from the drop-down list. The drop-down list is located at the top-right corner of the page.

Monitor > Media List View options

This view is displayed when you select Monitor > Media. This view contains detailed information for media. This data is based on the current View pane selection. See Controlling the scope of Monitor views on page 401. The table that appears in this view has the following columns: Table 7-8 Media List View options

Column Head/Option Description

Media ID Unique ID associated with a media. Click the link to view details about the media. Name of the master server that is associated with the media. Click the link to view details of master server.

Master Server

442

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitor > Services view

Table 7-8

Media List View options (continued)

Column Head/Option Description

Barcode Media Type Robot Type Barcode on the media Type of media like HCART, 8mm, 4mm etc. Specifies the robot type of the robot to inventory. Example: tl4, tl8 etc. Unique, logical identification number for the robot to inventory. Slot in the robot that contains the volume. The number of times that the volume has been mounted. The date when the volume was assigned for use. The maximum number of mounts (or cleanings) that are allowed for the volume. Zero (0) indicates unlimited mounts. Date when the images on the volume expire. The most recent time NetBackup used the volume for backups. Current media status like Frozen, Active etc. Capacity that has been used. This relates to NetBackup Search. If an image on a media is placed on hold, the status of the media is On Hold. If the media is on hold, the value would be Yes. In other cases the value would be -.

Robot Number Slot Mounts Time Assigned Max. Mounts

Data Expiration Last Written Media Status Used Capacity On Hold

Not all of the available columns appear initially in this view. The following columns do not appear, but can be added to your view by clicking the Table Settings icon:

Last Write Host Side Partner First Mount Last Mount Cleanings Remaining Created Description

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About using the List View to monitor NetBackup media

443

Vault Name Date Vaulted Return Date Vault Slot Session ID Vault Container ID Last Read Images Valid Images Number of Restores Conflicts Origin Host Media Owner Cleaning Media Imported Multiplexed Multiretention Last Restore Volume Expiration Retention Level

See the online NetBackup Administration Console Help for a detailed description of these fields. More information about how to customize tables and view specific columns is available. See About using tables on page 83.

About using the List View to monitor NetBackup media

You can perform the following tasks from this view:

444

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Viewing the details for NetBackup media

View the details for a particular NetBackup See Viewing the details for NetBackup media media on page 444. View the details for a master server that is associated with the media Use filters to view specific media See Viewing the details for a master server associated with the media on page 444. See Filtering on NetBackup media type on page 444. See Controlling media on page 445.

Control media

Viewing the details for NetBackup media

All the details that are associated with a media can be viewed from the Details pane. The Details pane is located at the bottom of the view. To view the details for a particular media

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, select Monitor > Media. Click a drilldown link from the Media ID column. View the media properties from the Details pane. From the Details pane, you can also click the master server link to see details about the master server that is associated with the media.

Viewing the details for a master server associated with the media
Use the following procedure to view the details for a master server that is associated with a media. To view the details for a master server associated with a media

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, select Monitor > Media. Click the server name (link) associated with the media in the Master Server column of the table. The details of the master server are shown on a separate page.

Filtering on NetBackup media type

You can sort and filter this view to focus on the specific type of media that you want to see. For example, you can create and apply a filter that displays full media only. You can filter by using any of the built-in filters. These filters are available from the drop-down list which is present on top of the table.

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Controlling media

445

The built-in filters are the following:

All Media (default filter) Assigned Media Select this filter to view details of all media. Select this filter to view details of the media that have been assigned to an individual for further action. Select this filter to view details of the media that are unassigned. Select this filter to view details of the media that are frozen. Select this filter to view details of the media that are full. Select this filter to view details of the media that are suspended. Select this filter to view details of all other media like Multi Retention Level media, BE media etc. Select this filter to view details of media with Active status. Select this filter to view details of cleaning media.

Unassigned Media

Frozen Media

Full Media

Suspended Media

Other Media

Active Media

Cleaning Media

In addition to the built-in filters, you can create your own custom filters. See Creating, applying, editing, and removing custom view filters on page 87. Use the following procedure to view details by type of media. To filter details by type of media

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, select Monitor > Media. Select a filter from the drop-down list. Note that the drop-down list is located on top of the table.

Controlling media
Use the following procedure to freeze, unfreeze, suspend, or unsuspend specific media. Note that to perform these tasks the media must be assigned to NetBackup. The media is assigned if there is a date in the Time Assigned column.

446

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitor > Media Summary View options

Note: These tasks are not visible if you log on with an Analyst or a Reporter role. To perform media tasks

1 2 3

In the OpsCenter console, select Monitor > Media. Select a media ID from the table (use the check box). Click Freeze, Unfreeze, Suspend, or Unsuspend. Note that these options are present on top of the table. The OpsCenter console may take some time to show the updated status once you perform these tasks.

Monitor > Media Summary View options

This view is displayed when you select Monitor > Media and then select Summary View from the drop-down list. The drop-down list is located at the top-right corner of the page. The data that is shown in this view is based on the current View pane selection. See Controlling the scope of Monitor views on page 401. The table that appears in this view displays the volume pool available for each master server. It also shows other media details that are associated with the master server like Frozen Media Count, Suspended Media Count etc. The following columns are shown in the table: Table 7-9 Media Summary View options Description
Name of the master server Name of the volume pool that is associated with the master server Total number of the frozen media that is associated with the master server. Total number of the suspended media that is associated with the master server. Total number of the full media that are associated with the master server. Total number of active media that are associated with the master server.

Option/Column Head
Master Server Volume Pool name

Frozen Media Count

Suspended Media Count

Full Media Count

Active Media Count

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Hierarchical View by Volume Pool for monitoring media

447

Table 7-9

Media Summary View options (continued) Description

Total number of all other media like Multi Retention Level media, BE media etc. that are associated with the master server . Total number of the media that are available for the master server. Total number of the media that are on hold for the master server.

Option/Column Head
Other Media Count

Available Media Count

On Hold Media Count

Hierarchical View by Volume Pool for monitoring media

This view is displayed when you select Monitor > Media and then select Heirarchical View by Volume Pool from the drop-down list. The drop-down list is located at the top-right corner of the page. The data that is shown in this view is based on the current View pane selection. See Controlling the scope of Monitor views on page 401. The Hierarchical View by Volume Pool shows details of all media and also groups media by volume pool. Each volume pool that is shown in the Media ID column has a +sign before it. You can expand a volume pool to see all media that are a part of this volume pool. Note that the media are indented to the right-hand side in the Media ID column. The sorting feature in this view applies only to media in the volume pool. When you expand a volume pool, the current selected sort order is applied to media in the pool. The following tasks can be performed from this view:
View the details for volume pool See Viewing the details for volume pool on page 448.

View details for the media that are a part of See Viewing the details for media a specific volume pool on page 448. Control media See Controlling media on page 448.

448

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Viewing the details for volume pool

Viewing the details for volume pool

Use the following procedure to view the details for a volume pool. To view details for a volume pool

1 2 3

In the OpsCenter console, select Monitor > Media. Select Hierarchical View by Volume Pool from the drop-down list. The drop-down list is located at the top-right corner of the page. Click a volume pool (link) from the Media ID column. Note that a volume pool has a + sign on the left side. The details for the volume pool are shown in the General tab at the bottom of this view.

Viewing the details for media

Use the following procedure to view details for the media that are part of a specific volume pool. To view the details for media

1 2 3

In the OpsCenter console, select Monitor > Media. Select Hierarchical View by Volume Pool from the drop-down list. The drop-down list is located at the top-right corner of the page. Expand a volume pool from the Media ID column. This column shows the media that are a part of the volume pool. Note that the media are indented to the right-hand side Click the media ID (link). Details for the media are shown in the General tab at the bottom of the view.

Controlling media
Use the following procedure to freeze, unfreeze, suspend, or unsuspend specific media. Note that to perform these tasks the media must be assigned to NetBackup. The media is assigned if there is a date in the Time Assigned column. Note: These tasks are not visible if you log on with an Analyst or a Reporter role. To perform media tasks

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, select Monitor > Media. Select Hierarchical View by Volume Pool from the drop-down list. The drop-down list is located at the top-right corner of the page.

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Hierarchical View by Volume Group for monitoring media

449

Expand a volume pool from the Media ID column. This view shows the media that are a part of the volume pool. Note that the media are indented to the right-hand side Select a media ID (use the check box). Click Freeze, Unfreeze, Suspend, or Unsuspend. Note that these tasks are present on top of the table. The OpsCenter console may take some time to show the updated status once you perform these tasks.

4 5

Hierarchical View by Volume Group for monitoring media

This view is displayed when you select Monitor > Media and then select Heirarchical View by Volume Group from the drop-down list. The drop-down list is located at the top-right corner of the page. The data that is shown in this view is based on the current View pane selection. See Controlling the scope of Monitor views on page 401. The Hierarchical View by Volume Group shows details of all media and also groups media by volume group. Each volume group shown in the Media ID column has a +sign before it. You can expand a volume group to see all media that are a part of this volume group. Note that the media are indented to the right-hand side in the Media ID column. The sorting feature in this view applies to media in the volume group. When you expand a volume group, the current selected sort order is applied to media in that group. You can perform the following tasks from this view:
View the details for a volume group See Viewing the details for a volume group on page 449.

View details for the media that are part of a See Viewing the details for media specific volume group on page 450. Control media See Controlling media in OpsCenter on page 450.

Viewing the details for a volume group

Use the following procedure to view the details for a specific volume group.

450

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Viewing the details for media

To view details for a volume group

1 2 3

In the OpsCenter console, select Monitor > Media. Select Hierarchical View by Volume Group from the drop-down list. The drop-down list is located at the top-right corner of the page. Click a volume group (link) from the Media ID column. Note that a volume group has a + sign on the left side. The details for the volume group are shown in the General tab at the bottom of this view.

Viewing the details for media

Use the following procedure to view details for media that are part of a specific volume group. To view the details for media

1 2 3

In the OpsCenter console, select Monitor > Media. Select Hierarchical View by Volume Group from the drop-down list. The drop-down list is located at the top-right corner of the page. Expand a volume group from the Media ID column. This view shows the media that are a part of the volume group. Note that the media are indented to the right-hand side Click the media ID (link). Details for the media are shown in the General tab at the bottom of the view.

Controlling media in OpsCenter

Use the following procedure to freeze, unfreeze, suspend, or unsuspend specific media. Note that to perform these tasks the media must be assigned to NetBackup. The media is assigned if there is a date in the Time Assigned column. Note: These tasks are not visible if you log on with an Analyst or a Reporter role. To perform media tasks

1 2 3

In the OpsCenter console, select Monitor > Media. Select Hierarchical View by Volume Group from the drop-down list. The drop-down list is located at the top-right corner of the page. Expand a volume group from the Media ID column. This view shows the media that are a part of the volume group. Note that the media are indented to the right-hand side

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitoring NetBackup devices

451

4 5

Select a media ID (use the check box). Click Freeze, Unfreeze, Suspend, or Unsuspend. Note that these options are present on top of the table. The OpsCenter console may take some time to show the updated status once you perform these tasks.

Monitoring NetBackup devices

This view is displayed when you select Monitor > Devices. This view contains the following two tabs:
Drives This tab is shown by default when you select Monitor > Devices. The contents of the Drives tab are shown by default. This view displays the current drive status information based on the current View pane selection. See Monitor > Devices > Drives List View options on page 451. See Monitor > Devices > Drives Summary View on page 455. Disk Pools This view displays detailed information about the disk pools that are configured for use by NetBackup based on the current View pane selection. See Monitor > Devices > Disk Pools options on page 456.

Monitor > Devices > Drives List View options

This view is displayed when you select Monitor > Devices > Drives. This view shows the current drive status information. The data that is shown in this view is based on the current View pane selection. See Controlling the scope of Monitor views on page 401. Note: For 7.0.1 and later master servers, the List View does not show a drive that is unreachable or disabled. Similarly if one of the paths for a drive is unreachable or disabled, it is not shown in the Paths tab that appears in the List View.

452

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitor > Devices > Drives List View options

The table that appears in this view shows the following information: Table 7-10 Drives List View options Description
The name that is assigned to the drive when it was added to NetBackup. The name of the device host where the drive is connected. Name of the master server that is associated with the drive. Type of drive like 4mm, 8mm etc. The type of robot that contains this drive.

Option/Column Head
Drive Name

Device Host Master Server Drive Type Robot Type

Not all of the available columns appear initially in this view. The following columns do not appear, but can be added to your view by clicking the Table Settings icon:

Serial Number Cleaning Frequency Shared Inquiry Information Volume Header Path ACS LSM Panel Drive Vendor Drive Identifier Robot Number Robot Drive Number Recorded Media ID Assigned Host Control Host Name Control Mode Evsn Control Up

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About using the List View for monitoring drives

453

Last Clean Time Local Control Mounted Time NDMP Occupy Index Opr Comment Ready Request ID Scan Host VM Host Write Enabled

See the online NetBackup Administration Console Help for a detailed description of these fields. More information about how to customize tables and view specific columns is available. See About using tables on page 83.

About using the List View for monitoring drives

You can perform the following tasks from this view:
View the details for a single drive See Viewing the details for a single drive on page 453. See Viewing the details for a master server associated with a drive on page 454. See Filtering on NetBackup drive category on page 454. See Controlling drives on page 455.

View the details for a master server that is associated with a drive Use filters to view specific drives

Control drives

Viewing the details for a single drive

All the details that are associated with a drive can be viewed from the Details pane. The Details pane is located at the bottom of the view.

454

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Viewing the details for a master server associated with a drive

To view the details for a single drive

1 2

Select Monitor > Devices > Drives. The List View is shown by default. Click the drilldown link from the Drive Name column. The drive information can be viewed from the General and Paths tab of the Details pane. From the General tab, you can also click the master server link to see details about the master server that is associated with the drive.

Viewing the details for a master server associated with a drive

Use the following procedure to view details for a master server that is associated with a drive. To view the details for a master server associated with a drive

1 2

Select Monitor > Devices > Drives. The List View is shown by default. Click the drilldown link from the Master Server column. The master server information can be viewed from a separate page.

Filtering on NetBackup drive category

You can sort and filter this view to focus on the specific type of drives that you want to see. For example, you can apply a filter that displays only those drives that are up. You can filter by using any of the built-in filters. These filters are available from the drop-down list which is present on top of the table. The following built-in filters are available:
All Drives The All Drives filter is the default filter. Select this filter to view all drives. Select this filter to view only those drives that are up. For up drives, all drive paths are up. Select this filter to view only those drives that are down. For down drives, all drive paths are down. Select this filter to view mixed drives. For mixed drives, some drive paths are up and some drive paths are down.

Up Drives

Down Drives

Mixed Drives

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Controlling drives

455

In addition to the built-in filters, you can create your own custom filters. See Creating, applying, editing, and removing custom view filters on page 87. Use the following procedure to view details by type of drives. To filter details by type of drives

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, select Monitor > Devices > Drives. Ensure that List View is selected in the drop-down list. Select a filter from the drop-down list. Note that the drop-down list is located on top of the table.

Controlling drives
See the NetBackup Administrator's Guide, Volume I for information on drive states and how to control drives. Before you perform these tasks, manually refresh your Web browser to obtain an updated view of all drives. When you refresh, you also ensure that the drive is not involved in any tasks by other users. Note: These tasks are not visible if you log on with an Analyst or a Reporter role. To control drives

1 2 3

In the OpsCenter console, select Monitor > Devices > Drives. The List View is displayed by default. Select a drive from the Drive Name column in the table. Click Up, Down, or Reset. Note that these options are located on top of the drive details table. The OpsCenter console may take some time to show the updated status once you perform these tasks.

Monitor > Devices > Drives Summary View

This view is displayed when you select Monitor > Devices > Drives and then select Summary View from the drop-down list. The drop-down list is located at the top-right corner of the page. The Summary view contains the following section: See Viewing the Drive Summary by Status on page 456.

456

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Viewing the Drive Summary by Status

Viewing the Drive Summary by Status

The Drive Summary by Status section shows an overall distribution of drives by drive status for the current View pane selection. This information is shown in a pie chart as well as a table. Note: For 7.0.1 and later master servers, the Drive Summary by Status section does not show the drives that are disabled or unreachable. Each color of the pie chart represents how drives are distributed in your environment as per the drive status. You can also view the color code summary in this section to know the colors that represent different exit status. Moving your mouse over the pie chart shows the number and percentage of drives with up or down status in your NetBackup environment. For example, pointing to the green color in the pie chart shows that 5 drives or 100% drives in your environment are up. Note: The Drive Summary by Status section can also be viewed from Monitor > Overview. You can drill down from this section to see details of the drives that are up or down. To view drives by drive status

1 2 3

In the OpsCenter console, select Monitor > Jobs. Select Summary View from the drop-down list. The drop-down list is located at the top-right corner of the page. In the Drive Summary by Status section, do either of the following:

Click the number of drives (link) for a particular drive status from the table. For example, click the number for Up drives Or Click a colored section of the pie chart that corresponds to a particular drive status. For example, click the green section of the pie chart to view details for the drives that are up.

Monitor > Devices > Disk Pools options

This view is displayed when you select Monitor > Devices > Disk Pools. This view displays detailed information about the disk pools that are configured for use by

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitor > Devices > Disk Pools options

457

NetBackup. The data that is shown in this view is based on the current View pane selection. See Controlling the scope of Monitor views on page 401. The table that appears in this view shows the following information:
Name Server Type Name of the disk pool The storage server type. For OpenStorage, the server type depends on the vendor name. Number of disk volumes in the disk pool. The amount of storage space in use. Space available on the disk pool The total raw, unformatted size of the storage in the disk pool. The estimated amount of disk space available for storage after file metadata overhead is taken into account. The low water mark for the disk pool. (The default is 80%.) When the capacity of the disk pool returns to the low water mark, NetBackup again assigns jobs to the storage unit. The high water mark for the disk pool (default is 98%.). Percentage of the disk pool that is full. Name of the master server that is associated with the disk pool State of the disk pool (like Up, Down etc.)

Number of Volumes Used Capacity Available Space Raw Size

Usable Size

Low Watermark (%)

High Water Mark (%)

% Full Master Server

State

Not all of the available columns appear initially in this view. The following columns do not appear, but can be added to your view by clicking the Table Settings icon:

Imported Configured for Snapshots Primary Replication

458

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Viewing the details for a single disk pool

See the online NetBackup Administration Console Help for a detailed description of these fields. More information about how to customize tables and view specific columns is available. See About using tables on page 83. You can perform the following task from this view:
View the details for a single disk pool See Viewing the details for a single disk pool on page 458.

Viewing the details for a single disk pool

All the details that are associated with a disk pool can be viewed from the Details pane. The Details pane is located at the bottom of the view. To view the details for a single disk pool

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, select Monitor > Devices > Disk Pools. Click the drilldown link from the Name column. The disk pool information can be viewed from the General and Disk Volume tab of the Details pane. From the General tab, you can also click the master server link to see details about the master server that is associated with the disk pool.

About monitoring NetBackup hosts

This view is displayed when you select Monitor > Hosts. This view contains the following subtabs:
Master Server This tab is shown by default when you select Monitor > Hosts. This view displays detailed information about NetBackup master servers based on the current View pane selection. See Monitor > Hosts > Master Servers view on page 459.

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitor > Hosts > Master Servers view

459

Media Server

This view displays detailed information about NetBackup media servers based on the current View pane selection. See Monitor > Hosts > Media Servers view on page 461.

Client

This view displays detailed information about NetBackup clients based on the current View pane selection. See Monitor > Hosts > Clients view on page 462.

Monitor > Hosts > Master Servers view

This view shows details of master servers. The data that is shown in this view is based on the current View pane selection. See Controlling the scope of Monitor views on page 401. The table that appears in this view shows the following columns: Table 7-11 Master Servers view options Description
Fully qualified domain name or IP address of the master server that is configured. The display name that you have chosen for the master server. Operating system of the master server. Back up product from where the data is being collected like PureDisk, Backup Exec etc. Shows the current state of the master server like Connected, Not Connected etc. The last time when OpsCenter successfully initiated contact with the master server. This does not necessarily represent the last time that OpsCenter collected information from the master server. Reason for the current state of the master server.

Option/Column Head
Master Server Name

Display Name

Operating System Product

State

Connected Since

Reason

460

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Filtering by NetBackup master server type and status

You can perform the following task from this view:

Use filters to view specific master servers See Filtering by NetBackup master server type and status on page 460.

Filtering by NetBackup master server type and status

You can sort and filter this view to focus on the specific type of master servers that you want to see. For example, you can apply a filter that displays Windows servers only. These filters are available from the drop-down list which is present on top of the table. The built-in filters are the following:
All Servers (default filter) Select this filter to view details of all master servers. Select this filter to view details of those master servers that are connected. Select this filter to view details of those master servers that are partially connected. Select this filter to view details of those master servers that appear as not connected. Select this filter to view details of Windows servers. Select this filter to view details of Solaris servers. Select this filter to view details of Linux servers. Select this filter to view details of all other servers like AIX servers, HP-UX servers etc.

Connected Servers

Partially Connected Servers

Not Connected Servers

Windows Servers

Solaris Servers

Linux Servers

Other Servers

In addition to the built-in filters, you can create your own custom filters. See Creating, applying, editing, and removing custom view filters on page 87. Use the following procedure to view details by type of master server.

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitor > Hosts > Media Servers view

461

To filter details by type of master server

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, select Monitor > Hosts > Master Server. Select a filter from the drop-down list. Note that the drop-down list is located on top of the table.

Monitor > Hosts > Media Servers view

This view shows details of media servers. The data that is shown in this view is based on the current View pane selection. See Controlling the scope of Monitor views on page 401. The table that appears in this view shows the following columns: Table 7-12 Option
Name Master Server

Media Servers view options Description

Name of the media server. Name of the master server that is associated with the media server.

You can perform the following tasks from this view:

View the details of a master server that is associated with a media server See Viewing the details of a master server that is associated with a media server on page 461.

Viewing the details of a master server that is associated with a media server
Use the following procedure to view the details of a master server that is associated with a media server. To view the details of a master server that is associated with a media server

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, select Monitor > Hosts > Media Servers. Click the drilldown link from the Master Server column.

462

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitor > Hosts > Clients view

Monitor > Hosts > Clients view

This view shows details of NetBackup clients. The data that is shown in this view is based on the current View pane selection. See Controlling the scope of Monitor views on page 401. The table that appears in this view shows the following columns: Table 7-13 Option
Client Name Master Server OS Type Hardware Is Offline Offline Until

Clients view options Description

Name of the client that is to be backed up. Name of the master server that is associated with the client. Operating system on the client like Linux, HP-UX etc. Hardware of the client computer like PC. Shows Yes if the client is offline. Date till the client is offline

You can click Search Client to search for specific clients on the page. You can search for clients using absolute host names or substrings. You can perform the following task from this view:
View the details for a single master server See Viewing the details for a single master server on page 462.

Viewing the details for a single master server

All the details for a master server that is associated with a client can be viewed from the General tab. To view the details for a single master server

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, select Monitor > Hosts > Client. Click the drilldown link in the Master Server column.

About monitoring NetBackup alerts

The Monitor > Alerts view provides details of NetBackup alerts. The data that is shown in this view is based on the current View pane and time frame selection.

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitor > Alerts List View

463

Data for the last 24 hours is shown by default. You can also view data for the last 48 hours or 72 hours. See Controlling the scope of Monitor views on page 401. Note: The OpsCenter console displays active alerts by default (these are the alerts that have not been cleared). You can use the following views to see NetBackup alert information:
List View The List View is shown by default when you select Monitor > Alerts. The List View shows active alerts by default. This view also lets you view detailed information about all NetBackup alerts and also filter, respond to alerts. See Monitor > Alerts List View on page 463. Summary View The Summary View only displays active alerts (these are the alerts that have not been cleared). The Summary View shows how active alerts are distributed in your environment as per the alert severity. This information is shown in a pie chart as well as a table. See Summary View for monitoring NetBackup alerts on page 469.

Monitor > Alerts List View

The List view is displayed when you select Monitor > Alerts. This view contains detailed information for alerts. This view provides tools to view and filter alerts, and to track user responses to alerts. The data that is shown in this view is based on the current View pane and time frame selection. Data for the last 24 hours is shown by default. You can also view data for the last 48 hours or 72 hours. See Controlling the scope of Monitor views on page 401. Note: The List View displays active alerts by default (these are the alerts that have not been cleared). An option called Ignore View filter has been added in the View drop-down list under Monitor > Alerts. Ignore View filter is selected by default when you click

464

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About using the List View to monitor NetBackup alerts

Monitor > Alerts List View. When you select Ignore View filter from the View Pane, all active alerts for the last 24 hours are displayed in the Monitor > Alerts view regardless of the views on which the alert policy is based. For example, selecting Ignore View filter displays an alert that is based on a view which has been deleted, or an alert that is based on a view for which you do not have access now. Also, the alert count shown in the Alert Summary pane at the bottom-left is based on the Ignore View filter. This means that the Alert Summary pane always displays all the alerts regardless of the views on which the alert policy is based. The table that appears in this view shows the following information: Table 7-14 Option
Alert ID Severity

Alerts List View options Description

Unique ID associated with each NetBackup alert. The severity of the alert. The severity type helps you determine how quickly you want to respond. Name of the policy that is associated with the alert. The alert condition that is used for the alert. Current status of the alert like Active, Cleared etc. Name of the individual to whom the alert has been assigned. Time, date, and year when the alert was raised. Time, date, and year when the alert was modified. Name of the individual who last modified the alert.

Alert Policy Alert Condition Status Assigned To Time Raised Last Update Time Updated by

Not all of the available columns appear initially in this view. The Assignment State column does not appear, but can be added to your view by clicking the Table Settings icon. More information about how to customize tables and view specific columns is available. See About using tables on page 83.

About using the List View to monitor NetBackup alerts

The following tasks can be performed from this view:

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Viewing the details for a single alert

465

View the details for a single alert

See Viewing the details for a single alert on page 465. See Viewing the details of the alert policy associated with an alert on page 465. See Filtering by alert type on page 466. See Responding to alerts on page 467.

View the details of an alert policy that is associated with the alert Use filters to view specific alerts Respond to alerts

Viewing the details for a single alert

All the details that are associated with an alert can be viewed from the Details pane. The Details pane is located at the bottom of the view. To view the details of a single alert

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, select Monitor > Alerts. Click a drill-down link from the Alert ID column. The alert details are shown under General and Comments tabs of the Details pane. In addition to the information that is shown in the table, the General tab also shows master server, policy name, job ID, and exit status information. The Comments tab shows comments on the alert (if any), the time these comments were given and the individual who last updated the alert.

See Viewing the details of the alert policy associated with an alert on page 465. See Filtering by alert type on page 466. See Responding to alerts on page 467.

Viewing the details of the alert policy associated with an alert

Use the following procedure to view the details of the alert policy that is associated with an alert. To view the details of alert policy associated with the alert

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, select Monitor > Alerts. Click the drill-down link from the Alert Policy column.

See Viewing the details for a single alert on page 465. See Filtering by alert type on page 466. See Responding to alerts on page 467.

466

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Filtering by alert type

Filtering by alert type

Since the Monitor > Alerts view can include large numbers of alerts, a filter is available. You can use this filter to limit the types of alerts that appear. You can filter on various severity levels or status settings, which lets you focus on only the specific alerts that interest you. For example, you can create and apply a filter that only displays the alerts that are acknowledged. You can filter using any of the following built-in alert filters. These filters are available from the drop-down list which is present on top of the alert details table.
Active (default filter) Select this filter to view Active alerts. This filter does not include the alerts that have been cleared. Select this filter to only view the alerts whose severity is Critical. Select this filter to only view the alerts whose severity is Major. Select this filter to only view the alerts whose severity is Warning. Select this filter to only view the alerts whose severity is Informational. Select this filter to only view the alerts that have not been assigned to anybody. Select this filter to only view the alerts that have been assigned to other OpsCenter users. Select this filter to only view the alerts that have been acknowledged by an OpsCenter user. Select this filter to only view the alerts that have been cleared. More information on cleared alerts is available. See Responding to alerts on page 467. All Alerts Select this filter to view the details of all alerts. This filter includes both active alerts and cleared alerts.

Critical

Major

Warning

Informational

Unassigned

Assigned

Acknowledged

Cleared

In addition to the built-in filters, you can create your own custom filters. See Creating, applying, editing, and removing custom view filters on page 87. Use the following procedure to view details by type of alerts.

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Responding to alerts

467

To filter details by type of alert

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, select Monitor > Alerts. Select a filter using the Filter drop-down list. For example, select All Alerts to view details of both active alerts and cleared alerts.

See Viewing the details for a single alert on page 465. See Viewing the details of the alert policy associated with an alert on page 465. See Responding to alerts on page 467.

Responding to alerts
You can manage OpsCenter alerts from the Monitor > Alerts view by adding comments or by assigning the alert to an individual for further review. You can also clear or acknowledge an alert. OpsCenter allows multiple users to process or take action on an alert. When you acknowledge an alert, you inform other users who see the alert that action on the alert occurred. If you clear an alert, you cannot perform any further activity on the alert (for example, assign or acknowledge). Cleared alerts do not appear in the alert view by default. Note: Under certain circumstances there may be issues among multiple OpsCenter users. For instance, an OpsCenter user comments on an alert while another OpsCenter user tries to clear the same alert. The OpsCenter console displays active alerts by default (these are the alerts that have not been cleared). Some alerts (for example, Drive is Down) are cleared automatically when the condition is resolved. You can view cleared alerts from Monitor > Alerts view (List View) by using the Cleared or All Alerts filter. See Filtering by alert type on page 466. The following alerts are cleared automatically when the condition is resolved:

Drive is Down Lost Contact with Media Server Service Stopped Agent Server Communication Break Master Server Unreachable

468

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Responding to alerts

Frozen Media Suspended Media Disk Pool Full Disk Volume Down Symantec ThreatCon High Down Drives High Frozen Media High Suspended Media Low Available Media No Cleaning Tape Low Disk Volume Capacity Catalog Space Low Catalog not backed up Catalog backup disabled

Note: You can also purge NetBackup alert data from Settings > Configuration > Data Purge in the OpsCenter console based on a retention period that you specify. Any purged data is deleted permanently. This option is useful if you see OpsCenter performance degrade when there is a high number of alerts in the OpsCenter database. See Configuring the data purge period on the OpsCenter Server on page 274. To acknowledge an alert

1 2 3

In the OpsCenter console, select Monitor > Alerts. Select an alert from the table. Click Acknowledge or Clear.

To add a comment for an alert

1 2 3

In the OpsCenter console, select Monitor > Alerts. Select an alert from the table. Click Add Comment. You can add a comment as a reminder to yourself or for other users.

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Summary View for monitoring NetBackup alerts

469

To clear an alert

1 2 3

In the OpsCenter console, select Monitor > Alerts. Select an alert from the table. Click More and then select Clear from the drop-down list.

To assign an alert to an individual

1 2 3

In the OpsCenter console, select Monitor > Alerts. Select an alert from the table. Click Assign. You can assign an alert to a user for their action or information.

4 5

Select a user to whom you want to assign the alert. Click OK.

To change the policy that is associated with an alert

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, select Monitor > Alerts. Select an alert from the table. The Alert Policy Wizard is also used to create a policy.

Click More and then select Edit Policy from the drop-down list.

See About understanding alert counts in the Monitor view on page 507. See Viewing the details for a single alert on page 465. See Viewing the details of the alert policy associated with an alert on page 465. See Filtering by alert type on page 466.

Summary View for monitoring NetBackup alerts

The Summary View gives an overall summary of alerts by severity. It contains the Alert Summary by Severity section which shows an overall distribution of alerts by severity for the current View pane and time frame selection. This information is shown in a pie chart as well as a table. Data for the last 24 hours is shown by default. You can also view data for the last 48 hours or 72 hours. See Controlling the scope of Monitor views on page 401. A pie chart with different colors represents the alert distribution by severity in this section. Each color of the pie chart represents how alerts are distributed in your environment as per the alert severity. You can also view the color code summary in this section to know the colors that represent different severity.

470

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Viewing alerts by severity

Note: The Summary View only displays active alerts (these are the alerts that have not been cleared). Moving your mouse over the pie chart displays the number and percentage of alerts with a particular severity in your NetBackup environment. For example, pointing to the green color in the pie chart shows that in the last 24 hours, 200 alerts, or 17% alerts in your environment are critical. An option called Ignore View filter has been added in the View drop-down list under Monitor > Alerts. When you select Ignore View filter from the View Pane, all active alerts in the last 24 hours are displayed in the Monitor > Alerts view regardless of the views on which the alert policy is based. For example, selecting Ignore View filter displays an alert that is based on a view which has been deleted, or an alert that is based on a view for which you do not have access now. When you select a view from the View drop-down list (including Ignore View filter), the last 24 hours data is displayed by default. Note that the Alert Summary pane at the bottom-left displays all the alerts that exist in the OpsCenter database. This means that the Alert Summary pane displays all the alerts regardless of the views on which the alert policy is based. Note: The Alert Summary by Severity section can also be viewed from Monitor > Overview. You can drill down from this section to see details for alert categories. See Viewing alerts by severity on page 470. See About understanding alert counts in the Monitor view on page 507.

Viewing alerts by severity

You can drill down to see details for alert categories. To view alerts by severity

1 2 3

In the OpsCenter console, select Monitor > Alerts. Select Summary View from the drop-down list. The drop-down list is located at the top-right corner of the page. In the Alert Summary by Severity section, do either of the following:

Click the number of alerts (link) for a particular alert severity from the table. For example, click the number that is shown for Critical alerts. Or

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About monitoring Audit Trails

471

Click a colored section of the pie chart that corresponds to a particular alert severity. For example, click the red section of the pie chart to view details for critical alerts.

See Summary View for monitoring NetBackup alerts on page 469.

About monitoring Audit Trails

You can manage and monitor audit trails using the OpsCenter features.

Additional information about the Audit Trails report

See Audit Trails report on page 472. See What Audit Trails track on page 471. See About OpsCenter features for Audit Trails on page 472. See Creating a custom filter to view audit trail data on page 473. See About managing Audit Trails settings on page 474.

What Audit Trails track

An audit trail is a record of all the user initiated activities. An audit trail consists of the changes that are made in the NetBackup environment. For example, changes such as creating a policy, deactivating a policy, or modifying a policy. The audit trails feature in OpsCenter lets you enable audit trail logging for NetBackup. Note: OpsCenter monitors, reports, and manages audit trails for the NetBackup master servers for the version 7.1 or later. You can control the audit settings and generate an Audit Trails Report. Through OpsCenter, you can set the audit logs retention period and also enable or disable audit trail logging. Audit trails display the following information in the form of columns: Column heading Description
Category Displays the changes that are made to policies, storage units, jobs, audit configuration, audit service, pool, and storage server. For example, when a storage unit is added, modified, or deleted. Displays the action performed, such as whether a policy is modified, a storage unit is created, or a storage server is deleted.

Action

472

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About monitoring Audit Trails

Column heading Description

Description Gives a brief information about the category and the action performed. It also gives the identity of the category. Gives the information about the user who initiated the action. Displays the time when the action was performed. Displays the name of the master server on which the action is performed. Displays the reason for the change that is made, if given by the user who makes the change. By default, the column is hidden. Displays the old and new values of the attributes that are modified. Some of the attributes that are modified are Clients, Hardware, Operating System (OS), and Policy Generation.

User Timestamp Master Server

Reason

Details

Audit Trails report

The Audit Trails report is a high-level summary report that is added to the reports tree. This report displays the number of changes that are made in the NetBackup environment. The report is displayed in the form of a chart. You can view the report in a Distribution chart or Historical chart format The chart displays the count of audit records for each category. Some of the categories are Policy, Audit Configuration, Job, Audit service, Storage unit, Pool, and Storage Server. You can hover the mouse on each colored section of the chart to know the count and the percent changes for each category. You can drill down the report by clicking any colored section of the chart. You can view the count of changes for each action for the selected category. For example, if you click the Policy section, the chart displays the total audit count for policies created, policies modified, and policies deleted. To view the details of the audit trails report in a tabular form, click the link Show Chart as Table. The table displays information about the Audit Category, Total Audit Count, and Percentage. The table also displays the information about Audit Action when you drill down the chart.

About OpsCenter features for Audit Trails

OpsCenter helps you to configure audit logging and generate the Audit report. Through OpsCenter, you can:

Manage the audit settings of the NetBackup master server. Monitor audit trails.

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About monitoring Audit Trails

473

Generate alerts if audit service goes down. Configure audit trail retention period in OpsCenter.

Use the various features of OpsCenter and generate the Audit report. You can enable or disable the audit settings, and set the retention period of the logs. You can set OpsCenter to generate alerts when the NetBackup Audit manager services are turned on or off. You can also set the retention period for the audit logs.

Creating a custom filter to view audit trail data

OpsCenter helps you to monitor the audit trails. To monitor them, select Monitor > Audit Trails. You can use predefined filters based on category and action to display the contents of the Audit trails and also create custom filters. You can view information about predefined and custom filters. See Creating, applying, editing, and removing custom view filters on page 87. To create a custom filter to view audit trail data

1 2 3

Select the Create Filter icon. The Edit Audit filter dialog box is displayed. Enter a name for the filter in the Name field. Select the column name that you want to filter from the drop-down list. The options available are Category, Action, User Name, Domain Name, Domain Type, Time Stamp, Object Name, and Master Server. Object Name is filtered based on the entity names present in the description. From the Operator drop-down list, select the operator =. Use != if you do not want to match a specific value. In the Value text box, enter or select a value. If you select Time Stamp as the column, a calendar icon appears for value. Click the calendar icon to choose the required date and click OK.

4 5 6

Select And or Or from the drop-down list to build the filter query. To add more columns to the query, click Add and select the required column name. To remove the column that is created, select Remove. Once you are done adding the required columns to the filter, click OK. The new view filter is displayed in the filter drop-down list. You can view more information about applying the filter, editing the filter, and deleting the filter. See View filters in OpsCenter on page 395.

474

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitor > Appliance Hardware > Master Server

About managing Audit Trails settings

You can manage the settings to enable the auditing for the selected master server through OpsCenter. You must have Admin privileges to configure the audit settings. See Managing audit trails settings on page 573.

Monitor > Appliance Hardware > Master Server

This view lets you monitor the hardware summary of appliance master servers that are added to the Symantec OpsCenter Analytics console. The view provides a quick visual cue to hardware status. You can monitor any hardware failures in the appliance master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console. OpsCenter can monitor the appliance 2.0 master servers. Adding an appliance master server is similar to adding a regular master server to OpsCenter. More information on how to add an appliance master server to the OpsCenter console is available. See Adding a master server or appliance in OpsCenter on page 346. This view provides the information that is monitored for each piece of hardware in your NetBackup appliance master server. The table displays the following details:

Name

This column lists the names of the appliance master servers (link) that are added to the OpsCenter console. Click the link to view the appliance summary. More information about the hardware details that are monitored is available. See Appliance hardware details on page 480.

Data Collection

This column lists the date and time when the last data collection occurred. Data collection takes place after every 15 minutes by NBSL.

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitor > Appliance Hardware > Master Server

475

CPU

The icon provides a quick visual cue to the CPU status. The following values are possible:

Green/OK Yellow/Presence Unknown Red/failure.

The icon that is depicted is based on monitoring the CPU presence and voltage to the appliance CPU chip. A CPU failure is reported if any of the following conditions occur:

No voltage Voltage less than 0.99 volts Voltage more than 1.25 volts

Disk

The icon provides a quick visual cue to the disk status. The following values are possible:

Green/OK Yellow/Presence Unknown Red/failure

The icon that is depicted is based on monitoring the boot drive and the storage drives. A disk failure is reported if an internal erroneous state occurs. RAID The icon provides a quick visual cue to the RAID status. The following values are possible:

Green/OK Yellow/Presence Unknown Red/failure.

The icon that is depicted is based on monitoring the RAID status. An error is reported if the status changes from optimal.

476

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitor > Appliance Hardware > Master Server

Fan

The icon provides a quick visual cue to the fan status. The following values are possible:

Green/OK Yellow/Presence Unknown Red/failure.

The icon that is depicted is based on monitoring the fan speed and reports a fan failure when the following conditions occur:

Fan speed less than 1974 rpm Fan speed more than 8977 rpm If there is a failure with the Fan, a Critical warning is displayed. If the Fan is not installed, a Not Installed warning is issued.

Power Supply

The icon provides a quick visual cue to the power supply. The following values are possible:

Green/OK Yellow/Presence Unknown Red/failure.

The icon that is depicted is based on monitoring the power supply wattage and reports a failure when the following conditions occur:

Wattage is 0 watts Wattage more than 700 watts

The following status warning are also provided: Not Available - Occurs if the power module is installed and no power is supplied. That can occur because it is not connected to the power outlet or some other reason. Not Installed - Occurs if the Power Module is pulled out.

Critical - Occurs if the Power Module is operated with a warning.

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitor > Appliance Hardware > Media Server

477

Temperature

The icon provides a quick visual cue to the temperature. The following values are possible:

Green/OK Yellow/Presence Unknown Red/failure.

The icon that is depicted is based on monitoring the temperature of the appliance at different points and reports a failure if the following limits are exceeded: Intake Vent Temp Lower than 0 C or higher than 60 C Outtake Vent Temp Lower than 0 C or higher than 60 C Backplane Temp Lower than 0 C or higher than 60 C

FC HBA

The icon provides a quick visual cue to the Fibre Channel HBA's. The following values are possible:

Green/OK Yellow/Presence Unknown Red/failure.

The icon that is depicted is based on monitoring the status and reports a failure if the status changes from online. Manage The icon is a link to the Appliance console. Click the icon to access the Appliance console.

See Monitor > Appliance Hardware > Media Server on page 477.

Monitor > Appliance Hardware > Media Server

This view lets you monitor the hardware summary of appliance media servers that are monitored from the Symantec OpsCenter Analytics console. The view provides a quick visual cue to the hardware status. Only appliance 1.2 and 2.0 media servers that are attached to appliance 2.0 master server or to a regular NetBackup 7.5 master server can be monitored from OpsCenter. Data collection from the appliance media servers takes place after every 15 minutes via NBSL. You can monitor any hardware failures in the appliance media servers that are monitored from the OpsCenter console.

478

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitor > Appliance Hardware > Media Server

Note that you cannot add an appliance media server directly to the OpsCenter console. You can add an appliance master server or a regular master server to which it is connected. See Adding a master server or appliance in OpsCenter on page 346. This view provides the information that is monitored for each piece of hardware in your NetBackup media appliance. The table displays the following details:

Name

This column lists the names of the appliance media servers (link) that are monitored from the OpsCenter console. Click the link to view the appliance summary. More information about the hardware details that are monitored is available. See Appliance hardware details on page 480.

Master Server

This column lists the appliance master server or the regular NetBackup master server that the appliance media server is connected to. This column lists the date and time when the last data collection occured. Data collection takes place after every 15 minutes via NBSL. The icon provides a quick visual cue to the CPU status. This may have the following values:

Data Collection

CPU

Green=OK Yellow=warning Red=failure

The icon that is depicted is based on monitoring the CPU presence and voltage to the appliance CPU chip. A CPU failure is reported if any of the following conditions occur:

No voltage Voltage less than 0.99 volts Voltage more than 1.25 volts

Disk

The icon provides a quick visual cue to the disk status. This may have the following values:

Green=OK Yellow=warning Red=failure

The icon that is depicted is based on monitoring the boot drive and the storage drives. A disk failure is reported if an internal erroneous state occurs.

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitor > Appliance Hardware > Media Server

479

RAID

The icon provides a quick visual cue to the RAID status. This may have the following values:

Green=OK Yellow=warning Red=failure

The icon that is depicted is based on monitoring the RAID status. An error is reported if the status changes from optimal. Fan The icon provides a quick visual cue to the fan status. This may have the following values:

Green=OK Yellow=warning Red=failure

The icon that is depicted is based on monitoring the fan speed and reports a fan failure when the following conditions occur:

Fan speed less than 1974 rpm Fan speed more than 8977 rpm If there is a failure with the Fan, a Critical warning is displayed. If the Fan is not installed, a Not Installed warning is issued.

Power Supply

The icon provides a quick visual cue to the power supply. This may have the following values:

Green=OK Yellow=warning Red=failure

The icon that is depicted is based on monitoring the power supply wattage and reports a failure when the following conditions occur:

Watage is 0 watts Wattage more than 700 watts

The following status warning are also provided: Not Available - Occurs if the power module is installed and no power is supplied. That can occur because it is not connected to the power outlet or some other reason. Not Installed - Occurs if the Power Module is pulled out.

Critical - Occurs if the Power Module is operated with a warning.

480

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Appliance hardware details

Temperature

The icon provides a quick visual cue to the temperature. This may have the following values:

Green=OK Yellow=warning Red=failure

The icon that is depicted is based on monitoring the temperature of the appliance at different points and reports a failure if the following limits are exceeded: Intake Vent Temp Lower than 0 C or higher than 60 C Outtake Vent Temp Lower than 0 C or higher than 60 C Backplane Temp Lower than 0 C or higher than 60 C

FC HBA

The icon provides a quick visual cue to the Fibre Channel HBA's. This may have the following values:

Green=OK Yellow=warning Red=failure

The icon that is depicted is based on monitoring the status and reports a failure if the status changes from online. Manage The icon is a link to the Appliance console. Click the icon to access the Appliance console.

See Monitor > Appliance Hardware > Master Server on page 474.

Appliance hardware details

The following table describes the hardware that is monitored. Table 7-15 Appliance hardware that is monitored Sample of collected data
Monitors the following: Status - Monitors the status of the CPU, such as, Presence detected and No CPU(s) detected. Voltage - Monitors the voltage to the appliance CPU chip

Monitored Hardware
CPU

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Appliance hardware details

481

Table 7-15

Appliance hardware that is monitored (continued) Sample of collected data

This view provides the following information:

Monitored Hardware
Disk

Slot No - Slot in the robot that contains the volume.

Status - Current status of the media. The status can be Frozen, Active, etc. Capacity - Capacity that is in use.

Type - The type of disk that is configured. Enclosure ID - ID of the enclosure that the disk resides in.

RAID

Monitors the RAID status and reports an error if the status changes from optimal. The following data is collected:

Name - The name of the RAID device.

Status - Shows the current status of the device, such as Optimal. Capacity - The capacity of each device. Type - The type of RAID device, such as RAID1 and RAID 6. Disks - The disks being used .

Fan

Monitors the following: Status - Monitors the status of the fan, such as, Presence detected and No Fan(s) detected. Speed - Monitors the fan speed

Power Supply Temperature Information

Monitors the power supply wattage. Monitors the temperature of the appliance at different points. Monitors the status and reports a failure if the status changes from online. The following data is collected:

Fibre Channel HBA

Status - Current status of the HBA.

World Wide Port Name - The port currently in use for a specific device. Speed

Mode -

482

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitor > Cloud options

Monitor > Cloud options

The data on this page is applicable only if you select a view of type Master Server. Select the master server from the View Pane for which you want to view cloud data. Expanding the master server lists the media servers below it that are configured for Cloud. The cloud data is collected from the master server through NBSL after every 15 minutes. Only NetBackup 7.5 master or media servers that have cloud configurations are monitored by OpsCenter. Select any or all of the media servers to view related data in the Content pane. The Cloud Storage Providers Overview section lists the providers that are configured on the selected media servers. The following cloud providers are supported:

Nirvanix AT&T Amazon Rackspace

The Cloud Storage Providers Overview section shows the data that is backed up and restored for the current month in GB. In case you have just installed OpsCenter, this section shows the current metering data which is collected after you add the master server to OpsCenter. Data is collected from the day the master server is added to OpsCenter. The link at the bottom of each Cloud provider lists the number of media servers for which the specific Cloud provider is configured. Click the link to know the names of the media servers for which the specific cloud provider is configured. The Cloud Connect Overview section shows what all data is being written to the Cloud and also data that is being read from the Cloud. The default timeframe for the Cloud Connect Overview section is Last 24 hours. You can also view data for the last last 48 hours or the last 72 hours by clicking Last 48 Hours or Last 72 Hours respectively. The Live Metering: Data written to cloud chart shows how much data is being written in accordance with the metering time. Similarly, Live Metering: Data read from cloud chart shows how much data is being read from the cloud in accordance with the metering time. The Summary of data transferred table gives the summary of data downloaded and uploaded for each media server in the selected timeframe. The Data

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitor > Cloud options

483

transferred per provider table gives the data uploaded for each cloud provider in the selected timeframe. The Backup Job Summary shows the backup job summary for the selected timeframe in the form of a pie chart. Only backup jobs for the Cloud are considered in this chart. It shows the number of Cloud backup jobs that are successful, partially successful, or failed. Click the link (number) to monitor the progress from Monitor > Jobs.

484

Monitoring NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Monitor > Cloud options

Chapter

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter

This chapter includes the following topics:

About the Manage views Controlling the scope of Manage views About managing alert policies About managing NetBackup storage About managing NetBackup devices About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations About managing NetBackup Hosts About managing NetBackup Deployment Analysis

About the Manage views

From the Manage tab and associated subtabs, you can view and manage your NetBackup environment, which also includes OpsCenter alert policies, storage, and devices. Note that OpsCenter or OpsCenter Analytics can only monitor and manage NetBackup or NetBackup Appliances. It cannot monitor or manage other products like Symantec NetBackup PureDisk, Symantec Enterprise Vault etc. The OpsCenter server collects data from NetBackup master servers, stores it in a database, and displays it on demand. NetBackup sends most of the data and it appears almost instantaneously after it changes. (Network, system delays, or browser refresh settings can affect how quickly it appears). This data is collected

486

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter Controlling the scope of Manage views

mainly using notifications. For most operations and changes in NetBackup, NBSL sends a notification to OpsCenter. See How OpsCenter collects data from NetBackup on page 332.

Controlling the scope of Manage views

The content that is shown in the Manage views is based on your current View pane selection. You can select the following default option from the View pane:
ALL MASTER SERVERS Select ALL MASTER SERVERS to view information for all the NetBackup servers in your environment.

In addition to using the default view i.e. ALL MASTER SERVERS, you can also create your own views from Settings > Views or by using Java View Builder. For example, you can create a view like Geography to view details about master servers in a particular region like Europe. More information about how to create views from Settings > Views is available. See About OpsCenter views on page 379. See the online Symantec OpsCenter Java View Builder Help to know how you can create views using Java View Builder. Use the following procedure to view details of all master servers or specific master servers. To view details of all master servers

In the OpsCenter console, select ALL MASTER SERVERS from the drop-down list in the View pane.

To view details of specific master servers

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, select ALL MASTER SERVERS from the drop-down list in the View pane. Deselect the checkbox next to ALL MASTER SERVERS and select specific master servers from the list of master servers. Ensure that other master servers are unchecked. Click Apply Selection.

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing alert policies

487

About managing alert policies

Table 8-1 lists the topics that describe how to manage alert policies. Table 8-1 Topic
See About OpsCenter alert policies on page 487. See Viewing the details for a single alert policy on page 489. See Filtering on type of alert policy on page 489. See About creating (or changing) an alert policy on page 490.

Topic contents and description Description

Explains the concept of alert policies.

Explains how to view the details for an alert policy. Explains how to filter and view the alert policies that are of interest to you. Explains how to create an alert policy using the Alert Policy Wizard.

See Managing an alert policy on page 508. Explains the tasks that are available for managing a single alert policy. Management includes tasks like editing, copying, deleting, activating, or deactivating an alert policy. See Viewing the alerts associated with an alert policy on page 509. Explains how you can view the alerts that are associated with an alert policy.

About OpsCenter alert policies

OpsCenter provides tools to create and manage alert policies and handle any resulting alerts that the policies generate. Alert policies help you manage your NetBackup environment by providing constant monitoring of your NetBackup systems. When certain events or conditions occur in your environment, OpsCenter helps you manage your NetBackup server network by generating alerts or sending email and trap notifications (or both). When a NetBackup system event triggers an alert (based on your alert policies), the following occurs:

OpsCenter sends email or SNMP notices to any recipients that are configured in the policy. The OpsCenter console displays views to help you track and manage these alerts.

You can specify email or SNMP notification in response to an alert, which lets administrators focus on other job responsibilities. Administrators do not need to monitor a terminal continuously.

488

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing alert policies

Alert policies are defined as informational, warning, major, or critical. Under certain circumstances there may be issues among multiple OpsCenter users. For instance, an OpsCenter user changes a policy while another user tries to remove the same policy.

Manage > Alert Policies view

This view is displayed when you select Manage > Alert Policies. This view displays detailed information for OpsCenter alert policies for the current View pane selection. See Controlling the scope of Manage views on page 486. An option called Ignore View filter has been added in the View drop-down list under Manage > Alert Policies. Ignore View filter is selected by default when you click Manage > Alert Policies. When you select Ignore View filter from the View Pane, all alert policies are displayed in the Manage > Alert Policies pane regardless of the views on which the alert policy is based. For example, selecting Ignore View filter displays an alert policy that is based on a view which has been deleted, or an alert policy that is based on a view for which you do not have access now. The table that appears in this view shows the following columns by default: Table 8-2 Column
Name

Manage > Alert Policies column headings Description

This column lists the name of the alert policy. Click the link to view details about the policy. This column lists the description for the alert policy. This column lists the alert condition that is used for the alert policy. Example: Hung Job, Job Finalized, High Frozen Media etc. See OpsCenter Alert conditions on page 490.

Description Alert Condition

Enabled

This column determines whether the alert policy is enabled or not. This column lists the severity that is associated with the alert policy. This column lists the severity of the email or trap that is sent when the alert is cleared.

Severity

Clear Severity

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing alert policies

489

Table 8-2 Column

Creation Time

Manage > Alert Policies column headings (continued) Description

This column lists the date and time when the alert policy was created. This column lists the date and time when the alert policy was last modified. This column lists the OpsCenter user who last modified the alert policy.

Modification Time

Modified By

Viewing the details for a single alert policy

All the details that are associated with an alert policy can be viewed from the bottom of the Manage > Alert Policies view under the General tab. The General tab displays all the details that are shown in the table. To view the details for a single alert policy

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, select Manage > Alert Policies. Click a drill-down link from the Name column. The alert policy details are shown at the bottom of this view under the General tab.

Filtering on type of alert policy

A filter is available in the Manage > Alert Policies view to limit the types of alert policies that appear. You can filter using any of the following three built-in filters. These filters are available from the drop-down list which is present on top of the table.
All Alert Policies Select this filter to view all alert policies.

Enabled Alert Select this filter to view the alert policies that are enabled. Policies Disabled Select this filter to view the alert policies that are disabled. Alert Policies

You can also create your own filters which let you focus on only the specific alert policies that interest you. See Creating, applying, editing, and removing custom view filters on page 87.

490

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing alert policies

To filter on type of alert policy

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, select Manage > Alert Policies. Select a filter from the drop-down list. Note that the drop-down list is located on top of the table.

About creating (or changing) an alert policy

You can create alert policies to detect when something goes wrong with NetBackup and troubleshoot it. You can create policies to automate responses to key events in your enterprise. For example, you can create a policy to alert you when a job fails on a specific master server. You can monitor for frozen media and email the operator when the number of frozen media exceeds a threshold value. You can then take corrective action. OpsCenter periodically retrieves data from NetBackup based on notifications and a wait time (of up to 15 minutes). This time delay between the NetBackup Activity Monitor and the OpsCenter console can mean that many intermediate job states may be lost. The following topics provide more information about alerts. See OpsCenter Alert conditions on page 490. See Additional information on job policy change condition on page 498. See Adding an alert policy on page 499. See About understanding alert counts in the Monitor view on page 507.

OpsCenter Alert conditions

OpsCenter comes with a set of predefined alert conditions. You can create alert policies based on these alert conditions to detect when something goes wrong in your NetBackup environment and troubleshoot NetBackup. The alerts help you to anticipate and handle problems before they occur. You can receive these alerts by logging on to OpsCenter, and also by email or SNMP traps. You can specify email and SNMP recipients while creating an alert policy. Alert conditions can be divided into the following categories:
Event-based alert conditions For these alert conditions, OpsCenter retrieves data from NetBackup based on notifications from NBSL. For these alert conditions, OpsCenter retrieves data from NetBackup based on a wait time (of up to 15 minutes).

Periodic alert conditions

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing alert policies

491

Table 8-3 lists the alert conditions, alert category, and descriptions.

492

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing alert policies

Table 8-3 Alert type

Job

Alert conditions in OpsCenter Alert condition Alert category

High job failure rate Hung job

Description

Event-based An alert is generated when the job failure rate becomes more than the specified rate. Periodic

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing alert policies

493

Table 8-3 Alert type

Alert conditions in OpsCenter (continued) Alert condition Alert category Description

An alert is generated when a job hangs (runs for more than the specified time) for a selected policy or a client for a specified period. The Hung Job condition is checked every 15 minutes. Depending upon when a job starts within a check cycle, an alert may not occur. For Hung Job alert, you can configure OpsCenter to ignore the time for which a job is in a queued state. While checking the Hung Job condition, OpsCenter considers the start time of a job by default. This also includes the time for which a job is in a queued state. A job may not always be in an active state after it starts. Due to unavailability of resources, a job may first be in a queued state before it becomes active. If you configure OpsCenter to ignore the queued time for a job, OpsCenter considers the time when a job becomes active while checking the Hung Job condition. Note that the active start time of the first attempt is considered. For example, suppose a policy is created with a job threshold of 25 minutes. A job starts 10 minutes after a first check cycle and ends 13 minutes after the third check cycle is done. This time is a total execution of 33 (5 + 15 + 13) minutes, but an alert is not raised. In this case, the policy is checked four times. The job was not yet started during the first check, was running less than the threshold during the second (job duration = 5 minutes) and third checks (job duration = 20 minutes), and the job completes (job duration = 33) before the fourth check. If a job starts at 4 minutes after a first check, an alert is raised at the third check, since the job has executed for 26 minutes (11 + 15 minutes). Job finalized Events-based

494

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing alert policies

Table 8-3 Alert type

Alert conditions in OpsCenter (continued) Alert condition Alert category Description

An alert is generated when a job of specified type, of the specified policy or client ended in the specified status. Incomplete Job Events-based An alert is generated when a job of a specified type of the specified policy or client moves to an Incomplete state. Events-based An alert is generated when any of the selected media is frozen.

Media

Frozen media

Suspended media Events-based An alert is generated when any of the selected media is suspended. Exceeded max media mounts Media required for restore Events-based An alert is generated when a media exceeds the threshold number of mounts. Events-based An alert is generated when a restore operation requires media. The restore operation may require a specific media which contains the specific image to be restored. Periodic An alert is generated when the number of available media becomes less than the predefined threshold value. An alert is generated when the percentage of suspended media exceeds the predefined threshold value. An alert is generated when the percentage of frozen media exceeds the predefined threshold value.

Low available media

High suspended media

Periodic

High frozen media

Periodic

Zero Cleaning Left

Events-based An alert is generated when a cleaning tape has zero cleaning left.

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing alert policies

495

Table 8-3 Alert type

Catalog

Alert conditions in OpsCenter (continued) Alert condition Alert category

Catalog Space low Periodic

Description
An alert is generated when space available for catalogs becomes less than the threshold value or size. For Catalog Space low condition, you can specify the threshold value for a particular policy in percentage, bytes, kilobytes (KB), megabytes (MB), gigabytes (GB), terabytes (TB) or petabytes (PB) and generate alerts. The generated alert can also show available catalog space using these units. An alert is generated when catalog backup does not take place for a predefined time period. This does not necessarily mean that if you do not receive this alert, the catalog backup was successful.

Catalog not Backed up

Periodic

Catalog Backup Disabled

Periodic

An alert is generated when all the catalog backup policies are disabled. If the policy has been defined for a server group, an alert is generated for every master server within the group that satisfies this criteria. The alert is not generated if no catalog backup policy exists for a master server.

496

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing alert policies

Table 8-3 Alert type

Device

Alert conditions in OpsCenter (continued) Alert condition Alert category

Mount Request

Description

Events-based An alert is generated on a media mount request. An alert is generated when no cleaning tapes are left.

No Cleaning Tape Periodic

Drive is Down

Events-based An alert is generated when a drive in a specified robot or media server in the selected server context goes down. Periodic An alert is generated when the percentage of down drives exceeds the predefined threshold value.

High Down Drives

OpenStorage

Events-based An alert is generated when specific events occur in the NetApp devices. See About the Open Storage alert condition on page 595. See Adding an alert policy on page 597.

Disk

Disk Pool Full

Events-based An alert is generated when a disk pool(s) reaches the high water mark. An alert policy based on Disk Pool Full condition generates an alert only when the used capacity of the disk pool reaches the high water mark. Events-based An alert is generated when the selected disk volume(s) is down. An alert is generated when a disk volume capacity is running below the threshold limit.

Disk Volume Down

Low Disk Volume Periodic Capacity

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing alert policies

497

Table 8-3 Alert type

Host

Alert conditions in OpsCenter (continued) Alert condition Alert category

Agent Server Communication break Periodic

Description
An alert is generated when the communication between Agent and OpsCenter Server breaks. By default, this alert is automatically cleared when the communication is re-established. An alert policy based on the Agent Server Communication Break condition is always based on the ALL MASTER SERVERS view. If you created an alert policy based on the Agent Server Communication Break condition, and you do not have access to the ALL MASTER SERVERS view, alerts are not generated for the alert policy.

Master Server Unreachable

Events-based An alert is generated when OpsCenter loses contact with the master server. This alert condition means that the connection between OpsCenter and the managed NetBackup master server is lost. It does not necessarily mean that NetBackup backups are not working.

Lost Contact with Events-based An alert is generated when OpsCenter loses Media Server contact with the media server. Others Service Stopped Events-based An alert is generated when the selected service stops on any of the selected servers in the selected view. Events-based An alert is generated when the Symantec ThreatCon level is equal to or more than the threshold level that you specify. To create the alert policy, select the Symantec ThreatCon alert condition and then specify the threshold ThreatCon rating. The Symantec ThreatCon alerts are cleared automatically when the ThreatCon level becomes less than the threshold level that you have specified. For example, if you have created an alert policy that alerts you when the Symantec ThreatCon level becomes 3, then the alert is cleared automatically once the ThreatCon level becomes 2 or less.

Symantec ThreatCon

498

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing alert policies

Table 8-3 Alert type

Alert conditions in OpsCenter (continued) Alert condition Alert category

Job Policy Change

Description

Events-based An alert is generated when a policy attribute for a job policy is changed. Multiple alerts are generated if multiple attributes are changed for a job policy See Additional information on job policy change condition on page 498. If you select a particular job policy, only the selected job policy is monitored for change. If you do not select any job policy, all the job policies are monitored for changes.

Additional information on job policy change condition

Review the following text for job policy alert condition. Only the following policy attributes are monitored for job policies:
Policy name Checkpoint interval Effective date Compression Block level incrementals Snapshot method Master server Collect bmr info Fail on error Frozen image Number of copies Residence Schedules Storage unit Policy client type Check point Backup network drives Encryption Offhost Snapshot arguments Client name Collect true image restore info Ext sec info Keyword phrase Off host backup Catalog Clients Volume pool

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing alert policies

499

Jobs/Policy Cross mount points Allow multiple data streams Alternate client Individual file restore from raw Block increment Data mover type File list Max fragmentation size Pfi enabled Data classification name Policy active

Priority True image recovery Keyword phrase Data mover Status Backup copy Disaster recovery Follows nfs mounts Max jobs per policy Proxy client Share group

Adding an alert policy

Follow the screens of the Alert Policy Wizard to define an alert policy. The required information and the required number of screens vary depending on the alert condition you choose. For some alert conditions, you can skip the optional screens. Note: The Alert Policy Wizard is also used when you edit an alert policy. To add an alert policy

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, select Manage > Alert Policies. Click Add. The Alert Policy Wizard appears. See Alert Policy Wizard on page 501.

Enter a Name, Description, and Alert Condition on the General panel. See OpsCenter Alert conditions on page 490. Click Next to continue. You may click Cancel to exit the wizard at any stage.

500

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing alert policies

On the Alert Condition Properties panel, specify attributes for the alert condition that you selected. The attributes differ for each alert condition. For many alert conditions (for example, for the Job Finalized condition), you may need to enter threshold attributes and other required or optional attributes. These attributes define and limit the alert. Click Next.

On the Scope panel, select the view that should be verified for the alert condition from the drop-down menu. You can select a view and a node that contains a group of master servers and also specific objects. You may also select only specific objects of a particular view or node to be checked for the alert condition. To select a specific object like a master server, first deselect the view or node that contains the master server and then select the master server. You may also deselect a specific master server from a view by selecting the view and then deselecting the specific master server. See Alert Policy Wizard on page 501. You must select at least one object or node for a view from this page. Click Next to continue. Note: This page is not shown if you have selected the Symantec ThreatCon alert condition. This is because the Symantec ThreatCon alert condition does not depend on any views or master servers.

Optionally, on the Actions panel, in the Email Recipients and Trap Recipients sections, you can select email or SNMP recipients (or both) to receive the alert notification. See Adding email recipients on page 506. See Adding SNMP trap recipients on page 507. Note that if you create an alert policy and do not define any recipients, the alert is still displayed in the Monitor > Alerts view.

Optionally on the Actions panel, do the following in the Severity section:

Select a severity level from the Alert Severity drop-down list. (If this alert occurs, the alert is displayed in the Monitor > Alerts view.) Select an appropriate severity level from the Severity of email/trap sent for cleared alert drop-down list. With Severity of email/trap sent for cleared alert option, you can configure the severity for an email or trap

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing alert policies

501

that is sent when an alert is cleared. The default severity level is Informational.

The Activate Condition option is checked by default. By default, the policy is active once you create it. Deselect the Activate Condition option if you want to deactivate the policy. You can always activate or deactivate the policy later from the OpsCenter console. See Managing an alert policy on page 508.

8 9

Click Save to save the alert policy. Click Finish once the policy is successfully created.

Alert Policy Wizard

The Alert Policy Wizard consists of four panels. Table 8-4 Setting
Name

Alert Policy Wizard General Panel Description

Enter a name for the alert policy. The name must be unique. Name is a required field.

Description Alert Condition

Enter a description for the alert policy. Select an alert condition from the list of alert conditions that are available. See OpsCenter Alert conditions on page 490.

502

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing alert policies

Table 8-5 Setting

Alert Policy Wizard Alert Condition Properties Panel Description

Specify attributes for the alert condition that you selected. The attributes differ for each alert condition. For many alert conditions (for example, for the Job Finalized condition), you may need to enter threshold attributes and other required or optional attributes. These attributes define and limit the alert. For alert conditions like High Job Failure Rate and Job Finalized, you may need to enter values for Exit Status to Include or Exit Status to Exclude field. You can provide multiple values in this field that are separated by comma in the following format: 20-35, 36, <40, >50 A value can be a range of exit status like 20-35 or all exit status below 40 like <40. Any combinations of this format can be used like 20-40, >55 or >70, 76

Specify properties for the selected alert condition

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing alert policies

503

Table 8-6 Setting

View

Alert Policy Wizard Scope Panel Description

504

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing alert policies

Table 8-6 Setting

Alert Policy Wizard Scope Panel (continued) Description

Select the view that should be verified for the alert condition. You can select a view and a node that contains a group of master servers and also specific objects. For example, you can select the default view ALL MASTER SERVERS to be checked for the alert condition. When you select a view like ALL MASTER SERVERS or a node that contains a group of master servers, all the master servers that are currently in the view or node are automatically selected. In addition, master servers that you may add later to this view or node are automatically selected and hence verified for the alert condition. You may also select only specific objects of a particular view or node to be checked for the alert condition. For example, you may select only a specific master server(s) under the default view ALL MASTER SERVERS to be checked for the alert condition. To select a specific master server, first deselect the view or node that contains the master server and then select the master server. You may also deselect a specific master server from a view by selecting the view and then deselecting the specific master server. Consider a scenario where there are two objects server A and server B in a particular view like ALL MASTER SERVERS. In case, you have selected the ALL MASTER SERVERS view and then specifically deselected server B , and in addition if you have selected a view or node that also contains server B, server B is not verified for the alert condition even though it is a part of the selected view or node. This is because you have specifically deselected server B from the ALLMASTERSERVER view. When you specifically deselect a master server from a view, which is also part of another selected view, the deselection or exclusion is given a higher priority because of which the master server is not verified for the alert condition. For this reason, it is recommended that you do not repeat a master server across groups. Note that you can also view and select additional attributes like policies, clients, media servers etc. on expanding the views and nodes from this page (wherever applicable). These attributes are located under the applicable views or nodes for specific alert conditions. For example, for the Job

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing alert policies

505

Table 8-6 Setting

Alert Policy Wizard Scope Panel (continued) Description

Finalized alert condition, you can select the view as well as the specific policies and clients that should be checked for the alert. You can view the applicable attributes like policy name, client name, media server name, robot number, drive IDs etc. for the following alert conditions:

Job Finalized Drive is Down Media Required for Restore Service Stopped Frozen Media Suspended Media Exceeded Max Media Mounts Disk Group Full Disk Volume Down Job Policy Changed Hung Job

Note: This page is not shown if you have selected the

Symantec ThreatCon alert condition. This is because the Symantec ThreatCon alert condition does not depend on any views or master servers. You must select at least one object, node, or view from this page.

Table 8-7 Setting

Email Recipients Trap Recipients Alert Severity

Alert Policy Wizard Actions Panel Description

Select email recipients to receive the alert notification. Select SNMP recipients to receive the alert notification. Select a severity level from the Alert Severity drop-down list. (If this alert occurs, the alert is displayed in the Monitor > Alerts view.)

506

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing alert policies

Table 8-7 Setting

Alert Policy Wizard Actions Panel (continued) Description

Select an appropriate severity level from the Severity of email/trap sent for cleared alert drop-down list. With Severity of email/trap sent for cleared alert option, you can configure the severity for an email or trap that is sent when an alert is cleared. The default severity level is Informational. In OpsCenter, an alert is raised with the severity specified in the alert policy. Whenever this alert is cleared, an email or trap informing the user that the alert is cleared is sent with the same severity that is defined in the alert policy. This is the default behavior. For example, you may have created an alert policy for a Hung Job alert condition with a Critical severity. As a result, you receive Hung Job alert with Critical severity. When this Hung Job alert gets cleared, you receive an email or trap that informs you that the alert has been cleared. This email or trap also has a Critical severity. You can now configure the severity for this email or trap from Critical to some other severity like Informational while creating the alert policy. Note that you can configure the severity only for email or trap.

Severity of email/trap sent for cleared alert

Activate the Policy

The Activate Condition option is checked by default. By default, the policy will be active once you create it. Deselect the Activate Condition option if you want to deactivate the policy. You can always activate or deactivate the policy later from the OpsCenter console. See Managing an alert policy on page 508.

See Adding an alert policy on page 499.

Adding email recipients

Follow this procedure to add email recipients to an Alert Policy. To add email recipients

1 2

While creating an alert policy using the Alert Policy Wizard, go to the Actions screen. On the Actions screen, click To, Cc, or Bcc from the Email Recipients section.

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing alert policies

507

In the Add Email Recipients dialog box, select the specific recipients from the Recipient Name column and click To, Cc, or Bcc based on your requirements. Click OK.

Adding SNMP trap recipients

Follow this procedure to add SNMP trap recipients to an Alert Policy. To add SNMP trap recipients

1 2 3 4

While creating an alert policy using the Alert Policy Wizard, go to the Actions screen. On the Actions screen, click To from the Trap Recipients section. In the Add Trap Recipients dialog box, select the specific recipients from the Recipient Name column and click To. Click OK.

Add Trap Recipients dialog box

In the Add Trap Recipients dialog box, select the specific recipients from the Recipient Name column and click To.

About understanding alert counts in the Monitor view

Alerts apply only to the object (master server) where the corresponding alert policy is created. When alerts are raised for that policy they are raised on the selected object. For example, a Frozen Media alert occurs when any of the selected media on the selected master server (object) are frozen. Consider a case where you create an alert policy for a selected view that contains two master servers. For creating the policy, you select an alert condition of type of Frozen Media. Since this master server is present in the view, the alert is listed when you select the specific server as well as the specific view from the View Pane. But some types of alerts, for example High Job Failure Rate apply across groups. In this case, jobs from all of the master servers in the selected group are used to calculate the job failure rate. The alert does not apply to a single master server in the group but applies to the server group on which the alert policy was created. This means that only one alert is raised for the group if the job failure rate for the servers in the selected group is more than a user-defined threshold. An alert is not generated for every master server that is a part of the group. Therefore, the alert is listed only when you select the server group on which alert policy is created (or a parent group of that group).

508

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing alert policies

If you create this type of alert policy for a single managed server, the alert is raised on the server since the server is the selected object. The alert can also be viewed if all the nodes or views that contain the master server are selected. The following OpsCenter alert policy conditions apply across groups:

High Down Drives High Frozen Media High Job Failure Rate High Suspended Media Low Disk Volume Capacity Low Available Media

Managing an alert policy

Use the following procedure to edit, delete, copy, activate, or deactivate an alert policy. You can copy and use an alert policy on another managed master server. The copy of the alert policy is available in the alert policy details table where you can make changes to it. To edit an alert policy

1 2 3

In the OpsCenter console, select Manage > Alert Policies. Select an alert policy from the Name column in the table. Click Edit. The Alert Policy Wizard is used to create or edit a policy. When you edit an alert policy, the alert condition specific to the policy is selected by default in the Alert Policy Wizard. You cannot select a different alert condition while editing an alert policy. See Adding an alert policy on page 499.

To delete an alert policy

1 2 3

In the OpsCenter console, select Manage > Alert Policies. Select an alert policy from the Name column in the table. Click Delete.

To copy an alert policy

1 2 3

In the OpsCenter console, select Manage > Alert Policies. Select an alert policy from the Name column in the table. Click More and then click Copy from the drop-down list.

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup storage

509

4 5

In the Copy Alert Policy dialog box, enter the new name for the alert policy. Click OK. The copy of the alert policy is available in the alert policy details table where you can make changes to it.

To enable or disable an alert policy

1 2 3

In the OpsCenter console, select Manage > Alert Policies. Select an alert policy from the Name column in the table. Click More and then click Enable or Disable from the drop-down list.

Viewing the alerts associated with an alert policy

Use the following procedure to view the alerts that are associated with an alert policy. To view the alerts associated with an alert policy

1 2 3

In the OpsCenter console, select Manage > Alert Policies. Select an alert policy from the Name column in the table. Click More and then select View Alerts from the drop-down list.

About managing NetBackup storage

This view is displayed when you select Manage > Storage. Included in this view are subtabs for Storage Unit, Storage Unit Group, and Storage Lifecycle Policy. Using these subtabs you can view detailed information about NetBackup storage for the current View pane selection. See Controlling the scope of Manage views on page 486. Table 8-8 lists the topics on how to manage NetBackup storage. Table 8-8 Topic Topic contents and descriptions Description

See Manage > Storage > Storage Unit view Explains the capabilities that are available on page 510. using the Manage > Storage > Storage Unit view. See Manage > Storage > Storage Unit Group Explains the capabilities that are available view on page 512. using the Manage > Storage > Storage Unit Group view.

510

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup storage

Table 8-8 Topic

Topic contents and descriptions (continued) Description

Explains the capabilities that are available using the Manage > Storage > Storage Lifecycle Policy view.

See Manage > Storage > Storage Lifecycle Policy view on page 513.

Manage > Storage > Storage Unit view

This view is displayed when you select Manage > Storage > Storage Unit. This view shows the details for a storage unit for the current View pane selection. There is one row in the table for each storage unit for the current selection in the View pane. See Controlling the scope of Manage views on page 486. The table that appears in this view shows the following columns by default: Table 8-9 Column Heading
Name

Manage > Storage > Storage Unit view Description

This column lists the name of the storage unit. Click the link to view details about the storage unit. This column specifies the type of robot (if any) that the storage unit contains. This column specifies a unique, logical identification number for the robotic library. This column lists the density of the storage unit. This column specifies whether the storage unit is available exclusively on demand. This happens only when a policy or schedule is explicitly configured to use this storage unit. . This column specifies the absolute path to a file system or a volume available for disk backups.

Robot Type

Robot Number

Density On Demand

Path

Not all of the available columns appear initially in this view. The following columns do not appear, but can be added to your view by clicking the Table Settings icon:

Storage Unit Type Capacity Free Space

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup storage

511

High Water Mark Max. Concurrent Jobs Staging Low Water Mark Can Exist On Root NDMP Host Enable Block Sharing Transfer Throttle Master Server Last Seen Time Host Fragment Size Multiplexing Disk Type Time Last Selected Disk Pool Host List Configured for Snapshots Primary Replication

See the online NetBackup Administration Console Help for a detailed description of these fields. More information about how to customize tables and view specific columns is available. See About using tables on page 83. The following task can be performed from this view:
View the details for a single storage unit See Viewing the details for a single storage unit on page 512.

512

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup storage

Viewing the details for a single storage unit

Use the following procedure to view the details for a single storage unit. To view details for a single storage unit

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, select Manage > Storage > Storage Unit. Click a storage unit name (drilldown link) from the Name column in the table. The storage unit details are shown at the bottom of this view under the General tab. This tab displays many of the available columns of the table.

Manage > Storage > Storage Unit Group view

This view is displayed when you select Manage > Storage > Storage Unit Group. This view shows the details for a storage unit group for the current View pane selection. The table contains one row for each storage unit group for the current selection in the View pane. See Controlling the scope of Manage views on page 486. The table that appears in this view shows the following columns by default: Table 8-10 Column heading
Name

Manage > Storage > Storage Unit Group view Description

This column lists the name of the storage unit group. Click the link to view details about the storage unit group. This column specifies the order that storage units are selected when they are included in a group. . This column specifies the date and time when the storage unit group was last seen.

Storage Unit Selection

Last Seen Time

Not all of the available columns appear initially in this view. The following columns do not appear, but can be added to your view by clicking the Table Settings icon:

Configured for Snapshots Primary Replication

The following task can be performed from this view:

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup storage

513

View the details for a single storage unit group

See Viewing the details for a single storage unit group on page 513.

Viewing the details for a single storage unit group

Use the following procedure to view the details for a storage unit group. The storage unit group details are shown at the bottom of this view under the following tabs:
General This tab shows the details of the storage unit group that are also shown in the table. This tab shows the details of the storage units that are a part of the storage unit group.

Storage Unit

To view details for a single storage unit group

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, select Manage > Storage > Storage Unit Group. Click the name of a storage unit group (drilldown link) from the Name column in the table.

Manage > Storage > Storage Lifecycle Policy view

This view is displayed when you select Manage > Storage > Storage Lifecycle Policy. This view shows the storage lifecycle policy details for the current View pane selection. A storage lifecycle consists of one or more storage units. The table contains one row for each Storage lifecycle policy for the current selection in the View pane. See Controlling the scope of Manage views on page 486. The table that appears in this view shows the following columns by default: Table 8-11 Column heading
Name

Manage > Storage > Storage Lifecycle Policy view Description

This column lists the name of the storage lifecycle policy. Click the link to view details about the storage lifecycle Policy. This column lists the version of the storage lifecycle policy.

Version

514

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup storage

Table 8-11 Column heading

Manage > Storage > Storage Lifecycle Policy view (continued) Description
This column lists the data classification that has been selected for the storage lifecycle, which applies to all of the storage units in the lifecycle. For example, the data might be classified as gold or silver. This column specifies the priority that a policy has for backup resources. The default for all policies is 0, the lowest priority possible. Any policy with a priority greater than zero has priority over the default setting. . This column lists the master server that is associated with the storage lifecycle Policy. Click the link to view more details about the master server.

Data Classification

Job Priority

Master Server

The following tasks can be performed from this view:

View the details of a single storage lifecycle See Viewing the details for a single storage policy lifecycle policy on page 514. View the details of a master server that is associated with a storage lifecycle policy See Viewing the details for a master server associated with a storage lifecycle policy on page 515.

Viewing the details for a single storage lifecycle policy

Use the following procedure to view the details for a single storage lifecycle Policy. The details are shown at the bottom of this view under the following tabs:
General This tab shows the details of the storage unit group that are also shown in the table. This tab shows the details of the storage destinations that are a part of the storage lifecycle policy.

Storage Destinations

To view the details for a storage lifecycle policy

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, select Manage > Storage > Storage Lifecycle Policy. Click the name of a storage lifecycle policy (drilldown link) from the Name column in the table.

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup devices

515

Viewing the details for a master server associated with a storage lifecycle policy
Use the following procedure to view the details for a master server that is associated with a storage lifecycle policy. The details are shown on a separate page. To view the details for a master server associated with a storage lifecycle Policy

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, select Manage > Storage > Storage Lifecycle Policy. Click the name of the master server (drilldown link) from the Master Server column in the table.

About managing NetBackup devices

Under certain circumstances there may be issues among multiple OpsCenter users managing devices. For instance, a user brings a drive down while another user tries to bring up the same drive. Table 8-12 lists the topics on how to manage NetBackup devices. Table 8-12 Topic
See Manage > Devices > Drive view on page 515. See Manage > Devices > Robot view on page 519. See Manage > Devices > Disk Pool view on page 521.

Topic contents and descriptions Description

Explains the capabilities that are available using the Manage > Devices > Drive view. Explains the capabilities that are available using the Manage > Devices > Robot view. Explains the capabilities that are available using the Manage > Devices > Disk Pool view. Explains the capabilities that are available using the Manage > Devices > SAN Client view. Explains the capabilities that are available using the Manage > Devices > FT Server view.

See Manage > Devices > SAN Client view on page 524.

See Manage > Devices > FT Server view on page 526.

Manage > Devices > Drive view

This view is displayed when you select Manage > Devices > Drive. This view shows details for the drives that are configured for use by NetBackup for the current

516

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup devices

View pane selection. This view shows information about all the drives and also includes disabled or unreachable drives. See Controlling the scope of Manage views on page 486. The table that appears in this view shows the following columns by default: Table 8-13 Column Heading
Drive Name

Manage > Devices > Drive view Description

This column lists the configured name of the drive. Click the link to view details about the drive. This column lists the name of the device host (media server) where this drive is attached. If multiple drive paths are configured, this column contains Multiple. If the drive is configured as a shared drive (SSO), this column contains Multiple. This column lists the name of the master server that is associated with the drive. This column specifies the type of drive. Example: hcart2, hcart3, 4MM.

Device Host

Master Server

Drive Type

Robot Type

This column specifies the type of robot that contains this drive. Example: TL4, TLD.

Enabled

This column contains Yes if the path is enabled. The column contains No if the path is not enabled. If multiple drive paths are configured, this column contains Multiple.

Not all of the available columns appear initially in this view. The following columns do not appear, but can be added to your view by clicking the Table Settings icon:

Serial Number Cleaning Frequency Shared Inquiry Information Volume Header Path ACS LSM

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup devices

517

Panel Drive Vendor Drive Identifier Robot Number Robot Drive Number Recorded Media ID Assigned Host Control Host Name Evsn Last Clean Time Local Control Mounted Time NDMP Occupy Index Opr Comment Ready Request ID Scan Host VM Host Write Enabled

See the online NetBackup Administration Console Help for a detailed description of these fields. More information about how to customize tables and view specific columns is available. See About using tables on page 83. The following tasks can be performed from this view:
View the details for a single drive See Viewing the details for a single drive on page 518. See Viewing the details for a master server associated with a drive on page 518.

View the details of a master server that is associated with a drive

518

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup devices

Use filters to view specific drives

See Filtering on NetBackup drive category on page 518.

Viewing the details for a single drive

Use the following procedure to view the details of a single drive. To view the details for a single drive

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, select Manage > Devices > Drive. Click the name of the drive (drilldown link) from the Drive Name column in the table. Detailed properties and status for the drive are shown at the bottom of the view under the General tab. The Paths tab shows the paths that were configured for the drive.

Viewing the details for a master server associated with a drive

Use the following procedure to view the details of a master server that is associated with a drive. To view the details for a master server

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, select Manage > Devices > Drive. Click the name of the drive (drilldown link) from the Master Server column in the table. Details for the specific master server are shown on a separate page.

Filtering on NetBackup drive category

You can sort and filter this view to focus on the specific type of drives that you want to see. For example, you can apply a filter that displays only those drives that are up. You can filter by using any of the built-in filters. These filters are available from the drop-down list which is present on top of the table. The following built-in filters are available:
All Drives All Drives is the default filter. Select this filter to view all drives. Select this filter to view only those drives that are up. For up drives, all drive paths are up.

Up Drives

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup devices

519

Down Drives

Select this filter to view only those drives that are down. For down drives, all drive paths are down. Select this filter to view mixed drives. For mixed drives, some drive paths are up and some drive paths are down.

Mixed Drives

In addition to using the built-in filters, you can also create your own custom filters. See Creating, applying, editing, and removing custom view filters on page 87. To filter details by type of drive

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, select Manage > Devices > Drive. Select a filter from the drop-down list. Note that the drop-down list is located on top of the table.

Manage > Devices > Robot view

This view is displayed when you select Manage > Devices > Robot. This view shows details for the robots that are configured for use by NetBackup for the current View pane selection. See Controlling the scope of Manage views on page 486. The table that appears in this view shows the following columns by default: Table 8-14 Column heading
Robot Name

Manage > Devices > Robot view Description

This column contains the name of the robot. The robot name contains the type and number of the robot, for example TLD(3). Click the link to view details about the robot.

Device Host

This column lists the name of the device host where this robot is attached. Click the link to view details about the device host.

Serial Number Robot Control Host

This column contains the robot serial number. If the robot is controlled by a remote host, this column contains the name of the host that controls the robot.

520

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup devices

Table 8-14 Column heading

Master Server

Manage > Devices > Robot view (continued) Description

This column lists the master server that is associated with the robot. Click the link to view details about the master server.

Not all of the available columns appear initially in this view. The following columns do not appear, but can be added to your view by clicking the Table Settings icon:

Robot Type Robot Number Inquiry Information Last Seen Time Max Drive Max Slot Remote ID VM Host

See the online NetBackup Administration Console Help for a detailed description of these fields. More information about how to customize tables and view specific columns is available. See About using tables on page 83. The following tasks can be performed from this view:
View the details of a robot See Viewing the details for a single robot on page 520. See Viewing the details for a master server associated with a robot on page 521. See Viewing the details of a device host associated with a robot on page 521.

View the details for a master server that is associated with a robot View the details for the device host that is associated with a robot

Viewing the details for a single robot

Use the following procedure to view the details of a single robot.

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup devices

521

To view the details for a single robot

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, select Manage > Devices > Robot. Click the name of the robot (drilldown link) from the Robot Name column in the table. Detailed properties for the robot are shown at the bottom of the view under the General tab. The Paths tab shows the paths that were configured for the robot.

Viewing the details for a master server associated with a robot

Use the following procedure to view the details of a master server that is associated with a robot. To view the details for a master server associated with a robot

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, select Manage > Devices > Robot. Click the name of the master server (drilldown link) from the Master Server column in the table. Detailed properties for the master server are shown on a separate page.

Viewing the details of a device host associated with a robot

Use the following procedure to view the details of a device host that is associated with a robot. To view the details for a device host associated with a robot

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, select Manage > Devices > Robot. Click the name of the master server (drilldown link) from the Device Host column in the table. Detailed properties for the device host are shown on a separate page.

Manage > Devices > Disk Pool view

This view is displayed when you select Manage > Devices > Disk Pool. This view shows details for the disk pools that are configured for use by NetBackup in the current View pane selection. See Controlling the scope of Manage views on page 486. The table that appears in this view shows the following columns by default:

522

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup devices

Table 8-15 Column heading

Name Server Type

Manage > Devices > Disk Pool view Description

This column lists the name of the disk pool This column lists the storage server type. For OpenStorage, the server type depends on the vendor name. This column lists the number of disk volumes in the disk pool. This column lists the amount of storage space in use. This column lists the available space in the disk pool in GB. This column lists the total raw, unformatted size of the storage in the disk pool. This column lists the estimated amount of disk space available for storage after file metadata overhead is taken into account. This column lists the low water mark for the disk pool. (The default is 80%.) When the capacity of the disk pool returns to the low water mark, NetBackup again assigns jobs to the storage unit. This column lists the high water mark for the disk pool (The default is 98%.). This column lists how full the disk pool is in percentage. This column lists the name of the master server (link) that is associated with the disk pool. This column lists the state of the disk pool like Up.

Number of Volumes

Used Capacity Available Space Raw Size

Usable Size

Low Watermark (%)

High Watermark (%)

% Full Master Server

State

Not all of the available columns appear initially in this view. The following columns do not appear, but can be added to your view by clicking the Table Settings icon:

Imported Configured for Snapshots Primary Replication

See the online NetBackup Administration Console Help for a detailed description of these fields.

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup devices

523

More information about how to customize tables and view specific columns is available. See About using tables on page 83. The following tasks can be performed from this view:
View the details for a disk pool See Viewing the details for a disk pool on page 523. See Viewing the details for a master server associated with a disk pool on page 523.

View the details for a master server

Viewing the details for a disk pool

Use the following procedure to view the details for a disk pool. The details for the disk pool are shown at the bottom of the Manage > Devices > Disk Pool view under the following tabs:
General This tab shows the detailed properties for a disk pool. Click the master server link to view details about the master server that is associated with the disk pool. Disk Volume This tab shows details about the disk volumes that are associated with the disk pool. This tab shows details about the storage servers that are associated with the disk pool.

Storage Server

To view the details for a disk pool

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, select Manage > Devices > Disk Pool. Click the name of the disk pool (drilldown link) from the Name column in the table. The details are shown at the bottom of this view.

Viewing the details for a master server associated with a disk pool
Use the following procedure to view the details of a master server that is associated with a SAN client.

524

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup devices

To view the details for a master server associated with a disk pool

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, select Manage > Devices > Disk Pool. Click the name of the master server (drilldown link) from the Master Server column in the table. Detailed properties for the master server are shown on a separate page.

Manage > Devices > SAN Client view

This view is displayed when you select Manage > Devices > SAN Client. This view shows details for the SAN clients that are configured for use by NetBackup in the current View pane selection. See Controlling the scope of Manage views on page 486. The table that appears in this view shows the following columns by default: Table 8-16 Column heading
Name State

Manage > Devices > SAN Client view Description

This column lists the name of the SAN client. This column lists the state of the FT device on the SAN client. The different states can be active, disabled etc.

Usage Preference No. of FT Media Servers

This column determines when to use the FT media server. This column lists the number of NetBackup media servers that support FT transport and that the client can send data to or receive data from. The number of minutes to wait for an FT media server for a backup operation. The number of minutes to wait for an FT media server for a restore operation. This column lists the master server that is associated with the SAN client.

Backup Wait Period

Restore Wait Period

Master Server

The Version column does not appear, but can be added to your view by clicking the Table Settings icon. The following task can be performed from this view:

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup devices

525

View the details of a SAN client

See Viewing the details for a SAN client on page 525. See Viewing the details for a master server associated with a SAN client on page 525.

View the details of a master server that is associated with a SAN client

Viewing the details for a SAN client

Use the following procedure to view the details of a SAN client. The details for the SAN Client are shown at the bottom of Manage > Devices > SAN Client view under the following tabs:
General This tab shows detailed properties and status for the SAN client. Click the master server link to view details about the master server that is associated with the SAN client. This tab shows the FT target devices information for the selected SAN client.

FT device

To view the details for a SAN client

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, select Manage > Devices > SAN Client. Click the name of the SAN client (drilldown link) from the Name column in the table. The details are shown at the bottom of this view.

Viewing the details for a master server associated with a SAN client
Use the following procedure to view the details of a master server that is associated with a SAN client. To view the details for a master server associated with a SAN client

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, select Manage > Devices > SAN Client. Click the name of the master server (drilldown link) from the Master Server column in the table. Detailed properties for the master server are shown on a separate page.

526

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup devices

Manage > Devices > FT Server view

This view is displayed when you select Manage > Devices > FT Server. This view shows details for the FT media servers that are configured for use by NetBackup for the current View pane selection. See Controlling the scope of Manage views on page 486. The table that appears in this view shows the following columns by default: Table 8-17 Column heading
Name

Manage > Devices > FT Server view Description

This column contains the name of the FT media server. Click the link to view details about the robot.

State Master Server

This column lists the state of the FT media server. This column lists the master server that is associated with the FT server. This column specifies the number of FT connections to allow to a media server.

Max Allowed Connections

The following tasks can be performed from this view:

View the details of an FT server See Viewing the details for an FT server on page 526. See Viewing the details for a master server associated with an FT server on page 527.

View the details for a master server that is associated with an FT server

Viewing the details for an FT server

Use the following procedure to view the details for an FT server. The details for the FT server are shown at the bottom of Manage > Devices > FT Server view under the following tabs:
General This tab shows detailed properties and status for the FT server. This tab shows the FT target devices information for the selected FT server.

FT device

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations

527

To view the details for an FT server

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, select Manage > Devices > FT Server. Click the name of the Fibre Transport server (drilldown link) from the Name column in the table. The details are shown at the bottom of this view.

Viewing the details for a master server associated with an FT server

Use the following procedure to view the details of a master server that is associated with an FT server. To view the details for a master server associated with an FT server

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, select Manage > Devices > FT Server. Click the name of the master server (drilldown link) from the Master Server column in the table. Detailed properties for the master server are shown on a separate page.

About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations

Use the Manage > Restore tab to perform operational restore or Guided recovery operations. The Restore subtab is not visible when you log on as Reporter. The Restore Files and Directories link is enabled only if you have permission to access either a client view or a master server view and if any client or master server is connected to the OpsCenter console. The Clone Oracle Database link is enabled only if you are permitted to access a master server view or if a master server is connected to the OpsCenter console.

About Operational Restores from OpsCenter

You can now search for and restore the backed up files or directories from multiple source clients easily from the OpsCenter console. The OpsCenter console lets you search for and view the backed up files or directories for multiple source clients in a consolidated manner. Before restoring files and directories from the OpsCenter console, review the following considerations:

You must have backups of files and directories that you want to restore.

528

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations

You can search for and restore files and directories only from NetBackup 7.5 master servers. You cannot search for or restore files and directories from NetBackup master servers prior to 7.5. The NetBackup client that is attached to a NetBackup 7.5 master server can be at 7.5 or a lower version that is supported. Note that you may have backed up files and directories using previous NetBackup versions. If you upgrade from an earlier NetBackup version to NetBackup 7.5, the backups that you have taken with the earlier version can be searched and restored using OpsCenter 7.5. You must add the NetBackup 7.5 master server to the OpsCenter console for restoring files and directories from a client that is associated with the master server. View-based access is used to control the clients that you can search and restore to. Only those views are displayed that you can access. Only one user session is allowed per user at a given time. OpsCenter supports normal restores only. Other restore types like Archived, Raw Partition, True Image, Virtual Machine etc. are not supported. For VMWare or HyperV clients, the search and restore operations work only if the client name is the same as hostname. If the client name is the same as display name, UUID, or DNS name then only the Search functionality is available. You cannot perform restore operations in this case. The following table provides the details on whether the Search and Restore functionality is available when the client name is the Host name, display name, UUID, DNS name etc.: Client Name Type
Host Name Display Name UUID DNS Name

Search
Yes Yes Yes Yes

Restore
Yes No No No

About timeframe selection

You can search for files and directories that were backed up in a specific timeframe. The following options are available:

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations

529

Today

If you have backed up a file today and want to restore it, select Today. The timeframe is displayed on the left side of the page at the top. For example, if today is May 31st, OpsCenter searches all files and directories that were backed up from May 31, 2011 12 A.M. to June 1, 2011 12 A.M.

Day

Select Day if you want to view the files and directories that were backed up in the last 24 hours. The time interval associated with the selected timeframe (Day) is displayed on the left side of the page. You can also adjust the time interval by clicking the arrows on the left and right respectively. For example, if you select Day and click Search on January 10th, 11:00 A.M. then OpsCenter searches files and directories that were backed up from Jan 9, 2012 11:00 A.M. to Jan 10, 2012 11:00 A.M.

Week

Select Week if you want to view files and directories that were backed up in the last seven days. The time interval associated with the selected timeframe (Week) is displayed on the left side of the page. You can also adjust the time interval by clicking the arrows on the left and right respectively. This is selected by default. Select Month if you want to view files and directories that were backed up in the last month. The time interval associated with the selected timeframe (Month) is displayed on the left side of the page. You can also adjust the time interval by clicking the arrows on the left and right respectively. Select 90 Days if you want to view files and directories that were backed up in the last 90 days. The time interval associated with the selected timeframe (90 Days) is displayed on the left side of the page. You can also adjust the time interval by clicking the arrows on the left and right respectively. Select Year if you want to view files and directories that were backed up one year prior to the current date. The time interval associated with the selected timeframe (Year) is displayed on the left side of the page. You can also adjust the time interval by clicking the arrows on the left and right respectively.

Month

90 Days

Year

530

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations

Customize

You can customize the timeframe selection by clicking Customize and specifying an absolute timeframe or relative timeframe. Using the Customize option, you can view data for any timeframe that you want like you can view backed up data for the previous three weeks. The time interval associated with the selected timeframe is displayed on the left side of the page.

About the Restore Operator

A new user role named Restore Operator has been added to control access to the Manage > Restore view. You can view Manage > Restore only when you log on to OpsCenter with the following roles:

Security Administrator Administrator Restore Operator Operator

The Restore subtab is not visible when you log on as Reporter. The Restore Operator can only select and perform operations on restore jobs in the Monitor > Jobs view. The Restore Operator can neither select any other jobs (like backup jobs) nor perform any operations on them like cancel, restart, resume etc. See User access rights and UI functions in OpsCenter on page 287. Note: In addition, view-based access is used to control the clients that you can search and restore to. Only those views are displayed that you can access.

Files and Directories Restore Wizard

The Files and Directories Restore Wizard consists of three panels.

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations

531

Table 8-18 Panel

Files and Directories Restore Wizard Description

The Search Files or Directories panel allows you to perform simple or advanced search operations for locating specific files or directories that you want to restore. You can restore these files and directories later by adding them to the Restore Cart. The Restore Cart also allows you to add files from multiple search and browse operations to a Cart. On this panel, you can see Select Files or Directories > Search view by default. You can also browse other tabs and subtabs like Restore Cart and Browse. See Select Files or Directories > Search options on page 531. See Select Files or Directories > Browse options on page 547. See Restore Cart on page 551.

Search Files or Directories

Restore Options

The Restore Options panel lets you select a number of restore options like destination client and paths, overwrite options etc. for the selected client. See Restore Options panel on page 553.

Summary

The Summary panel displays the list of files or directories that you selected for restore. See Summary panel on page 559.

Search Files or Directories panel

Use the Select Files or Directroies panel to search files and directories, browse clients, or use the Restore Cart.

Select Files or Directories > Search options

This view is shown by default when you select Manage > Restore and then click the Restore Files and Directories link. The Select Files or Directories > Search view lets you perform simple or advanced search operations based on the timeframe and search options that you select. When you select a specific timeframe, only the backups that occurred in the selected timeframe are searched.

532

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations

By default, the files or directories that are backed up over the last one month are searched. The following search options are displayed when you select Select Files or Directories > Search:

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations

533

File or Directory name

534

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations

Enter the name of the file or directory that you want to search for. This is a mandatory field. For UNIX clients, the search pattern may optionally begin with a / to indicate that the matching should start at the root directory. A pattern may optionally end with a / for UNIX clients or \ for Windows clients to indicate that only directory matches are returned. You can search by the following methods: Enter a full path name. OpsCenter searches for the specific path and file in the selected clients, timeframe, and as per any advanced search criteria that you entered. Use forward slash (/) as the path delimiter for UNIX and back slash (\) as the path delimiter for Windows. Enter a specific file or directory name. OpsCenter searches for the specific file or directory (folder) in the selected clients, timeframe, and as per any advanced search criteria that you entered.. Add a * or a ? wildcard to the entry. If you do not know the exact directory (folder) or file name, add one of these wildcards to the string. This is valid for both Windows and UNIX clients. Examples: Enter *.doc to view the files that end with that suffix.

Enter ca?.doc to view all the files that have one character after ca and a .doc extension. Enter etc/hos* to view files named hos* immediately inside directory etc. Enter C:\backup* to view files named backup* immediately inside C:. Enter /etc/hos* to view files named hos* immediately inside directory etc. The etc directory must be a first level directory. Enter trace\backup* to view files immediately inside directory named trace.

Enter etc//hos* to view files named hos* immediately inside etc or any subdirectory of etc. Enter C:\\backup* to view files named backup* immediately inside C: or any subdirectory of C:.

Note: You cannot search by only typing * in the text box.

This is not supported.

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations

535

In addition, you cannot search by using a pattern like /path/* on UNIX or path\* on Windows. To find related results, you can search using path* or path. Search within Clients In this field, you can specify the set of clients whose backup information you want to search. You can search multiple clients that are associated with one or more views or master servers at a given time. Select one or more clients that are associated with one master server. A table appears that provides details like client name, the master server that it is associated with and a link to remove the client. To add the clients that are associated with a different view or master server, select the view, master server, and then type in or browse for the clients. View Select a view from the View drop-down list. Only the following views are displayed in the View drop-down list:

Views that you have access to Client type or Master Server type views

If you select a view of type Master Server, all NetBackup 7.5 master servers that are added to the view are displayed in the Master Server drop-down list. If you select a client-type view, the Master Server drop-down list is disabled. Master Server Select a master server from the Master Server drop-down list. All NetBackup 7.5 master servers that are a part of the selected view are displayed.

Note: Only NetBackup 7.5 master servers are displayed in

the Master Server drop-down list. Even if you have master servers below 7.5 in the selected view, those master servers do not appear in the Master Server drop-down list. The Master Server drop-down list is disabled in the following scenario: If you select a client-type view from the View drop-down list If you have access to client-type views only

To restore backed up files and directories (folders) on a client, first ensure that the master server that is associated with the client is added to the OpsCenter console.

536

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations

Client

Specify the clients whose backup information you want to search. If you remember the client name, type the client name in the Client text box. Once you start typing the client name like a1, the protected clients that begin with these characters automatically appear beneath the drop-down list (auto-complete field). Select the client name when it appears. As you select the clients that you want to search, a table appears beneath that provides details like client name that you selected for search, the master server that it is associated with and a link to remove the client. Click Remove if you want to remove the specific client.

Note: Only those clients on which files and directories are

backed up (or protected clients) are displayed when you type in a client name or browse for a client. Clients that do not have any backups are not displayed.

Note: In addition, only those clients are displayed for which

the user has been granted access through a view. If you do not remember any client names or simply want to browse through the clients, click the Browse and select client link and select a list of protected clients that are associated with a master server or a client-type view. See Browse Client dialog box on page 539.

Note: The time to display search results may increase with

the number of selected clients.

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations

537

Advanced Search

538

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations

You can also search on the basis of more advanced parameters in addition to the simple search parameters. Click Advanced Search if you want to search using additional parameters like policy type, backup type, file size, policy name etc. These are optional parameters. You are presented with the following options for an advanced search operation:

Policy Name Enter a policy name to view the backups that are associated with the specific policy. Policy type By selecting the policy type, you can view the backups that are associated with the selected policy type. For restoring files and directories, policy types like FlashBackup, FlashBackup - Windows, MS-Windows, NDMP, Standard, Hyper-V, and VMware are supported. You can select only one policy type from the drop-down list. Policy associated keywords By specifying the policy associated keyword, you can view the backups that are associated with the specific keyword. Backup type By selecting the Backup type, you can view the backups that are associated with the selected backup type. You can select multiple backup types. Select File Extensions You can select one or more file extensions that you want to view from the Select file extensions drop-down list. The following file extensions are listed: txt

doc docx pdf xls xlsx ppt pptx

If a file extension is not listed, then you can type it under the Specify extension option Once you select or specify the file extensions, click Add. The selected file extensions are displayed in the list box on the right-hand side.

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations

539

Case-insensitive search This option is checked by default. You can uncheck the case-insensitive search option to make your search case-sensitive.

The case-sensitive search applies to file or directory name and file extensions only. File/Directory modification time With this option you can search based on when the file or directory was last modified. The default selection is Any. In addition to other options, you can also specify an absolute timeframe by selecting Specify date and time range.and select From and To timeframes.

Note: A command named nbfindfile has been added that lets you search files or directories based on simple search criteria. This command can be executed from the NetBackup master server (and not the OpsCenter Server). See nbfindfile on page 1042.

Browse Client dialog box

You can also browse to view and select clients that are associated with a master server or a view. This option may be helpful if you do not remember any client names or if you want to browse through the clients that are associated with master servers or a view. When you click Browse and select client link from Search files or directories > Search view, the Browse Clients dialog box is displayed. The following options are displayed in the dialog box:
Selected View The view that you select from the View drop-down list is displayed. If you select a view of type Master Server, all NetBackup 7.5 master servers that are added to the view are displayed under the Name column. If you select a client-type view, the clients are displayed under the selected view in the Name column.

540

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations

Filter Clients

You may want to view specific clients when the client list is large. To filter specific clients, enter client name, part of a client name, or add the * wildcard. For example, when you enter ary in the Filter Clients field, then OpsCenter displays all results that start with or contain ary string. Click Apply Filter to apply this filter and view the filtered clients. Click Clear Filter to clear the filtered view and see all the clients.

Name

If you select a Master Server type view, then each master server (with a yellow folder icon) is displayed under the Name column with a + sign next to it. When you expand a master server, you can see the protected clients that are associated with it. If you select a Client-type view, you can view clients under the Name column. Select the checkbox next to one or more clients and click OK. A table appears that provides details like client name that are selected for search, the master server that the client is associated with and a link to remove the client. Click Remove if you want to remove the specific client.

Note: The time to display search results may

increase with the number of selected clients.

Performing a simple or advanced search

To restore a specific file or directory, you may first need to know the location of the file or directory. You can either perform a simple or advanced search. For performing a simple search, you must select the timeframe, enter a file or directory name (full, partial, or wildcard) or path along with the client name. By default, timeframe of the last one month is selected. This means that files or directories that were backed up over the last one month are searched by default.

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations

541

While performing an advanced search, you can specify additional optional parameters like policy name, policy or backup type etc. in addition to the simple search parameters. Use the following procedure to search files and directories for restore. To search and select files and directories for restore

1 2 3

In the OpsCenter console, click Manage > Restore. Click Restore Files and Directories under Files and Directories. The contents of the Select files or directories > Search tab are displayed by default. From this view, you can search and select the files and directories that you want to restore. You can either perform a simple search or an advanced search. Instead of searching and selecting files, you can also browse and select the backed up files and directories on a client for restore. See Browsing for files and directories on a client on page 550.

Select a timeframe that you want to search. The default timeframe that is selected is Month. See About timeframe selection on page 528.

542

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations

In the Search files and directories based on name, path, wildcards etc. section, enter the following parameters. To perform a simple search operation, enter all the details in Search files and directories based on name, path, wildcards etc. section. See Select Files or Directories > Search options on page 531. You can select multiple clients from one or more views or master servers to be searched at a given time. To search for clients from multiple views or master servers, you must enter details in the Search within Clients section for each view or master server. For example, to search for clients from two master servers, select the first master server and then select clients for the first master server. Similarly, complete the Search within Clients section for the second master server. You can use the same procedure to add clients from different views. The clients that you selected for search are displayed in a table in this section. The table displays the following details:
Client Name This column displays the client name that is searched. This column displays the master server that is associated with the specific client. Click Remove if you do not want the backup information of the specific client to be searched.

Master Server

Remove

To perform an advanced search, you can also specify advanced search criteria in addition to the simple search criteria. The Advanced Search criteria are optional. See Select Files or Directories > Search options on page 531.

Click Search. It may take some time for OpsCenter to display the search results. The time to display the search results may increase with the number of selected clients. OpsCenter highlights the search results at the bottom of the pane in a table. The most recent 500 results can be shown in the table. The table lists the following default columns that are displayed:

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations

543

File/Directory Name

Names of the files and directories that are backed up as per the search criteria are displayed. The directory (folder) name may have a + sign next to it. This indicates that the directory has files or sub-directories. You can choose if you want to restore the whole directory or specific files from the directory. If you want to restore the selected files and directories now, click Restore now. To restore the selected files and directories later, click Add to Restore Cart.

File/Directory Path Backup History

Current location of files and directories is displayed. This link shows the backup timeline window for a specific file or directory. A file or directory may have been backed up multiple times in the past. You may want to restore a previous copy. In addition, you may have multiple copies for a specific backup. The primary copy is selected by default. You may want to restore a copy other than the primary copy. Click the link if you want to to restore a previous backup and also specify a copy other than the primary copy. See Backup Timeline Window on page 544.

Backup Time

This is the most recent date and time when the file was last backed up. Date and time when the backup was last modified. Name of the client on which the backup exists. Size of the backed up file or directory (folder) in bytes (B).

Modified Time Client Size

The columns that can be added to the table are the following:

Master Server Last Accessed Time Backup ID

The filter button on top of search results table allows you to filter out the search results and display only the search results matching a criteria. The result is a filtered subset of the last search result from the OpsCenter database.

544

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations

See Creating, applying, editing, and removing custom view filters on page 87. Whenever you apply a filter on the search results, you see the following message on top of the search results table. Search has been completed successfully. Filter is currently applied. Click here to remove filter. You can click the link to clear the filter and view all search results. You can also customize the search results table to allow standard table customizations like sort order, page size, columns displayed and the order in which columns are displayed. Click Change Table Settings icon on top of search result to access table customizations page. See About using tables on page 83.

Select one or more files or directories. Click Restore now to restore the files or directories now. Click Add to Restore Cart if you want to add the selected files and directories to the Restore Cart and restore at a later time. See Restore Cart on page 551. Click Preview Media to view the media required for the restore operation and to determine the availability of the required media. This helps you to know if the tape required for restore is in the library or not. This option applies only for tape backups. If the selected backups are on a disk, this option is not applicable. The Preview Media dialog box contains details like Media ID, Volume Group, and whether the media is in the library.

In the Restore Options panel, select the restore options for each individual client. See Restore Options panel on page 553. Click Next.

10 In the Summary panel, click Restore to restore all the files or directories.
See Summary panel on page 559.

Backup Timeline Window

This is a timeline view of backups for a specific file or directory. By default, the search and browse results that are displayed in the OpsCenter console display the most recent backup that occured for the specific file or directory and is the primary backup copy. The Backup Timeline window allows you to select a previous backup for the specific file or directory in the selected timeframe and also select a copy other than the primary copy.

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations

545

At the top of the Backup Timeline window, the name and location of the file or directory whose backup details are displayed is mentioned. Name of the client that contains the file or directory is also mentioned. The X-axis represents the time while the Y-axis represents the device or source like disk pool, volume group etc. on which the specific file or directory resides. Each row in the table represent the backups on a single disk pool, basic disk, or a single volume group. The timeline on top displays icons for each backup of the file or directory. Each icon represents a different backup or snapshot. There are different icons for snapshot, disk, or tape backups. Also if single or multiple backups occur during a single timeline unit, then it is represented through different icons. For example, if a file was backed up twice in an hour, a different icon appears representing more than one backup. When you open the Backup Timeline window, the latest backup (icon) in the selected timeline is already selected. Select another icon if you want to select a previous backup. Multiple backups may be displayed on the timeline. To view all the instances of backups, you may need to increase the scope of the timeline. You can display the timeline in days, weeks, or months. The following tabs are displayed:
Day This selection shows the backups that occured at different times in the day. By default, the Day tab shows the day of the backup that was shown in the search or browse result. For example, if search result shows backup date for a file as June 15, 2011 and that link is clicked to view the timeline, then June 15 is shown by default. The timeline for a day is split up in 24 slots of an hour each. Each slot of one hour is in turn split up by 30 minute slots - that is 2 cells per hour. You can also adjust the time interval by clicking the arrows on the left and right respectively.

546

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations

Week

Select Week to view a weekly summary of the backups. By default, the Week tab shows the week of the backup that was shown in search or browse result. For example, if search result shows backup date for a file as June 15, 2011 and that link is clicked to view the timeline, then the week of June 15 is shown by default. The timeline for week is split up in seven slots of one day each. Each slot of one day in turn is split up by 4 hour slots- that is six cells per day. You can also adjust the time interval by clicking the arrows on the left and right respectively.

Month

Select Month to view a monthly summary of the backups. By default, the Month tab shows the month of the backup that was shown in search or browse result. For example, if search result shows backup date for a file as June 15, 2011 and that link is clicked to view the timeline, then the month of June 15 is shown by default. The timeline for month is split up in five slots of one week each. Each slot of one week in turn is split up in seven cells - that is seven cells per week (and 35 cells per month). You can also adjust the time interval by clicking the arrows on the left and right respectively.

The Backup table in the middle of the window shows information about the icon (backup) that is selected from the timeline view. Click an icon to view the details of the specific backup in the Backup table. The Backup table lists the details of each backup image that is associated with the backup. It shows several details like backup time, policy name, policy type, backup type etc. Once you select the specific backup image that you want to restore from the Backup table, the copies that are associated with the backup image are displayed in another table at the bottom. The Copies of Selected Backup table at the bottom shows information about the copies that are associated with the selected backup image. By default, the primary copy is selected. You can select a different copy for restore and click Add to Restore Cart to add this to the restore cart. Note: A multiple disk, tape, or snapshot backup may include many backup images.

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations

547

Select Files or Directories > Browse options

This view is displayed when you select Select Files or Directories > Browse. The Select Files or Directories > Browse view allows you to select a client and then browse and select the backed up files and directories on the client for restore. You can browse the contents of only one client at a given time. You first need to select the client from the Select Client section. The following options are displayed in the Select Client section:
View All the views that are shown in the OpsCenter console are displayed in the drop-down list. Select a view from the drop-down list. You may select a view that is of Client-type or master server type. Only the following views are displayed in the View drop-down list:

Views that you have access to Client type or Master Server type views

If you select a view of type Master Server, all NetBackup 7.5 master servers that are added to the view are displayed in the Master Server drop-down list. If you select a client-type view, the Master Server drop-down list is disabled. Master Server Select the master server that is associated with the client. Only NetBackup 7.5 master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are displayed. The Master Server drop-down list is disabled in the following scenario: If you select a client-type view from the View drop-down list If you have access to client-type views only

548

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations

Client

Only protected clients or clients that have backups are displayed. Select the client that contains the protected files and directories. Specify the client whose backup information you want to browse. If you remember the client name, type the client name in the Client text box. Once you start typing the client name like a1, protected clients that begin with these characters automatically appear beneath the drop-down list (auto-complete field). Select the client name when it appears.

Note: Only those clients on which files and

directories are backed up (or protected clients) are displayed when you type in a client name or browse for a client. Clients that do not have any backups are not displayed.

Note: In addition, only those clients are

displayed for which the user has been granted access through a view. If you do not remember any client names or simply want to browse through the clients, click the Browse and select client link and select a list of protected clients that are associated with a master server or a client-type view. See Browse Client dialog box on page 539.

Once you select a client, you can see a two-pane view. The two-pane view shows the backed up client directories in the left pane and content of the selected directory in the right pane (like Windows Explorer). The backed up files and directories that are displayed is based on the timeframe that you select. The most recent backup in the specified timeframe is shown on the top by default. This is also similar to the Java GUI or the BAR GUI browse capability. From this view, you can select one or more files or directories for restore. The following properties are displayed when you select Select Files or Directories > Browse:

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations

549

Change Client link

The Change Client link lets you select a different client and allows you to browse the protected files and directories on a different client. Note that you can browse the contents of one client at a time. The Directory structure shows the backed up directories on the selected client in the selected timeframe. The directory (folder) name may have a + sign next to it. This indicates that the directory has sub-directories. Expand the directories to view the subdirectories. Click a directory from the left pane. The contents of the selected directory are displayed in this pane.

Directory Structure

Contents of selected directory

The following details are displayed in the right pane that shows the contents of the selected directory:
File/Directory Name Names of the files and directories that are a part of the selected directory in the left-pane are displayed. Select the files or sub-directories that you want to restore. If you want to restore the selected files and directories now, click Restore now. To restore the selected files and directories later, click Add to Restore Cart. Backup Time This is the most recent date and time when the file was last backed up. Date and time when the backup was last modified. Size of the backed up file or directory in bytes (B).

Modified Time

Size

550

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations

Backup History

This link shows the backup timeline window for a specific file or directory. A file or directory may have been backed up multiple times in the past. You may want to restore a previous copy. In addition, you may have multiple copies for a specific backup. The primary copy is selected by default. You may want to restore a copy other than the primary copy. Click the link if you want to to restore a previous backup and also specify a copy other than the primary copy. See Backup Timeline Window on page 544.

Click Preview Media to view the media required for the restore operation and to determine the availability of the required media. This helps you to know if the tape required for restore is in the library or not. If the selected backups are all on disk, this option is not applicable. The Preview Media dialog box displays details like Media ID, volume group, and if the media is in library.

Browsing for files and directories on a client

You can also browse the protected files and directories on a client. The view allows you to select the client to be browsed and allows you to specify a timeframe for backup selection. You can select only one client at a time. The two pane browse view shows the backed up client directories in the left pane and content of the selected directory in the right pane. The most recent backup in the specified date range is shown by default. Use the following procedure to browse for files and directories for restore. To browse for files and directories for restore

1 2 3 4

In the OpsCenter console, click Manage > Restore. Click Restore Files and Directories under Files and Directories. Select Select files or directories > Browse. Select a timeframe that you want to search. The default timeframe that is selected is Month. See About timeframe selection on page 528.

5 6

Select a view from the Views drop-down list. Select a master server from the Select Master Server drop-down list.

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations

551

Type a client name in the Client box. When you start typing a client name, a list of client names that start with the characters that you entered is displayed. Select a client from this list and then click Select Client. You can also click Browse and select clients and then browse to select a client. You can browse and select only one client at a time. The directory structure of the selected client and the contents of the directory are displayed in two panes. From this view, you can browse and select the specific files and directories that you want to restore.

Click Restore now to start the restore process. Click Add to Restore Cart if you want to add the selected files and directories to the Restore Cart and restore at a later time. See Restore Cart on page 551. Click Preview Media to view the media required for the restore operation and to determine the availability of the required media. If the selected backups are all on disk, this option is not applicable. The Preview Media dialog box displays details like Media ID, volume group, and if the media is in library.

In the Restore Options panel, select the restore options for each individual client. See Restore Options panel on page 553. Click Next.

10 In the Summary panel, click Restore to restore all the files or directories.
See Summary panel on page 559.

Restore Cart
The files shown in the Search and Browse subtabs, can be added to a Restore Cart. The Restore Cart allows you to view file selections from multiple search and browse operations and restore them at a later point in time. You may choose to restore all the file or directory selections in one go. The Restore Cart selection persists for each user across different OpsCenter sessions. Once a file belonging to the Restore Cart is sent for restore, it is automatically removed from the Cart for the specific user. Click Preview Media to view the media required for the restore operation and to determine the availability of the required media. This helps you to know if the tape required for restore is in the library or not. This option only applies to tape backups. If the selected backups are on disk, this option is not applicable. The Preview Media dialog box displays details like Media ID, volume group, and if the media is in library.

552

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations

You can also email, export, or restore from the Restore Cart. See Performing operations on the Restore Cart on page 552.

Performing operations on the Restore Cart

You can perform several operations on the files and directories in the Restore Cart. You can email or export the contents of the Restore Cart. You can also restore or remove files from the Restore Cart. Use the following procedures for performing specific Restore Cart operations. To export the Restore Cart

1 2 3 4 5 6

In the OpsCenter console, click Manage > Restore. Click Restore Files and Directories under Files and Directories. Click Restore Cart. On the top-right corner of the Restore Cart table, click the Export Report icon (in green). Select the file format in which you want to export the contents of the Restore Cart such as PDF, CSV, TSV, or HTML and click OK. Click Open or Save to open or save the file on your system.

To email the Restore Cart

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

In the OpsCenter console, click Manage > Restore. Click Restore Files and Directories under Files and Directories. Click Restore Cart. In the Content pane at the right-hand side, click the Email Report icon. The Email Report pop-up screen opens. On the Email Report pop-up screen, select the file format, such as PDF, CSV, TSV, or HTML. Enter email IDs in To, Cc, and Bcc text boxes, to which you want to send emails. Alternatively, you can add existing email recipients. Enter the subject of the email. Enter the message that may be a short description regarding the report data that you want to email. Click OK.

To restore the files or directories from the Restore Cart

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, click Manage > Restore. Click Restore Files and Directories under Files and Directories.

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations

553

3 4 5 6

Click Restore Cart. Select one or more files or directories that you want to restore. Click Restore Now. When you click Restore now, the selected file or directories are automatically removed from the Restore Cart. In the Restore Options panel, select the restore options for each individual client. See Restore Options panel on page 553. Click Next.

In the Summary panel, click Restore to restore all the files or directories. See Summary panel on page 559.

To remove files or directories from the Restore Cart

1 2 3 4 5

In the OpsCenter console, click Manage > Restore. Click Restore Files and Directories under Files and Directories. Click Restore Cart. Select one or more files or directories that you want to remove from the Restore Cart. Click Remove from cart.

Restore Options panel

You can specify restore options for the files and directories that you selected like destination client and paths, overwrite options etc. This panel allows you to specify the restore options for each source client from which a file or directory has been selected to be restored. Select individual clients on the left side and specify the restore options for each client. You can specify the following restore options for a client:
Specify destination (where to restore selected files/directories)

554

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations

Restore all files/directories to their original This option is the default. Select this option file path location on the source client to restore the selected files and directories to the same location from where they were backed up. This option works best when you restore from archived backups, since the backed up files are deleted from their original location after successful backup. If the original location contains items with the same names, the restore operation (by default) does not replace or overwrite those items. Restore all files or directories to alternate Select this option to restore all selected files file path location (maintaining existing and directories to a different location from structure) on source client or alternate client where they were backed up. You may choose to restore at a different location on the same client or may choose to restore on a different client. Note that a different destination client can only be a client that is associated with the same master server. You cannot restore to a client that is associated with a different master server. In the Destination field, enter the path for the new destination. You can also click Browse to locate the destination client.

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations

555

Restore all files or directories to individually Restore individual directories and files to specified path and destination client different locations and file paths and with different names. When you select this option, a table appears that lists the source files, and default values for destination client and path, and the destination file name. You can edit most columns of this table (except the Source File Name) and specify the destination client, file path, and the destination file name. Click on each cell under these columns and select Edit. Enter the appropriate values and click OK. Click the Saved Table Edited Info icon to save your edits in the table. This icon is located on the top-right corner of the table.

Note: A destination client can only be a

client that is associated with the same master server. You cannot restore to a client that is associated with a different master server. Overwrite and access control options Overwrite the file that exists at the destination By default, this option is not selected to avoid overwriting a current file. Select this option to replace a file with the same name in the destination directory with the file you want to restore.

Restore the file using a temporary file name Restore the file using a different name than (Windows clients only) before.

556

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations

Do not restore the file at all

By default, this option is selected to prevent the restore operation from overwriting a file with the same name in the destination folder. For example, if your destination choice is set to Restore all files/directories to their original location, marked files with the same names are not restored. If you deselect this option and your destination choice is set to Restore everything to its original location, files in the destination folder with the same names are overwritten. To avoid overwriting current files, you must do one of the following: Select Restore the file with different file name Select a different restore destination

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations

557

Restore without access control (Windows clients only)

By default, files are restored with the same access control attributes that existed at the time of their backup. On Windows systems, be aware of the following if the access control attributes of a file have changed since the backup: A user that was granted access to the file after the backup does not have access to the file after the restore. A user with previous access to the backed up file retains access to the file after the restore.

Select this option to restore files without the original access control attributes. This option is available only when the following conditions exist: You are logged on as the system administrator. The Operating System of the client computer is Windows Server 2003/XP, Windows Server 2008/Vista, or Windows Server 2008 R2/Windows 7. NetBackup server software is installed on the computer where the client software is running. The NetBackup master server, media server, and client are all at the same release level (software version).

Other options

558

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations

Rename hard links

This option applies to UNIX and Linux systems only. By default, hard link path names are restored exactly as they exist in the backup. Select this option to rename the hard link path names, if any exist. Symantec recommends that you select this option in the following situation: You restore system files to an alternate disk and not to the current system disk. You use the alternate disk as the system disk with the original file paths.

In this situation, Symantec recommends that you select Rename hard links. Then, make sure that Rename soft links is not selected so that you can use the alternate disk and still have the correct file paths. Rename soft links This option applies to UNIX and Linux systems only. By default, soft (symbolic) link path names are restored exactly as they exist in the backup. Select this option to rename the soft link path names, if any exist. Symantec recommends that you do not select this option if you rename hard links. Restore without crossing mount point This option applies to UNIX and Linux systems only. By default, all file systems that are mounted in the selected directories are restored. Select this option to restore the selected directories without restoring all file systems that are mounted in those directories.

Note: Mount points inside a backup image

are always restored whether or not this option is selected.

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations

559

Override default priority

You can change the priority of this restore by selecting Override default priority, and then set a priority number. The default is 90000. The available range is 0 to 99999. Higher numbers are higher priority.

Summary panel
The Summary panel shows the list of selected files and directories that have been selected for restore. It also shows details like the current location of these files and directories and where they will be restored. The Summary page shows a table with the following columns:
Source File Name This column lists the files or directories that have been selected for restore. This column lists the current location of the file or directory. This column lists the client that contains the source file. This column lists the location that you specified for restoring the file or directory. This column lists the name of the destination client where you want to restore the file or directory. Based on your selections, the destination client may be the same or different from the source client.

Source File Path

Source Client

Destination File Path

Destination Client

Click Preview Media to view the media required for the restore operation and to determine the availability of the required media. This helps you to know if the tape required for restore is in the library or not. This option only applies to tape backups. If the selected backups are on disk, this option is not applicable. The Preview Media dialog box displays details like Media ID, volume group, and if the media is in library.

Removing files or directories from the Summary panel

You can remove files or directories from the Summary panel. Use the following procedure to remove files or directories that you do not want to restore.

560

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations

To remove files or directories from the Summary panel

1 2

On the Summary panel, select one or more files or directories that you want to remove. Click Remove files or directories.

File or Directory Restore Launch Status dialog box options

The following options are displayed on the File or Directory Restore Launch Status dialog box:
Job ID Master Server Name Job ID of the restore job Name of the master server that is associated with the client on which the file resides. Name of the source client

Client Name

Restoring files or directories from the Summary panel

Use the following procedure to restore files or directories. To restore files or directories from the Summary panel

The Summary panel shows the selected files or directories that you want to restore. Click Restore to restore all the files and directories that are displayed. Note: If you want to restore only specific files and directories and not all the files and directories that are displayed, click Remove files or directories to remove files or directories that you do not want to restore.

The corresponding restore job(s) are triggered. The File/Directory Restore Launch Status dialog is displayed. This dialog box shows basic job details for the jobs triggered. It also shows a link to access these jobs. Click the link to go to the Monitor > Jobs view and look for the specific Job ID. See File or Directory Restore Launch Status dialog box options on page 560.

About OpsCenter Guided Recovery

The use of the OpsCenter Web-based user interface to guide a user through the Oracle cloning operation offers several benefits:

The process is more automated, making the operation easier to perform.

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations

561

OpsCenter retrieves information for you such as databases and control files, shortening the Oracle clone setup time. A validation process increases the rate of successfully completing the cloning operation. You do not need access to the original database to perform the cloning operation.

See Setting up for Guided Recovery cloning on page 561. See Guided Recovery cloning pre-operation checks on page 562. See Performing a Guided Recovery cloning operation on page 563. See Guided Recovery Post-clone operations on page 569.

Setting up for Guided Recovery cloning

Oracle uses metadata cataloging, which enables database information to display in OpsCenter. Metadata cataloging must occur during the backup from the Oracle database to be cloned. The collected metadata displays within the OpsCenter interface to guide the clone operation to enable metadata collection on the client host. Do the following before you perform a Guided Recovery cloning operation:

On UNIX and Linux systems, ensure that the Oracle metadata parameter in the client's bp.conf is set at backup time as follows:
ORACLE_METADATA=YES

Or, use the SEND command to set the metadata parameter:

SEND ORACLE_METADATA=YES

On Windows systems, first place the following text into a text file (for example, new_config.txt):
ORACLE_METADATA=YES

Then send this newly created configuration file to the client host by using the following bpsetconfig command on the master or media server:
# bpsetconfig -h myoracleclient new_config.txt bpsetconfig is located in the install_path\NetBackup\bin\admincmd

directory.

562

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations

Set up all destination file paths before you run the cloning operation, because the operation does not create new file paths during the process. Ensure that the user has write access to these paths.

See About OpsCenter Guided Recovery on page 560. See Guided Recovery cloning pre-operation checks on page 562. See Performing a Guided Recovery cloning operation on page 563. See Guided Recovery Post-clone operations on page 569.

Guided Recovery cloning pre-operation checks

Check the following items before you begin the cloning process:

Ensure that the source and destination systems and the source and destination databases are compatible. Examples are Solaris 9 to Solaris 10 and Oracle 11 to Oracle 11. The cloning operation does not support offline tablespaces or raw tablespaces. The cloning operation does not support Oracle Automatic Storage Management (ASM). To use a different user or a different group for the clone, you must change what the permissions of the backup image are to be at backup time. Add the 'BKUP_IMAGE_PERM=ANY' to the send commands during the backup of the source database. If the destination client is different than the source client, perform an alternate restore procedure. On Windows systems, if the NetBackup client service runs as the Oracle user, then that user needs to be granted the right to "Replace a process level token". On Oracle 9 for Windows, run the Oracle service under the Oracle user account. By default, it runs under the local system. On Oracle 10G systems and later, you can run under the local system. On Windows systems, if you are cloning to the same system, shut down the source database to successfully complete the operation. Otherwise, an error indicating the database cannot be mounted in exclusive mode appears. On UNIX and Linux systems, if the cloning user shares an existing Oracle home, the user must have write access to some directories such as DBS.

See About OpsCenter Guided Recovery on page 560. See Setting up for Guided Recovery cloning on page 561. See Performing a Guided Recovery cloning operation on page 563.

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations

563

See Pre-clone check panel on page 568. See Guided Recovery Post-clone operations on page 569.

Performing a Guided Recovery cloning operation

You need to log onto OpsCenter, to perform a cloning operation. OpsCenter is the Web GUI that you use to perform all guided recovery operations. To perform a cloning operation on an Oracle database in OpsCenter

1 2 3

When you log onto OpsCenter, the first screen that appears is the Monitor Overview screen. Along the top of the screen, click Manage > Restore. On the What do you want to restore? screen, click Clone Oracle Database. On the small Select a Master Server dialog box, use the drop-down menu to select the master server that you want to work with, then click OK. See Select a Master Server dialog on page 564.

The Select Source Database screen lets you filter the list of databases by database name, host name, database version, platform, and date. The default condition is to display all databases that are backed up in the default date range. Click Show Databases. More information is available on this screen. See Select Source Database panel on page 565.

The databases appear under the filtering part of the same screen. Select the database on which you want to perform a cloning operation by clicking option at the left side of the desired database entry. Then click Next>. The Select Control File Backup screen shows a timeline view of the control file backups. Select the icon for the desired control file backup from the timeline view. You can hover over the icon to display the control file details. If the icon represents multiple backups, you can hover over the icon to display all versions of the backup for that time periods. Additional information is available to verify that you have selected the correct control file. The lower left corner of the screen lists three links. More information is available about these links. See Select Control File Backup panel on page 565. Click on the icon of the control file backup you want to restore for the clone of the selected database. The default is the latest backup selected. Then click Next>.

The Destination Host and Login screen contains parameters for the destination of the clone to be created. Enter the destination host name in the

564

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations

text box that is provided or click Browse and select from a list of available hosts. Note the following prerequisites concerning the destination host:

The platform type of the source and destination must be the same. A NetBackup client must be installed. A compatible version of Oracle must be installed.

See Destination host and login panel on page 566. For operating system authentication, enter a user name, password (Windows), and domain (Windows). Then click Next>.

The Define Destination Parameters screen appears. The five tabs on this screen are used to change database attributes, the destination paths of control files, data files, and redo logs, and restore options. After you have changed the destination parameters, click Next>. See Destination Parameters panel on page 567.

The SelectionSummary screen lets you scan the information you have entered on the previous screens. Links to the recovery sets and destination database attributes let you view and verify any changes you have made. When you are satisfied with the summary information, click Next>. See Selection summary panel on page 568.

10 The Pre-clone Check screen lets you validate the database attributes and the
file paths. To validate, click the underlined word here. If a directory path does not already exist, the validation check flags the error. If a file already exists, the validation check also flags the error, so that the cloning operation does not overwrite the file. See Pre-clone check panel on page 568. When you are ready to launch the cloning operation, click Launch Cloning Process. A display appears that is similar to the NetBackup Activity Monitor. See About OpsCenter Guided Recovery on page 560. See Setting up for Guided Recovery cloning on page 561. See Guided Recovery cloning pre-operation checks on page 562. See Guided Recovery Post-clone operations on page 569.

Select a Master Server dialog

From the pulldown menu, select the NetBackup master server that collected the backup information to be used for the cloning operation. See Performing a Guided Recovery cloning operation on page 563.

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations

565

See Setting up for Guided Recovery cloning on page 561. See Guided Recovery cloning pre-operation checks on page 562. See About OpsCenter Guided Recovery on page 560.

Select Source Database panel

When the Select Source Database screen first appears, the lowest portion of the screen shows a list of the latest backups for all the databases that the master server knows about for the default date range. The upper portion of the screen shows parameters for filtering the list of databases. If the list is long, you can filter what databases appear by database name, host name, database version, and date range. Multiple filter parameters can be used at the same time. For example, to show only the Solaris databases that are backed up between 11/05/2011 and 11/12/2011, select Solaris from the Platform: pulldown menu. Then select the dates from the calendar icons. Then click Show Databases to display the new filtered list of databases. See Select Control File Backup panel on page 565. See Performing a Guided Recovery cloning operation on page 563. See Setting up for Guided Recovery cloning on page 561. See Guided Recovery cloning pre-operation checks on page 562. See About OpsCenter Guided Recovery on page 560.

Select Control File Backup panel

The Guided Recovery Select Control File Backup screen is a timeline view of all the control files that are backed up for the selected database. The timeline displays an icon for each control file that is associated with the backed up database. When you first enter this screen, the latest backup control file is already selected . Hover over the icon on the timeline to display a popup that shows information about that file: backup name, type of media, the size of the backup, etc. Multiple control files may be displayed on the timeline. To view all the instances of control files, you may need to increase the scope of the timeline. You can display the timeline in days, weeks, months, or years. If multiple control files were backed up during a single timeline unit, a different icon appears representing more than one control file (for example, if the database was backed up twice in an hour). To select from among these files, hover over the icon. A popup lists each control file in table format. It shows several items including the backup name and the type of media. Click option next to the desired control file.

566

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations

You can also click one of the links in the lower left of the screen to verify that you have selected the proper control file.

View Database Schema shows the schema of the selected control file. It shows how the database is laid out by listing each data file name, tablespace name, and its size. View Datafiles Recovery Set shows the data file backups to be used for the restore process. It also shows the backup and image information that is displayed for each data file. The data file recovery set is generated only for the files that are backed up as part of an incremental strategy. Even though files that are backed up as part of a full backup do not appear in this list, the clone still completes successfully. If the image spans media, only the first media is shown in the list. View Archived Log Recovery Set shows the archive log backups that may be used to recover the database to the latest point in time of that control file. This set is generated only for the files that are backed up as part of an incremental strategy. Even though files that are backed up as part of a full backup do not appear in this list, the clone still completes successfully.

See Performing a Guided Recovery cloning operation on page 563. See Setting up for Guided Recovery cloning on page 561. See Guided Recovery cloning pre-operation checks on page 562. See About OpsCenter Guided Recovery on page 560.

Destination host and login panel

The Select Destination Parameters screen lets you enter the destination host and the Oracle logon information. For Windows, you are asked for the domain name, user name, and password. For UNIX and Linux, you are asked only for the user name. The following rules apply to the selection of the destination host:

The destination must be of the same platform type as the source of the clone. A NetBackup client must be installed. A compatible version of Oracle must be installed.

See Destination Parameters panel on page 567. See Performing a Guided Recovery cloning operation on page 563. See Setting up for Guided Recovery cloning on page 561. See About OpsCenter Guided Recovery on page 560.

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations

567

Destination Parameters panel

Guided Recovery uses many values from the source database as default values for the destination database. You can modify these values if not appropriate for the destination database. Note: The Windows information you enter on this screen is case sensitive. Be sure to enter the Windows information appropriately. The Destination Parameters screen contains the following tabs:

Database Attributes. This pane appears when you first enter the Database Attributes screen. Each attribute name has identical source and destination attributes. You can change the destination attribute of the instance name, database name, and database home. Note that the instance name is case sensitive while the database name is not case sensitive. If you use a temporary tablespace or datafiles, and you plan to write the datafiles back to the same location, do not modify the path. If you must modify the path, make sure it is identical to the source path including case (upper, lower, mixed). Otherwise, the clone fails with an error that indicates the temporary file already exists. This limitation does not affect UNIX and Linux systems. Control File Paths. This pane displays the source path and the destination path for each control file. You can change a control file destination path by clicking in the associated text window and entering the new path. You can also click Browse to navigate to the desired path. When you change a path, a highlight bar appears around the text window as a visual indicator that this path has changed. Data File Paths. This pane lets you change the destination path for one or more data files. Enter the path in the text window provided, then select the data files on which to apply it, and press the Apply option. Redo Log Paths. This pane displays the source path and the destination path for all redo logs. You can type in a new destination path or click Browse to navigate to the desired path. When you change a path, a highlight bar appears around the text window as a visual indicator that this path has changed. Restore Options. This pane displays restore options. The option that is displayed on this pane is Number of parallel streams for restore and recover.

When you are done making changes on this screen, click Next>. All the information from the previous screen is saved in preparation for the cloning operation. All the changes that are made in this screen are temporary and are active only for the cloning session.

568

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations

See Selection summary panel on page 568. See Performing a Guided Recovery cloning operation on page 563. See Setting up for Guided Recovery cloning on page 561. See About OpsCenter Guided Recovery on page 560.

Selection summary panel

The following information appears on this screen:

The selected master server and the source database attributes. The date and time of the selected control file backup, and the backup media type. The database recovery set and the archived log recovery set. The destination database attributes selected in the previous screen and the database initialization parameters to be used for the cloning operation.

See Pre-clone check panel on page 568. See Performing a Guided Recovery cloning operation on page 563. See Setting up for Guided Recovery cloning on page 561. See About OpsCenter Guided Recovery on page 560.

Pre-clone check panel

The Guided Recovery Pre-clone Check screen lets you validate the database attributes and the file paths. To validate, click the underlined word here. If a file path does not already exist, the validation check flags the error. If a file already exists, the validation check also flags the error, so that the cloning operation does not overwrite the file. You can also specify an email address, so when the cloning process completes, an email is sent to you that gives you the status of the cloning operation along with other pertinent information. See Guided Recovery Post-clone operations on page 569. See Job Details panel on page 569. See Performing a Guided Recovery cloning operation on page 563. See Setting up for Guided Recovery cloning on page 561. See About OpsCenter Guided Recovery on page 560.

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations

569

Job Details panel

The Job Details screen is intended to reflect the NetBackup Activity Monitor. More information is available on the Activity Monitor. See the NetBackup Administrator's Guide, Volume I. See About OpsCenter Guided Recovery on page 560. See Performing a Guided Recovery cloning operation on page 563.

Guided Recovery Post-clone operations

Perform the following after the cloning operation has completed:

On UNIX and Linux systems, update the oratab file with the appropriate instance information. On UNIX and Linux systems, if the cloning operation fails, do the following cleanup:

If the database is active, shut down the database. Remove init<SID>.ora, spfile<SID>.ora, and any other files associated with the SID being used, from the <$ORACLE_HOME>/DBS directory. Remove all data files.

On Windows systems, if the cloning operation fails, use the dbca utility to delete the database. dbca sometimes removes directories, so verify before retrying the operation. If a cloned Oracle database contains read-only tablespaces or datafiles, you must make them read-write before RMAN backs them up, or RMAN cannot restore them. After the backup (cloning operation), you can return the items to read-only. The following shows an example of the sequence of steps in the process:

Back up Oracle database A which contains read-only tablespace TABLE1. Clone database A to database B. Use the Oracle alter tablespace command to make tablespace TABLE1 read-write. You may revert to read-only if you want. Back up database B. Use RMAN to restore database B.

See Guided Recovery cloning pre-operation checks on page 562. See Performing a Guided Recovery cloning operation on page 563.

570

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations

See Setting up for Guided Recovery cloning on page 561. See About OpsCenter Guided Recovery on page 560.

Troubleshooting Guided Recovery

Guided Recovery operations are in addition to the normal NetBackup for Oracle operations. On UNIX and Linux systems, gather all legacy logs at VERBOSE=5. On Windows systems, gather them at General=2, Verbose=5, and Database=5. All unified logs should be gathered at DebugLevel=6 and DiagnosticlLevel=6. In addition to the troubleshooting methods and evidence that you use for resolving NetBackup for Oracle operations, there is also information that is required specifically for troubleshooting Guided Recovery when it fails. For more information about NetBackup debug logs and reports, refer to the NetBackup Administrator's Guide, Vol. 1. See Troubleshooting files for metadata collection operations at the time of the backup on page 570. See Troubleshooting files for Guided Recovery validation operations on page 571. See Troubleshooting files for Guided Recovery cloning operations on page 572.

Troubleshooting files for metadata collection operations at the time of the backup
The information in the following log files can be helpful when you troubleshoot Guided Recovery metadata collection operations. From the Oracle client host:

netbackup/logs/bphdb legacy logs netbackup/logs/dbclient legacy logs (The directory must be writable by the Oracle users.) ncf unified logs, OID 309, New Client Framework ncforautil unified logs, OID 360, New Client Framework Oracle Utility ncforaclepi, OID 348, New Client Framework Oracle Plugin

From the NetBackup media server: netbackup/logs/bpbrm legacy logs From the NetBackup master server:

netbackup/logs/bprd legacy logs nbars unified logs, OID 362, NetBackup Agent Request Service dars unified logs, OID 363, Database Agent Request Service

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About Operational Restore and Guided Recovery operations

571

For more information about NetBackup debug logs and reports, refer to the NetBackup Administrator's Guide, Vol. 1. See Troubleshooting files for Guided Recovery validation operations on page 571. See Troubleshooting files for Guided Recovery cloning operations on page 572. See Troubleshooting Guided Recovery on page 570.

Troubleshooting files for Guided Recovery validation operations

The information in the following log files can be helpful when you troubleshoot Guided Recovery validation operations. From the Oracle client host:

netbackup/logs/vnetd legacy logs ncf unified logs, OID 309, New Client Framework ncfnbcs unified logs, OID 366, New Client Framework NetBackup Client Services

From the NetBackup master server:

netbackup/logs/vnetd legacy logs nbars unified logs, OID 362, NetBackup Agent Request Service dars unified logs, OID 363, Database Agent Request Service

From the NetBackup master server:

netbackup/logs/bprd legacy logs nbars unified logs, OID 362, NetBackup Agent Request Service dars unified logs, OID 363, Database Agent Request Service

From the Symantec OpsCenter server:

<SYMCOpsCenterServer>/config/log.conf file opscenterserver unified logs, OID 148 (The default location is <SYMCOpsCenterServer >/logs) opscentergui unified log, OID 147 (The default location is <SYMCOpsCenterGUI>/logs)

For more information about NetBackup debug logs and reports, refer to the NetBackup Administrator's Guide, Vol. 1. See Troubleshooting files for metadata collection operations at the time of the backup on page 570. See Troubleshooting files for Guided Recovery cloning operations on page 572. See Troubleshooting Guided Recovery on page 570.

572

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup Hosts

Troubleshooting files for Guided Recovery cloning operations

The information in the following log files can helpful when you troubleshoot Guided Recovery cloning operations. From the Oracle client host:

netbackup/logs/bphdb legacy logs (Includes the obk_stdout and obk_stderr logs.) netbackup/logs/bpdbsbora legacy logs netbackup/logs/dbclient legacy logs (The directory must be writable by the Oracle users.) A tar of netbackup/logs/user_ops (UNIX/Linux) A compress of NetBackup\Logs\user_ops (Windows)

From the NetBackup master server:

netbackup/logs/vnetd legacy logs netbackup/logs/bprd legacy logs nbars unified logs, OID 362, NetBackup Agent Request Service dars unified logs, OID 363, Database Agent Request Service

From the Symantec OpsCenter server:

<SYMCOpsCenterServer>/config/log.conf file opscenterserver unified logs, OID 148 (The default location is <SYMCOpsCenterServer >/logs) opscentergui unified log, OID 147 (The default location is <SYMCOpsCenterGUI>/logs)

See Troubleshooting files for metadata collection operations at the time of the backup on page 570. See Troubleshooting files for Guided Recovery validation operations on page 571. See Troubleshooting Guided Recovery on page 570.

About managing NetBackup Hosts

This view is displayed when you select Manage>Hosts. This view displays detailed information for OpsCenter audit reports. for the current Master server selection.

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup Deployment Analysis

573

Managing audit trails settings

You can manage the settings to enable the auditing for the selected master server through OpsCenter. You must have Admin privileges to configure the audit settings. To enable the Audit trail logging

1 2 3

Log on to OpsCenter server host with administrator privileges. Click Manage and click Hosts. From the Master Server tab, select the required master server and click Edit Audit Settings. Select the Enable audit trail logging with NetBackup Environment check box to enable the audit logging process. Note: If audit logging is initiated in NetBackup, the Enable audit trail logging with NetBackup Environment check box appears as selected. You can disable audit logging by clearing this check box.

Under Retention period, select the Always retain all audit trail logs option to retain the logs forever. To retain logs for a specific period of time, enter the value in the Retain audit logs for days text box. By default, the retention period is set to 90 days. Click Save to save the settings.

About managing NetBackup Deployment Analysis

This view is displayed when you select Manage > Deployment Analysis. This view lets you run OpsCenter traditional licensing and capacity licensing reports for all or selected master servers. Only Administrators or Security Administrators can access Manage > Deployment Analysis. The Deployment Analysis subtab is not visible to any other user role.

About the traditional license report

The traditional licensing report is helpful if you use the traditional NetBackup licensing model. The traditional NetBackup licensing model is based on the number of NetBackup clients, servers, and options in use. As per this model, you purchase licenses based on the number of NetBackup clients, servers, and options on which you want to run NetBackup. As you deploy additional NetBackup clients or servers

574

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup Deployment Analysis

or attach additional tape drives or storage to NetBackup, you must license additional copies of the appropriate NetBackup product. NetBackup Server, Client, and Agent offerings are charged on the basis of their hardware tier. Tape options are charged on a per drive basis. AdvancedDisk potions are charged on a per terabyte basis. The traditional licensing report is generated in the form of an Excel sheet. Basically OpsCenter invokes the nbdeployutil executable on the master server to collect the required data. OpsCenter invokes the nbdeployutil executable (bundled with OpsCenter) to analyze the collected data. More information about nbdeployutil is available in the NetBackup Administrator's Guide, Volume II. The traditional license report provides details about your utilization of the NetBackup components. The report lists all the NetBackup components and the associated tier for each component. The traditional licensing report also provides detailed information about each master server, clients, tapes, capacity etc. The traditional license report is a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet with seven tabs:

Summary This tab shows the final details about master servers, media servers, and clients. This tab lists the source data for generating the report. The number of media servers and the number of clients is provided, as well as capacity information. Hosts This tab provides a listing of host names, along with associated computer information. The associated information includes information such as: platform, computer type, database software installed, SAN media server, and NDMP. NDMP This tab shows the computers that the utility determined are NDMP servers and the corresponding tier number of the client. When you reconcile the report, you need to address the clients that are found on this tab. Virtual Servers This tab shows the number of virtual servers or virtual hosts detected in the environment. Drives This tab details the type of drives as well as the host or the library where the drive resides. The tab provides the host names that are associated with each drive as well as information about virtual tape libraries, shared drives, and vaulted drives.

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup Deployment Analysis

575

Interpreting the results This tab provides a general overview of how to reconcile the information in the report which your actual environment. Disclaimer This tab shows text explaining the limits of the reports calculations and proper use of the data. For example, the figures should not be used to audit compliance.

Much of the report information does not affect the final values on the Summary tab. This information is useful for having a better understanding of your environment. More information about the traditional licensing report is available in the NetBackup Administrator's Guide, Volume II.

Prerequisites and data collection for a traditional licensing report

Consider the following prerequisites before running the traditional licensing report:

This report is only available for NetBackup 6.5.6 or higher master servers. You must add the master servers to the OpsCenter console for which you want to run the traditional licensing report. You must install nbdeployutil on master servers lower than 7.5. This utility automatically gets installed when you install a NetBackup 7.5 master server. Hence you do not need to install this utility on 7.5 master servers. This utility is issued as emergency engineering binary (EEB) and must be installed on all master servers below 7.5. http://www.symantec.com/docs/TECH148678 More information about installing EEB's is available. http://www.symantec.com/business/support/index?page=content&id=TECH64620 Note: The nbdeployutil utility was earlier shipped with 7.1.x master servers. However the utility shipped with NetBackup 7.1.x does not support traditional license reporting. More information about the utility is available in NetBackup Administrator's Guide, Volume II.

You must configure an OpsCenter Agent to collect traditional license data from the master server. Figure 8-1 lists an example scenario of how data collection happens for a traditional license report. See About planning an OpsCenter Agent deployment on page 111.

576

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup Deployment Analysis

You must enable traditional license deployment data collection for the master server. In addition, you must enter the user name and password to access a remote NetBackup master server (a master server is remote if it is not installed on the OpsCenter Server). You can do this while adding or editing a master server by clicking Settings > Configuration > NetBackup and then configuring the Advanced Data Collection Properties section. Figure 8-2 illustrates how you can configure the Advanced Data Collection Properties section for traditional license reporting. Only Administrators or Security Administrators can access Manage > Deployment Analysis subtab and hence run this report. At any point of time, only a single user is allowed to generate the traditional licensing report. Once a traditional licensing report is generated successfully, the last report is overwritten.

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup Deployment Analysis

577

Figure 8-1

Data Collection for traditional license report

Collect data

Agent Host 7.0 Install 7.0 RAC or master Collect data

ProdHost1: NBU 7.0 + EEB for nbdeployutil

OpsCenter Server

Agent Host 7.5 Install 7.5 RAC or master

ProdHost2: NBU 7.5

Collect data ProdHost3: NBU 6.5 + EEB for nbdeployutil

Agent Host 6.5 Install 6.5 RAC or master ProdHost4: NBU 6.5.6 + EEB for nbdeployutil

578

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup Deployment Analysis

Figure 8-2

Advanced Data Collection properties section

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup Deployment Analysis

579

Traditional Licensing page

The traditional licensing page displays the last successfully created traditional license report (if applicable) and also lets you create a new traditional licensing report.

Create Traditional Licensing Report Wizard

The Create Traditional Licensing Report Wizard consists of the following panels:

Data Collection Export or Email Report Options

The Data Collection panel shows the following options:

Collect data and run report for all configured master servers Select this option if you want to run the traditional license report for all the master servers that are configured on the OpsCenter console. When you select this option, the panel shows the number of configured master servers. This is the number of master servers that are currently added to the OpsCenter console. The panel also displays the number and details of master servers for which the prerequisite status is Incomplete (or not successful) in a table. The table only shows those master servers that did not pass the prerequisite check. Click the link under the Prerequisite Status column to know and troubleshoot the issue. Note that the master servers for which the Prerequisite Status is Incomplete are not included in the traditional licensing report.

580

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup Deployment Analysis

Collect data and run report for specific master servers

Select this option if you want to run the traditional license report for only specific master servers. When you select this option, you can view a table underneath that shows the available master servers by default. From the list of available master servers, you can select the master servers for which you want to run the traditional licensing report. You must select at least one master server. Once you select the master servers from the list of available master servers, click Selected Master Servers tab to view details for the selected master servers.

A table in the middle of the Data Collection panel displays the following columns:
Master Server: This column displays the name of master servers for which the report is generated. If you select Collect data and run report for all configured master servers, this column displays only those master servers for which the prerequisite status is incomplete. Licensing Data Collection Status This column displays the status of traditional licensing data collection for the specific master server.

Last Licensing Data Collection This column displays the date and time when the last Date licensing data was collected. The column shows a blank when the data collection fails. Exceptions This column displays the reason for data collection failure. Example: OpsCenter Agent is not connected.

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup Deployment Analysis

581

Prerequisites Status

This column displays a link named Incomplete when one or more of the prerequisites are not met. Click the link to know the details about the prerequisites that need to be completed for each master server. When the prerequisite check is successful, a green checkmark appears in this column. The following prerequisites are checked for each master server:

Is an Agent configured for data collection?

Is the Enable Traditional License Deployment Data Collection option checked? Did you enter a user name or password to access the master server? Besides the prerequisites that are listed above, there are other prerequisites that must be satisfied. More information about all the prerequisites is available. See Prerequisites and data collection for a traditional licensing report on page 575.

In the Export or Email Report Options panel, you must specify email recipients and optionally can choose to export the report. It is mandatory that you email the report so that you have the report for future reference. The Export or Email Report Options panel displays the following options:
To, CC, or BCC Enter the recipients email address in these fields. The recipients receive fields emails when the report generation is complete. Subject This field displays the default text Traditional Licensing Report. You can change the subject line if required. Enter a message in this field.

Message

Export report Select this option to export report to INSTALL_PATH\server\export\NDAReportExport directory on Windows and INSTALL_PATH/SYMCOpsCenterServer/export/NDAReportExport directory on UNIX. You can change the export location from Settings > Configuration > Report Export Location.

582

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup Deployment Analysis

Generating a Traditional Licensing report

The Traditional Licensing report is generated in the form of an Excel sheet. This report can be emailed or exported in the XLS format to the required email address or location. To generate a Traditional Licensing report

Before running a traditional licensing report, review the prerequisites in the following topic. See Prerequisites and data collection for a traditional licensing report on page 575.

To generate the Traditional Licensing report, it is mandatory to enable Traditional License Deployment Data Collection and configure an OpsCenter Agent. In addition, you must also specify the user name and password to access the master server if it is installed remotely from the OpsCenter Agent. Log on to the OpsCenter console and select Settings > Configuration > NetBackup.

3 4

Select the required master server and click Edit. The Edit Master Server page is displayed. Select the Configure agent link to configure an agent. Select the Enable Traditional License Deployment Data Collection check box. Enter the user name and password for the master server (if it is installed separately from the OpsCenter Agent).

5 6

In the OpsCenter console, click Manage > Deployment Analysis. The Traditional Licensing page contains details about the previously created report, log file, and data collection. You can view the previously generated report by clicking Download. A calculation log file is also created when the traditional license report is generated. You can view the calculation log file by clicking the View Log link. Click New Report to generate a new report. The Create Traditional Licensing Report wizard is displayed. Select the Collect data and run report for all configured master servers to generate a report for all the master servers. Select the Collect data and run report for specific master servers to generate a report for specific master servers. Select the required master servers from the Available Master Servers tab. The master servers that you select are displayed in the Selected Master Servers tab.

7 8

Click Next.

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup Deployment Analysis

583

10 In the Report Options panel, enter the recipients email address in the To and
CC fields. The Subject field displays the default text Traditional Licensing Report, you can change the subject line if required.

11 Enter a message in the Message field. 12 To export the report to the required location, select the Export report (XLS
format) check box. You can change the export location path from Settings > Configuration > Report Export Location. See Setting report export location in OpsCenter on page 282.

13 Click Finish to initiate the report creation. A message to show that report
creation is in progress is flashed. When report generation is complete, you can open the .xls file or save the file for later viewing. Note: Re-running the report when report generation is in progress is not possible as it displays errors in the report. It is advisable to wait till the report is generated.

Traditional Licensing report and log file locations

The traditional licensing reports are located at the following locations:

The final report is located at INSTALL_PATH\server\fsdb\nda\report on Windows or INSTALL_PATH/SYMCOpsCenterServer/fsdb/nda/report on UNIX. The last successful backed up report is located at INSTALL_PATH\server\fsdb\nda\backup on Windows or INSTALL_PATH/SYMCOpsCenterServer/fsdb/nda/backup on UNIX.

The following log files are generated when you run the traditional licensing report:
NdaReportManager*.log This log file contains the output of nbdeployutil executable. This file is located in INSTALL_PATH\server\logs on Windows and INSTALL_PATH/SYMCOpsCenterServer/logs on UNIX.

584

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup Deployment Analysis

*148*.log

This log file contains the OpsCenter logs for traditional licensing report. This file is located in INSTALL_PATH\server\logs on Windows and INSTALL_PATH/SYMCOpsCenterServer/logs on UNIX.

Calculation log file (log_timestamp.log) You can validate the data in the traditional licensing report using the calculation log file. The calculation log files contain the logs for report generation which can be used to check the authenticity of the final report. This file is located in INSTALL_PATH\server\fsdb/nda/logs on Windows and INSTALL_PATH/SYMCOpsCenterServer/fsdb/nda/logs on UNIX.

Possible Traditional License report issues

The Traditional Licensing report requires a user to enable master servers and configure Agents to generate the correct report. When the master server is not enabled or when the Agents are not configured, the report is not generated and shows errors. Another cause of errors when a report is not generated is the network connectivity issue. Make sure that you have network connectivity. Always review the list of prerequisites before running a traditional license report. See Prerequisites and data collection for a traditional licensing report on page 575. Table 8-19 describes the possible Traditional License report issues and their solution. Table 8-19 Error and cause
Agent is in disconnected state Agent is not connected as it could be down or there could be a network issue.

Traditional License report issues, causes, and solution Solution

If the Agent is down OpsCenter will try to automatically connect to the Agent after every 10 minutes. You can also initialize the Agent explicitly by first disabling the master server and then enabling it.

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup Deployment Analysis

585

Table 8-19 Error and cause

Failed to initialize Agent Agent is not connected or there could be a network issue.

Traditional License report issues, causes, and solution (continued) Solution

If the Agent is not connected OpsCenter will try to automatically connect to the Agent after every 10 minutes. You can also initialize the Agent explicitly by first disabling the master server and then enabling it.

Server-side Confirm that the Agent is connected. If the Agent is disconnected, exception unknown wait for 10 minutes for it to reconnect. You can also initialize the OID Agent explicitly by first disabling the master server and then enabling it. This error is displayed when the agent gets disconnected while data collection is in progress. Retries exceeded cannot connect on opscenter_agent Connection to the Agent service is lost Master server not connected or it might be disabled Master server is not connected or disabled Agent is not connected Agent is not connected as it could be down or there could be a network issue. If the Agent is down OpsCenter will try to automatically connect to the Agent after every 10 minutes. You can also initialize the Agent explicitly by first disabling the master server and then enabling it. Confirm that the Agent is connected. If the Agent is disconnected, wait for 10 minutes for it to reconnect. You can also initialize the Agent explicitly by first disabling the master server and then enabling it.

Confirm that the master server is connected.

586

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup Deployment Analysis

Table 8-19 Error and cause

Traditional License report issues, causes, and solution (continued) Solution

You must install nbdeployutil on master servers lower than 7.5. This utility is issued as emergency engineering binary (EEB). More information about installing EEB's is available. http://www.symantec.com/business/support/index?page=content&id=TECH64620 More information about the utility is available in NetBackup Administrator's Guide, Volume II.

Data collection failed as the NetBackup Deployment Analysis utility has not been installed on the master server. You must install the utility to run the Traditional License report. Refer the Admin Guide for more details. Unable to log in into NBU Master server. Login credentials might be incorrect.

You must enter the user name and password to access a remote NetBackup master server (a master server is remote if it is not installed with the OpsCenter Agent). If Agent and master server are installed on the same computer, you do not need to enter any credentials. You can re-enter credentials while adding or editing a master server by clicking Settings > Configuration > NetBackup. In the Advanced Data Collection Properties section, enter the user name and password at the bottom.

Capacity License report

A Capacity Licensing report gives a summary of the amount of data that is protected. The report is classified by the options Enterprise Disk, PureDisk, and RealTime. The report gives capacity totals for each client, thus making it easier to verify capacity totals for each client. The report displays totals on the basis of the number of policies and subtotals for each capacity tier. A log file is also created, which gives information about how the totals are calculated. The report is generated in the form of an Excel sheet. The report contains information about capacity totals backed up for each client. The report displays details such as number of policies per client and their name and the total kilobytes backed up. The report also gives information about the terabytes stored on:

BasicDisk

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup Deployment Analysis

587

Physical Tape OpenStorage Visual Tape Library Flexible Disk Enterprise Disk Subtotal NDMP NASSnapVault PureDisk RealTime

Using the details of the Capacity Licensing report you can compare the actual amount of data that is backed up with the licensed amount. You can thus ensure that the data that is backed up is within the permitted license amount. The report displays the amount of data with the licensed amount for the Capacity Totals for Enterprise Disk, PureDisk, and RealTime. See Data compilation for the Capacity License report on page 587. See Possible Capacity License report issues on page 593.

Data compilation for the Capacity License report

Capacity Licensing is a way of determining the total terabytes of data NetBackup protects. The data can either be on the clients or the devices where the software is installed. The data can also be on the software that is used to provide the backup functionality.

About determining the capacity licensing

The bpimagelist command is used to obtain image and fragment information for all backups for the past 30 days. The NetBackup Deployment Analyzer examines the image headers in the NetBackup catalog to determine the amount of data that NetBackup protects. The data is measured in terabytes. The final total is the sum of terabytes for each client and policy combination that the analyzer examines. The Deployment Analyzer calculates the total data that needs to be protected. The analyzer uses the size of the last full backup for the last 30 days. A day is defined as the 24 hour period from midnight to midnight. The analyzer sums all backups that started within that period. For some policy types, the analyzer considers the day with the largest total volume of protected data as an

588

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup Deployment Analysis

estimate of the approximate size of active data under protection for the client and policy.

Generating a Capacity Licensing report

The Capacity Licensing report is generated in the form of an Excel sheet. This report can be emailed or exported in the XLS format to the required email address or location. To generate a Capacity Licensing report

To generate the Capacity Licensing report it is mandatory to enable License Deployment data collection and to configure an agent. The Settings tab helps you to enable them. Select Settings > Configuration > NetBackup. Select the required master server and click Edit. The Edit Master Server page is displayed.

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup Deployment Analysis

589

Select the Configure agent link to configure an agent. Select the Enable Capacity License Deployment Data Collection check box as shown in the following figure.

590

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup Deployment Analysis

In the OpsCenter console, click Manage > Deployment Analysis. The Capacity Licensing page is displayed as shown in the following figure.

The Capacity Licensing page contains details about the previously created report, log file, and data collection. You can view the previously generated report with the available link under the Last Successful Report Date header. A log file is generated when the Capacity License report is generated. You can view the log file with the View Log link. See About the Capacity Licensing page on page 592.

Click New Report to generate a new report. The Create Capacity Licensing Report page is displayed.

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup Deployment Analysis

591

Select the Collect data and run report on all Master Servers option to generate a report for all the master servers. Select the Collect data and run report on specific Master Servers option to generate a report for only the required master servers. Select the required master servers from the list, the following image displays both the options.

8 9

Click Next. The Report Options page is displayed. Enter the recipients email address in the To and CC fields. The Subject field displays the default text Capacity Licensing Report, you can change the subject line if required.

10 Enter a message in the Message field.

592

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup Deployment Analysis

11 To export the report to the required location, select the Export report (XLS
format) check box. You can change the export location path from the Settings > Configuration > Report Export Location tab. See Setting report export location in OpsCenter on page 282.

12 Select Run Report to initiate the data collection. A message to show that
report generation has started is flashed.

When report generation is complete, you can open the .xls file or save the file for later viewing. Note: Re-running the report when report generation is in progress is not possible as it displays errors in the report. Symantec recommends that you wait till the report is generated. See Data compilation for the Capacity License report on page 587. See About the Capacity Licensing page on page 592.

About the Capacity Licensing page

The Capacity Licensing page contains information about the Capacity License report and the data collection status. The report section contains details about the report in the form of a table. The headers are:

Last Successful Report Date: Displays a link to the previously generated report. The link itself contains information about the date and time of the last successful report. Status: Displays the report status as the name suggests. The status shows as Failed when the report is not generated. Exceptions: Displays the reasons for the report generation failure. An example exception detail message can be: Data collection failed for selected master servers. If the report generation is successful, this column shows a blank. Last Successful Report Log: Displays a link to the log file that is generated when the report is generated. The log file is very useful in analyzing the

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup Deployment Analysis

593

Capacity Licensing report. If the report generation fails, this column shows a blank.

The Capacity Licensing page also contains details about data collection in the form of a table. The headers are:

Master Server: Displays the list of master servers for which the report is generated. If you select the Collect data and run report on specific Master Servers option, then the column displays only those master servers that you select. Data Collection Status: Displays the status of data collection. Last Licensing Data Collection Date: Displays the date and time when the last licensing data is collected. The column shows a blank when data collection fails. Exceptions: Displays the reason for data collection failure. An example is: OpsCenter Agent is not connected. Prerequisites Status: Displays a link when the prerequisites have not been completed. Click the link to know the details about the prerequisites that need to be completed. Prerequisites can be, an agent not configured, or data status collection is not enabled for a master server.

Final location of the Capacity Licensing reports and logs

The reports and log files are located at the following locations:

The final report is located at SERVER_INSTALL_DIR/fsdb/fetb/report. The log file is located at SERVER_INSTALL_DIR/fsdb/fetb/log. The last successful backup report is located at SERVER_INSTALL_DIR/fsdb/fetb/backup. The output of bpimagelist for each server is located at SERVER_INSTALL_DIR/fsdb/fetb/data.

Possible Capacity License report issues

The Capacity Licensing report requires a user to enable master servers and configure agents to generate the correct report. When the master server is not enabled or when the agents are not configured, the report is not generated and shows errors. Another cause of errors when a report is not generated is the network connectivity issue. Make sure that you have network connectivity.

594

Managing NetBackup using Symantec OpsCenter About managing NetBackup Deployment Analysis

Table 8-20 describes the possible Capacity License report issues and their solution. Table 8-20 Error and cause
Agent is in disconnected state

Capacity License report issues, causes, and solution Solution

If the agent is down OpsCenter tries to automatically connect to the agent after Agent is not connected as it can be down or every 10 minutes. You can also initialize the there can be a network issue. agent explicitly by first disabling the master server and then enabling it. Failed to initialize agent Agent is not connected or there can be a network issue. If the agent is not connected OpsCenter tries to automatically connect to the agent after every 10 minutes. You can also initialize the agent explicitly by first disabling the master server and then enabling it.

Server-side exception unknown OID

Confirm that the agent is connected. If the agent is disconnected, wait for 10 minutes This error is displayed when the agent gets for it to reconnect. You can also initialize the disconnected while data collection is in agent explicitly by first disabling the master progress. server and then enabling it. Retries exceeded cannot connect on opscenter_agent Connection to the Agent service is lost Confirm that the agent is connected. If the agent is disconnected, wait for 10 minutes for it to reconnect. You can also initialize the agent explicitly by first disabling the master server and then enabling it. Confirm that the master server is connected.

Master server not connected or it might be disabled Master server is not connected or disabled Agent is not connected

If the agent is down OpsCenter tries to automatically connect to the agent after Agent is not connected as it can be down or every 10 minutes. You can also initialize the there can be a network issue. agent explicitly by first disabling the master server and then enabling it.

See Generating a Capacity Licensing report on page 588.

Chapter

Supporting Replication Director in OpsCenter

This chapter includes the following topics:

About monitoring Replication Director from OpsCenter About the Open Storage alert condition How the events are generated Adding an alert policy About changes in the SLP Status by Image Copy report About monitoring replication jobs About changes in the Monitor and Manage views

About monitoring Replication Director from OpsCenter

OpsCenter lets you monitor, alert, and report on the Replication Director functionality in NetBackup. The following sections provide an overview of the changes that have been made in OpsCenter with regards to the Replication Director functionality.

About the Open Storage alert condition

A new event-based alert condition named Open Storage has been added under the Device alert category in OpsCenter. For event-based alert conditions like Open

596

Supporting Replication Director in OpsCenter How the events are generated

Storage, OpsCenter retrieves data from NetBackup based on notifications from NBSL. An OpenStorage alert is generated when specific events occur in the storage server (in this case NetApp DataFabric Manager server). When you configure an alert policy based on the Open Storage alert condition, you can receive alerts for the NetApp (NTAP) events in OpsCenter. Table 9-1 lists the NTAP events that OpsCenter supports. Table 9-1 NTAP events supported by OpsCenter

General Category Event Type

Space Management Threshold alarms or Volume Almost Full (DataFabric Manager (DFM) and Alerting generated). If the particular volume crosses the high water mark, then DFM generates this event. Unprotected Data Unprotected Data is a custom event generated by NetApp NetBackup plug-in when resource pool has some volumes that are configured but are not protected. The event generation occurs where there is an auto-discovery of unprotected NAS file services data.

NBSL passes these NTAP events from NetApp devices to OpsCenter. Depending on the alert policy configuration, OpsCenter filters these events based on storage server, severity, and message filter values and raises the alert. The raised alert can be configured to be sent as an email or SNMP trap. You can clear the Open Storage alert manually. To clear the alert, go to the Monitor > Alerts (List View), select the alert and then click More > Clear.

How the events are generated

When you configure disk pools in NetBackup, NetBackup connects to the DFM server through the NetApp NetBackup plug-in. The plug-in scans the volumes that are not protected and takes some time to find out the details of unprotected volumes. If the master server asks for the event list while the event list is being prepared, then the same master server who triggered this does not receive the events at that time. However, the master servers which connect to the DFM server after the event list is prepared receive those events. After every 24 hours from the time the first call is made, the current list of events are sent again to all master servers that are connected to this DFM server. Currently this is a fixed cycle unless NetBackup is restarted. Maximum eight event channels are supported by default which means that maximum eight master servers are capable of receiving events from DFM. If more than eight master servers are connected to the DFM server

Supporting Replication Director in OpsCenter Adding an alert policy

597

and all are monitored by OpsCenter then it is not predictable which eight master servers receive those events. The value for maximum number of event channels is configurable in a file on the NetBackup plug-in host (usually the same as DFM host):
Windows UNIX C:\Program Files\netapp\NBUPlugin\config\NBUPlugin.cfg /usr/NetApp/NBUPlugin/config/NBUPlugin.cfg ([ NBUPlugin:NumEvCh ] Value=8)

It is recommended that the value for maximum event channels is configured as 8. Increasing the value may affect the DFM performance. Consider a scenario where one master server is connected to one DFM server and is monitored by OpsCenter. When NetBackup initially connects to the NetApp NetBackup plug-in, then it does not receive any event until the complete cycle of 24 hours assuming that the event cycle is of 24 hours. After 24 hours, the events are sent to OpsCenter by NBSL. So even if the condition like Volume almost Full has occurred, you see events only after the cycle is complete. Consider a scenario where multiple master servers monitored by OpsCenter are connected to one DFM server. In this scenario, the first master server that connects to the DFM server by NetApp NetBackup plug-in never receives the event for the first cycle. The master servers which connect later receive events only if they are connected after DFM prepares the event list. No events are sent in the time between when the first master server connected to DFM server and the time DFM is ready with events. If some master server connects during that time then it does not receive any events. Which master servers receive the events depends a lot on when they connect to the NetApp NetBackup plug-in. But after 24 hours, all master servers should receive the events from NetApp NetBackup plug-in provided that maximum eight master servers are connected.

Adding an alert policy

Use the following procedure to create an alert policy based on the Open Storage alert condition. To add an alert policy

1 2 3 4

In the OpsCenter console, select Manage > Alert Policies. Click Add. The Alert Policy Wizard appears. Enter a Name, Description, and Alert Condition on the General panel. For Alert Condition, select Open Storage under Device. Click Next.

598

Supporting Replication Director in OpsCenter About changes in the SLP Status by Image Copy report

On the Alert Condition Properties panel, specify attributes for the Open Storage alert condition. These attributes or filters define and limit the alert. You can select or define the following attributes:
Event Severity Select the event severity that should be evaluated for the alert condition. By default, All event severities are selected. Specify words from the event message to get alerts on specific events. Specify words for vendor type to get alerts on specific events.

Event message contains words Event vendor type contains words

6 7

Click Next. On the Scope panel, select the storage server that should be verified for the Open Storage alert condition. You must select at least one object, node, or view from this page. Click Next to continue. From the Actions panel, you can send the alert as an email or SNMP trap. You can also assign severity for the alert. In the Email Recipients and Trap Recipients sections, select email or SNMP recipients (or both) to receive the alert notification. Note that if you create an alert policy and do not define any recipients, the alert is still displayed in the Monitor > Alerts view. In the Severity section, do the following:

Select a severity level from the Alert Severity drop-down list. (If this alert occurs, the alert is displayed in the Monitor > Alerts view.) Select an appropriate severity level from the Severity of email/trap sent for cleared alert drop-down list. With Severity of email/trap sent for cleared alert option, you can configure the severity for an email or trap that is sent when an alert is cleared. The default severity level is Informational. The Activate Condition option is checked by default. By default, the policy is active once you create it. Deselect the Activate Condition option if you want to deactivate the policy. You can always activate or deactivate the policy later from the OpsCenter console.

About changes in the SLP Status by Image Copy report

A new column named Format has been added in the SLP Status by Image Copy report. The Format column helps to differentiate between the NetBackup image

Supporting Replication Director in OpsCenter About monitoring replication jobs

599

format and the snapshot copy. This report shows the details of any snapshot copy that is a part of the storage lifecycle policy. The following figure shows some columns from the SLP Status by Image Copy report and highlights the new Format column.

Format column

About monitoring replication jobs

A new filter named Snapshot Replication has been added in the Monitor > Jobs (List View). To view the replication jobs in the OpsCenter console, go to Monitor > Jobs (List View or Hierarchical View) and select the Snapshot Replication filter from the Filter drop-down list. The duplication method is shown in the Method column. The Method field is also available in the Details pane under the General tab.

600

Supporting Replication Director in OpsCenter About changes in the Monitor and Manage views

You can also view the data that is transferred for each of the replication jobs. This is reflected in the Job Size column when you select Monitor > Jobs (List View or Hierarchical View).

About changes in the Monitor and Manage views

A new column named Configured for Snapshots has been added to the following views in the OpsCenter console:

Monitor > Devices > Disk Pool Manage > Devices > Disk Pool Manage > Storage > Storage Units

This column helps you to identify if the disk pool or the storage unit has been configured for snapshots or not. Only the disk pools or storage units that are configured for snapshots can be used for taking snapshot backups. In the Monitor > Devices > Disk Pool or Manage > Devices > Disk Pool view, the Configured for Snapshots field also appears in the Details pane under General and Disk Volume tabs.

Supporting Replication Director in OpsCenter About changes in the Monitor and Manage views

601

Note that the Configured for Snapshots column does not appear by default in the Disk Pool or storage unit view. This column can be added from the Available columns by clicking the Table Settings icon at the top-right corner of the table. The following figure shows the Configured for Snapshot column and also the Configured for Snapshot field (at the end) under the General tab in the Disk Pool view.

The following figure shows the Configured for Snapshot column and also the Configured for Snapshot field (at the end) under the Disk Volume tab in the Disk Pool view.

602

Supporting Replication Director in OpsCenter About changes in the Monitor and Manage views

The following figure shows the Configured for Snapshot column and also the Configured for Snapshot field (at the end) under the General tab in the Storage Unit view.

Supporting Replication Director in OpsCenter About changes in the Monitor and Manage views

603

604

Supporting Replication Director in OpsCenter About changes in the Monitor and Manage views

Chapter

10

Understanding and configuring OpsCenter alerts

This chapter includes the following topics:

About using SNMP About managing OpsCenter alerts using Microsoft System Center Operations Manager 2007 About managing OpsCenter alerts using HP OpenView Network Node Manager 7.50/7.51 on Windows

About using SNMP

This section provides information about SNMP and how OpsCenter uses SNMP. See About SNMP on page 606. See About SNMP versions on page 606. See SNMP versions supported in OpsCenter on page 607. See About the Management Information Base (MIB) and OpsCenter support on page 607. See Configuring the SNMP trap community name for OpsCenter on page 622. See Configuring the SNMP version for sending SNMP traps on page 623. See About customizing Alert Manager settings on page 624. See Frequently asked SNMP and OpsCenter questions on page 625.

606

Understanding and configuring OpsCenter alerts About using SNMP

About SNMP
The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is an application layer protocol that facilitates the exchange of management information between network devices. It is part of the Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) protocol suite. SNMP enables network administrators to manage network performance, find and solve network problems, and plan for network growth. SNMP is based on the manager model and agent model. This model consists of a manager, an agent, a database of management information, managed objects, and the network protocol. The manager provides the interface between the human network manager and the management system. The agent provides the interface between the manager and the physical devices being managed. The manager and agent use a Management Information Base (MIB) and a relatively small set of commands to exchange information. The MIB is organized in a tree structure with individual variables, such as point status or description, being represented as leaves on the branches. A numeric tag or object identifier (OID) is used to distinguish each variable uniquely in the MIB and in SNMP messages.

About SNMP versions

Many versions of SNMP are available. The versions of SNMP protocol are as follows:

SNMPv1 The SNMPv1 version is the first version of the protocol and is defined by RFC 1157. This document replaces the earlier versions that were published as RFC 1067 and RFC 1098. Security is based on community strings. SNMPv2 It was created as an update of SNMPv1 adding several features. The key enhancements to SNMPv2 are focused on the SMI, manager-to-manager capability, and protocol operations. SNMPv2c combines the Community-based approach of SNMPv1 with the protocol operation of SNMPv2 and omits all SNMPv2 security features.

The original SNMPv2 (SNMPv2p) Community-based SNMPv2 (SNMPv2c) User-based SNMPv2 (SNMPv2u) SNMPv2 star (SNMPv2*).

SNMPv3

Understanding and configuring OpsCenter alerts About using SNMP

607

This version of the protocol is a combination of user-based security and the protocol operations and data types from SNMPv2p, and support for proxies. The security is based on that found in SNMPv2u and SNMPv2*. RFC 1905, RFC 1906, RFC 2261, RFC 2262, RFC 2263, RFC 2264, and RFC 2265 define this protocol.

SNMP versions supported in OpsCenter

OpsCenter supports the following SNMP versions:

SNMPv1 SNMPv2c SNMPv3

About the Management Information Base (MIB) and OpsCenter support

Each SNMP element manages specific objects with each object having specific characteristics. Each object and characteristic has a unique object identifier (OID) that is associated with it. Each OID consists of the numbers that are separated by decimal points (for example, 1.3.6.1.4.1.2682.1). These OIDs form a tree. The MIB associates each OID with a readable label and various other parameters that are related to the object. The MIB then serves as a data dictionary that is used to assemble and interpret SNMP messages. See SNMP traps on page 607. See Alert descriptions in OpsCenter on page 610.

SNMP traps
This section explains the content of an SNMP trap that is sent from Symantec OpsCenter. Each OpsCenter trap contains 2 standard object identifiers and 12 OpsCenter-specific object identifiers. An object identifier (or OID) is a numeric string that is used to uniquely identify an object. The following table shows the contents of a trap that is sent from OpsCenter. A total of 14 bindings (or 14 name-value pairs) are present in each trap that is sent from OpsCenter. Each binding associates a particular Management Information Base (MIB) object instance with its current value. Table 10-1 shows the name-value pairs that the traps pass to the SNMP manager.

608

Understanding and configuring OpsCenter alerts About using SNMP

Table 10-1 Name

1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3.0

OpsCenter trap binding Value

This field is the time (in hundredths of a second) between when OpsCenter server service starts and the OpsCenter trap is sent. See Request for Comment (RFC) 1905 and 2576 for a detailed definition. http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc1905.txt http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc2576.txt Example: 1173792454

1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.4.1.0

This field is the unique identifier for this trap. See RFC 1905 and RFC 2576 for a detailed definition. http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc1905.txt http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc2576.txt Example: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1302.3.12.10.2.0.4

1.3.6.1.4.1.1302.3.12.10.1.1

This field is the alert recipient name.

(iso.org.dod.internet.private.enterprises.p Example: Nancy Nieters roducts.veritascc. ccTrapDefinitionsBranch.ccTrapVarsBran ch.alertRecipients) 1.3.6.1.4.1.1302.3.12.10.1.2 This value specifies the alert ID, alert status, and alert summary in the (iso.org.dod.internet.private.enterprises.p following format: roducts.veritascc.ccTrapDefinitionsBranc Alert ID (Alert Status) Alert Summary h.ccTrapVarsBranch.alertSummary) Example: 100 (Active) Job Completed with Exit Status 0 1.3.6.1.4.1.1302.3.12.10.1.3 (iso.org.dod.internet.private.enterprises.p roducts.veritascc. ccTrapDefinitionsBranch.ccTrapVarsBran ch.alertDescription) This field is the alert description. Examples for each alert condition are available. See Alert descriptions in OpsCenter on page 610.

Understanding and configuring OpsCenter alerts About using SNMP

609

Table 10-1 Name

OpsCenter trap binding (continued) Value

This field is blank and not used.

1.3.6.1.4.1.1302.3.12.10.1.4 (iso.org.dod.internet.private.enterprises.p roducts.veritascc. ccTrapDefinitionsBranch.ccTrapVarsBran ch.policyName) 1.3.6.1.4.1.1302.3.12.10.1.5 (iso.org.dod.internet.private.enterprises.v eritas.products.veritascc.ccTrapDefinition sBranch.ccTrapVarsBranch.objectType) 1.3.6.1.4.1.1302.3.12.10.1.6 (iso.org.dod.internet.private.enterprises.v eritas.products.veritascc.ccTrapDefinition sBranch.ccTrapVarsBranch.collectorNam e) 1.3.6.1.4.1.1302.3.12.10.1.7

This field is blank and not used.

This field is blank and not used.

(iso.org.dod.internet.private.enterprises.v eritas.products.veritascc.ccTrapDefinition Example: 10.212.12.148 sBranch.ccTrapVarsBranch.ccHost) 1.3.6.1.4.1.1302.3.12.10.1.8 (iso.org.dod.internet.private.enterprises.v eritas.products.veritascc.ccTrapDefinition sBranch.ccTrapVarsBranch.sourceId) 1.3.6.1.4.1.1302.3.12.10.1.9 (iso.org.dod.internet.private.enterprises.v eritas.products.veritascc.ccTrapDefinition sBranch.ccTrapVarsBranch.ccObject) 1.3.6.1.4.1.1302.3.12.10.1.10 (iso.org.dod.internet.private.enterprises.v eritas.products.veritascc.ccTrapDefinition sBranch.ccTrapVarsBranch.sampleData)

This field is the IP address of the OpsCenter server.

This field is blank and not used.

This field is blank and not used.

This field is blank and not used.

610

Understanding and configuring OpsCenter alerts About using SNMP

Table 10-1 Name

OpsCenter trap binding (continued) Value

This field shows the alert severity level.

1.3.6.1.4.1.1302.3.12.10.1.11

(iso.org.dod.internet.private.enterprises.v eritas.products.veritascc.ccTrapDefinition Example: Informational sBranch.ccTrapVarsBranch.ccAlertSeveri ty) 1.3.6.1.4.1.1302.3.12.10.1.12

(iso.org.dod.internet.private.enterprises.v eritas.products.veritascc.ccTrapDefinition Example: 13-10-2008 06:57:34 00 sBranch.ccTrapVarsBranch.ccAlertTime)

This field shows the time when the alert gets cleared.

The first two OIDs listed in the table are standard SNMP OIDs. The other OIDs starting from 1.3.6.1.4.1.1302.3.12.10.1.1 to 1.3.6.1.4.1.1302.3.12.10.1.12 are OpsCenter OIDs. As per SNMPv2c trap definition, the two standard SNMP OIDs must be present as part of every trap. All the 12 OpsCenter OIDs are defined in the OpsCenter MIB files. However, the two standard OIDs are not defined in the OpsCenter MIB files.

Alert descriptions in OpsCenter

This section shows the content that is sent for each OpsCenter alert as OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1302.3.12.10.1.3. Note: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1302.3.12.10.1.3 represents iso.org.dod.internet.private.enterprises.products.veritascc. ccTrapDefinitionsBranch.ccTrapVarsBranch.alertDescription. Most of the alert information in OpsCenter is sent as OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1302.3.12.10.1.3. Table 10-2 shows the content that each OpsCenter alert sends as OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1302.3.12.10.1.3.

Understanding and configuring OpsCenter alerts About using SNMP

611

Table 10-2 Alert type

Job

Alert conditions in OpsCenter Alert condition

High job failure rate

Description (Example)
Alert Raised on: September 5, 2009 5:00 PM Tree Type : Policy Nodes : Root Node % Failed Jobs: 100.0 Alert Policy: high job failure rate policy view OpsCenter Server: ccs-sol-qe-17 Severity: Warning

Hung job

Alert Raised on: September 7, 2009 2:21 PM Job: 25888 Tree Type : Policy Nodes : ccs-win-qe-5 Job Policy: ccsqasol1 Client: ccs-win-qe-5 Alert Policy: Hung Job OpsCenter Server: ccs-sol-qe-17 Severity: Warning

Job finalized

Alert Raised on: September 9, 2009 4:54 PM Job: 26356 Tree Type : Policy Nodes : node1 Job Policy: sample_policy Exit Status: 150 (termination requested by administrator) Client: ccs-win-qe-5 New State: Done Alert Policy: Job Finalized OpsCenter Server: ccs-sol-qe-11 Severity: Warning

Incomplete Job

612

Understanding and configuring OpsCenter alerts About using SNMP

Table 10-2 Alert type

Alert conditions in OpsCenter (continued) Alert condition Description (Example)

Alert Raised on: September 9, 2009 4:54 PM Job: 26356 Tree Type : Policy Nodes : node1 Job Policy: sample_policy Client: ccs-win-qe-5 Alert Policy: Incomplete Job OpsCenter Server: ccs-sol-qe-11 Severity: Warning

Understanding and configuring OpsCenter alerts About using SNMP

613

Table 10-2 Alert type

Media

Alert conditions in OpsCenter (continued) Alert condition

Frozen media

Description (Example)
Alert Raised on: August 17, 2009 12:24 PM Tree Type : Server Nodes: node1 Frozen Media Name: A00004 Media server : ranjan Alert Policy: frozen media policy OpsCenter Server: localhost Severity: Warning

Suspended media

Alert Raised on: August 12, 2009 3:36 PM Suspended Media Name: 0122L2 Tree Type : Server Nodes: node1 Media server : ccs-win-qe-13 Alert Policy: Suspended media policy OpsCenter Server: localhost Severity: Informational

Exceeded max media mounts

Alert Raised on: August 12, 2009 3:27 PM Media Name: A00009 Tree Type : Server Nodes: node1 Media server : ccs-win-qe-13 Number of mounts: 3402 Alert Policy: Exceeded Max Media Mounts policy OpsCenter Server: localhost Severity: Critical

Media required for restore

614

Understanding and configuring OpsCenter alerts About using SNMP

Table 10-2 Alert type

Alert conditions in OpsCenter (continued) Alert condition Description (Example)

Alert Raised on: December 4, 2008 4:39 PM Tree Type : Server Nodes: node1 Media: 000_00000_TL4 Required for restore Master server: omwin12(omwin12) Client: omwin12 Media server: macy Restore Job ID: 615 Alert Policy: Media Required for Restore_root OpsCenter Server: ccs-sol-qe-10 Severity: Warning Low available media Alert Raised on: August 12, 2009 11:54 AM Tree Type: Server Nodes: node1 Available Media: 4 Alert Policy: low available media OpsCenter Server: localhost Severity: Warning High suspended media Alert Raised on: August 12, 2009 11:40 AM Tree Type : Server Nodes: node1 Suspended Media: 1 % Suspended Media: 25.0 Alert Policy: high percentage suspended media OpsCenter Server: localhost Severity: Warning High frozen media

Understanding and configuring OpsCenter alerts About using SNMP

615

Table 10-2 Alert type

Alert conditions in OpsCenter (continued) Alert condition Description (Example)

Alert Raised on: December 8, 2008 10:24 AM Tree Type : Server Nodes: node1 Frozen media: 6 % Frozen Media: 66 Alert Policy: highfrozenmedia OpsCenter Server: winfor11 Severity: Warning

616

Understanding and configuring OpsCenter alerts About using SNMP

Table 10-2 Alert type

Catalog

Alert conditions in OpsCenter (continued) Alert condition

Catalog Space low

Description (Example)
Alert Raised on: December 8, 2008 10:08 AM Master server : sargam(sargam) Tree Type : Server Nodes: node1 Available Catalog Space: 6480880 KB Threshold Catalog Space: 102400 TB Alert Policy: test_catalogspacelow OpsCenter Server: winfor11 Severity: Warning

Catalog not Backed up Alert Raised on: September 7, 2009 9:54 AM Tree Type : Server Nodes : ccs-sol-qe-13 Threshold: 10 Minute(s) Last Catalog BackUp Time: September 6, 2009 5:21 PM Alert Policy: Catalog not Backed up OpsCenter Server: ccs-sol-qe-17 Severity: Warning Catalog Backup Disabled Alert Raised on: September 5, 2009 3:44 PM Tree Type : Server Nodes : ccs-win-qe-1 Alert Policy: Catalog Backup Disabled OpsCenter Server: ccs-sol-qe-17 Severity: Warning

Understanding and configuring OpsCenter alerts About using SNMP

617

Table 10-2 Alert type

Tape

Alert conditions in OpsCenter (continued) Alert condition

Mount Request

Description (Example)
Alert Raised on: September 7, 2009 6:52 PM Tree Type : Server Nodes : ccs-win-qe-1 Barcode: 000014 Density: dlt evsn: 000014 Mode: 82 Request ID: 120 rvsn: 000014 User: - Volume Group: 000_00000_TLD Request Time: February 4, 1991 12:56 AM Alert Policy: Mount Request OpsCenter Server: ccs-sol-qe-12 Severity: Warning

No Cleaning Tape

Alert Raised on: August 17, 2009 12:30 PM Tree Type : Server Nodes : ccs-win-qe-1 Media server : ranjan Robot Number: 0 Alert Policy: no cleaning tape left OpsCenter Server: localhost Severity: Warning

Zero Cleaning Left

618

Understanding and configuring OpsCenter alerts About using SNMP

Table 10-2 Alert type

Alert conditions in OpsCenter (continued) Alert condition Description (Example)

Alert Raised on: December 13, 2008 12:02 PM Tree Type : Server Nodes : ccs-win-qe-1 Master server : ORLP-SPEECH01 Media server : ORLP-SPEECH01 Robot Number: 0 Cleaning Tape: CLN084 Alert Policy: test_zerocleaningleft_public OpsCenter Server: winfor11 Severity: Warning

Understanding and configuring OpsCenter alerts About using SNMP

619

Table 10-2 Alert type

Disk

Alert conditions in OpsCenter (continued) Alert condition

Disk Pool Full

Description (Example)
Alert Raised on: August 20, 2009 5:25 PM Tree Type : Server Nodes : ccs-win-qe-1 Disk Pool ID: SSOD_Pool Disk Pool Name: SSOD_Pool Total Capacity: 1007664128 KB Used Capacity: 1005702144 KB Alert Policy: Disk Pool Full OpsCenter Server: localhost Severity: Informational

Disk Volume Down

Alert Raised on: August 17, 2009 5:08 PM Tree Type : Server Nodes : ccs-win-qe-1 Disk Volume ID: /vol/luns/nbusd_sun10 Disk Pool ID: SSOD_Pool Alert Policy: disk volume down pol OpsCenter Server: localhost Severity: Informational

Low Disk Volume Capacity

Alert Raised on: August 26, 2009 10:35 AM Tree Type : Server Nodes : ccs-win-qe-1 Disk Volume Free Capacity: 106 MB Threshold: 20 % OpsCenter Server: localhost Severity: Major

Drive is Down

620

Understanding and configuring OpsCenter alerts About using SNMP

Table 10-2 Alert type

Alert conditions in OpsCenter (continued) Alert condition Description (Example)

Alert Raised on: August 12, 2009 10:39 AM Tree Type : Server Nodes : ccs-win-qe-1 Media server : omlinux2 Drive Name: BNCHMARK.VS640.000 Drive Number: 1 Robot Number: 0 Alert Policy: drive down-individual alert Device Path: /dev/nst0 OpsCenter Server: localhost Severity: Critical High Down Drives Alert Raised on: August 12, 2009 3:13 PM Tree Type : Server Nodes : ccs-win-qe-1 Drive Number: 1 % Down Drive Paths: 100.0 Alert Policy: high down drives OpsCenter Server: localhost Severity: Major

Understanding and configuring OpsCenter alerts About using SNMP

621

Table 10-2 Alert type

Host

Alert conditions in OpsCenter (continued) Alert condition Description (Example)

Agent Server Agent Host Name : pinacolada Communication break Server Host Name : PINACOLADA Severity: Warning Master Server Unreachable Alert Raised on: October 23, 2009 12:20 AM Alert Policy: MasterServer Unreachable OpsCenter Server: CCSQAWINSP1 Severity: Major Lost Contact with Media Server Alert Raised on: February 18, 2008 1:33 PM Master server : pmsun22 Media server : pmsun22 Alert Policy: lcm OpsCenter Server: pmwin9 Severity: Warning Service Stopped Alert Raised on: August 31, 2009 5:59 PM Tree Type : Server Nodes : ccs-win-qe-1 Media server : omlinux2 Process Name: nbkms Alert Policy: Service stopped OpsCenter Server: ccs-sol-qe-14 Severity: Major Symantec ThreatCon Alert Raised on: September 7, 2009 12:29 PM ThreatCon is at Level 1:Normal Alert Policy: THREAT_CON OpsCenter Server: divakar Severity: Warning Job Policy Change

622

Understanding and configuring OpsCenter alerts About using SNMP

Table 10-2 Alert type

Alert conditions in OpsCenter (continued) Alert condition Description (Example)

Alert Raised on: September 7, 2009 12:29 PM Tree Type : Server Nodes : ccs-win-qe-5 Changed Policy Name: BMRPolicy Alert Policy: job policy_change OpsCenter Server: ccs-sol-qe-17 Modified Policy Attributes : Severity: Warning

Configuring the SNMP trap community name for OpsCenter

For OpsCenter traps, the SNMP trap community name is OpsCenter (by default). Symantec OpsCenter uses a public community named OpsCenter. Public community implies a read-only access to SNMP traps. Use the following procedures to configure the SNMP trap community name on Windows and UNIX. To configure the SNMP trap community name for OpsCenter traps on Windows

On the OpsCenter server host, stop all the OpsCenter server services.
INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsadmin.bat stop

Navigate to INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\config directory and open the nm.conf file. The file shows the following entry:
nm.trapCommunity=OpsCenter

Modify the value of nm.trapCommunity from OpsCenter to some other name.

3 4

Save the nm.conf file after making the changes. Restart all OpsCenter services.
INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsadmin.bat start

Understanding and configuring OpsCenter alerts About using SNMP

623

To configure the SNMP trap community name for OpsCenter traps on UNIX

On the OpsCenter server host, stop all the OpsCenter services.

<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin.sh stop

Navigate to <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/config directory and open the nm.conf file. The file shows the following entry:
nm.trapCommunity=OpsCenter

Modify the value of nm.trapCommunity from OpsCenter to some other name.

3 4

Save the nm.conf file after making the changes. Restart all OpsCenter services.
<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin.sh start

Configuring the SNMP version for sending SNMP traps

The default SNMP version through which SNMP traps are sent in OpsCenter is SNMPv2c. However, this SNMP version can be changed by modifying a configuration file. The following procedure explains how to configure the default SNMP version on Windows and UNIX. To configure the SNMP version for sending SNMP traps on Windows

On the OpsCenter server host, stop all the OpsCenter services.

INSTALL_PATH\server\bin\opsadmin.bat stop

Navigate to INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\config directory and open the nm.conf file. The file shows the following entry:
nm.trapVersion=v2c

Modify the value of nm.trapVersion from v2c to v1 (for SNMPv1) or v3 (for SNMPv3).

3 4

Save the nm.conf file after making the changes. Restart all OpsCenter services:
INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsadmin.bat start

624

Understanding and configuring OpsCenter alerts About using SNMP

To configure the SNMP version for sending SNMP traps on UNIX

On the OpsCenter server host, stop all the OpsCenter services:

<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin.sh stop

Navigate to the OpsCenter configuration directory:

cd <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/config

Open the nm.conf file. The file shows the following entry: nm.trapVersion="v2c" Modify the value of nm.trapVersion from v2c to v1 (for SNMPv1) or v3 (for SNMPv3).

4 5

Save the nm.conf file after making the changes. Restart all OpsCenter services:
<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin.sh start

About customizing Alert Manager settings

In NOM 6.5.4, you can customize a few Alert Manager settings using the am.conf configuration file. The am.conf configuration file is located at the following default location:
Windows Solaris <NOM_INSTALL_DIR>\config\am.conf <NOM_INSTALL_DIR>/config/am.conf

The Alert Manager configuration settings are described as follows: Note: By default all Alert Manager configuration parameters are set to true.
am.autoClear Set this parameter to true, if you want the Alert Manager to automatically clear the alerts that are generated in NOM 6.5.4.

Understanding and configuring OpsCenter alerts About using SNMP

625

am.notifyOnAutoClear

Make sure that the am.autoClear parameter is set to true, to apply the change in the am.notifyOnAutoClear parameter setting on the Alert Manager functionality. Set this parameter to true, if you want to send notification after an alert was automatically cleared.

am.notifyOnManualClear

Set this parameter to true, if you want to send notifications after manually clearing alerts.

Note: If you set an Alert Manager configuration parameter to a value other than true or false, NOM assumes it as false.

Frequently asked SNMP and OpsCenter questions

Question Answer

What are the default versions of SNMP that SNMPv1, SNMPv2c, and SNMPv3. are supported in OpsCenter? What is SNMPv2c? How it is different from See About SNMP versions on page 606. SNMPv2? Is the OpsCenter SNMP community name configurable? Yes. See Configuring the SNMP trap community name for OpsCenter on page 622.

How is the OpsCenter community related to The "OpsCenter" community used by the public community? OpsCenter is public, but the community name is maintained as "OpsCenter". Is the default community name of "OpsCenter" just a name for the community, Generally, the "default read community but still considered public because of certain string" for the public community is "public". attributes? Public community means read-only access to SNMP traps.

626

Understanding and configuring OpsCenter alerts About managing OpsCenter alerts using Microsoft System Center Operations Manager 2007

About managing OpsCenter alerts using Microsoft System Center Operations Manager 2007
Microsoft System Center Operations Manager 2007 (SCOM), formerly Microsoft Operations Manager (MOM), is a next-generation performance and event-monitoring product from Microsoft. Microsoft System Center Operations Manager Management Pack for NetBackup lets you monitor and manage NetBackup alerts using Microsoft System Center Operations Manager 2007 (SCOM 2007). By detecting and alerting you on critical conditions, this Management Pack helps prevent possible service outages. The SCOM Management Pack for NetBackup and the documentation is available for download on the Symantec Support Web site. http://www.symantec.com/docs/TECH139344

About managing OpsCenter alerts using HP OpenView Network Node Manager 7.50/7.51 on Windows
You can monitor and manage NetBackup alerts using HP OpenView Network Node Manager 7.50 or 7.51 on Windows. By detecting and alerting you on critical conditions, HP OpenView Network Node Manager (NNM) can help you to prevent possible service outages. You can download and use the nom_trapd.conf file to monitor and manage NetBackup alerts using HP OpenView Network Node Manager 7.50 or 7.51. By using nom_trapd.conf file and configuring NNM and OpsCenter, NNM can receive the SNMP traps that have been configured in OpsCenter. As a result, NNM can be used for the centralized management of NetBackup alerts. Note: The term HP OpenView Network Node Manager (NNM) in this section refers specifically to HP OpenView Network Node Manager 7.50 or 7.51.
nom_trapd.conf file and the documentation is available for download on the

support site. http://entsupport.symantec.com/docs/295154 More information about OpsCenter alerts is available. See OpsCenter Alert conditions on page 490.

Chapter

11

Reporting in OpsCenter
This chapter includes the following topics:

About OpsCenter reports Report Templates in OpsCenter About managing reports in OpsCenter Creating a custom report in OpsCenter Changes in custom reporting in OpsCenter 7.5 Creating an OpsCenter report using SQL query About managing My Reports About managing My Dashboard About managing reports folders in OpsCenter Using report schedules in OpsCenter Reports > Schedules options About managing report schedules in OpsCenter About managing time schedules in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

About OpsCenter reports

Symantec OpsCenter is a Web-based software application that helps organizations by providing visibility into their data protection environment. By using OpsCenter, you can track the effectiveness of data backup and archive operations by generating comprehensive business-level reports.

628

Reporting in OpsCenter About OpsCenter reports

OpsCenter displays customizable, multi-level views of backup and archive resources and customizable reports for tracking service usage and expenditures. It also contains tools for defining cost metrics and chargeback formulas or handling alerts. A wide range of audiences benefit from the reporting and the management capabilities of OpsCenter. The audiences include IT (Information Technology) managers, application owners, IT finance teams, external compliance auditors, legal teams, line-of-business managers, external customers, IT architects, and capacity planning teams.

OpsCenter reports UI
The OpsCenter reports UI consists of the following components:
Report Templates tab This tab lists all Report Templates (or standard or canned reports) that are available in OpsCenter. You can modify the default parameter values of a Report Template as required and generate a new report of that kind. For example, use the existing Backup > Job Activity > Client Count Report Template, change the relative timeframe to four weeks (default timeframe is two weeks) and generate a new Client Count report. You can see all clients that are backed up over the last four weeks. See Reports > Report Templates on page 629. My Reports tab You can save generated reports for your future use. These saved reports are stored in the My Reports tab. Use this section to view the saved reports or modify the parameters of the saved reports and generate new reports out of them. You can also delete the saved reports using the My Reports tab. See About managing My Reports on page 668. See Saving an OpsCenter report on page 638. My Dashboard tab Your saved reports are preserved in My Reports tab, which you can select and publish on My Dashboard tab. You can select multiple reports and add them in the same dashboard section. Thus, you can create multiple dashboard section containing a number of reports. See About managing My Dashboard on page 671. Schedules tab This tab contains all report schedules. You can create, edit, or delete schedules using this tab. See Using report schedules in OpsCenter on page 675.

Reporting in OpsCenter About OpsCenter reports

629

Manage Folders tab

Use this tab to manage folders where you have saved your reports. See About managing reports folders in OpsCenter on page 673.

Report creation wizards in OpsCenter

OpsCenter provides wizards, which guide you through the entire report creation procedure. To create a report, in the OpsCenter console on the Reports tab, click Create New Report. The following report creation options are available on the Select Report Creation Option panel:

Create a report using an existing Report Template . See Creating an OpsCenter report using a Report Template on page 634. Create a custom report. See Creating a custom report in OpsCenter on page 644. Create a report using SQL Query. See Creating an OpsCenter report using SQL query on page 666.

Reports > Report Templates

This section provides details of the Report Templates that are available in OpsCenter. OpsCenter provides a number of Report Templates (or standard or canned reports) that you can modify and generate a new report of that kind. In the OpsCenter console, when you click the Reports tab, the Report Templates home page is displayed. From the Reports > Report Templates page, you can click any of the Report Templates to view the respective report with default parameter values. You can also click the following options on the Reports > Report Templates page:
Create New Report Click Create New Report to create a standard report, custom report, or run an SQL query. If you do not want to run a report template with default parameter values, you can directly edit it from Reports > Report Templates page. To edit a report template, first select the report template by selecting the checkbox on the extreme left of the report template. Click Edit Report to edit and save the report without executing it.

Edit Report

630

Reporting in OpsCenter About OpsCenter reports

Figure 11-1 shows various components of a report that is generated using a template. Figure 11-1
Manage reports toolbar Time filters Report Templates tree Report views Report area

Report Template

Tabular view

Report Templates tree

This tree lists all Report Templates that are available in OpsCenter. See About Report Templates descriptions on page 686.

Manage report toolbar

Use this toolbar to save, export, or email the generated report. Use these time filters to view the data for a specific period of time. OpsCenter reports are displayed here. Reports can be viewed in different forms or views, Distribution, Historical, or Ranking. Use these options to change the current report view. These options are available only for chart-based reports.

Time filters

Report area Report views

About custom reports in OpsCenter Analytics

Apart from generating reports using the existing templates, you can also create custom reports in OpsCenter by changing the report parameters as required. See Creating a custom report in OpsCenter on page 644.

Reporting in OpsCenter Report Templates in OpsCenter

631

About custom SQL query in OpsCenter Analytics

In OpsCenter, you can create reports by directly running SQL queries. Using this report creation option, you do not need to go through multiple parameter selections. Note: You can create only tabular reports by running SQL queries. You can also run stored procedures using this feature. See Creating an OpsCenter report using SQL query on page 666.

Report Templates in OpsCenter

Symantec OpsCenter provides a set of Report Templates or standard or canned reports that have parameters set to default values. You can modify the default parameters and generate reports to view the required data. OpsCenter reports help you to have a good visibility into your data protection environment. See Reports > Report Templates on page 629. Report Templates are categorized as follows:
Enterprise Vault Archiving Reports These reports are generated based on the archive data that is collected from Enterprise Vault. You can report on the number of messages that are archived across mailboxes or on the size of these messages before and after the archive operation. The backup reports show the information that is related to backups, such as success rate, job status, and protected bytes. This category also includes recovery reports.

Backup Reports

Note: If you select Reports > Activity

Planning > Job Size in the OpsCenter user interface, the report that appears displays the wrong client name. Instead of showing the client names, a list of backed up VM images is displayed in this report. In addition, the list of VM images may not be accurate. Catalog Reports These reports provide details about the catalogs.

632

Reporting in OpsCenter Report Templates in OpsCenter

Chargeback Reports

The chargeback reports provide details of the backup services expenditures. Using these reports you can track the backup and the recovery usage and the associated cost. You can calculate the cost of data protection management and chargeback to customers and business units.

Client Reports

These reports provide details about clients such as backup status, restore job details, or summary dashboard. These reports provide details about cloud. Disk-based data protection (DBDP) reports show disk pool capacity and its usage, performance of clients on LAN or SAN, NetBackup storage lifecycle Map Hold reports are a part of NetBackup Search. The Hold report category is visible only if you have added a valid NetBackup Search license key in OpsCenter and when you log on as a Security Administrator. These reports provide media data, such as tape count or usage. These reports provide details of throughput. These reports show all details about the backup job policies in NetBackup. These reports provide details about restore operation. The SLP reports in OpsCenter show an end-to-end view of the SLP process that includes backup to import of duplicated image into different NetBackup domains. The SLP reports help you to verify if each step in the SLP is executed and identify the possible bottlenecks.

Cloud Reports Disk & Tape Device Activity Reports

Hold Reports

Media Reports

Performance Reports Policy Reports

Restore Reports

Storage Lifecycle Policy

Reporting in OpsCenter Report Templates in OpsCenter

633

Workload Analyzer

The Workload Analyzer report gives information about the activities that are done across a period of seven days. The activities are number of jobs running at a given period of time and the amount of data that is transferred during this period. The report contains 168 data points of analysis in terms of the activities that are done for each hour for a period of seven days.

About report filters in OpsCenter

There can be hundreds of records or thousands of MB of the data that you may not be concerned about. For example, you want to view only those jobs that were successful. To view this specific data, you need to use the status filter. By setting this filter to Successful while generating the Job Count report, you can view all jobs that were successful. OpsCenter provides a number of filters that you can use to view the required data. For each report category there is a different set of filters. In OpsCenter 7.5, the Job Status column has been removed from the Jobs filter for the following reports:

Advanced Success Rate All Failed Backup Consecutive Failure Success Rate Line

Instead of the Job Status column, a new column that is called Consider Partially successful job as successful has been added under the Success Rate filter for all the above reports. From OpsCenter 7.1, a filter called Host is available when you edit custom reports and some Client reports. Using the Host filter, you can view data for Active Clients in specific reports. This filter has been added in the custom reports and the following Client reports:

Recovery Point Objective Client Risk Analysis

These Client reports can be accessed from the Reports > Report Templates page by navigating to Client Reports > Risk Analysis folder. Note the following considerations with respect to using the report filters:

634

Reporting in OpsCenter Report Templates in OpsCenter

If you edit certain standard reports and select Backup from Snapshot Job type from the Filters section, incorrect data is shown if data for Backup from Snapshot jobs exists. This also happens when you create image-related reports via custom reporting and apply Backup from Snapshot job type filter. The following standard reports display incorrect data when you select Backup from Snapshot job type from the Filters section:

Hold Reports > Image Retention Summary Backup > Planning Activity > Stored Backup Images > Duplicate copies Backup > Planning Activity > Stored Backup Images > Stored Backup Images on Media Backup > Planning Activity > Stored Backup Images > Valid Backup Images Backup > Planning Activity > Capacity Planning > Forecasted Size Backup > Planning Activity > Capacity Planning > Historical Size

The Backup Media Role filter when applied to the Tapes Expiring In Future and Tapes Expiring Now reports does not return any data as data is miscalculated in OpsCenter.

Creating an OpsCenter report using a Report Template

This section provides the procedure to create a report using an existing Report Template . To create a report using an existing Report Template

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, click Reports. On the Report Template tab, click Create New Report. To view a report output of a template, select a template in the reports tree. The report output is as per the default parameter values. You cannot modify any of the report parameters. By clicking the Create New Report option, you can launch the report creation wizard that guides you through the entire report creation procedure. Here you can modify the report parameters and view the required data.

3 4

In the Report Wizard, retain the default selection Create a report using an existing Report Template and click Next. On the Report Templates list, expand a report category to see the Report Templates within it. Select the Report Template that you want to create a report from. Click Next.

Reporting in OpsCenter Report Templates in OpsCenter

635

5 6

Select time frame and other filters as required and click Next. Modify display options and click Next.

Using report formats

The following formats are available for standard reports in OpsCenter.

About report formats

Report formats are described as follows:
Rankings reports Display a horizontal bar graph showing all the data for each view level object, from greatest to least, within the selected time frame. Display a pie chart showing all the data for each view level object within the selected time frame. Display a stacked (segmented) bar graph with a trend line superimposed over it, showing the average upward and downward trends of the data over time. For example the total size of each days backup jobs broken out by geography. Some backup reports use a different bar chart format, displaying clustered columns for easy comparison between two classes of objects or events Tabular reports Display backup or archiving data in a table

Distribution reports

Historical reports

About viewing data in a graphical report

Graphical reports present data in a convenient, at a glance fashion. However, some precision may be lost when you use this format. When you are viewing a graphical report, tool tips are available to provide the precise numerical data. To view the numerical data on which a graphical report is based, move your mouse pointer over an area of the graph. You can also click Show Chart as Table at the bottom of the report to view the data in a tabular format. When you are viewing a backup report, you can easily view lower-level reports. On a graphical report, when you click an area within a graph, the report refreshes to display data for the next lowest object level. For example, in a Geography view, you can click a bar labeled Canada to display a bar chart showing data for Toronto and Vancouver. You can select the bar for a host to display data for the hosts file systems.

636

Reporting in OpsCenter About managing reports in OpsCenter

About managing reports in OpsCenter

This section provides information on the operations that you can carry out on the standard reports that you generate in OpsCenter. You can carry out the following operations:

Saving a report See Saving an OpsCenter report on page 638. Exporting a report See Exporting an OpsCenter report on page 639. Emailing a report See Emailing a report in OpsCenter on page 641.

Save report and email report dialog boxes

A description of the Save report and Email report dialog box options follows in the table. Table 11-1 Option
Report name

Save report dialog box options Description

Enter the report name. For example, if you generated the Job Count standard report with the group by option that is selected as Policy Type and report view as Historical, you can name this report NumberofJobsbyPolicies. When you select this report on the Saved Reports tab, the report is displayed with the saved filters and in the report view that were selected when the reports were saved, with respect to the current time. Review the following points about report names: The report name must be unique in the folder where you create it. For example, if you create a report in the Private Reports folder under My Reports, the report name that you specify must be unique in the Private Reports folder. The same user can have two reports with the same name - like one in Public Reports and one in Private Reports folder. The report name must not contain any special characters like (/ \ * ? | ") The report name must not be more than 220 characters.

Reporting in OpsCenter About managing reports in OpsCenter

637

Table 11-1 Option

Description Folder

Save report dialog box options (continued) Description

Enter the short description for the report. Select Public or Private folder. If you save the report in a public folder, all other OpsCenter users can view it. If you save the report in a private folder, only you can view it. Expand the Public or Private folder and select a folder where you want to save the report. Depending on the folder type that you have selected - public or private - the folders displayed for selection vary.

Create New

Click this option to create a new public or private folder. Clicking this option changes the view of Folder. Enter the folder name and click OK. This folder is made available in the Folder tree for selection. Select this newly created folder where you want to save the report.

Overwrite if report already Select this check box if you want to overwrite the existing exists in the selected folder report with the same name in the same folder. If you do not select this check box and save a report with a name identical to any of the existing reports in the selected folder, a confirmation message is displayed before you overwrite the existing report.

Table 11-2 Option

Select Format

Email report dialog box options Description

Select one of the following formats:

PDF HTML CSV TSV XML

Note: Some of these formats may not be available for

specific reports. For example, the Drive Throughput and Drive Utilization reports can be exported and emailed only in the HTML format.

638

Reporting in OpsCenter About managing reports in OpsCenter

Table 11-2 Option

Select Content

Email report dialog box options (continued) Description

Select one of the following report formats:

Distribution Historical Ranking Tabular

Distribution, Historical, and Ranking formats are available only for chart-based reports. Email Enter appropriate email details like address, subject, and message.

Saving an OpsCenter report

You can save a standard report. This action saves the filters that you have selected while generating a report. You can use this set of filters to regenerate the reports with the current time selections. These reports are saved in the OpsCenter database, which you can view using the My Reports tab. You cannot save a report whose name contains any special characters like (/ \ * ? | "). See About managing My Reports on page 668. To save a report

1 2 3 4

In the OpsCenter console, click Reports > Report Templates. From the Reports tree, select the report template that you want to save. In the right-hand report view area, click the Save As Report icon. The Save Report pop-up screen opens. On the Save Report screen, enter the required details. See Save report and email report dialog boxes on page 636.

Click OK. After a successful save, My Reports tab is displayed with this report selected. Note: You cannot save a report name that contains special characters like (/ \ * ? | ")

Reporting in OpsCenter About managing reports in OpsCenter

639

Exporting an OpsCenter report

Using OpsCenter, you can preserve report data in files or print the data. See File formats available in OpsCenter on page 639. You can open the exported file using other applications, such as a spreadsheet program or a text editor. To export a report

In the OpsCenter console, click Reports > Report Templates. You can also export reports that you may have created from Reports > My Reports.

2 3 4

From the Reports tree, select the report template or report that you want to export. In the report view area at the right-hand side, click the Export Report icon. The Export Report pop-up screen opens. On the Export Report pop-up screen, select the export options that you want to export the report with: File format, such as PDF, HTML, CSV, TSV, or XML and content or report view, such as Tabular, Distribution, Historical, or Ranking. Note that only the applicable formats and report views appear for specific reports. See Save report and email report dialog boxes on page 636.

Click OK. The system displays the export options pertaining to the file format you have selected. Select those options and export the report.

File formats available in OpsCenter

You can export or email OpsCenter reports in the following file formats:
PDF (Portable Document Format) Can be viewed using a PDF reader, such as Adobe Reader

CSV (comma-separated Use with spreadsheet programs, such as Microsoft Excel. values) TSV (tab-separated values) HTML (hypertext markup language ) Compatible with word-processing applications and text editors

Can be opened using with Web browsers

640

Reporting in OpsCenter About managing reports in OpsCenter

XML (Extensible Markup Language)

Can be imported (using user-written scripts) by other programs like databases or billing applications.

The XML format has been enhanced in OpsCenter 7.5. Some of the fields that were present in other formats like PDF, CSV, TSV, and HTML are now also shown in the XML format. The following was the older XML format:
<Report> {Report Name} <Disclaimer> {customer message} </Disclaimer> <Table> <Header> <Row></Row> </Header> <Rows> <Row></Row> </Rows> </Table> <Table> <Header> <Row></Row> </Header> <Rows> <Row></Row> </Rows> </Table> {footer} </Report>

In the old XML format, for each view (like distribution, timeline, etc) there is one <Table> tag that contains information for that view. The following is the new XML format:
<Report> <ReportView> <Name> {nameValue} </Name> <Description> {descriptionForReportView} </Description> <TimeDuration> {timeValue} </TimeDuration> <ViewName> {viewNameValue} </ViewName>

Reporting in OpsCenter About managing reports in OpsCenter

641

<ViewSelections> <SelectedItem value="{selectedNodeNameValue1}"> <ExcludedItem> {excludedNodeName1} </ExcludedItem> <ExcludedItem> {excludedNodeName2} </ExcludedItem> ... </SelectedItem> <SelectedItem value="{selectedNodeNameValue2}"> <ExcludedItem> {excludedNodeName3} </ExcludedItem> <ExcludedItem> {excludedNodeName4} </ExcludedItem> ... </SelectedItem> </ViewSelections> <Table> <Header> <Row></Row> </Header> <Rows> <Row></Row> </Rows> </Table> </ReportView> <ReportView> </Report>

In the new format <Table> has been moved under a new tag called <ReportView>. If multiple views (distribution, historical, ranking) are selected for export or email, each of the views will have one <ReportView> tag corresponding to it. Name, Description and TimeDuration tags inside ReportView tag will always be present for each view. However, ViewName, GroupBy, and ViewSelections tags will be present only if applicable. If report is edited and view selections are changed, these tags will be added in export.

Emailing a report in OpsCenter

Using OpsCenter, you can email report data to the selected recipients. You can email a report in a number of different file formats. See File formats available in OpsCenter on page 639.

642

Reporting in OpsCenter About managing reports in OpsCenter

To email a report

In the OpsCenter console, click Reports > Report Templates. You can also export reports that you may have created from Reports > My Reports.

2 3

From the Reports tree, select the report template or the report that you want to email. In the report view area at the right-hand side, click the Email Report icon. The Email Report pop-up screen opens. See Save report and email report dialog boxes on page 636.

On the Email Report pop-up screen, select the email options: File format, such as PDF, HTML, CSV, TSV, or XML and content or report view, such as Tabular, Distribution, Historical, or Ranking Note that only the applicable formats and report views appear for specific reports.

Enter email IDs in To, Cc, and Bcc text boxes, to which you want to send emails. If these email IDs do not already exist, they are automatically added to the database. Alternatively, you can add existing email recipients. See Adding email recipients to an OpsCenter report mailing on page 644.

6 7 8

Enter the subject of the email. Enter the message that may be a short description regarding the report data that you want to email. Click OK.

Configuring number of rows in a tabular report for email or export

When you export, email, or schedule a tabular report, 4000 rows are exported by default. You can configure the maximum number of rows in a tabular report that you can export or email.

Reporting in OpsCenter About managing reports in OpsCenter

643

To configure the maximum number of rows for export

1 2

Log on to the OpsCenter Server. Stop all the OpsCenter Server services or processes by using the following commands on Windows and UNIX:
Windows UNIX INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsadmin.bat stop <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin.sh stop

Navigate to the following location:

Windows UNIX C:\Program Files\Symantec\OpsCenter\server\config <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/config

4 5

Open the report.conf file. You may want to export all the rows or you may want to increase or decrease the maximum value. Note that if you export all rows or increase the number of rows, exporting a report may take time when there are a large number of rows.

To export all the rows, you can either comment out report.schedule.max.tabular.rows parameter or specify any value less than or equal to -1 for report.schedule.max.tabular.rows parameter. To comment out report.schedule.max.tabular.rows parameter, add two forward slashes before the parameter in this manner:
//report.schedule.max.tabular.rows=4000

or Edit the value 4000 in report.schedule.max.tabular.rows=4000 to -1.

report.schedule.max.tabular.rows=-1

To change the maximum number of rows to say 5000, you can set the value of report.schedule.max.tabular.rows as 5000. Configure report.schedule.max.tabular.rows=5000

Start all Symantec OpsCenter Server services or processes by using the following command for Windows and UNIX:
Windows UNIX INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsadmin.bat start <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin.sh start

644

Reporting in OpsCenter Creating a custom report in OpsCenter

Adding email recipients to an OpsCenter report mailing

This section provides information on how to add email recipients to whom you want to send emails. This procedure assumes you've already started the email report procedure. More information is available about this procedure. See Emailing a report in OpsCenter on page 641. To add email recipients

On the Add Email Recipients screen, select the check boxes in front of the email recipients to whom you want to send emails. See Add email recipients dialog box options on page 644. Click To.., Cc.., or Bcc.. depending on where you want to add the selected recipients.

Click OK.

Add email recipients dialog box options

Table 11-3 Option
Recipient Name/Email Address To.../Cc.../Bcc...

Add email recipients dialog box options Description

Select the check boxes in front of the email recipients to whom you want to send emails. Click To.., Cc.., or Bcc.. depending on where you want to add the selected recipients.

Creating a custom report in OpsCenter

In addition to using the reports that come by default with OpsCenter, you can use the Custom Report Wizard to create custom reports that are unique to your installation. After creating a custom report, you can modify the report, print, save, and email it. As you work with different report categories, the Report Wizard displays different parameters. Many of the parameters are used for multiple report categories, and they appear in different combinations for each type. You can create a custom report by using the parameters that are available in the Custom Report Wizard. See About Custom Report Wizard parameters on page 654.

Reporting in OpsCenter Creating a custom report in OpsCenter

645

To create a custom report

1 2 3 4

In the OpsCenter console, click Reports > Report Templates. Click Create New Report. On the Select Report Creation Option page, click Create a Custom Report to start the Custom Report Wizard. Select a report category from the Category drop-down list:
Agent Select this category if you want to know about the configured Agents on the OpsCenter Server. Select this report category if you use Enterprise Vault. To create reports, ensure that data is being collected from Enterprise Vault using the OpsCenter Agent. Select this category to create reports on jobs, disk pool, logs, image, media, tape drive etc.

Archive

Backup/Recovery

646

Reporting in OpsCenter Creating a custom report in OpsCenter

The Subcategories appear as per what you select from the Category drop-down list. From the Subcategory drop-down list, select one of the following report subcategories: The following subcategory appears when you select Agent as the main category:
Agent Status Select to view information specific to the Agent. For example, you can create a report that shows the configured Agents on the OpsCenter Server and the Agent status.

The following subcategories appear when you select Archive as the main category:
Archive Storage Using this category you can generate reports to display information on archive storage, such as Vault Store or Vault Partition.

Archive Target Using this category you can generate reports to display information of mailboxes / targets that were archived.

The following subcategories appear when you select Backup/Recovery as the main category:
Disk Pool Select to view a consolidated report related to disk pool. Select to view job, image, media, or disk data. The reports based on this subcategory provide a consolidated view of job, image, media, and disk. For example, you can create a custom report that tells the number of images per job type or a tabular report that tells which image is backed up on which media. With OpsCenter 7.5, you can also view the backups that are taken on the disk. Log Select to view logs that are generated as a result of backup and recovery activity in NetBackup and Backup Exec. Select to view reports on media like tape media etc. Select to view reports on tape drives. This subcategory does not show reports related to media servers.The associated filter parameters, such as Tape Drive Device Host or Tape Drive Type appear.

Job/Image/Media/Disk

Media Tape Drive

Reporting in OpsCenter Creating a custom report in OpsCenter

647

Scheduled Jobs

Generate reports on Scheduled Jobs using this category. For example you can create a report that comapres the scheduled time and the actual time for scheduled jobs.

Select a report format from the following formats in the View Type drop-down list:
Distribution Ranking Display groupings or objects or resources in a pie chart. Display a horizontal bar graph showing all the data for each view level object, from greatest to the least, within the selected time frame. Display a stacked (segmented) bar graph with a trendline superimposed over it showing the average upward and downward trends of the data over time. Display data in the form of a table.

Historical

Tabular

7 8

Click Next. In the Select Parameters panel of the Custom Report Wizard, select values for one or more report parameters. The report parameters that appear depend on the report category and the view type that you selected. See Configuring timeframe parameters on page 654. See About Custom Report Wizard parameters on page 654. As you select parameters, the Content pane may refresh to display additional selections. For example, when you select a view filter, you are then given a choice of items on which to filter the report display.

Click Next. for historical, ranking, tabular, and distribution reports. Different display options are displayed for different view types. See About display options on page 657. Click Next.

10 In the Modify Display Options panel, define the measurements to be collected

648

Reporting in OpsCenter Creating a custom report in OpsCenter

11 In the View Report Data panel, you can view the report that is created as per
your selection. Click Next. To return to the Custom Report Wizard and make changes to the report, click Back.

12 Save the report. Enter a report name, a description (optional), and location
where you want to save the report. Click Save. Example 1: You may want to create a custom report based on your specific requirements. For example, you may want to create a daily status report of the clients that are backed up everyday. This report gives the detailed tabular information of the jobs directory being backed up, its status (if its successful, partially successful or failed), Level Type (Incremental, Full, Differential Incremental), the job file count and job size in the datacenter . You can enhance this report by adding more available columns based on the report requirement. See the procedure to know how you can create a daily status report of the clients that are backed up everyday. To create a daily status report of the clients that are backed up everyday

1 2 3 4 5

In the OpsCenter console, click Reports. On the Report Templates tab, click Create New Report. On the Report Wizard, select the Create a custom report option and click Next. Select the Report Category as Backup/Recovery and the Subcategory as Backup Job/Image. Select the Report View type as Tabular. Click Next.

6 7 8 9

Select the appropriate timeframe for which you want to view the data. Select the Job filter. Select the Column as Backup Job data type, Operator as =, and Value as Yes. Click Add. Click Next. Under Tabular Report Properties, select the Time Basis as Job End Time. Change the Display Unit as per your requirement.

10 Select Available columns from the list that appears:

Backup Job File Count

Reporting in OpsCenter Creating a custom report in OpsCenter

649

Backup Job Size

Job Directory Job End Time Job Start Time Job Status Job Status Code Job Type Master Server Schedule Name Schedule/Level Type

Click Add.

11 Click Next to run the report.

The following is a sample report view:

Example 2: You may want to create a report that examines the number of tapes in each status category and its percentage. To report on the distribution of tape status in your environment

1 2 3 4

In the OpsCenter console, click Reports. On the Report Templates tab, click Create New Report. On the Report Wizard, select the Create a custom report option and click Next. Select the Report Category as Backup/Recovery and the Subcategory as Media.

650

Reporting in OpsCenter Creating a custom report in OpsCenter

Select the Report View type as Distribution. Click Next.

6 7

Select the appropriate timeframe for which you want to view the data. You can also select No Time Basis. Optionally, select any filters based on your requirement. Click Next.

Reporting in OpsCenter Creating a custom report in OpsCenter

651

In the Distribution Chart Properties section, make the following selections:

Chart Type Report On Report Data Pie Chart Media History Status Media ID Count

652

Reporting in OpsCenter Creating a custom report in OpsCenter

Click Next. The following is a sample report view:

Reporting in OpsCenter Creating a custom report in OpsCenter

653

Example 3: You may want to create a custom tabular report that shows the following information:

Know what jobs were successful in the past week for a specific master server Show the amount of time the backup took Show how large the backup was

To create a report showing successful backup job details for a master server

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

In the OpsCenter console, click Reports. On the Report Templates tab, click Create New Report. On the Report Wizard, select the Create a custom report option and click Next. Select the Report Category as Backup/Recovery and the Subcategory as Job/Image/Media/Disk. Select the Report View type as Tabular. Change Relative Time Frame to Previous 1 Week Under Filters, select Job. In the Column area, select Job Type, select the = Operator and choose a value of Backup. Click Add.

Back under the Column heading, select Job Status leave the Operator at = and choose Successful as the value Click Add.

Click Next.

10 Select the Time Basis as Job Start Time 11 You may change the Display Unit or Time Duration. For example if the master
server takes smaller backups, then you may change the Display Unit to MB.

12 From the Available Columns list, select the following:

Backup Job Size Client Name Job Duration

Click Add to move them under the Selected Columns area.

13 In the Selected Column area, perform the following operations for each of
the rows:

Click the check box next to Client Name on the right and click Move Up to make it the first row.

654

Reporting in OpsCenter Creating a custom report in OpsCenter

On the Job Duration row, change Operation to Total. On the Job Size row, change Sort Order to Descending and Operation to Total.

14 Click Next.
The following is a sample report view:

About Custom Report Wizard parameters

The Custom Report Wizard displays a set of parameters that varies depending on the report type. The following topics describe all the available parameters:

Define Time frame parameters See Configuring timeframe parameters on page 654. About display options See About display options on page 657. Report conditions See Defining report conditions on page 661. Filter parameters See Selecting and using filter parameters on page 656.

Configuring timeframe parameters

You use the Time Frame parameters to define the reports overall time frame and the intervals for which data is reported. You can specify absolute or relative time frame for a report. You can select the following timeframe parameters:
Relative Timeframe Select Previous or Next from the drop-down list (wherever applicable), and then specify the number of hours, days, weeks, months, quarters, or years to define the period. The report displays data collected within the specified time period, for example, data of the previous 3 months. The Relative Timeframe is especially useful for reports that you plan to generate on a regular basis. Such reports always show data collected over the most recent time interval.

Reporting in OpsCenter Creating a custom report in OpsCenter

655

Start from the This applies only to Relative time frames. In Start from the beginning of <selected beginning of <selected unit>, the <selected unit> may stand for unit> Hours, Days, Weeks, Months, Quarters, or Years depending on what unit you select as a Relative Timeframe. If you specify a relative timeframe and check Start from the beginning of <selected unit>, the Relative timeframe is calculated starting from the first day for week, month, quarter, or year selection, from 12 A.M. for day selection, and from the earliest whole number (no minutes or seconds) for hour selection. Do not select the Start from the beginning of <unit> check box if you want to view data for the entire period specified in Relative Timeframe. Examples: The current date is June 13, 2010. If you select the Relative Timeframe as Previous 1 Month and do not select the Start from the beginning of Month check box, the report shows data from May 14, 2010 to June 13, 2010. However if you select the Start from the beginning of Month check box, the report shows data from June 1, 2010 to June 13, 2010. The current date and time is September 13, 10:30 PM. If you select the Relative Timeframe as Previous 2 Daysand do not select the Start from the beginning of Days check box, the report shows data from September 11, 10:30 P.M. to September 13, 10:30 P.M. However if you select the Start from the beginning of Days check box, the report shows data from September 12, 12 A.M. to September 13, 10:30 P.M. The current time is 4:25 P.M. If you select the Relative Timeframe as Previous 2 Hours and do not select the Start from the beginning of Hour check box, the report shows data from 2:25 P.M. to 4:25 P.M. However if you select the Start from the beginning of Hours check box, the report shows data from 3 P.M. to 4:25 P.M.

Note: If you specify relative time frame and check Start from
the beginning of <selected unit>, the report is configured to display data collected over the interval ending at the current date. This is effectively equivalent to specifying an absolute time frame; the reports contents remain static whenever you display it. Absolute Timeframe Define the beginning and end of the time interval to be covered by the report. When you enter absolute dates, the reports contents remain static whenever you display it.

656

Reporting in OpsCenter Creating a custom report in OpsCenter

Ignore From Date

This applies only to Absolute timeframes. Check this option to view all the data on and before the To date that you enter in the Absolute timeframe. Example: Suppose you specify an absolute timframe: From March 1, 2004, 12:00 A.M. to April 30, 2004, 12:00 A.M. The report displays data from the time period between the start and end dates. Now if you check Ignore From Date, the report ignores the From Date and displays all data before April 30, 2004, 12:00 A.M.

Ignore To Date

This applies only to Absolute timeframes. Check this option to view all data on and after the From date that you enter in the Absolute timeframe. Example: Suppose you specify an absolute timframe: From March 1, 2004, 12:00 A.M. to April 30, 2004, 12:00 A.M. The report displays data from the time period between the start and end dates. Now if you check IgnoreTo Date, the report ignores the To Date and displays all data on and after March 1, 2004, 12:00 A.M.

No Time Basis

This signifies that the data shown should not be grouped with time. The report includes all the data in the OpsCenter database irrespective of time. The timeframe grouping is not applicable. Day Window is applicable when you specify an Absolute or Relative timeframe. From the Day Window, you can specify the time interval that constitutes one day. Select values from the From and To drop-down lists. Example: 6:00 PM to 6:00 AM Example: 12:00 AM (midnight) to 12:00 PM (noon)

Day Window

Report Time Frame Grouping

This option appears only when you select a Historical view type. Select the time interval by which you want to group the records. For example, if you selected 1 month as the Report Time Frame and 10 days as the Group By interval, the report shows records in three chunks of data grouped by 10 days.

Selecting and using filter parameters

You can use filter parameters to obtain additional filtering capability for the report that you want to display. For example depending on the category or subcategory that you select, you may filter on the following:

Client Operating System Client is Active

Reporting in OpsCenter Creating a custom report in OpsCenter

657

Policy Active: Select Yes to view policies that are active. Select No to view policies that are not active. Index Server Name, Metadata Indexing Enabled have been added for the Policy filter. Indexing enabled for schedule column has been added under the Schedule filter. Media is On Hold column has been added under the Media filter. Image is on hold and Image Copy is on hold columns have been added under the Image filter.

To specify additional filtering criteria

1 2

On the Custom Reports Wizard, select a report category, subcategory and view type. Click Next. On the Select Parameters panel, the respective filters appear in the Filters section. The list of filters that appear depend on the report category and view type that you select.

Click the filter that you want to use, and then specify one or more values using the fields provided.

About display options

Use the Modify Display Options panel to define the measurements to be collected for historical, ranking, tabular, and distribution reports. Different display options are displayed for different view types.

About Historical view display options

The following display options are available for historical reports. The following parameters are displayed:
Report On Define the reports scope using the drop-down list. This field denotes the entity on which grouping is required. For example, when you select the Report On parameter as Client, the Y-axis report data is grouped per client. Example: Job Status, Image type etc. Description Description to display along with the report. If you leave this field blank, no description is provided by default.

X-Axis

658

Reporting in OpsCenter Creating a custom report in OpsCenter

Display Name

For Historical reports, a label for the horizontal (X) axis. If you leave this field blank, a default label is provided. The metric used to define the graphs horizontal (X) axis. Examples: Attempt End Time, Client Name If you choose a Report Data parameter like Client Name which is not time-based, another parameter called Time Basis appears.

Report Data

Time Basis

This parameter appears if you select a Report Data parameter like Client Name that is not related to time. Time Basis resembles the time attribute on which time filter is applied as criteria. This attribute is not shown if you select No Time Basis while configuring the timeframe in the Wizard. Time Basis is the metric used for assigning a time to each item in the report, if not specified by the Report Data parameter. Example: The start time or the end time for each backup job.

Y1 or Y2 -Axis Display Name For Historical reports, a label for the horizontal (Y1 or Y2) axis. If you leave this field blank, a default label is provided. For Historical reports, the metric used to define the graphs vertical (Y1 or Y2) axis. Examples: Job Size, Status Code etc. Display Unit For numeric data types, such as Job Size, the units in which to display the data. This is applicable only for size-related attributes like Job size, image size, fragment size etc. Examples: MB, GB. Chart Type The report format. Additional formats may be available depending on the values specified in Report Data. Use the Trendline and Forecast parameters to project future trends by averaging actual data from the recent past. Check Show forecast with forecast periods, and use the drop-down list to specify a number of forecast periods (intervals). This displays a forecast line extending to future dates, using linear regression to predict values based on the trend of data within the reports time frame. Example: 12 shows forecast data for the next 12 months (if the Time Frame Group By is 1 month). The following Web site helps in calculating the forecast: http://easycalculation.com/statistics/regression.php

Report Data

Show Forecast with forecast periods

Reporting in OpsCenter Creating a custom report in OpsCenter

659

Show trendline with Use the Trendline parameter to indicate a general pattern or moving average period direction by averaging actual data from the recent past. Check of Show trendline with moving average, and use the drop-down list to specify the number of data points to factor into the average. At each interval on the graph, the trendline shows a moving average of the most recent data points. Example: 3 displays a trendline that, at each interval, shows the average of the current data point and the two previous data points. Target Performance For Historical reports, select the Target Performance checkbox and then either Y1 or Y2-Axis radio button. Type a value in the text box to include a target level or threshold in the report display. The target value appears as a horizontal line, useful for making quick visual comparisons between the target value and the actual values being reported.

About Ranking chart display options

The following display options are available for Ranking reports. The following parameters are displayed:
Chart Type Report On Display Select Bar Chart from the drop-down list. Select the entity that you want to see in the report like Image Type. Select how many rankings you want to see and how you want them arranged (in Ascending or descending order). Enter a label for the Y-Axis.

Y-Axis Display Name Report Data Time Basis

This is the data that should be plotted on the Y-axis. Metric used for assigning a time to each item in the report, if not specified by the Report Data parameter. Example: The start time or the end time for each backup job.

Description

Description to display along with the report. If you leave this field blank, no description is provided by default.

About Distribution chart display options

The following display options are available for Distribution reports:
Chart Type Select Pie Chart from the drop-down list.

660

Reporting in OpsCenter Creating a custom report in OpsCenter

Report On

Select the entity that you want to see in the report like Attempt Status. This is the data that should be plotted on the pie chart. Metric used for assigning a time to each item in the report, if not specified by the Report Data parameter. Example: The start time or the end time for each backup job.

Report Data Time Basis

Description

Description to display along with the report. If you leave this field blank, no description is provided by default.

About Tabular display options

Use the Modify Display Options panel to establish the column titles for a tabular report. The following display options appear for a tabular report:
Time Basis From the Time Basis drop-down list, select a time basis like Job End Time or Job Start Time. Time Basis is used to assign a time to each item in the report. Description Enter a description for the report. This is optional.

Display Unit From the Display Unit drop-down list, select one of the following units:

B KB MB GB TB

Time Duration

From the Time Duration drop-down list, select one of the following time intervals:

Seconds Minutes Hours Days Weeks Months Years

Reporting in OpsCenter Changes in custom reporting in OpsCenter 7.5

661

Available Columns

From the Available Columns list, select one or more values for table columns, for example, Client Name, Status, Job Group ID. Click Add. The columns selected from the Available Columns list are added to the Selected Columns, which you can rearrange as you want them to be displayed on reports.

Selected Columns

The columns selected from the Available Columns list are added to the Selected Columns, which you can rearrange as you want them to be displayed on reports using the following controls:

Sort order Operation Move Up Move Down Remove

All the columns from the Selected Columns list are displayed in the report. Rows per page From the Rows Per Page drop-down list, select number of rows of records that you want to display on one report page.

Display When you select this option, all duplicate rows are replaced by a single row unique rows in the report and only distinct records are shown. Duplicate rows generally in the report appear if the rows do not have a unique ID.

Defining report conditions

In the Conditions section of the Modify Display Options panel, specify exception conditions for notification. Exception conditions represent potential problems, for example an unusually high percentage of backup job failures or an unusually low quantity of data being backed up. Each condition is defined by assigning threshold values for a particular metric, such as Success Rate or Total Backup Job Size. You can set a low threshold, a high threshold, or both. The conditions are applicable only for numeric values like Job Size (and not for values like Job Type, Master Server). You can apply condition for attributes like Job type or Master server provided you have applied a function like Count, Distinct Count etc. on it. After you specify your conditions, you can creat a report schedule so that when a condition is true, an email notification is sent or the report is exported, or both. The conditions are applied only when a report is scheduled.

Changes in custom reporting in OpsCenter 7.5

In OpsCenter 7.5, the following enhancements and changes have been implemented in custom reporting:

662

Reporting in OpsCenter Changes in custom reporting in OpsCenter 7.5

The unit Years and Quarters has been added for Relative Timeframe selection. You can now view report data for the last x years or the last x quarters with Symantec OpsCenter Analytics. You can now choose to start from the beginning of a Relative time frame for custom reports. The following checkbox has been added in Relative Timeframe: Start from the beginning of <selected unit>. <selected unit> may stand for Hours, Days, Weeks, Months, Quarters, or Years depending on what you select. If you specify a relative timeframe and check Start from the beginning of <selected unit>, the Relative timeframe is calculated starting from the first day for week, month, quarter, or year selection, from 12 A.M. for day selection, and from the earliest whole number (no minutes or seconds) for hour selection. Do not select the Start from the beginning of <unit> check box if you want to view data for the entire period specified in Relative Timeframe. Examples:

The current date is June 13, 2010. If you select the Relative Timeframe as Previous 1 Month and do not select the Start from the beginning of Month check box, the report shows data from May 14, 2010 to June 13, 2010. However if you select the Start from the beginning of Month check box, the report shows data from June 1, 2010 to June 13, 2010. The current date and time is September 13, 10:30 PM. If you select the Relative Timeframe as Previous 2 Days and do not select the Start from the beginning of Days check box, the report shows data from September 11, 10:30 P.M. to September 13, 10:30 P.M. However if you select the Start from the beginning of Days check box, the report shows data from September 12, 12 A.M. to September 13, 10:30 P.M. The current time is 4:25 P.M. If you select the Relative Timeframe as Previous 2 Hours and do not select the Start from the beginning of Hour check box, the report shows data from 2:25 P.M. to 4:25 P.M. However if you select the Start from the beginning of Hours check box, the report shows data from 3 P.M. to 4:25 P.M. Note: If you specify relative time frame and check Start from the beginning of <selected unit>, the report is configured to display data collected over the interval ending at the current date. This is effectively equivalent to specifying an absolute time frame; the reports contents remain static whenever you display it.

The following checkboxes have been added for Absolute Timeframe in custom reports:

Reporting in OpsCenter Changes in custom reporting in OpsCenter 7.5

663

Ignore From Date

Check this option to view all the data on and before the To date. Example: Suppose you specify an absolute timframe: From March 1, 2004, 12:00 A.M. to April 30, 2004, 12:00 A.M. The report displays data from the time period between the start and end dates. Now if you check Ignore From Date, the report ignores the From Date and displays all data before April 30, 2004, 12:00 A.M.

Ignore To Date

Check this option to view all data on and after the From date. Example: Suppose you specify an absolute timframe: From March 1, 2004, 12:00 A.M. to April 30, 2004, 12:00 A.M. The report displays data from the time period between the start and end dates. Now if you check IgnoreTo Date, the report ignores the To Date and displays all data on and after March 1, 2004, 12:00 A.M.

The unit Quarter has been removed from Time Frame Grouping parameter. The Subcategory Backup Job/Image/Media under Backup/Recovery category is now replaced by Job/Image/Media/Disk. New option for Disk reporting has been added in subcategory Job/Image/Media/Disk. A new checkbox named Target Performance has been added to the Modify Display Options page. This checkbox is visible when you create a custom historical report. You can use the Target Performance option to specify where a report draws the target line, with which you can compare the actual performance shown. The Target Performance option allows you to specify the target for Y1 or Y2 axis (in case of dual axis). In case you set a value of say 100 for Y1 axis and run the report, you will see a straight line parallel to X-axis and the value as 100 on Y1 axis. Using this option, you can easily compare the actual performance with the target performance. The following warning message is now displayed when you select any field or filter that is related to a snapshot while creating a custom report in historical view:
The report would show historical data since you have selected a filter or field related to snapshot.

664

Reporting in OpsCenter Changes in custom reporting in OpsCenter 7.5

Also if Snapshot Time is selected as a report parameter (filter or time basis), the data in OpsCenter is retrieved from the history table and not the main table.

A new checkbox option called Display unique rows in the report has been added for custom tabular reports. This option appears on the Modify Display Options page when you create custom tabular reports. When you select this option, all duplicate rows are replaced by a single row in the report and only distinct records are shown. Duplicate rows generally appear if the rows do not have a unique ID. While creating custom reports (Distribution, Historical, Tabular, or Ranking) in the Modify Display Options page, if you select report data for chart-based reports then the function or Operation drop-down list is populated dynamically with the supported values. For example if you create a Distribution, Historical, or Ranking custom report, and select Report Data as Job Primary ID, only valid functions like Count, Distinct Count, Maximum, and Minimum are shown in the other drop-down list. Earlier all the functions were displayed. Similarly if you create a tabular custom report, and add Job Retention Level as a selected column, the Operation drop-down list shows only applicable functions namely Count and Distinct Count. Backup and History prefixes have been removed from all subcategories, columns etc. For example, the earlier report subcategories like Backup Log, Backup Media, Backup Tape Drive are now Log, Media, Tape Drive etc. The filter Host is now called Client. Columns like RPO, RTO, Agent Server have been removed from the Host filter. Time attributes have been removed from the Y-Axis for historical reports. Filter attributes are now grouped more logically. For example, the Policy Name, Policy Type columns now come under the Policy filter and not Job filter. The Policy Description column under Policy filter is now renamed as Policy Keyword. Master Server and Media Server have been added as report parameters. The EMM Server column under the Media filter has been removed. The Master Server filter can be used to filter report data for a specific server instead of the EMM server column. The Backup Media Role column has been removed from the Media filter and Report On or Report Data parameters. A custom report condition is based on Y axis (i.e. Y1 and Y2) column selection. In OpsCenter 7.5, custom report condition applies only to numeric attributes like size, file count etc. and not for string and time-based values. Applicable

Reporting in OpsCenter Changes in custom reporting in OpsCenter 7.5

665

operators for condition are = & != with range option. This is common for all subcategories. In addition, the following filter changes have also been incorporated for custom reporting for the specific categories and subcategories. Table 11-4 Category Subcategory Filter changes for custom reporting Changes
The column Disk Pool Master Server under the Disk Pool filter has been regrouped and mapped as Master Server.

Backup/Recovery Disk Pool

Job/Image/Media/Disk The following changes have been implememnted: Job Expiration Time has been removed from the Job filter and also from Time Basis. Job File Count Deduplication Factor, Job File Count Deduplication Savings, Job Size Deduplication Factor, and Job Size Deduplication Savings columns have been added under the Job filter. The Backup Media Role column has been removed from the Media filter.

Media Server and Master Server attributes are added as Report On and Report Data parameters. The following have been added as Report On parameters under Backup Job attributes: Job Sub Type

Policy Data Classification name Policy Storage Unit Name Job Status (Complete and Partial only) Job Status (Complete Only) Policy Keyword

Volume DB/EMM Server has been removed from the Report On parameters under Backup Media attributes. Operating System (with version) has been added as a Report On parameter under the Client Attributes. Elapsed Time since last job has been added as a Report Data parameter under Backup Job Attributes: The following Report Data parameters have been added under Backup Attempt Attributes: Attempt Throughput (KB/sec)

Attempt Success Rate

666

Reporting in OpsCenter Creating an OpsCenter report using SQL query

Table 11-4 Category Subcategory

Log

Filter changes for custom reporting (continued) Changes

The following changes have been implemented for this subcategory: Backup Log Source Host attribute has been mapped and regrouped as Master Server. A new checkbox named Target Performance has been added to the Modify Display Options page for Y1 and Y2 axis. This checkbox is visible when you create a custom historical report. You can use the Target Performance option to specify where a report draws the target line, with which you can compare the actual performance shown. The Target Performance option allows you to specify the target for Y1 or Y2 axis (in case of dual axis). In case you set a value of say 100 for Y1 axis and run the report, you will see a straight line parallel to X-axis and the value as 100 on Y1 axis. Using this option, you can easily compare the actual performance with the target performance.

Media

The following changes have been implemented for this subcategory:

The Host filter has been removed.

Tape Library Device Database Server under Tape Library filter has been regrouped and mapped under the Master Server filter. The EMM Server column under the Media filter has been mapped and regrouped as Master Server filter. Tape Drive The following changes have been implemented for this subcategory: Tape Drive Type, Tape Drive Status, and Tape Drive Storage Unit Name columns have been added under the Tape Drive filter. The Host filter has been removed.

Tape Drive Storage Unit Name has been added as a Report On and Report Data parameter.

Creating an OpsCenter report using SQL query

This section provides the procedure to create a report using SQL query. Only Symantec OpsCenter Analytics users can access the custom SQL query function. In OpsCenter 7.5, a new database user named DBOPERATOR has been added. The DBOPERATOR role is used when you create reports by running SQL-based queries. The DBOPERATOR only has read access to the OpsCenter specific tables, views, procedures, and functions. Hence the DBOPERATOR can only execute Select queries on the OpsCenter-specific tables, views, or stored procedures. However,

Reporting in OpsCenter Creating an OpsCenter report using SQL query

667

the DBOPERATOR can create his own tables, views, procedures and functions for which he has full permission (like Select, Delete, or Update). If you are upgrading to OpsCenter 7.5, DBOPERATOR has full access on the procedures, functions that are not specific to OpsCenter and were created before 7.5. DBOPERATOR also has full access (except DROP) on the tables and views that are not specific to OpsCenter and were created before 7.5. Note: OpsCenter Reporter and Restore Operator do not have access to the custom SQL query option. To create a report using SQL query

1 2 3 4

In the OpsCenter console, click Reports. On the Report Templates tab, click Create New Report. On the Report Wizard, select the Create a report using SQL Query option and click Next. On the SQL Query page, enter an SQL query to view the required data. For example, to view all NetBackup master servers that monitored and managed by OpsCenter, enter the following SQL query: select * from domain_masterserver

Click Next. You can view all master server details that are stored in the domain_masterserver database table. Note: When you run a stored procedure that has multiple result sets, then output of only the first result set is displayed on the GUI. The output of other result sets is not shown on the GUI.

Note that Opscenter stores most of the time fields in Gregorian. If you want to see the value for a given Gregorian date field in a timezone that is configured on the OpsCenter host, you should use utcbiginttonomtime(gregorianDatefield) function, where gregorianDatefield is any time value in gregorian. The function utcbiginttonomtime function cannot consider DST time offset. Hence it ignores any DST offset while showing the date and time value. Also, you must not use utcbiginttoutctime() funtion as it will not show time in a time zone that is configured on your OpsCenter host.

668

Reporting in OpsCenter About managing My Reports

About managing My Reports

You can save generated reports for your future use. These saved reports are stored in the My Reports tab. Use this section to view the saved reports or modify the parameters of the saved reports and generate new reports out of them. You can also delete the saved reports using the My Reports tab. The following topics provide more information about managing reports. See Creating a report using the My Reports tab on page 668. See Deleting a saved report using the My Reports tab on page 668. See Viewing a saved report using the My Reports tab on page 669. See Editing a saved report using the My Reports tab on page 669. See Exporting a saved report on page 669. See Emailing a saved report on page 670.

Creating a report using the My Reports tab

This section provides the procedure to create a report using My Reports tab. To create a report using the My Reports tab

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, click Reports > My Reports. On the My Reports tab, click Create New Report. You can create a report in any of the following ways: See Creating an OpsCenter report using a Report Template on page 634. See Creating a custom report in OpsCenter on page 644. See Creating an OpsCenter report using SQL query on page 666.

Deleting a saved report using the My Reports tab

This section provides the procedure to delete a saved report. To delete a saved report

1 2 3 4

In the OpsCenter console, click Reports > My Reports. On the My Reports tab, in the Reports list, expand a report folder to view the reports that are saved within it. Select the check box in front of the report name. Click Delete.

Reporting in OpsCenter About managing My Reports

669

Viewing a saved report using the My Reports tab

You can view the saved reports using the My Reports tab. To view a saved report

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, click Reports > My Reports. On the My Reports tab, in the Reports list, expand a report folder to view the reports that are saved within it. Select the saved report that you want to view.

Editing a saved report using the My Reports tab

You can edit a saved report. You can edit the report details, such as the report name or the folder where you want to save the edited report. To edit a saved report

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, click Reports > My Reports. On the My Reports tab, in the Reports list, expand a report folder to view the reports that are saved within it. Select the saved report that you want to edit. In the report view area at the right-hand side, click the Save As Report icon. The Save Report pop-up screen opens. On the Save Report screen, enter the required information. See Save report and email report dialog boxes on page 636.

3 4

Click OK.

Exporting a saved report

Using OpsCenter, you can preserve saved report data in files or print the data. You can email a report in a number of different file formats. See File formats available in OpsCenter on page 639. You can open the exported file using other applications, such as a spreadsheet program or a text editor. To export a saved report

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, click Reports > My Reports. On the My Reports tab, in the Reports list, expand a report folder to view the reports that are saved within it. Select the saved report that you want to export.

670

Reporting in OpsCenter About managing My Reports

3 4

In the report view area at the right-hand side, click the Export Report icon. The Export Report pop-up screen opens. On the Export Report pop-up screen, select the export options that you want to export the report with. Select file format, such as PDF, CSV, or XML and content or report view, such as Distribution, Historical, or Ranking. Click OK. The system displays the export options pertaining to the file format you have selected. Select those options and export the saved report.

Emailing a saved report

Using OpsCenter, you can email the saved report data to the selected recipients. You can email the report in the following file formats:
PDF (Portable Document Format) Can be viewed using a PDF reader, such as Adobe Reader

CSV (comma-separated Use with spreadsheet programs, such as Microsoft Excel. values) TSV (tab-separated values) HTML (hypertext markup language ) XML (Extensible Markup Language) Compatible with word-processing applications and text editors

Can be opened using with Web browsers

Can be imported (using user-written scripts) by other programs like databases or billing applications

To email a report

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, click Reports > Saved Reports. On the My Reports tab, in the Reports list, expand a report folder to view the reports that are saved within it. Select the saved report that you want to email. In the report view area at the right-hand side, click the Email Report icon. The Email Report pop-up screen opens. On the Email Report pop-up screen, select the email options: File format, such as PDF, CSV, or XML and content or report view, such as Distribution, Historical, or Ranking. Enter email IDs in To, Cc, and Bcc text boxes, to which you want to send emails. Enter the subject of the email.

3 4

5 6

Reporting in OpsCenter About managing My Dashboard

671

7 8

Enter the message that may be a short description regarding the report data that you want to email. Click OK.

About managing My Dashboard

Your saved reports are preserved in My Reports tab, which you can select and publish on My Dashboard tab. You can select multiple reports and add them in the same dashboard section. Thus, you can create multiple dashboard sections containing a number of reports. You can add only 10 reports in a dashboard. See Adding reports to a dashboard on page 672. See Modifying a dashboard section on page 672. See Deleting a dashboard section on page 672. See Emailing dashboard sections on page 673. See Refreshing My Dashboard on page 673.

Reports > My Dashboard options

Select and publish reports on My Dashboard tab. You can select multiple reports and add them in the same dashboard section. Thus, you can create multiple dashboard sections containing a number of reports. You can add only 10 reports in a dashboard. Table 11-5 Option
Add/Edit/Delete

Reports > My Dashboard options Description

You can add multiple Dashboards on this page and one or more reports from My Reports to each of the dashboards. Use Add, Edit, Delete tasks to add, edit, or remove dashboard Select this option if you want to email all the dashboard reports. In the Email Dashboard dialog box that opens, you can specify the format in which you want to email the dashboard reports.along with the other email details. Click OK.

Email Dashboard

Refresh Dashboard

Select this option to update the reports in the dashboard.

672

Reporting in OpsCenter About managing My Dashboard

Adding reports to a dashboard

This section provides the procedure to add reports to a dashboard. To add reports to a dashboard

1 2 3 4 5 6

In the OpsCenter console, click Reports > My Dashboard. Click Add. On the Add Dashboard Section pop-up screen, enter the section name. Expand the Private or Public Reports folder to view existing reports. Select the check boxes in front of the report names, which you want to publish on the dashboard. Click OK.

Modifying a dashboard section

This section provides the procedure to modify dashboard section. To modify a dashboard

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

In the OpsCenter console, click Reports > My Dashboard. Click Edit. On the Edit Dashboard Section pop-up screen, select the dashboard section from the drop-down list, that you want to modify. Modify the section name. Expand the Private or Public Reports folder to view existing reports. Select or clear the check boxes in front of the report names, which you want to publish on or remove from this dashboard section. Click OK.

Deleting a dashboard section

This section provides the procedure to delete a dashboard section. To delete a dashboard section

1 2 3 4

In the OpsCenter console, click Reports > My Dashboard. Click Delete. On the Delete Dashboard Section pop-up screen, select the dashboard section from the drop-down list, that you want to delete. Click OK.

Reporting in OpsCenter About managing reports folders in OpsCenter

673

Emailing dashboard sections

You can email your dashboards. To email a dashboard

1 2 3 4

In the OpsCenter console, click Reports > My Dashboard. Click the Email Dashboard icon. On the Email Dashboard pop-up screen, select the format in which you want to send the email. Select email recipients from the To.., Cc.., and Bcc.. as appropriate. Alternatively, enter new email recipients, which are added into the database.

5 6

Enter the email subject and message. Click OK.

Refreshing My Dashboard
This section provides the procedure to refresh My Dashboard. To refresh My Dashboard

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, click Reports > My Dashboard. Click the Refresh icon.

About managing reports folders in OpsCenter

OpsCenter provides a way to manage folders where you have saved your reports. They can be both private reports and public reports. Using the Manage Folders tab in the Reports section, you can add new report folders, edit names of the existing folders, or delete them. You can also select reports in a particular folder and delete them using this tab. See Adding a reports folder in OpsCenter on page 674. See Editing a reports folder in OpsCenter on page 674. See Deleting reports folders in OpsCenter on page 675. See Deleting reports from a folder in OpsCenter on page 675.

Reports > Manage Folders options

Using the Manage Folders tab in the Reports section, you can add new report folders, edit names of the existing folders, or delete them.

674

Reporting in OpsCenter About managing reports folders in OpsCenter

Adding a reports folder in OpsCenter

This section provides a procedure to add a report folder. To add a folder

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, click Reports > Manage Folders. On the Reports tree, select a check box in front of a private folder node or public folder node in which you want to create a new folder.

3 4 5 6

Click Add. In the Create new folder pop-up window, make sure that you have selected only one folder. If multiple folders are selected, the Add option is disabled. Enter the folder name. Click OK. This folder is added in the selected node.

Editing a reports folder in OpsCenter

This section provides a procedure to edit a report folder. To edit a folder

1 2 3 4 5 6

In the OpsCenter console, click Reports > Manage Folders. On the Reports tree, select a check box in front of a private folder or public folder that you want to edit. Click Edit. In the Edit folder name pop-up window, make sure that you have selected only one folder. If multiple folders are selected, the Edit option is disabled. Edit the folder name. Click OK.

Reporting in OpsCenter Using report schedules in OpsCenter

675

Deleting reports folders in OpsCenter

This section provides a procedure to delete a report folder. If you delete a report folder, all reports that are saved in that folder are deleted. To delete folders

1 2 3

In the OpsCenter console, click Reports > Manage Folders. On the Reports tree, select a check boxes in front of the private folders or public folders that you want to delete. Click Delete.

Deleting reports from a folder in OpsCenter

This section provides a procedure for deleting the reports that are saved in a public folder or private folder. To delete reports from a folder

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, click Reports > Manage Folders. On the Reports tree, select a private folder or public folder from which you want to delete the reports. A list of reports that are saved in the selected folder displays at the right-hand side of the page. From the list of reports, select the check boxes in front of the reports that you want to delete. Click Delete.

3 4

Using report schedules in OpsCenter

Using report schedules, you can email or export reports at a scheduled time. Each report schedule is associated with a time schedule at which it emails or sends the specified reports. OpsCenter provides a wizard to create a report schedule. See Creating a report schedule in OpsCenter on page 681. The following table describes the steps that you need to carry out to email or export a report on a specific schedule. See About managing time schedules in OpsCenter on page 684.

676

Reporting in OpsCenter Using report schedules in OpsCenter

Table 11-6

Creating a report schedule

Step Step and reference topic Number

1 Create a time schedule. See Creating a time schedule on page 685. 2 Create a report schedule. OpsCenter provides a wizard to create a report schedule. This wizard lets you specify the following details:

Report schedule name File format in which you want to email or export reports

Select a time schedule. You can either select an existing time schedule that you have created in the first step or create a new schedule from here to associate it with this report schedule. Specify details of export or email options.

Select the reports that you want to export or email on a specific schedule.

Note: You can select only saved reports in a schedule.

See Creating a report schedule in OpsCenter on page 681.

Table 11-7 Steps

Create a time schedule.

Reference topic
See Creating a time schedule on page 685.

Create a time schedule.

Reporting in OpsCenter Reports > Schedules options

677

Table 11-7 Steps

(continued) Reference topic

See Creating a report schedule in OpsCenter on page 681.

Create a report schedule.

Create a report schedule. OpsCenter provides a wizard to create a report schedule. This wizard lets you specify the following details:

Report schedule name

File format in which you want to email or export reports Select a time schedule. You can either select an existing time schedule that you have created in the first step or create a new schedule from here to associate it with this report schedule. Specify details of export or email options.

Select the reports that you want to export or email on a specific schedule.

Note: You can select only saved reports

in a schedule.

Reports > Schedules options

Using report schedules, you can email or export reports at a scheduled time. Each report schedule is associated with a time schedule at which it emails or sends the specified reports. Table 11-8 Option
Add/Edit Delete Enable/Disable

Report Schedules tab options Description

Select Add or Edit to start the Report Schedule Wizard. Select Delete to remove the selected report schedules. Select Enable or Disable to enable or disable the selected report schedules. Name of a report schedule.

Name

678

Reporting in OpsCenter About managing report schedules in OpsCenter

Table 11-8 Option

Report Schedules tab options (continued) Description

Name of a time schedule that is associated with this report schedule. Specifies whether the report schedule is enabled or not. Date on which this schedule runs. Date on which this schedule stops. Specifies whether you have exported the associated reports. Specifies whether you have emailed the associated reports. Number of the reports that are exported or emailed when this schedule runs.

Time Schedule Name

Enabled Start Date End Date Export Email Reports

Table 11-9 Option

Add/Edit Delete Name Schedule Time

Time Schedules tab options Description

Select Add or Edit to go to the Time Schedule page. Select Delete to delete the selected time schedules. Name of the time schedule. Time when the associated reports are exported or emailed. A pattern with which this schedule runs. Date when the schedule starts. Date when the schedule stops.

Recurrence Pattern Start Date End Date

About managing report schedules in OpsCenter

NetBackup OpsCenter provides a way to export or email a report on a specific schedule. For this task you need to create a report schedule that is associated with a time schedule on which the specified reports are exported or emailed. Each report schedule can be associated with a single time schedule. A single time schedule can be associated with multiple report schedules. See About managing time schedules in OpsCenter on page 684. The following topics describe how to create and manage report schedules.

Reporting in OpsCenter About managing report schedules in OpsCenter

679

See Viewing report schedule details in OpsCenter on page 679. See Creating a report schedule in OpsCenter on page 681. See Editing a report schedule in OpsCenter on page 683. See Deleting a report schedule in OpsCenter on page 684. See Enabling or disabling a report schedule on page 684.

Viewing report schedule details in OpsCenter

This section provides information on viewing the list of report schedules. If you have applied conditions for the selected report, the list of applicable conditions is shown on the last page of the wizard. You can select the appropriate conditions. An email notification is sent to the relevant recipients if the selected condition is satisfied. To view report schedule details

In the OpsCenter console, click Reports > Schedules. By default, the Report Schedules tab is selected.

On the Report Schedules tab, view the report schedule details. See Reports > Schedules options on page 677.

Report Schedule Wizard

The Report Schedule Wizards contains five panels to help you create a schedule. Table 11-10 Option
Report Schedule Name Select Format

Enter Report Schedule Details panel options Description

Enter a report schedule name. This field must be filled. Select a file format in which you want to export or email report the associated reports. See File formats available in OpsCenter on page 639.

Table 11-11 Option

Select Time Schedule panel options Description

Select this option if you want a new time schedule to be associated with the report schedule.

Create new Time Schedule

680

Reporting in OpsCenter About managing report schedules in OpsCenter

Table 11-11 Option

Select Time Schedule panel options (continued) Description

Select this option if you want the report schedule to be associated with an existing time schedule

Use existing Schedule

Table 11-12 Option

Export

Select Export/Email Report Options panel options Description

Select this check box if you want to export the reports that are associated with this schedule. See File formats available in OpsCenter on page 639.

Location

Enter a directory path where you want to save the exported report or click Browse to select the desired location. Select this check box if you want to overwrite a file that already exists at the specified location. Select this check box if you want to email the reports that are associated with this schedule. Select email IDs to which you want to email reports. Select email IDs to add in the Cc list of email. Select email IDs to add in the Bcc list email. Type the email subject. For example: Daily Job Count Report Type any other related information.

Overwrite if file exists

Email

To Cc Bcc Subject Message

Table 11-13 Option

Private Reports

Select Reports panel options Description

Select private reports from the list that you want to schedule. You can select both public reports and private reports. Select public reports from the list that you want to schedule. You can select both public reports and private reports.

Public Reports

Reporting in OpsCenter About managing report schedules in OpsCenter

681

Table 11-14 Option

Select a report condition to be applied panel options Description

Send email only if the report Check this option if you want the report to be emailed only meets one or more selected if it meets one or more of the selected conditions. You can conditions create conditions for custom reports while editing the report. Report Name The custom reports that have conditions and are selected to be scheduled are displayed. The condition that is associated with the custom report is displayed. You can create a condition only for custom reports.

Condition

Creating a report schedule in OpsCenter

To create a report schedule

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, click Reports > Schedules. On the ReportSchedules tab, click Add. OpsCenter provides a Report Schedule Wizard that guides you through the procedure of creating a report schedule. The Enter Report Schedule Details panel appears as follows:

Enter the report schedule details. See Report Schedule Wizard on page 679.

682

Reporting in OpsCenter About managing report schedules in OpsCenter

Click Next. The Select Time Schedule panel appears:

Select the Use existing schedule option if you want to run this schedule on any existing time schedule. If you want to create a new time schedule for this report schedule, select Create new time schedule. See Creating a time schedule on page 685. If you have selected Create new time schedule, the system takes you to the Time Schedule Wizard. After creating a time schedule you can select the export and the email report options.

4 5

Click Next. If you have selected the Use existing schedule option in the previous step, in the Configure Export/Email Report Settings panel, specify the following details: You can select either Export, Email, or both options. See Report Schedule Wizard on page 679.

Click Next.

Reporting in OpsCenter About managing report schedules in OpsCenter

683

In the Select Reports panel, select the public reports or private reports that you want to export or email on this schedule. These reports should be saved.

Click Back if you want to change the previous selections.

In the Select a report condition to be applied panel, select a report and report condition to be applied. You can apply report conditions to custom reports. You can also select the option Send email only if the report meets one or more of the selected conditions if you want the report to be emailed only when the report meets one or more of the selected conditions.

Click Save.

Editing a report schedule in OpsCenter

This section describes how to edit report schedule details. To edit a report schedule

In the OpsCenter console, click Reports > Schedules. By default, the Report Schedules tab is selected.

2 3 4 5

On the Report Schedules tab, select a report schedule from the list that you want to edit. Click Edit. Edit the report schedule details using the wizard. Click Save.

684

Reporting in OpsCenter About managing time schedules in OpsCenter

Deleting a report schedule in OpsCenter

This section describes how to delete a report schedule. To delete a report schedule

In the OpsCenter console, click Reports > Schedules. By default, the Report Schedules tab is selected.

2 3

On the Report Schedules tab, select one or more report schedules from the list that you want to delete. Click Delete.

Enabling or disabling a report schedule

This section describes how to enable or disable a report schedule. To enable or disable a report schedule

In the OpsCenter console, click Reports > Schedules. By default, the Report Schedules tab is selected.

2 3

On the Report Schedules tab, select one or more report schedules from the list that you want to enable or disable. Click Enable or Disable.

About managing time schedules in OpsCenter

This section provides procedures to create and manage a report schedule. Each report schedule can be associated with only a single time schedule. A single time schedule can be associated with multiple report schedules. See About managing report schedules in OpsCenter on page 678. The following topics provide more information about managing time schedules. See Viewing time schedule details on page 685. See Creating a time schedule on page 685. See Editing a time schedule on page 686. See Deleting a time schedule on page 686.

Reports > Schedules > Create or Edit Time Schedule options

Use the page to create or edit a time schedule.

Reporting in OpsCenter About managing time schedules in OpsCenter

685

Table 11-15 Option

Schedule Name Schedule Time

Create or Edit Time Schedule options Description

Enter name of the time schedule. Enter the time when the schedule runs and the associated reports are exported or emailed. Select a pattern with which you want this schedule to be run. The following schedule patterns are available:

Schedule Pattern

One Time Daily Weekly Monthly Quarterly Yearly

Depending on the pattern-selected , options change.

Viewing time schedule details

This section provides a procedure to view the details of time schedules. To view a time schedule

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, click Reports > Schedules. Click Time Schedules. The time schedule details appear: See Reports > Schedules options on page 677.

Creating a time schedule

Use the following procedure to create a time schedule. To create a time schedule

1 2 3 4

In the OpsCenter console, click Reports > Schedules. Click Time Schedules. On the Time Schedules tab, click Create. On the Create Time Schedule page, specify the necessary details. See Reports > Schedules > Create or Edit Time Schedule options on page 684.

686

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Click OK.

Editing a time schedule

Use the following procedure to edit a time schedule. To edit a time schedule

1 2 3 4 5 6

In the OpsCenter console, click Reports > Schedules. Click Time Schedules. On the Time Schedules tab, in the table, select the time schedule that you want to edit. Click Edit. Edit the time schedule details. Click OK.

Deleting a time schedule

Use the following procedure to delete a time schedule. To delete a time schedule

1 2 3 4

In the OpsCenter console, click Reports > Schedules. Click Time Schedules. On the Time Schedules tab, in the table, select the time schedules that you want to delete. Click Delete.

About Report Templates descriptions

This section provides descriptions of all Report Templates available in OpsCenter. A few important notes on the OpsCenter Report Templates :

The Drive Throughput, and Drive Utilization reports can be exported and emailed only in the HTML format. The Drive Throughput and Drive Utilization reports display data only till 1 A.M. and not till the time when you run the report. This is because OpsCenter collects data for Drive Throughput and Drive Utilization report once per day at 1 A.M. everyday after midnight. Therefore the Drive Throughput or Drive Utilization reports are only able to report on data up until 1 AM on that day, even when run with a relative

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

687

timeframe of Previous 24 hours. Similarly if you run Drive Throughput and Drive Utilization reports at 2 P.M. in the afternoon, the reports display data collected till 1 A.M. only.

Symantec recommends that you configure the retention period of error logs in NetBackup as more than 1 day. If the retention period of error logs is less than 24 hours, it may result in data loss for some reports like Drive Throughput. A tabular report that is scheduled for emailing has up to 4000 rows by default. Similarly, exporting a tabular report in the available formats displays data for a maximum of 4000 rows by default. The maximum number of rows can be configured. See Configuring number of rows in a tabular report for email or export on page 642. Reports in the PDF, TSV, XML, or CSV formats are sent as email attachments. A report in the HTML format is sent as an inline message in email. Sorting for HTML-based reports (for example, Drive Utilization) is not supported. The default view that is selected is All My Views. All standard reports by default show the data based on what you select for Report Template Default View. The Report Template Default View can be specified in Settings > User Preferences. The default value of Report Template Default View is All My Views.

See About Enterprise Vault Archiving reports in OpsCenter on page 688. See About Audit reports on page 691. See About Backup reports in OpsCenter on page 691. See About Catalog reports in OpsCenter on page 833. See About Chargeback reports in OpsCenter on page 833. See About Client reports in OpsCenter on page 842. See About Disk and Tape Device Activity reports in OpsCenter on page 887. See About Media reports in OpsCenter on page 897. See About Performance reports in OpsCenter on page 907. See About Policy reports in OpsCenter on page 921. See About Restore reports in OpsCenter on page 937. See About Storage Lifecycle Policy reports on page 943. See Workload Analyzer report on page 978.

688

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

About Enterprise Vault Archiving reports in OpsCenter

This section provides descriptions of archive Report Templates available in OpsCenter.
Archive Storage > Archived Count See Archive Storage > Archived Count report on page 688.

Archive Storage > Tabular - Storage Report See Archive Storage > Tabular - Storage Report on page 688. Archive Storage > Archived Size See Archive Storage > Archived Size report on page 688. See Exchange > Mailbox Quota report on page 689. See Exchange > Archive Size Vs Original Size report on page 689. See Exchange > Item Count report on page 690. See Exchange > Target Report Detail report on page 690. See Exchange > Original Size report on page 690.

Exchange > Mailbox Quota

Exchange > Archive Size Vs Original Size

Exchange > Item Count

Exchange > Target Report Detail

Exchange > Original Size

Archive Storage > Archived Count report

This report shows the number of messages or items that were archived across vault servers, sites, archive targets, provisioning groups, and business level views.

Archive Storage > Tabular - Storage Report

The Storage Details report shows details of archive the data that is stored in various Vault Stores and vault partitions . The Archived Size report is available in the Archive Storage report category.

Archive Storage > Archived Size report

This report is available only in the Archive Storage report category. Use this report if you want to determine the size of the Exchange Server data that was archived. You can determine the size of the Exchange Server data that was archived and stored in a specific Vault Store, Enterprise Vault server , or Vault Store Partition. The Archived Size report is available in the Archive Storage report category.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

689

The Archive Size Vs Original Size report depicts the difference between the two sizes of Exchange Server data. The more the difference, the more efficient is your archival process.

Exchange > Mailbox Quota report

The Mailbox Quota report displays the top mailboxes in Exchange Server, which have exceeded a particular mailbox size limit. This report is available in the Ranking report view. There are three types of Mailbox Quota reports:
By Warning Limit This report shows the mailboxes that have exceeded the Warning limit set in Exchange Server. The Warning limit is a limit set for mailboxes, which decides how much data mailboxes can contain. For example: The Warning limit for mailboxes is set to 256 MB. The By Warning Limit report displays all mailboxes that have exceeded 256 MB of data. By Send Limit This report shows the mailboxes that have exceeded the Send limit set in Exchange Server. The Send limit is a limit set for mailboxes, which is greater than the Warning limit. If size of a mailbox exceeds this limit, emails cannot be sent from this mailbox. By Receive Limit This report shows the mailboxes that have exceeded the Receive limit. If size of your mailbox exceeds the Receive limit, you cannot receive any emails.

The Mailbox Quota reports are available in the Exchange report category.

Exchange > Archive Size Vs Original Size report

This report provides the comparison between original size and archived size of Exchange Server data. using the report, you can determine how much was the original size of the data that was archived later. The difference between original size and archived size is termed as savings. If the savings are more, it implies that data was archived in a very efficient way and thus, lesser storage space was required. The Archive Size Vs Original Size report is available in the Exchange report category.

690

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Target Server is selected as the Report On parameter.

Exchange > Item Count report

This report is available in both archive report categories, Exchange, and Archive Storage. Use this report to determine the number of emails or items in each Exchange Server in an Enterprise Vault environment. The Item Count report is available in all three graphical views, Historical, Ranking, and Distribution. This report provides different drill-down reports depending on the archive report category that you have selected.

Exchange > Target Report Detail report

The Target Details report shows details of all mailboxes in all Exchange Servers in an archive site. The word Target refers to individual mailboxes. The details include the name of a mailbox, original size of emails in a mailbox (Item Original Size), archived size of emails (Item Archived Size), and number of emails (Target Item Count).

Exchange > Original Size report

This report is available only in the Exchange report category. Generate this report if you want to determine the original size of the Exchange Server data that was archived. You can view the original size of the archived data for a specific archive site or Exchange Server. You can also determine the original size of the data that was archived and stored in a specific Vault Store, Enterprise Vault server , or Vault Store Partition. You can select these filters using the Advanced Filters option on the Report Wizard page. The Original Size report is available in all three graphical views, Historical, Ranking, and Distribution. The following example explains about the original size of the data that was archived:

You have 100 MB of Exchange Server data, which is the total mailbox size Out of 100-MB data you want to archive 30 MB, as per the definition in an archive policy After archiving, the 30-MB data is compressed into 20-MB data The Original Size of Exchange Server data was 30 MB and Archived Size is now 20 MB The total savings are equal to the difference between the Original Size and Archived Size. Total Savings = 30 MB - 20 MB = 10 MB

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

691

By archiving, you can save on huge amount of storage space.

About Audit reports

This section provides descriptions on the Audit Report Template available in OpsCenter.

Audit Reports > Audit Trails Report

This section provides descriptions on the Audit Report Template available in OpsCenter. Audit trails is a record of all the user initiated activities. An audit trail consists of the changes that are made in the NetBackup environment. For example, changes such as creating a policy, deactivating a policy, or modifying a policy. You can generate the Audit trails report through the reports tab. You can also create a custom SQL. For example, enter a query: SELECT * FROM audit_record on SQL query page. See Creating an OpsCenter report using a Report Template on page 634. See Creating an OpsCenter report using SQL query on page 666.

About Backup reports in OpsCenter

This section provides descriptions on all backup Report Templates available in OpsCenter.
Deduplication > Deduplication Size Factor See Deduplication > Deduplication Size Factor on page 694. See Deduplication > Pre vs. Post Deduplication Size report on page 700.

Deduplication > Pre vs. Post Deduplication Size

Deduplication > Deduplication Size Savings See Deduplication > Deduplication Size Savings on page 703. Job Activity > Variance > About Throughput See Variance > Throughput Variance Variance report on page 709. Job Activity > Variance > About File Count Variance report Job Activity > Variance > About Backup Duration Variance report See Job Activity > Variance > File Count Variance report on page 711. See Job Activity > Variance > Backup Duration Variance report on page 711.

692

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Job Activity > Variance > About Backup Job Size Variance report

See Job Activity > Variance > Backup Job Size Variance report on page 712.

Job Activity > Backup Window > Job Count See Job Activity > Backup Window > Job Count report on page 716. Job Activity > Backup Window > Job Size See Job Activity > Backup Window > Job Size report on page 720.

Job Activity > Backup Window > File Count See Job Activity > Backup Window > File Count report on page 720. Job Activity > Job Count See Job Activity > Backup Window > Job Count report on page 716. See Job Activity > Job Size on page 725. See Job Activity > Client Count on page 731. See Job Activity > Job Duration on page 736. See Job Activity > File Count on page 740. See Job Browser > Tabular Backup Report on page 745. See Planning Activity > Capacity Planning > Forecasted Size report on page 750. See Planning Activity > Capacity Planning > Historical Size report on page 750. See Planning Activity > Forecast > Job Count report on page 751. See Planning Activity > Forecast > Job Size on page 751. See Planning Activity > Scheduled Job > Scheduled Job report on page 755.

Job Activity > Job Size Job Activity > Client Count > Historical Job Activity > Job Duration > Ranking Job Activity > File Count Job Browser > Tabular Backup Report

Planning Activity > Capacity Planning > Forecasted Size Planning Activity > Capacity Planning > Historical Size Planning Activity > Forecast > Job Count

Planning Activity > Forecast > Job Size

Planning Activity > Scheduled Job > Scheduled Job

Planning Activity > Scheduled Job > Job See Planning Activity > Scheduled Job > Job Count Scheduled Vs Actual report Count Scheduled Vs Actual on page 756. Planning Activity > Scheduled Job > Job See Planning Activity > Scheduled Job > Job Count within Backup Window report Count within Backup Window on page 760.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

693

Planning Activity > Scheduled Jobs > Job Details Scheduled Vs Actual

See Planning Activity > Scheduled Jobs > Job Details Scheduled Vs Actual report on page 762.

Planning Activity > Scheduled Job > All See Planning Activity > Scheduled Job > All Jobs report on page 766. Jobs Planning Activity > Stored Backup Images > Valid Backup Images See Planning Activity > Stored Backup Images > Valid Backup Images report on page 766. See Planning Activity > Stored Backup Images > Duplicate Copies report on page 768. See Planning Activity > Stored Backup Images > Stored Backup Images > Stored Backup Images on Media on page 769.

Planning Activity > Stored Backup Images > Duplicate Copies

Planning Activity > Stored Backup Images > Stored Backup Images > Historical

Status & Success Rate > Status > Failed Job See Status & Success Rate > Status > Failed Count Job Count report on page 776. Status & Success Rate > Status > Partially Successful Job Count See Status & Success Rate > Status > Partially Successful Job Count report on page 780.

Status & Success Rate > Status > Successful See Status & Success Rate > Status > Job Count Successful Job Count report on page 784. Status & Success Rate > Status > All Failed Backups See Status & Success Rate > Status > All Failed Backups report on page 788.

Status & Success Rate > Status > Consecutive See Status & Success Rate > Status > All Failures Failed Backups report on page 788. Status & Success Rate > Status > Success Rate Line See Status & Success Rate > Status > Success Rate Line report on page 793.

Status & Success Rate > Status > Week At A See Status & Success Rate > Status > Week Glance At A Glance report on page 797. Status & Success Rate > Status > Backup Window Failures Status & Success Rate > Status > Partially Successful Job Details See Status & Success Rate > Status > Backup Window Failures report on page 805. See Status & Success Rate > Status > Partially Successful Job Details report on page 805. See Status & Success Rate > Status > Skipped Files Summary report on page 805.

Status & Success Rate > Status > Skipped Files Summary

694

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Status & Success Rate > Status > Job Exit Status Detail

See Status & Success Rate > Status > Job Attempt Status Detail report on page 806.

Status & Success Rate > Status > Job Details See Status & Success Rate > Status > Job Details report on page 810. Status & Success Rate > Status > Job Summary by Status See Status & Success Rate > Status > Job Summary by Status report on page 810.

Status & Success Rate > Status > Job Status See Status & Success Rate > Status > Job > Historical Status > Historical report on page 810. Status & Success Rate > Status > Job Status See Status & Success Rate > Status > Job > Distribution Status > Distribution report on page 813. Status & Success Rate > Success Rate > Success Rate All Jobs Status & Success Rate > Success Rate > Advanced Success Rate Status & Success Rate > Success Rate > Success Rate All Attempts See Status & Success Rate > Success Rate > Success Rate All Jobs report on page 817. See Status & Success Rate > Success Rate > Advanced Success Rate report on page 821. See Status & Success Rate > Success Rate > Success Rate - All Attempts report on page 824. See Status & Success Rate > Success Rate > Success Rate - First Attempt report on page 829.

Status & Success Rate > Success Rate > Success Rate - First Attempt

Deduplication > Deduplication Size Factor

This report is usually the most talked about when it comes to deduplication since it shows what the deduplication ratio is for each day over the last two weeks (the time frame is modifiable). The deduplication ratio is calculated by taking the total number of bytes that would normally be backed up and dividing it by the number of bytes that have changed and were backed up. So if 100TB exists on all the backups taking place but only 10TB were changed and therefore transferred, you have a rate of 10. This report shows only deduplication jobs. The default Report On parameter for this report is Master Server. This report is available in a line-chart format. This report is available in historical and ranking views. The ranking report ranks the top hosts in terms of which ones have the best deduplication ratio in bytes. These hosts have the least amount of change and therefore you get the best benefit from deduplication. Figure 11-2 shows a sample view of Deduplication Size Factor Report.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

695

Figure 11-2

Deduplication Size Factor Report (Historical)

This deduplication report ranks the top hosts in terms of which ones have the best deduplication ratio in bytes. These hosts have the least amount of change and therefore you get the best benefit from deduplication. Figure 11-3 shows a sample view of Deduplication Size Factor Report.

696

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Figure 11-3

Deduplication Size Factor Report (Ranking)

The following are the details that are associated with the Deduplication Size Factor report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Deduplication Size Factor Deduplication Report > Report Templates > Backup > Deduplication > Deduplication Size Factor. Historical trending report showing savings deduplication factors. Symantec NetBackup, Symantec NetBackup Master Appliance, Symantec PureDisk Master Server, Client Historical, Ranking Yes. Drill down reports can be viewed at following four levels depending on the selected parameter value. Level 1: Client Name, Level 2: Job Type, Level 3: Schedule/Level Type, Level 4: Policy Name

Report Purpose

Supported products

Applicable View Report Display Drill down report

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

697

Can be scheduled Supported formats Mapping with VBR report

Yes. PDF, CSV, HTML, XML, TSV All Reports > Standard Report > Backup > Deduplication > Size Factor

You can edit the Deduplication Size Factor report to show or hide the columns that you are interested in. All the columns are shown by default. You can also filter the report to view reports of specific master servers. The following table shows the filters for Deduplication Size Factor report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Master Server

Master Server

Select one or more master servers to view data for the virtual clients that are backed up by the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value drop-down list .

Media Server

Media Server Select one or more media servers to view data for the selected media servers in the report. All media servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value dropdown list. Client Name Client OS Select one or more clients to view data for the selected clients in the report. All clients that are protected by the master servers in the OpsCenter console are listed. Select one or more client OS to view data for the selected client OS in the report.

Client

Policy

Policy Name Policy Type Policy Keyword

Select one or more policy names to view data for the selected policies. Select one or more policy types to view data for the selected policy types.

Select one or more policy keyword to view data for the policies Policy Data having the selected keyword. Classification Name Select one or more policy data classification names like Gold, Silver, Bronze etc. to view data for the policies having the selected data classiciation names.

698

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Filter

Column

Description

Schedule Schedule/Level Select one or more schedule or level types to view the data for Type the configured schedules. Schedule Name Job Job Type Product Type Job Transport Type Job Status Select one or more schedule names to view data for the selected schedule names. Select one or more job types as Archive, Backup, or Restore to view data for the selected job types. Select one or more backup products to view data for the selected products. Select one or more transport types like FT, LAN, or Unknown to view data for the jobs that have the selected transport type. Select one or more job status like Failed, Successful etc. to view data for the selected job status.

Example of filter usage: You may run the Duplication Size Factor report for a specific client to view details for the specific clients. Report Enhancements: The following report enhancements have been made for the Duplication Size Factor report:

Drill down reports for following four levels have been added.

Level 1: Client Name Level 2: Job Type Level 3: Schedule/Level Type Level 4: Policy Name

The report now shows trendlines with customized average periods with option: Show trendline with moving average period of 3. The value can be 1, 2, 3, 7, 14, or 30. The default value is 3. Example: 3 displays a trendline that, at each interval, shows the average of the current data point and the two previous data points. The unit Years has been added for Relative Timeframe selection. You can now view data for the last x years. The option Next has been removed from the drop-down menu for Relative Timeframe. You now cannot enter a relative timeframe like Next 2 weeks. This is because the report does not support any futuristic data. The following options have been removed from TimeFrameGroupBy selection:

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

699

Days of week Average Days of week total Hours of day Average Hours of day Total Minutes Month of year Average Month of year total Quarter of year Average Quarter of year total

The following filter enhancements have been made for the Duplication Size Factor report:

New columns Job Status (Complete Only) and Job Status(Complete and Partial Only) are added to the Report On parameter. UNKNOWN has been added as a value for Policy Type column in the Policy filter. You can now filter report data for policy types that are UNKNOWN. Job types which are not applicable for this report are removed from the filter. The supported job types are Backup, Archive, Restore, Catalog Backup, Backup from Snapshot, Snapshot, Duplicate, and Replication. The default selected value for Job Type column is changed to Backup. Symantec Enterprise Vault,IBM Tivoli Storage Manager,EMC NetWorker,Symantec Backup Exec,and CommVault Galaxy have been removed from the list of values for column Product Type under Job filter. The default unit for Y1 axis is now GB. Value SAN is removed from the Job Transport Type filter.

Known Issues:

Selecting Reporton Storage Unit name in OpsCenter does not result in any data for Symantec PureDisk because Storage Unit is not present in PureDisk .In VBR, jobs data collected from PureDisk puts the storage unit name incorrectly as SPA. As compared to VBR, the unit of data for Y axis/Y1 axis is one unit lower. For example: Unit GB in VBR matches up with unit MB in OpsCenter. OpsCenter shows the correct data.

700

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Deduplication > Pre vs. Post Deduplication Size report

The Pre vs. Post Deduplication Size report gives the comparison between the total number of bytes that exist on all the backups as if they were normal full backups and the number of bytes that have changed and therefore needed to be transferred. This report shows only deduplication jobs. The default Report On parameter for this report is All Master Servers. This report is available in a line-chart format. Figure 11-4 shows a sample view of Pre vs. Post Deduplication Size Report. Figure 11-4 Pre vs. Post Deduplication Size Report

The following are the details that are associated with the Deduplication Size Factor report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Pre vs. Post Deduplication Size report Deduplication Report > Report Templates > Backup > Deduplication > Pre vs. Post Deduplication Size report. Historical trending report of pre vs. post deduplication size. Symantec NetBackup, Symantec NetBackup Master Appliance, Symantec PureDisk Master Server, Client Historical

Report Purpose Supported products

Applicable View Report Display

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

701

Drill down report Can be scheduled Supported formats Mapping with VBR report

None Yes PDF, CSV, HTML, XML, TSV All Reports > Standard Report > Backup > Deduplication > Protected size vs. Backed up size

You can edit the Pre vs. Post Deduplication Size report to show or hide the columns that you are interested in. All the columns are shown by default. You can also filter the report to view reports of specific master servers. The following table shows the filters for Pre vs. Post Deduplication Size report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Master Server

Master Server

Select one or more master servers to view data for the virtual clients that are backed up by the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value drop-down list .

Media Server

Media Server Select one or more media servers to view data for the selected media servers in the report. All media servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value dropdown list. Client Name Client OS Select one or more clients to view data for the selected clients in the report. All clients that are protected by the master servers in the OpsCenter console are listed. Select one or more client OS to view data for the selected client OS in the report.

Client

Policy

Policy Name Policy Type Policy Keyword

Select one or more policy names to view data for the selected policies. Select one or more policy types to view data for the selected policy types.

Select one or more policy keyword to view data for the policies Policy Data having the selected keyword. Classification Name Select one or more policy data classification names like Gold, Silver, Bronze etc. to view data for the policies having the selected data classiciation names.

702

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Filter

Column

Description

Schedule Schedule/Level Select one or more schedule or level types to view the data for Type the configured schedules. Schedule Name Job Job Type Product Type Job Transport Type Job Status Select one or more schedule names to view data for the selected schedule names. Select one or more job types as Archive, Backup, or Restore to view data for the selected job types. Select one or more backup products to view data for the selected products. Select one or more transport types like FT, LAN, or Unknown to view data for the jobs that have the selected transport type. Select one or more job status like Failed, Successful etc. to view data for the selected job status.

Example of filter usage: You may run the Pre vs. Post Deduplication Size report for a specific client to view details for the specific clients. The following report enhancements have been made for the Pre vs. Post Deduplication Size report:

The option Next has been removed from the drop-down menu for Relative Timeframe. You now cannot enter a relative timeframe like Next 2 weeks. This is because the report does not support any futuristic data. The unit Years has been added for Relative Timeframe selection. You can now view data for the last X years. You can also select Year from the top-right corner of the report Drill down reports for following four levels have been added in OpsCenter.

Level 1: Client Name Level 2: Job Type Level 3: Schedule/Level Type Level 4: Policy Name

The following options have been removed from TimeFrameGroupBy selection:

Days of week Average Days of week total Hours of day Average Hours of day Total

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

703

Minutes Month of year Average Month of year total Quarter of year Average Quarter of year total

The following filter enhancements have been made for the Pre vs. Post Duplication Size report:

New columns Job Status (Complete Only) and Job Status(Complete and Partial Only) are added to the Report On parameter. UNKNOWN has been added as a value for Policy Type column in the Policy filter. You can now filter report data for policy types that are UNKNOWN. Job types which are not applicable for this report are removed from the filter. The supported job types are Backup, Archive, Restore, Catalog Backup, Backup from Snapshot, Snapshot, Duplicate, and Replication. The default selected value for Job Type column is changed to Backup. Symantec Enterprise Vault, IBM Tivoli Storage Manager,EMC NetWorker, Symantec Backup Exec, and CommVault Galaxy have been removed from the list of values for column Product Type under Job filter. The default value of Report On is None. Value SAN is removed from the Job Transport Type filter.

Known Issues:

Selecting Report on Storage Unit name in OpsCenter does not result in any data for Symantec PureDisk because Storage Unit is not present in PureDisk .In VBR, jobs data collected from PureDisk puts the storage unit name incorrectly as SPA. As compared to VBR, the unit of data for Y axis/Y1 axis is one unit lower. For example: Unit GB in VBR matches up with unit MB in OpsCenter. OpsCenter shows the correct data.

Deduplication > Deduplication Size Savings

Most NetBackup customers have either implemented some sort of deduplication or plan to in the near future. This is the current trend as customers try to get control of infrastructure and the amount of time backups take. Add to this the need for many customers to protect remote offices across smaller WAN links and deduplication becomes critical since only so much data can be pushed through a small pipe and many times there is no one at the remote site who is capable of

704

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

managing hardware. In the data center, deduplication reporting helps to determine what the actual deduplication rate is occurring at each PureDisk storage unit. Reporting can be abstracted to view the protected size or stored size across all PureDisk environments or drilled down in to one specific area. Common file or data types can then be identified and matched with their ability to be deduplicated. The report below is a simple dedupe report created using a Media Server Deduplication Pool. It is a very basic report and shows how much data would have been backed up without deduplication enabled. In large environments this would show the number of GB or TB that is NOT being used due to deduplication. The other reports can contrast the dedupe data savings vs. the actual deduped information however in this very small test environment this report shows better information. OpsCenter and OpsCenter Analytics provide the ability to report on the various forms of deduplication available with NetBackup. It can provide reports that show things such as how much deduplication is being done at a remote site before the data hits the WAN pipe. Using the trending feature of Opscenter Analytics can also help to understand if the data is growing faster than the hardware or when the WAN bandwidth can be expected to max out. This allows the company to make educated decisions on when to add infrastructure proactively instead of waiting for things to fail. This report shows the total number of bytes that do not need to be backed up because of deduplication. There is no calculation or ratio in this number. It is the number of bytes (MB, GB, TB etc.) that have not changed since the last backup and therefore do not need to be backed up. This report shows only deduplication jobs. The default Report On parameter for this report is Master Server. This report is available in Historical, and Ranking views. The ranking report groups the total number of bytes saved per host being backed up to show the top five hosts in terms of deduplication savings. The historical report shows the total number of bytes that do not need to be backed up because of deduplication. There is no calculation or ratio in this number. It is the number of bytes (MB, GB, TB etc.) that have not changed since the last backup and therefore do not need to be backed up. This report shows only deduplication jobs. The default Report On parameter for this report is Master Server Figure 11-5 shows a sample view of Deduplication Size Savings Report.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

705

Figure 11-5

Deduplication Size Savings Report (Historical)

The ranking report shows the number of bytes that have not changed within the time frame and therefore do not have to be backed up due to deduplication. The report groups the total number of bytes saved per host being backed up to show the top five hosts in terms of deduplication savings. This report shows only deduplication jobs. The default Report On parameter for this report is Master Server. Figure 11-6 shows a sample view of Deduplication Size Savings Report.

706

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Figure 11-6

Deduplication Size Savings Report (Ranking)

The following are the details that are associated with the Deduplication Size Savings report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Deduplication Size Savings Deduplication Report > Report Templates > Backup > Deduplication > Deduplication Size Savings. Historical trending report showing savings in storage due to deduplication. Symantec NetBackup, Symantec NetBackup Master Appliance, Symantec PureDisk Master Server, Client Historical, Ranking Yes. Drill down reports can be viewed at following four levels depending on the selected parameter value. Level 1: Client Name, Level 2: Job Type, Level 3: Schedule/Level Type, Level 4: Policy Name Yes

Report Purpose

Supported products

Applicable View Report Display Drill down report

Can be scheduled

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

707

Supported formats Mapping with VBR report

PDF, CSV, HTML, XML, TSV All Reports > Standard Report > Backups > Deduplication > Size Savings

You can edit the Deduplication Size Savings report to show or hide the columns that you are interested in. All the columns are shown by default. You can also filter the report to view reports of specific master servers. The following table shows the filters for Deduplication Size Savings report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Master Server

Master Server

Select one or more master servers to view data for the virtual clients that are backed up by the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value drop-down list .

Media Server

Media Server Select one or more media servers to view data for the selected media servers in the report. All media servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value dropdown list. Client Name Client OS Select one or more clients to view data for the selected clients in the report. All clients that are protected by the master servers in the OpsCenter console are listed. Select one or more client OS to view data for the selected client OS in the report.

Client

Policy

Policy Name Policy Type Policy Keyword

Select one or more policy names to view data for the selected policies. Select one or more policy types to view data for the selected policy types.

Select one or more policy keyword to view data for the policies Policy Data having the selected keyword. Classification Name Select one or more policy data classification names like Gold, Silver, Bronze etc. to view data for the policies having the selected data classiciation names. Schedule Schedule/Level Select one or more schedule or level types to view the data for Type the configured schedules. Schedule Name Select one or more schedule names to view data for the selected schedule names.

708

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Filter
Job

Column
Job Type Product Type Job Transport Type Job Status

Description
Select one or more job types as Archive, Backup, or Restore to view data for the selected job types. Select one or more backup products to view data for the selected products. Select one or more transport types like FT, LAN, or Unknown to view data for the jobs that have the selected transport type. Select one or more job status like Failed, Successful etc. to view data for the selected job status.

Example of filter usage: You may run the Duplication Size Savings report for a specific client to view details for the specific clients The following report enhancements have been made for the Duplication Size Savings report:

Drill down reports for following four levels have been added.

Level 1: Client Name Level 2: Job Type Level 3: Schedule/Level Type Level 4: Policy Name

The report now shows trendlines with customized average periods with option: Show trendline with moving average period of 3. The value can be 1, 2, 3, 7, 14, or 30. The default value is 3. Example: 3 displays a trendline that, at each interval, shows the average of the current data point and the two previous data points. The unit Years has been added for Relative Timeframe selection. You can now view data for the last x years. The option Next has been removed from the drop-down menu for Relative Timeframe. You now cannot enter a relative timeframe like Next 2 weeks. This is because the report does not support any futuristic data. The following options have been removed from TimeFrameGroupBy selection:

Days of week Average Days of week total Hours of day Average Hours of day Total Minutes

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

709

Month of year Average Month of year total Quarter of year Average Quarter of year total

The following filter enhancements have been made for the Duplication Size Savings report:

New columns Job Status (Complete Only) and Job Status(Complete and Partial Only) are added to the Report On parameter. UNKNOWN has been added as a value for Policy Type column in the Policy filter. You can now filter report data for policy types that are UNKNOWN. Job types which are not applicable for this report are removed from the filter. The supported job types are Backup, Archive, Restore, Catalog Backup, Backup from Snapshot, Snapshot, Duplicate, and Replication. The default selected value for Job Type column is changed to Backup. Symantec Enterprise Vault, IBM Tivoli Storage Manager,EMC NetWorker, Symantec Backup Exec,and CommVault Galaxy have been removed from the list of values for column Product Type under Job filter. The default unit for Y1 axis is now GB. Value SAN is removed from the Job Transport Type filter.

Known Issues:

Selecting Reporton Storage Unit name in OpsCenter does not result in any data for Symantec PureDisk because Storage Unit is not present in PureDisk .In VBR, jobs data collected from PureDisk puts the storage unit name incorrectly as SPA. As compared to VBR, the unit of data for Y axis/Y1 axis is one unit lower. For example: Unit GB in VBR matches up with unit MB in OpsCenter. OpsCenter shows the correct data.

Variance > Throughput Variance

This report shows client or policy level details on backup job throughput variations between last full backup and recent averages. Figure 11-7 shows a sample view of Throughput Variance Report.

710

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Figure 11-7

Throughput Variance Report

The following are the details that are associated with the Throughput Variance report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Throughput Variance Backup All Reports > Report Templates > Backup > Job Activity > Variance > Throughput Variance report. Client/Policy level detail on backup job throughput variations between last full backup and recent averages. Symantec NetBackup, Symantec NetBackup Master Appliance, Symantec Backup Exec, Symantec NetBackup PureDisk, EMC NetWorker, IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Master Server, Client Tabular Yes. See Client Backup Details. Yes PDF, CSV, TSV, XML, HTML All Reports > Standard Reports > Jobs > Throughput Variance

Report Purpose

Supported products

Applicable View Report Display Drill down report Can be scheduled Supported formats Mapping with NOM report

You can edit the Throughput Variance report to show or hide the columns that you are interested in. All the columns are shown by default. You can also filter the report to view reports of specific master servers. The following table shows the filters for Throughput Variance report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

711

Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Master Server

Master Server

Select one or more master servers to view data for the virtual clients that are backed up by the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value drop-down list . Select an appropriate value of variance percentage. By default, all the variance percentages that are greater than 1 are displayed in the Variance (%) column in the report.

Percentage Percentage

Example of filter usage: You may run the Throughput Variance report for a specific master server to view details only for the specific master server. The following report enhancements have been made for the Job Duration report:

The unit Years has been added for Relative Timeframe selection. You can now view data for the last x years. The default Relative Timeframe for this report was 28 days now it is changes to Previous 14 days.

Job Activity > Variance > File Count Variance report

This report lets you investigate why a particular full backup is different than usual. For example, a file server backup is successful, but contains fewer files than usual for a full backup. The report shows NetBackup jobs with significant differences in file counts from the average count for a master server, policy, and schedule. If any variation calculation is greater than the selected value of variance when the report is run, the server, client, policy, and schedule type combination is shown with the actual file count variation. The table provides the percent variance (in file counts) for each good job from the average for that server, policy, and schedule. The Client Name column of the report provides a drilldown link to back up job details for the specified time frame.

Job Activity > Variance > Backup Duration Variance report

This report provides an indication of how backup time varies from the average backup time. You can detect any anomalies if the variation is too high. This report calculates the backup time variation of the last good backup with the average backup time per client, policy, and schedule type. If any variation

712

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

calculation is greater than the selected value of variance when the report is run, the client, policy, and schedule type combination is shown with the actual variation.

About client jobs for selected time frame report

This drilldown report from the Client Name column provides detailed job information for the client for the selected time frame. This drilldown report uses the run time parameters that are passed from the main report.

Job Activity > Variance > Backup Job Size Variance report
This report provides an indication of how a backup size varies from the average size. You can detect any anomalies if the variation is too high. This report calculates the backup size variation of the last good backup with the average backup size per a client, policy, and schedule type. If any variation calculation is greater than the selected value of variance when the report is run, the client, policy and schedule type combination is shown with the actual variation. Size variance is calculated using the following formula: (the last backup size - the average backup size) / the average backup size x 100. Consider the following points before running a Backup Job Size Variance report:

This report considers only full schedules. This report does not consider deduplication jobs. This report does not consider failed jobs. The report considers jobs with status code like 0, 1 etc. If you ran multiple jobs for the same client in the given time frame like 10 jobs per the master server, client, policy, and schedule combination then the report calculates the difference between the last job and the average of the remaining 9 jobs. In case of multi-stream jobs, the report considers each stream as a different job.

The Client Name column of the report provides a drilldown link to back up job details for the specified time frame. Figure 11-8 shows a sample view of the Backup Job Size Variance report.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

713

Figure 11-8

Backup Job Size Variance report

The following are the details that are associated with the Backup Job Size Variance report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Backup Job Size Variance Backup Report > Report Templates > Backup > Job Activity > Variance > Backup Job Size Variance This report shows job size variance. EMC Networker, IBM Tivoli Storage Manager, Symantec Backup Exec, Symantec NetBackup, Symantec NetBackup Master Appliance, Symantec NetBackup PureDisk Master Server Tabular Yes See Client backup jobs on page 714. Can be scheduled Supported formats Mapping with NOM report Yes PDF, CSV, TSV, XML, HTML Reporting > All Reports > Standard Reports > Jobs > Backup Job Size Variance

Report Purpose Supported products

Applicable View Report Display Drill down report

The following table lists the filters for Backup Job Size Variance report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report.

714

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Master Server

Master Server Select one or more master servers to view data for the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value drop-down list . Select an appropriate value of variance percentage. By default, all the variance percentages that are greater than 1 are displayed in the Variance (%) column in the report.

Percentage Percentage

Example of filter usage: You may run the Backup Job Size Variance report for a specific master server to view details only for the specific master server. The following report enhancements have been made for the Backup Job Size Variance report:

The unit Years has been added for Relative Timeframe selection. You can now view data for the last x years. The option Next has been removed from the drop-down menu for Relative Timeframe. You now cannot enter a relative timeframe like Next 2 weeks. This is because the report does not support any futuristic data.

Client backup jobs

The Client Backup Jobs report shows details of the jobs run for a selected client. This tabular report shows information like Job ID, Policy Name, Schedule Name, Status Code, Number of files, Throughput (KB/Sec) etc. Figure 11-9 shows a sample view of the Client Backup Jobs report.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

715

Figure 11-9

Client backup jobs report

The following are the details that are associated with the Client Backup Jobs report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Client backup jobs Backup Report > Report Templates > Backup > Job Activity > Variance > Backup Job Size Variance (drill down on Client Name) > Client backup jobs This report shows details of the jobs run for a selected client. Symantec NetBackup, Symantec NetBackup Master Appliance Master Server Tabular No Yes PDF, CSV, TSV, XML, HTML

Report Purpose Supported products Applicable View Report Display Drill down report Can be scheduled Supported formats

716

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Mapping with NOM report

Reporting > All Reports > Standard Reports > Jobs > Backup Job Size Variance > Client Backup Job

The following table shows the filters for Client Backup Jobs report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Master Server

Master Server

Select one or more master servers to view data for the virtual clients that are backed up by the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value drop-down list . Select Yes to view only Active Clients or No to view all the clients in the report. By default, only Active Clients are shown in the report. Select one or more clients to view data for the selected clients in the report. All clients that are protected by the master servers in the OpsCenter console are listed.

Client

Client is Active Client Name

Example of filter usage: You may run the Client Backup Jobs report for more than one master server. Select Master Server and then select specific master servers to view details for all the clients. The following report enhancements have been made for the Backup Job Size Variance report:

The unit Years has been added for Relative Timeframe selection. You can now view data for the last x years. The option Next has been removed from the drop-down menu for Relative Timeframe. You now cannot enter a relative timeframe like Next 2 weeks. This is because the report does not support any futuristic data.

Job Activity > Backup Window > Job Count report

This report shows the total number backup jobs in the last two weeks shown by the hour of the day in which each job ends. It also renders a configurable backup window to help quickly identify if a lot of jobs end in or outside of what your backup window is or should be. The report can help you see if there are any hours within the backup window that are under used and whether any load balancing is appropriate.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

717

Figure 11-10 shows a sample view of the Job Count report. Figure 11-10 Job Count report

The following are the details that are associated with the Job Count report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Job Count Backup Report > Report Templates > Backup > Job Activity > Backup Window > Job Count This report shows job count by hour of day in which job ends. EMC Networker, IBM Tivoli Storage Manager, Symantec Backup Exec, Symantec NetBackup, Symantec NetBackup Master Appliance, Symantec NetBackup PureDisk Master Server, Client Historical (Chart) No Yes PDF, CSV, TSV, XML, HTML Backups->Activity Planning->Backup Window->Job Count

Report Purpose Supported products

Applicable View Report Display Drill down report Can be scheduled Supported formats Mapping with VBR report

718

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Deviation from VBR

In OpsCenter, the Job Count report does not include the jobs that were collected during the image data collection. These jobs are called Sparse Jobs. This is unlike the Job Count report in VBR, which also included Sparse Jobs. Because of this change, you may notice a mismatch between the job count on the OpsCenter report and the corresponding VBR report.

The following table shows the filters for Job Count report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Master Server

Master Server

Select one or more master servers to view data for the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value drop-down list .

Media server

Media server Select one or more media servers to view data for the specific media servers in the report. All media servers that are attached to the master servers in the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value drop-down list .. Client Name Client OS Select one or more clients to view data for the selected clients in the report. All clients that are protected by the master servers in the OpsCenter console are listed. Select one or more client OS to view data for the selected client OS in the report.

Client

Policy

Policy Data Select one or more policy data classification names to view data Classification for the selected policy data classification names. Name Select one or more policy keyword to view data for the policies Policy having the selected keyword. Keyword Select one or more policy names to view data for the selected Policy Name policies. Policy Type Select one or more policy types to view data for the selected policy types.

Schedule Schedule/Level Select one or more schedule types like CINC, Copy, Daily etc. to Type view data for the selected schedule types. Schedule Name Select one or more schedule names to view data for the selected schedule names.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

719

Filter
Job

Column
Job Status Job Transport Type Job Type Product Type

Description
Select one or more job status like Failed, Successful etc. to view data for the selected job status. Select one or more transport types like FT, LAN, or Unknown to view data for the jobs that have the selected transport type. Select one or more job types like Archive, Backup, Restore etc. to view data for the selected job types. Select one or more backup products to view data for the selected products.

Attempt

Attempt Status

The Attempt Status column can have two values i.e. Attempt or Job. When Job Count is calculated, the report considers all attempts if Attempt is selected. By default, Job is selected. Number of attempts are not considered when Job is selected.

Example of filter usage: You may run the Job Count report for a specific policy to view job counts for the specific policy. Further if you are interested in knowing about the job counts for specific products, you can use the Job filter and under Product Type column, select Backup Exec and EMC NetWorker. The following report enhancements have been made for the Job Count report:

The unit Years has been added for Relative Timeframe selection. You can now view data for the last x years. The option Next has been removed from the drop-down menu for Relative Timeframe. You now cannot enter a relative timeframe like Next 2 weeks. This is because the report does not support any futuristic data. Symantec Enterprise Vault and CommVault Galaxy have been removed from the list of values for column Product Type under Job filter. The following Report On options have been added under Backup Job
Attributes:

Job Status (Complete and Partial only) Job Status (Complete only)

The Schedule Name column is added under the Schedule filter to filter data by schedule name. UNKNOWN has been added as a value for Policy Type column in the Policy filter. You can now filter report data for policy types that are unknown. In earlier versions of OpsCenter the unknown policy types were shown as blank.

720

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Now all static columns like job type, schedule type, policy type, etc. are shown as UNKNOWN like in VBR

Job Activity > Backup Window > Job Size report

This report shows the total gigabytes backed up in the last two weeks shown by the hour of the day in which each job ends. It also renders a configurable backup window to help quickly identify if a lot of jobs end in or outside of what your backup window is or should be. The report can help you see if there are any hours within the backup window that are under used and whether any load balancing is appropriate.

Job Activity > Backup Window > File Count report

This report shows the number of files that were backed up for each hour of the day. The height of each bar on the graph represents the total number of files that are backed up for that hour across the entire date range selected. A user defined backup window is drawn in yellow for example to compare with what hours the files should have been backed up in. Bars outside of the yellow window represent the activity that occurred outside of the backup window. The report can also be used to see what hours may have capacity to add more backups while still remaining in the backup window.

Job Activity > Job Count

This report provides as a summary of backup job counts across products, domains, clients, policies and business level views. There are three display options to see this report. Historical report view shows the total amount of time spent while doing backups each day for the past two weeks. Figure 11-11 shows a sample view of Job Count Report.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

721

Figure 11-11

Job Count Report (Historical)

Ranking view shows the top ten environments by ranking total number of jobs performed by each media server during the last two weeks. Figure 11-12 shows a sample view of Job Count Report. Figure 11-12 Job Count Report (Ranking)

Distribution view gives a breakdown of number of jobs performed by each media server and provides information if any type of load balancing is beneficial.

722

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Figure 11-13 shows a sample view of Job Count Report. Figure 11-13 Job Count Report (Distribution)

You can view historical, ranking and distribution report types in tabular format. Figure 11-14 shows a sample view of Job Count Report. Figure 11-14 Job Count Report (Tabular)

The following are the details that are associated with the Job Count report:

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

723

Report Name Report Category Where to Locate

Job Count Backup All Reports > Report Templates > Backup > Job Activity > Job Count report. Customizable report that shows total number of unique clients backed up per day for the last two weeks, by each master server. Symantec NetBackup, Symantec NetBackup Master Appliance, Symantec Backup Exec, Symantec NetBackup PureDisk, EMC NetWorker, IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Master Server, Client Historical, Ranking, Distribution Yes You can view drill down reports for the selected parameter value. These reports are available for NetBackup and NetBackup appliance. Example: For ranking type of report, you can view four levels of drill down reports: Level 1: Client Name, Level 2: Job Type, Level 3: Schedule/Level Type, Level 4: Policy Name

Report Purpose

Supported products

Applicable View Report Display Drill down report

Can be scheduled Supported formats Mapping with VBR report

Yes PDF, CSV, TSV, XML, HTML All Reports > Standard Reports > Backup > Activity Planning > Job Count

You can edit the Job Count report to show or hide the columns that you are interested in. All the columns are shown by default. You can also filter the report to view reports of specific master servers. The following table shows the filters for Job Count report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

724

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Filter
Master Server

Column
Master Server

Description
Select one or more master servers to view data for the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value drop-down list .

Media Server

Media Server Select one or more media servers to view data for the selected media servers in the report. All media servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value dropdown list. Client Name Client OS Select one or more clients to view data for the selected clients in the report. All clients that are protected by the master servers in the OpsCenter console are listed. Select one or more client OS to view data for the selected client OS in the report.

Client

Policy

Policy Name Policy Type Policy Keyword

Select one or more policy names to view data for the selected policies. Select one or more policy types to view data for the selected policy types.

Select one or more policy keyword to view data for the policies Policy Data having the selected keyword. Classification Name Select one or more policy data classification names like Gold, Silver, Bronze etc. to view data for the policies having the selected data classiciation names. Schedule Schedule/Level Select one or more schedule or level types to view the data for Type the configured schedules. Schedule Name Job Job Type Product Type Job Transport Type Job Status Select one or more schedule names to view data for the selected schedule names. Select one or more job types as Archive, Backup, or Restore to view data for the selected job types. Select one or more backup products to view data for the selected products. Select one or more transport types like FT, LAN, or Unknown to view data for the jobs that have the selected transport type. Select one or more job status like Failed, Successful etc. to view data for the selected job status. Attempt Attempt Status The Attempt Status filter can have two values i.e. Attempt or Job. When Job Count is calculated, the report considers all attempts if Attempt is selected.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

725

Example of filter usage: To view a count of all job attempts in the Job Count report, select Attempt Status as Attempt. The following report enhancements have been made for the Job Count report:

The unit Years has been added for Relative Timeframe selection. You can now view data for the last x years. The option Next has been removed from the drop-down menu for Relative Timeframe. You now cannot enter a relative timeframe like Next 2 weeks. This is because the report does not support any futuristic data.

The following filter enhancements have been made for the Job Count report:

UNKNOWN has been added as a value for Policy Typecolumn in the Policy filter. You can now filter report data for policy types that are UNKNOWN. In earlier versions of OpsCenter the unknown policy types were shown as blank. Now all static columns like job type, schedule type, policy type, etc. are shown as UNKNOWN as in VBR. Symantec Enterprise Vault and CommVault Galaxy have been removed from the list of values for column ProductType under Job filter. Job Transport Type column has been added to the Job filter. For example, you can view report data for jobs for which the Job transport type is FT or LAN.

Job Activity > Job Size

This report provides as a summary of backup job sizes across products, domains, clients, policies and business level views. There are three display options to see this report. Historical report view shows the total megabytes backed up each day during the last two weeks. Figure 11-15 shows a sample view of Job Size Report.

726

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Figure 11-15

Job Size Report (Historical)

Ranking view shows the top 10 backup client ranking them on total megabytes backed up for that client for last two weeks. The report provides an overview of top consumers and whether those consumers are the expected ones. Figure 11-16 shows a sample view of Job Size Report.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

727

Figure 11-16

Job Size Report (Ranking)

Distribution view gives a breakdown view about total megabytes they have been backed up in the last two week, for each media server. It shows a clear distribution of amount of data going to all the media servers and provides inputs if any type of load balancing is beneficial. Figure 11-17 shows a sample view of Job SizeReport.

728

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Figure 11-17

Job Size Report (Distribution)

You can view historical, ranking and distribution report types in tabular format. Figure 11-18 shows a sample view of Job Size Report. Figure 11-18 Job Size Report (Tabular)

The following are the details that are associated with the Job Size report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Job Size Backup All Reports > Report Templates> Backup > Job Activity >Job Size report

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

729

Report Purpose

Customizable report about the total megabytes backed up for each day during the last two weeks. Symantec NetBackup, Symantec NetBackup Master Appliance, Symantec Backup Exec, Symantec NetBackup PureDisk, EMC NetWorker, IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Master Server, Client Historical, Ranking, Distribution Yes. You can view drill down report for the selected parameter value. These drill down reports are available for NetBackup and NetBackup appliance. Example: For ranking type of report, you can view three levels of drill down reports: Level 1: Job Type, Level 2: Schedule/Level Type, Level 3: Policy Name

Supported products

Applicable View Report Display Drill down report

Can be scheduled Supported formats Mapping with VBR report

Yes PDF, CSV, TSV, XML, HTML All Reports > Standard Reports > Backup > Activity Planning > Job Size

You can edit the Job Size report to show or hide the columns that you are interested in. All the columns are shown by default. You can also filter the report to view reports of specific master servers. The following table shows the filters for Job Size report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Master Server

Master Server

Select one or more master servers to view data for the virtual clients that are backed up by the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value drop-down list .

Media Server

Media Server Select one or more media servers to view data for the selected media servers in the report. All media servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value dropdown list.

730

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Filter
Client

Column
Client Name Client OS

Description
Select one or more clients to view data for the selected clients in the report. All clients that are protected by the master servers in the OpsCenter console are listed. Select one or more client OS to view data for the selected client OS in the report.

Policy

Policy Name Policy Type Policy Keyword

Select one or more policy names to view data for the selected policies. Select one or more policy types to view data for the selected policy types.

Select one or more policy keyword to view data for the policies Policy Data having the selected keyword. Classification Name Select one or more policy data classification names like Gold, Silver, Bronze etc. to view data for the policies having the selected data classiciation names. Schedule Schedule/Level Select one or more schedule or level types to view the data for Type the configured schedules. Schedule Name Job Job Type Product Type Job Transport Type Job Status Select one or more schedule names to view data for the selected schedule names. Select one or more job types as Archive, Backup, or Restore to view data for the selected job types. Select one or more backup products to view data for the selected products. Select one or more transport types like FT, LAN, or Unknown to view data for the jobs that have the selected transport type. Select one or more job status like Failed, Successful etc. to view data for the selected job status.

Example of filter usage: You may run the Job Size report for specific policy data classification names to view details only for the specific policy classifications. The following report enhancements have been made for the Job Size report:

The unit Years has been added for Relative Timeframe selection. You can now view data for the last x years. The option Next has been removed from the drop-down menu for Relative Timeframe. You now cannot enter a relative timeframe like Next 2 weeks. This is because the report does not support any futuristic data.

The following filter enhancements have been made for the Job Size report:

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

731

UNKNOWN has been added as a value for Policy Typecolumn in the Policy filter. You can now filter report data for policy types that are UNKNOWN. In earlier versions of OpsCenter the unknown policy types were shown as blank. Now all static columns like job type, schedule type, policy type, etc. are shown as UNKNOWN as in VBR. Symantec Enterprise Vault and CommVault Galaxy have been removed from the list of values for column ProductType under Job filter. Job Transport Type column has been added to the Job filter. For example, you can view report data for jobs for which the Job transport type is FT or LAN. The following options have been removed from TimeFrameGroupBy selection:

Days of week Average Days of week Total Hours of day Average Hours of day Total Minutes Month of year Average Month of year Total Quarter of year Average Quarter of year Total

Job Activity > Client Count

This report provides a summary of backup client counts across products, domains, clients, policies and business level views. There are three display options to see this report. Historical report view shows the total number of unique clients backed up per day for the last two weeks, for each master server. It can help in highlighting potential problems by showing any variations in the number of clients that needs to be backed up and how many are actually getting backed up. Figure 11-19 shows a sample view of Client Count Report.

732

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Figure 11-19

Client Count Report (Historical)

Ranking view shows the top ten environments by listing the number of unique clients that got backed up per each media server during the last two weeks. Figure 11-20 shows a sample view of Client Count Report. Figure 11-20 Client Count Report (Ranking)

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

733

Distribution view gives you breakdown by each master server of the number of unique clients that got backed up in the last two weeks. Figure 11-21 shows a sample view of Client Count Report. Figure 11-21 Client Count Report (Distribution)

You can view historical, ranking and distribution report types in tabular format. Figure 11-22 shows a sample view of Client Count Report. Figure 11-22 Client Count Report (Tabular)

The following are the details that are associated with the Client Count report:

734

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Report Name Report Category Where to Locate

Client Count Backup All Reports > Report Templates > Backup > Job Activity > Client Count report. Customizable report that shows total number of unique clients backed up per day during last two weeks, by each master server. Symantec NetBackup, Symantec NetBackup Master Appliance, Symantec Backup Exec, Symantec NetBackup PureDisk, EMC NetWorker, IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Master Server, Client Historical, Ranking, Distribution Yes You can view drill down reports for the selected parameter value. These reports are available for NetBackup and NetBackup appliance. Example: For ranking type of report, you can view four levels of drill down reports: Level 1: Client Name, Level 2: Job Type, Level 3: Schedule/Level Type, Level 4: Policy Name

Report Purpose

Supported products

Applicable View Report Display Drill down report

Can be scheduled Supported formats Mapping with VBR report

Yes PDF, CSV, TSV, XML, HTML All Reports > Standard Reports > Backup > Activity Planning > Client Count

You can edit the Client Count report to show or hide the columns that you are interested in. All the columns are shown by default. You can also filter the report to view reports of specific master servers. The following table shows the filters for Client Count report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

735

Filter
Master Server

Column
Master Server

Description
Select one or more master servers to view data for the virtual clients that are backed up by the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value drop-down list .

Media Server

Media Server Select one or more media servers to view data for the selected media servers in the report. All media servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value dropdown list. Client Name Client OS Select one or more clients to view data for the selected clients in the report. All clients that are protected by the master servers in the OpsCenter console are listed. Select one or more client OS to view data for the selected client OS in the report.

Client

Policy

Policy Name Policy Type Policy Keyword

Select one or more policy names to view data for the selected policies. Select one or more policy types to view data for the selected policy types.

Select one or more policy keyword to view data for the policies Policy Data having the selected keyword. Classification Name Select one or more policy data classification names like Gold, Silver, Bronze etc. to view data for the policies having the selected data classiciation names. Schedule Schedule/Level Select one or more schedule or level types to view the data for Type the configured schedules. Schedule Name Job Job Type Product Type Job Transport Type Job Status Select one or more schedule names to view data for the selected schedule names. Select one or more job types as Archive, Backup, or Restore to view data for the selected job types. Select one or more backup products to view data for the selected products. Select one or more transport types like FT, LAN, or Unknown to view data for the jobs that have the selected transport type. Select one or more job status like Failed, Successful etc. to view data for the selected job status.

Example of filter usage: You may run the Client Count report for specific policy data classification names to view details only for the specific policy classifications. The following report enhancements have been made for the Client Count report:

736

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

The unit Years has been added for Relative Timeframe selection. You can now view data for the last x years. The option Next has been removed from the drop-down menu for Relative Timeframe. You now cannot enter a relative timeframe like Next 2 weeks. This is because the report does not support any futuristic data.

The following filter enhancements have been made for the Client Count report:

UNKNOWN has been added as a value for Policy Typecolumn in the Policy filter. You can now filter report data for policy types that are UNKNOWN. In earlier versions of OpsCenter the unknown policy types were shown as blank. Now all static columns like job type, schedule type, policy type, etc. are shown as UNKNOWN as in VBR. Symantec Enterprise Vault and CommVault Galaxy have been removed from the list of values for column ProductType under Job filter. The following options have been removed from TimeFrameGroupBy selection:

Days of week Average Days of week Total Hours of day Average Hours of day Total Minutes Month of year Average Month of year Total Quarter of year Average Quarter of year Total

Job Activity > Job Duration

This report provides a summary of backup job durations across products, domains, clients, policies and business level views. It shows you the top ten clients ranked by the total amount of time consumed for the backup during last two weeks. Figure 11-23 shows a sample view of Job Duration Report.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

737

Figure 11-23

Job Duration Report

In addition, you can view the report in tabular format. Figure 11-24 shows a sample view of Job Duration Report. Figure 11-24 Job Duration Report (Tabular)

The following are the details that are associated with the Job Duration report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Job Duration Backup All Reports > Report Templates > Backup > Job Activity > Job Duration report. Customizable report that shows top ten clients ranked by the total amount of time for the backup during the last two weeks.

Report Purpose

738

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Supported products

Symantec NetBackup, Symantec NetBackup Master Appliance, Symantec Backup Exec, Symantec NetBackup PureDisk, EMC NetWorker, IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Master Server, Client Ranking Yes. You can view drill down reports for the selected parameter value. These reports are available for NetBackup and NetBackup appliance. Example: For ranking type of report, you can view four levels of drill down reports: Level 1: Job Type, Level 2: Schedule/Level Type, Level 3: Policy Name

Applicable View Report Display Drill down report

Can be scheduled Supported formats Mapping with VBR report

Yes PDF, CSV, TSV, XML, HTML All Reports > Standard Reports > Backup > Activity Planning > Job Duration

You can edit the Job Duration report to show or hide the columns that you are interested in. All the columns are shown by default. You can also filter the report to view reports of specific master servers. The following table shows the filters for Job Duration report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Master Server

Master Server

Select one or more master servers to view data for the virtual clients that are backed up by the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value drop-down list .

Media Server

Media Server Select one or more media servers to view data for the selected media servers in the report. All media servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value dropdown list. Client Name Client OS Select one or more clients to view data for the selected clients in the report. All clients that are protected by the master servers in the OpsCenter console are listed. Select one or more client OS to view data for the selected client OS in the report.

Client

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

739

Filter
Policy

Column
Policy Name Policy Type Policy Keyword

Description
Select one or more policy names to view data for the selected policies. Select one or more policy types to view data for the selected policy types.

Select one or more policy keyword to view data for the policies Policy Data having the selected keyword. Classification Name Select one or more policy data classification names like Gold, Silver, Bronze etc. to view data for the policies having the selected data classiciation names. Schedule Schedule/Level Select one or more schedule or level types to view the data for Type the configured schedules. Schedule Name Job Job Type Product Type Job Transport Type Job Status Select one or more schedule names to view data for the selected schedule names. Select one or more job types as Archive, Backup, or Restore to view data for the selected job types. Select one or more backup products to view data for the selected products. Select one or more transport types like FT, LAN, or Unknown to view data for the jobs that have the selected transport type. Select one or more job status like Failed, Successful etc. to view data for the selected job status.

Example of filter usage: You may run the Job Duration report for specific policy data classification names to view details only for the specific policy classifications. The following report enhancements have been made for the Job Duration report:

The unit Years has been added for Relative Timeframe selection. You can now view data for the last x years. The option Next has been removed from the drop-down menu for Relative Timeframe. You now cannot enter a relative timeframe like Next 2 weeks. This is because the report does not support any futuristic data.

The following filter enhancements have been made for the Job Duration report:

UNKNOWN has been added as a value for Policy Typecolumn in the Policy filter. You can now filter report data for policy types that are UNKNOWN. In earlier versions of OpsCenter the unknown policy types were shown as blank. Now all static columns like job type, schedule type, policy type, etc. are shown as UNKNOWN as in VBR.

740

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Symantec Enterprise Vaultand CommVault Galaxy have been removed from the list of values for column ProductType under Job filter. Job Transport Type column has been added to the Job filter. For example, you can view report data for jobs for which the Job transport type is FT or LAN.

Job Activity > File Count

This report provides the summary of backed up file counts across products, domains, clients, policies and business level views. There are three display options to see this report. Historical report view shows the total number of files that got backed up for each day during the last two weeks for each master server. Figure 11-25 shows a sample view of File Count Report. Figure 11-25 File Count Report (Historical)

Ranking view shows the top ten backup clients ranking them on total numbers of files that were backed up for them during the last two weeks. Figure 11-26 shows a sample view of File Count Report.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

741

Figure 11-26

File Count Report (Ranking)

Distribution view gives a breakdown for the number of files that got backed up in the last two weeks, for each master server. Figure 11-27 shows a sample view of File Count Report. Figure 11-27 File Count Report (Distribution)

You can view historical, ranking and distribution report types in tabular format. Figure 11-28 shows a sample view of File Count Report.

742

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Figure 11-28

File Count Report (Tabular)

The following are the details that are associated with the File Count report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate File Count Backup Report > Report Templates > Backup > Job Activity > File Count Customizable report showing the total number of files that are backed up each day during the last two weeks. Symantec NetBackup, Symantec NetBackup Master Appliance, Symantec Backup Exec, Symantec NetBackup PureDisk, EMC NetWorker, IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Master Server, Client Historical, Ranking, Distribution Yes You can view drill down reports for the selected parameter value. These reports are available for NetBackup and NetBackup appliance. Example: For ranking type of report, you can view three levels of drill down reports: Level 1: Job Type, Level 2: Schedule/Level Type, Level 3: Policy Name Can be scheduled Supported formats Mapping with VBR report Yes PDF, CSV, TSV, XML, HTML All Reports > Standard Reports> Backup >Activity Planning > File Count

Report Purpose

Supported products

Applicable View Report Display Drill down report

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

743

You can edit the File Count report to show or hide the columns that you are interested in. All the columns are shown by default. You can also filter the report to view reports of specific master servers. The following table shows the filters for File Count report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Master Server

Master Server

Select one or more master servers to view data for the virtual clients that are backed up by the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value drop-down list .

Media Server

Media Server Select one or more media servers to view data for the selected media servers in the report. All media servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value dropdown list. Client Name Client OS Select one or more clients to view data for the selected clients in the report. All clients that are protected by the master servers in the OpsCenter console are listed. Select one or more client OS to view data for the selected client OS in the report.

Client

Policy

Policy Name Policy Type Policy Keyword

Select one or more policy names to view data for the selected policies. Select one or more policy types to view data for the selected policy types.

Select one or more policy keyword to view data for the policies Policy Data having the selected keyword. Classification Name Select one or more policy data classification names like Gold, Silver, Bronze etc. to view data for the policies having the selected data classiciation names. Schedule Schedule/Level Select one or more schedule or level types to view the data for Type the configured schedules. Schedule Name Select one or more schedule names to view data for the selected schedule names.

744

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Filter
Job

Column
Job Type Product Type Job Transport Type Job Status

Description
Select one or more job types as Archive, Backup, or Restore to view data for the selected job types. Select one or more backup products to view data for the selected products. Select one or more transport types like FT, LAN, or Unknown to view data for the jobs that have the selected transport type. Select one or more job status like Failed, Successful etc. to view data for the selected job status.

Example of filter usage: You may run the File Count report for specific policy data classification names to view details only for the specific policy classifications. The following report enhancements have been made for the File Count report:

The unit Years has been added for Relative Timeframe selection. You can now view data for the last x years. The option Next has been removed from the drop-down menu for Relative Timeframe. You now cannot enter a relative timeframe like Next 2 weeks. This is because the report does not support any futuristic data.

The following filter enhancements have been made for the File Count report:

UNKNOWN has been added as a value for Policy Typecolumn in the Policy filter. You can now filter report data for policy types that are UNKNOWN. In earlier versions of OpsCenter the unknown policy types were shown as blank. Now all static columns like job type, schedule type, policy type, etc. are shown as UNKNOWN as in VBR. Symantec Enterprise Vault and CommVault Galaxy have been removed from the list of values for column ProductType under Job filter. Job Transport Type column has been added to the Job filter. For example, you can view report data for jobs for which the Job transport type is FT or LAN. The following options have been removed from TimeFrameGroupBy selection:

Days of week Average Days of week Total Hours of day Average Hours of day Total Minutes Month of year Average

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

745

Month of year Total Quarter of year Average Quarter of year Total

Job Browser > Tabular Backup Report

This report shows a detailed listing of all the backup activity performed for the specified timeframe. The default timeframe is last two weeks. This report lets you view the status for multiple job attempts (from Job Attempt Count and Status Code columns). This report also lets you know the time it takes for backup or restore operations to complete (from the Job Duration column). It thus helps you to quickly identify details about the backup or restore jobs that take the maximum time. You can also drill down from the Job Primary ID column in the report to know the skip file details that are associated with the job. Only some jobs may have skipped files associated with them. For jobs that do not have any skipped files, the drill-down report is either blank or shows hyphens. Figure 11-29 shows a sample view of the Tabular Backup Report. Figure 11-29 Tabular Backup Report

The following are details associated with the Tabular Backup Report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Tabular Backup Report Backup Report > Report Templates > Backup > Job Browser > Tabular Backup Report

746

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Report Purpose

Customizable tabular report of all backup data (size, start time, status code etc.) by client. NetBackup, NetBackup Appliance, Backup Exec, NetBackup PureDisk, EMC NetWorker, IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Master Server, Client Tabular Skip File Details See Skip File Details on page 748.

Supported products

Applicable View Report Display Drill down report

Can be scheduled Supported export formats Mapping with VBR report

Yes CSV, HTML, PDF, XML, TSV Backups > Job Browser > Scheduled Jobs > Tabular Backup Report

You can edit the Tabular Backup Report to show or hide the columns that you are interested in. All the columns are shown by default. You can also filter the report to show activity for a limited sample set, such as one or more policies, master servers, clients, views, product types, job status etc. The following table shows the filters for Tabular Backup report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Master Server

Master Server Select one or more master servers to view data for the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value drop-down list . Media server Select one or more media servers to view data for the specific media servers in the report. All media servers that are attached to the master servers in the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value drop-down list .. Select one or more clients to view data for the selected clients in the report. All clients that are protected by the master servers in the OpsCenter console are listed. Select one or more client OS to view data for the selected client OS in the report.

Media server

Client

Client Name Client OS

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

747

Filter
Policy

Column

Description

Policy Data Select one or more policy data classification names like Gold, Classification Silver, Bronze etc. to view data for the policies having the Name selected data classification names. Policy Keyword Policy Name Policy Type Select one or more policy keyword to view data for the policies having the selected keyword. Select one or more policy names to view data for the selected policies. Select one or more policy types to view data for the selected policy types.

Schedule Schedule/Level Select one or more schedule types like CINC, Copy, Daily etc. Type to view data for the selected schedule types. Schedule Name Job Job Status Select one or more schedule names to view data for the selected schedule names.

Select one or more Job Status like Failed, Missed, Partially Successful etc. to view data for the selected job status in the Job Transport report. Type Select one or more transport types like FT, LAN, or Unknown Product Type to view data for the jobs that have the selected transport type. Select one or more products like Backup Exec, IBM TSM etc. to view data for the selected products.

Example of filter usage: You may run the Tabular Backup report for a specific master server to view backup details only for the selected master server. The sample report view that is shown above shows data for a specific master server named purandar. The following enhancements have been made in the Tabular Backup report:
Report Enhancements The following report enhancements have been made: Each Job primary ID is now a link. You can drill down from the Job Primary ID column to know the skipped file details for a job. The report now displays the seconds in Job End Time, Job Start Time, and Expiration Time columns like 9:40:37 A.M. Earlier the report used to display the time in hours and minutes only like 9:40 A.M. The report now shows data for all your views by default. All My Views is the default view when you edit the report. Fixed issues of data correctness and parity with VBR.

748

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Additional Columns

The following new columns are now shown in the report:

Product This column shows the product that is associated with the job like Symantec NetBackup, Symantec NetBackup Master Appliance.

Job Directory Path that is backed up by a job. Policy Keyword Policy keyword that is associated with the job Storage Unit Name Name of the storage unit that is associated with the job Attempt Start Time Shows the start date and time for the specific job attempt. A job may require multiple attempts or retries due to resources not being available etc. Ensure that the report always shows the Attempt Start Time column. In case you remove Attempt Start Time column, the report may show duplicate records.

Filter Enhancements

The following filter enhancements are listed: The unit Years has been added for Relative Timeframe selection. You can now view data for the last x years. You can also see the Years tab on top-right corner of the Tabular Backup Report. The option Next has been removed from the drop-down menu for Relative Timeframe. You now cannot enter a relative timeframe like Next 2 weeks. The following columns have been removed for the Job filter: Agent Server

Job State

UNKNOWN has been added as a value for Policy Type column in the Policy filter. You can now filter report data for policy types that are unknown. In earlier versions of OpsCenter the unknown policy types were shown as blank. Now all static columns like job type, schedule type, policy type, etc. are shown as unknown like in VBR. Symantec Enterprise Vault and CommVault Galaxy have been removed from the list of values for column Product Type under Job filter. Job Transport Type column has been added to the Job filter. For example, you can view report data for jobs for which the Job transport type is FT or LAN.

Skip File Details

In the Tabular Backup report, you can drill down from the Job Primary ID column to know the skip file details that are associated with the job. Only some jobs may

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

749

have the skipped files that are associated with them. For the jobs that do not have any skipped files, the drill-down report is either blank or shows hyphens. Note: The Skip File Details report is also available when you click a Job Primary ID in the Week at a Glance Details report . Figure 11-30 shows a sample view of the skip file details report that is obtained by clicking the Job Primary ID column in Tabular Backup Report. Figure 11-30 Skip file details

The following are details associated with the Skip File Details report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Skip File Details Backup Report > Report Templates > Backup > Job Browser > Tabular Backup Report (click the Job Primary ID link) Lists the skip file details for the selected job. NetBackup, NetBackup Appliance, Backup Exec, NetBackup PureDisk, EMC NetWorker, IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Master Server, Client Tabular None Yes CSV, HTML, PDF, XML, TSV Backups > Job Browser > Scheduled Jobs > Tabular Backup Report > Skip File Details

Report Purpose Supported products

Applicable View Report Display Drill down report Can be scheduled Supported formats Mapping with VBR report

750

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

You can edit the report to show or hide the columns that you are interested in. All the columns are shown by default. You can also filter the report to show skipped files for a specific job primary ID. The following table shows the filter for Skip File Details report and how you can use the filter to view specific data in the report. Filter
Primary Job

Column

Description

Job Primary ID Select a job primary ID to view skipped file details for the selected job primary ID.

Planning Activity > Capacity Planning > Forecasted Size report

This report shows the supply vs. demand historically but also adds a forecast line for both supply and demand that can show when in the future they may meet. The point that these two lines intersect would be the date that new capacity (more disk or more backup tapes) needs to be added. In the above example the supply is by far outgrowing the demand, which would suggest that more capacity does not need to be purchased. The default first view of this report shows the entire backup environment but for actual use it should be filtered to a specific tape library or disk pool since some libraries or pools may be closer to full capacity than others. The EMM Server column has been removed from the Media filter. The Master Server filter can be used to view data for specific servers instead of the EMM Server column.

Planning Activity > Capacity Planning > Historical Size report

This report shows the historical supply vs. demand. Supply is defined as all available free space on all the tape media in the backup application. This number is calculated by taking the average size of all full media of the same tape type. That average is then used for the predicted size of all other tapes that are not full of the same type. Use of the average is necessary since tapes do not have an exact capacity and are written to until the end of tape mark. On the demand side this is a calculation of all backup jobs for the time period. The idea for this report is that the difference between the two lines is the extra capacity that was not needed. In an ideal environment these lines match the blue line, for example, being slightly under the line showing that all the space for backups is used. This report can sometimes be referred to as the just in time inventory report after the business theory by the same name. The default is to show the total environment but for operational use it would need to be filtered down to individual storage locations since some can be closer to

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

751

100% capacity than others. This change is easily made by clicking Edit Report at the top of the report. The EMM Server column has been removed from the Media filter. The Master Server filter can be used to view data for specific servers instead of the EMM Server column.

Planning Activity > Forecast > Job Count report

This report shows you the total number of backup jobs for each day in specified time frame. A linear regression forecast is also performed to show you how many backups you can expect for the next three days based on the current data.

Planning Activity > Forecast > Job Size

This report shows you the total number of backup jobs for each day in specified time frame. A linear regression forecast is also performed to show you how many backups you can expect for the next three days based on the current data. Figure 11-31 shows a sample view of Job Size Forecast Report. Figure 11-31 Job Size Forecast Report (Historical)

This report is also available in tabular format. Figure 11-32 shows a sample view of Job Size Forecast Report.

752

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Figure 11-32

Job Size Forecast Report (Tabular)

The following are the details that are associated with the Job Size Forecast report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Job Size Forecast report Planning Activity Report > Report Templates > Backup > Planning Activity > Forecast > Job Size Forecast report. Provides forecast of future backup job sizes across products, domains, clients, policies and business level views. Symantec NetBackup, Symantec NetBackup Master Appliance Master Server, Client Historical Yes. Drill down reports can be viewed at following five levels for the selected parameter value. Level 1: Master Server, Level 2: Client Name, Level 3: Job Type, Level 4: Schedule/Level Type, Level 5: Policy Name Yes PDF, CSV, HTML, XML, TSV All Reports > Standard Report > Backup > Activity Planning > Forecast > Job Size Forecast

Report Purpose

Supported products Applicable View Report Display Drill down report

Can be scheduled Supported formats Mapping with VBR report

You can edit the Job Size Forecast report to show or hide the columns that you are interested in. All the columns are shown by default. You can also filter the report to view reports of specific master servers. The following table shows

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

753

the filters for Job Size Forecast report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Master Server

Master Server

Select one or more master servers to view data for the virtual clients that are backed up by the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value drop-down list .

Media Server

Media Server Select one or more media servers to view data for the selected media servers in the report. All media servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value dropdown list. Client Name Client OS Select one or more clients to view data for the selected clients in the report. All clients that are protected by the master servers in the OpsCenter console are listed. Select one or more client OS to view data for the selected client OS in the report.

Client

Policy

Policy Name Policy Type Policy Keyword

Select one or more policy names to view data for the selected policies. Select one or more policy types to view data for the selected policy types.

Select one or more policy keyword to view data for the policies Policy Data having the selected keyword. Classification Name Select one or more policy data classification names like Gold, Silver, Bronze etc. to view data for the policies having the selected data classiciation names. Schedule Schedule/Level Select one or more schedule or level types to view the data for Type the configured schedules. Schedule Name Select one or more schedule names to view data for the selected schedule names.

754

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Filter
Job

Column
Job Type Product Type Job Transport Type Job Status

Description
Select one or more job types as Archive, Backup, or Restore to view data for the selected job types. Select one or more backup products to view data for the selected products. Select one or more transport types like FT, LAN, or Unknown to view data for the jobs that have the selected transport type. Select one or more job status like Failed, Successful etc. to view data for the selected job status.

Example of filter usage: You may run the Job Size Forecast report for a specific client to view details for the specific clients. The following report enhancements have been made for the Job Size Forecast report:

The option Next has been removed from the drop-down menu for Relative Timeframe. You now cannot enter a relative timeframe like Next 2 weeks. This is because the report does not support any futuristic data. The unit Years has been added for Relative Timeframe selection. You can now view data for the last X years. You can also select Year from the top-right corner of the report. Drill down reports for following five levels have been added in OpsCenter.

Level 1: Master Server Level 2: Client Name Level 3: Job Type Level 4: Schedule/Level Type Level 5: Policy Name

The following options have been removed from TimeFrameGroupBy selection:

Days of week Average Days of week total Hours of day Average Hours of day Total Minutes Month of year Average Month of year total

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

755

Quarter of year Average Quarter of year total

The following filter enhancements have been made for the Job Size Forecast report:

CommVault Galaxyand Enterprise Vault have been removed from the list of values for Product type column under the Job filter. New columns Job Status (Complete Only) and Job Status(Complete and Partial Only) are added to the Report On parameter. UNKNOWN has been added as a value for Policy Type column in the Policy filter. You can now filter report data for policy types that are UNKNOWN. The default unit for Y1 axis is now GB. Value SAN is removed from the Job Transport Type filter.

Planning Activity > Scheduled Job > Scheduled Job report

This report is available in Ranking Report view, which depicts how many jobs have been scheduled to run in future. You can view the Scheduled Jobs per schedule, policy, master server, or client. Note: By default, the Scheduled Jobs report shows job count per policy. If you want to view the job count for clients, schedules, or master servers, change the report parameters. There is more information available about how to change this report's parameters. See Changing the Planning Activity > Scheduled Job > Scheduled Job report parameters on page 755.

Changing the Planning Activity > Scheduled Job > Scheduled Job report parameters
To change the report parameters

1 2 3

On the Scheduled Jobs report, click the Edit link. On the Report Wizard, from the Report On drop-down list, select a Scheduled Job attribute. For example: Client, Master Server, Policy, or Schedule Name. Click Run.

756

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Note: To view job count for a specific client, policy, master server, or schedule, click Show Advanced Filters and select name of the client, policy, master server, or schedule, for which you want to view job count. There is more information about the Planning Activity > Scheduled Job > Scheduled Job report. See Planning Activity > Scheduled Job > Scheduled Job report on page 755.

Planning Activity > Scheduled Job > Job Count Scheduled Vs Actual report
This historical report depicts how many jobs were scheduled to run in future and how many jobs are run. The report essentially shows the comparison between Scheduled (Future) Job Count and Actual Job Count. Using this report you can determine whether the jobs that were scheduled to run in future have been run on schedule. Figure 11-33 shows a sample view of the Job Count Scheduled Vs Actual report.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

757

Figure 11-33

Job Count Scheduled Vs Actual report

The following are details associated with the Job Count Scheduled Vs Actual report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Job Count Scheduled Vs Actual report Backup Report > Report Templates > Backup > Planning Activity > Scheduled Job > Job Count Scheduled Vs Actual This historical report compares actual and scheduled job counts. This report is valid for NetBackup and NetBackup Appliance.

Report Purpose

758

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Supported products Applicable View Report Display Drill down report Can be scheduled Supported formats Mapping with VBR report

NetBackup, NetBackup Appliance Master Server Historical None Yes PDF, CSV, TSV, XML, HTML Backups > Activity Planning > Scheduled Jobs > Job Count Scheduled Vs Actual

You can view comparison between actual and scheduled job count for a specific client, policy, master server, or schedule by using filters. The following table shows the filters for Job Count Scheduled Vs Actual report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Master Server

Master Server Select one or more master servers to view data for the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value drop-down list . Client Name Select one or more clients to view data for the selected clients in the report. All clients that are protected by the master servers in the OpsCenter console are listed. Select one or more policy names to view data for the selected policies. Select one or more schedule names to view data for the selected schedule names. By default the Actual Job Count includes manual jobs, which were initiated manually. You can exclude manual jobs from the actual job count, and view only the jobs that are of execution type Scheduled. To exclude manual jobs in the report, select Yes.

Client

Policy

Policy Name

Schedule Schedule Name Scheduled Exclude Job Manual Jobs

Example of filter usage: By default the Actual Job Count includes manual jobs, which were initiated manually by the NetBackup admin. There is more information available about how to exclude manual jobs from the actual job count.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

759

See Excluding manual jobs from the actual jobs in the Job Count Scheduled Vs Actual report on page 759. The following enhancements have been made for this report:

The unit Years has been added for Relative Timeframe selection. You can now view data for the last x years. You can also see the Year tab on top-right corner of the report. The following units for Time Frame Grouping have been removed:

Day of week Average Day of Week total Hour of day Average Hour of day total Minutes Month of year Average Month of year Total Quarter Quarter of year Average Quarter of year total

The default value for Exclude Manual Jobs column in Scheduled Job filter is now changed to No. Earlier the default value for Exclude Manual Jobs was Yes.

Excluding manual jobs from the actual jobs in the Job Count Scheduled Vs Actual report
By default the Actual Job Count includes manual jobs, which were initiated manually by NetBackup admin. To exclude manual jobs from the Actual Job count, and view only those jobs that have execution type as Scheduled, do the following: To exclude manual jobs from the actual jobs

1 2 3

On the Job Count-Scheduled Vs Actual report, click the Edit link. On the Report Wizard, in the Filter Options section, select Yes from the Exclude Manual Jobs drop-down list. Click Run.

More information is available about the Planning Activity > Scheduled Job > Job Count Scheduled Vs Actual report.

760

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

See Planning Activity > Scheduled Job > Job Count Scheduled Vs Actual report on page 756.

Planning Activity > Scheduled Job > Job Count within Backup Window report
This historical report depicts how many jobs were scheduled and how many jobs have been run within the specified backup window. The report essentially shows the comparison between Scheduled (Future) Job Count and Actual Job Count, during the backup window. Use this report to determine whether your backup windows are appropriate and are properly used. Click Show Chart as Table link below the report to display report details in a tabular format. The Job Count within Backup Window report can show if jobs are finishing within a specified backup window. This report is complemented with a graphical drawing of the backup window for a quick analysis. You can quickly determine if all backup activity is occurring within the defined window. Furthermore, looking at window performance across broad timelines using intelligent averaging is also necessary. Missing a window once or twice doesnt necessarily point to broader systematic problems and thus the averaging context needs to be examined alongside the actual daily context. The following are details associated with the Job Count within Backup Window report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Job Count within Backup Window Backup Report > Report Templates > Backup > Planning Activity > Scheduled Job > Job Count within Backup Window Comparison of actual vs scheduled NetBackup jobs across a user-defined backup window against a 24-hour timeline. NetBackup, NetBackup Appliance Master Server Historical None Yes PDF, CSV, TSV, XML, HTML

Report Purpose

Supported products Applicable View Report Display Drill down report Can be scheduled Supported formats

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

761

Mapping with VBR report

Backups > Activity Planning > Scheduled Jobs > Job Count within Backup Window

Figure 11-34 shows a sample view of Job Count within Backup Window report. Figure 11-34 Job Count within Backup Window report

This report shows that backups occurred outside of the window shown in green (18:00 - 09:00). The following table shows the filters for Job Count within Backup Window report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

762

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Filter
Master Server

Column

Description

Master Server Select one or more master servers to view data for the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value drop-down list . Client Name Select one or more clients to view data for the selected clients in the report. All clients that are protected by the master servers in the OpsCenter console are listed. Select one or more policy names to view data for the selected policies. Select one or more schedule names to view data for the selected schedule names. Select if you want to exclude manual jobs in the report. You can select Yes or No.

Client

Policy

Policy Name

Schedule Schedule Name Scheduled Exclude Job Manual Jobs

Example of filter usage: You may run the Job Count Window report for a specific master server to view job count details only for the selected master server. The following enhancements have been made for this report:

The unit Years has been added for Relative Timeframe selection. You can now view data for the last x years. You can also see the Years tab on top-right corner of the report. The default value for Exclude Manual Jobs column in Scheduled Job filter is now changed to No. Earlier the default value for Exclude Manual Jobs was Yes.

Planning Activity > Scheduled Jobs > Job Details Scheduled Vs Actual report
This tabular report shows the comparison between Scheduled Job count and Actual Job count for each of the combinations of clients, policies, and schedules, for each day. Note: By default, the Job Count Details-Scheduled Vs Actual report shows job count per policy. If you want to view the job count per client or master server, change the filter parameters. Figure 11-35 shows a sample view of the Job Details Scheduled vs Actual report.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

763

Figure 11-35

Job Details Scheduled Vs Actual report

The following are details associated with the Job Details Scheduled Vs Actual report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Job Details Scheduled Vs Actual report Backup Report > Report Templates > Backup > Planning Activity > Scheduled Job > Job Details Scheduled Vs Actual This is a tabular report comparing scheduled to actual job counts grouped by date, master server, client and policy. This report is valid for NetBackup and NetBackup Appliance. NetBackup, NetBackup Appliance Master Server Tabular None Yes

Report Purpose

Supported products Applicable View Report Display Drill down report Can be scheduled

764

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Supported export formats Mapping with VBR report

PDF, CSV, TSV, XML, HTML Backups > Activity Planning > Scheduled Jobs > Job Details - Scheduled Vs Actual

The following table lists the filters for Job Details Scheduled Vs Actual report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Master Server

Master Server Select one or more master servers to view data for the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value drop-down list . Client Name Select one or more clients to view data for the selected clients in the report. All clients that are protected by the master servers in the OpsCenter console are listed. Select one or more policy names to view data for the selected policies. Select one or more schedule names to view data for the selected schedule names. By default, the Actual Job Count includes manual jobs, which were initiated manually. You can exclude manual jobs from the actual job count, and view only the jobs that are of execution type Scheduled. To exclude manual jobs in the report, select Yes.

Client

Policy

Policy Name

Schedule Schedule Name Scheduled Exclude Job Manual Jobs

There is more information available about modifying the Planning Activity > Scheduled Jobs > Job Details Scheduled Vs Actual report. See Modifying the Planning Activity > Scheduled Jobs > Job Details Scheduled Vs Actual report on page 765. The unit Years has been added for Relative Timeframe selection. You can now view data for the last x years. You can also see the Years tab on top-right corner of the report.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

765

Modifying the Planning Activity > Scheduled Jobs > Job Details Scheduled Vs Actual report
Note: By default, the Job Count Details-Scheduled Vs Actual report shows job count per policy. If you want to view the job count per client or master server, change the filter parameters. To change the report parameters

1 2 3 4

On the Job Count Details-Scheduled Vs Actual report, click the Edit link. On the Report Wizard, in the Define Viewable Columns section, select a column name (Client or Master Server) from the Available Columns list. Click >> option. Click Run.

Note: To view job count for a specific client, policy, master server, or schedule, go to the Filters section and select the name of the policy, master server, or schedule for which you want to view job count. By default the jobs that were run (Actual Job Count) include manual jobs, which do not have any schedule time associated with them as they are initiated manually. You can exclude manual jobs from the actual job count, and view only the jobs that are of execution type Scheduled. To exclude manual jobs from the actual jobs

1 2 3

On the Job Count Details-Scheduled Vs Actual report, click the Edit link. On the Report Wizard, in the Filter Options section, select Yes from the Exclude Manual Jobs drop-down list. Click Run.

The Job Count Details-Scheduled Vs Actual report shows comparison between Scheduled Job count and Actual Job count. The Actual Job count includes Manual Jobs. There is more information available about the Planning Activity > Scheduled Jobs > Job Details Scheduled Vs Actual report. See Planning Activity > Scheduled Jobs > Job Details Scheduled Vs Actual report on page 762.

766

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Planning Activity > Scheduled Job > All Jobs report

This canned report shows jobs in a tabular form, which include the following:
Manual Jobs These jobs are initiated manually, by NetBackup admin at his or her discretion. Therefore, these jobs do not have schedule time associated with them.

Note: While generating the Job Count-Scheduled Vs Actual report,

you have an option to exclude the manual jobs from the actual job count and show only those jobs that are of execution type Scheduled. See Planning Activity > Scheduled Job > Job Count Scheduled Vs Actual report on page 756. Scheduled Jobs These jobs are scheduled to run in future. Each Scheduled Job information comprises a client, policy, schedule, and schedule time. OpsCenter stores this information historically. Each Scheduled Job when run on the specified schedule time becomes an actual job of execution type Scheduled. Thus, a Scheduled Job has a corresponding actual job entry in OpsCenter database. This particular Scheduled Job can be identified by the unique combination of client, policy, schedule, and schedule time. You can compare the schedule time of this Scheduled Job with the corresponding Job Start Time to determine whether that job was run on scheduled time or not.

Planning Activity > Stored Backup Images > Valid Backup Images report
This report shows unexpired backup images across products, domains, clients, policies, and business level views. This report is valid only for NetBackup. This report is available in Ranking and Distribution views. The unit Years has been added for Relative Timeframe selection. You can now view data for the last x years. You can also see the Years tab on top-right corner of the Tabular Backup report. The option Next has been removed from the drop-down menu for Relative Timeframe. You now cannot enter a relative timeframe like Next 2 weeks. The following units for Time Frame Grouping have been removed:

Day of week Average Day of Week total Hour of day Average

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

767

Hour of day total Minutes Month of year Average Month of year Total Quarter Quarter of year Average Quarter of year total

The default Report On parameter is None. Earlier it was Master Server. UNKNOWN has been added as a value for Policy Type column in the Policy filter. You can now filter report data for policy types that are UNKNOWN. In earlier versions of OpsCenter the unknown policy types were shown as blank. Now all static columns like job type, schedule type, policy type, etc. are shown as UNKNOWN like in VBR. The following values for Job Type have been removed:

Automatic Discovery and Protection Cleaning DB Recover DQTS Erase Generic Image Cleanup Import Inventory Label LiveUpdate Media Contents Migration None Reclamation Replication Report

768

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Restore Retention Retrieve Storage Pool Management Tape Eject Tape Formatting Tape Request Task Last Test Run Undefined Utility Vault Verify

The default value "All" for Job Type is not there now. The default-selected value is Backup. Symantec Enterprise Vault and CommVault Galaxy have been removed from the list of values for column Product Type under Job filter. Add Scheduled Job filter. You can filter on the basis of Schedule Name or Schedule/Level Type. The default unit for Y axis is now GB. Earlier it was MB. The following option has been added: Show trendline with moving average period of 3. The value can be 1, 2, 3, 7, 14, or 30. The Distrbution and ranking view is part of another report in OpsCenter "Valid Backup Images" ImageExpirationTime with value NULL should also be considered as in VBR.

Planning Activity > Stored Backup Images > Duplicate Copies report
The axis on the left is for the height of the blue bars for example that tells the number of duplicate backup copies that exist overall. The yellow line for example is the axis on the right and it shows the percentage of backup images that are copies. This is a particularly useful report for situations where you want to make

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

769

certain there is always more than 1 backup copy. If two copies of a backup exist, the blue bar would be a height of 1 (since there is 1 extra copy) and the line would show .5 for 50% since half of the backup images are copies. The same situation for 3 copies would be a blue bar height of 2 and a yellow line percentage of .66 or 66%. In operational use you can filter this report down to specific policies or the clients that you want to ensure always have a 50% or greater yellow line so that more than 1 backup copy exists.

Planning Activity > Stored Backup Images > Stored Backup Images > Stored Backup Images on Media
This report shows you the total amount of data in gigabytes that was backed up but has not expired yet for each of the days in the past two weeks. This report shows results only for NetBackup and NetBackup Appliances. The report can now also show trendlines with customized average periods. Click Show Chart as Table link below the report to view tabular details. You can also filter the report to show unexpired backed up data for a limited sample set, such as one or more policies, clients, views, or job status. You can use timeframe grouping filter. For example: If you want to view unexpired backup images for the period between 1st Jan 2010 to 1st Feb 2010, in groups each of one week, select 1 Week from the Group by drop-down list. On the report, you can see data in four stacked bars, one per week. Using the Report On parameter, you can select report grouping attribute from the drop-down list, which you want to view the report for. For example: Backup Job Attributes, Backup Image Attributes etc. The following are details associated with the Stored Backup Images on Media report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Stored Backup Images on Media Backup Report > Report Templates > Backup > Planning Activity > Stored Backup Images on Media Historical report of unexpired image sizes across products, domains, clients, policies, and business level views. EMC NetWorker, IBM Tivoli Storage Manager, Symantec Backup Exec, NetBackup, NetBackup Master Appliance, NetBackup PureDisk Master Server Historical

Report Purpose

Supported products

Applicable View Report Display

770

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Drill down report Can be scheduled Supported formats Mapping with VBR report

None Yes PDF, CSV, TSV, XML, HTML Backups > Activity Planning > Scheduled Jobs > Stored Backup Images The data for this report from VBR and OpsCenter does not match as OpsCenter points to expiration time from Image_Copy table while VBR used expiration time from Image_fragment table. This change was introduced in OpsCenter 7.1 to correct the behavior of the report and also improve the performance.

Deviation from VBR

Figure 11-36 shows a sample view of the Stored Backup Images on Media report.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

771

Figure 11-36

Stored Backup Images on Media report

The following table shows the filters for Stored Backup Image on Media report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

772

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Filter
Master Server

Column

Description

Master Server Select one or more master servers to view data for the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value drop-down list . Media server Select one or more media servers to view data for the specific media servers in the report. All media servers that are attached to the master servers in the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value drop-down list .. Select one or more clients to view data for the selected clients in the report. All clients that are protected by the master servers in the OpsCenter console are listed. Select one or more client OS to view data for the selected client OS in the report.

Media server

Client

Client Name Client OS

Policy

Policy Data Select one or more policy data classification names like Gold, Classification Silver, Bronze etc. to view data for the policies having the Name selected data classification names. Policy Keyword Policy Name Policy Type Select one or more policy keywords to view data for the policies having the selected keyword. Select one or more policy names to view data for the selected policies. Select one or more policy types to view data for the selected policy types.

Schedule Schedule/Level Select one or more schedule types like Full, Incremental etc. to Type view data for the selected schedule types. Schedule Name Job Job Status Select one or more schedule names to view data for the selected schedule names.

Select one or more Job Status like Failed, Missed, Partially Successful etc. to view data for the selected job status in the Job Transport report. Type Select one or more transport types like FT, LAN, or Unknown Job Type to view data for the jobs that have the selected transport type. Product Type Select one or more job types like Archive, Backup, Restore etc. to view data for the selected job types. Select one or more products like Backup Exec, IBM TSM etc. to view data for the selected products.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

773

Example of filter usage: You may run the Stored Backup Images on Media report for a specific policy to view unexpired image sizes for the specific policy. Further if you are interested in knowing about the unexpired image sizes for specific products, you can use the Job filter and under Product Type column, select Backup Exec and EMC NetWorker. The following enhancements have been made in the Stored Backup Images on Media report:
Report Enhancements The following report enhancements have been made: The report now also shows trendlines with customized average periods. The following option has been added: Show trendline with moving average period of 3. The value can be 1, 2, 3, 7, 14, or 30. The default value is 3. Select Show trendline with moving average checkbox and use the drop-down list to specify the number of data points to factor into the average. At each interval on the graph, the trendline shows a moving average of the most recent data points. Example: 3 displays a trendline that, at each interval, shows the average of the current data point and the two previous data points. Fixed issues of data correctness and parity with VBR. Image Expiration time with value NULL is now considered in the report.

774

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Filter Enhancements

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

775

The following filter enhancements are listed:

The unit Years has been added for Relative Timeframe selection. You can now view data for the last x years. You can also select Year from the top-right corner of the report.

The option Next has been removed from the drop-down menu for Relative Timeframe. You now cannot enter a relative timeframe like Next two weeks. The following units for Time Frame Grouping have been removed: Day of week Average

Day of Week total Hour of day Average Hour of day total Minutes Month of year Average Month of year Total Quarter Quarter of year Average Quarter of year total

The default Report On parameter is now None. Earlier it was Master Server. UNKNOWN has been added as a value for Policy Type column in the Policy filter. You can now filter report data for the policy types that are unknown. In earlier versions of OpsCenter the unknown policy types were shown as blank. Now all static columns like job type, schedule type, policy type, etc. are shown as UNKNOWN like in VBR. The following values for Job Type column have been removed for the Jobs filter: Automatic Discovery and Protection

Cleaning DB Recover DQTS Erase Generic Image Cleanup Import Inventory Label LiveUpdate Media Contents Migration None

776

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Reclamation Replication Report Restore Retention Retrieve Storage Pool Management Tape Eject Tape Formatting Tape Request Task Last Test Run Undefined Utility Vault Verify

The Job Type column is mandatory and the default-selected value for Job Type column is Backup. Earlier the Job Type column was not applied by default. Symantec Enterprise Vault and CommVault Galaxy have been removed from the list of values for column Product Type under Job filter. A new filter called Scheduled Jobs has been added. You can now filter on the basis of Schedule Name or Schedule/Level Type. The default unit for Y1 axis is now GB. Earlier it was MB.

The Distribution view and Ranking view for this report is part of Valid Backup Images.

Status & Success Rate > Status > Failed Job Count report
This report aggregates failed jobs and shows these across a timeline. In reality, this report is the same as all jobs as no distinction on whether the failed job was first or last one is made. It provides visualization of whether a problematic trend exists. It can be reported on against any view or level within a view along with any of the key backup infrastructure components (backup server, media server) and attributes (policy, policy type, schedule, OS, product, transport type). Filtering is available on all components and attributes. The primary use case of the report is verification of whether actions taken to correct persistent failures produce results and reversing trends. The report can now also show trendlines with customized average periods. Figure 11-37 shows a sample view of the Failed Job Count report.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

777

Figure 11-37

Failed Job Count report

The following are details associated with the Failed Job Count report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Failed Job Count Backup Report > Report Templates > Backup > Status & Success Rate > Status > Failed Job Count This report shows the failed job density over time. NetBackup, NetBackup Appliance, Backup Exec, NetBackup PureDisk, EMC NetWorker, IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Master Server, Client Historical No Yes

Report Purpose Supported products

Applicable View Report Display Drill down report Can be scheduled

778

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Supported export formats Mapping with VBR report

CSV, HTML, PDF, XML, TSV Backups > Status > Failed Job Count

The following table shows the filters for Failed Job Count report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Master Server

Master Server

Select one or more master servers to view data for the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value drop-down list .

Media server

Media server Select one or more media servers to view data for the specific media servers in the report. All media servers that are attached to the master servers in the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value drop-down list .. Client Name Client OS Select one or more clients to view data for the selected clients in the report. All clients that are protected by the master servers in the OpsCenter console are listed. Select one or more client OS to view data for the selected client OS in the report.

Client

Policy

Policy Data Select one or more policy data classification names to view data Classification for the selected policy data classification names. Name Select one or more policy keyword to view data for the policies Policy having the selected keyword. Keyword Select one or more policy names to view data for the selected Policy Name policies. Policy Type Select one or more policy types to view data for the selected policy types.

Schedule Schedule/Level Select one or more schedule types like CINC, Copy, Daily etc. to Type view data for the selected schedule types. Schedule Name Select one or more schedule names to view data for the selected schedule names.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

779

Filter
Job

Column
Job Transport Type Job Type Product Type

Description
Select one or more transport types like FT, LAN, or Unknown to view data for the jobs that have the selected transport type. By default, Backup jobs are shown in the report. You can select one or more job types like Archive, Backup, Restore etc. to view data for the selected job types. Select one or more backup products to view data for the selected products.

Attempt

Attempt Status

The Attempt Status filter can have two values i.e. Attempt or Job. When Job Count is calculated, the report considers all attempts if Attempt is selected. By default, Job is selected. Number of attempts are not considered when Job is selected.

Example of filter usage: To view a count of all job attempts in the Failed Job Count report, select Attempt Status as Attempt. The following report enhancements have been made for Failed Job Count report:

The unit Years has been added for Relative Timeframe selection. You can now view data for the last x years. The option Next has been removed from the drop-down menu for Relative Timeframe. You now cannot enter a relative timeframe like Next 2 weeks. This is because the report does not support any futuristic data. The following options have been removed from TimeFrameGroupBy selection:

Days of week Average Days of week total Hours of day Average Hours of day Total Minutes Month of year Average Month of year total Quarter Quarter of year Average Quarter of year total

780

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Symantec Enterprise Vault and CommVault Galaxy have been removed from the list of values for column Product Type under Job filter. The following Report On options have been added under Backup Job Attributes:

Job Status (Complete and Partial only) Job Status (Complete only)

The Schedule Name column is added under the Schedule filter to filter data by schedule name. The report now also shows trendlines with customized average periods. The following option has been added: Show trendline with moving average period of 3. The value can be 1, 2, 3, 7, 14, or 30. The default value is 3. Select Show trendline with moving average checkbox and use the drop-down list to specify the number of data points to factor into the average. At each interval on the graph, the trendline shows a moving average of the most recent data points. Example: 3 displays a trendline that, at each interval, shows the average of the current data point and the two previous data points. UNKNOWN has been added as a value for Policy Type column in the Policy filter. You can now filter report data for policy types that are unknown. In earlier versions of OpsCenter the unknown policy types were shown as blank. Now all static columns like job type, schedule type, policy type, etc. are shown as UNKNOWN like in VBR

Status & Success Rate > Status > Partially Successful Job Count report
This report aggregates partially successful jobs and shows these across a timeline. It provides a visualization of job volume trends that skip the files that are open during the backup job. It can be reported on against any view or level within a view along with any of the key backup infrastructure components (backup server, media server) and attributes (policy, policy type, schedule, OS, product, transport type). Filtering is available on all components and attributes. The primary use case of the report is verification of whether actions taken to correct the open file situation by moving the scheduling of the client or policies produce results and reversing trends. Figure 11-38 shows a sample view of the Partially Successful Job Count report.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

781

Figure 11-38

Partially Successful Job Count report

The following are details associated with the Partially Successful Job Count report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Partially Successful Job Count Backup Report > Report Templates > Backup > Status & Success Rate > Status > Partially Successful Job Count This report shows the partially successful jobs density over time. NetBackup, NetBackup Appliance, Backup Exec, NetBackup PureDisk, EMC NetWorker, IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Master Server, Client Historical No Yes

Report Purpose

Supported products

Applicable View Report Display Drill down report Can be scheduled

782

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Supported export formats Mapping with VBR report

CSV, HTML, PDF, XML, TSV Backups > Status > Partially Successful Job Count

The following table shows the filters for Partially Successful Job Count report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Master Server

Master Server

Select one or more master servers to view data for the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value drop-down list .

Media server

Media server Select one or more media servers to view data for the specific media servers in the report. All media servers that are attached to the master servers in the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value drop-down list .. Client Name Client OS Select one or more clients to view data for the selected clients in the report. All clients that are protected by the master servers in the OpsCenter console are listed. Select one or more client OS to view data for the selected client OS in the report.

Client

Policy

Policy Data Select one or more policy data classification names to view data Classification for the selected policy data classification names. Name Select one or more policy keyword to view data for the policies Policy having the selected keyword. Keyword Select one or more policy names to view data for the selected Policy Name policies. Policy Type Select one or more policy types to view data for the selected policy types.

Schedule Schedule/Level Select one or more schedule types like CINC, Copy, Daily etc. to Type view data for the selected schedule types. Schedule Name Select one or more schedule names to view data for the selected schedule names.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

783

Filter
Job

Column
Job Transport Type Job Type Product Type

Description
Select one or more transport types like FT, LAN, or Unknown to view data for the jobs that have the selected transport type. By default, Backup jobs are shown in the report. You can select one or more job types like Archive, Backup, Restore etc. to view data for the selected job types. Select one or more backup products to view data for the selected products.

Attempt

Attempt Status

The Attempt Status column can have two values i.e. Attempt or Job. When Job Count is calculated, the report considers all attempts if Attempt is selected. By default, Job is selected. Number of attempts are not considered when Job is selected.

Example of filter usage: You may run the Partially Successful Job Count report for a specific policy to view partially successful jobs for the specific policy. Further if you are interested in knowing about the partially successful job count for specific products, you can use the Job filter and under Product Type column, select Backup Exec and EMC NetWorker. The following report enhancements have been made for Partially Successful Job Count report:

The unit Years has been added for Relative Timeframe selection. You can now view data for the last x years. The option Next has been removed from the drop-down menu for Relative Timeframe. You now cannot enter a relative timeframe like Next 2 weeks. This is because the report does not support any futuristic data. The following options have been removed from TimeFrameGroupBy selection:

Days of week Average Days of week total Hours of day Average Hours of day Total Minutes Month of year Average Month of year total Quarter

784

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Quarter of year Average Quarter of year total

Symantec Enterprise Vault and CommVault Galaxy have been removed from the list of values for column Product Type under Job filter. The following Report On options have been added under Backup Job Attributes:

Job Status (Complete and Partial only) Job Status (Complete only)

The Schedule Name column is added under the Schedule filter to filter data by schedule name. The report now also shows trendlines with customized average periods. The following option has been added: Show trendline with moving average period of 3. The value can be 1, 2, 3, 7, 14, or 30. The default value is 3. Select Show trendline with moving average checkbox and use the drop-down list to specify the number of data points to factor into the average. At each interval on the graph, the trendline shows a moving average of the most recent data points. Example: 3 displays a trendline that, at each interval, shows the average of the current data point and the two previous data points. UNKNOWN has been added as a value for Policy Type column in the Policy filter. You can now filter report data for policy types that are unknown. In earlier versions of OpsCenter the unknown policy types were shown as blank. Now all static columns like job type, schedule type, policy type, etc. are shown as UNKNOWN like in VBR

Status & Success Rate > Status > Successful Job Count report
This report aggregates successful jobs and shows these across a timeline. It provides a visualization of job volume trends. It can be reported on against any view or level within a view along with any of the key backup infrastructure components (backup server, media server) and attributes (policy, policy type, schedule, OS, product, transport type). By default backup jobs are shown in the report. Filtering is available on all components and attributes. The primary use case of the report is verification of trends and the days that are exception to the norm. The report is highly effective for presenting long-term historical data on one of the most fundamental metrics of managing a backup operation. Figure 11-39 shows a sample view of the Successful Job Count report.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

785

Figure 11-39

Successful Job Count report

The following are details associated with the Successful Job Count report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Successful Job Count Backup Report > Report Templates > Backup > Status & Success Rate > Status > Successful Job Count This report shows the successful jobs density over time. NetBackup, NetBackup Appliance, Backup Exec, NetBackup PureDisk, EMC NetWorker, IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Master Server, Client Historical (Chart) No Yes CSV, HTML, PDF, XML, TSV Backups > Status > Successful Job Count

Report Purpose Supported products

Applicable View Report Display Drill down report Can be scheduled Supported export formats Mapping with VBR report

The following table shows the filters for Successful Job Count report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report.

786

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Master Server

Master Server

Select one or more master servers to view data for the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value drop-down list .

Media server

Media server Select one or more media servers to view data for the specific media servers in the report. All media servers that are attached to the master servers in the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value drop-down list .. Client Name Client OS Select one or more clients to view data for the selected clients in the report. All clients that are protected by the master servers in the OpsCenter console are listed. Select one or more client OS to view data for the selected client OS in the report.

Client

Policy

Policy Data Select one or more policy data classification names to view data Classification for the selected policy data classification names. Name Select one or more policy keyword to view data for the policies Policy having the selected keyword. Keyword Select one or more policy names to view data for the selected Policy Name policies. Policy Type Select one or more policy types to view data for the selected policy types.

Schedule Schedule/Level Select one or more schedule types like CINC, Copy, Daily etc. to Type view data for the selected schedule types. Schedule Name Job Job Transport Type Job Type Product Type Select one or more schedule names to view data for the selected schedule names. Select one or more transport types like FT, LAN, or Unknown to view data for the jobs that have the selected transport type. By default, Backup jobs are shown in the report. You can select one or more job types like Archive, Backup, Restore etc. to view data for the selected job types. Select one or more backup products to view data for the selected products.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

787

Filter
Attempt

Column
Attempt Status

Description
The Attempt Status column can have two values i.e. Attempt or Job. When Job Count is calculated, the report considers all attempts if Attempt is selected. By default, Job is selected. Number of attempts are not considered when Job is selected.

Example of filter usage: You may run the Successful Job Count report for a specific policy to view successful job counts for the specific policy. Further if you are interested in knowing about the successful job counts for specific products, you can use the Job filter and under Product Type column, select Backup Exec and EMC NetWorker. The following report enhancements have been made for the Successful Job Count report:

The unit Years has been added for Relative Timeframe selection. You can now view data for the last x years. The option Next has been removed from the drop-down menu for Relative Timeframe. You now cannot enter a relative timeframe like Next 2 weeks. This is because the report does not support any futuristic data. The following options have been removed from TimeFrameGroupBy selection:

Days of week Average Days of week total Hours of day Average Hours of day Total Minutes Month of year Average Month of year total Quarter Quarter of year Average Quarter of year total

Symantec Enterprise Vault and CommVault Galaxy have been removed from the list of values for column Product Type under Job filter. The following Report On options have been added under Backup Job Attributes:

Job Status (Complete and Partial only)

788

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Job Status (Complete only)

The Schedule Name column is added under the Schedule filter to filter data by schedule name. The report now also shows trendlines with customized average periods. The following option has been added: Show trendline with moving average period of 3. The value can be 1, 2, 3, 7, 14, or 30. The default value is 3. Select Show trendline with moving average checkbox and use the drop-down list to specify the number of data points to factor into the average. At each interval on the graph, the trendline shows a moving average of the most recent data points. Example: 3 displays a trendline that, at each interval, shows the average of the current data point and the two previous data points. UNKNOWN has been added as a value for Policy Type column in the Policy filter. You can now filter report data for policy types that are unknown. In earlier versions of OpsCenter the unknown policy types were shown as blank. Now all static columns like job type, schedule type, policy type, etc. are shown as UNKNOWN like in VBR

Status & Success Rate > Status > All Failed Backups report
This report is one of three using the advanced success or failure calculation logic around the notion of first, all and last job. They require schedule and window parameters enabling a precise definition of timeframes. Additionally, these reports have aggregation levels of job and client. The first job success or failure is the first job for a client/policy/schedule combination in its defined backup window and last job is the opposite. As failed jobs are rerun one or more times, the last job represents the last of the reruns within the window. This report produces the details of the failed jobs based on which one of the three (first or all or last) methods is chosen. The main use case for this report is based on last job where failure notification to users is based around last job and failures leading up to the last one is ignored.

Status > Consecutive Failures

This report is the second of three using the advanced success or failure calculation logic around the notion of first, all and last job. The main use case is the calculation of 2 or more consecutive failures based around Last Job Success/Failure. It applies intricate logic to pick off the last failed job and in turn to determine that the last job failures are indeed consecutive. This report can be best verified through the Client Risk Analysis report. In this report, if three consecutive failures with 24 hour windows were chosen, the client or the policy combination should also appear on the risk report as not having a successful backup in 72 or more hours.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

789

Jobs that fail consecutively appear in the Consecutive Failures report. The period for which they fail consecutively is configurable. Figure 11-40 shows a sample view of Consecutive Failures Report. Figure 11-40 Consecutive Failures Report

The following columns are displayed in the report:

790

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Node Name

Value in the Node Name column depends on the Report On parameter that you select. The default value of Report On parameter is Master Server. So the value in Node Name column by default shows the master server name. When you select a view from the Filters section while editing the report, the Report On parameter drop-down list also shows the view levels. Based on the levels that you select from the Report On drop-down list, value in the Node Name column changes. For example, if there is a view like Location with two levels: Location (View name) - US -- Client1 -- Client2 -- Client3 - India -- Client4 -- Client5 -- Client6 The following selections are possible:

Select this view called Location from the Filters section and select the Report On parameter as Master Server (default selection). The Node Name column displays the master server.

Select this view called Location from the Filters section and select the Report On parameter as Level 1. The Node Name column displays US and India Select this view called Location from the Filters section and select the Report On parameter as Level 2. The Node Name column displays the clients (clients 1-6).

Client Name Policy Name Schedule Name Job ID Start Time End Time

Name of the client Policies associated with the client and node name Schedules associated with the client Job IDs associated with the policy and schedule that fail consecutively. Date and Time when the job started Date and time when the job ended.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

791

Status Code

Status code for the job ID. You can also filter the report to see details of only a particular status code by using the Job > Status Code filter and selecting the specific status codes. Note that jobs with status code 0 (successful) may also appear in the report. This usually happens in case of multi-streaming jobs. Job IDs with status code 0 appear because if any of the sub-jobs of a multi-streaming job fail, it is considered a complete failure. Generally the Start Time for the multistreaming jobs would be very close.

The following are the details that are associated with the Consecutive Failures report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Consecutive Failures Status and Success Rate Report > Report Templates > Backup > Status and Success Rate > Status > Consecutive Failures report. Provides tabular view showing clients that had consecutive job failures. Symantec NetBackup, Symantec NetBackup Master Appliance Master Server, Client Tabular None Yes PDF, CSV, HTML, XML, TSV All Reports > Standard Report > Backup > Status > Consecutive Failures

Report Purpose

Supported products Applicable View Report Display Drill down report Can be scheduled Supported formats Mapping with VBR report

You can edit the Consecutive Failures report to show or hide the columns that you are interested in. All the columns are shown by default. You can also filter the report to view reports of specific master servers. The following table shows the filters for Consecutive Failures report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

792

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Filter
Master Server

Column
Master Server

Description
Select one or more master servers to view data for the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value drop-down list . Select one or more policy names to view data for the selected policies. Select one or more job types as Archive, Backup, or Restore to view data for the selected job types. Select one or more status codes to view data for the selected status codes. Select different parameters for criteria definition about success rate of the jobs. Select All Jobs Success Rate, First job Success Rate, Last Job Success Rate. Select Aggregation Level to consider the kind of jobs for the specified time frame. For example, if you select First Job Success Rate then the report shows only the first job for the combination of master server, client, policy, and schedule. Select Metric Type to calculate the success rate based as jobs. Select Full Days to specify the list of days to be considered for Full backups.

Policy

Policy Name

Job

Job Types

Status Code

Success Rate

Aggregation Level

Metric Type Full Days

Full Window Select Full Window Parameter to specify the start time for the Parameter full backup window. Count Partial Select Count Partially Successful Job as Successful to count Successful partially successful jobs as successful. job as Successful Full for Duration of (In Hours) Select Full for Duration of (In Hours) to calculate the end time for the incremental backup window. Backup window end time is equal to the duration from the start time of the backup window. Select how many consecutive failures should be included in the report. Select Increment Window Parameter to specify the start time for the incremental backup window.

Consecutive Failures Increment Window Parameter

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

793

Filter

Column

Description

Schedule/Level Select the schedule of jobs is Full or Increment or All. Type Increment Select Increment for Duration of (In Hours) to calculate the end for Duration time for the incremental backup window. Backup window end of (In Hours) time is equal to the duration from the start time of the backup window. Increment Days Select Increment Days to specify the list of days to be considered for Incremental backups.

Example of filter usage: You may run the report for specific policy names to view details only for that specific policy. The following report enhancements have been made for the Consecutive Failures report:

The option Next has been removed from the drop-down menu for Relative Timeframe. You now cannot enter a relative timeframe like Next 2 weeks. This is because the report does not support any futuristic data. The default Relative Timeframe for this report is changed to Previous 2 weeks.

Status & Success Rate > Status > Success Rate Line report
This report is a historical report that shows success rate across products, domains, clients, policies, and business level views. This report simply aggregates jobs according to success rate and shows these across a timeline. Filtering is available on all components and attributes. The primary use case of the report is verification of trends and the days that are exception to the norm. The report is highly effective for presenting long-term historical data on one of the most fundamental metrics of managing a backup operation. Figure 11-41 shows a sample view of the Success Rate Line report.

794

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Figure 11-41

Success Rate Line report

The following are details associated with the Success Rate Line report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Success Rate Line report Backup Report > Report Templates > Backup > Status & Success Rate > Status > Success Rate Line This report shows job success rate density over time. NetBackup, NetBackup Appliance, Backup Exec, NetBackup PureDisk, EMC NetWorker, IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Master Server, Client Historical (Chart) No Yes PDF, CSV, TSV, XML, HTML Backups > Success Rate > Success Rate Line

Report Purpose Supported products

Applicable View Report Display Drill down report Can be scheduled Supported formats Mapping with VBR report

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

795

The following table shows the filters for Success Rate Line report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Master Server

Master Server

Select one or more master servers to view data for the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value drop-down list . Select one or more policy names to view data for the selected policies. Select one or more job types like Archive, Backup, Restore etc. to view data for the selected job types. Select one or more status codes to view data for the selected status codes.

Policy

Policy Name

Job

Job Type Status Code

796

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Filter
Success Rate

Column
Aggregation Level Full Days

Description
Select Aggregation Level to consider the kind of jobs for the specified time frame. For example, if you select First Job Success Rate then the report shows only the first job for the combination of master server, client, policy, and schedule.

Full Window Select Full Days to specify the list of days to be considered for Parameter Full backups. Metric Type Select Full Window Parameter to specify the start time for the Full for full backup window. Duration of Select Metric Type to calculate the success rate based on clients (In Hours) or jobs. Increment Select Full for Duration of (In Hours) to calculate the end time Days for the incremental backup window. Backup window end time Increment is equal to the duration from the start time of the backup Window window. Parameter Select Increment Days to specify the list of days to be considered Increment for Incremental backups. for Duration Select Increment Window Parameter to specify the start time of (In Hours) for the incremental backup window. Consider Select Increment for Duration of (In Hours) to calculate the Partially end time for the incremental backup window. Backup window Successful end time is equal to the duration from the start time of the Job as backup window. Successful Select Count Partially Successful Job as Successful to count partially successful jobs as successful while calculating the Success Rate.

Example of filter usage: Run the Success Rate Line report for a specific job type like Restore to get an idea of the success rate for restore operations. The following report enhancements have been made for the Success Rate Line report:

The unit Years has been added for Relative Timeframe selection. You can now view data for the last x years. The option Next has been removed from the drop-down menu for Relative Timeframe. You now cannot enter a relative timeframe like Next 2 weeks. This is because the report does not support any futuristic data.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

797

Status & Success Rate > Status > Week At A Glance report
This report summarizes activity for a week by symbolically displaying the result of each job for each client under the day of the week. The symbols are the blue (Success) and yellow (Partial Success) men and failures that are denoted by a red X. This report provides quick and comprehensive verification that all is well in the data protection solution using symbols. A drill-down capability to the job level details (i.e Job ID, Start/End Time, Size etc.) is provided. You can drill down to any server on any day and get the job level detail. It can be reported on against any view or level within a view along with any of the key backup infrastructure components (backup server, media server) and attributes (policy, policy type, schedule, OS, product, transport type). Filtering is available on all components and attributes. The report provides a visualization of job status for the most current data and how that compares to the previous six days. This report can be used for automated report generation and email features where different report filters can be used to show specific systems and then that data emailed to the relevant parties once a week. Symantec recommends that you use filters in large environments. This is because the report shows every master server and client by default. Week at a Glance Reports performance declines as the data to be displayed in the report increases. For example, running a two-month report is slower than running a two-week report. Note: The Week at a Glance report displays icons when it is exported or emailed in an HTML format. Earlier in OpsCenter 7.0.x, the Week at a Glance report could not display icons when exported or emailed in an HTML format. This issue has been fixed in OpsCenter 7.1 and later versions. Figure 11-42 shows a sample view of the Week at a Glance report.

798

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Figure 11-42

Week at a Glance report

This report shows that there were a number of failures and also quickly shows that most of the backups completed successfully. Using this report you can see if backups ran each day of the week and the status of that backup. This report can be scheduled to be emailed or exported weekly which saves a great deal of time. The following are details associated with the Week at a Glance report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Week at a Glance Backup Report > Report Templates > Backup > Status & Success Rate > Week At a Glance This is a graphical report of the backup status for each protected client. A blue icon represents a successful backup, a yellow icon represents a partially successful backup, and a red icon represents a failed backup. A green background indicates a full backup. A light blue background represents an incremental backup.

Report Purpose

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

799

Supported products

EMC NetWorker, IBM Tivoli Storage Manager, Symantec Backup Exec, NetBackup, NetBackup Master Appliance, NetBackup PureDisk Master Server, Client Tabular Week at a Glance Detail See Week at a Glance Detail report on page 801. The Week at a Glance Details report further drills down to Skip File Details.

Applicable View Report Display Drill down report

Can be scheduled Supported export formats Mapping with VBR report Deviations from VBR

Yes CSV, TSV, XML, HTML Backups > Status > Week At a Glance If one client is backed up by two master servers, two rows are shown in OpsCenter while one row is displayed in VBR.

The following table shows the filters for Week at a Glance report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Master Server

Master Server

Select one or more master servers to view data for the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value dropdown list.

Media Server

Media Server Select one or more media servers to view data for the specific media servers in the report. All media servers that are attached to the master servers in the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value dropdown list.. Client Name Client OS Select one or more clients to view data for the selected clients in the report. All clients that are protected by the master servers in the OpsCenter console are listed. Select one or more client OS to view data for the selected client OS in the report.

Client

800

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Filter
Policy

Column

Description

Policy Data Select one or more policy data classification names like Gold, Classification Silver, Bronze etc. to view data for the policies having the Name selected data classiciation names. Policy Keyword Policy Name Policy Type Select one or more policy keyword to view data for the policies having the selected keyword. Select one or more policy names to view data for the selected policies. Select one or more policy types to view data for the selected policy types.

Schedule Schedule Name Job Job Status Job Transport Type Job Type Product Type

Select one or more schedule names to view data for the selected schedule names. Select one or more Job Status like Failed, Missed, Partially Successful etc. to view data for the selected job status in the report. Select one or more transport types like FT, LAN, or Unknown to view data for the jobs that have the selected transport type. Select one or more job types like Archive, Backup, Restore etc. to view data for the selected job types. Select one or more products like Backup Exec, IBM TSM etc. to view data for the selected products.

Example of filter usage: You may run the Week at a Glance report for a specific master server to view backup status for the clients protected by the specific master server. Further if you are interested in knowing about the status of say only Backup jobs (and no other jobs like Restore or archive jobs), you can use the Job Type filter and select Backup. The following enhancements have been made in the Week at a Glance report:

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

801

Report Enhancements

The following report enhancements have been made:

The Week at a Glance report can now show the files and directories that are backed up for each client. The following checkbox has been added on the Modify Display Options pane when you edit the report:

Show the files and directories backed up for each client If you check this option and click Run Report, you can view the client name and the backed up directory in the Client Name column of Week at a Glance report. You can drill down from the Client Name column in the Week at a Glance report to view Week at a Glance Details report. This was also available earlier. Now an additional level of drill down is available from the Week at a Glance Details report. You can now further drill down from the Job Primary ID column in Week at a Glance Details report to view Skip File Details report. The Client Name column in the Week at a Glance report is now sorted by default. Earlier if you selected Rolling 8 days column in the Week Information filter, the Week at a Glance report displayed one day less than VBR. This issue has now been fixed. Filter Enhancements The following filter enhancements are listed: For Week Information filter, the value list for Week of the year column has been updated. The values staring from 17 Weeks Ago to 30 Weeks Ago have been added. Earlier the value selections were limited from current week to 16 Weeks Ago. By selecting these additional values, you can view older data in the report. UNKNOWN has been added as a value for Policy Type column in the Policy filter. You can now filter report data for policy types that are UNKNOWN. In earlier versions of OpsCenter the unknown policy types were shown as blank. Now all static columns like job type, schedule type, policy type, etc. are shown as UNKNOWN like in VBR. Symantec Enterprise Vault and CommVault Galaxy have been removed from the list of values for column Product Type under Job filter. Schedule filter has been added to the list of filters for this report. You can now view report data for jobs that have a specific schedule name.

Week at a Glance Detail report

In the Week at a Glance report, you can drill down from the Client Name column to know the job details that are associated with the client in the selected week.

802

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

You can also click on a job icon to see job details for the selected day for the specific client. Figure 11-43 shows a sample view of the Week at a Glance Details report that is obtained by clicking the Client Name column in Week at a Glance report. Figure 11-43 Week at a Glance Detail report

You can click a Job Primary ID to view skipped file details for the job. A new drilldown report named Skip File Details has been added. The following are details associated with the Week At A Glance Details report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Week at a Glance Details Backup Report > Report Templates > Backup > Status & Success Rate > Week At a Glance (click the Client Name link or any icon) Backup status for the selected client.

Report Purpose

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

803

Supported products

EMC NetWorker, IBM Tivoli Storage Manager, Symantec Backup Exec, NetBackup, NetBackup Master Appliance, NetBackup PureDisk Master Server, Client Tabular Skip File Detail See Skip File Details on page 748.

Applicable View Report Display Drill down report

Can be scheduled Supported export formats Mapping with VBR report

Yes PDF, CSV, TSV, XML, HTML Backups > Status > Week At a Glance > Week at a Glance Details

You can edit the report to show or hide the columns that you are interested in. All the columns are shown by default. You can also filter the report to show jobs for a specific product or master server. The following table shows the filters for Week at a Glance Details report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Master Server

Master Server Select one or more master servers to view data for the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value dropdown list. Media Server Select one or more media servers to view data for the specific media servers in the report. All media servers that are attached to the master servers in the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value dropdown list.. Select one or more clients to view data for the selected clients in the report. All clients that are protected by the master servers in the OpsCenter console are listed. Select one or more client OS to view data for the selected client OS in the report.

Media Server

Client

Client Name Client OS

804

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Filter
Policy

Column

Description

Policy Data Select one or more policy data classification names like Gold, Classification Silver, Bronze etc. to view data for the policies having the Name selected data classiciation names. Policy Keyword Policy Name Policy Type Select one or more policy keywords to view data for the policies having the selected keyword. Select one or more policy names to view data for the selected policies. Select one or more policy types to view data for the selected policy types.

Schedule Schedule/Level Select one or more schedule types like Full, Incremental etc. to Type view data for the selected schedule types. Job Job Status Select one or more Job Status like Failed, Missed, Partially Successful etc. to view data for the selected job status in the Job Transport report. Type Select one or more transport types like FT, LAN, or Unknown Job Type to view data for the jobs that have the selected transport type. Product Type Select one or more job types like Archive, Backup, Restore etc. to view data for the selected job types. Select one or more products like Backup Exec, IBM TSM etc. to view data for the selected products.

Example of filter usage: You may run the Week at a Glance Details report for a specific policy to view backup details for the specific policy. Further if you are interested in knowing about the status of say only Full schedule types, you can use the Schedule filter and select Full. The following enhancements have been made in the Week at a Glance Details report:

The Job Primary ID column in the Week at a Glance Details report is now a link and you can drill down to Skip File Details report. Use the Skip File Details report to view the skipped files that are associated with a job. The Master Server OS column has been removed from the Master Server filter. The Media Server OS column has been removed from the Media Server filter. The Client Architecture column has been removed from the Client filter. The Policy Domain column has been removed from the Policy filter.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

805

The Job Type, Job Transport Type, and Product Type columns have been added to the Job filter. You can now filter this report on the basis of job type, job transport type or product type. The Agent Server and Job State columns have been removed from the Job filter.

Status & Success Rate > Status > Backup Window Failures report
This report lists the jobs which were scheduled to run but failed because the scheduled backup window was no longer open (the NetBackup status code is 196).

Status & Success Rate > Status > Partially Successful Job Details report
This report provides details for all NetBackup partially successful jobs. Partially successful jobs have an exit status of 1. The table in the report is organized by job ID, server name, and client name.

Status & Success Rate > Status > Skipped Files Summary report
The information in this report is presented using a set of linked reports. The main report that is organized by master server, displays clients and policies, and the corresponding number of files that were skipped.
Skipped file details for client report This drilldown report from the Client Name column identifies risks to the client because of any skipped files. This drilldown report uses the run time parameters that are passed from the main report. Skipped file details for policy report This drilldown report from the Policy Name column identifies risks to the client due to any skipped files. This drilldown report uses the run time parameters that are passed from the main report. Skipped file details for policy and client This drilldown report from the No. of Skipped report Files column provides the names of all skipped files. This drilldown report uses the run time parameters that are passed from the main report.

806

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Status & Success Rate > Status > Job Attempt Status Detail report
This report provides information about the completion status for a NetBackup job. The report table provides a count of jobs having a particular status code on a specific day. The table is organized by server name and date. This report was earlier named as Job Exit Status Detail report. A drilldown report is available from the Number of Occurrences column of the table of the main report. This drilldown report shows job details, such as job type and policy name. The table includes all jobs having a particular status code on a given day. Note: This report may provide inaccurate output when a Job ID is reset in NetBackup like for catalog recovery or via manual resetting of the Job ID. In case the Job ID is reset, you must delete the NetBackup master server from the OpsCenter console and add it again. Figure 11-44 shows a sample view of the Job Attempt Status Detail report. Figure 11-44 Job Attempt Status Detail report

The following are details associated with the Job Attempt Status Detail report:

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

807

Report Name Report Category Where to Locate

Job Attempt Status Detail Backup Report > Report Templates > Backup > Status & Success Rate > Status > Job Attempt Status Detail This report shows the successful jobs density over time. NetBackup, NetBackup Appliance Master Server, Client Tabular Yes See Job details by attempt status on page 808.

Report Purpose Supported products Applicable View Report Display Drill down report

Can be scheduled Supported export formats Mapping with NOM report

Yes CSV, HTML, PDF, XML, TSV Standard Reports > Job > Job Attempt Status Detail

The following table shows the filters for Job Attempt Status Detail report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Master Server

Master Server

Select one or more master servers to view data for the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value dropdown list. Select one or more job types like Archive, Backup, Restore etc. to view data for the selected job types.

Job

Job Type

Example of filter usage: You may run the Job Attempt Status Detail report for a specific job type like Backup to view status code details for the backup jobs. The following report enhancements have been made for the Job Attempt Status Detail report:

The unit Years has been added for Relative Timeframe selection. You can now view data for the last x years.

808

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

The option Next has been removed from the drop-down menu for Relative Timeframe. You now cannot enter a relative timeframe like Next 2 weeks. This is because the report does not support any futuristic data. This report was earlier named Job Exit Status Detail. This has been renamed to Job Attempt Status Detail report.

Job details by attempt status

A drilldown report named Job details by attempt status is available when you click the Number of Occurrences column in Job Attempt Status Detail report. This drilldown report shows job details, such as job type and policy name. The table includes all jobs that have a particular status code on a given day. This tabular reports shows job information i.e. Job Type, Job End time etc by its attempt numbers. Figure 11-45 shows a sample view of the Job details by attempt status report. Figure 11-45 Job details by attempt status report

The following are details associated with the Job details by attempt status report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Job details by attempt status Backup Report > Report Templates > Backup > Status & Success Rate > Status > Job Attempt Status Detail (drill down from Number of Occurrences column) > Job details by attempt status

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

809

Report Purpose Supported products Applicable View Report Display Drill down report Can be scheduled Supported export formats Mapping with NOM report

This report shows job information by job attempt. NetBackup, NetBackup Appliance Master Server Tabular No Yes CSV, HTML, PDF, XML, TSV Standard Reports > Job > Job Attempt Status Detail (drill down from Number of Occurrences column) > Job Details By Status for

The following table shows the filters for Job details by attempt status report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Master Server

Master Server

Select one or more master servers to view data for the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value dropdown list. Select one or more job types like Archive, Backup, Restore etc. to view data for the selected job types. Select one or more status codes to view data for the selected status codes.

Job

Job Type Status Code

Example of filter usage: You may run the Job details by attempt status report for a specific job type like Backup to view job attempt details for the backup jobs. The following report enhancements have been made for the Job details by attempt status report:

The unit Years has been added for Relative Timeframe selection. You can now view data for the last x years. The option Next has been removed from the drop-down menu for Relative Timeframe. You now cannot enter a relative timeframe like Next 2 weeks. This is because the report does not support any futuristic data.

810

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Status & Success Rate > Status > Job Details report
This report provides detailed information about NetBackup jobs.

Status & Success Rate > Status > Job Summary by Status report
This report summarizes NetBackup jobs based on the job exit status for a specified time interval. You can use this report to provide trend information. The bar chart shows a count of successful, partially successful, and failed jobs per a given date.

Status & Success Rate > Status > Job Status > Historical report
A Job Status report in red (failure), yellow (partial success) and green (success) displayed in stacked bar format that is grouped by hour, day, week, month, or year across any timeframe. The report is a count of jobs for each of the three outcomes. The simplicity of the presentation helps easily identify both positive and negative trends as well as one-off deviations. For NetBackup environments, the report can also be generated where attempts rather than jobs are counted. In NetBackup, jobs can be configured for x many attempts before a job exits with a status. The report can be filtered across a selection that includes views, backup and media servers, backup level, policies, schedules, transport types, Operating Systems, and business classifications. Figure 11-46 shows a sample view of the Job Status (Historical) report. Figure 11-46 Job Status (Historical) report

The following are details associated with the Job Status (Historical) report:

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

811

Report Name Report Category Where to Locate

Job Status Backup Report > Report Templates > Backup > Status & Success Rate > Status > Job Status This report shows job density over time. NetBackup, NetBackup Master Appliance, EMC NetWorker, IBM Tivoli Storage Manager, Symantec Backup Exec, Symantec NetBackup PureDisk Master Server, Client, Policy Historical No Yes CSV, HTML, PDF, XML, TSV Backup > Status and Success Rate > Status > Job Status

Report Purpose Supported products

Applicable View Report Display Drill down report Can be scheduled Supported export formats Mapping with VBR report

The following table shows the filters for Job Status report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Master Server

Master Server

Select one or more master servers to view data for the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value dropdown list.

Media Server

Media Server Select one or more media servers to view data for the specific media servers in the report. All media servers that are attached to the master servers in the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value dropdown list.. Client Name Client OS Select one or more clients to view data for the selected clients in the report. All clients that are protected by the master servers in the OpsCenter console are listed. Select one or more client OS to view data for the selected client OS in the report.

Client

812

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Filter
Policy

Column

Description

Policy Data Select one or more policy data classification names to view data Classification for the selected policy data classification names. Name Select one or more policy keyword to view data for the policies Policy having the selected keyword. Keyword Select one or more policy names to view data for the selected Policy Name policies. Policy Type Select one or more policy types to view data for the selected policy types.

Schedule Schedule/Level Select one or more schedule types like CINC, Copy, Daily etc. to Type view data for the selected schedule types. Schedule Name Job Job Status Job Transport Type Job Type Select one or more schedule names to view data for the selected schedule names. Select one or more job status like Failed, Successful etc. to view data for the selected job status. Select one or more transport types like FT, LAN, or Unknown to view data for the jobs that have the selected transport type.

By default, Backup jobs are shown in the report. Select one or more job types like Archive, Backup, Restore etc. to view data Product Type for the selected job types. Select one or more backup products to view data for the selected products.

Example of filter usage: You may run the Job Status report for a specific policy to view job counts for the specific policy. Further if you are interested in knowing about the job counts for specific products, you can use the Job filter and under Product Type column, select Backup Exec and EMC NetWorker. The following report enhancements have been made for the Successful Job Count report:

The unit Years has been added for Relative Timeframe selection. You can now view data for the last x years. The option Next has been removed from the drop-down menu for Relative Timeframe. You now cannot enter a relative timeframe like Next 2 weeks. This is because the report does not support any futuristic data. The following options have been removed from TimeFrameGroupBy selection:

Days of week Average Days of week total

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

813

Hours of day Average Hours of day Total Minutes Month of year Average Month of year total Quarter Quarter of year Average Quarter of year total

Symantec Enterprise Vault and CommVault Galaxy have been removed from the list of values for column Product Type under Job filter. The following Report On options have been added under Backup Job Attributes:

Job Status (Complete and Partial only) Job Status (Complete only)

The Schedule Name column is added under the Schedule filter to filter data by schedule name. The report now also shows trendlines with customized average periods. The following option has been added: Show trendline with moving average period of 3. The value can be 1, 2, 3, 7, 14, or 30. The default value is 3. Select Show trendline with moving average checkbox and use the drop-down list to specify the number of data points to factor into the average. At each interval on the graph, the trendline shows a moving average of the most recent data points. Example: 3 displays a trendline that, at each interval, shows the average of the current data point and the two previous data points. UNKNOWN has been added as a value for Policy Type column in the Policy filter. You can now filter report data for policy types that are UNKNOWN. In earlier versions of OpsCenter the unknown policy types were shown as blank. Now all static columns like job type, schedule type, policy type, etc. are shown as UNKNOWN like in VBR

Status & Success Rate > Status > Job Status > Distribution report
A job status report in red (failure), yellow (partial success) and green (success) displayed in pie chart format. The report is a count of jobs for each of the three outcomes. The main use cases of the report are typically short-term verification

814

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

(i.e. last 24 48 hours) of backup job status and long term (i.e. 1+ months) management level reporting requiring high-level status summaries. The report can be filtered across a selection that includes views, backup and media servers, backup level, policies, schedules, transport types, Operating Systems, and business classifications. Figure 11-47 shows a sample view of the Job Status (Distribution) report. Figure 11-47 Job Status (Distribution) report

The following are details associated with the Job Status (Distribution) report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Job Status Backup Report > Report Templates > Backup > Status & Success Rate > Status > Job Status This report shows job density over time. NetBackup, NetBackup Master Appliance, EMC NetWorker, IBM Tivoli Storage Manager, Symantec Backup Exec, Symantec NetBackup PureDisk Master Server, Client, Policy Distribution No

Report Purpose Supported products

Applicable View Report Display Drill down report

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

815

Can be scheduled Supported export formats Mapping with VBR report

Yes CSV, HTML, PDF, XML, TSV Backup > Status and Success Rate > Status > Job Status

The following table shows the filters for Job Status report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Master Server

Master Server

Select one or more master servers to view data for the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value dropdown list.

Media Server

Media Server Select one or more media servers to view data for the specific media servers in the report. All media servers that are attached to the master servers in the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value dropdown list.. Client Name Client OS Select one or more clients to view data for the selected clients in the report. All clients that are protected by the master servers in the OpsCenter console are listed. Select one or more client OS to view data for the selected client OS in the report.

Client

Policy

Policy Data Select one or more policy data classification names to view data Classification for the selected policy data classification names. Name Select one or more policy keyword to view data for the policies Policy having the selected keyword. Keyword Select one or more policy names to view data for the selected Policy Name policies. Policy Type Select one or more policy types to view data for the selected policy types.

Schedule Schedule/Level Select one or more schedule types like CINC, Copy, Daily etc. to Type view data for the selected schedule types. Schedule Name Select one or more schedule names to view data for the selected schedule names.

816

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Filter
Job

Column
Job Status Job Transport Type Job Type

Description
Select one or more job status like Failed, Successful etc. to view data for the selected job status. Select one or more transport types like FT, LAN, or Unknown to view data for the jobs that have the selected transport type.

Select one or more job types like Archive, Backup, Restore etc. to view data for the selected job types. By default, only Backup Product Type is selected. Select one or more backup products to view data for the selected products.

Example of filter usage: You may run the Job Status report for a specific policy to view job counts for the specific policy. Further if you are interested in knowing about the job counts per job status for specific products, you can use the Job filter and under Product Type column, select Backup Exec and EMC NetWorker. The following report enhancements have been made for the Successful Job Count report:

The unit Years has been added for Relative Timeframe selection. You can now view data for the last x years. The option Next has been removed from the drop-down menu for Relative Timeframe. You now cannot enter a relative timeframe like Next 2 weeks. This is because the report does not support any futuristic data. The following options have been removed from TimeFrameGroupBy selection:

Days of week Average Days of week total Hours of day Average Hours of day Total Minutes Month of year Average Month of year total Quarter Quarter of year Average Quarter of year total

Symantec Enterprise Vault and CommVault Galaxy have been removed from the list of values for column Product Type under Job filter.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

817

The following Report On options have been added under Backup Job Attributes:

Job Status (Complete and Partial only) Job Status (Complete only)

The Schedule Name column is added under the Schedule filter to filter data by schedule name. UNKNOWN has been added as a value for Policy Type column in the Policy filter. You can now filter report data for policy types that are UNKNOWN. In earlier versions of OpsCenter the unknown policy types were shown as blank. Now all static columns like job type, schedule type, policy type, etc. are shown as UNKNOWN like in VBR

Status & Success Rate > Success Rate > Success Rate All Jobs report
This last of the single-line success rate reports give the highest number since it shows at least one success per client stream. Meaning as long as one job is successful despite any number of retries, it is a 100% success. This report typically shows overall exposure to someone outside the backup team. A 100% on this report indicates that everything was backed up even though it may have taken a number of retries. Figure 11-48 shows a sample view of the Success Rate-All Jobs report.

818

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Figure 11-48

Success Rate All Jobs report

The following are details associated with the Success Rate All Jobs report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Success Rate - All Jobs Backup Report > Report Templates > Backup > Status & Success Rate > Success Rate > Success Rate - All Jobs This report shows the Success rate by job level across products, domains, clients, policies and business level views. NetBackup, NetBackup Appliance, Backup Exec, NetBackup PureDisk, EMC NetWorker, IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Master Server, Client

Report Purpose

Supported products

Applicable View

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

819

Report Display Drill down report Can be scheduled Supported export formats Mapping with VBR report

Historical (Chart) No Yes CSV, HTML, PDF, XML, TSV Backups > Success Rate > Success Rate - At Least 1 Success Per Client

The following table shows the filters for Success Rate All Jobs report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Master Server

Master Server

Select one or more master servers to view data for the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value dropdown list.

Media Server

Media Server Select one or more media servers to view data for the specific media servers in the report. All media servers that are attached to the master servers in the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value dropdown list.. Client Name Client OS Select one or more clients to view data for the selected clients in the report. All clients that are protected by the master servers in the OpsCenter console are listed. Select one or more client OS to view data for the selected client OS in the report.

Client

Policy

Policy Data Select one or more policy data classification names to view data Classification for the selected policy data classification names. Name Select one or more policy keyword to view data for the policies Policy having the selected keyword. Keyword Select one or more policy names to view data for the selected Policy Name policies. Policy Type Select one or more policy types to view data for the selected policy types.

820

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Filter

Column

Description

Schedule Schedule/Level Select one or more schedule types like CINC, Copy, Daily etc. to Type view data for the selected schedule types. Schedule Name Job Job Status Job Transport Type Job Type Product Type Select one or more schedule names to view data for the selected schedule names. Select one or more Job Status like Failed, Missed, Partially Successful etc. to view data for the selected job status in the report. Select one or more transport types like FT, LAN, or Unknown to view data for the jobs that have the selected transport type. The value selection for Job Type is mandatory. By default, Backup jobs are shown in the report. You can select one or more job types like Archive, Backup, Restore etc. to view data for the selected job types. Select one or more backup products to view data for the selected products. Success Rate Consider Partially Successful Job as Successful The default selection is Yes. Select No if you do not want to consider partially successful jobs as successful. Selecting Yes or No may impact the Success Rate percentage that is shown in the report. Consider a policy that has 5 successful jobs, 3 partially successful jobs, and 2 failed jobs. If you select the value as Yes, the Success Rate is 80%. However if you select the value as No, the Success Rate is 50%.

Example of filter usage: Run the Success Rate - All Jobs report for a specific product like Backup Exec to get an idea of the success rate for Backup Exec jobs. The following report enhancements have been made for Success Rate All Jobs report:

The option Next has been removed from the drop-down menu for Relative Timeframe. You now cannot enter a relative timeframe like Next 2 weeks. This is because the report does not support any futuristic data. The following options have been removed from TimeFrameGroupBy selection:

Days of week Average Days of week total Hours of day Average Hours of day Total

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

821

Minutes Month of year Average Month of year total Quarter Quarter of year Average Quarter of year total

Symantec Enterprise Vault and CommVault Galaxy have been removed from the list of values for column ProductType under Job filter. The following Report On options have been added under Backup Job Attributes:

Job Status (Complete and Partial only) Job Status (Complete only)

Two new filters called Schedule and Success Rate have been added. A new checkbox named Target Performance has been added in the Modify Display Options page under Timeline Chart Properties. You can use the Target Performance option to specify where a report draws the target line, with which you can compare the actual performance shown. The Target Performance option allows you to specify the target for Y1 axis. In case you set a value of say 100 for Y1 axis and run the report, you will see a straight line parallel to X-axis and the value as 100 on Y1 axis. Using this option, you can easily compare the actual performance with the target performance.

Status & Success Rate > Success Rate > Advanced Success Rate report
This report uses the advanced success or the failure calculation logic around the notion of first, all and last job. It collects all information around both successes and failures and presents the results that are grouped by (day or month) timeframe for either client or the job success rate. Client success rate is a count of successful clients where all policies that are defined to the client must be successful to declare the client successful. Thus a client is either 0% or 100% and no intermediate state. Job success rate is derived from all jobs and separated out by first, all and last and a specific client can have a job success rate that can range between 0% and 100%. End-user and customer typically get Last Job Success for job and client whereas backup architects and administrators examine all three. These reports work well with views and can be reported on at any level with robust filtering capabilities. This report simply aggregates jobs according to success rate and shows these across a timeline. It can be reported on against views and view levels, along with any of the key backup infrastructure components (master server etc) and attributes

822

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

(policy, policy, job etc). Filtering is available on all components and attributes. The primary use case of the report is verification of trends and the days that are exception to the norm. The report is highly effective for presenting long-term tabular data on one of the most fundamental metrics of managing a backup operation. Figure 11-49 shows a sample view of the Advanced Success Rate report. Figure 11-49 Advanced Success Rate report

The following are details associated with the Advanced Success Rate report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Advanced Success Rate Backup Report > Report Templates > Backup > Status & Success Rate > Success Rate > Advanced Success Rate This report shows the master server, number of backups that were successful and failed, the success rate and total amount processed for each day. NetBackup, NetBackup Appliance, Backup Exec, NetBackup PureDisk, EMC NetWorker, IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Master Server, Client Tabular

Report Purpose

Supported products

Applicable View Report Display

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

823

Drill down report Can be scheduled Supported export formats Mapping with VBR report

No Yes CSV, HTML, PDF, XML, TSV Backups > Status > Daily Summary of Backup Activity

The following table shows the filters for Advanced Success Rate report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Master Server

Master Server

Select one or more master servers to view data for the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value dropdown list. Select one or more policy names to view data for the selected policies. You can select one or more job types like Archive, Backup, Restore etc. to view data for the selected job types. By default, Backup jobs are shown in the report. Select one or more status codes to view data for the selected status codes.

Policy

Policy Name

Job

Job Type Status Code

824

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Filter
Success Rate

Column
Aggregation Level Full Days

Description
Select Aggregation Level to consider the kind of jobs for the specified time frame. For example, if you select First Job Success Rate then the report shows only the first job for the combination of master, client, policy, and schedule.

Full Window Select Full Days to specify the list of days to be considered for Parameter Full backups. Metric Type Select Full Window Parameter to specify the start time for the Full for full backup window. Duration of Select Metric Type to calculate the success rate based on clients (In Hours) or jobs. Increment Select Full for Duration of (In Hours) to calculate the end time Days for the incremental backup window. Backup window end time Increment is equal to the duration from the start time of the backup Window window. Parameter Select Increment Days to specify the list of days to be considered Increment for Incremental backups. for Duration Select Increment Window Parameter to specify the start time of (In Hours) for the incremental backup window. Consider Select Increment for Duration of (In Hours) to calculate the Partially end time for the incremental backup window. Backup window Successful end time is equal to the duration from the start time of the Job as backup window. Successful Select Count Partially Successful Job as Successful to count partially successful jobs as successful while calculating the Success Rate.

Example of filter usage: Run the Advanced Success Rate report for a one week timeframe and for a single master server. The default Relative Timeframe is now changed to Previous 15 days. Earlier the report showed data for the Previous 14 days by default.

Status & Success Rate > Success Rate > Success Rate - All Attempts report
This report shows success rate as it is aggregated at the attempt ( try) level. Jobs can be configured for x many attempts before exiting with a status. If for example the attempt setting is two and success is attained on the second attempt, this translates into a 50% attempt rate and 100% job success rate. This metric is only supported for backup applications in which attempt level data is available. A target line is also supported providing for an effective visual presentation on when the

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

825

target is exceeded. It can be reported on against any view or level within a view along with any of the key backup infrastructure components (backup server, media server) and attributes (policy, policy type, schedule, OS, product, transport type). Filtering is available on all components and attributes. Main use case is long-term historical data on one of the key performance indicators. Figure 11-50 shows a sample view of the Success Rate All Attempts report. Figure 11-50 Success Rate All Attempts report

The following are details associated with the Success Rate All Attempts report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Success Rate - All Attempts Backup Report > Report Templates > Backup > Status & Success Rate > Success Rate > Success Rate - All Attempts

826

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Report Purpose

This report shows the success rate by all job attempt level across products, domains, clients, policies and business level views. NetBackup, NetBackup Appliance, Backup Exec, NetBackup PureDisk, EMC NetWorker, IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Master Server, Client Historical (Chart) No Yes CSV, HTML, PDF, XML, TSV Backups > Success Rate > Success Rate - All Attempts

Supported products

Applicable View Report Display Drill down report Can be scheduled Supported export formats Mapping with VBR report

The following table shows the filters for Success Rate All Attempts report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Master Server

Master Server

Select one or more master servers to view data for the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value dropdown list.

Media Server

Media Server Select one or more media servers to view data for the specific media servers in the report. All media servers that are attached to the master servers in the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value dropdown list.. Client Name Client OS Select one or more clients to view data for the selected clients in the report. All clients that are protected by the master servers in the OpsCenter console are listed. Select one or more client OS to view data for the selected client OS in the report.

Client

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

827

Filter
Policy

Column

Description

Policy Data Select one or more policy data classification names to view data Classification for the selected policy data classification names. Name Select one or more policy keyword to view data for the policies Policy having the selected keyword. Keyword Select one or more policy names to view data for the selected Policy Name policies. Policy Type Select one or more policy types to view data for the selected policy types.

Schedule Schedule/Level Select one or more schedule types like CINC, Copy, Daily etc. to Type view data for the selected schedule types. Schedule Name Job Job Status Job Transport Type Job Type Product Type Select one or more schedule names to view data for the selected schedule names. Select one or more Job Status like Failed, Missed, Partially Successful etc. to view data for the selected job status in the report. Select one or more transport types like FT, LAN, or Unknown to view data for the jobs that have the selected transport type. The value selection for Job Type is mandatory. By default, Backup jobs are shown in the report. You can select one or more job types like Archive, Backup, Restore etc. to view data for the selected job types. Select one or more backup products to view data for the selected products. Success Rate Consider Partially Successful Job as Successful The default selection is Yes. Select No if you do not want to consider partially successful jobs as successful. Selecting Yes or No may impact the Success Rate percentage that is shown in the report. Consider a policy that has 5 successful jobs, 3 partially successful jobs, and 2 failed jobs for all job attempts. If you select the value as Yes, the Success Rate is 80%. However if you select the value as No, the Success Rate is 50%.

Examples of filter usage: You can run this report for a few master servers for which you want to view the success rate for all attempts. The following report enhancements have been made for Success Rate - All Attempts report:

828

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

The unit Years has been added for Relative Timeframe selection. You can now view data for the last x years. The option Next has been removed from the drop-down menu for Relative Timeframe. You now cannot enter a relative timeframe like Next 2 weeks. This is because the report does not support any futuristic data. The following options have been removed from TimeFrameGroupBy selection:

Days of week Average Days of week total Hours of day Average Hours of day Total Minutes Month of year Average Month of year total Quarter Quarter of year Average Quarter of year total

Symantec Enterprise Vault and CommVault Galaxy have been removed from the list of values for column Product Type under Job filter. The following Report On options have been added under Backup Job Attributes:

Job Status (Complete and Partial only) Job Status (Complete only)

Two new filters called Schedule and Success Rate have been added. A new checkbox named Target Performance has been added in the Modify Display Options page under Timeline Chart Properties. You can use the Target Performance option to specify where a report draws the target line, with which you can compare the actual performance shown. The Target Performance option allows you to specify the target for Y1 axis. In case you set a value of say 100 for Y1 axis and run the report, you will see a straight line parallel to X-axis and the value as 100 on Y1 axis. Using this option, you can easily compare the actual performance with the target performance.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

829

Status & Success Rate > Success Rate > Success Rate - First Attempt report
This report shows success rate as it is aggregated at the attempt (known as try) level. Specifically, it zooms in on the measurement of the first attempt for each job. Jobs can be configured for x many attempts before you exit with a status. If for example the attempt setting is two and success is attained on the second attempt, this data translates into a 50% All Attempt rate and 0% First Attempt rate and 100% job success rate. This metric is only supported for backup applications in which attempt level data is available. A target line is also supported providing for an effective visual presentation on when the target is exceeded. Filtering is available on all components and attributes. Main use case is to use this report and the All Attempts report together to see how often success is attained on the first attempt as opposed to second, third etc. attempts. Figure 11-51 shows a sample view of Success Rate - First Attempt report. Figure 11-51 Success Rate - First Attempt report

830

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

The following are details associated with the Success Rate First Attempt report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Success Rate - First Attempt Backup Report > Report Templates > Backup > Status & Success Rate > Success Rate > Success Rate - First Attempt This report shows the success rate by first job attempt level across products, domains, clients, policies and business level views. NetBackup, NetBackup Master Appliance, Backup Exec, NetBackup PureDisk, EMC NetWorker, IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Master Server, Client Historical (Chart) No Yes CSV, HTML, PDF, XML, TSV Backups > Success Rate > Success Rate - First Attempt

Report Purpose

Supported products

Applicable View Report Display Drill down report Can be scheduled Supported export formats Mapping with VBR report

The following table shows the filters for Success Rate First Attempt report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Master Server

Master Server

Select one or more master servers to view data for the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value dropdown list.

Media Server

Media Server Select one or more media servers to view data for the specific media servers in the report. All media servers that are attached to the master servers in the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value dropdown list..

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

831

Filter
Client

Column
Client Name Client OS

Description
Select one or more clients to view data for the selected clients in the report. All clients that are protected by the master servers in the OpsCenter console are listed. Select one or more client OS to view data for the selected client OS in the report.

Policy

Policy Data Select one or more policy data classification names to view data Classification for the selected policy data classification names. Name Select one or more policy keyword to view data for the policies Policy having the selected keyword. Keyword Select one or more policy names to view data for the selected Policy Name policies. Policy Type Select one or more policy types to view data for the selected policy types.

Schedule Schedule/Level Select one or more schedule types like CINC, Copy, Daily etc. to Type view data for the selected schedule types. Schedule Name Job Job Status Job Transport Type Job Type Product Type Select one or more schedule names to view data for the selected schedule names. Select one or more Job Status like Failed, Missed, Partially Successful etc. to view data for the selected job status in the report. Select one or more transport types like FT, LAN, or Unknown to view data for the jobs that have the selected transport type. The value selection for Job Type is mandatory. By default, Backup jobs are shown in the report. You can select one or more job types like Archive, Backup, Restore etc. to view data for the selected job types. Select one or more backup products to view data for the selected products. Success Rate Consider Partially Successful Job as Successful The default selection is Yes. Select No if you do not want to consider partially successful jobs as successful. Selecting Yes or No may impact the Success Rate percentage that is shown in the report. Consider a policy that has 5 successful jobs, 3 partially successful jobs, and 2 failed jobs for the first job attempt. If you select the value as Yes, the Success Rate is 80%. However if you select the value as No, the Success Rate is 50%.

832

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Examples of filter usage: You can run this report for a few master servers for which you want to view the success rate for the first attempt. The following report enhancements have been made for Success Rate - First Attempt report:

The unit Years has been added for Relative Timeframe selection. You can now view data for the last x years. The option Next has been removed from the drop-down menu for Relative Timeframe. You now cannot enter a relative timeframe like Next 2 weeks. This is because the report does not support any futuristic data. The following options have been removed from TimeFrameGroupBy selection:

Days of week Average Days of week total Hours of day Average Hours of day Total Minutes Month of year Average Month of year total Quarter Quarter of year Average Quarter of year total

Symantec Enterprise Vault and CommVault Galaxy have been removed from the list of values for column Product Type under Job filter. The following Report On options have been added under Backup Job Attributes:

Job Status (Complete and Partial only) Job Status (Complete only)

Two new filters called Schedule and Success Rate have been added. A new checkbox named Target Performance has been added in the Modify Display Options page under Timeline Chart Properties. You can use the Target Performance option to specify where a report draws the target line, with which you can compare the actual performance shown. The Target Performance option allows you to specify the target for Y1 axis. In case you set a value of say 100 for Y1 axis and run the report, you will see a straight line parallel to X-axis and the value as 100 on Y1 axis. Using this option, you can easily compare the actual performance with the target performance.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

833

About Catalog reports in OpsCenter

This section describes catalog reports.

Cold catalog backup report

This report shows the count of cold NetBackup catalog backups and information about the media that NetBackup uses for offline backups. Tool tips in the bar chart show the report name and backup count. The table in the report also lists the media that NetBackup uses for the backups for each master server.

About Chargeback reports in OpsCenter

This section provides descriptions of chargeback reports.
Deduplication Chargeback report See Deduplication Chargeback report on page 833. See Cost Tabular report on page 838. See Backup Chargeback report on page 838.

Cost Tabular report Chargeback report

Deduplication Chargeback report

This report shows the savings that is achieved because of the deduplication technology. To generate this report, you first need to have a cost variable of Protected Job Size. The deduplication technology can identify files and the data segments that contain identical data and treats them as a single instance of the file, which it backs up only once. For example, PureDisk has backed up 100 MB data , in which 20 MB of data is duplicate or identical. PureDisk protects the same data but eliminates the duplicity using deduplication. Therefore, the data that is protected is 100 MB, but the actual data that is backed up by PureDisk is 80 MB, as 20 MB of data is duplicate data. This results in saving 20 MB of data. You can generate the Deduplication Chargeback report that shows the amount you have saved using deduplication. The Deduplication Chargeback report is available in Distribution, Historical, and Ranking views. Figure 11-52 shows a sample distribution view of the Deduplication Chargeback report.

834

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Figure 11-52

Deduplication Chargeback - Distribution view

Figure 11-53 shows a sample historical view of the Deduplication chargeback report.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

835

Figure 11-53

Deduplication Chargeback - Historical View

Figure 11-54 shows a sample ranking view of the Deduplication chargeback report.

836

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Figure 11-54

Deduplication Chargeback - Ranking View

The following are details associated with the Deduplication Chargeback Report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Deduplication Chargeback Report Chargeback Reports Report > Report Templates > Chargeback > Deduplication Chargeback Report This report shows the savings that is achieved because of the deduplication technology. NetBackup, NetBackup Appliance, Backup Exec, NetBackup PureDisk, EMC NetWorker, IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Master Server, Client Distribution, Historical, and Ranking No Yes CSV, HTML, PDF, XML, TSV Costs > Saving Reports

Report Purpose

Supported products

Applicable View Report Display Drill down report Can be scheduled Supported export formats Mapping with VBR report

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

837

The following table shows the filters for Deduplication Chargeback report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Master Server

Master Server

Select one or more master servers to view data for the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value dropdown list.

Example of filter usage: Run the Deduplication chargeback report for a specific master server to view the cost savings for the specific master server. The following report enhancements have been made for Deduplication Chargeback report:

The unit Years has been added for Relative Timeframe selection. You can now view data for the last x years. The option Next has been removed from the drop-down menu for Relative Timeframe. You now cannot enter a relative timeframe like Next 2 weeks. This is because the report does not support any futuristic data. The following options have been removed from TimeFrameGroupBy selection:

Days of week Average Days of week total Hours of day Average Hours of day Total Minutes Month of year Average Month of year total Quarter Quarter of year Average Quarter of year total

The following Report On options have been added under Backup Job Attributes:

Job Status (Complete and Partial only) Job Status (Complete only)

The Master Server Operating system filter has been removed.

838

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

The following Report On options have been removed:

Backup Image Copy Is Currently Expired Backup Image Copy Media Server Backup Image Encryption State Backup Image Fragment Is Currently Expired Backup Image Is Currently Expired Backup Image Type Data Classification Master Server Data Classification Name

Cost Tabular report

This report shows the chargeback of your backup services in a tabular form. OpsCenter provides organizations with a tool to evaluate the cost of the IT services they consume, which is called Chargeback. You can create cost variables and the formulas that enable you to run the reports that show costs of backup services. To generate the Cost report you need to have a cost formula created.

Backup Chargeback report

This report shows the chargeback of your backup services in Historical and Ranking views. You need to have a cost formula created to generate this report. Figure 11-55 shows a sample Historical view of the Backup Chargeback report:

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

839

Figure 11-55

Backup Chargeback report - Historical View

Figure 11-56 shows a sample Rankings view of the Backup Chargeback report.

840

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Figure 11-56

Backup Chargeback report - Rankings view

The following are details associated with the Backup Chargeback Report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Backup Chargeback Report Chargeback Reports Report > Report Templates > Chargeback > Backup Chargeback Report This report shows the chargeback of your backup services. NetBackup, NetBackup Appliance, Backup Exec, NetBackup PureDisk, EMC NetWorker, IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Master Server, Client Historical, Ranking

Report Purpose Supported products

Applicable View Report Display

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

841

Drill down report Can be scheduled Supported export formats Mapping with VBR report

No Yes CSV, HTML, PDF, XML, TSV Costs > Cost Reports

The following table shows the filters for Backup Chargeback report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Master Server

Master Server

Select one or more master servers to view data for the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value dropdown list.

Example of filter usage: Run the Backup Chargeback report for a specific master server to view the cost savings for the specific master server The following report enhancements have been made for Backup Chargeback report:

The option Next has been removed from the drop-down menu for Relative Timeframe. You now cannot enter a relative timeframe like Next 2 weeks. The following options have been removed from Time Frame Group By selection:

Days of week Average Days of week total Hours of day Average Hours of day Total Minutes Month of year Average Month of year total Quarter Quarter of year Average Quarter of year total

The unit Years has been added for Relative Timeframe selection. You can now view data for the last x years.

842

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

The following Report On options have been added under Backup Job Attributes:

Job Status (Complete and Partial only) Job Status (Complete only) Backup Image Copy Is Currently Expired Backup Image Copy Media Server Backup Image Encryption State Backup Image Fragment Is Currently Expired Backup Image Is Currently Expired Backup Image Type Data Classification Master Server Data Classification Name

The following Report On options have been removed:

The Master Server Operating System filter has been removed.

About Client reports in OpsCenter

This section describes client reports.
Risk Analysis > Client Risk Analysis See Risk Analysis > Client Risk Analysis report on page 843. See Risk Analysis > Client Coverage report on page 846. See Risk Analysis > Recovery Point Objective report on page 853. See Clients Not Backed up report on page 857. See Virtual Client Summary report on page 859. See Job Success by Client report on page 864. See Client summary dashboard report on page 870. See Client Restore report on page 872.

Risk Analysis > Client Coverage

Risk Analysis > Recovery Point Objective

About clients not backed up report

Virtual Client Summary

About job success by client report

About client summary dashboard report

About client restore report

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

843

About BMR client configuration backup failures report About jobs by application report

See BMR client configuration backup failures report on page 873. See Jobs by application report on page 873.

Risk Analysis > Client Risk Analysis report

This report identifies the backup clients that have gone without a successful backup for a specified period of time and hence are at risk from a restore standpoint or recoverability standpoint. The specified period of time is userdefined along with several other variables for filtering purposes. The report is interpreted as all client or policy combinations that have gone x hours, days, weeks, or months without a successful backup. The level of granularity is at a client level or policy level and exposes the clients that have multiple backup policies where one of them may repeatedly fail. The primary use case is to show that all clients have been backed up as of the last x hours and all clients have a full backup not more than x days ago. The report also has an Is Active filter to include only those that are currently active as well as the capability to count partial successes as success and vice versa. Figure 11-57 shows a sample view of the Client Risk Analysis report.

844

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Figure 11-57

Client Risk Analysis report

The following are details associated with the Client Risk Analysis Report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Client Risk Analysis Report Client Reports Report > Report Templates > Client Reports > Client Risk Analysis Report

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

845

Report Purpose

The report takes a look at all of the clients configured and determines if the client has had a full successful backup in the time frame specified. If not, it will be called out as a Risk so that action can be taken to get a successful full backup. NetBackup, NetBackup Appliance, Backup Exec, NetBackup PureDisk, EMC NetWorker, IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Master Server, Client Tabular No Yes CSV, HTML, PDF, XML, TSV Backups > Risk Analysis > Client Risk Analysis

Supported products

Applicable View Report Display Drill down report Can be scheduled Supported export formats Mapping with VBR report

The following table shows the filters for Client Risk Analysis report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Master Server

Master Server

Select one or more master servers to view data for the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value dropdown list. The default selection is Yes. By default, active clients are displayed in the report. Hence the clients that are not actively backed up are omitted by default. Select No if you want to view the report for all the clients.

Client

Client is Active

Schedule Schedule/Level Select one or more schedule types like Full, Incremental etc. to Type view data for the selected schedule types. Job Job Status Select a Job Status like Successful or Partially Successful or both to view data for the selected job status in the report.

Example of filter usage: Run the Client Risk Analysis report to include all clients (both active and non-active) by selecting Client is Active as No. The following enhancements have been made in the Client Risk Analysis report:

The unit Years has been added for Relative Timeframe selection. You can now view data for the last x years.

846

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

The option Next has been removed from the drop-down menu for Relative Timeframe. You now cannot enter a relative timeframe like Next 2 weeks. Earlier there was a Host filter with Host is Active column. The Host filter has been removed. The Host is Active column is now renamed as Client is Active column and exists under the Client filter. The default value of Client is Active column is Yes. The default value of Job Status column under Job filter has been changed to Successful.

Risk Analysis > Client Coverage report

This is a report where a .CSV file can be imported and compared to the existing backup solution to determine if there are systems that are not being protected correctly. The purpose of this report is to show what hosts are not backed up because the backup application is not even aware of them. The report compares what OpsCenter hosts are known to be backed up with an external list that is fed in by .csv file. The list can come from a content management database (CMDB), DNS listings or any other authoritative source of what hosts should be backed up. The report works across all backup applications and shows you what backup application and policy executed the backup and the time of the last full or incremental backup. The Client Coverage report tells you whether all clients in your environment are being backed up or not. OpsCenter can only report on clients that have already been defined and configured for backups. This report helps you to identify the clients that are a part of your environment but are not known to OpsCenter. These clients may not be getting backed up because of backup software not being installed or the clients not being configured for backups. To run this report, you must specify a CSV file (comma-separated value) that contains a complete and authoritative inventory of all servers across the enterprise. Some of the independent sources of server inventory across the enterprise which can be used to generate a CSV file are the following:

Configuration Management Database (CMDB) Asset Management System Domain Name System (DNS) Homegrown databases Spreadsheet

OpsCenter imports data from the CSV file and compares the list of clients (available in CSV) with the clients known to OpsCenter. The clients which are present in CSV but not in OpsCenter can be easily identified from this report.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

847

Figure 11-58 shows a sample view of the Client Coverage report. Figure 11-58 Client Coverage report

Note: The CSV file must be located on the machine from where you are running the Client Coverage report. See About comparison of clients listed in CSV and OpsCenter on page 852. for more information on how the comparison takes place. The following table provides details on each column that is displayed in the report:
External Client Name of the client that appears in the CSV file.

Note: A client may be known by multiple names and all the names
may be documented in the CSV file. The name that appears in the External Client column is the first name that is documented in the CSV file. For example, if a CSV file lists multiple names for a client such as, myhost, myhost.symantec.com, myhost.veritas.com, then myhost appears in the External Client column. Backed Up Client Name of the backed up client in OpsCenter

848

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Message

The result of comparison. The following are the possible messages:

Match - Direct Match - FQDN vs. Short name In External List And Not In Backup

The Client Coverage report helps you to identify these clients which are present in your environment but are not known to OpsCenter. You must verify if these clients are being backed up. See About comparison of clients listed in CSV and OpsCenter on page 852. Product A list of backup products used for backing up the client, such as, NetBackup, Backup Exec, or Tivoli Storage Manager. The backup policy associated with the client when the last full backup was successful

Policy Full Name

Last Full Job Time This is the time when the last full backup was successful for the specific client. Incremental Policy The backup policy associated with the client when the last incremental backup was successful. Last Incremental Job Time This is the time when the last incremental backup was successful for the specific client.

The following are details associated with the Client Coverage report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Client Coverage Client Report > Report Templates > Client Reports > Risk Analysis > Client Coverage This report shows a comparison of the list of clients being backed up against an independently-sourced list (like CMDB, third party and homegrown asset management systems) of clients. Symantec NetBackup, Symantec NetBackup Master Appliance, Backup Exec, NetBackup PureDisk, EMC NetWorker, IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Client Tabular

Report Purpose

Supported products

Applicable View Report Display

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

849

Drill down report Can be scheduled Supported export formats Mapping with VBR report

No No PDF, CSV, TSV, HTML, XML Backups > Risk Analysis > Client Risk Analysis > Client Coverage

The following table shows the filters for Client Coverage report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report.
View Selection Select a view from the Select View Name drop-down list. This can be done to view the report for a specific location, department etc. In case you select a specific view, you must create the CSV file that contains the clients in the particular view only. For example, if you want to see the Client Coverage report for HR department in Canada, then the CSV file must contain the client list specific to the HR department in Canada.

Additional Parameters

850

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Client Selection Criteria

All: This is selected by default. Comparison results for all the clients are displayed. In External List And Not In Backup: Select this option if you want to view the clients that are present in your environment but are not known to OpsCenter. You must verify if these clients are being backed up. In Backup And Not In External List: Select this option if you want to view the clients that are known to OpsCenter but not present in the CSV file. This may be due to several reasons like machine not being available in the network or machine not registered in the DNS, and so on. Match (Direct): Select this option if you want to view the clients for which host name in CSV is exactly the same as the host name in OpsCenter. For example, myhost.symantec.com in CSV and myhost.symantec.com in OpsCenter. Match (FQDN vs. Short Name): Select this option if you want to view the clients for which the host name is an FQDN in CSV and a short name in OpsCenter or a short name in CSV and an FQDN in OpsCenter. For example, if the CSV file contains myhost.veritas.com and OpsCenter contains myhost, then the comparison result is Match - FQDN vs. Short Name. Similarly, if the CSV file contains myhost and OpsCenter contains myhost.veritas.com, then the client is displayed in the report.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

851

Wild Card

You can specify a part of the backed up client name so that the report shows data only for the specific backed up clients that are of your interest. For example, to see details of all backed up servers running Oracle which are known to have a string "ora" somewhere in the host name, you can type the following:

%ora% - Include or exclude all backed up clients with ora' anywhere in the host name ora - Include or exclude all backed up clients named ora. ora% - Include or exclude all backed up clients whose names start with ora. %ora - Include or exclude all backed up clients whose names end with ora. Similarly, you can specify multiple search strings as follows: %ora%, %syb% - Include or exclude all OpsCenter hosts with Ora or Syb anywhere in the backed up client name.

Note: This search is applicable only for

Backed up clients and not the External Clients.

Note: The search is not case-sensitive. For

example, if you search for Ora, you may find results like ora, Ora, oRa, and so on. Display Options Type a report description. Select the number of rows you want displayed on a single page.

Example of filter usage: To view details of all backed up servers running VMWare that are known to have 'vm' somewhere in the host name, type %vm% in the Wild Card text box.

About CSV formats

The CSV file required as an input to the Client Coverage report can be created using a text editor or Microsoft Excel application. A typical CSV file format is as follows: Host1_name1,Host1_name2,Host1_name3,Host1_name4

852

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Host2 Host3 Note: Host1_name1,Host1_name2,Host1_name3,Host1_name4 are multiple names of the same machine. Multiple names for the same machine may exist due to many reasons like because of a machine having multiple Network Interface Cards etc.

Note: Each host machine exists in a new line. For example, Host1, Host2, and Host3 all exist in three separate lines. Here is a sample CSV format: css-bin3,css-bin3.symantec.com macy.symantec.com,macy,macy.veritas.com css-bin10.symantec.com Note: There is no space after the comma in the CSV file.

About comparison of clients listed in CSV and OpsCenter

OpsCenter imports data from the CSV file and compares the list of clients (available in CSV) with the clients known to OpsCenter. The Client Coverage report shows any or all of the following outcomes after comparison:

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

853

Client is in External Client and Backed Up Client list

This means that a client exists in both the CSV file and OpsCenter database.

Note: In case multiple names for a system are present in CSV and
OpsCenter, then all the names present in CSV are compared with each name in OpsCenter till a match is obtained. The comparison results in this case may be one of the following: Match - Direct: This happens when the host name in CSV is exactly the same as the host name in OpsCenter. For example, myhost.symantec.com in CSV and myhost.symantec.com in OpsCenter. Match - FQDN vs. Short Name: This happens when the host name is an FQDN in CSV and a short name in OpsCenter or a short name in CSV and an FQDN in OpsCenter. For example, if the CSV file contains myhost.veritas.com and OpsCenter contains myhost, then the comparison result is Match - FQDN vs. Short Name. Similarly, if the CSV file contains myhost and OpsCenter contains myhost.veritas.com, then the comparison result is Match - FQDN vs. Short Name.

In External List The Client Coverage report helps you to identify these clients which And Not In Backup are present in your environment but are not known to OpsCenter. You must verify if these clients are being backed up. In Backup And Not This happens when the host name is known to OpsCenter but not In External List present in the CSV file. This may be due to several reasons like computer not being available in the network or computer not registered in the DNS, and so on.

Risk Analysis > Recovery Point Objective report

Recovery Point Objective (RPO) and Recovery Time Objective (RTO) have emerged as generally accepted metrics for client recoverability. This report ranks all clients by the amount of time that is elapsed since their last successful backup. The report shows how long it has been since each system has had a successful backup and therefore would have difficulty meeting a Recovery Point. In larger environments being able to run this report on a weekly basis will quickly show where there is risk due to systems that have not been backed up in a pre-determined amount of time. In contrast to the Client Risk Analysis report, the level of granularity is the client level and thus clients with multiple backup policies are represented by the policy with most recent success. It is recommended that this report not be used for multi-policy clients. The client IsActive filter allows for those hosts that are not actively being backed up to be omitted. The elapsed time in the report is always

854

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

between now and the last successful backup. The report is effective in its graphical rankings format placing the clients with longest elapsed time at the top. Figure 11-59 shows a sample view of the Recovery Point Objective report. Figure 11-59 Recovery Point Objective report

In the example, no backups have been run for nearly 10 hours for all the clients. This means that for the five systems on the report, the best RPO possible would be nearly 10 hours. If you have committed to an 8 hour RPO, then these systems need to be backed up quickly to be able to meet that SLA. The following are details associated with the Recovery Point Objective report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Recovery Point Objective Client Reports Report > Report Templates > Client Reports > Risk Analysis > Recovery Point Objective User-configurable threshold-based rankings report of clients exceeding their recovery point objectives.

Report Purpose

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

855

Supported products

Symantec NetBackup, Symantec NetBackup Master Appliance, Symantec Backup Exec, NetBackup PureDisk, EMC NetWorker, IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Master Server, Client Rankings (Chart) No Yes PDF, CSV, TSV, HTML, XML Backups > Risk Analysis > Recovery Point Objective - RPO

Applicable View Report Display Drill down report Can be scheduled Supported export formats Mapping with VBR report

The following table shows the filters for Recovery Point Objective report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Master Server

Master Server

Select one or more master servers to view data for the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value drop-down list .

Media Server

Media Server Select one or more media servers to view data for the specific media servers in the report. All media servers that are attached to the master servers in the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value drop-down list. Client is Active Client Name Client OS The default selection is Yes. By default, Active Clients are displayed in the report. Hence the clients that are not actively backed up are omitted by default. Select No if you want to view the report for all the clients. Select one or more clients to view data for the selected clients in the report. All clients that are protected by the master servers in the OpsCenter console are listed. Select one or more client OS to view data for the selected client OS in the report.

Client

856

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Filter
Policy

Column
Policy Keyword Policy Name Policy Type

Description
Select one or more policy keyword to view data for the policies having the selected keyword. Select one or more policy names to view data for the selected policies. Select one or more policy types to view data for the selected policy types.

Schedule Schedule/Level Select one or more schedule types like CINC, Copy, Daily etc. to Type view data for the selected schedule types. Schedule Name Job Job Status Job Transport Type Job Type Select one or more schedule names to view data for the selected schedule names. Select one or more Job Status like Failed, Missed, Partially Successful etc. to view data for the selected job status in the report. Select one or more transport types like FT, LAN, or Unknown to view data for the jobs that have the selected transport type. The value selection for Job Type is mandatory. By default, Backup jobs are shown in the report. You can select one or more job types like Archive, Backup, Restore etc. to view data for the selected job types.

Example of filter usage: You may run the report for specific master servers to view details for the clients backed up by specific master servers. The following enhancements have been made in the Stored Backup Images on Media report:

You can now click (drill down) the bar for each client and view Recovery Point Objective report for job type, schedule/level type and policy name. The Job Type column has been added under the Job filter. For the Policy filter, the following columns have been added:

Policy Keyword Policy Type

The Schedule filter has been added. The following Report On parameters have been added:

Job Type Policy Name

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

857

Schedule/Level Type

Earlier there was a Host filter with Host is Active column. The Host filter has been removed. The Host is Active column is now renamed as Client is Active column and exists under the Client filter. The default value of Client is Active column is Yes.

Clients Not Backed up report

This report provides a list of NetBackup clients that have not been backed up or clients for which all backups failed during the reporting period. You can determine if all jobs of a policy and client combination have failed or have not been initiated during the reporting period. You can filter by type of policy like SharePoint, Oracle, Windows NT and so on. The client name is displayed multiple times in the report if the client has multiple NetBackup policies that are associated with it and none of the policies are run during the reporting period. The report shows details like policy name, schedule name, and date of the last successful backup. You can now view data in this report for a specific client view by selecting a client view from the View filter. Earlier you could only filter the report data for a master server view. Figure 11-60 shows a sample view of the Clients not backed up report.

858

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Figure 11-60

Clients Not Backed up report

The following are details for the Clients Not Backed up report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Clients Not Backed up Client Reports Report > Report Templates > Client Reports > Clients Not Backed up This report lists all the clients that are not backed up in the selected timeframe. EMC NetWorker, IBM Tivoli Storage Manager, Symantec Backup Exec, NetBackup, NetBackup Master Appliance, NetBackup PureDisk Master Server, Client Tabular No Yes

Report Purpose

Supported products

Applicable View Report Display Drill down report Can be scheduled

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

859

Supported export formats Mapping with NOM report

PDF, CSV, TSV, XML, HTML All Reports > Standard Reports > Client > Clients Not Backed up Last Successful Backup column shows the job end time in OpsCenter. However, this column shows the job start time in NOM.

Deviation from NOM

The following table shows the filters for Clients not backed up report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Policy

Policy Type

Select one or more policy types like NDMP, FlashBackup etc. to view data for the selected policy types.

Example of filter usage: You may run the Clients not Backed up report for a specific policy type like FlashBackup to view backup details for the specific policy type. The following enhancements have been made in the Clients Not Backed up report:

The unit Years has been added for Relative Timeframe selection. You can now view data for the last x years. You can also see the Years tab on top-right corner of the Tabular Backup Report. UNKNOWN has been added as a value for Policy Type column in the Policy filter. You can now filter report data for policy types that are unknown. In earlier versions of OpsCenter, the unknown policy types were shown as blank.

Virtual Client Summary report

The Virtual Client Summary report shows details of all virtual clients of a NetBackup master server. Using this report, you can determine whether these virtual clients were backed up by NetBackup or not. Thus, you can report on the virtual clients that need to be protected. It also shows at a glance that last time the system was backed up. . You can also drill down in this report to see the job details of a specific virtual client. OpsCenter can poll the ESX or Hyper-V server to determine what systems have been configured and compare that with the NetBackup policies that have been created. This helps to track those virtual machines that are not being protected by any NetBackup polices.

860

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

You can now view data in this report for a specific client view by selecting a client view from the View filter. Earlier you could only filter the report data for a master server view. Figure 11-61 shows a sample view of the Virtual Client Summary report. Figure 11-61 Virtual Client Summary report

The sample report shows an example of ESX server that has a number of VM's configured. Most of the virtual clients do not exist in any NetBackup policy and need to be added or protected. It also shows at a glance the last time the system was backed up (from the Last Successful Backup Time column). The Virtual Client Summary report shows the following columns:
Virtual Server Name Name of the virtual server host such as VMware or Hyper-V server Data store associated with the virtual client. Data Store is where vmdk files are stored. Host name of the virtual machine.

Data Store

Host

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

861

Virtual Client Name

Name of the virtual client running on a virtual server and which is connected to the NetBackup Master Server through a proxy server Virtual clients are the physical partitions of a virtual server, such as VMware or Hyper-V. Multiple virtual clients may have the same IP address. But they can be identified by their UUIDs. UUID is a unique identifier of a virtual client.

Note: Click the virtual client name link to view

its job details. UUID Client Name Instance ID IP Address Type IP address of the virtual client Type of the virtual server that this client belongs to, such as VMware or Hyper-V Name of the NetBackup Master Server, which backs up this virtual client This field is shown blank if this virtual client is not backed up by any NetBackup master server Exists in a Policy This status field that describes whether backing up this virtual client is defined in any NetBackup policy or not If a NetBackup Master Server backs up this client, this field displays Yes. If it shows No, it means that this client should be backed up and be protected. Last Backup Time Time when this virtual client was backed up last This field displays NA (not applicable) if the client is not defined in a backup policy or it is yet to be backed up. A unique identifier of the virtual client

Server Name

The following are details for the Virtual Client Summary report:
Report Name Report Category Virtual Client Summary Client Reports

862

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Where to Locate

Report > Report Templates > Client Reports > Virtual Client Summary This report shows details of the VMware or Hyper-V servers that you have configured with NetBackup. It also shows whether these virtual machines are protected by NetBackup or not. NetBackup, NetBackup Master Appliance Master Server, Client Tabular Yes See Virtual Client Job Details on page 862.

Report Purpose

Supported products Applicable View Report Display Drill down report

Can be scheduled Supported export formats Mapping with NOM report

Yes PDF, CSV, TSV, XML, HTML All Reports > Standard Reports > Client > Virtual Client Summary

The following table shows the filters for Virtual Client Summary report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Master Server

Master Server

Select one or more master servers to view data for the virtual clients backed up by the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value dropdown list.

Example of filter usage: You may run the Virtual Client Summary report for a specific client view to view details for the specific clients.

Virtual Client Job Details

This drilldown report is obtained when you click a virtual client name (link) from the Virtual Summary report. This report shows details for a virtual client like policies, schedules, backup start and end time, data backed up etc. Figure 11-62 shows a sample view of the Virtual Client Job Details report.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

863

Figure 11-62

Virtual Client Job Details

The following are details associated with the Virtual Client Job Details report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Virtual Client Job Details Client Reports Report > Report Templates > Client Reports > Virtual Client Summary (click the virtual client name) > Virtual Client Job Details This report shows the details of selected virtual machine. NetBackup, NetBackup Appliance Master Server, Client Tabular None Yes PDF, CSV, TSV, XML, HTML All Reports > Standard Reports > Client > Virtual Client Summary (click the virtual client name)

Report Purpose Supported products Applicable View Report Display Drill down report Can be scheduled Supported formats Mapping with NOM report

The following table shows the filters for Virtual Client Job Details report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report.

864

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Master Server

Master Server

Select one or more master servers to view data for the virtual clients backed up by the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value drop-down list . Select one or more clients to view data for the selected clients in the report. All clients that are protected by the master servers in the OpsCenter console are listed.

Client

Client Name

Example of filter usage: You may run the Virtual Client Job Details report for a specific client to view details for the specific clients.

Job Success by Client report

This report shows the rate of success for client jobs. The bar chart shows totals for successful, partially successful, and failed jobs for each client that is backed up by the selected master servers. Tool tips in the bars show these job counts. The tool tips for each client also include links to a drill-down report showing details for all job types. Click Show Chart as Table link to display job counts of successful, partially successful, or failed jobs for each client in the selected timeframe. Figure 11-63 shows a sample view of the Job Success by Client report.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

865

Figure 11-63

Job Success by Client report

The following are details for the Job Success by Client report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Job Success by Client Client Reports Report > Report Templates > Client Reports > Job Success by Client This report shows the job success by client. This report is valid for NetBackup and NetBackup Appliance.

Report Purpose

866

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Supported products Applicable View Report Display Drill down report Can be scheduled Supported export formats Mapping with NOM report

NetBackup, NetBackup Master Appliance Master Server, Client Historical (Chart) Job Details by Client Yes PDF, CSV, TSV, XML, HTML All Reports > Standard Reports > Client > Job Success by Client

The following table shows the filters for Job Success by Client report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Master Server

Master Server

Select one or more master servers to view data for the clients backed up by the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value drop-down list .

Example of filter usage: You may run the Job Success by Client report for a specific master server to view job success details for the clients that are protected by the specific master server. The following enhancements have been made for the Job Success by Client report:

You can now drill down by clicking the bars in the report. A drill-down report called Job Details by Client is available. The Report On parameter that let you group the report by Exit Status has been removed from the Modify Display Options page.

Job Details by Client

This report can be drilled down either by clicking the bar charts in Jobs Success by Client report or from the Client Name column in Jobs Success by Client (Tabular) report. This drilldown report lists details of all the jobs for the selected client and time frame. The table includes details like Job type, status code, and media server name. The report now also displays the Media Server column.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

867

Figure 11-64 shows a sample view of the Job Details by Client report. Figure 11-64 Job Details by Client

The following is more information on the Job Details by Client report:

Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Job Details by Client Client Reports Report > Report Templates > Client Reports > Job Success by Client (click the bar chart) or Job Success by Client (Tabular) (click the Client Name column) This report lists job details for client. This report is valid for NetBackup and NetBackup Appliance.

Report Purpose

868

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Supported products Applicable View Report Display Drill down report Can be scheduled Supported export formats Mapping with NOM report

NetBackup, NetBackup Master Appliance Master Server, Client Tabular No Yes PDF, CSV, TSV, XML, HTML All Reports > Standard Reports > Client > Job Success by Client > Job Details by Client

The following table shows the filters for Job Details by Client report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Master Server

Master Server

Select one or more master servers to view data for the clients backed up by the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value drop-down list . Select one or more clients to view data for the selected clients in the report. All clients that are protected by the master servers in the OpsCenter console are listed.

Client

Client Name

Example of filter usage: You may run the Job Details by Client report for specific clients or master servers.

Job Success by Client (Tabular) report

This report shows the rate of success for client jobs. The tabular report shows totals for successful, partially successful, and failed jobs for each client that is backed up by the selected master servers. You can also drill-down from the following columns in the table:

Client Name Number of Successful Jobs Number of Partially Successful Jobs Number of Failed Jobs

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

869

Figure 11-65 shows a sample view of the Job Success by Client (Tabular) report. Figure 11-65 Job Success by Client (Tabular) report

The following are details for the Job Success by Client (Tabular) report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Job Success by Client Client Reports Report > Report Templates > Client Reports > Job Success by Client (Tabular) This report shows the job success by client. This report is valid for NetBackup and NetBackup Appliance. NetBackup, NetBackup Master Appliance Master Server, Client Tabular Job Details for Client Successful Job Details for Client Partially Successful Job Details for Client Failed Job Details for Client Can be scheduled Supported export formats Mapping with NOM report Yes PDF, CSV, TSV, XML, HTML All Reports > Standard Reports > Client > Job Success by Client

Report Purpose

Supported products Applicable View Report Display Drill down report

870

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

The following table shows the filters for Job Success by Client report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Master Server

Master Server

Select one or more master servers to view data for the clients backed up by the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value drop-down list . Select one or more clients to view data for the clients.

Client

Client Name

Example of filter usage: You may run the Job Success by Client (Tabular) report for specific clients to view job success details for the selected clients.

Client summary dashboard report

This report summarizes several parameters for each client for the selected server context and acts as a dashboard of NetBackup activities. You can use drilldown links to view client detail reports for many of the columns in the table. The drilldown reports provide information about the client and answer the following questions:

What is the server name, IP address, and operating system type? How much volume for a client is backed up? How many successful, partially successful, and failed jobs for the client? What is the number of restore jobs that run for the client? What is the average job throughput?

You can now view data in this report for a specific client view by selecting a client view from the View filter. Earlier you could only filter the report data for a master server view. The report can also be used as a tool to monitor the health of backup activities for your managed clients.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

871

Total jobs for client report

This drilldown report from the Number of Total Jobs column lists all the jobs for the selected client and time frame. The job details include policy name, schedule name, and throughput (KB/sec). This drilldown report uses the run time parameters that are passed from the main report.

Successful jobs for client report

This drilldown report from the Number of Successful Jobs column lists the successful jobs for the selected client and time frame. The report lists job details, such as, job type, policy name, start and end times, and job duration. This drilldown report uses the run time parameters that are passed from the main report.

Partially successful jobs for client report

This drilldown report from the Number of Partial Successful Jobs column shows the partially successful jobs for the selected client and time frame. The report lists job details, such as, job type, policy name, start and end times, and job duration. This drilldown report uses the run time parameters that are passed from the main report.

Failed jobs for client report

This drilldown report from the Number of Failed Jobs column lists the failed jobs for the selected client and time frame. Any jobs with an exit status other than 0 or 1 are considered to be failed jobs. The report lists job details, such as, job type, policy name, start and end times, and job duration. This drilldown report uses the run time parameters that are passed from the main report.

Restore jobs for client report

This drilldown report from the Number of Restore Jobs column lists restores job details for the selected client. It provides details like policy name, schedule name, and throughput (KB/sec). This drilldown report uses the run time parameters that are passed from the main report.

872

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Client Restore report

This report provides restore job details for a specified client. The table in the report contains information, such as, master and media server names, and start and end times. You can edit the report to show or hide the columns that you are interested in. All the columns are shown by default. You can also filter the report to show activity for a limited sample set, such as one or more clients or views. Figure 11-66 shows a sample view of the Client Restore report. Figure 11-66 Client Restore report

The following are details associated with the Client Restore Report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Report Purpose Supported products Client Restore Client Reports Report > Report Templates > Client Reports > Client Restore Lists all the restore jobs of the given client. NetBackup, NetBackup Master Appliance, NetBackup PureDisk Master Server, Client N.A. None Yes

Applicable View Report Display Drill down report Can be scheduled

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

873

Supported formats Mapping with NOM report

PDF, CSV, TSV, XML, HTML All Reports > Standard Reports > Client > Client Restore

The following table shows the filters for Client Restore report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Client

Client Name

Select one or more clients to view data for the selected clients in the report. All clients that are protected by the master servers in the OpsCenter console are listed.

Example of filter usage: You may run the Clients Restore report for specific clients to view details only for the specific clients. The unit Years has been added for Relative Timeframe selection. You can now view data for the last x years. You can also select Year from the top-right corner of the report.

BMR client configuration backup failures report

If a NetBackup policy has the Collect BMR Info flag set, the job backs up BMR (Bare Metal Restore) client configuration. This job type starts one or more dependant jobs to back up the client data. This report shows all jobs that failed to completely back up a BMR client configuration, but their related child jobs (client data backup jobs) were partially or fully successful. You can now view data in this report for a specific client view by selecting a client view from the View filter. Earlier you could only filter the report data for a master server view.

Jobs by application report

This report uses the NetBackup policy type to simulate an application level report. For example, an Oracle policy type implies an Oracle application. The report then lets you see all Oracle backups. The table in this report organizes jobs in the table by server, client, and application and includes the backup size in MBs and the number of files. The Application (policy type) column provides a drilldown link to job details for the respective application.

874

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

There is a drilldown report available from the Application column of the table of the main report. This drilldown report lists all the jobs for the selected client and policy type. The table includes job details such as, job ID, exit status, and job start and end times, and a count of files. This drilldown report uses the run time parameters that are passed from the main report.

About Cloud reports

This section describes Cloud reports. These reports are only for NetBackup servers that have Cloud configured on them. The following Cloud reports are available:
Job Success Rate Data Expiring in Future Cloud Metering Average Data Transfer Rate Cloud Metering Chargeback See Job Success Rate report on page 874. See Data Expiring in Future on page 877. See Cloud Metering on page 880. See Average Data Transfer Rate on page 882. See Cloud Metering Chargeback on page 885.

Job Success Rate report

This report gives the success rate of backup jobs on the Cloud for each configured Cloud storage provider. It also helps you to compare job success rates for different Cloud storage providers. You can also view the Success Rate (%) for a specific job end date or time in a tabular format. Click Show Table to view the details in a tabular format. The X-axis shows the Job end time and date and Y-axis shows the Job Success Rate in percentage. The Legend defines different colors for specific storage providers. Click Show Chart as Table to view details in the tabular format. Figure 11-67 is a sample view of the Job Success Rate report.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

875

Figure 11-67

Job Success Rate report

The following are details associated with the Job Success Rate report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Job Success Rate Cloud Reports Report > Report Templates > Cloud Reports > Job Success Rate Success rate by job level across products, domains, clients, policies and business level views. Symantec NetBackup, Symantec NetBackup Master Appliance

Report Purpose

Supported products

876

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Applicable View Report Display Drill down report Can be scheduled Supported formats

Master Server, Client Historical None Yes PDF, CSV, TSV, XML, HTML

You can edit the report and configure the timeframe or run the report for specific views, clients, or master servers. The following table shows the filters for Job Success Rate report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Master Server

Master Server Select one or more master servers to view data for the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value drop-down list . Media Server Select one or more media servers to view data for the specific media servers in the report. All media servers that are attached to the master servers in the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value drop-down list. The default selection is Yes. By default, Active Clients are displayed in the report. Hence the clients that are not actively backed up are omitted by default. Select No if you want to view the report for all the clients. Select one or more clients to view data for the selected clients in the report. All clients that are protected by the master servers in the OpsCenter console are listed. Select one or more client OS to view data for the selected client OS in the report.

Media Server

Client

Client is Active Client Name Client OS

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

877

Filter
Policy

Column

Description

Policy Data Select one or more policy data classification names to view data Classification for the selected policy data classification names. Name Select one or more policy keyword to view data for the policies Policy having the selected keyword. Keyword Select one or more policy names to view data for the selected Policy Name policies. Policy Type Select one or more policy types to view data for the selected policy types.

Schedule Schedule/Level Select one or more schedule types like CINC, Copy, Daily etc. Type to view data for the selected schedule types. Job Job Status Select one or more Job Status like Failed, Missed, Partially Successful etc. to view data for the selected job status in the Job Transport report. Type Select one or more transport types like FT, LAN, or Unknown Product Type to view data for the jobs that have the selected transport type. Select one or more backup products to view data for the selected products. Success Rate Client Name Select one or more clients to view data for the selected clients in the report. All clients that are protected by the master servers in the OpsCenter console are listed.

Example of filter usage: You may run the Job Success Rate report for specific clients to view details only for the specific clients. You can also select time interval for which you want to group the records. For example, if you select 1 month as the Time Frame and 10 days as the Group By interval, the report shows records in three chunks of data grouped by 10 days.

Data Expiring in Future

The report shows how much data on the Cloud is going to expire for each Cloud provider. By default, the report shows the data expiring each day for the next seven days. The report shows the total expired backup size and also the number of images that are going to expire in the next seven days for each Cloud provider. The Y1 axis gives the total expired backup size and the Y2 axis indicates the number of images that are going to expire. Click Show Chart as Table to view the data in a tabular format. Figure 11-68 shows a sample view of the Data Expiring in Future report.

878

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Figure 11-68

Data Expiring in Future

The following are details associated with the Data Expiring in Future report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Data Expiring in Future Cloud Reports Report > Report Templates > Cloud Reports > Data Expiring in Future This report shows the data expiring each day for the next 7 days.

Report Purpose

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

879

Supported products Applicable View Report Display Drill down report Can be scheduled Supported formats

Symantec NetBackup, Symantec NetBackup Master Appliance Master Server Historical None Yes PDF, CSV, TSV, XML, HTML

You can edit the report and configure the timeframe or run the report for specific views, clients, or master servers. The following table shows the filters for Data Expiring in Future report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Master Server

Master Server Select one or more master servers to view data for the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value drop-down list . Media Server Select one or more media servers to view data for the specific media servers in the report. All media servers that are attached to the master servers in the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value drop-down list. The default selection is Yes. By default, Active Clients are displayed in the report. Hence the clients that are not actively backed up are omitted by default. Select No if you want to view the report for all the clients. Select one or more clients to view data for the selected clients in the report. All clients that are protected by the master servers in the OpsCenter console are listed. Select one or more client OS to view data for the selected client OS in the report.

Media Server

Client

Client is Active Client Name Client OS

880

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Filter
Policy

Column

Description

Policy Data Select one or more policy data classification names to view data Classification for the selected policy data classification names. Name Select one or more policy keyword to view data for the policies Policy having the selected keyword. Keyword Select one or more policy names to view data for the selected Policy Name policies. Policy Type Select one or more policy types to view data for the selected policy types.

Schedule Schedule/Level Select one or more schedule types like CINC, Copy, Daily etc. Type to view data for the selected schedule types. Job Job Status Select one or more Job Status like Failed, Missed, Partially Successful etc. to view data for the selected job status in the Job Transport report. Type Select one or more transport types like FT, LAN, or Unknown Job Type to view data for the jobs that have the selected transport type. Product Type Select one or more job types like Archive, Backup, Restore etc. to view data for the selected job types. Select one or more backup products to view data for the selected products.

Example of filter usage: You may run the Data Expiring in Future report for specific clients to view details only for the specific clients.

Cloud Metering
This report shows the data written to the cloud. It also shows forecast and trend. Figure 11-69 shows a sample view of the Cloud Metering report.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

881

Figure 11-69

Cloud Metering report

The following are details associated with the Cloud Metering report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Report Purpose Cloud Metering Cloud Reports Report > Report Templates > Cloud Reports > Cloud Metering Historical view of data written to cloud per Cloud Provider.

882

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Supported products

Symantec NetBackup

Note: Symantec NetBackup Appliance is not supported.

Applicable View Report Display Drill down report Can be scheduled Supported formats Master Server Historical None Yes PDF, CSV, TSV, XML, HTML

You can edit the report and configure the timeframe or run the report for specific views or media servers. The following table shows the filters for the Cloud Metering report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Media Server

Media Server

Select one or more media servers to view data for the specific media servers in the report. All media servers that are attached to the master servers in the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value drop-down list.

Example of filter usage: You may run the Cloud Metering report for specific media servers to view details only for the specific media servers.

Average Data Transfer Rate

You can see the Cloud job count and throughput in KB/sec. The bars represent job count while the lines represent throughput. This report gives an insight on the throughput for each Cloud Provider. If you are using services from multiple Cloud providers, you can compare and identify the Cloud provider that is providing a better throughput. Figure 11-70 shows a sample view of the Average Data Transfer Rate report.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

883

Figure 11-70

Average Data Transfer Rate report

The following are details associated with the Average Data Transfer Rate report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Average Data Transfer Rate Cloud Reports Report > Report Templates > Cloud Reports > Average Data Transfer Rate Data expiring each day for the next 7 days.

Report Purpose

884

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Supported products Applicable View Report Display Drill down report Can be scheduled Supported formats

Symantec NetBackup, Symantec NetBackup Master Appliance Master Server Historical None Yes PDF, CSV, TSV, XML, HTML

You can edit the report and configure the timeframe or run the report for specific views, clients, or master servers. The following table shows the filters for Average Data Transfer Rate report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Master Server

Master Server Select one or more master servers to view data for the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value drop-down list . Media Server Select one or more media servers to view data for the specific media servers in the report. All media servers that are attached to the master servers in the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value drop-down list. The default selection is Yes. By default, Active Clients are displayed in the report. Hence the clients that are not actively backed up are omitted by default. Select No if you want to view the report for all the clients. Select one or more clients to view data for the selected clients in the report. All clients that are protected by the master servers in the OpsCenter console are listed. Select one or more client OS to view data for the selected client OS in the report.

Media Server

Client

Client is Active Client Name Client OS

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

885

Filter
Policy

Column

Description

Policy Data Select one or more policy data classification names to view data Classification for the selected policy data classification names. Name Select one or more policy keyword to view data for the policies Policy having the selected keyword. Keyword Select one or more policy names to view data for the selected Policy Name policies. Policy Type Select one or more policy types to view data for the selected policy types. Select one or more schedule names to view data for the selected schedules.

Schedule Schedule Name Job Job Status

Select one or more Job Status like Failed, Missed, Partially Successful etc. to view data for the selected job status in the Job Transport report. Type Select one or more transport types like FT, LAN, or Unknown Product Type to view data for the jobs that have the selected transport type. Select one or more backup products to view data for the selected products.

Example of filter usage: You may run the Average Data Transfer Rate report for specific master servers to view details only for the specific master servers.

Cloud Metering Chargeback

This report is valid for Symantec OpsCenter Analytics (a licensed version of OpsCenter). To run this report, you need a cost formula based on a cost variable that uses the Storage Server variable metric. To do this, first create a cost variable based on a variable metric named Storage Size and then create a cost formula based on this cost variable. Only the cost formulae that are based on the Storage Server variable metric appear in the Cost Formula drop-down list. The Cloud Metering Chargeback report calculates how much you need to pay to the Cloud provider on a specific date. The forecast and trendlines help you understand how much you are going to spend on a particular Cloud provider in the future. The Ranking view shows the amount you pay to each Cloud-provider. From the Ranking view, you can compare the price that you pay to each Cloud provider. Figure 11-71 shows a sample view of the Cloud Metering Chargeback report.

886

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Figure 11-71

Cloud Metering Chargeback report

The following are details associated with the Cloud Metering Chargeback report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Cloud Metering Chargeback Cloud Reports Report > Report Templates > Cloud Reports > Cloud Metering Chargeback Metering Chargeback

Report Purpose

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

887

Supported products

Symantec NetBackup

Note: Symantec NetBackup Appliance is not supported.

Applicable View Report Display Drill down report Can be scheduled Supported formats Master Server Historical, Ranking None Yes PDF, CSV, TSV, XML, HTML

You can edit the report and configure the timeframe or run the report for specific views or media servers. The following table shows the filters for the Cloud Metering Chargeback report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Media Server

Media Server

Select one or more media servers to view data for the specific media servers in the report. All media servers that are attached to the master servers in the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value drop-down list.

Example of filter usage: You may run the Cloud Metering Chargeback report for specific media servers to view details only for the specific media servers.

About Disk and Tape Device Activity reports in OpsCenter

This section describes disk and tape device activity reports.
Current disk usage report See Disk and Tape Device Activity > Current Disk Usage Report on page 888. See NetBackup Disk Pool Capacity report on page 889.

NetBackup Disk Pool Capacity report

NetBackup Disk Pool Size vs. Percentage Full See NetBackup Disk Pool Size vs. report Percentage Full report on page 890. NetBackup SAN Client Performance report See NetBackup SAN Client Performance report on page 890.

888

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Library Summary report Library Capacity Forecast report

See Library Summary report on page 890. See Library Capacity Forecast report on page 891. See Disk and Tape Device Activity > Drive Throughput on page 891. See Disk and Tape Device Activity > Drive Utilization Report on page 894. See SAN client jobs report on page 896.

Drive Throughput report

Drive Utilization report

SAN client jobs report

Disk and Tape Device Activity > Current Disk Usage Report
This report shows a comprehensive utilization of disk by pool and type for each master server that has configured disk pools. It provides details about the disk pool usage and also about the free space available in the disk pool. Figure 11-72 shows a sample view of Current Disk Usage Report. Figure 11-72 Current Disk Usage Report

The following are the details that are associated with the Current Disk Usage report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Current Disk Usage Disk and Tape Device Activity Report > Report Templates > Disk and Tape Device Activity > Current Disk Usage report. Comprehensive utilization report by disk pool and disk type for each master server for NetBackup and NetBackup Appliance.

Report Purpose

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

889

Supported products Applicable View Report Display Drill down report Can be scheduled Supported formats Mapping with NOM report

Symantec NetBackup, Symantec NetBackup Master Appliance Master Server Tabular None Yes PDF, CSV, TSV, XML, HTML All Reports > Standard Reports > Disk Based Data Protection > Current Disk Usage

You can edit the Current Disk Usage report to show or hide the columns that you are interested in. All the columns are shown by default. You can also filter the report to view reports of specific master servers. The following table shows the filters for Current Disk Usage report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Master Server

Master Server

Select one or more master servers to view data for the virtual clients that are backed up by the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value drop-down list .

Example of filter usage: Run the Current Disk Usage report for a specific master server to view the used disk space for that master server. The following report enhancements have been made for the Current Disk Usage report:

Job Transport Type column has been added to the Job filter. For example, you can view report data for jobs for which the Job transport type is FT or LAN. The column heading Server Type has been modified to Disk Type. New columns Configured for Snapshots and Replication are added in the report table.

NetBackup Disk Pool Capacity report

This report is specific to NetBackup 6.5 and above which introduced Disk Pools as a type of Storage Unit. The basic version of this report shows the total amount

890

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

of space that is occupied by backups across all NetBackup 6.5 Disk Pools which would include OpenStorage Devices, PureDisk deduplication option storage, SharedDisk, or even AdvancedDisk pools. Along with usage the average of the high and the low water mark is taken for each disk pool and drawn on the graph. Since this is an average it should not be used for planning purposes but rather estimation. In actual usage this report should be filtered on a specific Disk Pool to show the exact high and low water mark. Finally the forecast is shown so that it can be determined when capacity needs to be added or backups expired to maintain operations.

NetBackup Disk Pool Size vs. Percentage Full report

This report is specific to NetBackup 6.5 and above which has new devices and storage units called Disk Pools. A Disk Pool may be an OpenStorage device, a PureDisk Deduplication system, SharedDisk, or a group of local or network disk volumes that are pooled together. The bars represent the total number of available bytes across all disk pools with the colors representing the total amount of space per disk pool. The lines represent the percentage full each disk pool is. So this report can help identify how much disk space is used for backups, which pools are the largest, which ones are near capacity and how the backup environment is load balancing across disk storage.

NetBackup SAN Client Performance report

This report is specific to NetBackup 6.5 and above which features Fibre Channel connected clients called SAN Clients. The blue and the yellow bars for example are stacked together to show the total number of jobs per day. The blue bars represent the jobs that ran over the LAN and the yellow is jobs ran over the SAN. The purple and the yellow lines show the total job throughput for all those jobs that ran that day. The purple represents total job throughput by LAN and the yellow represents total job throughput by SAN. This report helps identify what ratio of LAN to SAN traffic for backups are run and what performance benefit is gained by doing so.

Library Summary report

This report provides a current point in time inventory of library capacity. The reports list the libraries name, Volume DB Server, used/available/total slot count, and used or available or total capacity. Two calculated columns show the % utilization of slots and library capacity. The report provides a rich selection of filters enabling users with a diverse tape library environment to zoom in on any segment of their tape library population.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

891

Note: The Library Summary report might display some negative values. These negative values are a result of negative slot counts. If the user added -1 NetBackup is unable to connect to the media. If the slot count is 0 NetBackup only calculates data for TLD and TLD8 media leading to negative values in the report. The user must enter the media slot count from Settings > Configuration > Tape Library.

Library Capacity Forecast report

This report provides a capacity forecast of Tape Libraries. A libraries capacity is calculated by multiplying Slot Count by Slot Capacity. Slot capacity is the capacity of the tape in the slot. As no standard exists for measuring library capacity, the report enables several methods by which an individual tapes capacity is determined. These consist of using the maximum, the minimum and the average size of full tapes to determine tape capacity. Additionally, user-defined capacity for tape types is available in the report parameter selection UI. The report extrapolates out the trend line through the forecast period using classic linear regression and also plots the libraries capacity. At the date in which the library capacity line intersects the capacity forecast line is when the libraries capacity is reached.

Disk and Tape Device Activity > Drive Throughput

This report shows the speed (KB/Sec) at which data backups flow through the tape drives. The report uses the heat map concept and depicts ranges of speeds (slow to fast) through configurable shades of green color. Reports are generated based on either Hours-of-Day or Days-of-Week. Advanced averaging logic is used to determine the throughput values for each cell in the report. The averaging is done at an image fragment level ensuring granularity and precision in calculations. The reports can be aggregated and filtered at the Tape Library, Media Server, Drive Type, Logical Drive, and Physical Drive levels. The sort options allow intuitive presentation of voluminous data. These reports are important sources of information for performance analysis and capacity planning activities. As an example on the analysis that can be performed on this report, suppose you look at an LTO4 drive that can run at 120+MB/sec, having a report that shows only 5 -6 MB/sec would indicate that the drives are not even close to being at the maximum capacity. Adding drives in an environment such as this would not impact the backup window. We see a lot of money being spent on new tape drives when customers have trouble pushing tape drives from years ago. If you cannot push an LTO2 drive, then upgrading to an LTO4 will not benefit you (unless you wanted the hardware encryption option of course). These reports are important sources of information for performance analysis and capacity planning activities.

892

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Note that the Drive Throughput report displays data only till 1 A.M. and not till the time when you run the report. This is because OpsCenter collects data for Drive Throughput report once per day at 1 A.M..after midnight. Therefore the Drive Throughput report is only able to report on data up until 1 AM on that day, even when run with a relative timeframe of Previous 24 hours. Similarly if you run Drive Throughput report at 2 P.M. in the afternoon, the reports display data collected till 1 A.M. only. Note: Symantec recommends that you configure the retention period of error logs in NetBackup as more than 1 day. If the retention period of error logs is less than 24 hours, it may result in data loss for some reports like Drive Throughput. Figure 11-73 shows a sample view of Drive Throughput Report. Figure 11-73 Drive Throughput Report

The following are the details that are associated with the Drive Throughput report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Drive Throughput Disk and Tape Device Activity Report > Report Templates > Disk and Tape Device Activity > Drive Throughput report. A heat-map report showing drive throughput by library, media server, tape drive and drive type. Darker the color, higher is the throughput for that particular time, for NetBackup servers. Symantec NetBackup, Symantec NetBackup Master Appliance Master Server Tabular None

Report Purpose

Supported products Applicable View Report Display Drill down report

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

893

Can be scheduled Supported formats Mapping with VBR report

Yes HTML All Reports > Standard Reports > Backups > Tape Devices > Drive Throughput

You can edit the Drive Throughput report to show or hide the columns that you are interested in. All the columns are shown by default. You can also filter the report to view reports of specific master servers. The following table shows the filters for Drive Throughput report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Master Server

Master Server

Select one or more master servers to view data for the virtual clients that are backed up by the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value drop-down list . Select one or more policy names to view data for the selected policies.

Policy

Policy Name

Schedule Schedule/Level Select one or more schedule or level types to view the data for Type the configured schedules. Job Job Type Select one or more job types as Archive, Backup, or Restore to view data for the selected job types. Select one or more drives to view the specific data on those drives.

Drive

Drive

Tape Library

Tape Library Select one or more tape library serial numbers to view the data Serial specific for those tapes. Number

Example of filter usage: You may run the report for specific policy data classification names to view details only for the specific policy classifications. You may run the report for a specific job type like Backup to view drive throughput details for the backup jobs. The following report enhancements have been made for the Drive Throughput report:

894

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

The option Next has been removed from the drop-down menu for Relative Timeframe. You now cannot enter a relative timeframe like next 2 weeks. This is because the report does not support any futuristic data.

The following filter enhancements have been made for the Drive Throughput report:

Job types which are not applicable for this report are removed from the filter. The supported job types are Backup, Archive, Restore, Backup from Snapshot, Snapshot, Duplicate, and Replication. UNKNOWN has been added as a value for Schedule Level/Type column in the Schedule filter. You can now filter report data for Schedule Level/Type that is UNKNOWN.

Disk and Tape Device Activity > Drive Utilization Report

Tape drives are still very popular as backup destinations and are moderately expensive especially if new drives are purchased each time a new update is available such as moving from LTO3 to LTO4. Many times when backup windows are not being met the first thing suggested is more tape drives. What we have found is that in most cases customers are under-utilizing the tape drive investment either due to time of day considerations i.e. backups cannot run during the day due to performance issues or they simply have too few Media Servers. OpsCenter and OpsCenter Analytics have a number of drive utilization and throughput reports that can show at a glance when tape drives are being used, and if there are large gaps in usage that could be filled up with changes to the backup Policies. This can help not only fully utilize the drives, but defer a hardware purchase since it is easy to see when the drives have open cycles. This report shows the utilization (0 100%) of tape drives. The report uses the heat map concept and depicts ranges of utilization (low to high) through configurable shades of blue for example. Reports are based on either Hour-Of-Day or Day-of- Week. Advanced logic is used to determine the utilization values for each cell in the report. Utilization is calculated off a per minute basis ensuring precision in calculations versus traditional methods of periodic polling of the devices. The reports can be aggregated and filtered at the Tape Library, Media Server, Drive Type, Logical Drive, and Physical Drive levels. The sort options allow for intuitive presentation of voluminous data. These reports are important sources of information for performance analysis and capacity planning activities. Note that the Drive Utilization report displays data only till 1 A.M. and not till the time when you run the report. This is because OpsCenter collects data for Drive Utilization report once per day at 1 A.M..after midnight. Therefore the Drive Utilization report is only able to report on data up until 1 AM on that day, even when run with a relative timeframe of Previous 24 hours. Similarly if you run

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

895

Drive Utilization report at 2 P.M. in the afternoon, the reports display data collected till 1 A.M. only. Figure 11-74 shows a sample view of Drive Utilization Report. Figure 11-74 Drive Utilization Report

The following are the details that are associated with the Drive Utilization report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Drive Utilization Disk and Tape Device Activity Report > Report Templates > Disk and Tape Device Activity > Drive Utilization. A heat-map report showing drive utilization by library, media server, tape drive and drive type. Darker colour signifies higher utilization of drive for a particular time. Symantec NetBackup, Symantec NetBackup Master Appliance Master Server Tabular None Yes HTML All Reports > Standard Report > > Backups > Tape Device Activity > Drive Utilization

Report Purpose

Supported products Applicable View Report Display Drill down report Can be scheduled Supported formats Mapping with VBR report

You can edit the Drive Utilization report to show or hide the columns that you are interested in. All the columns are shown by default. You can also filter the report to view reports of specific master servers. The following table shows the filters for Drive Utilization report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report.

896

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Master Server

Master Server

Select one or more master servers to view data for the virtual clients that are backed up by the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value drop-down list . Select one or more policy names to view data for the selected policies. Select one or more job types as Archive, Backup, or Restore to view data for the selected job types. Select one or more drives to view the specific data on those drives.

Policy

Policy Name

Job

Job Type

Drive

Drive

Tape Library

Tape Library Select one or more tape library serial numbers to view the data Serial specific for those tapes. Number

Example of filter usage: You may run the report for specific policy names to view the details only for a specific policy. You may run the report for Drive utilization for a specific job type like Backup to view the details. The following report enhancements have been made for the Drive Utilization report:

The option Next has been removed from the drop-down menu for Relative Timeframe. You now cannot enter a relative timeframe like next 2 weeks. This is because the report does not support any futuristic data.

The following filter enhancements have been made for the Drive Throughput report:

Job types which are not applicable for this report are removed from the filter. The supported job types are Backup, Archive, Restore, Backup from Snapshot, Snapshot, Duplicate, and Replication. UNKNOWN has been added as a value for Schedule Level/Type column in the Schedule filter. You can now filter report data for Schedule Level/Type that is UNKNOWN.

SAN client jobs report

This report shows all the jobs for selected Fiber Transport (FT) media servers and selected SAN clients.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

897

The report answers the following questions and provides the following information:

Did the job run on a LAN or an FT pipe? Are two different clients backed up by a single media server, thus reducing the throughput? A list of all the FT media servers A list of all the SAN clients.

About Hold reports in OpsCenter

This section describes Hold reports. The Hold reports are visible only if you have added a valid NetBackup Search license key in OpsCenter and when you log on as a Security Administrator.
Image Retention Summary See Hold Reports > Image Retention Summary on page 897. See Hold Reports > Top Holds by Size on page 897. See Hold Reports > Top Holds by Age on page 897.

Top Holds by Size

Top Holds by Age

Hold Reports > Image Retention Summary

This report provides information about status of the images which are on hold. You can select the size unit (B, KB, MB, GB, or TB) to display.

Hold Reports > Top Holds by Size

This report shows holds that are ranked by the total size of their backup images. You can select the number of holds in the display, the size unit (B, KB, MB, GB, or TB), and whether the holds display in ascending or descending order.

Hold Reports > Top Holds by Age

This report shows holds that are ranked by the age of their backup images. You can select the number of holds in the display, the time duration, and whether the holds display in ascending or descending order.

About Media reports in OpsCenter

This section describes media reports.

898

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Media State report

See Media Reports > Media State on page 898. See Available Media report on page 900. See Drives in Use report on page 900. See Full Media Capacity report on page 900. See Media Summary by Media Server report on page 900. See Media Reports > Media Utilization on page 901. See Tape Count report on page 902. See Tapes Expiring in Future report on page 903. See Tapes Expiring Now report on page 903. See Vault Media Usage report on page 903. See Media Reports > Media Expiration Schedule on page 904.

Available Media report Drives in Use report Full Media Capacity report Media Summary by Media Server report

Media Utilization report

Tape Count report Tapes Expiring in Future report

TapesExpiring Now report

Vault Media Usage report Media Expiration Schedule report

Media Reports > Media State

This report displays the media status and count (per media type) for each master server and media server combination. Media state can be frozen, active, off-site, and so on. Figure 11-75 shows a sample view of Media State Report. Figure 11-75 Media State Report

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

899

The following are the details that are associated with the Media State report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Report Purpose Media State Media Reports Report > Report Templates > Media Reports > Media State. Lists number of media in each media status per media type and per media server. Symantec NetBackup, Symantec NetBackup Master Appliance Master Server Tabular None Yes PDF, CSV, TSV, XML, HTML All Reports > Standard Report > Media and Devices > Media State

Supported products Applicable View Report Display Drill down report Can be scheduled Supported formats Mapping with NOM report

You can edit the Media State report to show or hide the columns that you are interested in. All the columns are shown by default. You can also filter the report to view reports of specific master servers. The following table shows the filters for Media State report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Master Server

Master Server

Select one or more master servers to view data for the virtual clients that are backed up by the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value drop-down list .

Example of filter usage: Run the Media State report for a specific master server to view the media state for that master server. The following report enhancements have been made for the Media State report:

The

900

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Available Media report

This report lists the media that is available for use by NetBackup for each master server that is selected. The report table provides information, such as, media server, media status, robot type, volume group and pool, and the time assigned.

Drives in Use report

This report shows the drive usage for the selected server. The report table provides details for the drive, for example, drive name and type, robot number and type, and assigned host.

Full Media Capacity report

This report shows the average amount of protected data (in kilobytes) on a tape for each master server and media type. These are the tapes that NetBackup marked as full. The bar chart depicts the amount of data (in kilobytes) per media type. The report table is organized by server, media type and count, and shows the size and number of images on the tape.

Media Summary by Media Server report

For each media server, this report provides the number of tapes and images, the last written date, and amount of data on the tapes. The name of the media server is also a drilldown link to a detailed report for media.
Media summary by media status for a media server report This drilldown report from the Media Server column provides a media status summary for a selected media server. This report displays media status, number of tapes and images, the last written date, and amount of data on tapes. This drilldown report uses the run time parameters that are passed from the main report.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

901

Media details of media status for a media server report

This drilldown report from the Media Status column provides media details for the selected media server and selected media status. Media status can be Active, Frozen, Full, Invalid, or Suspended. This drilldown report uses the run time parameters that are passed from the main report. The report displays media ID, type, volume pool, last written date, expiration date, number of images, and the amount of data on tape.

Media Reports > Media Utilization

This report shows the number of media in use for a server per date. The columns in the table show assigned, unassigned, frozen, full, off-site, or suspended media states. The data for this report is only calculated once in a day. So the report shows the summary till the previous date. The data for today reflects in the report that you generate tomorrow. The table in the report is organized by date and server, and shows counts for each media state. Figure 11-76 shows a sample view of Media Utilization Report. Figure 11-76 Media Utilization Report

The following are the details that are associated with the Media Utilization report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Media Utilization Media Reports Report > Report Templates > Media Reports > Media Utilization.

902

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Report Purpose

Lists tabular details of media count by media status and media type. Symantec NetBackup, Symantec NetBackup Master Appliance Master Server Tabular None Yes PDF, CSV, TSV, XML, HTML All Reports > Standard Report > Media and Devices > Media Utilization

Supported products Applicable View Report Display Drill down report Can be scheduled Supported formats Mapping with NOM report

You can edit the Media Utilization report to show or hide the columns that you are interested in. All the columns are shown by default. You can also filter the report to view reports of specific master servers. The following table shows the filters for Media Utilization report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Master Server

Master Server

Select one or more master servers to view data for the virtual clients that are backed up by the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value drop-down list .

Example of filter usage: Run the Media Utilization report for a one week timeframe and for a single master server. The following report enhancements have been made for the Media State report:

The unit Years has been added for Relative Timeframe selection. You can now view data for the last X years. You can also select Year from the top-right corner of the report. The option Next has been removed from the drop-down menu for Relative Timeframe. You now cannot enter a relative timeframe like Next 2 weeks.

Tape Count report

This report shows tape count for the following Report On parameters:

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

903

Backup Media Retention Level Tape Type Volume Pool Name

In Veritas Backup Reporter (VBR), there was a separate report for each of these parameters. In OpsCenter, the three reports are merged into one report. The Tape Count report is available in the Distribution view.

Tapes Expiring in Future report

This report shows the number of media that expire at each day in the upcoming seven days. This time frame can be changed to show more in to the future. The report is helpful in determining if a large quantity of media may become free in the future which could justify delaying the purchase of more media. Note: The filter Backup Media Role applied to the Tape Expiring Now report does not return any data.

Tapes Expiring Now report

This report lists the media that are about to expire. The Volume Pool Name , Media ID, and Media Barcode that are listed make it easy to locate the media. The default time frame when the report is clicked will show what is expiring in the next 24 hours. That time frame can be changed to show media expiring in the next week, month, or any future time window desirable.

Vault Media Usage report

This report shows off-site media trends for selected vaults and current off-site media count. The report consists of two component reports, a bar chart and a table. This report helps understand your off-site media trends. Questions like the following are answered by this report:

How does the off-site media count vary for each vault? What are the details of the current off-site media ?

The bar chart shows the weekly trend of off-site media counts for selected vaults. While running the report you select the vaults for which you want to run this report. The report shows a weekly line trend for selected vault. This chart is a good indication of how the off-site media count varies over the period of time.

904

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

You can compare the media counts of different vaults to see which vault is consuming more media and how it varies. The report table provides the details of vaulted media for the selected vaults. When you run the report you specify the vault names. The report provides important media details like media ID, off-site slot number, container ID, expiration date, barcode , and so on.

Media Reports > Media Expiration Schedule

This report gives graphical representation of the expiration schedule for media. The report predicts the availability of media based on the expiration date of the media. Using this report you can determine what media will be available for reuse. The stacked bars represent the number of media of a specific type that are expired or going to expire on a particular day. Different colors are used in the bars for different media types. Tool tips for the bar segments provide the media type and count of the media that is available on that day. Figure 11-77 shows a sample view of Media Expiration Schedule Report. Figure 11-77 Media Expiration Schedule Report

The following are the details that are associated with the Media Expiration Schedule report:
Report Name Report Category Media Expiration Schedule Media Reports

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

905

Where to Locate

Report > Report Templates > Media Reports > Media Expiration Schedule. Stacked bars representing number of media getting expired on a particular reporting day. Symantec NetBackup, Symantec NetBackup Master Appliance Master Server Historical Yes. See Media Expiration Details. Yes PDF, CSV, TSV, XML, HTML All Reports > Standard Report > Media and Devices> Media Expiration Schedule

Report Purpose

Supported products Applicable View Report Display Drill down report Can be scheduled Supported formats Mapping with NOM report

You can edit the Media Expiration Schedule report to show or hide the columns that you are interested in. All the columns are shown by default. You can also filter the report to view reports of specific master servers. The following table shows the filters for Media Expiration Schedule report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Master Server

Master Server

Select one or more master servers to view data for the virtual clients that are backed up by the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value drop-down list .

Example of filter usage: Run the Media Expiration Schedule report for a specific master server to view the expiration schedule of media for that master server. The following report enhancements have been made for the Media Expiration Schedule report:

A new drilldown report named Media Expiration Details has been added. The unit Years has been added for Relative Timeframe selection. You can now view data for the last X years. You can also select Year from the top-right corner of the report.

906

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

The following options have been removed from TimeFrameGroupBy selection:

Days of week Average Days of week total Hours of day Average Hours of day Total Minutes Month of year Average Month of year total Quarter of year Average Quarter of year total

Figure 11-2 shows a sample view of Media Expiration Schedule Report. Figure 11-78 Media Expiration Details Report

The following are the details that are associated with the Media Expiration Details report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Media Expiration Details Media reports (Drill down) Report > Report Templates > Media Reports > Media Expiration Schedule (click the bar in the historical graph) Details regarding number of media getting expired on a particular reporting day along with media details Symantec NetBackup, Symantec NetBackup Master Appliance Master Server Tabular None Yes PDF, CSV, TSV, XML, HTML

Report Purpose

Supported products Applicable View Report Display Drill down report Can be scheduled Supported formats

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

907

Mapping with NOM report

All Reports > Standard Report > Backup Media Reports > Media Expiration Schedule (click the bar in the historical graph)

You can edit the Media Expiration Details report to show or hide the columns that you are interested in. All the columns are shown by default. You can also filter the report to view reports of specific master servers. The following table shows the filters for Media Expiration Details report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Master Server

Master Server

Select one or more master servers to view data for the virtual clients that are backed up by the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value drop-down list .

Example of filter usage: Run the Media Expiration Details report for a specific master server to view the media expiration details for that master server.

About Performance reports in OpsCenter

This section describes performance reports.
Storage Unit Usage report Master Server Job Throughput report See Storage Unit Usage report on page 907. See Master Server Job Throughput report on page 908. See Media Server Job Throughput report on page 914. See Disk Usage report on page 915.

Media Server Job Throughput

Disk Usage report

Storage Unit Usage report

This report shows storage unit usage for a selected master server and time frame. The first column of each row of the report table lists a storage unit. The storage unit name is also a drilldown link to a detailed report. The media server name in the second column is also a drilldown link.

908

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

The rest of the row provides details such as total number of jobs, total volume processed (KB), average throughput (KB/sec), duration of activity and percentage of utilization in terms of duration.
Storage unit throughput report This drilldown report from the Storage Unit column shows the data transfer rate (throughput) of the selected storage unit. This drilldown report uses the run time parameters that are passed from the main report. Storage unit usage details for media server report This drilldown report from the Media Server Name column shows the usage details for all of the storage units of the selected media server. This drilldown report uses the run time parameters that are passed from the main report. The Storage unit column of the report table is a link to a drilldown throughput report. The rest of the cells indicate whether the storage unit was in use or not during the time slot.

Master Server Job Throughput report

This report provides a tool to compare performance of various master servers. The table of this report displays throughput and job success information for each master server. It shows job count and job success rate, and enables you to compare throughputs of different servers to identify any servers that are performing poorly. Figure 11-79 shows a sample view of the Master Server Job Throughput report. Figure 11-79 Master Server Job Throughput report

Drilldown links for the server name, number of total and successful jobs columns are also provided.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

909

Total jobs of a server report

This drilldown report from the Total Job Count column lists the details for all jobs for a selected server. The report details include details like job type and status, policy and schedule names, and start time. This drilldown report uses the run time parameters that are passed from the main report.

Successful jobs of a server report

This drilldown report from the Number of Successful Jobs column shows details for successful jobs for a given server. The report provides details like job type, policy and schedule names, volume, and file counts. This drilldown report uses the run time parameters that are passed from the main report.

The following are the details that are associated with the Master Server Job Throughput report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Master Server Job Throughput Performance Reports Report > Report Templates > Performance Reports > Master Server Job Throughput This report shows the performance of a master server. NetBackup, NetBackup Appliance Master Server Tabular Yes See Total Jobs of a Server report on page 910. See Successful Jobs of a Server on page 912. Can be scheduled Supported formats Mapping with NOM report Yes PDF, CSV, TSV, XML, HTML Reporting > All Reports > Standard Reports > Performance Report > Master Server Job Throughput

Report Purpose Supported products Applicable View Report Display Drill down report

The following table shows the filters for Master Server Job Throughput report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report.

910

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Master Server

Master Server

Select one or more master servers to view data for the clients backed up by the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value drop-down list .

Example of filter usage: You may run the Master Server Job Throughput report for a specific master servers to view the performance of the specific master servers. The following report enhancements have been made for the Master Server Job Throughput report:

The unit Years has been added for Relative Timeframe selection. You can now view data for the last x years. The option Next has been removed from the drop-down menu for Relative Timeframe. You now cannot enter a relative timeframe like Next 2 weeks. This is because the report does not support any futuristic data.

Total Jobs of a Server report

This tabular report shows the job information run for a master server i.e. Client Name, Job Type, Job Status, Policy Name, Schedule Name etc. Figure 11-80 shows a sample view of Total Jobs of a Server report.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

911

Figure 11-80

Total Jobs of a Server report

The following are the details that are associated with the Total Jobs of a Server report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Total Jobs of a Server Performance Reports Report > Report Templates > Performance Reports > Master Server Job Throughput (drill down from Total Job Count column) > Total Jobs of a Server This report shows the job information for a master server. NetBackup, NetBackup Appliance Master Server Tabular No Yes PDF, CSV, TSV, XML, HTML

Report Purpose Supported products Applicable View Report Display Drill down report Can be scheduled Supported formats

912

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Mapping with NOM report

Reporting > All Reports > Standard Reports > Performance Report > Master Server Job Throughput (drill down on Number of Successful Jobs column) > Total Jobs of a Server

The following table shows the filters for Total Jobs of a Server report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Master Server

Master Server

Select one or more master servers to view data for the clients backed up by the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value drop-down list .

The following report enhancements have been made for the Backup Job Size Variance report:

The unit Years has been added for Relative Timeframe selection. You can now view data for the last x years. The option Next has been removed from the drop-down menu for Relative Timeframe. You now cannot enter a relative timeframe like Next 2 weeks. This is because the report does not support any futuristic data.

Successful Jobs of a Server

This drilldown report is obtained when you click number of successful jobs (link) from the Master Server Job Throughput report. This tabular report shows details of all successful jobs of a Server. It shows information like Client Name, Policy Name, Schedule Name, Start Time, Number of Files, Duration, Volume, Throughput etc. Figure 11-81 shows a sample view of the Successful Jobs of a Server report.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

913

Figure 11-81

Successful Jobs of a Server report

The following are the details that are associated with the Successful Jobs of a Server report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Successful Jobs of a Server Performance Reports Report > Report Templates > Performance Reports > Master Server Job Throughput (drill down from Number of Successful Jobs column) > Successful Jobs of a Server This report shows the successful jobs for a master server. NetBackup, NetBackup Appliance Master Server Tabular No Yes PDF, CSV, TSV, XML, HTML

Report Purpose Supported products Applicable View Report Display Drill down report Can be scheduled Supported formats

914

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Mapping with NOM report

Reporting > All Reports > Standard Reports > Performance Report > Master Server Job Throughput (drill down on Number of Successful Jobs column) > Total Jobs of a Server

The following table shows the filters for Successful Jobs of a Server report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Master Server

Master Server

Select one or more master servers to view data for the clients that are backed up by the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value drop-down list .

The following report enhancements have been made for the Successful Jobs of a Server report:

The unit Years has been added for Relative Timeframe selection. You can now view data for the last x years. The option Next has been removed from the drop-down menu for Relative Timeframe. You now cannot enter a relative timeframe like Next 2 weeks. This is because the report does not support any futuristic data.

Media Server Job Throughput report

This report provides details of data that is backed up by NetBackup media servers and shows server throughput. The report is a useful tool to compare performance of the media servers that are present in your NetBackup environment. The pie chart provides a breakdown of the volume of data that is processed for each media server. A drilldown detail link for throughput details is provided from each volume pie slice.
Job details for client and media server This drilldown report from the client name report column provides details for a given client, job type, job status, and media server. The report details include job ID, job type, exit status, start time, and duration in seconds. This drilldown report uses the run time parameters that are passed from the parent report.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

915

Media server throughput for media server report

You can use this drill-down report from the Throughput (KB/sec) column to see the variation of throughput per day. The throughput is represented by a bar for each day of the reporting period. This drill-down report uses the run time parameters that are passed from the main report.

Disk Usage report

This report shows disk usage for the selected server and time frame. The table in the report provides details such as total number of jobs, total volume processed (KB), average throughput (KB/sec), duration of activity, and percentage utilization in terms of duration. Figure 11-82 shows a sample view of the Disk Usage report. Figure 11-82 Disk Usage report

The Disk Name and Media Server Name columns of the table contain drilldown links to detailed throughput and disk usage reports.
Disk Throughput This drilldown report from the Disk Name column shows the data transfer rate (throughput) for a disk storage unit for the selected server or server groups. This drilldown report uses the run time parameters that are passed from the main report. See Disk Throughput report on page 917.

916

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Disk Usage Details

This drilldown report from the Media Server Name column shows the usage details for all the disk storage units for the selected media server. This drilldown report uses the run time parameters that are passed from the main report. The Disk cell in each row of the report table is a link to a drill-down report. The rest of the cells indicate whether the disk was in use or not during the time slot. See Disk Usage Details report on page 919.

The following are the details that are associated with the Disk Usage report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Disk Usage Performance Reports Report > Report Templates > Performance Reports > Disk Usage This report shows the disk usage of a master server. NetBackup, NetBackup Appliance Master Server Tabular Yes See Disk Throughput report on page 917. See Disk Usage Details report on page 919. Can be scheduled Supported formats Mapping with NOM report Yes PDF, CSV, TSV, XML, HTML Reporting > All Reports > Standard Reports > Performance Report > Disk Usage

Report Purpose Supported products Applicable View Report Display Drill down report

The following table shows the filters for Disk Usage report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

917

Filter
Master Server

Column
Master Server

Description
Select one or more master servers to view disk usage for the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value dropdown list.

Example of filter usage: You may run the Disk Usage report for specific master servers to view the disk usage of the specific master servers. The following report enhancements have been made for the Successful Jobs of a Server report:

The unit Years has been added for Relative Timeframe selection. You can now view data for the last x years. The option Next has been removed from the drop-down menu for Relative Timeframe. You now cannot enter a relative timeframe like Next 2 weeks. This is because the report does not support any futuristic data.

Disk Throughput report

This report shows the throughput of the selected disk. Figure 11-83 shows a sample view of the Disk Throughput report. Figure 11-83 Disk Throughput report

The following are the details that are associated with the Disk Throughput report:

918

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Report Name Report Category Where to Locate

Disk Throughput Performance Reports Report > Report Templates > Performance Reports > Disk Usage (drill down from the Disk Name column) > Disk Throughput This report shows the throughput of the selected disk. NetBackup, NetBackup Appliance Master Server Historical (Chart) No Yes PDF, CSV, TSV, XML, HTML Reporting > All Reports > Standard Reports > Performance Report > Disk Usage (drill down on Disk Name column)

Report Purpose Supported products Applicable View Report Display Drill down report Can be scheduled Supported formats Mapping with NOM report

The following table shows the filters for Disk Throughput report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Master Server

Master Server

Select one or more master servers to view disk throughput for the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value drop-down list . Select one or more disks whose throughput you want to view.

Disk

Disk

Example of filter usage: You may run the Disk Throughput report for specific master servers to view the disk throughput of the specific master servers. The following report enhancements have been made for the Disk Throughput report:

The unit Years has been added for Relative Timeframe selection. You can now view data for the last x years.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

919

The option Next has been removed from the drop-down menu for Relative Timeframe. You now cannot enter a relative timeframe like Next 2 weeks. This is because the report does not support any futuristic data. The following options have been removed from TimeFrameGroupBy selection:

Days of week Average Days of week total Hours of day Average Hours of day Total Minutes Month of year Average Month of year total Quarter Quarter of year Average Quarter of year total

Disk Usage Details report

This report shows the usage of disk for selected media server for the selected time frame. Figure 11-84 shows a sample view of the Disk usage details report.

920

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Figure 11-84

Disk Usage Details report

The following are the details that are associated with the Disk Usage Details report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Disk Usage Details Performance Reports Report > Report Templates > Performance Reports > Disk Usage (drill down from the Media Server Name column) > Disk Usage Details This report shows the disk usage for the selected media server. NetBackup, NetBackup Appliance Master Server Tabular No

Report Purpose

Supported products Applicable View Report Display Drill down report

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

921

Can be scheduled Supported formats Mapping with NOM report

Yes PDF, CSV, TSV, XML, HTML Reporting > All Reports > Standard Reports > Performance Report > Disk Usage > Disk Usage Details for Media Server

The following table shows the filters for Disk Usage Details report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Master Server

Master Server

Select one or more master servers to view disk usage details for the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value drop-down list .

Media server Disk

Media server Select one or more media servers to view disk usage details for the selected media servers in the report. Disk Select one or more disks whose details you want to view.

Example of filter usage: You may run the Disk usage details report for specific media servers to view the disk throughput of the specific media servers. The following report enhancements have been made for the Successful Jobs of a Server report:

The unit Years has been added for Relative Timeframe selection. You can now view data for the last x years. The option Next has been removed from the drop-down menu for Relative Timeframe. You now cannot enter a relative timeframe like Next 2 weeks. This is because the report does not support any futuristic data.

About Policy reports in OpsCenter

This section describes policy reports.
Top 10 Policies Using Most Server Space report Job Success Rate by Policy Type report See Top 10 Policies Using Most Server Space report on page 922. See Job Success Rate by Policy Type report on page 926.

922

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Policy Change report Policy Summary Dashboard report

See Policy Change report on page 927. See Policy Summary Dashboard report on page 927.

Top 10 Policies Using Most Server Space report

This report displays the 10 policies that have backed up the most data in your NetBackup environment. You can edit the report and run it for one or more master servers. Tool tips appear when you point at each colored bar chart. The tool tip shows the master server, policy, and also shows the volume of data in MB. Click Show Chart as Table link at the bottom of the report to view the report details in a tabular format. The table lists the volume of data in MB for each policy. A new drilldown report named Job Details for Policy is now available from the main report. This drilldown report from the colored bars in the chart provides details about all jobs for a selected policy. The drilldown report includes information, such as, job type, status code, client name, and volume in KB. Figure 11-85 shows a sample view of the Top 10 Policies Using Most Server Space report.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

923

Figure 11-85

Top 10 Policies Using Most Server Space report

The following are details associated with the Top 10 Policies using most server space report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Top 10 Policies Using Most Server Space Policy Report > Report Templates > Policy Reports > Top 10 Policies using most Server Space This report shows a ranking of backup policies by space consumption. This report is valid for NetBackup and NetBackup Appliance. Symantec NetBackup, Symantec NetBackup Master Appliance

Report Purpose

Supported products

924

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Applicable View Report Display Drill down report

Master Server Ranking (Chart) Job Details for Policy See Job Details for Policy on page 924.

Can be scheduled Supported export formats Mapping with NOM report

Yes PDF, CSV, TSV, XML, HTML All Reports > Standard Reports > Policy > Top 10 Policies using most Server Space

The following table lists the filters for Top 10 Policies using most server space report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Master Server

Master Server Select one or more master servers to view data for the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value drop-down list . Job Type Select one or more job types like Archive, Backup, Restore etc. to view data for the selected job types. By default, the report displays information for the following types of jobs:

Job

Archive Backup Catalog Backup Vault

You must select at least one job type from the Value list.

Example of filter usage: You may run the Top 10 Policies using most server space report for specific master servers or views to view details only for the specific master servers or views.

Job Details for Policy

A new drilldown report named Job Details for Policy is available when you click the colored bars from the Top 10 Policies Using Most Server Space report. This drilldown report provides details about all jobs for a selected policy.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

925

This drilldown report uses the run time parameters that are passed from the main report. The drilldown report includes information, such as, job type, status code, client name, and volume in KB. Figure 11-86 shows a sample view of the Job Details for Policy report. Figure 11-86 Job Details for Policy report

The following are details associated with the Job Details for Policy report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Job Details for Policy Drill down report Report > Report Templates > Policy Reports > Top 10 Policies Using most Server Space (click the colored bars) This report lists all jobs for the selected policy. This report is valid for NetBackup and NetBackup Appliance. Symantec NetBackup, Symantec NetBackup Master Appliance Master Server Tabular No Yes

Report Purpose

Supported products Applicable View Report Display Drill down report Can be scheduled

926

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Supported export formats Mapping with NOM report

PDF, CSV, TSV, XML, HTML All Reports > Standard Reports > Policy > Top 10 Policies using most Server Space > Job Details for Policy

The following table lists the filters for Job Details for Policy report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Policy

Policy Data Select one or more policy data classification names like Gold, Classification Silver, Bronze etc. to view data for the policies having the Name selected data classification names. Policy Name Select one or more policy names to view data for the selected policies.

Example of filter usage: You may run the report for specific policy data classification names to view details only for the specific policy classifications.

Job Success Rate by Policy Type report

This report provides a quick view of the status of jobs by policy type. The report shows the job success rate for clients, server, and job policy type. The bar chart shows the count of successful, partially successful, and failed jobs per policy type. The tool tips in the colored bars provide job counts and also are drilldown links to view the details for the policy. The table in the report displays job information, such as, client name, policy type, and the success rate. Note: This report may not show appropriate data for duplication jobs that are associated with SLP policy. This issue occurs because the duplication jobs do not have a policy type. The job batches duplication of images that are created from possibly different policies and policy types. The duplication job itself has an internal policy that is created but this internal policy does not have the policy type set because this is not a backup job.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

927

Job details for policy type report

This drilldown report from the Policy Type column and the colored bars in the chart provides details about all jobs for a selected policy type. This drilldown report uses the run time parameters that are passed from the main report. The table includes information, such as, exit status, client name, volume in KB, and count of files.

Successful, partially successful, and There are three drilldown reports from the failed job details for policy type report Number of Successful Jobs, Number of Partially Successful Jobs, or Number of Failed Jobs columns. The job exit status is used as a filter for the reports. These reports are similar and provide details for all jobs for a selected client and policy type. This drilldown report uses the run time parameters that are passed from the main report. The table in this report provides details like, policy and schedule name, start and end times, and duration for the job. The table for failed jobs also includes a column for the job exit status.

Policy Change report

This report shows a count of the changes that were made to job policies in a given time frame for the selected servers. The pie chart shows the number of policy changes (a policy can change multiple times) for each master server. (Each different server appears in a different color in the chart.) Tool tips in the chart provide a count of the changes. The table in the report displays the count of changes that were made to each policy for each server.

Policy Summary Dashboard report

This report acts as a dashboard of activities that are summarized by your policies. It gives an overview of activities and can be used as a tool to troubleshoot and manage by exception using the drilldown links to other detail reports. It provides answers for some of the following questions for each policy:

What is the total number of jobs? How many jobs were successful?

928

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

How many jobs were partially successful? How many jobs failed?

The table in this report shows information per policy like policy name and type, job volume in MB, job count, and counts for job exit status. You can also drill down from the job exit status counts in the columns and view individual policy details based on exit status and job policy and type. There are drilldown reports available from the Total Jobs, Number of Successful Jobs, Number of Partially Successful Jobs, or Number of Failed Jobs columns of the main report. These drilldown reports provide an overview of all jobs for the selected policy name, server, and time frame based on the job status. These drilldown reports use the run time parameters that are passed from the main report. Figure 11-87 shows a sample view of the Policy Summary Dashboard report. Figure 11-87 Policy Summary Dashboard report

The following are details associated with the Policy Summary Dashboard report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Policy Summary Dashboard Policy Report > Report Templates > Policy Reports > Policy Summary Dashboard Tabular report summarizing size, throughput, job counts and success rate by master server, policy and policy type. Symantec NetBackup, Symantec NetBackup Master Appliance

Report Purpose

Supported products

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

929

Applicable View Report Display Drill down report

Master Server, Client Tabular Yes See Total Jobs for Policy on page 930. See Successful Jobs for Policy on page 931. See Partial Jobs for Policy report on page 933. See Failed Jobs for Policy on page 935.

Can be scheduled Supported export formats Mapping with NOM report

Yes PDF, CSV, TSV, XML, HTML All Reports > Standard Reports > Policy > Policy Summary Dashboard

The following table lists the filters for Policy Summary Dashboard report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Master Server

Master Server Select one or more master servers to view data for the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value dropdown list. Consider The default selection is Yes. Partially Select No if you do not want to consider partially successful Successful Job jobs as successful. as Successful Selecting Yes or No may impact the Success Rate percentage that is shown in the report. Consider a policy that has 5 successful jobs, 3 partially successful jobs and 2 failed jobs. If you select the value as Yes, the Success Rate column shows 80%. However if you select the value as No, the Success Rate column shows 50%.

Success Rate

Example of filter usage: You may run the Policy Summary Dashboard report for specific master servers or views to view details only for the specific master servers or views.

930

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Total Jobs for Policy

This drilldown report is available when you click a value (link) from the Total Jobs column of the Policy Summary Dashboard report. This drilldown report provides an overview of all jobs for the selected policy name, server, and time frame. This drilldown report uses the run time parameters that are passed from the main report. The report provides details like schedule name, start times, and duration of the job etc. Figure 11-88 shows a sample view of the Total Jobs for Policy report. Figure 11-88 Total Jobs for Policy report

The following are details associated with the Total Jobs for Policy report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Total Jobs for Policy Policy (Drill down report) Report > Report Templates > Policy Reports > Policy Summary Dashboard (click total jobs) > Total Jobs for Policy

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

931

Report Purpose

This report lists all jobs of the selected policy. This report is valid for NetBackup and NetBackup Appliance. Symantec NetBackup, Symantec NetBackup Master Appliance Master Server, Client Tabular No Yes PDF, CSV, TSV, XML, HTML All Reports > Standard Reports > Policy > Policy Summary Dashboard > Total Jobs for Policy

Supported products Applicable View Report Display Drill down report Can be scheduled Supported formats Mapping with NOM report

The following table lists the filters for Total Jobs for Policy report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Master Server

Master Server Select one or more master servers to view data for the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value dropdown list. Policy Name Policy Type Select one or more policy names to view data for the selected policies. Select one or more policy types to view data for the selected policy types.

Policy

Example of filter usage: You may run the Total Jobs for Policy report for specific policies to view details only for the specific policies.

Successful Jobs for Policy

This drilldown report is available when you click the successful jobs (link) from the Policy Summary Dashboard report. This drilldown report provides an overview of all the successful jobs for the selected policy name, server, and time frame. This drilldown report uses the run time parameters that are passed from the main report. The report provides details like schedule name, start times, and duration of the job etc.

932

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Figure 11-89 shows a sample view of the Successful Jobs for Policy report. Figure 11-89 Successful Jobs for Policy report

The following are details associated with the Successful Jobs for Policy report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Successful Jobs for Policy Policy (Drill down report) Report > Report Templates > Policy Reports > Policy Summary Dashboard (click Successful jobs) This report lists all the successful jobs of the selected policy. This report is valid for NetBackup and NetBackup Appliance. Symantec NetBackup, Symantec NetBackup Master Appliance Master Server, Client Tabular No

Report Purpose

Supported products Applicable View Report Display Drill down report

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

933

Can be scheduled Supported formats Mapping with NOM report

Yes PDF, CSV, TSV, XML, HTML All Reports > Standard Reports > Policy > Policy Summary Dashboard > Successful Jobs for Policy

The following table lists the filters for Successful Jobs for Policy report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Master Server

Master Server Select one or more master servers to view data for the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value drop-down list . Policy Name Policy Type Select one or more policy names to view data for the selected policies. Select one or more policy types to view data for the selected policy types.

Policy

Example of filter usage: You may run the Successful Jobs for Policy report for specific policies to view details only for the specific policies.

Partial Jobs for Policy report

This drilldown report is available when you click a value (link) from the Number of Partially Successful Jobs from the Policy Summary Dashboard report. This drilldown report provides an overview of all the partially successful jobs for the selected policy name, server, and time frame. This drilldown report uses the run time parameters that are passed from the main report. The report provides details like schedule name, start times, and duration of the job etc. Figure 11-90 shows a sample view of the Successful Jobs for Policy report.

934

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Figure 11-90

Partially Successful Jobs for Policy report

The following are details associated with the Partially Successful Jobs for Policy report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Partially Successful Jobs for Policy Policy (Drill down report) Report > Report Templates > Policy Reports > Policy Summary Dashboard (click Partially Successful jobs) > Partially Successful Jobs for Policy This report lists all the partially successful jobs of the selected policy. This report is valid for NetBackup and NetBackup Appliance. Symantec NetBackup, Symantec NetBackup Master Appliance Master Server, Client Tabular No Yes

Report Purpose

Supported products Applicable View Report Display Drill down report Can be scheduled

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

935

Supported formats Mapping with NOM report

PDF, CSV, TSV, XML, HTML All Reports > Standard Reports > Policy > Policy Summary Dashboard > Partially Successful Jobs for Policy

The following table lists the filters for Partial Jobs for Policy report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Master Server

Master Server Select one or more master servers to view data for the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value drop-down list . Policy Name Policy Type Select one or more policy names to view data for the selected policies. Select one or more policy types to view data for the selected policy types.

Policy

Example of filter usage: You may run the Partial Jobs for Policy report for specific policies to view details only for the specific policies.

Failed Jobs for Policy

This drilldown report is available when you click a value (link) from the Number of Failed Jobs column of the Policy Summary Dashboard report. This drilldown report provides an overview of all the failed jobs for the selected policy name, server, and time frame. This drilldown report uses the run time parameters that are passed from the main report. The report provides details like schedule name, start times, and duration of the job etc. Figure 11-91 shows a sample view of the Failed Jobs for Policy report.

936

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Figure 11-91

Failed Jobs for Policy report

The following are details associated with the Failed Jobs for Policy report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Failed Jobs for Policy Policy (Drill down report) Report > Report Templates > Policy Reports > Policy Summary Dashboard (click Failed jobs) > Failed Jobs for Policy This report lists all the failed jobs of the selected policy. This report is valid for NetBackup and NetBackup Appliance. Symantec NetBackup, Symantec NetBackup Master Appliance Master Server, Client Tabular No Yes

Report Purpose

Supported products Applicable View Report Display Drill down report Can be scheduled

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

937

Supported formats Mapping with NOM report

PDF, CSV, TSV, XML, HTML All Reports > Standard Reports > Policy > Policy Summary Dashboard > Failed Jobs for Policy

The following table lists the filters for Failed Jobs for Policy report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Master Server

Master Server Select one or more master servers to view data for the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value drop-down list . Policy Name Policy Type Select one or more policy names to view data for the selected policies. Select one or more policy types to view data for the selected policy types.

Policy

Example of filter usage: You may run the Failed Jobs for Policy report for specific policies to view details only for the specific policies.

About Restore reports in OpsCenter

This section describes restore job reports. These reports are applicable only for NetBackup.
Restore Job Summary by Job Count report See Restore > Restore Job Attempt Summary by Job Count on page 937. See Restore > Restore Job Attempt Summary by Volume Restored on page 939. See Restore > Restore Job Details on page 941.

Restore Job Summary by Volume Restored report Restore Job Details report

Restore > Restore Job Attempt Summary by Job Count

This report shows graphical summary of number of restore jobs per day. Figure 11-92 shows a sample view of Restore Job Attempt Summary by Job Count Report.

938

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Figure 11-92

Restore Job Attempt Summary by Job Count Report

In addition, you can view the report in a tabular format. Figure 11-93 shows a sample view of Restore Job Attempt Summary by Job Count Report. Figure 11-93 Restore Job Attempt Summary by Job Count Report (Tabular)

The following are the details that are associated with the Restore Job Attempt Summary by Job Count report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Restore Job Attempt Summary by Job Count Backup All Reports > Report Templates > Restore > Restore Job Summary by Job Count report. Graphical summary of number of jobs per day. Symantec NetBackup, Symantec NetBackup Master Appliance

Report Purpose Supported products

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

939

Applicable View Report Display Drill down report Can be scheduled Supported formats Mapping with NOM report

Master Server, Client Historical Yes. See Restore Job Attempt Details Yes PDF, CSV, TSV, XML, HTML All Reports > Standard Reports > Restore Job Summary

You can edit this report to show or hide the columns that you are interested in. All the columns are shown by default. You can also filter the report to view reports of specific master servers. The following table shows the filters for the report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Master Server

Master Server

Select one or more master servers to view data for the virtual clients that are backed up by the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value drop-down list .

Example of filter usage: Run the report for a specific master server to view the restore jobs per day for that master server.

Restore > Restore Job Attempt Summary by Volume Restored

This report shows graphical summary of volume of restore jobs per day. Figure 11-94 shows a sample view of Restore Job Attempt Summary by Volume Restored Report.

940

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Figure 11-94

Restore Job Attempt Summary by Volume Restored Report

In addition, you can view the historical report in tabular format. Figure 11-95 shows a sample view of Restore Job Attempt Summary by Volume Restored Report. Figure 11-95 Restore Job Attempt Summary by Volume Restored Report (Tabular)

The following are the details that are associated with the Restore Job Attempt Summary by Volume Restored report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Restore Job Attempt Summary by Volume Restored Restore All Reports > Report Templates > Restore > Restore Job Summary by Volume Restored report. Graphical summary showing number of restore jobs per day.

Report Purpose

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

941

Supported products Applicable View Report Display Drill down report Can be scheduled Supported formats Mapping with NOM report

Symantec NetBackup, Symantec NetBackup Master Appliance Master Server, Client Historical Yes. See Restore Job Attempt Details Yes PDF, CSV, TSV, XML, HTML All Reports > Standard Reports > Restore Job Summary

You can edit this report to show or hide the columns that you are interested in. All the columns are shown by default. You can also filter the report to view reports of specific master servers. The following table shows the filters for the report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Master Server

Master Server

Select one or more master servers to view data for the virtual clients that are backed up by the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value drop-down list .

Example of filter usage: Run the report for a specific master server to view the Restore Job Summary by Volume Restored for that master server. Following filter enhancements have been done for the report.

New supported formats TSV, XML, PDF, and HTML are added.

Restore > Restore Job Details

This report lists all the completed restore jobs for a selected timeframe. Figure 11-96 shows a sample view of Restore Job Details Report. Figure 11-96 Restore Job Details Report

942

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

The following are the details that are associated with the Restore Job Details report:
Report Name Report Category Where to Locate Restore Job Details Restore All Reports > Report Templates > Restore > Restore Job Details report. Lists all completed jobs for the selected timeframe. Symantec NetBackup, Symantec NetBackup Master Appliance Master Server, Client Historical, Ranking, Distribution None Yes PDF, CSV, TSV, XML, HTML All Reports > Standard Reports > Jobs > Restore Job Details

Report Purpose Supported products Applicable View Report Display Drill down report Can be scheduled Supported formats Mapping with NOM report

You can edit the Restore Job Details report to show or hide the columns that you are interested in. All the columns are shown by default. You can also filter the report to view reports of specific master servers. The following table shows the filters for Restore Job Details report and how you can use these filters to view specific data in the report. Filter
View

Column

Description
Select a view to show data for the selected view in the report. By default All My Views is selected.

Master Server

Master Server

Select one or more master servers to view data for the virtual clients that are backed up by the selected master servers in the report. All master servers that are added to the OpsCenter console are shown in the Value drop-down list .

Example of filter usage: Run the Restore Job Details report for a specific master server to view the completed restore jobs for that master server. The following report enhancements have been made for the Restore Job Details report:

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

943

The unit Years has been added for Relative Timeframe selection. You can now view data for the last x years. You can also see the Years tab on top-right corner of the Tabular Backup Report. The default Relative Timeframe for this report was 28 days now it is changes to next 2 weeks.

The following filter enhancements have been made for the Restore Job Details report:

The units Weeks, Months and Years have been added for Relative Timeframe selection. You can now view data for the last X years. The default Relative Timeframe for this report is changed to Previous 14 days. The column Elapsed Time has been removed. New supported formats like TSV, XML, PDF & HTML added. Rows per page parameter value were 20 now it is set to 100.

About Storage Lifecycle Policy reports

The Storage Lifecycle Policy reports in OpsCenter help you gain an end-to-end visibility across destinations in a storage lifecycle policy. With NetBackup 7.1, you can duplicate to remote master servers and thus specify a different master server as a storage destination in an SLP. The SLP reports in OpsCenter show an end-to-end view of the SLP process that includes backup to import of duplicated image into different NetBackup domains. The SLP reports help you to verify if each step in the SLP is executed and identify the possible bottlenecks. The Storage Lifecycle Policy reports in OpsCenter help you find answers to the following questions:

Is the SLP performing according to schedule? Have the 2nd, 3rd Copies been made? Does the original image still exist? Am I at a risk of data loss? A copy at a certain phase is about to expire and the subsequent phases copy has not been made. What is my backlog? Is it getting steadily worse?

Review the following points about SLP reports:

The SLP reports are applicable only to NetBackup. The SLP reports can be run only for 7.1 or higher master servers. If you upgrade from 7.0 (or 7.0.1) to a 7.1 master server, the SLP reports also show the images for 7.0 or 7.0.1 master servers.

944

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

If you upgrade NetBackup from 7.0 or 7.0.1 to 7.1 and the SLP definition contains multiple backup operations, then the first copy is marked as "Backup" and the remaining are marked as "Duplication". For example, if you created an SLP that contains four destinations where two destinations are for backup and two are for duplication, then image copy data marks the first copy as Backup and remaining for Duplication.

The data that is shown in the SLP reports is collected from the NetBackup catalog and the SLP worklist by NBSL. Once the initial data collection is complete, the updated data is collected from the NetBackup catalog in every 15 minutes and from the SLP worklist in every 10 minutes. The SLP worklist is located in the EMM and contains metadata like how many copies need to be created, where they need to be created, when they are completed etc. The data that is displayed in the SLP reports is based on the image data that exists in the SLP worklist and the NetBackup catalog. The effects of deduplication, compression, or optimized deduplication on image or copy size are not considered in the SLP reports. By default, data for SLP reports is purged from the OpsCenter database after 90 days. You can also customize the purge interval for SLP images from Settings > Configuration > Data Purge. In general, the copy data in the SLP reports (like Copies Completed column) is based on the data that is collected from the SLP worklist. EMM creates the SLP worklist once a backup is complete. OpsCenter collects this data in every 10 minutes and shows it in the SLP reports. Depending on when the SLP worklist is created and also the OpsCenter data collection cycle, the OpsCenter reports show details for the copy data. The timeframe filter for all SLP reports is based on the time when the primary backup image (and not an image copy) was created. For example, if you view the SLP Status by Image Copy report between 7'th May 1:00 P.M. to 8'th May 1:00 P.M., then the copies that got created for an SLP after 8'th May 1:00 P.M. may be displayed. These copies may be displayed as the timeframe filter is based on the time when the primary backup image was created and not on the copy creation time. SLP reports do not consider non-SLP based duplications. Creating custom reports for SLPs is not supported.

The following are two high-level SLP reports:

SLP Status report SLP Backlog report See SLP Status report on page 945. See SLP Backlog report on page 950.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

945

Before using the SLP reports, you must understand the SLP concept and how duplication to remote master servers works in NetBackup. See About SLP and duplication to remote master servers on page 945.

About SLP and duplication to remote master servers

This section gives a brief overview about SLP and also duplicating to remote master servers in NetBackup. A Storage Lifecycle Policy (SLP) is a storage plan that specifies where data will be stored and for how long. The SLP determines where the backup image is initially written and where it is subsequently duplicated. With NetBackup 7.1, you can also duplicate backup image or duplicate copies from one storage domain to another for business continuity planning purposes. This means that you can now copy backup images from one master server to another master server, and also specify a different master server as a storage destination in an SLP. The SLP and duplication to remote master functionality in NetBackup allows you to move data to tiers of storage on different master servers commensurate with the value of the data as it ages. More information about SLP and duplication to remote master functionality is available in the Symantec NetBackup Administrators Guide.

SLP Status report

The SLP Status report provides a summary of lifecycle policies that are associated with a master server. The SLP Status report is a tabular report that lets you know the current progress of SLPs in the selected timeframe for each master server that is added to the OpsCenter console. The SLP status report gives a quick summary of the SLP activity and lets you identify the SLPs that are incomplete. You can see if all your duplications (copies) are complete or not. By clicking the links in the SLP Status report, you can drill down to more detailed reports. You can use the drill-down reports to focus on SLPs, images, or the image copies that are incomplete. You can also view SLP status for each destination and also for each SLP. From the SLP Status report, you can drill down to the following reports:

946

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

SLP Status by SLP report

See SLP Status by SLP report on page 951. From the SLP Status by SLP report, you can drill down to the following reports:

SLP Status by Destinations report See SLP Status by Destinations report on page 969. SLP Duplication Progress report See SLP Duplication Progress report on page 973.

SLP Status by Client report SLP Status by Image report SLP Status by Image Copy report

See SLP Status by Client report on page 956. See SLP Status by Image report on page 961. See SLP Status by Image Copy report on page 966.

The SLP Status report comprises of the following columns:

Master Server (where the SLP lives) Name of the master server (link) where the SLP runs. The SLP may run on the origin master server or any of the destination master servers (in case of duplication to remote master). The NetBackup master server must be of 7.1 or a later version and also added to the OpsCenter console. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report. Click on the master server (link) to see the drilldown report named SLP Status by SLP. Oldest Unfinished Image This column tells you about the oldest image that is SLP-incomplete for the selected master server. This column represents the image end time (and date). The data from this column helps you to identify the possible bottlenecks in the SLP process. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report. Total Clients Number of the unique clients that are backed up by the SLP for the selected master server. Note that if the same client is backed up twice or thrice by the SLP, the client is counted only once. Click the number (link) to view the SLP Status by Client report. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

947

Total Existing Images

Total number of the images that are present in the OpsCenter database for SLPs on the selected master server (includes both SLP-complete images and SLP-incomplete images). Click the number (link) to view the SLP Status by Image report for the specific master server. This report displays details of images in the OpsCenter database that are associated with the SLPs on the selected master server. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report.

Images % SLP Complete

Percentage of images in the OpsCenter database that are SLP-complete for the selected master server. This column is calculated using data from the following columns of the SLP Status report:

Images SLP Complete Total Existing Images

The contents of Images % SLP Complete column is calculated by using the following formula: Images SLP Complete / Total Existing Images * 100 This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report. Images SLP Complete Number of images in the OpsCenter database that are SLP-complete for the specific SLP on the selected master server. You can remove this column when you edit the report. Click the number (link) to view the SLP Status by Image report. A filtered view of the report appears that displays details of images in the OpsCenter database that are SLP-complete for the specific SLP. Images Not SLP Complete Number of images in the OpsCenter database that are SLP-incomplete for the specific SLP on the selected master server. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report. Click the number (link) to view the SLP Status by Image report. A filtered view of the report appears that displays details of images in the OpsCenter database that are SLP-incomplete.

948

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Total Expected Copies

Total number of image copies in the OpsCenter database for the specific SLP on the selected master server (includes both complete copies and incomplete copies). This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report. Click the number (link) to view the SLP Status by Image Copy report.

% Copy Complete

Percentage of completed copies in the OpsCenter database for the specific SLP on the selected master server. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report. The data for this column is calculated by using data from the following columns of the SLP Status By SLP report:

Copies Completed Total Copies

The contents of % Copy Complete column is calculated by using the following formula: Copies Completed / Total Copies * 100 Copies Completed Number of the completed copies that are present in the OpsCenter database for SLPs on the selected master server. Click the number (link) to view the SLP Status by Image Copy report. A filtered view of the report appears that displays details for copies in the OpsCenter database that are complete for the selected master server. You can remove this column when you edit the report. Copies Not Complete Number of incomplete copies in the OpsCenter database for SLPs on a selected master server. This column is calculated using the following formula: Copies Not Complete = Total Copies Copies Completed Click the number (link) to view the SLP Status by Image Copy report. A filtered view of the report appears that displays details for image copies in the OpsCenter database that are incomplete for the selected master server. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

949

Total Expected Size - all copies (MB)

Expected aggregate size of all copies for SLPs on the selected master server that are present in the OpsCenter database. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report. The Total Expected Size for all copies is calculated by using the following formula: Total Expected Size for all copies = (Number of copies) * (backup copy size)

Note: The total expected size for all copies is a front-end

size and is derived from the number of copies multiplied by the size of backup copy. The effects of deduplication, compression, or optimized deduplication on the Total Expected Size all copies are not considered in the SLP reports. Completed Copy Size (%) Percentage of completed copy size for the selected master server. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report. The Completed Copy Size (%) for the specific master server is calculated using data from the following columns of the SLP Status report:

Completed Copy Size Total Expected Size all copies

The contents of Completed Copy Size (%) column is calculated for each master server by using the following formula: Completed Copy Size / Total Expected Size all copies * 100 Completed Copy Size (MB) Aggregate size of all the completed copies in the OpsCenter database for the selected master server. You can remove this column when you edit the report. Note: The Completed Copy Size is a front-end size. The effects of deduplication, compression, or optimized deduplication on completed copy size are not considered in the SLP reports.

950

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Remaining Copy Size (MB)

Aggregate size of all remaining copies that are to be created for the selected master server. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report. The Remaining Copy Size (MB) for a specific master server is calculated in the following manner: (Remaining Copy Count) x (Size of Backup Copy1)

Note: The remaining copy size is a front-end size and is

derived from the number of remaining copies multiplied by the size of backup copy 1. The effects of deduplication, compression, or optimized deduplication on remaining copy size are not considered in the SLP reports.

You can use filters to view specific data in the SLP Status report. The following filters are available when you edit the SLP Status report:
Views Master Server Select a particular view to see data for the selected view. Select one or more master servers to see data for the selected master servers.

SLP Backlog report

The SLP Backlog report lets you monitor the overall SLP backlog in a glance. This report shows the trend of images created vs. the images which are SLP incomplete in a line chart format. This report illustrates what the SLP backlog looks like against the image creation volume for the selected timeframe and the selected SLPs. By comparing the line charts in this report, you can understand the rate at which copies are created vs. the rate at which images requiring copies are created. This report provides you with empirical evidence on how efficiently the SLP performs and visibility into its capacity (i.e. at what point does the outflow begin to fall steadily behind). Data for the SLP Backlog report is collected from the OpsCenter database at midnight (12:00 A.M. by the OpsCenter Server clock). The data collection for the SLP Backlog report occurs after every 24 hours. This report is available in both graphical (chart) and tabular formats. To view the report details in a tabular format, click the link Show Chart as Table at the bottom of the report. You can edit the report to view specific data in the report. You can also save this report. Note that when you save the SLP Backlog report and run the saved report after some time, the report displays current data. You can export or email this report for reference.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

951

Note that the data that is shown in the SLP Backlog report (images that are created and unfinished images) is in GB by default. You can edit the report and change the units to KB, MB, or TB. The default timeframe for the SLP Backlog report is last two weeks. While editing the SLP Backlog report, you can group the timeframe for which you want to see data. However, the time frame grouping for the SLP Backlog report is supported for the following intervals only:

one day one week one month

The SLP Backlog report does not support any other time frame grouping (like two days, three months, 1 minute, or four weeks). You can use filters to view specific data in the SLP Backlog report. The following filters are available when you edit the SLP Backlog report:
Views Master Server Select a particular view to see data for the selected view. Select one or more master servers to see data for the selected master servers. Select one or more SLPs to see data for the selected SLPs.

Storage Lifecycle Policy

SLP Status by SLP report

You can view the SLP status by SLP report when you click the master server (link) in the SLP report. It provides detailed information on the status of each SLP that is configured on the selected master server. The SLP status by SLP report lets you monitor the progress of each SLP and also quickly identify the possible bottlenecks. The SLP Status by SLP report comprises of the following columns:
Master Server (where the SLP lives) Name of the master server where the SLP runs. The SLP may run on the origin master server or any of the destination master servers (in case of duplication to remote master). The NetBackup master server must be of 7.1 or a later version and also added to the OpsCenter console. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report.

952

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

SLP Name

Name of the SLP (link) that is configured on the master server. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report. Click the name (link) to view the SLP Status by Destinations report.

SLP Version

Version (link) that is associated with the specific SLP on the selected master server. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report. Click the version (link) to view the SLP Duplication Progress report.

Oldest Unfinished Image

The oldest image that is not SLP-complete for the specific SLP on the selected master server. This column represents the image end time (and date). This data helps you to identify the possible bottlenecks for the specific SLP. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report.

TotaI Clients

Number of unique clients (link) that are backed up by the specific SLP. Note that if the same client is backed up twice or thrice by the SLP, the client is counted only once. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report. Click the number (link) to view the SLP Status by Client report.

Total Existing Images

The total number of images that are present in the OpsCenter database for the specific SLP on the selected master server. This includes both SLP-complete images and SLP-incomplete images. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report. Click the number (link) to view the SLP Status by Image report for the specific SLP on the selected master server. This report displays details of images in the OpsCenter database that are associated with the SLPs on the selected master server.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

953

Images % SLP Complete

Percentage of images in the OpsCenter database that are SLP-complete for the specific SLP on the selected master server. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report. The data for this column is calculated using data from the following columns of the SLP Status by SLP report:

Images SLP Complete Total Existing Images

The contents of Images % SLP Complete column is calculated by using the following formula: Images SLP Complete / Total Existing Images * 100 Images SLP Complete Number of images in the OpsCenter database that are SLP-complete for the specific SLP on the selected master server. You can remove this column when you edit the report. Click the number (link) to view the SLP Status by Image report. A filtered view of the report appears that displays details of images in the OpsCenter database that are SLP-complete for the specific SLP. Images Not SLP Complete Number of images in the OpsCenter database that are SLP-incomplete for the specific SLP on the selected master server. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report. Click the number (link) to view the SLP Status by Image report. A filtered view of the report appears that displays details of images in the OpsCenter database that are SLP-incomplete. Total Expected Copies Total number of image copies in the OpsCenter database for the specific SLP on the selected master server (includes both complete copies and incomplete copies). This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report. Click the number (link) to view the SLP Status by Image Copy report.

954

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

% Copy Complete

Percentage of completed copies in the OpsCenter database for the specific SLP on the selected master server. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report. The data for this column is calculated by using data from the following columns of the SLP Status By SLP report:

Copies Completed Total Copies

The contents of % Copy Complete column is calculated by using the following formula: Copies Completed / Total Copies * 100 Copies Completed The number of completed copies that are present in the OpsCenter database for the specific SLP on the selected master server. You can remove this column when you edit the report. Click the number (link) to view the SLP Status by Image Copy report. A filtered view of the report appears that displays details for copies in the OpsCenter database that are complete for the selected master server. Copies Not Complete Shows the number of incomplete copies in the OpsCenter database for the specific SLP on the selected master server. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report. The data for this column is calculated by using the following formula: Copies Not Complete = Total Copies Copies Completed Click the number (link) to view the SLP Status by Image Copy report. A filtered view of the report appears that displays details for copies in the OpsCenter database that are incomplete for the selected SLP.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

955

Total Expected Size - all copies (MB)

Expected aggregate size of all copies for the selected SLP that are present in the OpsCenter database. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report. The data for this column is calculated by using the following formula: Total Expected Size for all copies = (Number of copies for the specific SLP) * (backup copy size for the specific SLP)

Note: The total expected size for all copies is a front-end

size and is derived from the number of copies multiplied by the size of backup copy. The effects of deduplication, compression, or optimized deduplication on the Total Expected Size all copies are not considered in the SLP reports. Completed Copy Size (%) Percentage of completed copy size for the specific SLP on the selected master server. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report. The data for this column is calculated from the following columns of the SLP Status By SLP report:

Completed Copy Size Total Expected Size all copies

The contents of Completed Copy Size (%) column is calculated by using the following formula: Completed Copy Size / Total Expected Size all copies * 100 Completed Copy Size (MB) Aggregate size of all the completed copies in the OpsCenter database for the specific SLP on the selected master server. You can remove this column when you edit the report.

Note: The Completed Copy Size is a front-end size. The

effects of deduplication, compression, or optimized deduplication on completed copy size are not considered in the SLP reports.

956

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Remaining Copy Size (MB)

Aggregate size of all remaining copies that are to be created for the specific SLP on the selected master server. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report. The data for this column is calculated in the following manner: (Remaining Copy Count for the specific SLP) x (Size of backup copy for the specific SLP)

Note: The remaining copy size is a front-end size and is

derived from the number of remaining copies multiplied by the size of backup copy 1. The effects of deduplication, compression, or optimized deduplication on remaining copy size are not considered in the SLP reports.

You can use filters to view specific data in the SLP Status by SLP report. The following filters are available when you edit the SLP Status by SLP report:
Views Select a particular view to see data for the selected view. Select one or more master servers to see data for the selected master servers. Select one or more SLPs to see data for the selected SLPs.

Master Server

Storage Lifecycle Policy

The default timeframe for this report is based on what timeframe is selected for the top-level report.

SLP Status by Client report

The SLP Status by Client report is available as a drill-down report from the SLP Status and SLP Status by SLP report. You can view the SLP status by Client report when you click the links in the Total Clients column in the following reports:

SLP Status SLP Status by SLP (a filtered view of the SLP status by Client report is shown)

The SLP Status by Client report lets you monitor the SLP progress for each client that is associated with the SLP. This report helps you to know details about the SLPs that protect the clients. This report also provides details about origin master server (master server where the data is backed up) and the master server where the SLP is running currently.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

957

The origin master server and master server where the SLP is running currently may be different when you duplicate to remote master server. The SLP Status by Client report comprises of the following columns:
Master Server (where the SLP lives) Name of the master server where the SLP that is associated with the client exists. The SLP may run on the origin master server or any of the destination master servers (in case of duplication to remote master). The NetBackup master server must be of 7.1 or a later version and also added to the OpsCenter console. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report. SLP Name Name of the SLP that is associated with the selected master server and client. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report. Version that is associated with the specific SLP. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report. Client name (link) that is backed up by the specific SLP on the selected master server. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report. Click the client name (link) to view the SLP Status by Image report. The SLP Status by Image report is filtered for the specific client and the specific SLP. Origin Master Server (created the image) Origin Master Server is where the primary backup copy resides. The SLP may run on the origin master server or any of the destination master servers (in case of duplication to remote master). The Origin Master Server must be a NetBackup 7.1 or later master server and also added to the OpsCenter console. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report. Oldest Unfinished Image This column tells you about the oldest image that is not SLP-complete for the selected master server, SLP, and client. This column represents the image end time (and date). This data helps you to identify the possible bottlenecks for the specific SLP. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report.

SLP Version

Client Name

958

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Total Existing Images

The total number of images that are present in the OpsCenter database for the specific SLP and client on the selected master server. This includes both SLP-complete images and SLP-incomplete images. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report. Click the number (link) to view the SLP Status by Image report for the specific SLP on the selected master server. This report displays details of images in the OpsCenter database that are associated with the SLPs and client on the selected master server.

Images % SLP Complete

Percentage of images in the OpsCenter database that are SLP-complete for the specific SLP and client on the selected master server. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report. The data for this report is calculated from the following columns of the SLP Status by Client report:

Images SLP Complete Total Existing Images

The data in the Images % SLP Complete column is calculated by using the following formula: Images SLP Complete / Total Existing Images * 100 Images SLP Complete Number of images in the OpsCenter database that are SLP-complete for the specific SLP and client on the selected master server. You can remove this column when you edit the report. Click the number (link) to view the SLP Status by Image report. A filtered view of the report appears that displays details of images in the OpsCenter database that are SLP-complete for the specific SLP and client. Images Not SLP Complete Number of images in the OpsCenter database that are SLP-incomplete for the specific SLP and client on the selected master server. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report. Click the number (link) to view the SLP Status by Image report. A filtered view of the report appears that displays details of images in the OpsCenter database that are SLP-incomplete.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

959

Total Copies

Total number of copies in the OpsCenter database for the specific SLP and client on the selected master server (includes both complete copies and incomplete copies). This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report. Click the number (link) to view the SLP Status by Image Copy report.

% Copy Complete

Percentage of completed copies in the OpsCenter database for the specific SLP and client on the selected master server. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report. The data for this column is calculated from the following columns of the SLP Status by Client report:

Copies Completed Total Copies

The contents of % Copies Complete column is calculated by using the following formula: Copies Completed / Total Copies * 100 Copies Completed The number of completed copies that are present in the OpsCenter database for the specific SLP and client on the selected master server. You can remove this column when you edit the report. Click the number (link) to view the SLP Status by Image Copy report. A filtered view of the report appears that displays details for copies in the OpsCenter database that are complete for the selected master server. Copies Not Complete Shows the number of incomplete copies in the OpsCenter database for the specific SLP and client on the selected master server. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report. The data for this column is calculated by the following formula: Copies not Complete = Total Copies Copies Completed Click the number (link) to view the SLP Status by Image Copy report. A filtered view of the report appears that displays details for copies in the OpsCenter database that are incomplete for the selected SLP.

960

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Total Expected Size - all copies (MB)

Expected aggregate size of all copies for the selected SLP and client that are present in the OpsCenter database. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report. The data for this column is calculated by the following formula: Total Expected Size for all copies = (Number of copies) * (backup copy size)

Note: The total expected size for all copies is a front-end

size and is derived from the number of copies multiplied by the size of backup copy. The effects of deduplication, compression, or optimized deduplication on the Total Expected Size all copies are not considered in the SLP reports. Completed Copy Size (%) Percentage of completed copy size for the specific SLP and client on the selected master server. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report. The data for this column is calculated from the following columns of the SLP Status by Client report:

Completed Copy Size Total Expected Size all copies

The contents of Completed Copy Size (%) column is calculated by using the following formula: Completed Copy Size / Total Expected Size all copies * 100 Completed Copy Size (MB) Aggregate size of all the completed copies in the OpsCenter database for the specific SLP and client on the selected master server. You can remove this column when you edit the report.

Note: The Completed Copy Size is a front-end size. The

effects of deduplication, compression, or optimized deduplication on completed copy size are not considered in the SLP reports.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

961

Remaining Copy Size (MB)

Aggregate size of all remaining copies that are to be created for the specific SLP and client on the selected master server. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report. The column content is calculated in the following manner: (Remaining Copy Count) x (Size of Backup Copy1)

Note: The remaining copy size is a front-end size and is

derived from the number of remaining copies multiplied by the size of backup copy 1. The effects of deduplication, compression, or optimized deduplication on remaining copy size are not considered in the SLP reports.

You can use filters to view specific data in the SLP Status by Client report. The following filters are available when you edit the SLP Status by Client report:
Views Master Server Select a particular view to see data for the selected view. Select one or more master servers to see data for the selected master servers. Select one or more SLPs to see data for the selected SLPs. Select one or more clients to see data for the selected clients.

Storage Lifecycle Policy Client

The default timeframe for this report is based on what timeframe is selected for top-level report.

SLP Status by Image report

The SLP Status by Image report is available as a drill-down report from the SLP Status, SLP Status by SLP, and SLP Status by Client report. You can view the SLP Status by Image report when you click the links in the following columns:

Total Existing Images Images SLP Complete (filtered view of the SLP Status by Image report is shown) Images Not SLP Complete (filtered view of the SLP Status by Image report is shown)

The SLP Status by Image report lets you monitor the lifecycle for the images that are associated with the SLP. This report helps you to know which images are complete and incomplete for a specific SLP and identify bottlenecks in the SLP process. This report gives an idea of how a specific image is duplicated across master servers and also provides specific details about the image like backup time, SLP completion time, copies associated with each image and it's status etc. The

962

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

SLP status by Image report can help you to identify the image IDs that are not SLP-complete. The SLP Status by Image report comprises of the following columns:
Master Server (where the SLP lives) Name of the master server where the SLP runs. The SLP may run on the origin master server or any of the destination master servers (in case of duplication to remote master). The NetBackup master server must be of 7.1 or a later version and also added to the OpsCenter console. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report. SLP Name Name of the SLP that is associated with the selected master server and image. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report. SLP Version Version (link) that is associated with the specific SLP. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report. Click the version (link) to view the SLP Duplication Progress report. Policy that is associated with the SLP. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report. Schedule that is associated with the policy. You can remove this column when you edit the report. Client name that is backed up by the SLP for the selected master server. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report. Origin Master Server (created the image) Origin Master Server is where the primary backup copy resides. The SLP may run on the origin master server or any of the destination master servers (in case of duplication to remote master). The origin master server and master server where the SLP lives (or is running currently) may be different if you duplicate to a remote master server. The Origin Master Server must be a NetBackup 7.1 or later master server and also added to the OpsCenter console. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report.

Policy Name

Schedule Name

Client Name

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

963

Image ID

Image ID (link) associated with the image. The Image ID is unique for each image. Click the image ID (link) to view the SLP Status by Image Copy report. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report.

Backup Time

Date and time when the primary backup is completed. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report.

SLP Completion Time

Date and time when the image is SLP-complete. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report. The Lag Time gives you an idea of how much time was required to complete the SLP and judge how fast or slow duplications occur. The Lag time is displayed in seconds. The Lag time for a specific image copy is computed by using data from the following columns and by using the following formula: Lag Time = SLP Completion Time Backup Time This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report.

Lag Time (SLP Completion Time Backup Time)

Total Copies

Total number of copies in the OpsCenter database for the specific SLP and image on the selected master server (includes both complete copies and incomplete copies). Click the number (link) to view the SLP Status by Image Copy report. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report.

Copies Completed

The number of completed copies that are present in the OpsCenter database for the specific SLP and image on the selected master server. Click the number (link) to view the SLP Status by Image Copy report. A filtered view of the report appears that displays details for copies in the OpsCenter database that are complete for the selected master server. You can remove this column when you edit the report.

964

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Copies Not Complete

Shows the number of incomplete copies in the OpsCenter database for the specific SLP and image on the selected master server. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report. The data for this column is calculated by the following formula: Copies not Complete = Total Copies Copies Completed Click the number (link) to view the SLP Status by Image Copy report. A filtered view of the report appears that displays details for copies in the OpsCenter database that are incomplete for the selected SLP.

% Copy Complete

Percentage of completed copies in the OpsCenter database for the specific SLP and image on the selected master server. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report. The data for this column is calculated from the following columns of the SLP Status by Image report:

Copies Completed Total Copies

The contents of this column is calculated by using the following formula: Copies Completed / Total Copies * 100 Total Expected Size - all copies (MB) Expected aggregate size of all copies for the selected SLP and image that are present in the OpsCenter database. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report. The data for this column is calculated by the following formula: Total Expected Size for all copies = (Number of copies) * (backup copy size)

Note: The total expected size for all copies is a front-end

size and is derived from the number of copies multiplied by the size of backup copy. The effects of deduplication, compression, or optimized deduplication on the Total Expected Size all copies are not considered in the SLP reports.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

965

Completed Copy Size (MB)

Aggregate size of all the completed copies in the OpsCenter database for the specific SLP and image on the selected master server. You can remove this column when you edit the report.

Note: The Completed Copy Size is a front-end size. The

effects of deduplication, compression, or optimized deduplication on completed copy size are not considered in the SLP reports. Completed Copy Size (%) Percentage of completed copy size for the specific SLP and image on the selected master server. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report. The data for this column is calculated from the following columns of the SLP Status By Image report:

Completed Copy Size Total Expected Size all copies

The contents of Completed Copy Size (%) column is calculated by using the following formula: Completed Copy Size / Total Expected Size all copies * 100 Remaining Copy Size (MB) Aggregate size of all remaining copies that are to be created for the specific SLP and image on the selected master server. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report. The data for this column is calculated in the following manner: (Remaining Copy Count) x (Size of Backup Copy1)

Note: The remaining copy size is a front-end size and is

derived from the number of remaining copies multiplied by the size of backup copy 1. The effects of deduplication, compression, or optimized deduplication on remaining copy size are not considered in the SLP reports.

You can use filters to view specific data in the SLP Status by Image report. The following filters are available when you edit the SLP Status by Image report:
Views Select a particular view to see data for the selected view. Select one or more master servers to see data for the selected master servers.

Master Server

966

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Storage Lifecycle Policy

You can select the following columns: SLP Name: Select one or more SLPs to view data for the selected SLPs. SLP status: Select SLP status for which you want to view data.

Policy

Select one or more policies to see data for the selected policies. Select one or more schedules to see data for the selected schedules. Select one or more clients to see data for the selected clients.

Schedule

Client

The default timeframe for this report is based on what timeframe is selected for the top-level report.

SLP Status by Image Copy report

The SLP status by Image Copy report is available as a drill-down report from the SLP Status, SLP Status by SLP, and SLP Status by Image report. You can view the SLP Status by Image Copy report when you click the links in the following columns:

Total Expected Copies Copies Completed (filtered view of the SLP Status by Image Copy report is shown) Copies Not Complete (filtered view of the SLP Status by Image Copy report is shown)

The SLP Status by Image Copy report shows how the image copies are created for different SLP destinations across different master servers. This report provides detailed information about the image copies that the SLP creates. This report provides details such as which copy is complete, which SLP is not complete and the specific copy operations that are pending. The SLP Status by Image Copy report comprises of the following columns:
Master Server (where the SLP lives) Name of the master server where the SLP runs. The SLP may run on the origin master server or any of the destination master servers (in case of duplication to remote master). The NetBackup master server must be of 7.1 or a later version and also added to the OpsCenter console. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

967

SLP Name

Name of the SLP that is associated with the selected master server. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report.

SLP Version

Version (link) that is associated with the specific SLP. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report. Click the version (link) to view the SLP Duplication Progress report.

Data Classification

Data classification that is associated with the SLP. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report.

Policy Name

Policy that is associated with the SLP. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report. Schedule that is associated with the NetBackup policy. You can remove this column when you edit the report. Client name that is backed up by the SLP for the selected master server. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report. Image ID associated with the image. The image ID is unique for each image. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report. Click the image ID (link) to view the SLP Status by Image Copy report.

Schedule Name

Client Name

Image ID

Job ID

Job ID associated with the specific operation. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report. Origin Master Server is where the primary backup copy resides. The SLP may run on the origin master server or any of the destination master servers (in case of duplication to remote master). The origin master server and master server where the SLP lives (or is running currently) may be different if you duplicate to a remote master server. The Origin Master Server must be a NetBackup 7.1 or later master server and also added to the OpsCenter console. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report.

Origin Master Server (created the image)

968

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Operation

The operation that is performed on an image copy like Duplication, Backup, Import etc. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report.

State

Current status of the copy like Complete, Not Started, In Process, Deleted, Paused. You can remove this column when you edit the report. The Format column helps to differentiate between the NetBackup image format and the snapshot copy. This report shows the details of any snapshot copy that is a part of the storage lifecycle policy. Destination where a copy should reside as per the SLP definition. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report. Time when the copy expires. You can remove this column when you edit the report. Time when the copy is completed. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report. The Lag Time gives you an idea of how fast or slow duplications occur. The Lag time is displayed in seconds. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report.

Format

Destination

Expiration Time

Copy/Import Completion Time Lag Time (Copy Time Backup Time)

Completed Copy Size (MB)

Aggregate size of all the completed copies in the OpsCenter database for the specific SLP and image on the selected master server. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report.

Note: The Completed Copy Size is a front-end size. The

effects of deduplication, compression, or optimized deduplication on completed copy size are not considered in the SLP reports.

You can use filters to view specific data in the SLP Status by Image Copy report. The following filters are available when you edit the SLP Status by Image Copy report:
Views Select a particular view to see data for the selected view.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

969

Master Server

Select one or more master servers to see data for the selected master servers. You can select the following parameters: Duplication to Remote Master: If the value is Yes, then copy details for replication jobs are displayed. Operation: Select one or more operations that you want to view. SLP name: Select one or more SLPs that you want to view. State: Select one or more states that you want to view.

Storage Lifecycle Policy

Example: If you want to view all pending import operations, select the following parameters:

Operation = Import State = Not Started

Example: If you want to view the replication status for jobs, select the following parameters:

Duplication to Remote Master = Yes Operation = Duplication

Policy

Select one or more policies to see data for the selected policies. Select one or more schedules to see data for the selected schedules. Select one or more clients to see data for the selected clients. Enter the image ID for which you want to view data.

Schedule

Client

Images

The default timeframe for this report is based on what timeframe is selected for the top-level report.

SLP Status by Destinations report

The SLP Status by Destinations report is available as a drill-down report from the SLP Status by SLP report. You can view the SLP Status by Destinations report when you click the SLP name (link) in the SLP Status by SLP report.

970

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

The SLP Status by Destinations report provides a summary of all the destinations for a specific SLP. You can view the SLP status by Destinations report to monitor the SLP progress for each SLP destination. For example, you may want to know the image copies that are not complete for a specific SLP destination. The SLP Status by Destinations report comprises of the following columns:
Master Server (where the SLP lives) Name of the master server where the SLP runs. The SLP may run on the source master server or any of the destination master servers (in case of duplication to remote master). The NetBackup master server must be of 7.1 or a later version and also added to the OpsCenter console. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report. SLP Name Name of the SLP that you selected. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report. Version that is associated with the SLP. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report. Data classification that is associated with the SLP destination. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report. Origin Master Server (created the image) Origin Master Server is where the primary backup copy resides. The SLP may run on the origin master server or any of the destination master servers (in case of duplication to remote master). The origin master server and master server where the SLP lives (or is running currently) may be different if you duplicate to a remote master server. The Origin Master Server must be a NetBackup 7.1 or later master server and also added to the OpsCenter console. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report. Operation The operation that is performed on an image copy like Duplication, Backup, Import etc. for the specific SLP destination. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report.

SLP Version

Data Classification

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

971

Retention

Retention period that is associated with the specific SLP destination. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report.

Destination

Destination where an image should reside as per the SLP definition. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report.

Average Lag Time (Copy Time Backup Time)

The Average Lag Time gives you an idea of how much time is required to duplicate the primary copy to a particular destination for a specific SLP and judge how fast or slow duplications occur. The Average Lag Time is displayed in seconds. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report. Total number of copies in the OpsCenter database for the SLP and the specific SLP destination (includes both complete copies and incomplete copies). This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report.

Total Expected Copies

Copies Completed

The number of completed copies that are present in the OpsCenter database for the SLP and the specific SLP destination. You can remove this column when you edit the report. Percentage of completed copies in the OpsCenter database for the SLP and the specific SLP destination. The column contents are calculated using data from the following columns of the SLP Status by Destinations report:

% Copy Complete

Copies Completed Total Copies

The contents of % Copies Complete column is calculated by using the following formula: Copies Completed / Total Copies * 100 This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report.

972

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Total Expected Size - all copies (MB)

Expected aggregate size of all copies for SLP and the specific SLP destination that are present in the OpsCenter database. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report. The column contents are calculated by using the following formula: Total Expected Size for all copies = (Number of copies) * (backup copy size)

Note: The total expected size for all copies is a front-end

size and is derived from the number of copies multiplied by the size of backup copy. The effects of deduplication, compression, or optimized deduplication on the Total Expected Size all copies are not considered in the SLP reports. Completed Copy Size (MB) Aggregate size of all the completed copies in the OpsCenter database for the SLP and the specific SLP destination. You can remove this column when you edit the report.

Note: The Completed Copy Size is a front-end size. The

effects of deduplication, compression, or optimized deduplication on completed copy size are not considered in the SLP reports. Completed Copy Size (%) Percentage of completed copy size for the SLP and the specific SLP destination. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report. The data for this column is calculated from the following columns of the SLP Status by Destinations report:

Completed Copy Size Total Expected Size all copies

The contents of Completed Copy Size (%) column is calculated by using the following formula: Completed Copy Size / Total Expected Size all copies * 100

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

973

Remaining Copy Size (MB)

Aggregate size of all remaining copies that are to be created for the SLP and the Size (MB) specific SLP destination. This column is mandatory and cannot be removed when you edit the report. The data for this column is calculated in the following manner: (Remaining Copy Count) x (Size of Backup Copy1)

Note: The remaining copy size is a front-end size and is

derived from the number of remaining copies multiplied by the size of backup copy 1. The effects of deduplication, compression, or optimized deduplication on remaining copy size are not considered in the SLP reports.

You can use filters to view specific data in the SLP Status by Image Copy report. The following filters are available when you edit the SLP Status by Image Copy report:
View Select a particular view to see data for the selected view. Select one or more master servers to see data for the selected master servers. You can select the following columns: Duplication to Remote Master: If the value is Yes, then SLPs that duplicate across master servers are displayed. Operation: Select one or more operations that you want to view SLP name: Select one or more SLPs that you want to view.

Master Server

Storage Lifecycle Policy

The default timeframe for this report is based on what timeframe is selected for the top-level report.

SLP Duplication Progress report

The SLP Duplication Progress report is available as a drill-down report from the SLP Status by SLP report. You can view the SLP Duplication Progress report when you click the SLP version (link) in the SLP Status by SLP report. The SLP Duplication Progress report is a graphical report that shows how the image copies are created for an SLP on a specific master server. This indicates how duplications are progressing for an SLP on a specific master server.

974

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

The SLP Duplication Progress report is in a bar chart format and shows the following data for each axis:

X axis shows all duplication destinations that are associated with the SLP Y1 axis bar charts show the percentage of images that are completed Y2 axis shows how many images are created.

Note: The SLP Duplication Progress report shows data for only one master server where that SLP version is running. You can also view the report data in a tabular format. To view the report details in a tabular format, click the link Show Chart as Table at the bottom of the report. You can edit the report to view specific data in the report. You can also save this report for reference. You can use filters to view specific data in the SLP Duplication Progress report. The following filters are available when you edit the SLP Duplication Progress report:
View Master Server Select a particular view to see data for the selected view. Select one or more master servers to see data for the selected master servers. Select an SLP to see data for the selected SLP. You can select only one SLP.

Storage Lifecycle Policy

The default timeframe for this report is based on what timeframe is selected for the top-level report.

Limitations of SLP reports

The data that is shown in the SLP reports is collected primarily from the EMM worklist and also from the NetBackup catalog. Hence it is important to understand how the EMM worklist functions. The functionality of the EMM worklist affects the data that is displayed in the SLP reports. The following sections provide an insight on SLP and EMM functionality and also list some limitations that are associated with the SLP reports.

About storage lifecycle policy retention

While creating a storage lifecycle policy in NetBackup, you can specify the destinations where copies should be created. For an SLP, an image can be written to the initial destination as part of the following operations:

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

975

Backup

Import

You can define the Retention type for each SLP destination. You can select many retention types like Fixed (1, 2, 3 weeks), Expire after Copy, Staged capacity managed etc. The following table explains the meaning of Fixed and Expire after Copy retention types:
Fixed Fixed retention type means that the backup data is retained for a specific length of time before the backups are expired. When the retention period is reached, NetBackup deletes information about the expired backup. Expire after Copy retention type means that the image expires after the dependent duplication is complete.

Expire after Copy

When you are creating a NetBackup policy, the SLP that you created (like SLP1) can be selected as Policy Storage (storage unit). The SLP (SLP1) is executed when the policy runs.

About data collection from EMM

The SLP1 performs the following operations: data that is shown in the SLP reports is collected from the EMM worklist and the NetBackup catalog. The worklist is located in the EMM and contains metadata like how many copies need to be created, where they need to be created, when they are completed etc. In general, the copy data that is shown in the SLP reports (like Copies Completed, Completed Copy Size columns etc.) is based on the EMM worklist. EMM creates the worklist after a backup is complete based on lifecycle configuration parameters. Consider a case when you configure an SLP named SLP1:

Backup (Stu1) Duplication (Stu2) Duplication (Stu3)

After the backup is complete, a worklist that contains an entry for each copy is created in the EMM database. In this example, the EMM worklist has three copy entries (corresponding to the number of copies that are defined in the SLP). The EMM worklist is updated as and when a duplication job is processed (for example, State for the copy changes from Not Started to In Process to Complete).

976

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

SLP reporting limitations

OpsCenter collects data for SLP reports in the following phases: Table 11-16 Serial No.
1.

SLP data collection Phase

Initial Data Collection

Description
When a NetBackup 7.1 or later master server is added to the OpsCenter console, OpsCenter Server initially collects all data from the EMM worklist. After the initial data load, OpsCenter collects only the changed data after every 10 minutes.

2.

Periodic Data Collection

OpsCenter depends on the EMM worklist for SLP reporting. The following EMM behavior affects the data that is shown in the SLP reports:

If the Retention type of the SLP destination is Expire after Copy, then EMM deletes the copy entry from the EMM worklist after duplication is complete. This behavior affects the initial data collection and periodic data collection for SLP reports. See Issues associated with initial data collection on page 977. See Issues associated with periodic data collection on page 977. If the Retention type of the SLP destination is Fixed, then EMM deletes the copy entry based on the Retention period that is specified in the policy. This behavior affects the initial data collection and periodic data collection for SLP reports. See Issues associated with initial data collection on page 977. See Issues associated with periodic data collection on page 977. If the SLP images reside on a tape drive, then EMM deletes the copy entry when the particular SLP is complete. This behavior affects the initial data collection and periodic data collection for SLP reports. See Issues associated with initial data collection on page 977. See Issues associated with periodic data collection on page 977. If you cancel an SLP that is in progress, then all the copy entries that are associated with this SLP image are deleted from the EMM worklist. This behavior affects the periodic data collection for SLP reports. See Issues associated with periodic data collection on page 977.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

977

Issues associated with initial data collection

For initial data collection, the following potential issues can be seen in SLP reports due to the EMM behavior. Since initial data collection loads all the data from the EMM, it may have an image entry with missing copy entries. It is possible that the copy entries in the EMM worklist are deleted due to the following factors:

If the Retention type of an SLP destination is Expire after Copy or Fixed. If duplications happen on a tape drive

The deletion of copies has the following affect on the data that is shown in specific SLP reports:

The SLP Duplication Progress report is in a bar chart format. The X axis shows all duplication destinations associated with the SLP; Y1 axis bar charts show the percentage of images completed (% Images Count) and Y2 axis shows how many images are actually created (Completed Images Count). If a backup copy is deleted from the EMM worklist, then this report may show that the backup copy count is less than the duplication count. This is misleading. It is expected that when an SLP is complete, same number of copies should be created on all the destinations. Similarly the % Size Completed computation is inaccurate for this report. If a backup copy entry is deleted from the EMM worklist, the SLP Duplication Progress report will not show the backup bar chart. Similarly, if a duplication copy entry is deleted, the Duplication Progress report will not show the duplication bar chart. The SLP Status by Destination report will show incorrect copy sizes across destinations. The following columns of the SLP Status by Destination report show incorrect data:

Total Expected Size all copies (MB) Completed Copy Size (MB)

Issues associated with periodic data collection

When OpsCenter collects data periodically after every 10 minutes, the following potential problems can be seen in SLP reports. Consider a scenario when OpsCenter has collected the data for all copies associated with SLP1 which is in progress. However, before the next data collection happens one of the copy entries is removed from the EMM worklist (due to the EMM behavior). In this scenario, OpsCenter marks such copy entries as Complete if the image is SLP-complete during the next data collection cycle. In this example scenario, you may see the following issues:

978

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

For all such copies that OpsCenter marks complete, the SLP Status by Image Copy report does not show any value for the Lag Time and the Copy End Time. If the last copy entry for an SLP is removed from the EMM worklist (due to EMM behavior), then the SLP Completion Time that is shown in the SLP Status by Image report is inaccurate.

Note: The same issues are seen if you cancel an SLP that is in progress (like SLP1). These issues occur because all the copy entries associated with this SLP image are deleted from the EMM worklist.

Known Issues with SLP reports

The following known issues are associated with the SLP reports:

When there are multiple copies in an SLP and two or more copies share the same destination, then only one-bar chart is shown for such copies in the SLP Duplication Progress report. The size of image copies for which Import is in a Not Started state, is not considered. Because of this behavior, the SLP Status, SLP Status by SLP, SLP Status by Client reports may display Completed Copy Size % as 100% while in reality there may be image copies for which the Import operation is in a Not Started state. If the Import is in a Not Started state for some image copies, the SLP Status by Destination report may show two rows for the same storage destination. This data is shown because there is insufficient data for image copies for which Import is in a Not Started state. The additional row is not shown once the Import operation is complete for all image copies.

About Workload Analyzer reports in OpsCenter

This section provides descriptions on the Workload Report Templates available in OpsCenter.

Workload Analyzer report

The Workload Analyzer is a report that gives information about the activities that are done across a period of seven days. The activities are number of jobs running at a given period of time and the amount of data that is transferred during this period. The report contains 168 data points of analysis in terms of the activities that are done for each hour for a period of seven days. The report is comprised of four reports that are based on time, data transfer, job queue, and job throughput. Time is the point from when the jobs start, the periods

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

979

for which the jobs are active, and the point when the jobs end. Job queue is based on the length of time, a job is in queue before the job is initiated. Job size is the amount of data that is moved from the target to the destination depending on the job type. Job size is also based on how much data is broken down and moved in a given hour. Job throughput is based on the data transmission rate. The Workload Analyzer reports consider only the jobs done for calculating and generating the report. The calculation can result in a difference in data for the current hour and date. For example, a job that started in the past, and is in the queued state for a long time is not considered in the job queue report. It is considered only when it is complete. See Workload Analyzer subreports: Job Count, Size, Queue, and Throughput on page 979. See Generating a Workload Analyzer report on page 985.

Workload Analyzer subreports: Job Count, Size, Queue, and Throughput

The Workload Analyzer reports are based on time, queue, size, and throughput. The following reports are a part of the Workload Analyzer report:

Job Count Workload Analyzer: This report is based on the number of jobs running at a given period of time. The purpose of this report is to display the data that is based on time and load. You can determine the time for the job count on the basis of the start and end time of the job. Data for load is determined based on how many jobs are active during a given period of time. Calculations are done to determine the number of jobs that are active during a given period of time. For example, the following figure displays the job counts for a given period of time. (A) shows the jobs that start before the time interval and end after the time interval. (B) shows the jobs that start before the time interval and end during the time interval. (C) shows the jobs that start and end during the time interval. (D) shows the jobs that start during the time interval and end after the time interval.

980

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Job Size Workload Analyzer: This report is based on the amount of data that is transferred during a given period of time. The calculation is based on the total amount of data that is backed up by the jobs divided by the time period. For example, in the following figure there are four jobs that have different durations across a four hour time period. The left-hand side displays the amount of data that's transferred during the four hour time period. The right-hand side of the report displays the start time and end time for each job, amount of data transferred, and duration. Job A is active for a period of four hours, it starts at 1:20 P.M. and ends at 4:20 P.M. During that period the total data that is transferred is 80,000 MB. You can calculate data transfer rate, multiply data transfer rate by the number of minutes during each hour when there is job activity. Job activity in the first hour is 20 minutes, in the second and third hour it is 60 minutes, and fourth hour it is 20 minutes. Jobs B, C, and D follow a similar pattern. Load is the sum of loads of all jobs during that hour. The yellow slot shows maximum activity and the data that is transferred is 115960 KB.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

981

Job Queue Workload Analyzer: This report is based on the period for which, jobs are in a queue state before data back up begins. Queue time is calculated through the use of timestamps such as time taken to initiate the job, time taken to start and end the job. Jobs that have a high queue time are identified to reduce scenarios where many jobs with high queue time are initiated at the same time. The queuing is calculated at individual job level and then aggregated to the level where the report is generated.

982

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Job Throughput Workload Analyzer: This report is based on the rate in Mbytes\Sec at which the data is transferred This calculation provides an important indicator to understand the performance. The throughput report is based on cross-hour calculation. The report displays accurate analysis of the data. Compared to the other workload reports, the totals for the rows of this report are averaged. The Start Write time ensures that the speed is only measured against the time in which, the actual data transfer takes place. This calculation ensures that the queue time is not considered. The queue report calculates the queue time. In the following figure, the throughput is calculated across four jobs that span for a period of three hours. One job belongs to Policy B and three jobs belong to Policy A. The green boxes indicate the time in which the write job occurs.

Workload Analyzer report template options

The Workload Analyzer report template is a pre-fixed 168 hour reporting template. The template makes extensive use of color to display the analyzed data through the heat map technology. You can configure the color range. Report categories that include attributes such as backup server, media server, client, policy, provide a good means to understand the basics of workload and performance. All the reports that comprise the workload analyzer report template are based on time. The following figure is a sample report template.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

983

The highlights of the workload analyzer report template are as follows:

You can hover the mouse on each cell in the report to get details such as date, time, hour, and actual value of the hour. You can configure the range for each color. The color depicts the density of the jobs running at that hour. It also displays the number of minutes of queue time, the amount of data transferred, and the throughput rate. The deeper the color of the cell, the higher is the value in the cell. You can use the Report on feature to select entities for which, you require the data. For example, if you select Report on for a master server, the second column in the report displays data for the master server only. The entities include Backup Server, Media Server, Backup Client, Policy, Policy Type, Schedule, Job Type, Job Level, Job Error Code, Exit Status, Job Exit Code, Job Transport Type, Schedule\Level Type, and Storage Unit. You can drill down to the next level in the report. The second column is hyper linked and provides the drill-down option. For example, from the master server you can drill down to client. A drill-down report is launched. You can drill down to clients from the media server, policy, policy schedule, schedule, job type, job error code, job status, job level, transport type. Other drill-down options are policy type to policy, job status to job error code, view to next level down the view hierarchy. The last row on the report shows the total values of all the rows for the entire time span. The first column shows data for the entire week, whereas the hour column shows data for that particular hour for all entities. You can use various filters in the report. The filters include: Filter type
Time Filter View Master Server, media server

Description
Filter on Absolute or Relative time filter Filter on any view. Filter on available master servers and media servers. Filter on available client. Filter on name and type of policy.

Client Policy

984

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Filter type
Schedule Job

Description
Filter on schedules Filter on status, status code, transport type, type, and schedule or level type. Filter on the name. Filter on duration threshold and time basis.

Storage unit Workload

You can use the Report on feature for different variables. The variables include Backup Server, Media Server, Backup Client, Policy, Policy Type, Schedule, Job Type, Job Level, Job Error Code, and Storage Unit. You can drill down on any cell to know the details about the data.

The following drill-down options are available for all the Workload Analyzer reports.

Master Server to Client Media server to Client Policy Type to Policy Policy to Client Policy ScheduletoClient

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

985

Schedule to Client Job Type to Client Job Error Code to Client Job Status to Client (when Job Status <> Failure) Job Status to Job Error Code (when Job Status = Failure) Job Level to Client Transport Type to Client View to Next level down the view hierarchy

The colors in the report represent different data values, the information is available in the following table. Table 11-17 Color range
Idle

Color range values Value

Displays the cells that are gray, which means there are no active jobs assigned. Displays value for the data that has the color range between 1 - 10, the light yellow cells represent these values. Displays value for the data that has the color range between 11 - 50, the dark yellow cells represent these values. Displays value for the data that has the color range between 51 - 100, the orange cells represent these values. Displays the value for data that has the color range that is greater than 100, the red cells represent these values.

1 - 10

11 - 50

51 - 100

More than 100

See Workload Analyzer subreports: Job Count, Size, Queue, and Throughput on page 979.

Generating a Workload Analyzer report

You can generate the Workload Analyzer report using the Workload Analyzer report template from the reports tree. The report comprises of four reports that are based on time, data transfer, queue time, and throughput speed.

986

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

To generate the workload analyzer report

1 2

In the OpsCenter console, click Reports. On the Reports Template tab, click Create New Report. The reports are also available under the reports tree as shown in the following figure

3 4

On the Report Wizard, retain the default selection Create a report using an existng report templateand click Next. From the Select Report Template list, select the Workload Analyzer report you want to create and click Next.

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

987

Select the time frame from the Relative TimeFrame (beginning at) or Absolute TimeFrame (beginning at) options. The Timeframe option displays the output for seven days for the previous week or the next week. The Relative Timeframe option also displays data from the date you choose, it can also be from the middle of a week. Absolute Timeframe displays data for a week for the date you select. For example, if you select today's date, the data that is displayed is for the next week including today's date. The selection is for a week and there is no end time provided for selection.

6 7 8

Select the required filters and click Next. View the report and click Next. Enter a name and description in the Report name and Description text boxes. Select the location and click Save to save the report. Note: Open the saved report. Use the options Previous Week and Next Week to view data for the previous seven days or next seven days.

About exporting and emailing the Workload Analyzer report

The Workload Analyzer report can be exported in the HTML format. You can set the export location through the Report Export Location tab. The report can be emailed only in the HTML format. Note: When the Workload Analyzer report is emailed for Outlook Express, it does not show the correct alignment of the cells of the report.

988

Reporting in OpsCenter About Report Templates descriptions

Chapter

12

Using NetBackup Search

This chapter includes the following topics:

About NetBackup Search Search & Hold > New view Search & Hold > Saved view Search & Hold > Saved > Search Results view Search & Hold > Holds view Search & Hold > Holds > Hold Details view

About NetBackup Search

NetBackup Search provides a mechanism to index the file system metadata that is associated with backup images. This mechanism makes searching for relevant information simple, powerful, and fast. Once information is found, the user is able to take actions on that information. NetBackup Search provides a robust legal hold mechanism. This mechanism ensures that images relevant to a legal case are not inadvertently deleted or allowed to expire based on retention levels. Note: NetBackup Search is a licensed feature. With NetBackup Search you can determine the data in the catalog at file level and locate any file or folder from the repository. Further, you can select the required files or folders (backup images) and retain them by placing them on hold. After you release the Hold, the files or folders can be expired. The following capabilities are provided with this feature:

Advanced search capabilities enable you to find relevant information faster:

990

Using NetBackup Search Search & Hold > New view

Search across multiple domains. Save and edit search queries for legal traceability.

Robust solution for legal hold management.

Legal holds provide a mechanism to retain backup images regardless of existing retention levels. Legal holds ensure that backup images and associated media are retained until the legal proceeding completes. Hold reports in OpsCenter provide insight into size and age of legal hold and length of time of the associated holds.

More information is available:

Search & Hold > New view

This view is displayed when you select Search & Hold > New. This view displays the criteria fields that you can use to search for indexed backups. Table 12-1 Field
Users and Groups

Field descriptions for New Search - Search Terms Description

Click the ellipses to select the users and groups that created the files that you want to find. Selected users are searched within selected groups. To find users and groups in this list, enter text in Search this list. You may use wildcard characters; for example, enter Group* to include users and the groups that begin with "Group". To include all users and groups on the displayed page, select the checkbox at the top of the left-most column.

Backups Taken in

From the drop-down list, select a time period in which the backup was taken. Select Custom Date Range to specify a specific range of dates.

Using NetBackup Search Search & Hold > New view

991

Table 12-1 Field

Files and Folders

Field descriptions for New Search - Search Terms (continued) Description

Specify the names of the files and folders you want to include in the search. Separate multiple names with semicolons. You may use wildcard characters to specify patterns in file names and folder names. For entering a valid file and folder pattern imply the following: Enter at least one alpha or numeric character for every files and folders name. For example: /c/Group* or /c/Group2 Enter double quotes at the beginning and at the end of files and folders name. For example: "MyQueryfiles"

These criteria are required for a valid search. Advanced Domain Views Click this link to display the advanced search criteria. Choose to search Domains or Views: Choose Domain to search the backups that were taken for master servers and clients. Choose View to search the backups that were taken for master server views or client views. Only master servers of clients that are configured for indexing are listed with views.

Master servers

Note: (Domain
selection only)

Click the ellipses to select the names of the NetBackup master servers you want to include in this search. Separate multiple names with semicolons. To find master servers in this list, enter text in the Search this list field. You may use wildcard characters; for example, enter *symantec.com to include master servers that end with "symantec.com". From the Version drop-down list, select a version number to find the master servers that are running a specific version of NetBackup.

Name

Note: (Views
selection only)

Click the ellipses to select the names of the views you want to include in this search.

992

Using NetBackup Search Search & Hold > New view

Table 12-1 Field

Clients

Field descriptions for New Search - Search Terms (continued) Description

Click the ellipses to select the names of the clients you want to include in this search. Separate multiple names with semicolons. To find clients in this list, enter text in the Search this list field. You may use wildcard characters; for example, enter *symantec.com to include the clients that end with "symantec.com". To view clients on other master servers and select them if required for this search, select the Master Servers from the drop-down list.

Note: (Domain
selection only)

File Type

Select one or more of the following file types to include in the search:

Excel Spreadsheets (xls and xlx) PDF Documents (pdf) PowerPoint Presentation (ppt and pptx) Text Files (txt and rtf) Word Documents (doc and docx) (Other) / Specify . Use a semicolon to specify multiple file types; for example: exe;png;mp3 and so on.

Separate multiple values with semicolons. File Created From the drop-down list, select a time period in which the files for the search were created. Select Custom Date Range to specify a specific range of dates. From the drop-down list, select a time period in which the files for the search were most recently changed. Select Custom Date Range to specify a specific range of dates.

File Modified

For the Backups Taken in, File Created, and File Modified fields, the valid date options are as follows:

Today - This is the current day. Yesterday Last week - The time span consists of the last seven days. For Example: If the current day is Wednesday, then the span is calculated from last Wednesday to the current day (Wednesday). Last month - The time span consists of the last 31 days. For Example: If current date is 7th December, then span is calculated from 7th November to the current day (7th December).

Using NetBackup Search Search & Hold > Saved view

993

Last 90 days - The time span consists of the last 90 days. For Example: If the current day is 8th December, then the span is calculated from 8th September to the current day (8th December). Last year - The time span consists of the last year. For Example: If the current date is 7th December, 2011, then the span is calculated from 7th December, 2010 to the current day (7th December, 2011). Custom date range - You can select the from and to date options.

Search & Hold > Saved view

This view is displayed when you select Search & Hold > Saved. This view displays detailed information about saved searches. Table 12-2 Field
Name

Search & Hold > Saved column headings Description

Lists the names of the saved searches. Click the name to edit the search criteria. Lists the names of holds that have been placed on backup images from the saved search. Lists the date and the time of the most recent changes to the saved search. Lists the status of the saved search: Completed, In progress, Queued, Failed, or Stopped. Click the status for more detailed information. Lists the date and the time of the most recent changes to the saved search. Lists the date and the time of the most recent update with the indexing server . If a search remains in progress for a long time and the Last Sync Time has not been updated recently, unexpected problems may have occurred. In this situation, consider stopping the search, and then restarting it.

Hold

Last Saved

Status

Last Run

Last Sync Time

Search & Hold > Saved > Search Results view

This view is displayed when you select the status link for a saved search in the Search & Hold > Saved view. This view displays detailed information about a hold that has been placed on backed up images.

994

Using NetBackup Search Search & Hold > Holds view

To filter the backups in the search results, enable filter criteria from the left panel. To place a hold, select the backups that you want to hold and then click Hold. Table 12-3 Field Search & Hold > Saved > Search Results column headings Description

Total backup images Displays the number of backup images that are included with this (n) search. Backup Taken At Displays each backup that contains hits (or matches) to the saved search criteria. The backups are referenced by the date and time of the backup's completion. The number in parentheses after the date and time indicates the number of search hits in the backup image. Click the plus sign to view details about the backup. Displays the number of hits (or matches) in the selected backup image to the search criteria. Lists the file names and the folder names within the selected backup image that matched the search criteria Displays the size of the file or folder. Displays the user name that created or last modified the file or folder. Displays the user group to which the user is a member. If the user is not a member of a user group, None is displayed. Displays the date and time on which the file was created. Displays the date and time on which the file was last modified.

Total search hits (n)

File/Folder name

Size User

User group

File Created File Modified

Search & Hold > Holds view

This view is displayed when you select Search & Hold > Holds. This view displays summarized information about holds that have been placed on backed up images.

Using NetBackup Search Search & Hold > Holds > Hold Details view

995

Table 12-4 Field

Name

Search & Holds > Holds column headings Description

Lists the names of the holds or hold groups. To display the members of a hold group, click the plus sign before the hold group name. To view the stored comments about the hold or the hold group, click the plus sign after the hold name or the hold group name.

Media Backups Size Files Created by Placed on Status

Lists the number of media types that are included with the hold. Lists the number of backup images that are included with the hold. Lists the total size of the images that are included with the hold. Lists the number of files that are included with the hold. Lists the user name that is responsible for creating the hold. Lists the date and time on which the hold was placed. Lists the current status of the hold. Click the status to view details about the hold.

Search & Hold > Holds > Hold Details view

This view is displayed when you select the status link for a hold in the Search & Hold > Holds view. This view displays detailed information about a hold that has been placed on backed up images. When you click View search results that produced this hold, the Search > Saved > Search Results view is displayed. Use the browser's Back button to return to the hold details. Table 12-5 Field Search & Hold > Holds > Hold Details column headings Description

Total backup images Displays the number of backup images that are included with this (n) hold.

996

Using NetBackup Search Search & Hold > Holds > Hold Details view

Table 12-5 Field

Backup Taken At

Search & Hold > Holds > Hold Details column headings (continued) Description
Displays each backup that contains hits (or matches) to the saved search criteria. The backups are referenced by the date and time of the backup's completion. The number in parentheses after the date and time indicates the number of search hits in the backup image. Click the plus sign to view details about the backup.

Note: The remainder of this table lists search-related fields. Search-related details about
holds are available only for legal holds that were placed using OpsCenter. If the hold was placed using nbholdutil from a command line, the hold is not associated with a saved search. Therefore, search-related details do not exist for the hold. Total search hits (n) Displays the number of hits (or matches) in the selected backup image to the search criteria. Lists the file names and the folder names within the selected backup image that matched the search criteria Displays the size of the file or folder. Displays the user name that created or last modified the file or folder. Displays the user group to which the user is a member. If the user is not a member of a user group, None is displayed. Displays the date and time on which the file was created. Displays the date and time on which the file was last modified.

File/Folder name

Size User

User group

File Created File Modified

Appendix

Additional information on PureDisk data collection

This appendix includes the following topics:

About AT configuration scenarios specific to PureDisk backup product Setting up a trust between the OpsCenter AB host and PureDisk SPA host

About AT configuration scenarios specific to PureDisk backup product

This section describes various configuration scenarios for Symantec Product Authentication Service (AT) that you should take into account before configuring PureDisk data collector. On a broader level, there can be two types of OpsCenter - PureDisk setups with respect to their AT root broker configurations:

Common AT root broker for OpsCenter server and PureDisk SPA See About Scenario 1: Common Root Broker on page 998. Different AT root broker for OpsCenter server and PureDisk SPA Note: In this type of configuration, you need to set up a bi-directional trust between the OpsCenter AB host and PureDisk SPA host. You need to establish trust between the authentication brokers of OpsCenter and PureDisk SPA for secure communication. This set up is a pre-requisite for PureDisk data collection from OpsCenter. See About Scenario 2: Different Root Brokers on page 999.

998

Additional information on PureDisk data collection About AT configuration scenarios specific to PureDisk backup product

About Scenario 1: Common Root Broker

This section talks about all scenarios where the AT root broker is common for OpsCenter server as well as PureDisk SPA. Figure A-1 describes a scenario where the AT root broker is configured on the PureDisk SPA host and OpsCenter server points to the same root broker. Thus for both product hosts, the AT root broker is common. You do not need to carry out any additional steps for PureDisk data collection. Figure A-1 Common root broker - root broker on PureDisk SPA
AT hierarchy Host B: PureDisk SPA AT Root Broker + Authentication Broker

Host A: OpsCenter Server AT Authentication Broker

Data collection

Figure A-2 describes a scenario where the AT root broker is configured on the OpsCenter server host and PureDisk SPA points to the same root broker. Thus for both product hosts, the AT root broker is common. Figure A-2 Common root broker - root broker on OpsCenter Server
AT hierarchy Host B: PureDisk SPA AT Authentication Broker

Host A: OpsCenter Server AT Root Broker + Authentication Broker

Data collection

Figure A-3 describes a scenario where the AT root broker is configured on the Host C and OpsCenter server host and PureDisk SPA point to this remote root broker. Thus for both product hosts, the AT root broker is common. Figure A-3 Common root broker - root broker on a remote host

Host C: AT Root Broker AT hierarchy Host A: OpsCenter Server AT Authentication Broker AT hierarchy Host B: PureDisk SPA AT Authentication Broker

Data collection

Additional information on PureDisk data collection About AT configuration scenarios specific to PureDisk backup product

999

About Scenario 2: Different Root Brokers

This section talks about all scenarios where the OpsCenter server and PureDisk SPA use different AT root brokers. Note: If OpsCenter and PureDisk have different AT root broker configurations, you need to set up a bi-directional trust between the OpsCenter AB host and the PureDisk SPA host. This set up is a pre-requisite for collecting PureDisk data from OpsCenter.

Note: Setting up trust between the PureDisk SPA host and OpsCenter AB host is a manual process. Refer to the Setting up a trust between PureDisk SPA host and OpsCenter AB host section. Setting up trust between the OpsCenter Authentication Broker host and PureDisk SPA host is accomplished automatically after PureDisk data collector is configured. If it is not successful, you need to do it manually. See Setting up a trust between the OpsCenter AB host and PureDisk SPA host on page 1001. Figure A-4 describes a scenario where the OpsCenter server and PureDisk SPA use the AT root brokers that are configured on their respective hosts. Figure A-4 Different root brokers - root brokers on local hosts
Host B: PureDisk SPA AT Root Broker + Authentication Broker

Host A: OpsCenter Server AT Root Broker + Authentication Broker

Data collection

Note: If you have this kind of configuration, you need to set up a trust between the two root broker hosts, that is between Host A and Host B. Figure A-5 describes a scenario where the OpsCenter server and PureDisk SPA use the AT root brokers that are configured on two remote hosts.

1000

Additional information on PureDisk data collection About AT configuration scenarios specific to PureDisk backup product

Figure A-5

Root brokers on remote hosts

Host C: AT Root Broker

Host D: AT Root Broker

AT hierarchy

Host A: OpsCenter Server AT Authentication Broker

Data collection

Host B: PureDisk SPA AT Authentication Broker

Figure A-6 describes a scenario where the OpsCenter server uses remote root broker and PureDisk SPA uses local root broker. Figure A-6 Remote root for OpsCenter server and local root for PureDisk

Host C: AT Root Broker

AT hierarchy Host A: OpsCenter Server AT Authentication Broker Host B: PureDisk SPA AT Authentication Broker

Data collection

Figure A-7 describes a scenario where PureDisk SPA uses remote root broker and OpsCenter server uses local root broker.

Additional information on PureDisk data collection Setting up a trust between the OpsCenter AB host and PureDisk SPA host

1001

Figure A-7

Local root broker for OpsCenter server and remote for PureDisk

Host C: AT Root Broker

AT hierarchy Host A: OpsCenter Server AT Authentication Broker Host B: PureDisk SPA AT Authentication Broker

Data collection

Setting up a trust between the OpsCenter AB host and PureDisk SPA host
This section provides the steps that are required to set up trust between the OpsCenter AB (authentication broker ) host and PureDisk SPA host. Note: OpsCenter AB host is the host where the OpsCenter server is installed. If OpsCenter is installed in a clustered mode, the OpsCenter AB host is the host name that was provided as the remote AB host during the OpsCenter installation.

Note: Trust setup between the OpsCenter AB host and PureDisk SPA host is automatically carried out when you create a PureDisk data collector in OpsCenter. If the trust is not successfully established at this stage, carry out the manual steps as follows.

1002

Additional information on PureDisk data collection Setting up a trust between the OpsCenter AB host and PureDisk SPA host

To set up a trust between the OpsCenter AB host and PureDisk SPA host

On the OpsCenter AB host, run the following command depending on the OpsCenter server operating system : These are the default directory paths.
Windows 32-bit C:\Program Files\VERITAS\Security\Authentication\bin\vssat setuptrust --broker <PureDiskSPAhost:port> --securitylevel high C:\Program Files (x86)\VERITAS\Security\Authentication\bin\vssat setuptrust --broker <PureDiskSPAhost:port> --securitylevel high /opt/VRTSat/bin/vssat setuptrust --broker <PureDiskSPAhost:port> --securitylevel high

Windows 64-bit

UNIX

The registered port for authentication is 2821. If the AT root broker is configured with another port number, contact your security administrator for more information. After successfully setting up a trust between the OpsCenter AB host and PureDisk SPA host, the following message is displayed:
setuptrust ------------------------------------------Setup Trust With Broker: PureDiskSPAhost

Appendix

Attributes of NetBackup data

This appendix includes the following topics:

Backup data attributes

Backup data attributes

This section lists all attributes pertaining to data that OpsCenter collects from NetBackup. You can select these attributes while generating custom reports. The following tables list all NetBackup attributes that OpsCenter collects.

Table B-1 Table B-2 Table B-3 Table B-4 Table B-5 Table B-6 Table B-7 Table B-8 Table B-9 Table B-10 Table B-11 Table B-12

1004

Attributes of NetBackup data Backup data attributes

Table B-1 Data Attributes

Agent Server

Backup Job Attributes Sample Data

host.symantec.com

Explanation
The name of the server where a OpsCenter data collection agent is installed Filled in by the user in the Job Reconciliation page to indicate why a job failed so others can see. The deduplication file factor for each PureDisk backup job. Meaning that for every 321 files that were backed up only one file was actually stored. (321 to 1 file deduplication rate) The number of files not needing to be backed up for every backup job in PureDisk because they were already stored with deduplication. Meaning that if 500 files were targeted for backup, only 44 were stored since the saving was 456. Within OpsCenter there is the ability to mark a job as ignored (yes/no). If it is ignored it does not count towards things like success rate or time since last successful backup. This marking of a job as ignored is done in the "Reports > Explorers" section.

Backup job Comment

Host cannot be reached

Backup job File Count Deduplication Factor

321

Backup job File Count 456 Deduplication Savings

Backup job Is Ignored

Yes/No

Attributes of NetBackup data Backup data attributes

1005

Table B-1 Data Attributes

Backup Job Attributes (continued) Sample Data

400 files

Explanation
The number of files that are processed in a PureDisk backup. Note that this number is not actually stored since it is before deduplication. The size in byes of a PureDisk backup job before deduplication. The deduplication size factor for each PureDisk backup job. Meaning that for every 567KB that were backed up only 1KB was stored. The number of KB's not needing to be backed up for every backup job in PureDisk because they were already stored with deduplication. Meaning that if 346KB were backed up, the savings of 345KB means only 1 KB was needed to be stored. Each directory under a job and it's type of backup. The transport that was used to move the backup from backup client to media server The number of times a backup job had to be attempted before being successful or reaching the maximum allowable number of retries

Backup job Protected File Count

Backup job Protected Size

200GB

Backup job Size Deduplication Factor

567

Backup job Size 345 Deduplication Savings

Backup job Sub Type

Catalog, File System, MS Exchange, NDMP, Sybase

Backup job Transport Type

LAN, SAN

Job Attempt Count

1006

Attributes of NetBackup data Backup data attributes

Table B-1 Data Attributes

Job Client

Backup Job Attributes (continued) Sample Data

backup-client.symantec.com

Explanation
The name of a host being backed up as seen by a backup job The file system directory being backed up as seen by a backup job The amount of time in seconds for a backup to start and finish as seen by a backup job The date and time that a backup ended The exit code, status code, or error code for a particular job The time at which this job (the image that the job generates) will expire. The number of files a backed up during a backup job The group ID that the product group specifies. Note:The secondary ID and the Group ID are intended for the same purpose. These IDs group the jobs in some way that is useful in reporting.

Job Directory

C:\, /var, ALL_LOCAL_DRIVES

Job Duration

300 seconds

Job End Time

Tues 3/23/2008 03:34:43

Job Error Code

0,1,2,3

Job Expiration Time

Aug 01, 2008 22:03:48

Job File Count

300

Job Group ID

6114

Job Level

Full, Differential Incremental, User Backup

The Schedule Type for the backup job, Full, Incremental, Cumulative, User etc.

Attributes of NetBackup data Backup data attributes

1007

Table B-1 Data Attributes

Job Primary ID

Backup Job Attributes (continued) Sample Data

5,234,234

Explanation
A unique number for each backup job in a backup domain that identifies a backup job When a unique job number is not enough to distinguish a job, a secondary ID may be used. For NBU, this field is the job Process ID The amount in KB that a backup job transferred from client to media server for backing up The date and time that a backup started A percent number that is calculated based on the number of jobs that were successful (NetBackup status 0) and partially successful (NetBackup status 1) divided by the total number of jobs ran in that period of time. Example: 98 successful jobs / 100 total jobs (2 failures) = 98% A percent number that is calculated based on the number of jobs that were successful (NetBackup status 0) divided by the total number of jobs ran in that period of time. Example: 98 successful jobs / 100 total

Job Secondary ID

5,234,235

Job Size

2048

Job Start Time

Tues 3/23/2008 02:34:43

Job Success Rate 98 (Complete and partial)

Job Success Rate (Complete only)

99

1008

Attributes of NetBackup data Backup data attributes

Table B-1 Data Attributes

Job Throughput (Kbytes/sec)

Backup Job Attributes (continued) Sample Data

3,234

Explanation
The speed of a backup job in Kbytes/sec. This is the speed of the overall job which takes in to account transfer time from client to media server and media server to disk or tape storage. It is not just the speed of a tape drive. The type of operation done by the backup product The Schedule Type for the backup job grouped into just two options. Full vs. Other The name of the master server that executed the backup job The name of the media server that performed the backup job The name of the backup policy as seen by a backup job The name of the backup policy as seen by a backup job

Job Type

Backup, Restore, duplication, archive, label, erase

Level Type

Full, Differential Incremental, User Backup

Master Server

nbu-master.example.com

Media Server

nbu-media.example.com

Policy

Oracle Backup Policy, User Backup Policy, File System Backup Policy

Policy Description

Oracle Backup Policy, User Backup Policy, File System Backup Policy

Policy Description

This policy is for doing Oracle backups The user-defined description of a policy as seen by a backup job NetBackup Policy Domain, PureDisk Policy Domain The backup product that a backup policy executed a job from

Policy Domain Name

Attributes of NetBackup data Backup data attributes

1009

Table B-1 Data Attributes

Policy Type

Backup Job Attributes (continued) Sample Data Explanation

Standard (UNIX), Windows-NT, Oracle, The type of policy as Exchange seen by a backup job NetBackup, PureDisk, TSM The backup product that performs backup, from which OpsCenter collects data The name of a schedule which resides within a policy as seen by a backup job A word description for each job that coorelates status codes to their english meaning. All failures are mapped to the word Failure The name of a storage unit which is choosen by a policy to receive and store backups. Storage Units are usually groupings of tape drives within a library or multiple disk locations that are grouped together in pools. This is the storage unit name that was used by a backup job and therefore may or may not exist in present time. The type of storage unit used and seen by a backup job

Product

Schedule

(user-defined), ex: Weekly-Fulls, Daily-Incrementals

Status

Success, Partial, Failure

Storage Unit Name

(user-defined), ex: tld0-hcart-0

Storage Unit Type

Disk, Media Manager (tape)

1010

Attributes of NetBackup data Backup data attributes

Table B-2 Data Attributes

Backup Image Compression State

Backup Image Attributes Sample Data

Yes/No

Explanation
A yes/no property of if a backup image stored in the catalog was compressed or not. The date/time that a backup image copy is set to expire A yes/no property of if a backup image is expired or not. If it is expired it can no longer be restored and that space may be rewritten to by the backup application. If it is not expired it is available for restore. A yes/no property of if a backup image is the primary copy. If the image is a 2nd or greater copy this value would be no. The name of the backup server that performed the copy of a backup to a second location. A true/false property as to if the backup image copy was written using multiplexing or not (multiple clients/jobs streamed to one image) The type of storage unit that the backup image was copied to. This could be disk, tape etc.

Backup Image Copy Expiration Time

Mon 4/23/2008 4:32:34

Backup Image Copy Is Yes/No Currently Expired

Backup Image Copy Is Yes/No Primary

Backup Image Copy Media Server

backup-server.symantec.com

Backup Image Copy Multiplexed State

True/False

Backup Image Copy Storage Unit Type

Media Manager (tape), Disk

Attributes of NetBackup data Backup data attributes

1011

Table B-2 Data Attributes

Backup Image Attributes (continued) Sample Data

30

Explanation
The number of fragments that make up a complete unexpired backup. A single backup can have 1 or a multiple of fragments which are blocks of data seperated by tape marks on tape or seperated in to separate files on the file system if written to disk. A unique ID or key for every backup stored in the catalog. This key or ID can be used to look up an image in the catalog for restore or other activity A yes/no property of if a backup image was encrypted between the backup client and backup media server. This value does NOT represent if tape drive or other encryption was used or not. The date and time that a backup image will expire. When a backup image expires it is no longer available for restore and the space that the backup occupied can be reused for additional backups (overwritten) The actual number of files that are stored within a backup image.

Backup Image Copy Unexpired Fragment Count

Backup Image Copy Unique ID

backupclient_23423

Backup Image Encryption State

Yes/No

Backup Image Expiration Time

Mon 4/23/2008 4:32:34

Backup Image File Count

432

1012

Attributes of NetBackup data Backup data attributes

Table B-2 Data Attributes

Backup Image Attributes (continued) Sample Data

Mon 4/23/2008 4:32:34

Explanation
The date/time that the backup image fragment is set to expire A yes/no property of if the backup image fragment is expired or not. Even if a backup fragment is expired, that space can not be reused until the whole backup image is expired (disk) or the whole backup tape media is expired (tape) The true image restore status for a backup image fragment. True image restores allow a restore to take place at the directory level without overwriting files that weren't backed up but are still in the directory. For this to be possible a true image restore backup image must exist. The size of the backup image fragment. By default NetBackup uses 1TB fragments (ie no fragments) but this can be configured to different values A unique ID associated with every backup image fragment A yes/no property as to if the backup image is expired or not

Backup Image Fragment Expiration Time

Backup Image Yes/No Fragment Is Currently Expired

Backup Image Fragment Is TIR

TIR Info on Disk, TIR Rsv Synthetic Info on Disk

Backup Image Fragment Size

2048

Backup Image Fragment Unique ID

backupimagefragment_124

Backup Image Is Currently Expired

Yes/No

Attributes of NetBackup data Backup data attributes

1013

Table B-2 Data Attributes

Backup Image TIR Status

Backup Image Attributes (continued) Sample Data

TIR Info on Disk, TIR Rsv Synthetic Info on Disk

Explanation
The true image restore status for a backup image. True image restores allow a restore to take place at the directory level without overwriting files that weren't backed up but are still in the directory. For this to be possible a "true image restore" backup image must exist. The type of backup image. Catalog being a NBU catalog image for disaster recovery The number of copies that exist for a primary backup image. These are copies that are unexpired and can be used for a restore. A unique ID or key for every backup stored in the catalog. This key or ID can be used to look up an image in the catalog for restore or other activity The date and time that the backup image was finished writing. The date and time that the backup image began to be written.

Backup Image Type

Regular, Catalog

Backup Image 1, 2, 3 etc. Unexpired Copy Count

Backup Image Unique backupclient_23423 ID

Backup Image Write End Time

Mon 4/23/2008 4:32:34

Backup Image Write Start Time

Mon 4/23/2008 4:32:34

1014

Attributes of NetBackup data Backup data attributes

Table B-2 Data Attributes

Data Classification Master Server

Backup Image Attributes (continued) Sample Data

master-server.symantec.com

Explanation
The name of the server that classified the backup image in some sort of ranking (gold, silver, bronze etc) The name of the classification of data The number ranking that corresponds with the name of data classification. A 1 would mean the data is more important than a 2 for example.

Data Classification Name Data Classification Rank

Gold, Silver, Bronze, Non-DataClassification-Name 1,2,3,etc

Table B-3 Data Attributes

Attempt Duration

Backup Attempt Attributes Sample Data

3500

Explanation
The number in seconds that a backup was attempted The number in seconds that a backup was attempted The date and time that a backup attempt ended (each attempt is unique) The error code that the backup attempt finished with The number of files the backup attempted to process The number in KB for the amount an attempted backup tried to process

Attempt Duration

3500

Attempt End Time

Mon 4/23/2008 4:32:34

Attempt Error Code

0, 1, 2, 3 etc.

Attempt File Count

0, 1, 2, 3 etc.

Attempt Size

2048

Attributes of NetBackup data Backup data attributes

1015

Table B-3 Data Attributes

Backup Attempt Attributes (continued) Sample Data

Mon 4/23/2008 4:32:34

Explanation
The start time that a backup attempt began A named status that maps to the error code numbers in the backup application (for example a status 0 in NetBackup is a success, a status 1 is partial and all other numbers are failures) The average success rate across all attempts in all backups. Example would be the average of 2 backups were each was attempted 3 times. The success rate would be the success rate average of the 3 attempts within each backup job. (Note that this is different than the success rate across all jobs which does not take in to account attempts) The speed of a backup attempt in Kbytes/sec. This is different than the overall KB/sec for a job which would take in to account all attempts.

Attempt Start Time

Attempt Status

Success, Partial, Failure

Attempt Success Rate 98%

Attempt Throughput

2048Kbytes/sec

1016

Attributes of NetBackup data Backup data attributes

Table B-3 Data Attributes

Backup Attempt Attributes (continued) Sample Data

98%

Explanation
The average success rate across all attempts in all backups but also including partial successes (status 1 in NetBackup). Example would be the average of 2 backups were each was attempted 3 times. The success rate would be the success rate average of the 3 attempts within each backup job. (Note that this is different than the success rate across all jobs which does not take in to account attempts) The attempt number in a sequence. 1 would represent the first attempt, 2 would represent the second attempt etc. The date and time that a particular file was skipped over during a backup The status code for why that file was skipped (usually a status 1) The reason a file was skipped. (Usually because file was in use) The actual file name that was skipped over during a backup.

Backup Attempt Partial Success Rate

Backup Attempt Sequence

1, 2, 3

Backup Skipped File Time

Mon 4/23/2008 4:32:34

Skipped File Code

Skipped File Reason

File is open by another process

Skipped File Name

C:\Windows\an_open_file.dll

Attributes of NetBackup data Backup data attributes

1017

Table B-4 Data Attributes

Backup Policy Attributes Sample Data Explanation

The host name of the backup application host that contains the backup policy. In the case of NetBackup this is the master server. The name of a backup policy that exists in the backup application. Note that this is similar and can be the same as the backup job Attribute: Policy which shows what policy the backup job was executed from. It is different though since this Policy Name simply means that this Policy exists not that anything was executed from it yet.

Backup Policy Domain nbu-master.example.com Master Server

Backup Policy Name

Oracle Backup Policy, User Backup Policy, File System Backup Policy

Backup Policy Type

Standard (UNIX), Windows-NT, Oracle, The type of backup Exchange policy that exists in the backup application. Note that this is different than the backup job Attribute: Policy Type

Table B-5 Data Attributes

File System Attributes Sample Data Explanation

User defined field. Can be one of Mission Critical, Business Critical or Business Support A user defined field for an object ID of the file system. Typically used as a pairing with an asset management database

Business Classification Business Critical

File System: OID

asset123 etc.

1018

Attributes of NetBackup data Backup data attributes

Table B-5 Data Attributes

Filesystem Name

File System Attributes (continued) Sample Data Explanation

C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\ The file system directory being backed up. NTFS, UFS, ZFS, EXT3 A user-defined field (this is not collected automatically) of what type of file system was backed up.

Filesystem Type

Table B-6 Data Attributes

Host Architecture

Host Attributes Sample Data

SPARC, x86

Explanation
User defined field (this is not automatically collected) for filling in architecture type such as x86, x86-64, SPARC, POWER, PA-RISC, IA64 etc A user defined field for inserting any extra information regarding a host A user defined field for inserting an object ID from an asset management database The name of the host object that contains file systems. The version of the operating system. Usually grouped with Operating System name since this will have values like 10 (i.e. Solaris 10), or 2003 (i.e. Windows 2003)

Host: Misc Info

Pete's server

Host: OID

asset123, etc.

Hostname

hostname.example.com

O.S. Version

2003, 10

Attributes of NetBackup data Backup data attributes

1019

Table B-6 Data Attributes

Operating System

Host Attributes (continued) Sample Data

Windows, Solaris

Explanation
The operating system name of the host

Table B-7 Data Attributes

Agent Server

Backup Media Attributes Sample Data

ops-agent.example.com

Explanation
The name of the OpsCenter agent that collected the media information. The date/time that a piece of media was first allocated or had it's first backup written to it. Once the media expires it will have a new allocation date/time when it is reused How much is left on tape in KB. Value here per sample is either the free capacity if the media is active, or 0 otherwise. Total capacity of the tape in KB. Value here per sample is either the total capacity if the media is active, or 0 otherwise. The full barcode as ready by the physical robot. This can be longer than the 6 characters used by a NetBackup Media. The date/time that a backup media is set to expire

Backup Media Allocation Time

Mon 3/4/2008 3:34:34

Backup Media Available Free Capacity

500,000 KB

Backup Media Available Total Capacity

19,000,000KB

Backup Media Barcode JFP000L2

Backup Media Expiration Time

Mon 3/4/2008 3:34:34

1020

Attributes of NetBackup data Backup data attributes

Table B-7 Data Attributes

Backup Media Free Capacity

Backup Media Attributes (continued) Sample Data

500,000 KB

Explanation
How much is left on tape in KB. This number may be estimated using an algorithm. A yes/no property of a particular tape indicating whether the tape has been sampled in the last two collections. A yes/no property of a particular tape indicating whether it can still be written to. A yes/no property of if the backup media exists in the current configuration (and not historical) A yes/no property of if the backup media has expired data on it or not A yes/no property of if the backup media is marked as full (no more backups can be written to it)

Backup Media Is Active Yes/No

Backup Media Is Available

Yes/No

Backup Media Is Current

Yes/No

Backup Media Is Data Expired

Yes/No

Backup Media Is Full

Yes/No

Attributes of NetBackup data Backup data attributes

1021

Table B-7 Data Attributes

Backup Media Is Imported

Backup Media Attributes (continued) Sample Data

Yes/No

Explanation
A yes/no property of if the backup media was imported. Imported media simply means that this paticular backup domain did not originally write the data to the media. This could be due to disaster recovery where the catalog could not be moved from an existing domain so the tapes were read individually to determine what data was on them. It also is commonly used to import Backup Exec media to NetBackup. A yes/no property of if the physical media is expired or not. Once all the backup images (data) has been expired on a tape that entire cartridge is marked as Physically Expired=Yes and it can be overwritten or used by future backups. Since capacity of a tape is often estimated using an algorithm. This specifies whether it was actually calculated, or provided exactly by the DP product. A date/time that the backup media was last used to be read (restored)

Backup Media Is Physically Expired

Yes/No

Backup Media Is Total Yes/No Capacity Estimated

Backup Media Last Read Time

Mon 3/4/2008 3:34:34

1022

Attributes of NetBackup data Backup data attributes

Table B-7 Data Attributes

Backup Media Last Write Time

Backup Media Attributes (continued) Sample Data

Mon 3/4/2008 3:34:34

Explanation
A date/time that the backup media was last used to be written to (duplicates, backups) The physical slot number that a given piece of media resides in A yes/no property of if a given piece of tape media will allow for multiple expiration dates. Multiple expiration dates means that the whole tape can not be reused until the last backup has expired on the media. A yes/no property of if multiplexing is allowed on a piece of tape media. Multiplexing means that multiple clients were multiple clients or jobs were backed up to one image so that particular image could have more than one client inside it. Calculated value representing (available free capacity /available total capacity ) in percentage Calculated value representing (free capacity total capacity ) in percentage

Backup Media Library 1, 2, 3 etc. Slot Number

Backup Media Multiple Yes/No Retention Levels Allowed

Backup Media Multiplexing Allowed

Yes/No

Backup Media Percent 0-100% Available Free Capacity

Backup Media Percent 0-100% Free Capacity

Attributes of NetBackup data Backup data attributes

1023

Table B-7 Data Attributes

Backup Media Attributes (continued) Sample Data Explanation

Calculated value representing (used capacity / total capacity) in percentage The date/time that a piece of media will physically expire (all images on the media) and be able to be reused

Backup Media Percent 0-100% Used Capacity

Backup Media Physical Mon 3/4/2008 3:34:34 Expiration Time

Backup Media Retention Level

63072000.00, 31536000.00, 1209600.00 The retention level of the media in number of seconds. Divide by 86400 to get the retention level in days Mon 3/4/2008 3:34:34 The date/time that all the media information was collected from the backup application to OpsCenter. History is kept so a history of the state of all media can be determined. The type of storage for a given piece of media (disk or tape) Total capacity of the tape in KB. This number may be estimated using an algorithm. The density or type of media. This is used to match what drives the media can go in for a mixed media environment. The number of images that are unexpired on a given piece of media

Backup Media Snapshot Time

Backup Media Storage Disk, Tape Type

Backup Media Total Capacity

19,000,000 KB

Backup Media Type

HCART, DLT, 8MM etc.

Backup Media Unexpired Image Count

1, 2, 3 etc.

1024

Attributes of NetBackup data Backup data attributes

Table B-7 Data Attributes

Backup Media Attributes (continued) Sample Data

500,000 KB

Explanation
Amount in KB used up in the tape. This value is provided by the DP product and is NOT estimated.

Backup Media Used Capacity

Backup Media Volume User defined but defaults to things like A user defined field for Group Name 000_00002_TLD grouping volumes. By default NetBackup assigns the robot number and type so that TLD(2) would read 000_00002_TLD Backup Media Volume /disk_staging_file_system/, Path C:\disk_staging\ The path on disk where backup images are stored. Specific to NetBackup 6.5 - this is the high water mark that is set for a Flexible Disk pool, OpenStorage disk pool or PureDisk backend storage pools. When this threshold is reached by the file system on the disk pools backups will not be attempted to that disk location since it will be considered full. Specific to NetBackup 6.5 - this is the low water mark that is set for a Flexible Disk pool, OpenStorage disk pool or PureDisk backend storage pools. When this threshold is reached by the file system on the disk pools backups will not be sent to the location as often

Disk Pool High Water Mark

95%

Disk Pool Low Water Mark

80%

Attributes of NetBackup data Backup data attributes

1025

Table B-7 Data Attributes

Disk Pool Master Server

Backup Media Attributes (continued) Sample Data

nbu-master.example.com

Explanation
The name of the NetBackup master server that the disk pool belongs to The name of the disk pool which defaults to the disk array string or a user defined value The raw size is the size of the disk volume(s) in a disk pool. Raw size does not mean you can actually write to that amount (that's what usable size is) but just tells you there is more possible disk space that could be allocated from raw to usable. The type of flexible disk that the pool is The date/time that a snapshot was taken to produce the backup image that exists in the disk pool Similar to tape drive status, this tells if the disk pool is UP meaning it is usable and can be used or DOWN meaning it is not usable. When in the DOWN state jobs will not attempt to use the disk pool.

Disk Pool Name

netappfi::fas3050-1a, DDPool, etc.

Disk Pool Raw Size

69,990.40

Disk Pool Server Type AdvancedDisk, SharedDisk

Disk Pool Snapshot Time

Mon 3/4/2008 3:34:34

Disk Pool Status

UP, DOWN

1026

Attributes of NetBackup data Backup data attributes

Table B-7 Data Attributes

Backup Media Attributes (continued) Sample Data

1,208,893.44

Explanation
The usable size is the size of the formatted file system and tells you how much data can be written to the disk pool The number of disk volumes that make up the disk pool The type of tape media as defined by the backup application. For NetBackup this is also called the density and specifies what types of drive the tape can go in. Optical media header size of a backup image The Media ID for a given piece of media, usually a subset of the barcode. For NetBackup this is a 6-digit ID. The number of backup images on a given piece of tape media or disk pool Logical block address of the beginning of the block that a backup image exists The number of times a given piece of backup media has been used for restores. Optical media sector size of a backup image.

Disk Pool Usable Size

Disk Pool Volume Count

Media Density

HCART, DLT, 8MM etc.

Media Hsize

1024

Media ID

JFP000

Media Image Count

54

Media L Offset

2048

Media Restore Count

0, 1, 2, 3, etc.

Media Ssize

1024

Attributes of NetBackup data Backup data attributes

1027

Table B-7 Data Attributes

Partner

Backup Media Attributes (continued) Sample Data

A/B

Explanation
The ID of the opposite side of a optical platter. If on side A of a platter this would show Side B The backup product that this piece of media belongs to

Product

NetBackup, TSM

Status

Active, Non-active, Suspended, Frozen The status of a given piece of media. Active meaning it is being used at a given point in time, Frozen meaning errors have occurred on the tape media and it is no longer being used for backups, etc. 1, 2, 3, 4 etc. The volume pool ID which automatically starts at 1 for the default pool "NetBackup". Things like Scratch Pools or onsite/offsite pools are typically also used and these all have unique volume pool ID's. Many encryption solutions such as Decru and IBM use the volume pool ID to determine what backups to encrypt or not This user defined field is the name of the volume pool that media is placed in to. The default is NetBackup but many others are typically created to segment tapes in to groups

Volume Pool ID

Volume Pool Name

NetBackup, Scratch, CatalogBackup, MSEO, WORM, etc.

1028

Attributes of NetBackup data Backup data attributes

Table B-7 Data Attributes

Volume/EMM Database Server

Backup Media Attributes (continued) Sample Data

nbu-master.example.com

Explanation
The name of the Volume Database (pre-NetBackup 6.) or EMM server (NetBackup 6.0+). This is typically the NBU Master but doesn't have to be in the case where multiple masters are sharing the same EMM server.

Table B-8 Data Attributes

Tape Library Attributes Sample Data

NetBackup, TSM

Explanation
The backup application that controls the tape drive The server host name that the OpsCenter agent is installed on that is used to collect tape drive information. The device database server that is controlling the particular library. This is the Enterprise Media Manager server (EMM) in NetBackup 6.0+ or the device control host in 5.1 and below. The manufacturer as determined by the SCSI inquiry string in the backup application. The serial number, unique, to each tape library

Tape Library Agent Product

Tape Library Agent Server

ops-agent.example.com

Tape Library Device Database Server

NBU-device-host.example.com

Tape Library Manufacturer

STK, Quantum, IBM etc.

Tape Library Serial Number

ADIC203100468_LL0

Attributes of NetBackup data Backup data attributes

1029

Table B-8 Data Attributes

Tape Library Slot Count

Tape Library Attributes (continued) Sample Data

40, 120, 360

Explanation
The total number of slots that exist in a tape library

Tape Library Type

Tape Library DLT, Tape Library 8MM, The type of tape library Tape Library ACS (TLD, ACS, 8MM, 4MM, TLM, TLH etc) 0, 1, 2 etc. The unique number given to each tape library in the EMM database. This ID is put together with the library type in the NBU GUI to show TLD(0), TLD(1) etc.

Tape Library Unique ID

Table B-9 Data Attributes

Name

Tape Drive Attributes Sample Data

IBM.ULTRIUM-TD2.000

Explanation
The name of a tape drive as given by the backup application, usually default names are based on SCSI inquiry strings that contain the manufacturer name and model number The number of a tape drive as given by the backup application which is unique for each physical drive (a number could be shared between media servers though) A simple true/false on weather the tape drive is shared across backup servers or not

Number

0, 1, 2, 3 etc.

Shared

true/false

1030

Attributes of NetBackup data Backup data attributes

Table B-9 Data Attributes

Tape Drive Device Host

Tape Drive Attributes (continued) Sample Data

NBU-device-host.example.com

Explanation
The device host (Media Server) that the tape drive is connected to. A simple true/false on weather the tape drive exists in the current configuration (true) or if it is historical and no longer exists (false) The unique serial number for a physical tape drive The storage unit that the tape drive is assigned to The type of tape drive as defined by the backup application. For NetBackup this is also called the density and specifies what types of tape can go in the drive. The tape drive number inside the library

Tape Drive Is Current

true/ false

Tape Drive Serial Number

768ZD03034

Tape Drive Storage Unit Name Tape Drive Type

dcdell214-dlt-robot-tld-0

hcart, hcart2, dlt, 8mm etc.

Tape Drive Unique ID for Library

1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 etc.

Table B-10 Data Attributes

Tape Usage Attributes Sample Data

Storage Unit Tape Group

Explanation
The storage unit group that the storage unit that the tape drive belongs to The host (Media Server) that the tape drive is assigned to for use at time of tape drive information collection

Storage Unit Group Name

Tape Drive Assigned

nbu-host.example.com

Attributes of NetBackup data Backup data attributes

1031

Table B-10 Data Attributes

Tape Drive Control

Tape Usage Attributes (continued) Sample Data Explanation

TLD, ACS, DOWN-TLD, DOWN-ACS etc. The robot type that is controlling the tape drive and it's associated status of up or down at time of tape drive information collection true / false A true / false for if the tape drive was enabled at the time of tape drive information collection A true / false for if the tape drive was in use at the time of tape drive information collection The tape that was in the drive at the time of tape drive information collection The date and time that the tape drive information was collected

Tape Drive Enabled

Tape Drive In Use

true / false

Tape Drive Recorded Media ID

VT0036

Tape Drive Snapshot Time

Apr 05, 2008 22:57:17

Table B-11 Data Attributes

Backup Log Agent Server

Backup Log Attributes Sample Data

ops-server.example.com

Explanation
The host name of the OpsCenter server where the database and web interface resides

Backup Log Message

backup of client dcdell211 exited with The detailed status status 71 (none of the files in the file messages for each job list exist) nbu-host.example.com The host server with the backup application that logged the error message

Backup Log Source Host

1032

Attributes of NetBackup data Backup data attributes

Table B-11 Data Attributes

Backup Log Client

Backup Log Attributes (continued) Sample Data

nbu-client.example.com

Explanation
The backup client that was associated with the logged error message The process or daemon name that wrote the error message The group ID that can be specified by the backup product to group them in a certain way. Note:The secondary ID and the Group ID are basically intended for the same purpose, that is to group the jobs in some way that is useful in reporting. A unique number for each backup job in a backup domain that identifies what backup job caused the error message to be logged The date/time that the error message or log was written to The backup application name that caused the error message to be created The severity code of the error message The code representing the type of the log and error message The version of the log/error message

Backup Log Daemon Name

bptm, ndmpagent, nbpem, bpbrm

Backup Log Job Group 5980 ID

Log Primary ID

6021

Log Time

Mon 3/4/2008 3:34:34

Product

NetBackup, TSM

Severity Code

1, 2, 3, 4 etc.

Type Code

1, 2, 3, 4 etc.

Version

1, 2, 3, 4 etc.

Attributes of NetBackup data Backup data attributes

1033

Table B-12 Data Attributes

Agent Monitoring Attributes Sample Data

1, 2, 3, 4 etc.

Explanation
A unique number for each data collection agent under the OpsCenter server The host name of the OpsCenter data collection agent The date and time of the last heartbeat from the data collection agent to the OpsCenter server The host name of the OpsCenter server where the database and web interface resides The number of seconds since the last heartbeat from the data collection agent to the OpsCenter server

Agent Configuration ID

Agent Host

ops-agent.example.com

Last Heartbeat

May 04, 2008 10:52:28

Server

ops-server.example.com

Time Since Agent Last 44 Heartbeat

1034

Attributes of NetBackup data Backup data attributes

Appendix

Man pages for CLIs

This appendix includes the following topics:

changeDbPassword changeVxATProperties configurePorts dbbackup dbdefrag nbfindfile opsadmin opsCenterAgentSupport opsCenterSupport runstoredquery startagent startdb startgui startserver stopagent stopdb stopgui stopserver

1036

Man pages for CLIs changeDbPassword

changeDbPassword
changeDbPassword This script changes the OpsCenter database password. This

is supported only for DBA user and not for guest and server passwords.

SYNOPSIS
changeDbPassword [--restoreDefaultPassword] | [-h|-?|--help]

DESCRIPTION
Sybase SA (SQL Anywhere) database management system is used to store the OpsCenter data. You require a user name and a password to access the database. The following database user account is shipped with OpsCenter:
dba The database administrator account. The dba account is required by the database queries that are used to update the database schema or upgrade to a new product version.

When the tool changes the dba password, it updates a configuration file on the file system so that the server can still access the database. The password is encrypted before it is stored in the configuration file. However, since the server needs to retrieve the password it cannot be stored with a one-way hash. Thus, someone could obtain the password. When the tool is run, the system administrator is advised to check the permissions on the configuration file to ensure that only an administrator can read the file.

OPTIONS
--restoreDefaultPassword

Resets DBA password to the default password.

--h|-?|--help

Shows the CLI usage statement and exits.

NOTES
Enter the following command to change the database password on Windows:
INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\changeDbPassword.bat

You are prompted to enter the current and the new password. Enter the current and the new password. Enter the following command to change the database password on UNIX:

Man pages for CLIs changeDbPassword

1037

<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/changeDbPassword.sh

You are prompted to enter the current and the new password. Enter the current and the new password.

1038

Man pages for CLIs changeVxATProperties

changeVxATProperties
changeVxATProperties This script configures the Symantec Product

Authentication Service (AT) Server parameters.

SYNOPSIS
changeVxATProperties

DESCRIPTION
The changeVxATProperties script prompts you to enter the following details:

Authentication Service Host Name Authentication Service Port Number Authentication Service Domain Name Authentication Service User Name Authentication Service Password

OPTIONS
Not applicable

NOTES
Enter the following command to configure AT parameters on Windows:
INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\changeVxATProperties.bat

Enter the following command to configure AT parameters on UNIX:

<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/changeVxATProperties.sh

Man pages for CLIs configurePorts

1039

configurePorts
configurePorts This script is used to configure Web server ports on UNIX or

Linux systems.

SYNOPSIS
configurePorts.sh [-status]|[-httpPort <httpPort>][-httpsPort <httpsPort>][-shutdownPort <shutdownPort>]

DESCRIPTION
The configurePorts script is used for the following purposes:

For configuring http, https and Tomcat shutdown ports For querying the current values for the above ports

OPTIONS
-status

Queries the current values for http, https, and Tomcat shutdown ports This option is to be used exclusive of other attributes.
-httpPort <httpPort>

Modifies the httpPort to the new value in web.xml of Tomcat

-httpsPort <httpsPort>

Modifies the httpsPort to the new value in web.xml of Tomcat

- shutdownPort <shutdownPort>

Modifies the shutdownPort to the new value in web.xml of Tomcat

NOTES
To know the HTTP and HTTPS port that OpsCenter uses, run the configurePorts utility. Run the following command on Windows:
INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\gui\bin\goodies\configurePorts.cmd -status

Run the following command on UNIX:

<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterGUI/bin/goodies/configurePorts.sh -status

1040

Man pages for CLIs dbbackup

dbbackup
dbbackup This script backs up the OpsCenter database.

SYNOPSIS
dbbackup <DB_BACKUP_DIR> [-v | -restore]

DESCRIPTION
dbbackup is a script used for backing up the OpsCenter database.

OPTIONS
DB_BACKUP_DIR

(Required) DB_BACKUP_DIR is the directory where the OpsCenter database is backed up to, or restored from. DB_BACKUP_DIR should be an absolute path.
-v

Option to validate the database after backup

- restore

Option to restore database from backupDir to the current database directory.

NOTES
On Windows, you perform backups with the dbbackup.bat batch file. The backup script creates the following files in the backup directory: vxpmdb.db and vxpmdb.log Data spaces are started when the main database is started; therefore, starting and stopping the data space file is not required.

EXAMPLES
The following command backs up the OpsCenter database to the my_db_backups directory on Windows:
INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\dbbackup.bat C:\my_db_backups

The following command backs up the OpsCenter database to the my_db_backups directory on UNIX:
<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/dbbackup.sh /my_db_backups

Man pages for CLIs dbdefrag

1041

dbdefrag
dbdefrag This script defragments the OpsCenter database.

SYNOPSIS
dbdefrag

DESCRIPTION
The dbdefrag script is used to defragment the OpsCenter database.

OPTIONS
Not applicable

NOTES
To defragment the OpsCenter database run the following commands. Run the following command on Windows:
INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\dbdefrag.bat

Run the following command on UNIX:

<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/dbdefrag.sh

1042

Man pages for CLIs nbfindfile

nbfindfile
nbfindfile This utility searches for files or folders based on simple search

criteria. This utility must be run on the master server and not the OpsCenter Server.

SYNOPSIS
nbfindfile -c client_name[,...] -p search_pattern [-s mm/dd/yyyy [HH:MM:SS] | -s_ut unix_time] [-e mm/dd/yyyy [HH:MM:SS] | -e_ut unix_time] [-backupid backup_id] [-policy policy_name] [-keyword "keyword_phrase"] [-extn file_extn[,...]] [-st sched_type] [-pt policy_type] [-kb_min min_size_kb] [-kb_max max_size_kb] [-mtime_min mm/dd/yyyy [HH:MM:SS]] [-mtime_max mm/dd/yyyy [HH:MM:SS]] [-atime_min mm/dd/yyyy [HH:MM:SS]] [-atime_max mm/dd/yyyy [HH:MM:SS]] [-ctime_min mm/dd/yyyy [HH:MM:SS]] [-ctime_max mm/dd/yyyy [HH:MM:SS]] [-only_dirs | -only_files] [-max_results number] [-I] [-l [-ctime | -atime] | -raw] [-help | -h] On UNIX and Linux systems, the directory path to this command is /usr/openv/netbackup/bin/admincmd/ On Windows systems, the directory path to this command is <install_path>\NetBackup\bin\admincmd\

DESCRIPTION
The nbfindfile command lets you search files or folders based on simple search criteria like file name and path including wildcard and backup date range. Users can specify a set of clients, possibly belonging to different master servers, for which backups are to be searched. You can specify advanced search criteria including policy type, schedule type, policy name, policy associated keywords, file extensions, file modification date range, and file size.

OPTIONS
-atime

When used with the -l option, -atime displays the last access time in place of the last modification time.
-atime_max mm/dd/yyyy [HH:MM:SS]

Specifies the maximum last access time of objects to be returned. The default is infinite.

Man pages for CLIs nbfindfile

1043

-atime_min mm/dd/yyyy [HH:MM:SS]

Specifies the minimum last access time of objects to be returned. The default is 01/01/1970 00:00:00.
-backupid backup_id

The backup ID of the backup image that should be searched.

-c client_name[,...]

Specifies the names of the NetBackup clients whose backups need to be searched. The client names must be specified as they appear in the NetBackup configuration. Multiple clients can be specified as a list that is separated by commas.
-ctime

When used with the -l option, -ctime displays the last change time in place of the last modification time.
-ctime_max mm/dd/yyyy [HH:MM:SS]

Specifies the maximum last change time of objects to be returned. The default is infinite.
-ctime_min mm/dd/yyyy [HH:MM:SS]

Specifies the minimum last change time of objects to be returned. The default is 01/01/1970 00:00:00.
-e mm/dd/yyyy [HH:MM:SS] | -e_ut unix_time

Specifies the end date for the search. Backups that occurred at or before the specified date and time are searched. The default is the current date and time.
-extn file_extn[,...]

Returns only the files with the specified extensions. For example, -extn txt,do*,jp?.
-h | -help

Displays usage information.

-i

Performs case insensitive matching.

-kb_max max_size_kb

Specifies the maximum size in kilobytes (1024 bytes) of files to be returned. The default is infinite.
-kb_min min_size_kb

Specifies the minimum last modification time of objects to be returned. The default is 01/01/1970 00:00:00.

1044

Man pages for CLIs nbfindfile

-keyword "keyword_phrase"

Searches only the backup images that contain a matching keyword phrase are searched. The keyword phrase can contain wildcards (*, ?) and square bracket expressions. Examples are [Kk]ey*, [a-z]e?, and [!K]ey.
-l

Displays output in long list format. The default condition is the last modification time of objects.
-max_results number

Specifies the maximum number of results to be displayed. The default is infinite.

-mtime_max mm/dd/yyyy [HH:MM:SS]

Specifies the maximum last modification time of objects to be returned. The default is infinite.
-mtime_min mm/dd/yyyy [HH:MM:SS]

Specifies the minimum last modification time of objects to be returned. The default is 01/01/1970 00:00:00.
-only_dirs | -only_files

Specifies the type of objects to be returned.

-p search_pattern

Specifies the search pattern. File and directory entries matching this pattern are displayed.
-policy policy_name

Searches only backup images that are created using the specified policy.
-pt policy_type

Searches only the backups with the specified policy type. Valid values for policy_type: Any, Standard, FlashBackup, MS-Windows, NDMP, FlashBackup-Windows.
-r

Displays raw output.

-s mm/dd/yyyy [HH:MM:SS] | -s_ut unix_time

Specifies the start date for the search. Backups that occurred at or after the specified date and time are searched. The default is 30 days before the end date.
-st sched_type

Specifies a schedule type for the image selection. The default is any schedule type. Valid values, in either uppercase or lowercase, are as follows:

Man pages for CLIs nbfindfile

1045

ANY FULL (full backup) INCR (differential-incremental backup) CINC (cumulative-incremental backup) UBAK (user backup) UARC (user archive) SCHED USER (user backup and user archive) NOT_ARCHIVE (all backups except user archive)

1046

Man pages for CLIs opsadmin

opsadmin
opsadmin This script is used to monitor/start/stop the OpsCenter services on

UNIX or Linux systems

SYNOPSIS
opsadmin.sh {start|stop|monitor}

DESCRIPTION
The opsadmin script is used for monitoring/starting/stopping the OpsCenter services.

OPTIONS
start

Starts all OpsCenter services. These services include OpsCenter database, OpsCenter server, and Web server services.
stop

Stops all OpsCenter services. These services include OpsCenter database, OpsCenter server, and Web server services.
monitor

Monitors all OpsCenter services and also AT (Symantec Product Authentication Service) and PBX (Symantec Private Branch Exchange)services

NOTES
opsadmin opsadmin.sh resides by default in the <INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin

directory.

EXAMPLES
EXAMPLE 1 The following command starts all OpsCenter services:
<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin.sh start

EXAMPLE 2 The following command monitors OpsCenter services:

Man pages for CLIs opsadmin

1047

<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsadmin.sh monitor

1048

Man pages for CLIs opsCenterAgentSupport

opsCenterAgentSupport
opsCenterAgentSupport This script collects OpsCenter Agent configuration

files and logs.

SYNOPSIS
opsCenterAgentSupport

DESCRIPTION
The opsCenterAgentSupport script collects OpsCenter Agent configuration files and logs for troubleshooting.

OPTIONS
Not applicable

NOTES
Run the following commands to execute the support scripts for OpsCenter Agent. Run the following command on Windows:
INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\Agent\bin\opsCenterAgentSupport.bat

Run the following command on UNIX:

<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterAgent/bin/opsCenterAgentSupport.sh

You can view the following status messages on the command prompt:
Stopping the OpsCenter Agent Service... Support Directory Exists. This will be deleted... Support Directory Deleted... Created Support Directory... Zipping Support Folder... Please collect Support.zip file from C:\PROGRA~1\Symantec\OPSCEN~1\Agent\temp\support.zip Starting the OpsCenter Agent... C:\Program Files\Symantec\OpsCenter\Agent\bin>

Man pages for CLIs opsCenterSupport

1049

opsCenterSupport
opsCenterSupport This script collects OpsCenter server configuration files and

logs for troubleshooting.

SYNOPSIS
opsCenterSupport

DESCRIPTION
opsCenterSupport is a script used for collecting OpsCenter server configuration

files and logs for troubleshooting.

OPTIONS
Not applicable

NOTES
Run the following command to collect OpsCenter server configuration information: Run the following command on UNIX:
<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/opsCenterSupport.sh

Run the following command on Windows:

INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\opsCenterSupport.bat

You can view the following statuses on the command prompt:

Support Directory Exists. This will be deleted... Support Directory Deleted... Created Support Directory... SupportDir=E:\OPSCEN~1\OPSCEN~1\server\temp\support Collecting Installed Paths Collecting System Properties Collecting Memory & Processor Properties Collecting Disk Allocation for OpsCenter Installed Drive Collecting Directory Structure for OpsCenter Collecting version file Collecting Version File... Getting Customized Collections...

1050

Man pages for CLIs opsCenterSupport

Do you want to Collect Configuration files [y/n]: (y)y Do you want to Collect Application Log files [y/n]: (y)y Do you want to Collect OpsCenter GUI(147) Log files [y/n]: (y)y Collecting 147 files... Do you want to Collect OpsCenter Server(148) Log files [y/n]: (y)y Collecting 148 files... Do you want to Collect db Log files [y/n]: (y)y Collecting db logs... Do you want to Collect WebServer Log files [y/n]: (y)y Collecting WebServer logs... Do you want to Collect setEnv file [y/n]: (y)y Collecting setenv file... Do you want to Collect Database files [y/n]: (y)y Collecting vxpmdb file... Collecting vxpmdb.log file... If this is an Upgrade scenario Do you want to Collect Old Database files and logs [y/n]: (y)y Old dbfiles are not present in the path, hence not collected... Collecting upgrade logs... If this is an install scenario Do you want to Collect Installation Logs [y/n]: (y)y Zipping Support Folder... Please collect Support.zip file from E:\OPSCEN~1\OPSCEN~1\server\temp\support.zip

Man pages for CLIs runstoredquery

1051

runstoredquery
runstoredquery

SYNOPSIS
runStoredQuery <Report Name> <User Name> <Domain Name> <Domain Type> [<Output Type> pdf | csv]

DESCRIPTION
The runstoredquery script runs saved customSQL and the OpsCenter Administrator generates output in the desired format.

OPTIONS
Report Name

Name of the report (surrounded with double-quotes) Example: runStoredQuery "My Report" admin OpsCenterUsers vx pdf
User Name

Name of the user who has saved the report

Domain Name

Domain name for the user

Domain Type

Domain type for the user

Output Type

Report output type (pdf/csv). The default is csv.

EXAMPLE
runStoredQuery "My Report" admin OpsCenterUsers vx pdf

1052

Man pages for CLIs startagent

startagent
startagent This script starts the OpsCenter Agent service.

SYNOPSIS
startagent

DESCRIPTION
The startagent script is used to start the OpsCenter Agent service.

OPTIONS
Not applicable

NOTES
Enter the following command to start the OpsCenter Agent service on Windows:
INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\Agent\bin\startagent.bat

Enter the following command to start the OpsCenter Agent process on UNIX:
<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterAgent/bin/startagent

Man pages for CLIs startdb

1053

startdb
startdb This script starts the OpsCenter database.

SYNOPSIS
startdb

DESCRIPTION
The startdb script is used to start the OpsCenter database.

OPTIONS
Not applicable

NOTES
To start the database server, enter the following command on Windows:
INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\startdb.bat

To start the database server, enter the following command on UNIX:

<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/startdb

1054

Man pages for CLIs startgui

startgui
startgui This script is used to start the OpsCenter Web server service on UNIX

or Linux systems.

SYNOPSIS
startgui.sh

DESCRIPTION
The startgui script is used for starting the OpsCenter Web server service.

OPTIONS
Not applicable

NOTES
The following command starts the OpsCenter WebServer service on Windows:
INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\gui\bin\startgui.cmd

The following command starts the OpsCenter WebServer service on UNIX:

<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterGUI/bin/startgui.sh

Man pages for CLIs startserver

1055

startserver
startserver This script starts the OpsCenter Server.

SYNOPSIS
startserver

DESCRIPTION
The startserver script is used to start the OpsCenter Server.

OPTIONS
Not applicable

NOTES
Run the following command to start the OpsCenter Server on Windows:
INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\startserver.bat

Run the following command to start the OpsCenter Server on UNIX:

<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/startserver

1056

Man pages for CLIs stopagent

stopagent
stopagent This script is used to stop the OpsCenter Agent.

SYNOPSIS
stopagent

DESCRIPTION
The stopagent script is used to stop the OpsCenter Agent on UNIX.

OPTIONS
Not applicable

NOTES
Run the following command to stop the OpsCenter Agent:
<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterAgent/bin/stopagent

Man pages for CLIs stopdb

1057

stopdb
stopdb This script is used to stop the OpsCenter database.

SYNOPSIS
stopdb

DESCRIPTION
The stopdb script is used to stop the OpsCenter database.

OPTIONS
Not applicable

NOTES
Run the following command to stop the OpsCenter database on Windows:
INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\stopdb.bat

Run the following command to stop the OpsCenter database on UNIX:

<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/stopdb

1058

Man pages for CLIs stopgui

stopgui
stopgui used to stop the OpsCenter Web server service.

SYNOPSIS
stopgui.sh

DESCRIPTION
The stopgui script is used for stopping the OpsCenter Web server service.

OPTIONS
Not applicable

NOTES
The following command stops the OpsCenter Web server service on Windows:
INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\gui\bin\stopgui.cmd

The following command stops the OpsCenter Web server process on UNIX:
<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterGUI/bin/stopgui.sh

Man pages for CLIs stopserver

1059

stopserver
stopserver This script stops the OpsCenter Server.

SYNOPSIS
stopserver

DESCRIPTION
The stopserver script is used to stop the OpsCenter Server.

OPTIONS
Not applicable

NOTES
Run the following command to stop the OpsCenter Server on Windows:
INSTALL_PATH\OpsCenter\server\bin\stopserver.bat

Run the following command to stop the OpsCenter Server on UNIX:

<INSTALL_PATH>/SYMCOpsCenterServer/bin/stopserver

1060

Man pages for CLIs stopserver

Appendix

Creating views using CSV, TSV, and XML files

This appendix includes the following topics:

About using CSV, TSV, and XML files to create views About creating CSV files About creating TSV files About creating XML files XML DTD structure DTD elements DTD <application> element DTD <objects> and <object> elements DTD <attribute> elements DTD <view> element DTD <node> elements DTD <aliaslevel> elements Examples of XML files Example 1: Adding an object Example 2: Adding a view Example 3: Updating an object

1062

Creating views using CSV, TSV, and XML files About using CSV, TSV, and XML files to create views

Example 4: Merging objects

About using CSV, TSV, and XML files to create views

You can use the Symantec OpsCenter Analytics console to create views. However, you may find it faster and more convenient to create the CSV, TSV, or XML files that describe the views that you want to create. This Appendix describes how you can create views using CSV, TSV, or XML files. You can then import, export, merge, or alias the CSV, TSV, or XML file into the OpsCenter database from the View Builder GUI or by using the view_exportimport script. See the Java View Builder help for information on how to import, export, merge, or alias a CSV, TSV, or XML file using the View Builder GUI. Information on how to import, export, merge, or alias a CSV, TSV, or XML file to Symantec OpsCenter Analytics by using the view_exportimport utility is available.

About creating CSV files

You can create views in Symantec OpsCenter Analytics by creating and importing the comma-separated values (CSV) file that describes the views. You can create the CSV files in a text editor, Excel etc. and save the file as <filename>.csv. Note that you can only create objects of type Generic when you create views using a CSV file. Note: You can export and import view structures using the CSV file. However, you cannot export or import attributes using a CSV file. A CSV file typically contains the following details:
First column View type View Type must be one of the following:

Master Server Client Policy File System Enterprise Vault Server Exchange Server Vault

Creating views using CSV, TSV, and XML files About creating CSV files

1063

Second column Third column

Name of the view Level of the view (hierarchy). The third column and subsequent columns contain the name that you give to each level. You can have as many levels as you want, which must be specified in the third column or subsequent columns in the CSV file.

Last column

Host name

Note: The last column must be the host name. If the last column of a
row is not the host name, the specific row or entry is ignored and not considered.

The CSV file contains comma-separated values. Each row defines the hierarchy of one host. The following is the format of a sample CSV file. This CSV file contains only one level of view.
Client, View_Application, Oracle, client1 Client, View_Application, Oracle, client2 Client, View_Application, Sybase, client3

Figure D-1 shows the view that is created when you import the sample CSV file. Figure D-1 Sample view

The following is the format of a sample CSV file containing two levels of view.
Client, Client, Client, Client, View_Global, View_Global, View_Global, View_Global, India, Chennai, client1 India, Pune, client2 UK, London, client3 US, NYK, client4

1064

Creating views using CSV, TSV, and XML files About creating TSV files

Figure D-2 shows the multi-level view that is created when you import the sample CSV file that contains two levels of view. Figure D-2 Sample multi-level view

Note: If you create a view using a CSV file that already exists in OpsCenter Analytics, the view gets deleted. You cannot modify an existing view by using a CSV file.

About creating TSV files

You can create views in Symantec OpsCenter Analytics by creating and importing the Tab-separated values (TSV) file that describes the views. You can create the TSV files in any text editor, Excel etc. and save the file as <filename>.tsv. Note that you can only create objects of type Generic when you create views using a TSV file. Note: You can export and import view structures using the TSV file. However, you cannot export or import attributes using a TSV file. A TSV file typically contains the following details:

Creating views using CSV, TSV, and XML files About creating TSV files

1065

First column

View type View Type must be one of the following:

Master Server Client Policy File System Enterprise Vault Server Exchange Server Vault

Second column Third column

Name of the view Level of the view. The third column and subsequent columns contain the name that you give to each level. You can have as many levels as you want, which must be specified in the third column or subsequent columns in the TSV file.

Last column

Host name

Note: The last column must be the host name. If the last column of a
row is not the host name, the specific row or entry is ignored and not considered.

The TSV file contains tab-separated values. Each row defines the hierarchy of one host. The following is the format of a sample TSV file containing one level of view.
Client View_Application Oracle client1 Client View_Application Oracle client2 Client View_Application Sybase client3

Figure D-3 shows the view that is created when you import the sample TSV file.

1066

Creating views using CSV, TSV, and XML files About creating TSV files

Figure D-3

Sample view

The following is the format of a sample TSV file containing two levels of view.
Client View_Global India Chennai client1 Client View_Global India Pune client2 Client View_Global UK London client3 Client View_Global US NYK client4

Figure D-4 shows the multi-level view that is created when you import the sample TSV file that contains two levels of view. Figure D-4 Sample multi-level view

Creating views using CSV, TSV, and XML files About creating XML files

1067

Note: If you create a view using a TSV file that already exists in OpsCenter Analytics, the view gets deleted. You cannot modify an existing view by using a TSV file.

About creating XML files

You can create views in Symantec OpsCenter Analytics by creating and importing the XML files that describe the views. By using the XML API, you can import IT asset data and their relationships that you maintain through in-house or third-party systems (for example, Peregrine AssetCenter). The XML import capability enables you to import arbitrary groupings of master servers, clients, policies, Enterprise Vault servers, Exchange server, Vault, and file systems. For example, you can import the groupings that are defined around business units by using the XML import capability. Note: You can export and import view structures using the XML file. However, the attributes that are collected by data collectors like Network Name, OS etc. are not exported or imported. Only user-defined attributes like location, isTagged etc. can be exported or imported using an XML file. You can create user-defined attributes from the OpsCenter GUI (Settings > Configuration > Object Type). See About managing Object Types in OpsCenter on page 283. The following examples illustrate the practical use of OpsCenter Analytics XML import functionality. Example 1: You can use a spreadsheet to define Host A as the marketing host and Host B as the sales host. By importing the XML using the View Builder GUI or the view_exportimport utility, you can import the data in the spreadsheet, create a view using the imported data, and chargeback the services based on business units. Example 2: You can build a view of a chart of accounts that shows server ownership by company department for chargeback purposes. With large enterprises, the chart of accounts can easily exceed a thousand. Entering this data into Symantec OpsCenter Analytics is cumbersome and error prone. By importing the XML using the View Builder GUI or the view_exportimport utility, you can import this data from your local system. While importing the data into Symantec OpsCenter Analytics, you can continue with the maintenance of data in the local system.

1068

Creating views using CSV, TSV, and XML files XML DTD structure

Importing data using XML is the best example of Symantec OpsCenter Analyticss open architecture that enables integration with other systems. See the following sections to know how you can create views in an XML file.

XML DTD structure

The XML DTD is constructed as follows:
<?xml version="1.0"?> <!-- Note : This DTD is provided for viewing the XML with tools like Microsoft's Internet Explorer. if it fails to work, the DTD should be replaced by the DTD provided with documentation. --> <!DOCTYPE application [ <!ELEMENT application (objects?,view*,user*,mergeitems*)> <!ATTLIST application version CDATA #REQUIRED> <!ELEMENT objects (object+)> <!ELEMENT view (node*,aliaslevels?)> <!ATTLIST view identifier CDATA #REQUIRED> <!ATTLIST view type CDATA #REQUIRED> <!ATTLIST view action (add|delete|update|declare) "declare"> <!ATTLIST view id ID #IMPLIED> <!ELEMENT object (attribute*)> <!ATTLIST object id ID #IMPLIED> <!ATTLIST object name CDATA #IMPLIED> <!ATTLIST object action (add|delete|update|declare) "declare"> <!ATTLIST object type CDATA #IMPLIED> <!ATTLIST object dbid CDATA #IMPLIED> <!ELEMENT node (object?,node*)> <!ATTLIST node id ID #IMPLIED> <!ATTLIST node action (add|delete|declare) "declare"> <!ATTLIST node object IDREF #IMPLIED> <!ATTLIST node parents IDREFS #IMPLIED> <!ELEMENT aliaslevels (level*)> <!ATTLIST aliaslevels action (add|update|delete|declare) "declare"> <!ELEMENT level EMPTY> <!ATTLIST level number CDATA #REQUIRED> <!ATTLIST level label CDATA #REQUIRED> <!ELEMENT mergeitems (mergeitem+)> <!ELEMENT mergeitem EMPTY> <!ATTLIST mergeitem toobject IDREF #IMPLIED> <!ATTLIST mergeitem fromobject IDREF #IMPLIED>

Creating views using CSV, TSV, and XML files DTD elements

1069

<!ELEMENT attribute (name,value*)> <!ATTLIST attribute name CDATA #IMPLIED> <!ATTLIST attribute value CDATA #IMPLIED> <!ELEMENT name (#PCDATA)> <!ELEMENT value (#PCDATA)> ]>

DTD elements
The elements of the XML DTD are as follows:

See DTD <application> element on page 1069. See DTD <objects> and <object> elements on page 1069. See DTD <attribute> elements on page 1071. See DTD <view> element on page 1071. See DTD <node> elements on page 1072. See DTD <aliaslevel> elements on page 1072.

DTD <application> element

The <application> element is the root level tag that encloses rest of the XML definitions. This tag contains <objects> tag and zero or more other tags, namely <view> and <mergeitems> in this order.

DTD <objects> and <object> elements

The <objects> tag holds the definition of the objects to be acted on, and so contains a number of <object> tags. Each object tag represents a single asset in the Symantec OpsCenter Analytics configuration. Each object has the following properties that define it in the XML file:
id The ID of the object. This value is not the actual object ID but a unique value that identifies the object in the working XML. The actual name of the object. The action to be taken for the object. Add the object.

name action add

1070

Creating views using CSV, TSV, and XML files DTD <objects> and <object> elements

delete

Delete the object. Note that for an object, delete operation does not delete the object from the OpsCenter database. For a view or node, the delete operation deletes the view or node but does not delete the related object from the OpsCenter database. Update the properties of the object. No action. You may need this object in XML at a later stage. In some cases, another object already present in the Symantec OpsCenter Analytics configuration may be required to take action using this object (for example, setting it as a master object for a newly defined object). To be able to do that, the object must first be declared in the XML. The type of the object. Currently, an object can be one of the following types:

update declare

type

MASTER_SERVER CLIENT POLICY MASTER_MEDIA MASTER_CLIENT MASTER_MEDIA_CLIENT MEDIA_CLIENT FILE_SYSTEM MEDIA_SERVER ENTERPRISE_VAULT_ SERVER EXCHANGE_SERVER VAULT

GENERIC

A generic object such as a hierarchical node in the View tree. A file system object. Host that acts as both media server and client. Host that is only a media server. A policy object

FILE_SYSTEM MEDIA_CLIENT MEDIA_SERVER POLICY

Creating views using CSV, TSV, and XML files DTD <attribute> elements

1071

dbid

The database ID of the object. This field is optional and is written when the data is exported. It is very useful in cases where you want to update or declare objects. Because the dbid is an ID in the database, lookups are much faster. So, it is recommended to use the dbid to speed up the overall XML processing whenever possible. This ID is entirely database dependant and is created when the object is created. One cannot specify an object to have a specific dbid.

DTD <attribute> elements

Each object has a set of attributes that defines it in the Symantec OpsCenter Analytics configuration. These attributes are defined in the <attribute> tag. Each attribute tag can contain a <name> tag and multiple <value> tags. The <name> tag defines the name of the attribute and a <value> tag defines a value for it. The attribute tags can be defined in several ways, such as in the following example:
<attribute> <name>attrname</name> <value>attrvalue 1</value> </attribute>

Or:
<attribute name=attrname value=attrvalue/>

DTD <view> element

The <view > tag defines a view in the Symantec OpsCenter Analytics configuration. A view is a hierarchical association of objects. So, this tag contains multiple nested <node > tags that define the nodes of the tree. The tree tag contains the following properties:
identifier action add delete update The name of the view. The action to be taken for the tree. Create a new view. Delete an existing view. Update the view.

1072

Creating views using CSV, TSV, and XML files DTD <node> elements

declare id type

No action. This property defines an already existing tree in the XML. Deprecated and no longer used. Specifies the view type

DTD <node> elements

A node can be viewed as a container that holds a single object. The same object can be contained in more than one node in the tree, but a node can contain only one object. The properties of nodes are as follows:
id object The unique identifier of the node in XML. The ID of the object that the node contains. This value is the ID given to that object in the working XML file and not the actual ID. There can be multiple parents for a node. In such a case, separte the parent node IDs by spaces in the XML. The node ID of this nodes parent node. The current node is added as a child to the specified parent node. This value is the ID given to the parent node in the working XML file and not the actual ID. The action to be taken for the node. Add the node to the tree. Delete the node. No action. You may need this node in XML at a later stage. In some cases, another node already present in the Symantec OpsCenter Analytics configuration may be required to take action using this node (for example, adding a child node). To use the node in XML as a parent for some other node, the node must first be declared in the XML.

parent

action add delete declare

DTD <aliaslevel> elements

In Symantec OpsCenter Analytics, you can set aliases or labels for levels in views. Using the <aliaslevel> element, you can specify names for view levels. A view contains number levels. By default, the levels are labeled Level 1, Level 2, and Level 3, which is not intuitive. To name the levels as per your requirements, you can use the <aliaslevel> element.
action The action to be taken for the aliaslevel.

Creating views using CSV, TSV, and XML files Examples of XML files

1073

add update delete declare level number level label

Add the level number and level label. Update the level number and level label. Delete the level number and level label. Default action. Enter the level number like 1 or 2. Enter the label for the level.

Examples of XML files

You can create several types of XML files, including the following:

Add an object. See Example 1: Adding an object on page 1073. Add a view. See Example 2: Adding a view on page 1074. Update an object See Example 3: Updating an object on page 1075. Merge two objects into a single object. See Example 4: Merging objects on page 1076.

Example 1: Adding an object

Example 1, when imported into Symantec OpsCenter Analytics, adds the object Detroit under the MyMasterServers view. (The DTD header has been snipped.)
<application version="2.0"> <objects> <object id="o3" name="master.abc.domain.com" action="declare" type="MASTER_SERVER" dbid="58"> <attribute> <name>Location</name> <value>Illinois</value> </attribute> </object> <object id="o4" name="master1" action="declare" type="MEDIA_CLIENT" dbid="61" />

1074

Creating views using CSV, TSV, and XML files Example 2: Adding a view

<object id="o5" name="dailybackuppolicy" action="declare" type="POLICY" dbid="62" /> <object id="o6" name="weeklybackuppolicy" action="declare" type="POLICY" dbid="63" /> <object id="o7" name="monthlybackuppolicy" action="declare" type="POLICY" dbid="64" /> </object> <object id="o10" name="Detroit" action="add" type="GENERIC" /> </objects> <view identifier="MyMasterServers" type="Master Server" action="update"> <node id="n268" action="add" object="o9" /> <node id="n269" action="add" object="o3" parents="n268" /> </view> </application>

Example 2: Adding a view

Example 2, when imported into Symantec OpsCenter Analytics, the TestMasterServers view is created with top-level branch as Chicago that contains a host object master1.abc.domain.com. (The DTD header has been snipped.)
<application version="2.0"> <objects> <object id="o3" name="master.abc.domain.com" action="declare" type="MASTER_SERVER" dbid="58"> <attribute> <name>Location</name> <value>Illinois</value> </attribute> </object> <object id="o4" name="master2" action="declare" type="MEDIA_CLIENT" dbid="61" /> <object id="o5" name="dailybackuppolicy" action="declare" type="POLICY" dbid="62" /> <object id="o6" name="weeklybackuppolicy" action="declare" type="POLICY" dbid="63" /> <object id="o7" name="monthlybackuppolicy" action="declare" type="POLICY" dbid="64" /> <object id="o9" name="Illinois" action="declare" type="GENERIC" dbid="66">

Creating views using CSV, TSV, and XML files Example 3: Updating an object

1075

<attribute> <name>Name</name> <value>Illinois</value> </attribute> </object> <object id="o10" name="Chicago" action="declare" type="GENERIC" dbid="67"> <attribute> <name>Name</name> <value>Chicago</value> </attribute> </object> </objects> <view identifier="MyMasterServers" type="Master Server" action="update"> <node id="n268" action="add" object="o9" /> <node id="n269" action="add" object="o3" parents="n268" /> </view> <view identifier="TestMasterServers" type="Master Server" action="add"> <node id="n271" action="add" object="o10" /> <node id="n272" action="add" object="o3" parents="n271" /> </view> </application>

Example 3: Updating an object

Example 3, when imported into Symantec OpsCenter Analytics, updates the Location attribute of master1.abc.domain.com (to Illinois). The Name attribute of Chicago object is also updated (to Chicago). (The DTD header has been snipped.)
<application version="2.0"> <objects> <object id="o3" name="master.abc.domain.com" action="update" type="MASTER_SERVER" dbid="58"> <attribute> <name>Location</name> <value>Illinois</value> </attribute> </object> <object id="o4" name="master3" action="declare"

1076

Creating views using CSV, TSV, and XML files Example 4: Merging objects

type="MEDIA_CLIENT" dbid="61" /> <object id="o5" name="dailybackuppolicy" action="declare" type="POLICY" dbid="62" /> <object id="o6" name="weeklybackuppolicy" action="declare" type="POLICY" dbid="63" /> <object id="o7" name="monthlybackuppolicy" action="declare" type="POLICY" dbid="64" /> <object id="o9" name="Illinois" action="declare" type="GENERIC" dbid="66"> <attribute> <name>Name</name> <value>Illinois</value> </attribute> </object> <object id="o10" name="Chicago" action="update" type="GENERIC" dbid="67"> <attribute> <name>Name</name> <value>Chicago</value> </attribute> </object> </objects> <view identifier="MyMasterServers" type="Master Server" action="update"> <node id="n268" action="add" object="o9" /> <node id="n269" action="add" object="o3" parents="n268" /> </view> </application>

Example 4: Merging objects

Example 4, when imported into Symantec OpsCenter Analytics, merges object o2 into the object o1. Objects o1 and o2 represent the same host. One has a host name of hostA.veritas.com and the other has the host name as hostXYZ.somedomain.veritas.com. While merging object o2 into object o1, you can specify hostXYZ.somedomain.veritas.com as an alias for object o1. After merging object o2, it is deleted and only object o1 remains. In Example 4, a host object has the hostname hostA.veritas.com which also goes by the name hostXYZ.somedomain.veritas.com. The XML export of this object looks like the following: (The DTD header has been snipped.)

Creating views using CSV, TSV, and XML files Example 4: Merging objects

1077

<object id="o1" action="declare" type="Host" dbid="50"> </object>

This example has another host object whose host name is hostA and whose XML export is as follows:
<object id="o2" action="declare" type="Host" dbid="70"> </object>

Now, whenever a particular Symantec OpsCenter Analytics Agent refers to a host as hostA, the Symantec OpsCenter Analytics Server identifies the object since one of its host names matches this object. After this object update, you can merge the two hosts with the following syntax:
<mergeitems> <mergeitem toobject = "o1" fromobject = "o2"/> </mergeitems>

Merging of two hosts moves all data from the hostA object to the newly updated object and deletes the hostA object.

1078

Creating views using CSV, TSV, and XML files Example 4: Merging objects

Appendix

Error messages in OpsCenter

This appendix includes the following topics:

OpsCenter Error Messages added in 7.5

OpsCenter Error Messages added in 7.5

Following table lists OpsCenter error messages with the possible root cause of the problem and details about the solutions that can be applied. Table E-1 Error Code
401

OpsCenter Erros codes with Description Root Cause

This error occurs when user A saves the report with a given view V (master/media/client) in public folder. Later in time, if administrator changes permission on the view V for user A, then next time on running the report by user A, will raise this exception. This error occurs when user A saves the report S in public folder and later in time if administrator delete user A , and if User B or Admin runs the saved report S , will fail to run because the original user does not exists.

Description
The user does not have permissions of the selected view.

Solution
Make sure that user running the report has permission on the view selected. If no permission for the view then user can edit the report and re-run by selecting available views.

402

Provided user details are invalid.

There is no direct way to solve this problem. Best way is to re-create the report and re-run it.

1080

Error messages in OpsCenter OpsCenter Error Messages added in 7.5

Table E-1 Error Code

10500

OpsCenter Erros codes with Description (continued) Root Cause Solution

Description
OpsCenter Database Error

This error signifies OpsCenter database Check Database is up and running. related generic issue. (Connectivity, Do basic sanity around database. Timeouts . . .etc.) Contact Support with screenshot and relevant log-files.

10501

OpsCenterDb PK Violation Primary Key violation / Duplicate Contact Support with screenshot around:{<table/entity>} while entries were tried to insert in the same and relevant log-files executing {<add/delete-API>} table. OpsCenterDb FK Violation This error signifies Foreign Key around:{<table/entity>} while violation or Reference records do not executing {<add/delete-API>} exist. OpsCenterDb Column value This error occurs when NULL value is issue around:{<table/entity>} added for Non-Nullable columns in while executing database. {<add/delete-API>} OpsCenterDb Column This error occurs when a value is too Truncation large, and does not fit into database around:{<table/entity>} while column. executing {<add/delete-API>} OpsCenterDb Constraints failed around:{<table/entity>} while executing {<add/delete-API>} Contact Support with screenshot and relevant log-files.

10502

10503

Contact Support with screenshot and relevant log-files.

10504

Contact Support with screenshot and relevant log-files.

10505

This error occurs when database Contact Support with screenshot constraints failed. This can occur under and relevant log-files. multiple reasons. Eg.Entity based constraint or trigger based constraints.

10506

OpsCenterDb SQL Parsing This error resembles that the generated Contact Support with screenshot Error around:{<table/entity>} code has a problem and is a serious and relevant log-files. while executing issue. {<add/delete-API>} DBAL component consists of generated code from the database. OpsCenterDb Query This error resembles that the generated Contact Support with screenshot Execution failed code has a problem and is a serious and relevant log-files. around:{<table/entity>} while issue. executing {<add/delete-API>} DBAL component consists of generated code from the database.

10507

Messages related to Reporting Services

Error messages in OpsCenter OpsCenter Error Messages added in 7.5

1081

Table E-1 Error Code

10802

OpsCenter Erros codes with Description (continued) Root Cause Solution

Description
The selected view for this report is not available. The view that was associated with this report might have been deleted. You have no permissions to see the report {0}.

A view which is used in the saved report Edit the saved report and select the has been deleted. View can be deleted views which are currently available without validating that it is associated and try again. with a report.

10804

The user accessing the report may not User can see reports created by that have permission to run/view the report. user itself or the reports from a User is actually trying to access the public folder. private reports of other user by modifying the URL parameters. Incorrectly or undefined filter may cause the problem. Undefined filter should be defined properly in filter definition xml file.

10805

Filter {0} is not defined in XML definition file. Please define the filter in FilterAttributeList.xml. Failed to load the XML definition file {0}. Please contact customer support for assistance. Failed to read the XML file.

10806

Each report is associated with xml Make sure that definition file. This error occurs when OPS_INSTALL_DIR/definitions/reports.zip there is no corresponding definition file file is not corrupted or modified. for a report. XML definition file may be in use and therefore cannot be read. Stored procedure may fail due to formation of invalid query inside the procedure. Make sure that no process is using the XML definition file. Based on stack trace message, it is possible to figure out where the problem exists in the stored procedure. Stack trace helps in finding the root cause.

10807

10808

Failed to execute stored procedure {0}.

10809

Failed to get the database connection. Definition mapping for report ID {0} is failed to load from the database. Please check report_cannedReportMapping table for the mapping. Failed to fetch the schedule workflow details from the database.

DBAL component exposes connection to reporting.

10810

Each report has an entry in Make sure that the table has entry report_cannedReportMapping table. for the running report. This table keeps the mapping between report ID and XML file. If there is no mapping for the running report, then this error occurs. Exception occurred while running the Stack trace helps in finding the root query at the database level. cause.

10811

1082

Error messages in OpsCenter OpsCenter Error Messages added in 7.5

Table E-1 Error Code

10814

OpsCenter Erros codes with Description (continued) Root Cause Solution

Description
Failed to fetch the report condition list from the database for report ID {0}. Failed to fetch the saved report details from the database for report {0}.

Exception occurred while running the Stack trace helps in finding the root query at the database level. cause.

10815

Exception occurred while running the Stack trace helps in finding the root query at the database level. cause.

10816

Failed to fetch the user Exception occurred while running the Stack trace helps in finding the root details from the database for query at the database level. cause. report {0}. Failed to fetch the custom Exception occurred while running the Stack trace helps in finding the root saved report details from the query at the database level. cause. database for report {0}. Failed to fetch the custom template category mapping list from the database. Failed to fetch the custom template from the database for {0} category. Failed to fetch saved report list from the database for user {0}. Exception occurred while running the Stack trace helps in finding the root query at the database level. cause.

10817

10818

10819

Exception occurred while running the Stack trace helps in finding the root query at the database level. cause.

10820

Exception occurred while running the Stack trace helps in finding the root query at the database level. cause.

10821

Failed to fetch the Exception occurred while running the Stack trace helps in finding the root information for upgrade query at the database level. cause. report from the database for user {0}. Failed to process the query result for report {0}. Each result set is processed before This should be escalated to sending to the GUI. This error message CFT/engineers to understand the conveys that the logic that is written to problem. process the result is broken.

10822

10823

Failed to execute the query Exception occurred while running the Stack trace helps in finding the root at the database for report {0}. query at the database level. cause. Failed to execute the query for report {0}. Failed to update report {0}. Exception occurred while running the Stack trace helps in finding the root query at the database level. cause. Exception occurred while updating the Stack trace helps in finding the root report at the database level. cause.

10824

10825

Error messages in OpsCenter OpsCenter Error Messages added in 7.5

1083

Table E-1 Error Code

10826

OpsCenter Erros codes with Description (continued) Root Cause

Exception occurred while saving the report at the database level.

Description
Failed to save report {0}.

Solution
Stack trace helps in finding the root cause.

10828

Failed to delete report {0}.

Exception occurred while deleting the Stack trace helps in finding the root report at the database level. cause.

10830

Failed to update the schedule Exception occurred while updating the Stack trace helps in finding the root workflow in the database. workflow at the database level. cause. Failed to update the Finish Time of schedule workflow in the database. Exception occurred while updating the Stack trace helps in finding the root schedule finish time at the database cause. level.

10831

10832

Failed to create report Exception occurred while running the Stack trace helps in finding the root schedule {0} in the database. query at the database level. cause. Failed to delete schedule workflow in the database. Exception occurred while running the Stack trace helps in finding the root query at the database level. cause.

10833

10834

Failed to delete reports from Exception occurred while running the Stack trace helps in finding the root schedule workflow. query at the database level. cause. No report schedule is found. This error occurs while adding reports Re-create the report schedule and to a report schedule which does not try to add reports to this newly exists in the database. created schedule. Tree ID and Tree Type This can be an upgrade issue. Each Re-create the saved report and information is missing from report that is migrated should have a re-run it. saved report {0}. tree ID and tree type information (if it is view based report) in report_savedreport table. Time column ID {0} used in definition is not present in the database. Either the time filter is wrongly defined in the definition .xml file or reports.zip file under OPS_INSALL_DIR/definitions folder is corrupted. Make sure reports.zip file is not corrupted. If the problem still persists, escalate to engineering/CFT. Make sure reports.zip file is not corrupted. If the problem still persists, escalate to engineering/CFT.

10835

10836

10837

10838

Time condition column ID {0} Either the time filter is wrongly defined used in the definition file is in the definition .xml file or reports.zip not present in the database. file under OPS_INSALL_DIR/definitions folder is corrupted.

1084

Error messages in OpsCenter OpsCenter Error Messages added in 7.5

Table E-1 Error Code

10839

OpsCenter Erros codes with Description (continued) Root Cause Solution

Description

You do not have permissions The report with selected view cannot Edit the report and select the view to run any report with the be run because the user does not have available from the drop down menu specified view. However, you permission to access the selected view. and re-run the report. can edit the view filter for which you have permissions and can re-run the report. View filter is not applicable for the report. This error is due to inconsistency in the In such cases, edit the report and definition. re-run by applying any valid views that are applicable. Example: Suppose user has created and saved a report with some view. In the next release, if the support for the view is removed from the definition, then there is a mismatch in saved definition versus XML definition. If there is a mismatch in the saved definition and XML definition, then it means that database is not updated properly to reflect the new change. The report does not support the vault view filtering. Edit the report and select the view available from the drop down menu and re-run the report.

10840

10841

Vault view is not applicable for the report.

10842

Policy view is not supported The report does not support the policy Edit the report and select the view for this report. However, you view filtering. available from the drop down menu can edit the view filter and and re-run the report. re-run the report. Exchange view is not supported for this report. However, you can edit the view filter and re-run the report. Master Server view is not supported for this report. However, you can edit the view filter and re-run the report. The report does not support the exchange view filtering. Edit the report and select the view available from the drop down menu and re-run the report.

10843

10844

The report does not support the Master Edit the report and select the view Server view filtering. available from the drop down menu and re-run the report.

Error messages in OpsCenter OpsCenter Error Messages added in 7.5

1085

Table E-1 Error Code

10845

OpsCenter Erros codes with Description (continued) Root Cause Solution

Description

Client view is not supported The report does not support the Client Edit the report and select the view for this report. However, you view filtering. available from the drop down menu can edit the view filter and and re-run the report. re-run the report. File system view is not supported for this report. However, you can edit the view filter and re-run the report. The report does not support the file system view filtering. Edit the report and select the view available from the drop down menu and re-run the report.

10846

10847

Enterprise vault server view The report does not support the file is not supported for this system view filtering. report. However, you can edit the view filter and re-run the report.

Edit the report and select the view available from the drop down menu and re-run the report.

10848

No definition of report {0} is Missing XML definition for the report. Make sure that found. OPS_INSTALL_DIR/definitions/reports.zip file is not corrupted or modified. Please upload the .csv file This error can occur while running The .csv file with client names with client name, to run the client coverage report, if user runs the should be uploaded while running report. report without uploading the .csv file. the client coverage report. Report {0} does not have This error can occur in case of support to run with {1} view. upgraded reports Or when reports.zip View in this context refers to file is corrupted. Distribution/Ranking/Historical/Tabular. Make sure that OPS_INSTALL_DIR/definitions/reports.zip file is not corrupted or modified. If problem persists, upgraded report needs to be re-created.

10849

10850

10851

Report {0} does not have correctly defined java type.

This error can occur while running any Make sure that Java based reports. This can occur if OPS_INSTALL_DIR/definitions/reports.zip reports.zip file is corrupted. file is not corrupted or modified. If problem persists, escalate to CFT/Engineering. This error can occur while running any Make sure that Java-based reports. This can occur if OPS_INSTALL_DIR/definitions/reports.zip reports.zip file is corrupted. file is not corrupted or modified. If problem persists, escalate to CFT/Engineering.

10852

Java type executor {0} for report {1} should be appropriately created and used for each java-based report.

1086

Error messages in OpsCenter OpsCenter Error Messages added in 7.5

Table E-1 Error Code

10853

OpsCenter Erros codes with Description (continued) Root Cause Solution

Save report with a different name.

Description

Report {0} already exists in User cannot save the report which the selected folder. Either already exists; else he needs to save the report with a overwrite the existing once. different name or overwrite the existing report. The folder does not exist for saving report {0}. Each report should be saved under the specific folder. No node is present in view node for report ID {0}. This error occurs when user tries to save a report in a folder while at the same time someone has deleted that folder.

10854

Re-save a report under the existing folder.

10855

This error occurs when there is major Re-create the report and save it. problem with the data in the database. However, it will occur only in case of saved report. This error signifies that there is an issue with the view component. Stack trace helps in finding the root cause.

10856

Failed to execute report {0} at view level. Reporting component uses view layer component for view related queries.

10857

Failed to fetch child nodes at This error signifies that there is an view level. Reporting issue with the view component. component uses view layer component for view related queries. Failed to fetch the report tree. Failed to delete a report.

Stack trace helps in finding the root cause.

10858

Failed to execute the query, by the view Stack trace helps in finding the root component while fetching the view tree. cause. Failed to execute the query, by the view Stack trace helps in finding the root component while deleting the report cause node from database. Failed to execute the query, by the view Stack trace helps in finding the root component while adding the report to cause the report tree.

10859

10860

Failed to add report to the view tree. .

10861

Failed to update report to the Failed to execute the query, by the view Stack trace helps in finding the root view tree. component while updating the report cause. to the report tree.

Error messages in OpsCenter OpsCenter Error Messages added in 7.5

1087

Table E-1 Error Code

10862

OpsCenter Erros codes with Description (continued) Root Cause Solution

Description

Failed to fetch report details Failed to execute the query, by the view Stack trace helps in finding the root at view level. component while fetching the report cause. details from the report tree. Column {0} does not exist in This error occurs when an incorrectly Make sure reports.zip file under the database. defined column exists in the XML {OPS_INSTALL_DIR}/definitions definition. folder is not corrupted. If problem persists, escalate to CFT/Engineers. Report schedule {0} already exists. Please specify a different name. Data collection failed for selected Master Servers. Duplicate report schedule names are not allowed. Save the report schedule with a different name.

10863

10864

10865

This error occurs only when we run Make sure that agent is configured explicit data collection for License correctly. Stack trace helps in report (Capacity and Traditional). It finding the root cause. implies that agent is not able to collect the data from the Master Server.

10866

An error has occurred while This error occurs only while running Stack trace helps in finding the running the licensing report. license report (Capacity /Traditional). exact issue. It resembles that an error has occurred while performing File IO operation. Generating license report is This error is caused while running failed due to {0}. nbdeployutil. Capacity license report is generated via nbdeployutil executable and any error thrown will be the root cause. From the log file, check if any exception is thrown by nbdeployutil. Since this is an executable, it creates its own log file which is shown as a link in the License report GUI. From the log file, check if any exception is thrown by nbdeployutil. Since this is an executable, it creates its own log file which is shown as a link in the License report GUI.

10867

10868

Generating license report is Capacity license report generation failed. From the log file, depends on nbdeployutil executable. check if any exception is thrown by nbdeployutil.

10869

No Masters Sever is License report (Capacity /Traditional) Configure Master Server for which configured for collecting the can be executed only when at least one license report needs to be licensing data. Master Server is configured in generated. OpsCenter.

1088

Error messages in OpsCenter OpsCenter Error Messages added in 7.5

Table E-1 Error Code

10870

OpsCenter Erros codes with Description (continued) Root Cause Solution

Description

License Data Collection or This error occurs when user tries to run Make sure you run the report only Report Generation is already license report multiple times at the when previous request for run is in progress. same time. User cannot run license completed. report multiple times at any given point in time. Failed to fetch licensing details from the database. This error occurs when Licensing Log file will help in finding the report (Capacity /Traditional) fails to exact root cause. perform some of the database activity like fetching status of the failed master server. License Report (Capacity /Traditional) will be generated only when at least one Master Server data collection (Licensing specific) is successful. Report is not generated if none of the Master Server collection is successful. Email component failed to send email because SMTP configuration might be incorrect or email ID specified might be incorrect. Make sure the data collection (Licensing Specific) is successfully collected for at least one Master Server.

10871

10872

License report is not generated as none of the Master Server license data collections is successful.

10873

Unable to send the email. Please verify the email address, SMTP server settings and then try again. Failed to create report {0}.

If not specified, set SMTP configuration from Settings > Configuration > SMTP configuration page.

10875

This error occurs when charting Log file will help in finding the root component fails to create the chart cause of failure. while exporting and emailing a report. Remove the non-PDF format supported report from scheduled report if the export format expected is PDF. If the export format selected (while defining the report schedule) is HTML, then make sure you add only HTML supported reports in the schedule. This error denotes serious problem in the Query builder forming SQL meta data. This problem needs to be diagnosed from the log file to find the root cause.

10876

PDF format is not supported This error occurs when a report not for report {0}. supported for PDF format is added in the scheduled report and expected to be exported in PDF format. Only HTML export format is This error occurs when a HTML format supported for report {0}. supported report is added in the scheduled report and expected to be exported other than HTML format.

10877

10878

Query builder failed to build Query Builder forms the metadata a query for report {0}. required to build actual SQL query. This meta data is then passed to DBAL component to get the actual query.

Error messages in OpsCenter OpsCenter Error Messages added in 7.5

1089

Table E-1 Error Code

10879

OpsCenter Erros codes with Description (continued) Root Cause Solution

While emailing the dashboard report, make sure that all the reports under dashboard supports the given export format.

Description

One or more reports failed to This error will occur when dashboard execute and therefore cannot is emailed and one or more reports be sent by email. failed to be exported in specified format (PDF/HTML/CSV). For eg, week at a glance report do not support PDF format. The selected combination of report parameters for this report is not valid. However, you can edit the report, change the parameters and then run the report. Failed to execute specified SQL-- {0}. Please make sure the SQL syntax is correct. Failed to read file {0} from report.zip. Each report is associated with XML definition file. Invalid table join set ID {0} specified in the report {1}. Custom reporting allows user with a lot of combinations to create customized report. However, not all combinations are valid.

10880

Example: Y1-axis Report data and Y2-axis Report data cannot be same. Edit the created custom report and specify valid parameters.

10881

This error signifies that SQL specified Log file will help in finding the by the user is invalid. exact problem of the SQL.

10882

This error is due to non-availability of Make sure reports.zip file under particular XML file for a given report. {OPS_INSTALL_DIR/definitions} folder is not corrupted. If problem persists, escalate to CFT/Engineers. This error indicates that definition is incorrect for specified report. This issue needs to be escalated to CFT/Engineers to get XML definition corrected. Make sure the definition file reports.zip is not corrupted. If problem persists, escalate to CFT/Engineers.

10883

10884

Failed to load chargeback definition XML file.

This error is due to invalid XML definition for chargeback reports.

10885

Failed to execute chargeback This error is due to failure to fetch Log file helps in finding the exact report {0}. chargeback variable/formulae from the root cause. database. Report {0} already exists in some other folder. Please save the report with a different name. You cannot overwrite the report that exists in another folder. Duplicate report names are not allowed even across different folders. It should be unique across the saved report tree. Save the report with a different name.

10887

1090

Error messages in OpsCenter OpsCenter Error Messages added in 7.5

Table E-1 Error Code

10888

OpsCenter Erros codes with Description (continued) Root Cause

This error signifies that report-on parameter is mandatory field while creating custom report.

Description
Please select report-on parameter by editing the report as it is a mandatory field. You do not have permission to execute the SQL-- {0}. Custom SQL allows user to fire any SQL as per choice.

Solution
Select appropriate report-on parameter by editing the report.

10889

This can be harmful if user fires delete/update query on OpsCenter database and thus getting corrupted. This error denotes that user do not have permission to execute the specified SQL. However he can fire update/delete on tables which he has created on OpsCenter Database.

User needs to fire only those queries which will NOT corrupt OpsCenter database

10890

Please select Y-axis report-data parameter by editing the report as it is a mandatory field. Please select Time-basis parameter by editing the report as it is a mandatory field.

This error signifies that Y-axis report Select appropriate Y-axis report data parameter is mandatory field while data parameter by editing the creating a custom report. report.

10891

This error signifies that Time-basis parameter is mandatory field while creating custom report.

Select appropriate Time-basis parameter by editing the report.

10892

Please select Y-axis function This error signifies that Y-axis function Select appropriate Y-axis function parameter by editing the parameter is mandatory field while parameter by editing the report. report as it is a mandatory creating custom report. field. Please select X-axis Report-data parameter by editing the report as it is a mandatory field. One or more selected columns are invalid. Please edit the report and remove invalid columns. This error signifies that X-axis Report Select appropriate X-axis report data parameter is mandatory field while data parameter by editing the creating custom report. report.

10893

10894

This error signifies that one or more Remove all invalid columns and columns in custom tabular report re-run the report. created are invalid. The label of the invalid columns is usually -. Remove all such columns that are selected and re-run the report. This issue usually occurs in case of upgraded reports. If one or more columns are not mapped correctly while upgrading, then such issue occurs.

Error messages in OpsCenter OpsCenter Error Messages added in 7.5

1091

Table E-1 Error Code Description

OpsCenter Erros codes with Description (continued) Root Cause Solution

Messages related to SCL 10901 An error has occurred. Please This is an unknown error. This is the Log will help in finding the cause. contact your system rarest scenario for which the root cause administrator. cannot be predicted. It is an unknown error for Opscenter. The specified master server already exists. This error occurs when we try to add master server that already exists in OpsCenter. Do not try to add same master server twice.

10902

10903

Master Server with the same Each master server should have a display name already exists. unique display name associated with it.

Try giving another display name.

10904

The specified Master Server Trying to add NetBackup media server Try adding NBU Master Server, is not a valid Netbackup to OpsCenter. instead. Master Server. Action not permitted. Please verify that the OpsCenter host is listed in Netbackup configuration file (host properties or bp.conf) and/or trust is established in case of NBAC. Deletion is already in progress for the specified Master Server. This error occurs when you try to add a master server for which there is no entry of OpsCenter host in bp.conf file. The other problem could be insufficient trust between OpsCenter and Netbackup in NBAC case. Make sure bp.conf file has proper entry for OpsCenter host. In case of NBAC, proper trust setup should be established.

10905

10906

This error occurs if user tries to delete Do not perform delete operation Master Server for which the delete multiple times. Wait till the request is already in progress. previous delete operation completes.

10908

The specified Master Server This error occurs while adding a Master Make sure NetBackup host is could not be located. Please Server which is not reachable from the reachable from OpsCenter and check if the machine is OpsCenter. vice-a-versa via ping command. reachable and the Netbackup services are running.

1092

Error messages in OpsCenter OpsCenter Error Messages added in 7.5

Table E-1 Error Code

10909

OpsCenter Erros codes with Description (continued) Root Cause

This error occurs while adding a Master Server which is not reachable from OpsCenter and vice-a-versa. Or when NBSL service on NBU master is not running. Or there might be firewall configuration blocking OpsCenter-NetBackup communication.

Description
The specified Master Server could not be located. Please check if the machine is reachable and the Netbackup services are running.

Solution
Make sure NetBackup host is reachable from OpsCenter and vice-a-versa via ping command. Also check if NBSL service on NetBackup Master is running. And if firewall is configured, check TCP port 1556 is opened on OpsCenter and NetBackup machine. Make sure that nbevtmgr is up and running on NetBackup Master Server.

10910

Unable to connect with Netbackup event channel. Please check if the Netbackup services are running. Unable to create consumer for the event.

In case of NBU6.5.x or NBU 6.0. MPx, if nbevtmgr (NetBackup Event Manager) service is not running.

10911

This can occur, when OpsCenter Server Root cause might be Object process is out of resources. This is a leak/Thread leak. symptom of OpsCenter going out of resource.

10912

The specified Master Server This is only in case of reconnection This is just a safe guard. is currently disabled. master server task is present and at the same time someone disabled and enabled the Master Server. Invalid GUID found for NetBackup Master Server. NBSL is not getting the GUID from the Check the NBSL logs. NetBackup.

10913

10914

NetBackup is not initialized. NBSL is not passing the Product Name. Ensure that NBSL service are up Please check if the and running. Also verify there is no NetBackup services are error during start-up of service. running and NetBackup is correctly initialized. OpsCenter machine is not This error occurs when OpsCenter is reachable from the specified not reachable from NBSL/NetBackup Master Server. Or there might be firewall configuration blocking OpsCenterNetBackup communication. This indicates that OpsCenter is able to communicate to NBSL but reverse communication is not working. The specified agent already exists. Make sure OpsCenter is reachable from NetBackup via ping command. Also check if firewall is configured, check port 1556 is opened on NetBackup machine.

10915

10916

This error is caused when we try to add Do not add agent host multiple same agent host, twice. times.

Error messages in OpsCenter OpsCenter Error Messages added in 7.5

1093

Table E-1 Error Code

10917

OpsCenter Erros codes with Description (continued) Root Cause

Each agent is associated with one or more data collector that user can create. This error occurs when data collector with existing data collector name is created.

Description
The specified data collector already exists.

Solution
Save each data collector with a unique name.

10925

The specified agent is already This occurs when one user is editing User will see the refreshed list by deleted. the agent and another user deleted the again accessing the agent home same agent from another session. page. Basically one user is working on stale data. The specified data collector is already deleted. Come back to agent home page and user will see the refreshed list. This occurs when one user is editing User will see the refreshed list by the data collector and another user has again accessing the agent home deleted the same data collector from page. another session. Basically one user is working on stale data. Try updating after some time assuming that other user has completed updating.

10926

10927

The specified agent has been While updating agent information, updated by other user. Please there are chances that multiple users try again. try to modify the same agent at the same time. This can make database inconsistent and hence the error message. The specified data collector has been updated by other user. Please try again. While updating data collector information, there are chances that multiple users try to modify the same data collector at the same time. This can make database inconsistent and hence the error message.

10928

Try updating after some time assuming that other user has completed updating.

10929

The specified platform is not This error signifies that agent is not supported. Agent is installed on the supported platform. supported only on Windows and Solaris platform. Unable to connect with specified target host.

Install agent on Windows or Solaris platform.

10930

This error occurs while adding a point Make sure Point Product host is product host which is not reachable reachable from OpsCenter and from OpsCenter. Or there might be vice-a-versa via ping command. firewall configuration blocking OpsCenter,-NetBackup communication. Install the appropriate license for point product data collection.

10931

The specified product is not This occurs when product is not licensed. licensed for data collection.

1094

Error messages in OpsCenter OpsCenter Error Messages added in 7.5

Table E-1 Error Code

10932

OpsCenter Erros codes with Description (continued) Root Cause Solution

Make sure that agent host is reachable from OpsCenter host and vice-a-versa.

Description

Unable to connect with This error occurs when OpsCenter is agent. Please check if the unable to connect with agent host. machine is reachable and the agent service is running. The specified data collector is disabled.

10934

This is only in case of reconnection This is just a safe guard. server task is present and at the same time someone disabled and enabled the Master Server. This error occurs when deleting the agent data collector while another delete request is already in progress. This error occurs when an invalid path to Volume Manager Directory or Install Directory is specified while defining Advanced Data Collection Properties in Add Master Server. Wait till the previous delete request is completed.

10935

Deletion is already in progress for the specified data collector. The specified install or volume directory is invalid.

10936

While defining advanced data collection properties, make sure you specify proper path of NetBackup install directory and volume manager directory.

10937

The specified install This error occurs when Install Make sure NetBackup is installed directory of the product does Directory path (under Configuring on the host and specify proper path not exist. Advanced data collection properties of of NetB ackup home directory. Add Master Server) is incorrect or does not exist on the NetBackup host. The specified volume This error occurs when Volume directory of the product does Manager Directory path (under not exist. Configuring Advanced data collection properties of Add Master Server) is incorrect or does not exist on the NetBackup host. The specified username or password is not valid. Correct the Remote Admin Console installed path (installed on Agent box). Or install the NetBackup Remote Admin Console on the Agent.

10938

10939

This occurs when UserName/Password Provide correct user name and is not valid to connect to Master Server password of Master Server. through BPJava. Log file helps in finding the exact root cause.

10943

A database error has This error occurs when any database occurred. Please contact your related exception occurs. system administrator.

Error messages in OpsCenter OpsCenter Error Messages added in 7.5

1095

Table E-1 Error Code

10944

OpsCenter Erros codes with Description (continued) Root Cause

This error occurs when a Master Server delete request is in progress and user tries to add/locate Master Server at the same time.

Description
Deletion is in progress for the same Master Server. Connection to this master server will occur once deletion is completed.

Solution
Before you add/locate Master Server, make sure that the previous request for delete Master Server is complete.

Messages related to Schedules 20800 Failed to get the next schedule time for schedule {0}. The schedule information in the database might be corrupted. Please re-create the schedule and try again. For each schedule, the next schedule time is calculated based on the type of schedule (daily, weekly, monthly, etc). The problem can occur when data for schedule in database is corrupted. You can delete the schedule for which you are facing the problem and re-create it so that proper data is stored for schedule. Such problem may occur in case of upgraded schedule where data is not migrated properly for schedule.

20801

Failed to execute the query at the database.

This error can occur when Time Log helps in finding the cause of schedule crud operations such as failure at the database level. add/delete/update/fetch are performed. This error is due to a problem at the database level when the corresponding query is fired. When Time schedule is referred by one or more Report Schedules, then user cannot delete the Time schedule since it is in use. If you want to delete the Time Schedule, make sure it is not referred in any of the Report Schedule.

20802

Schedule cannot be deleted as it is referred in one or more report schedules.

20803

Schedule {0} already exists. You cannot save a Time schedule with Save the schedule with a different Please save the schedule with same name that already exists. name. a different name.

Messages related to Chargeback 20850 Failed to load the chargeback If any problem exists in XMLfile, then definition file {0}. this error message is shown. Chargeback definitions are stored in XML format. Make sure reports.zip file present in {OPS_INSTALL_DIR}/definitions folder is not corrupt. If problem still persists, escalate to CFT/Engineers.

1096

Error messages in OpsCenter OpsCenter Error Messages added in 7.5

Table E-1 Error Code

20851

OpsCenter Erros codes with Description (continued) Root Cause Solution

Description
Failed to execute the query at the database.

This error can occur when chargeback Log helps in finding the cause of crud operations such as failure at the database level. add/delete/update/fetch chargeback variable, chargeback formula or chargeback currency are performed. This error is due to problem at the database level when we fire the corresponding query. Before you delete chargeback formula, make sure you remove all references to the formulae from all saved report.

20852

Cannot delete the formula as Chargeback formula created can be it is referred in one or more used in chargeback based reports. If chargeback reports. such reports are saved with a given formula, then that formula cannot be deleted until we remove the reference of the formula from all the saved reports. Cannot delete the variable as it is referred in one or more chargeback reports or chargeback formulae. Chargeback variable created can be used in chargeback based reports and in chargeback formula. If such reports/formulae are saved with a given variable, then that variable cannot be deleted until we remove the reference of the variable from all saved reports/formulae.

20853

Before you delete a chargeback variable, make sure you remove all references to the variable from all saved report and all saved formulae.

20854

Chargeback variable {0} This error occurs due to saving already exists. Please save chargeback variable with the same the variable with a different name that already exists. name. Chargeback formula {0} This error occurs due to saving already exists. Please save chargeback formula with the same the formula with a different name that already exists. name.

Save the variable with a different name.

20855

Save the formula with a different name.

Glossary

Administrator Console application

See CommandCentral Service View Builder. A program or group of programs designed to perform a specific task. Oracle Database and Veritas NetBackup are examples of applications. A Server component that manages policies associated with objects on the storage network. A policy associates certain sets of conditions with storage resources and defines actions to be taken when these conditions are detected. The Alert Manager is seamlessly integrated with the CommandCentral product offerings so that Console users can monitor, define, and modify policies. Data collector is a part of Symantec OpsCenter Agent that collects data from various products. A notification that indicates when an action, such as an alert or a change in state, has occurred for one or more objects on the storage network. In CommandCentral Service, a Console area in which to display and run custom reports saved by the user. A component of the Veritas Security Services (VxSS) that is used by the and runtime libraries that enables users to log on to multiple Veritas products with one logon.

CommandCentral Alert Manager

Data Collector

event

My Reports

VAS (Veritas

Authentication Service) CommandCentral offerings to provide user authentication. VAS is a set of processes

VxPBX (Veritas Private Branch Exchange)

A common Veritas component that uses socket passing to reduce the number of ports required to be open across a firewall. VxPBX uses a paradigm similar to that of a telephone switchboard in which calls placed to a switchboard are redirected to a known extension. In the PBX exchange, client connections sent to the exchange's port are redirected to an extension associated with the CommandCentral Service Management Server. A graphical user interface that displays reports and other information for users of CommandCentral Service through a standard Web browser. The Console provides a central point to manage cost analysis and chargeback for services, managing workflow, displaying and managing reports, and other tasks. A database, residing on the Server, that gathers data related to performance and monitoring, reports, alarms, service requests, and the SAN Access Layer (SAL). A Sybase ASA (Adaptive Server Anywhere) database management system, the Server database is installed silently when you install CommandCentral Service.

CommandCentral Console

CommandCentral Database

1098

Symantec OpsCenter Glossary

CommandCentral Service

A product offering that tracks IT effectiveness by providing complete business-level reporting of resource utilization, costs, and service level delivery. CommandCentral Service also helps enable business customers ensure that their application performance and availability requirements are met at the lowest cost. The licensed version of OpsCenter is called Symantec OpsCenter Analytics. Symantec OpsCenter Analytics lets you do advanced business-level reporting. The part of CommandCentral Service that collects information from discoverable applications residing on remote host systems, such as Veritas NetBackup, Veritas Backup Exec, and EMC Legato Networker. CommandCentral Service formats the information collected from these applications and displays it through the CommandCentral Console. The portion of the CommandCentral Service product offering that resides on the primary host. A Flash-based application in which an administrator creates, modifies, and manages access to the object views that users see in the CommandCentral Console. (An earlier, Java-based version of this application was known as the Administrator Console in earlier releases of CommandCentral Service.) See also object view. Symantec OpsCenter views are logical groups of IT assets (hosts or file systems) organized in a hierarchical manner. You can create views in Java View Builder and make them available in the Symantec OpsCenter console. The following view details appear in the Symantec OpsCenter console.

Symantec OpsCenter Analytics CommandCentral Service Agent

CommandCentral Service Management Server CommandCentral Service View Builder

Views

Index

A
about Symantec OpsCenter 23 about Symantec OpsCenter Analytics 25 access OpsCenter console 53 ActiveX 51 add master server 346, 351, 355 NetBackup 7.0 master server 347 add email recipient options 299 add email recipient options 299 Add Master Server options 351 add SNMP trap recipient options 301 add SNMP trap recipient options 301 adding existing user 293 new user 293 adding users 286 Agent overview 46 agent delete 325 modify 325 Agent options 322 agent.conf file 49 alert policies alert conditions 490 Open Storage alert condition 595 alerts filtering by type 466 responding to 467 application logs 259 archive data 363

breakup jobs 338, 340 viewing 339 Breakup Jobs option 334 business planning 28

C
capacity license 586 Change Job Priority dialog box options 418 Change Job Priority dialog box options 418 changeDbPassword 1036 changeVxATProperties 1038 changing AT parameters 235 chargeback cost variables 307308 formulae 310 modeling 310 cluster 193, 208 installing OpsCenter server UNIX 213 Windows 200, 204 limitations UNIX 209 Windows 197 OpsCenter server Windows 196 preinstallation checklist 211 all VCS cluster configurations 211 VxVM 212 prerequisites UNIX 209 Windows 197 supported OS 193 supported solutions 193 uninstalling OpsCenter server UNIX 218 Windows 207 color use in OpsCenter 82 compliance reporting 27

B
backing up OpsCenter database 242 Backup Exec 358 bookmarks using with OpsCenter 90

1100

Index

configure session timeout interval 68 configure SMTP 275 configure ThreatCon feature 276 configurePorts 1039 configuring Enterprise Vault data collector 373 connected master server state 345 Content pane enlarging 82 Summary and Hierarchical views 80 control OpsCenter logging on UNIX 259 on Windows 258 controlling OpsCenter services and processes 227 copy user profile options 282 copy user profile options 282 copying user profile 281 correlation reports 635 cost formulae 309 cost estimation 310 options 311 cost estimation options 311 cost variable options 305 cost variable options 305 costs variables 307 Create Agent options 324 create alert policy 499 Create Time Schedule options 684 creating cost formulae 309 cost variables 307 custom report 644 custom reports 654 custom SQL query 666 email recipients 299 SNMP trap recipients 300 views 388 currency settings options 304 currency settings options 304 Custom Report Wizard columns parameters populating table columns 660

Custom Report Wizard (continued) data parameters 657 filter parameters selecting 656 using 656 filtering parameters 661 time frame parameters 654 custom reports 630, 654 data 657 table columns 660 time frame 654 custom SQL query 631 customizing alert settings 624

D
data in graphical reports 635 parameters 657 data collection 349 data collection status 338, 341 view 342 Data Collection view 332 Data Collector configuring 326, 330 deleting 329 data collector Backup Exec 358 Data Collector configuration 329 Data Collector status viewing 325 Data Collector Wizard 327 data purge configure 274 database see (OpsCenter database) 230 dbbackup 1040 dbdefrag 1041 deduplication 359 defining cost formulae 309 cost variables 307 delete master server 357 Deleting user group 296 deleting alert recipients 302 cost formulae 310

Index

1101

deleting (continued) views 390 deleting user 293 dependency of OpsCenter services 229 deployment analysis 573 deployment mode multi domain 368 single domain 368 standalone mode 368 disable security warnings on Mozilla 54 documentation for Sybase 230 HTTP and HTTPS ports 252 NBSL 108 NetBackup 51 SymcOpsCenterWebServer 95 VxUL 95

F
file formats 639 filtering parameters 661 firewall considerations 247 firewalls Symantec Private Branch Exchange 44 floating-point math and OpsCenter 188 forecast reports 635

G
getting started with typical OpsCenter tasks 88 Guided Recovery 560 Destination host and login screen 566 Job Details screen 569 metadata 561, 570 Performing a cloning operation 563 Post-clone operations 569 Pre-clone check screen 568 Pre-operation checks 562 Select Control File Backup screen 565 Select Destination Parameters screen 567 Select Master Server dialog 564 Select Source Database 565 Selection summary screen 568 Troubleshooting 570

E
edit master server 356 Edit Agent options 324 edit currency list options 305 edit currency list options 305 Edit Time Schedule options 684 editing currency list 304 editing user profile 293 editing users 286 email options 298 report 641 email options 298 email recipients creating 299 EMC data collector 376 EMC Networker 376 Enterprise Vault 363 data types 363 versions supported 366 Enterprise Vault data collector 373 data collection checklist 374 deployment scenarios 366 exporting report 639

H
heap size adjusting 179 host alias adding 278 viewing 278

I
IBM Tivoli Storage Manager 375 icons for managed server status 82 install AT UNIX 210 Windows 199 clustering. See cluster OpsCenter DVD 100 install and upgrade checklist 123 install OpsCenter on UNIX 137 on Windows 131

1102

Index

Installing OpsCenter 130

J
JavaScript 51 Jobs List View options 410 Jobs List View options 410 jre (Java Run Time Environment) 94

L
license viewing 272 license keys 97 adding 273 deleting 273 viewing 273 license report issues 584, 593 licensed OpsCenter features 99 licenses adding 272 managing 272 licensing model 95 licensing page 592 log files on UNIX servers 263 on Windows servers 260 logging in to OpsCenter 64 out of OpsCenter 68

Microsoft SQL Server versions supported 366 modeling chargeback 310 modifying alert recipients 302 cost formulae 310 cost variables 308 report export location 282 views 389 Monitor views controlling scope 401 monitor views monitoring alerts 462 monitoring appliance hardware master server 474 media server 477 monitoring cloud 482 monitoring devices 451 monitoring hosts 458 monitoring jobs 410, 418 monitoring media 440 monitoring policies 430 monitoring services 428 Mozilla Firefox 53 MS SQL Server host 368 MS SQL Server JDBC driver 372 multi-domain deployment mode 370 My Dashboard options 671 My Dashboard tab 671 My Reports tab 668

M
Manage Folders options 673 Manage views controlling scope 486 manage alert policies 488 manage devices 515 manage storage 509 managed master server considerations 106 managed server icons 82 Management Information Base (MIB) 607 managing folders 673 master server 349 add 346 details 341 master server states 345 Microsoft Internet Explorer 53

N
nbfindfile command 1042 nbproxy process 229 NetBackup 7.0 master server add 347 NetBackup Data Collection concept 332 NetBackup data collection adding a master server 346 deleting a master server 357 editing a master server 356 enabling or disabling data collection 357 managed master server versions 340 supported data types and collection status 343 NetBackup options 330 NetBackup PureDisk data collector configuring 361

Index

1103

NetBackup Service Layer (NBSL) 108, 253, 332 Network Address Translation (NAT) network considerations 107 not connected master server state 345 numeric data viewing 635

O
object merger options 280 object type add 284 add attribute 285 delete 284 delete attribute 285 modify 285 options 283 object type options 283 object types 283 objects (hosts) merging 279 operational restore backup timelines 544 browse a client 539 browse files and directories 550 restore cart 551 simple or advanced search 540 opsadmin 1046 OpsCenter adjusting heap size 179 Sybase cache size 184 and floating-point math 188 color use 82 database 109 installing UNIX 137 Windows 131 sanity check after installing 170 sizing 108 status bar 82 store database and logs on separate disk 235 Sybase database used 95 tasks performed on startup 171 uninstalling UNIX 191 Windows 190

OpsCenter 7.5 new features 29 OpsCenter alerts about alert policies 487 alert conditions 490 creating alert policy 490 managing alert policy 508 understanding alert counts 507 OpsCenter architecture database 45 Server and Authentication Service 46 OpsCenter back up and restore procedures 241 OpsCenter console alert summary pane 79 content pane 79 description 70 quick links 78 tabs and subtabs 72 ThreatCon pane 78 title bar 71 View pane 73 OpsCenter context-sensitive help locating 50 OpsCenter database back up using backupDB script 241 backing up 242 restoring 244 OpsCenter database password file 244 OpsCenter database utilities change database administrator password 231 defragment OpsCenter databases 233 OpsCenter DVD layout 100 OpsCenter installation hardware requirements 108 install checklist 123 master server considerations 106 Operating System requirements 101 supported backup and archive products 104, 319 web browser considerations 51 OpsCenter post-installation starting to use OpsCenter 170 OpsCenter processes on UNIX 223 OpsCenter reports 627 OpsCenter Server 43 Authentication Service 46 OpsCenter server scripts on Windows and UNIX 225

1104

Index

OpsCenter services on Microsoft Windows 222 OpsCenter start-up tasks 171 OpsCenter system requirements see OpsCenter 108 OpsCenter upgrade procedures 158 OpsCenter user profiles 243 OpsCenter View Builder 50 OpsCenter views managing 387 overview 379, 381 opsCenterAgentSupport 1048 opsCenterSupport 1049 originator ID 257 OS considerations 103

P
parameters Custom Report Wizard 654 partially connected master server state 345 password changing 272 PBX 44 PDOS 359 performance tuning 171 pie chart reports 635 policy filtering by type 435 port numbers backup and archive products 250 HTTP 251 HTTPS 251 key OpsCenter components 247 ports Symantec Private Branch Exchange 44 product ID 257 PureDisk reports table columns 660

report export 283 report export location options 283 report export location options 283 report formats 635 report schedules 678 report template descriptions 686 report templates 629 reports conditions 661 custom creating 654 formats 635 graphical formats 635 numeric data 635 notification condition parameters 661 Scheduled Jobs 755 ToolTips in 635 reports custom filtering parameters 661 restore cart about 551 using 552 restoring OpsCenter 244 runstoredquery 1051

S
saving report 638 Scheduled Jobs reports 755 All Jobs report 766 scheduled jobs reports Job Count Details-Scheduled Vs Actual report 762 Job Count Within Backup Window report 760 Job Count-Scheduled Vs Actual report 756 schedules 675 Schedules options 677 scripts runstoredquery 1051 search files using OpsCenter 531 server.conf file 187 services controlling 430

Q
quick links minimizing 79 quick start for OpsCenter tasks 88

R
ranking reports 635 refresh OpsCenter console 73

Index

1105

services (continued) filtering by type 429 setting default currency 303 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) 606 configuring community name 622 configuring SNMP version 623 SNMP traps 607 supported SNMP versions 607 Single Instance Storage SIS 359 single-domain deployment mode 369 SIS single instance storage 660 SLP reports about 943 SLP Backlog report 950 SLP Status by Client report 956 SLP Status by Destinations report 969 SLP Status by Image report 961 SLP Status by SLP report 951 SLP Status report 945 SLp reports SLP Status by Image Copy report 966 SMTP server options 276 options 276 SNMP port 253 SNMP trap recipient options 298 SNMP trap recipient options 298 SNMP trap recipients creating 300 software components used by OpsCenter 94 standalone deployment mode 370 standard reports descriptions 833 start-up tasks OpsCenter server 171 startagent 1052 startdb 1053 startgui 1054 starting runstoredquery 1051 startserver 1055 status icons 82 stopagent 1056 stopdb 1057 stopgui 1058 stopserver 1059

supported backup and archive products 319 supported backup products 28 supported platforms 101 supported upgrade paths 110 Sybase cache size adjusting 184 Symantec Java Web Server (SymcOpsCenterWebServer) 95 Symantec OpsCenter Analytics and Symantec OpsCenter 95 Symantec OpsCenter Analytics XML DTD 1068 DTD elements 1069 Symantec OpsCenter AnalyticsXML example files 1073 Symantec Private Branch Exchange 44 port number configuration 94 Symantec Private Branch Exchange (PBX) 94 Symantec Product Authentication Service installing UNIX 210 overview 46 shared component 94 Windows installing 199

T
tables in OpsCenter applying filters 87 creating custom filters 87 customizing 84 selecting rows 86 using filters 87 viewing hidden columns 84 viewing multiple pages 86 tape library modifying 280 ThreatCon options 277 ThreatCon options 277 thresholds report 661 time frames parameters 654 time schedule 684 tool tips 82 ToolTips 635 trending reports format 635

1106

Index

troubleshooting accessing OpsCenter 58 OpsCenter console logon issues 65 OpsCenter server issues 69 support script in OpsCenter 254 TSM data collector 375 tuning OpsCenter for performance 171

U
unified logging (VxUL) 257 uninstalling OpsCenter UNIX 191 OpsCenter on Windows 190 UNIX installing OpsCenter 137 upgrading OpsCenter 7.0.x or 7.1.x to OpsCenter 7.5 166 upgrading OpsCenter 7.0.x or 7.1.x to OpsCenter 7.5 UNIX 166 Windows 159 user creating multi-domain deployment mode 370 single-domain deployment mode 369 standalone deployment mode 370 user access rights 287 user groups creating 296 options 295 user groups options 295 user preferences options 268 user preferences options 268 user profiles viewing 292

Veritas Unified Logging (VxUL) (continued) originator IDs used by OpsCenter 257 view accessing 385 level 386 view OpsCenter alerts using HP OV NNM 626 using HP OV NNM 7.50/7.51 on Windows 626 using SCOM 2007 626 View pane making selections 75 using 73 viewing email recipients 297 viewing alerts using List View 463 using Summary View 469 views view type 383 Views options 381 visual keys in the OpsCenter console 82

W
web browser book marks 90 pop-up blockers 51 support 53 UTF-8 51 Windows installing OpsCenter 131 uninstalling OpsCenter 190 upgrading OpsCenter 7.0.x or 7.1.x to OpsCenter 7.5 159 wizards Custom Report Wizard 654

V
Veritas Cluster Server (VCS) for UNIX/Linux preinstallation checklist 211 Veritas NetBackup PureDisk PDOS 359 Veritas Unified Logging (VxUL) 95 log files 257

X
XML DTD 1068 examples for importing 1073 importing 1068